Inbox News: May 2025 - Issue 642

 

Week Five May 2025 - Week One June 2025 (May 26 - June 1): Issue 643

VW State Classic 2025 - NSW High School State Titles: Results

Surfing NSW is currently running the 2025 Volkswagen State Classic, a historic event combining five NSW State Titles: Juniors, Masters Shortboard, Longboard, SUP and High School, under one banner for the very first time.

Being held from May 27 to June 1 in Coffs Harbour, the six-day event features more than 700 of the state’s top surfers, aged 10 to 80+, competing across three breaks on the Coffs Coast. This all-ages, inclusive surfing celebration is bringing the community together for a week of competition, connection and experiences that reach far beyond the water.

The results of the NSW High School State Titles, held Wednesday May 28, are already in and record Narrabeen Sports High School had two teams taking part, both of which won a place in the finals, with their junior team winning first place, while St. Augustine's secured the silver in the Seniors Division - congratulations to all who had a go - and especially to the St Augustine's and Narrabeen crews who did so well in their heats and across the competition.

The news service sent through a request for some 'medal pics' late Saturday (May 31) and the great team at Surfing NSW (thanks Zoe!), and your peers, sent back those that run below - we'll run a full 'wrap' next Sunday, including action pics. In the meantime, some results:

Senior Boys- High School (16 teams overall)

  1. Illawarra Sports High - Ethan Rule  and Taj Air
  2. St Augustines College Sydney - Aussie Kelaher and Ben Zanatta
  3. St Francis Xavier's College - Jye Kelly and Felix Byrnes
  4. Narrabeen Sports High School - Louie Ewing and Rene Galloway

Senior Girls- High School

  1. Illawarra Sports High
  2. Cronulla High
  3. Byron Bay High School
  4. McAuley Catholic College

Junior Boys- High School

  1. Narrabeen Sports High School - Jaggar Phillips and  Eli Clarke
  2. Illawarra Sports High - Cruz Air and Ashton Mekisic
  3. Lindisfarne Anglican Grammar School (2)- Jay Whitfield and  Charlie Cairncross
  4. Lindisfarne Anglican Grammar School (1) - Hunter Sutcliffe and Marvin Freeman

Junior Girls- High School

  1. Illawarra Sports High
  2. St Peters Anglican College (1)
  3. St Peters Anglican College (2)
  4. McAuley Catholic College (1)

 

Empowering voices: youth have their say

By YAG (Youth Advisory Group) writer Isabel Schilling

Wednesday, 28 May 2025

Have Your Say Day, the Beaches’ youth voice forum, is back for it’s fourth year. 

This year’s successful forum, held at Northern Beaches Secondary College Freshwater Senior Campus, provided a platform for young people to share their voice on important matters impacting them to a packed, enthusiastic crowd. 

This year’s forum leaders had the opportunity to present to the key decision makers from local, state and federal government. 

With support from Northern Beaches Council and their Youth Advisory Group (YAG), the event sees young leaders from ten local high schools collaborate and network to voice the concerns raised by 2,120 local young people in the Have Your Say Day survey. 

Here are some of the issues that were discussed at Have Your Say Day: 

Social media:

Students explored the impact of harmful online content shaping young people’s identity and emotional regulation.  

They discussed the importance young people place on their phone and social media usage. Highlighted was the idea that online content is not just seen but learned, making it a public health concern. 

They called for community actions including limiting phone use, promoting outdoor activities and empowering schools to continue to educate students on the risks related to phone use, social media and accessing online content. 

Teacher inconsistencies:

177 surveyed participants named education as their top concern. Student speakers addressed the impact of teacher inconsistencies on students' engagement and success. They highlighted a lack of consistency with regular substitute and casual teachers. 

Students called for both immediate and long-term solutions such as third learning spaces and quiet study zones.

Their calls for action also focused on systematic reform of the education system including increased pay for teachers to make it more attractive and extra permanent teaching staff. 

Discrimination: 

Speakers addressed casual discrimination, focusing on racism and homophobia, and its impact on youth mental health, academic performance and inclusion. 

They shared how harmful jokes, bullying and a culture of silence can perpetuate stigma. Students highlighted the risk of this becoming normalised if inadequately addressed, particularly in schools and sports settings. 

They proposed emotionally engaging workshops to educate and dismantle harmful attitudes to normalise queer identity, build empathy and foster inclusion to change mindsets. They noted that ‘little by little, a little becomes a lot’. 

Other issues:

Other issues presented during the forum and discussed during the Q&A session that followed included environmental anxiety, destigmatising mental health, public transport concerns, the overuse of technology and economic pressures faced by young people.

Students called for practical action, community support and real youth involvement in decision making. Their message was clear: listen to us, involve us, and work with us to create meaningful, lasting change.

The results of the Have Your Say Day survey and full transcripts of speeches will be collated into a report, made publicly available on Council's website in July 2025.

Follow @keepalookoutfor on Instagram and Facebook for events, programs, and opportunities for young people on the Beaches. 

Fishing on Commuter Wharf: Church Point

Broken Bay Water Police are asking for your assistance. 

Police are responding to an increasing number of incidents in relation to youths Fishing against Local Government signage on the Church Point Commuter Wharf. 


It’s fabulous to see young people out enjoying our waterways but unfortunately we have had issues with youths 
  • - walking over vessels,
  • - obstructing boats coming into the wharf, 
  • - hooks and lines left on vessels and wharfs, 
  • - fish bait and guts left behind.
Frustrations are escalating with several members of the community accidently breaking / snapping fishing rods trying to get on and off their boats.  

Over the weekend over 30 youths have been spoken to on the wharf aged between 12 and 14. 

Police ask that locals respect each other and abide by wharf signage before fishing.

Sunday May 25 2025

Inaugural NSW School Sport Games 

Some of the state’s best up-and-coming sports stars will be on display when the biggest schools’ multisport event ever hosted in NSW comes to Blacktown from the 2 to 6 June.

The inaugural NSW School Sport Games will see more than 2,000 athletes from 15 NSW Sports Associations compete across the week in Aussie rules, bowls, football, gymnastics, rugby league, rugby7s, softball, ten pin bowling and touch football.

Twelve state champions will be named, as the cream of NSW primary and secondary public school talent will be represented alongside combined teams from NSW Catholic and Independent Schools.

Athletes from the state’s rural, regional and remote areas will converge on Blacktown to join their metropolitan counterparts in competition.

The Games will also include the inaugural Ten Pin Bowling State Championship for students with a disability.

“Physical activity plays a vital role in wellbeing and the NSW School Sport Games provide a fantastic platform to bring together athletes from across the state for a celebration of school sport,” said Darren Lang, Sport Strategy and Planning Coordinator for the School Sport Unit.

“NSW public schools have had a long history of developing athletes for state, national and international competitions and these Games will showcase that talent in a carnival-style atmosphere.

“And with professional sporting teams in the NRL, AFL, A-League and cricket all based in the region, we knew there’d be no better host than Western Sydney with fantastic venues such as the Blacktown International Sports Park.”

Six Australian Olympians will attend the event: Aidan Roach (water polo), Alexandra Croak (gymnastics), Noah Havard (canoe sprint), Ellen Roberts (softball), Nick Timmings (skeleton) and Emma Tonegato (rugby 7s), engaging with students as part of the Olympics Unleashed program.

The event is expected to provide a $4 million boost to the local economy.

Competing Associations at the School Sport Games. 

Sydney West; Sydney North; Sydney South West; Sydney East; Riverina; Western;  North West; North Coast; Hunter; South Coast; Barrier; West Darling; MacKillop (Catholic Schools NSW); Polding (Catholic Schools NSW); NSW Combined Independent Schools. 

Schedule of Championships 

Primary Girls’ Australian Football: Monday 2 – Tuesday 3 June 

Primary Boys’ Australian Football: Wednesday 4 – Friday 6 June 

Secondary Bowls: Tuesday 3 – Thursday 5 June 

Secondary Boys’ Football: Monday 2 – Wednesday 4 June 

Secondary Girls’ Football: Wednesday 4 – Friday 6 June 

Secondary Gymnastics: Monday 2 – Wednesday 4 June 

Primary 11 Yrs Rugby League: Monday 2 – Wednesday 4 June 

Primary Girls’ Rugby 7s: Thursday 5 – Friday 6 June 

Primary Girls Softball: Monday 2 – Thursday 5 June 

Inclusive Sport Ten Pin Bowling: Tuesday 3 – Wednesday 4 June 

Secondary Girls’ Touch Football:  Monday 2 – Wednesday 4 June

Secondary Boys’ Touch Football: Wednesday 4 – Friday 6 June 

 

2025 Environment Art & Design Prize Finalists announced

Friday May 30 2025

Council is delighted to announce the finalists for the 2025 Environment Art & Design Prize. 

Finalists include a range of early career and established artists and designers, who together will create 3 contemporary exhibitions exploring critical environmental issues.

Mayor Sue Heins said the range of entries were broad and thought-provoking.

“We were thrilled to receive almost 700 entries this year and 191 of the best works of art and design have been selected as finalists for the exhibition opening on 1 August 2025. 

“This year’s Environmental Art & Design Prize attracted entries from across the nation, many sharing a common theme of how the issues of climate change and sustainability affect local communities across the globe,” Mayor Heins said.

You can view the finalists’ works at Manly Art Gallery and Museum, Curl Curl Creative Space and Mona Vale Creative Space Gallery from 1 August to 14 September.

“Don’t forget to vote for your favourite entry through the People’s Choice Award, which is open till 10 September, with the winner announced on 12 September,” added Mayor Heins.

This Year’s prize money, is an impressive $20,000 for each of the Art and Design categories, making the design category one of Australia’s richest design awards. The Young Artists and Designers winners will receive a total of $3,000, and the three People’s Choice winners will receive $1,000 per venue.

Young 7-12 years

  • Camilo Budet Trescott, Ancestral Sunrise 
  • Audrey Chen, Shy Forest 
  • Beatrix Dennison, I Love North Head
  • Constance Fan, Golden Treasure
  • Abbey Fu, The Stranded Penguin
  • Iris Ha, The Ocean's Secret Message
  • Zoe Jiang, Witch House
  • Yichen (Jasmine) Jiang, Imagination
  • Alice Juwono, The Green Fennec Fox in Bushland
  • Phoenix Libotte, Broken Seasons
  • Saffron Libotte, Turtle Island
  • Felicia Lin-Xie, Living Fossil - Bulloak Jewel Butterfly
  • Anahid Mezoghlian, The Busy Penguin
  • Louie (Lucinda) Ornelas, Squawks the Grubinator
  • Sophie Poulier, Frogzilla
  • Sophie Poulier, Captain Cassowary
  • Vivian Qin, Don't Cut Our Home
  • Theodore Saldan, The Ugly Face of Pollution
  • Lia Shachar, Fruit Break
  • Ellory Tan, Beneath and Beyond the Circle of Life
  • Aria Tan, A Cute Seahorse
  • Eva Wheeler, The Worker Bee
  • Màira Widholzer with Florence, Rachel, Aarna, Ava and Clara, The Sisters Tree
  • Evangeline Wrightson, Great Barrier Grief
  • Felix Xu, Log-head Shark
  • Angie Xu, Nature's Room
  • Brandon Xu, Hell in Paradise
  • Blair Xu, Guardians of the Ocean
  • Emmie Yao, The Final 50
  • Kloe Zhou, Reality Check

Young 13-18 years

  • Luca Bianchinotti, My Perfect Summer 
  • Jennifer Charlton, 2050
  • Ivy Chen, Filet-O-Fish
  • Claire Childs, Once Loved
  • Arabella Czerwenka, Coral Seascape
  • Banjo Evans, Discarded World, Fading Creatures 01
  • Oscar Gilliland, Long Reef Headland in Clay
  • Miley Hiraizumi, Ocean of Digestion 
  • Madeline Hollier, The Emu
  • Laura Hou, Australia's Sounds
  • Isla Jessup, Ingalalla 
  • Sierra Knights, Tide Riders
  • Abigail Lee, The Tree and Waratah 
  • Suzie Leys, Mandy's Gourmet Delicacies
  • Ching Ka Janelle Lin, The Last Branch
  • Zoe Maryska, River Songs of Life
  • Chelsea Moss, Ignorant Bliss
  • Meera Nirmalendran, Nature's Bounty
  • Serena Plane, The Places We Have Been
  • Clare Powell, Irrawong
  • Willamina Powell, Natural Renaissance
  • Claire Power, Beneath Our Actions
  • Angie Procter, Seahorse  
  • Emma Sproule, Slipping Glimpse
  • Yudie Sun, Mother Nature's Wrath
  • Ali Talebian, The Price of Thirst
  • Eden Xu, Numbat

Art

  • Luke Abdallah & Izumi Nago, Rhythm in Nature (Bilpin)
  • Gus Armstrong & Peter Swain, Creek Dreaming W/Peter Swain
  • Tara Axford, Held in Balance
  • Rina Bernabei, Groundings
  • Camille Blyth, The Secret Keepers
  • Lisa Cahill, Effervesce
  • Gordon R Carmichael, Anthroposcream
  • The Arthitects – Gary Carsley & Renjie Teoh, Wambuul (Proclamation Park Bathurst) 
  • Caroline Christie-Coxon, The Unburdening
  • Jan Cleveringa, What Rubbish
  • Sadhbha Cockburn, Earth Bound
  • Samuel Condon, Six Days in Dordogne 
  • Penny Coss, Cross Currents 2024
  • Danielle Creenaune, Resounding Vale
  • Laura Curcio, Best Before
  • Julia Davis, In Relation: To the Heart
  • Chris De Rosa, Bloom/Doom
  • Tamara Dean, Blowin’ in the Wind
  • Shoufay Derz, The Maws - Emptiness (Part 3)
  • Joel Dickens, Rhizome
  • Susie Dureau, Powerful Owl
  • Helen Earl, Landscape Embodied
  • Julie Edgar, Veiled
  • Matt Elliott & David Collins, Changing of Tides (Crosslands Exchange)
  • Claire Ellis, Hot Air
  • Bernadette Facer, Low Water
  • Dongwang Fan, Nine Gum Trees 
  • Nic Fern, Frayed Ideals
  • Louise Fowler-Smith, Extinction Solastalgia
  • Guy Fredericks, Lasso 1 & 2
  • Kath Fries, Beguiling (Lean on Me)
  • Phillip George, Swimming to Hades 
  • Maddison Gibbs Wing, Kin
  • Allan Giddy, Abandoned Home
  • Genevieve Ginty, The Future
  • Marisabel Gonzalez, Field Notes from the Body of the Earth 2
  • Maharlina Gorospe-Lockie, Discomfort Food: Sinangag (Garlic Fried Rice)
  • Petra Gotthardt, Agony & Apathy
  • Tim Gregory, Farmland Landscape C.1990/2025
  • Chris Hagen, Apistolaries (Exchange)
  • Lee Harrop, Foundation Stone
  • Dan Hewitt, Queensie from Dad's Place
  • Mahala Hill, Apocalypse Unfolding VII
  • Rachel Honnery, Green Between the Trees
  • Linda Hume, Kate's Garden
  • Jude Hungerford, Arbores Vitae
  • Jude Hungerford, Burn 2
  • Les Irwig, Ocypode Art
  • Derek Jungarrayi Thompson, Maku (Witchetty Grub) Derek’s Story
  • Lea Kannar-Lichtenberger, Footprint Convergence - Penguin Highway
  • Freddy Ken, Kulata Tjuta - Kungkarangkalpa Freddy's Story
  • Bella La Spina, Margin
  • James Lai, Paddocks and Vineyards
  • Birte Larsen, End Grain
  • Ryan Andrew Lee, Anthropocentrism
  • Pamela Leung, Yuenyeung 43
  • Chrystie Longworth, Jetsam Sentinels
  • Daniel Lopez Lomeli, Kodama Variation #3
  • Orlando Luminere, Brooklyn #0088
  • Amelia Lynch, Flora Strata
  • Rachel Mackay, Crabs Nipping at My Flesh Beneath the Surface
  • Kathy Mackey, Coastal Drawings (Inverted) 
  • Negin Maddock, Standing Still
  • David Manley, Post-Traumatic Urbanist #14
  • Donna Marcus, End of Empire
  • Katherine Marmaras, Waste Not, Want Not (Memories)
  • Sally Mayman, Liminal Zone, Wontanella
  • Georgia McFarland, Poolside #63 (Suburban Dreams)
  • Catherine McGuiness & Diane Pirotta, My Parents Always Called Me A Possum
  • Milan Milojevic, The Great White Hunter After a Hard Day's Work 1
  • Luanne Mitchelmore, Honouring Soil
  • Jodie Munday, Gunlindulin - Eel Wiradjuri
  • Kendal Murray, Keen Eyed Applied, Hillside Confide
  • Ainslie Murray, Not A Problem
  • Phillip Muzzall, And If It All Falls Apart, What Then?
  • Anne Nginyangnka Thompson, Strong Family Connection
  • Julie Nicholson, Water Forms
  • Lucy O'Doherty, Car in Blue Storm 
  • Julie Paterson, The Menindee Memorial Loop
  • Meagan Pelham, Bird Land Washy Whale Party
  • Lori Pensini, Empty
  • Emma Pinsent, Return to Form
  • Julien Playoust, Standing by the Gate Set, Old Stringy Bark & Gravel Pit Near the Woolshed
  • Shirley Ploog, Salt Lake Wanderings
  • Anthony Polkinghorne, Katabasis
  • Kim Power, Dyad
  • Sandra Pumani, Maku Tjukurpa
  • Simon Reece, Resting Sponge
  • Margaret Richards, Tjukula Tjuta
  • Adam Sébire, Anthroposcene XII: Iceberg Care
  • Douglas Schofield, Suburban Tree Tensions
  • Gary Shinfield, Remnants
  • Patrick Shirvington, Observation of Beauty
  • Kris Smith, Tree Litmus
  • Emma Sutherland, Totems
  • Jane Theau & Ramji Ambrosiussen, Saint Bob and the Swifts
  • Carlene Thompson, Tjulpu Kulunypa - Baby Birds
  • Thomas Thorby-Lister, Can't See the Forest for the Fields
  • Angela Tiatia, Render
  • Shonah Trescott, Red Gold 
  • Jennifer Turpin, CR.E
  • Gabriela Villalba, Queenscliff
  • Hilary Warren, Banksia Cones
  • Ben Waters, A Patchwork of Sunlight
  • Rachael Wellisch, Recuperated Material Monuments #23
  • Cat Wilson, Just Hanging
  • Jason Wing, Save Our Souls
  • Mei Zhao, Garden C

Design

  • Craig Ashton, Connections
  • Jane Bamford, Ceramic Little Penguin Nesting Module 
  • Luke Batten, Dyad lamp
  • Julian Clarkson, Bedridden
  • Kate Dorrough, River Costume
  • Caren Elliss, Grandiflora Chandelier
  • Björn Eriksson, Co-Habitat Coat: Fashion for Nonhuman Kinship
  • Diego Faivre, Altare di Casa made in 3669 minutes
  • Chloe Ferres, All That Remains (Burial Quilt) 
  • Maddison Gibbs Wing, Fallen Kin
  • Georgia Graham, Like a Virgin
  • Anne Greenway, SEGway
  • Shawnna Hodgson, Waves
  • Locki Humphrey, Vault Stool
  • Trent Jansen & Tanya Singer, Manta Pilti | Dry Sand Low Chair
  • Marlo Lyda, Turning (Camphor) - Bed & Lamp
  • Joanne Odisho, Pathways
  • Joanne Odisho, Lume
  • Susie Roberts, Star
  • Lucile Sciallano, Loose Threads 
  • Christine Simpson, Hooked
  • Jasmine Stein, Phyla
  • Ben Styles & Jordan Goren, Caustara
  • Lilli Taranto, Transparent Paths: Reframing waste as a precious resource.
  • Emma Varga, Hug Me
  • Xinze Yu, Emberbloom

Opportunities:

Surfrider Foundation: June 2025 Events

Check out our Epic line-up of events this month ! 🌊🤙
Join the wave of changemakers protecting our beautiful blue backyard !
🌊This Sun 1 June - Adopt a Beach Community Clean ups
Venue: 9 x northern beach locations.
Time: 3 - 4pm
*Note* the new event time during winter months (June, July, Aug) 
Check out our Impact to-date and beach location details: https://www.surfrider.org.au/impact/adoptabeach/


🌊Thu 5 June - A Brew for the Blue 
Venue: Bonsai Bar ( below 4 Pines Brewery Manly)
Time: 5 - 7pm 
A collaboration with SIMS (Sydney Institute of Marine Science)
A Celebration for World Ocean Day, Science, Underwater photography competition.
Surfrider will join a panel of SIMS scientists to chat about Sydney’s ocean conservation programs.
Tix $10 includes a cold brew on arrival. Event details and Book tickets here



🌊Sun 22 June - Surfrider 3rd Annual Surf swap & Repair Market
Venue: Surfrider Gardens, 50 Oceans St, Narrabeen
Time: 11 - 3pm 
Ride the Use Wave - Sell, Swap, Repair or repurpose your preloved Surf gear.
Meet shapers and makers of sustainable surfboards, local innovators of upcycling waste into surf accessories
Upcycle your ‘end of life’ wetsuit with Ripcurl, attend minor board repair workshops
Chill to smooth beats in the winter sun and enjoy killer coffee from the local cafes
This event is held with the support of the Northern Beaches Council.
Free to attend and a waste free event!
Event Registration here - Day traders and Stallholders

Kay Cottee Women's Development Regatta

Sunday 29th June 2025 | RPAYC

Get ready for a day of fun, learning, and friendly competition on the water! The Kay Cottee Women’s Development Regatta is all about building confidence, developing sailing skills, and giving recent Sailing Academy graduates a chance to experience the excitement of racing in a supportive and welcoming environment.

Whether you’ve just completed a learn to sail course at RPAYC or a similar program at another club, this is your chance to take the next step in your sailing journey – no pressure, just good company, great vibes, and time on the water!

Who Can Join?
You’re eligible if you have recently completed a Learn to Sail course (at RPAYC or another club) and are keen to try out racing in a fun, relaxed regatta format.

Event Schedule – Sunday 29 June 2025
Morning Training Session
⏰ 8:30am – 11:00am
Kick off the day with on-water coaching designed to boost your skills and build racing confidence. Our experienced instructors will guide you through boat handling, starting techniques, and race strategy.

Lunch Break – Clubhouse Social
🍽️ 11:30am – 12:30pm
Enjoy a relaxed lunch in the clubhouse with fellow sailors, swap stories, and fuel up for the afternoon.

Afternoon Racing Session
🚩 First Warning Signal: 1:00pm
⚓ Up to 4 short-format races
🏁 No races will be started after 3:30pm
The regatta will follow a Windward/Leeward course, keeping things simple and fun as you put your new skills into practice.

Presentation & Wrap-Up
🏆 Celebrate the day’s efforts with a casual awards presentation and cheer on your fellow sailors!

Entries Are Now Open!
Spots are limited – don’t miss your chance to be part of this empowering day on the water. We can’t wait to see you on the start line!

Click HERE to register your name - Registration for this event closes at Monday 23 Jun 2025

Entry Fee:
  • $100 for RPAYC members per person
  • $125 for non-members per person
The Entry Fee Includes:
  • Comprehensive Training Session: Shore-based and on-water coaching to prepare you for the regatta.
  • Racing on our Fleet of Elliott 7 Inshore Keelboats: You’ll sail with a skilled Mentor Skipper, gaining hands-on experience.
  • Some Fantastic Prizes: Because every sailor deserves to be rewarded for their hard work and spirit!
  • An Amazing Day on the Water: With a fun, supportive atmosphere to help you grow your sailing skills while making lasting memories.
Event Overview:
This exciting event is specifically designed to promote and develop women’s sailing, creating an opportunity for emerging sailors to build confidence, refine skills, and transition into the world of racing. Whether you’re a recent graduate of our Sailing Academy or have participated in similar programs at other clubs, this regatta is the perfect chance to test your abilities in a friendly and supportive environment.

How It Works:
This regatta focuses on creating an inclusive atmosphere where women sailors can experience racing in a safe and encouraging space. Female crews will be formed from individual applications, with each crew paired with a Sailing Academy-appointed skipper/instructor. This ensures that you have expert guidance throughout the event. Each crew will have a maximum of 5 members, and the goal is to encourage learning, teamwork, and fun!

In this format, helm swapping is encouraged, allowing everyone to take turns as helmsperson throughout the day. This gives each participant a chance to grow their skill set, whether you’re new to helming or experienced and looking to refine your technique.

The Day of the Event:
Morning Training Session (8:30 AM – 11:00 AM):
The day will kick off with a comprehensive training session, covering both shore-based and on-water components. You’ll practice essential skills like boat handling, crew coordination, and communication. We’ll also hold a race briefing to go over key race rules, strategies, and the conduct of sailing races – all designed to increase your knowledge and boost your confidence when you’re out there on the race course.

Racing Session (1:00 PM – 3:30 PM):
The afternoon is all about putting your new skills into action! Crews will compete in up to four fun-filled races on a Windward/Leeward course, designed to be accessible for all levels while still offering exciting racing. After each race, there will be time to debrief, make adjustments, and get ready for the next round.

You’ll be sailing on a fleet of Elliott 7 inshore keelboats, known for their stability and ease of handling, which means you can focus on developing your sailing skills without worrying about complicated boat handling. Each boat will be helmed by one of the crews, with guidance from the skilled Mentor Skipper who will be there to offer tips, advice, and support throughout the regatta.

Why You Should Join:
  • A Supportive Learning Environment: This event is specifically designed to help you transition into racing in a low-pressure, fun atmosphere. It’s about development, not just competition!
  • Skilled Mentorship: With an experienced instructor at the helm, you’ll have the chance to learn the ropes and refine your sailing technique.
  • Collaboration and Teamwork: The focus on working as a crew will help you hone essential skills like communication, coordination, and leadership.
  • Networking with Other Women Sailors: Connect with like-minded women who are passionate about sailing and eager to improve, share tips, and make lasting friendships on the water.
  • A Confidence Boost: Whether you’re aiming to compete in future races or just looking for more sailing experience, this regatta is a stepping stone to building your confidence and skills in a real-world racing environment.
What you’ll get out of it:
  • A deeper understanding of race tactics and sailing rules.
  • Hands-on practice with boat handling, racing strategy, and teamwork.
  • The chance to helm a keelboat and swap positions with your teammates.
  • Exposure to different sailing styles and techniques from others in the event.
  • An amazing time sailing, making new friends, and learning in a supportive, fun atmosphere
This is your chance to join a community of women sailors who are passionate about improving their skills and having a blast on the water. We can’t wait to see you there, ready to race, learn, and grow as part of this incredible sailing experience!

If you have any questions about the event, you can contact the Sailing Office via email, sailtraining@rpayc.com.au or (02) 9998 3700

The 2025 CWAS "David Malin Awards"

Entries close July 1 2025. For details on each category visit: https://www.cwas.org.au/astrofest/DMA/

There is a new International Section open to all astrophotographers - both Australian and overseas residents. 

The Competition Structure:
  • General Section (Open only to Australian residents):
  • Wide-Field
  • Deep Sky
  • Solar System
  • Theme - "People and Sky"
  • Junior Section (Australian residents aged 18 years or younger):
  • One Open Category (can be of any astronomical subject)
  • International Section (Open to all Australian and overseas resident astrophotographers)
  • Nightscapes
An additional prize, "The Photo Editor's Choice", will also be awarded. This will be judged by a major news organisation's photo editor or editors. Entry fees are $20 per entry and can be paid by the PayPal, Credit and debit cards.

Wide field winner in the 2018 CWAS David Malin Awards: Barrenjoey Milky Way Arch
Supplied: ©Tom Elliott/David Malin Awards

More places available in innovative jobs program for women

Applications are now open for the 2025 Future Women (FW) Jobs Academy – an innovative pre-employment initiative designed to help women overcome career challenges and connect them with employers.

The NSW Government invested $5.8 million as part of an election promise to support 1,000 women to be part of FW Jobs Academy.

The program is already showing results with nearly 75 per cent of the 2024 participants now actively looking for work or applying for further study, and 85 per cent reporting they now feel well-equipped to search for work.

Flexible, free and online, FW Jobs Academy is a year-long program that equips women with the skills, networks and confidence they need to re-enter the workforce following a career break. The program offers a curated mix of learning, mentoring and community to assist participants navigate evolving job search tools, employer expectations and workplace environments.

The NSW Government is focused on supporting women who face intersecting barriers to securing employment and career progression through FW Jobs Academy. This includes women from the following communities:

  • Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander women, who are prioritised and accepted on an ‘if not why not’ basis
  • women from culturally diverse backgrounds
  • women living with disability
  • women living in regional, rural or remote areas.

Jobs Academy is delivered by FW (formerly Future Women), an Australian-based organisation that was founded in NSW. FW’s programs help women succeed in finding work, building their careers and securing their economic futures. Since launching in 2021, the Jobs Academy program has helped thousands of women to return to work and thrive.

The 2025 program will commence in early August 2025. For more information and to apply, visit the Future Women Jobs Academy web page.

Minister for Women Jodie Harrison said:

“FW Jobs Academy is solving two challenges simultaneously. Helping NSW women overcome the barriers they face in finding meaningful work and achieving financial security and, at the same time, helping employers access an untapped talent pool.

“By supporting more New South Wales women to return to work, the Minns Government is not only empowering women to succeed but addressing critical skills gaps in industries that will drive the future prosperity of our state.

“FW Jobs Academy is helping to unlock the full potential of NSW’s skilled workforce, boosting women’s workforce participation and securing their economic futures.”

FW Managing Director and co-founder of FW Jobs Academy Helen McCabe said:   

“Hundreds of thousands of Australian women would like to return to work but can face multiple and intersecting barriers to paid employment.

“Jobs Academy works because we recognise women as experts in their own lives and, with their input, we’re providing the right balance of education, empowerment and connection to achieve real results.”

FW Deputy Managing and co-founder of FW Jobs Academy Jamila Rizvi said:  

“As Australia faces skills shortages in a variety of occupations, FW Jobs Academy offers a practical pathway for women to be part of the solution.

“Having already supported thousands of women to re-enter the workforce or undertake further study, FW Jobs Academy is boosting workforce participation and productivity, as well as addressing skills shortages and helping families make ends meet.”

2025 Dorothea Mackellar Poetry Awards entries are now open!!

The Dorothea Mackellar Poetry Awards seek to capture the imaginations of school students across Australia, inspiring them to express their thoughts and feelings through the medium of poetry in their pursuit of literary excellence. The standard of entries year after year is consistently high, yet the winning poems never cease to impress the judges. From reading the entries of both the primary and secondary students, one can get an idea of the current events and issues that have had a great impact on young Australians over the decades. 

The awards are held every year and open for entries until the 30th of June with the winners announced on the first Friday in September.

For more information on the competition and how to enter CLICK HERE.

Conditions of entries:

  • Only students enrolled in an Australian education facility (Kindergarten to Year 12) are eligible to enter.
  • Poems must be no more than 80 lines with no illustrations, graphics or decorations included.
  • Entries are limited to up to 3 poems per student.
  • Poems on any subject are accepted, the annual theme is optional.
  • Poems that have been previously entered in the Dorothea Mackellar Poetry Awards are NOT ELIGIBLE to be entered.
  • Poems entered in other competitions are eligible to be entered.

Our poets are encouraged to take inspiration from wherever they may find it, however if they are looking for some direction, they are invited to use this year’s optional theme to inspire their entries.

“All the beautiful things” has been selected as the 2025 optional theme. Students are encouraged to write about topics and experiences that spark their poetic genius (in whatever form they choose).

Big Brother Movement's Scholarships Now open for All Young Australians

For a century, the Big Brother Movement (BBM) has been a catalyst for change and opportunity, opening doors for young people to explore the world and make their mark.

It began as Australia’s most successful migration program for young men moving from the UK to Australia, the Big Brother Movement. 

Today, built on this legacy, BBM continues to empower young people to venture overseas for work experience through their Global Footprints Scholarships program. 

So instead of bringing young people to Australia to access all the opportunities here, they are providing a chance for young Australians to follow their vocational dreams overseas.

few insights into their Global Footprints Scholarship opportunity for young men and women aged 18 to 24.

What is a Global Footprints Scholarship?

A Global Footprints Scholarship is a self-directed career development opportunity for young Australians in agriculture, trades and horticulture. Successful applicants receive an AUD $9,000 grant to travel overseas for industry experience, professional development workshops, networking opportunities and mentoring.  University Students are not eligible to apply - this is for young people outside of that system.

Scholarships are awarded once a year. 

Who can apply?

To be eligible for a Global Footprints Scholarship you must be an Australian citizen or permanent resident and be between 18-25 years old. Check their “Who can apply?” page for full details. If your application is shortlisted you will need to provide evidence for the above.

Applications open every year on 1 May and close 1 June. Shortlisted applicants will be notified by September. 

Will you assist me in finding a work placement?

The Global Footprints Scholarship is a self-directed career development opportunity. You are expected to have a good idea of where you want to go and why, including an understanding of who the industry trailblazers in your field are and where they are located. Networking to find your placement is the first critical learning opportunity of your scholarship experience. We will give you advice on how to approach them, and put you in touch with past scholars who can help.

Find out more and apply at: www.globalfootprints.org.au

Inaugural Murcutt Symposium 2025, 11-13 September 2025

Glenn Murcutt AO is Australia's most celebrated living architect. To mark more than five decades of architectural practice, the inaugural Murcutt Symposium offers 3 days of tours, activities and events in Sydney from 11-13 September 2025.

Murcutt will not be alone in headlining the Murcutt Symposium in 2025. Fellow Pritzker Prize winning architect and friend Francis Kéré will join Murcutt on stage over two days in Sydney - delivering a public lecture, and keynote at a one-day symposium.

Join us for a rare chance to come inside some of Murcutt's most awarded buildings on guided tours. Hear the backstory and share in tales of the design evolution from those who have lived in and loved these places.

Witness the first ever award of the Murcutt Pin, a new international award for architecture designed by Murcutt and presented at the flagship public Murcutt Oration in Sydney on Friday, 12 September.

Dive deep into the themes that have driven Murcutt and informed his unique model of practice, and his internationally awarded projects at a one-day symposium.

Join us for 3 days of tours, talks and deep dives into architecture with a meaningful connection to place.

Murcutt building tours
Thursday 11 September: 8am-5pm
This is an exceptionally rare chance to go inside the iconic Nicholas House (Mount Irvine) and Simpson Lee House (Mount Wilson), with Glenn Murcutt AO as your guide. 
Lunch provided. Vigorous walking involved. Numbers strictly limited.

Friday 12 September: 1.30pm-5pm
Come inside an early Murcutt house in Cromer, north of Sydney, that has been described as "a hidden masterpiece in the suburbs" - given a new life by architect Matt Chan, in consultation with Glenn Murcutt.
Vigorous walking involved. Numbers strictly limited.

Murcutt Oration 
Friday 12 September 2025: 6pm-8pm
Award of the inaugural Murcutt Pin, and Murcutt Oration 
The inaugural Murcutt Oration will be delivered by Francis Kéré, laureate of the Pritzker Prize (2022) and Praemium Imperiale (2023) - widely recognised as one of the worlds leading architects.

Murcutt Symposium 
Saturday 13 September 2025: 9am-5pm
Join us for a deep dive into the themes behind Murcutt's work (3 hours Formal CPD, 2 hours informal CPD):

In-conversation - Glenn Murcutt AO and Francis Kéré
Hear these two eminent Pritzker Prize winning architects and warm friends engage in conversation on events and experiences that have shaped their personal lives and their practice over decades. 

Keynote - Piers Taylor (UK)
Piers Taylor is the founder and principal of the highly awarded Invisible Studio, and Professor of Knowledge Exchange in Architecture at UWE; founding 2 renowned academic programs: ‘Studio in the Woods’ and 'AA Design and Make'. Both engage students in hands-on design and construction. Piers Taylor originally studied in Australia and currently lives in a prototypical self built award winning house in the UK and manages a 100 acre woodland as a research resource for the practice.

Healthy buildings breathe - Lindsay Clare, Ché Wall, Kerry Clare, Rod Simpson
Buildings that breathe and have good natural ventilation are now event more critical in a changing climate. Are our current planning and building regulatory settings match-fit? Three eminent practitioners question the current state of play at the intersection of architecture, environmental science and emerging building regulation. 

Design for climate/Design for change - Carol Marra, Marra + Yeh
Carol Marra is an award-winning architect and Churchill Fellow specialising in sustainable and climate-resilient design. For over 25 years, her architecture, advocacy and research have guided the success of city-based and regional projects. Awarded an Alastair Swayn Strategic Research grant, her practice recently released Design for Climate | Design for Change, a toolkit for climate-resilient design. Originally from Argentina but trained in the United States, Carol has worked across cultural landscapes from North America, Australia and the Asia Pacific region, in urban, regional and remote locations.

The Murcutt legacy - celebrated documentary film maker Catherine Hunter shares footage from 30 years following Glenn Murcutt AO.
Catherine Hunter has followed and documented the work of celebrated architect Glenn Murcutt for more than thirty years and collaborated on a number of film projects. Share in Murcutt's warmth, humanity and skill in pursuit of an architectural vision that always seeks to respond to place and provide delight.

Contributors
Glenn Murcutt AO, Australia
Francis Kéré, Germany/Burkina Faso
Piers Taylor, UK
Brit Andresen, Australia
Kerry Clare, Australia
Lindsay Clare, Australia
Ché Wall, Australia
Richard Leplastrier AO, Australia
Peter Stutchbury, Australia
Carol Marra, Australia  

Tickets are designed for you to choose one or more events, including ticket packages if you can't decide. 
The 2025 Murcutt Symposium is supported by the Robin Boyd Foundation and National Gallery of Victoria; Sydney Design Week (thanks to the Powerhouse); and the Futuna Chapel Trust (NZ). 

This event is presented in partnership with the State Library of New South Wales.

Financial help for young people

Concessions and financial support for young people.

Includes:

  • You could receive payments and services from Centrelink: Use the payment and services finder to check what support you could receive.
  • Apply for a concession Opal card for students: Receive a reduced fare when travelling on public transport.
  • Financial support for students: Get financial help whilst studying or training.
  • Youth Development Scholarships: Successful applicants will receive $1000 to help with school expenses and support services.
  • Tertiary Access Payment for students: The Tertiary Access Payment can help you with the costs of moving to undertake tertiary study.
  • Relocation scholarship: A once a year payment if you get ABSTUDY or Youth Allowance if you move to or from a regional or remote area for higher education study.
  • Get help finding a place to live and paying your rent: Rent Choice Youth helps young people aged 16 to 24 years to rent a home.

Visit: https://www.nsw.gov.au/living-nsw/young-people/young-people-financial-help

School Leavers Support

Explore the School Leavers Information Kit (SLIK) as your guide to education, training and work options in 2022;
As you prepare to finish your final year of school, the next phase of your journey will be full of interesting and exciting opportunities. You will discover new passions and develop new skills and knowledge.

We know that this transition can sometimes be challenging. With changes to the education and workforce landscape, you might be wondering if your planned decisions are still a good option or what new alternatives are available and how to pursue them.

There are lots of options for education, training and work in 2022 to help you further your career. This information kit has been designed to help you understand what those options might be and assist you to choose the right one for you. Including:
  • Download or explore the SLIK here to help guide Your Career.
  • School Leavers Information Kit (PDF 5.2MB).
  • School Leavers Information Kit (DOCX 0.9MB).
  • The SLIK has also been translated into additional languages.
  • Download our information booklets if you are rural, regional and remote, Aboriginal or Torres Strait Islander, or living with disability.
  • Support for Regional, Rural and Remote School Leavers (PDF 2MB).
  • Support for Regional, Rural and Remote School Leavers (DOCX 0.9MB).
  • Support for Aboriginal and/or Torres Strait Islander School Leavers (PDF 2MB).
  • Support for Aboriginal and/or Torres Strait Islander School Leavers (DOCX 1.1MB).
  • Support for School Leavers with Disability (PDF 2MB).
  • Support for School Leavers with Disability (DOCX 0.9MB).
  • Download the Parents and Guardian’s Guide for School Leavers, which summarises the resources and information available to help you explore all the education, training, and work options available to your young person.

School Leavers Information Service

Are you aged between 15 and 24 and looking for career guidance?

Call 1800 CAREER (1800 227 337).

SMS 'SLIS2022' to 0429 009 435.

Our information officers will help you:
  • navigate the School Leavers Information Kit (SLIK),
  • access and use the Your Career website and tools; and
  • find relevant support services if needed.
You may also be referred to a qualified career practitioner for a 45-minute personalised career guidance session. Our career practitioners will provide information, advice and assistance relating to a wide range of matters, such as career planning and management, training and studying, and looking for work.

You can call to book your session on 1800 CAREER (1800 227 337) Monday to Friday, from 9am to 7pm (AEST). Sessions with a career practitioner can be booked from Monday to Friday, 9am to 7pm.

This is a free service, however minimal call/text costs may apply.

Call 1800 CAREER (1800 227 337) or SMS SLIS2022 to 0429 009 435 to start a conversation about how the tools in Your Career can help you or to book a free session with a career practitioner.

All downloads and more available at: www.yourcareer.gov.au/school-leavers-support

Word Of The Week: Gravitas

Word of the Week remains a keynote in 2025, simply to throw some disruption in amongst the 'yeah-nah' mix. 

Noun

1.dignity, seriousness, or solemnity of manner.

From: Latin, from gravis ‘serious’.

Gravitas was one of the ancient Roman virtues that denoted "seriousness". It is also translated variously as weight, dignity, and importance and connotes restraint and moral rigor. It also conveys a sense of responsibility and commitment to the task.

Along with pietas (regard for discipline and authority), severitas, gloria, simplicitas (lucidity), integritas, dignitas, and virtus, gravitas was particularly appreciated as an ideal characteristic in leaders. Gravitas and virtus are considered more canonical virtues than the others.

Gravitas was one of the virtues that allowed citizens, particularly statesmen, to embody the concept of romanitas, which denotes what it meant to be Roman and how Romans regarded themselves, eventually evolving into a national character. Many Roman philosophers praised constantia (perseverance, endurance, and courage), dignitas, and gravitas as the most important virtues; this is because they made dignified men capable. They accompany Roman actions. The men of the ruling upper and upper-middle classes were educated in a public school system where Classical language and literature formed basic elements of the curriculum.

Exuding gravitas or dignified and serious conduct allowed Romans to maintain a persistent element of conservatism and traditionalism.[6] According to the Roman emperor and philosopher Marcus Aurelius, the cultivation of gravitas involves acting with sincerity and dignity, by being temperate in manner and speech as well as by carrying oneself with authority.

Other sources associate gravitas with living an austere lifestyle. 

Gravitas is also used in communication, particularly in speech, where it denotes the use of emphasis in order to give certain words weight.

Jacinda Ardern, 2025 Yale Class Day Speaker

The Right Honorable Dame Jacinda Ardern, former prime minister of New Zealand, delivered the 2025 Yale Class Day address - well worth a listen.

Actually, Gen Z stand to be the biggest winners from the new $3 million super tax

Brendan CoatesGrattan Institute and Joey MoloneyGrattan Institute

As debate rages about the federal government’s plan to lift the tax on earnings on superannuation balances over A$3 million, it’s worth revisiting why we offer super tax breaks in the first place, and why they need to be reformed.

Tax breaks on super contributions mean less tax is paid on super savings than other forms of income. These tax breaks cost the federal budget nearly $50 billion in lost revenue each year.

These tax breaks boost the retirement savings of super fund members. They also ensure workers don’t pay punitively high long-term tax rates on their super, since the impact of even low tax rates on savings compounds over time.

But they disproportionately flow to older and wealthier Australians.

Two thirds of the value of super tax breaks benefit the top 20% of income earners, who are already saving enough for their retirement.

Few retirees draw down on their retirement savings as intended, and many are net savers – their super balance continues to grow for decades after they retire.

By 2060, Treasury expects one-third of all withdrawals from super will be via bequests – up from one-fifth today.

Superannuation in Australia was intended to help fund retirements. Instead, it has become a taxpayer-subsidised inheritance scheme.

The tax breaks aren’t just inequitable; they are economically unsound. Generous tax breaks for super savers mean other taxes (such as income and company taxes) must be higher to make up the forgone revenue. That means the burden falls disproportionately on younger taxpayers.

The government should go further

The government’s plan to increase the tax rate on superannuation earnings for balances exceeding $3 million from 15% to 30% is one modest step towards fixing these problems. The tax would only apply to the amount over $3 million, not the entire balance.

This reform will affect only the top 0.5% of super account holders – about 80,000 people – and save more than $2 billion a year in its first full year.

Claims that not indexing the $3 million threshold will result in the tax affecting most younger Australians, or that it will somehow disproportionately affect younger generations, are simply nonsense.

Rather than being the biggest losers from the lack of indexation, younger Australians are the biggest beneficiaries. It means more older, wealthier Australians will shoulder some of the burden of budget repair and an ageing population. Otherwise, younger generations would bear this burden alone.

The facts speak for themselves: a mere 0.5% of Australians have more than $3 million in their super, and 85% of those are aged over 60.

Even in the unlikely scenario where the threshold remains fixed until 2055 – or for ten consecutive parliamentary terms – it would still only affect the top 10% of retiring Australians. Treasurer Jim Chalmers has rightly pointed out that it is unlikely the threshold will never be lifted.

Far from abandoning the proposed $3 million threshold, the government should go further and drop the threshold to $2 million, and only then index it to inflation, saving the budget a further $1 billion a year.

There is no rationale for offering such generous earnings tax breaks on super balances between $2 million and $3 million.

At the very least, if the $3 million threshold is maintained, it should not be indexed until inflation naturally reduces its real value to $2 million, which is estimated to occur around 2040.

Sure, it’s complicated

Levying a higher tax rate on the earnings of large super balances is complicated by the fact existing super earnings taxes are levied at the fund level, not on individual member accounts.

And it’s true that levying a 15% surcharge on the implied earnings of the account over the year (the change in account balance, net of contributions and withdrawals) will impose a tax on unrealised capital gains, or paper profits.

Taxing capital gains as they build up removes incentives to “lock in” investments to hold onto untaxed capital gains, as the Henry Tax Review recognised. But it can create cash flow problems for some self-managed super fund members who hold assets such as business premises or a farm in their fund.

Yet there are seldom easy answers when it comes to tax changes.

Most people with such substantial super balances are retirees who already maintain enough liquid assets to meet the minimum drawdown requirements.

Indeed, self-managed super funds are legally obligated to have investment strategies that ensure liquidity and the ability to meet liabilities.

In any case, the tax does not have to be paid from super. Australians with large super balances typically earn as much income from investments outside super. And the wealthiest 10% of retirees today rely more on income from outside super than income from super.

Good policy is always the art of the compromise

Australia faces the twin challenges of big budget deficits and stagnant productivity. Tax reform will be needed to respond to both.

Good public policy, like politics, always requires some level of compromise.

Super tax breaks should exist only where they support a policy aim. And on balance, trimming unneeded super tax breaks for the wealthiest 0.5% of Australians would make our super system fairer and our budget stronger.The Conversation

Brendan Coates, Program Director, Housing and Economic Security, Grattan Institute and Joey Moloney, Deputy Program Director, Housing and Economic Security, Grattan Institute

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

X-rays have revealed a mysterious cosmic object never before seen in our galaxy

Author provided
Ziteng WangCurtin University

In a new study published today in Nature, we report the discovery of a new long-period transient – and, for the first time, one that also emits regular bursts of X-rays.

Long-period transients are a recently identified class of cosmic objects that emit bright flashes of radio waves every few minutes to several hours. This is much longer than the rapid pulses we typically detect from dead stars such as pulsars.

What these objects are, and how they generate their unusual signals, remains a mystery.

Our discovery opens up a new window into the study of these puzzling sources. But it also deepens the mystery: the object we found doesn’t resemble any known type of star or system in our galaxy – or beyond.

An image of the sky showing the region around ASKAP J1832-0911. The yellow circle marks the position of the newly discovered source. This image shows X-rays from NASA’s Chandra X-ray Observatory, radio data from the South African MeerKAT radio telescope, and infrared data from NASA’s Spitzer Space Telescope. Author provided

Watching the radio sky for flickers

There’s much in the night sky that we can’t see with human eyes but can detect when we look at other wavelengths, such as radio emissions.

Our research team regularly scans the radio sky using the Australian SKA Pathfinder (ASKAP), operated by CSIRO on Wajarri Yamaji Country in Western Australia. Our goal is to find cosmic objects that appear and disappear (known as transients).

Transients are often linked to some of the most powerful and dramatic events in the universe, such as the explosive deaths of stars.

In late 2023, we spotted an extremely bright source, named ASKAP J1832-0911 (based on its position in the sky), in the direction of the galactic plane. This object is located about 15,000 light years away. This is far, but still within the Milky Way.

An overhead view of large white radio dishes under a bright blue sky littered with clouds and a red earth underneath.
Some of the ASKAP antennas, located at Inyarrimanha Ilgari Bundara, the Murchison Radio-astronomy Observatory in Western Australia. CSIRO

A dramatic event

After the initial discovery, we began follow-up observations using telescopes around the world, hoping to catch more pulses. With continued monitoring, we found the radio pulses from ASKAPJ1832 arrive regularly – every 44 minutes. This confirmed it as a new member of the rare long-period transient group.

But we did not just look forward in time – we also looked back. We searched through older telescope data from the same part of the sky. We found no trace of the object before the discovery.

This suggests something dramatic happened shortly before we first detected it – something powerful enough to suddenly switch the object “on”.

Then, in February 2024, ASKAPJ1832 became extremely active. After a quieter period in January, the source brightened dramatically. Fewer than 30 objects in the sky have ever reached such brightness in radio waves.

For comparison, most stars we detect in radio are about 10,000 times fainter than ASKAPJ1832 during that flare-up.

A lucky break

X-rays are a form of light that we can’t see with our eyes. They usually come from extremely hot and energetic environments. Although about ten similar radio-emitting objects have been found so far, none had ever shown X-ray signals.

In March, we tried to observe ASKAPJ1832 in X-rays. However, due to technical issues with the telescope, the observation could not go ahead.

Then came a stroke of luck. In June, I reached out to my friend Tong Bao, a postdoctoral researcher at the Italian National Institute for Astrophysics, to check if any previous X-ray observations had captured the source. To our surprise, we found two past observations from NASA’s Chandra X-ray Observatory, although the data were still under a proprietary period (not yet public).

We contacted Kaya Mori, a research scientist at Columbia University and the principal investigator of those observations. He generously shared the data with us. To our amazement, we discovered clear X-ray signals coming from ASKAPJ1832. Even more remarkable: the X-rays followed the same 44-minute cycle as the radio pulses.

It was a truly lucky break. Chandra had been pointed at a different target entirely, but by pure coincidence, it caught ASKAPJ1832 during its unusually bright and active phase.

A chance alignment like that is incredibly rare – like finding a needle in a cosmic haystack.

Artwork of a tube-shaped telescope in space with large solar panel arrays on one end.
NASA’s Chandra X-ray Observatory is the world’s most powerful X-ray telescope, in orbit around Earth since 1999. NASA/CXC & J. Vaughan

Still a mystery

Having both radio and X-ray bursts is a common trait of dead stars with extremely strong magnetic fields, such as neutron stars (high-mass dead stars) and white dwarf (low-mass dead stars).

Our discovery suggests that at least some long-period transients may come from these kinds of stellar remnants.

But ASKAPJ1832 does not quite fit into any known category of object in our galaxy. Its behaviour, while similar in some ways, still breaks the mould.

We need more observations to truly understand what is going on. It is possible that ASKAPJ1832 is something entirely new, or it could be emitting radio waves in a way we have never seen before.The Conversation

Ziteng Wang, Associate Lecturer, Curtin Institute of Radio Astronomy (CIRA), Curtin University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Friday essay: I’m an Aboriginal farmer. But a romanticised idea of agriculture writes Black people out of the farming story

Joshua GilbertUniversity of Technology Sydney

I grew up with Dorothea Mackellar and The Man from Snowy River, where ragged mountain ranges met the colt from Old Regret. I grew up with the idea that the Australian bush meant endless possibility to breed livestock and find gold in every rock overturned. But these practices of clearing and marking ownership through decree of unproductive agricultural land pushed mob further from their traditional lands. It discredited their voices and their connection to Country.

Indigenous culture is viewed as something that is static, unable to move with the times. It’s one of many stereotypes in Australia, from the deemed requirement of dark skin to “be Aboriginal”, to the assumption that our participation in society only occurred in the time prior to colonisation. Indigenous people and our culture continue to be romanticised and therefore fixed in time.

I want to broaden the story and build a new reality for the future. But to do this I need to break down the stereotypes.

Joshua Gilbert. Penguin Random House Australia

After a yarn about climate change, or my family’s farming legacy, or my Aboriginal heritage, it doesn’t take long before I get asked the same old questions. Questions about the size of our properties, the number of cows, or the length of time we’ve been farming. I find this a bit uncomfortable, given the way Aboriginal land was taken, and the actions made to remove our people from this Country.

More uncomfortable are some of the questions I’m asked in other circles. You aren’t really that Aboriginal, are you? Or, what percentage Aboriginal are you?

Instead of answering, I usually spin a yarn that I believe is more relevant, more representative of my views. I try to challenge the fearful motivations behind these attempts to minimise or negate my voice and my identity.

Indigenous people have more than enough experience on these lands to give things a go and we’re more than capable of working as hard as non-Indigenous people. I’m the fourth generation of my family to raise cattle with humps – the drought-hardy Bos indicus breed – on British-type cattle country. We know how to deal with the floods and the droughts and the pests that creep a little further south each year.

I didn’t have to answer these sorts of questions when I was a kid; these conversations were hidden when my grandparents or great-grandparents were farming and supporting their families. But now they seem to matter.

Today, a farmer’s bio often starts with the numbers. The number of cattle and acres, the number of generations the farm’s been in the family and the volume of commodities produced. But what about the things that aren’t so easily quantified? The knowledge derived from deep and rich sources, of connection running through the veins and told to us by the landscape as we walk it?

This is all despite the challenges outlined in the Australian Beef Report, which estimates the average farm now needs over A$10 million of land assets to be self-sustaining. In the United States, the Department of Agriculture found that 88% of farmers run small family farms, with most relying on off-farm income to keep their passion for feeding people alive. The data is likely not much better in Australia.

Systematically organised land

My connection to food began in the Taree butcher shop my family used to run. I watched my uncles talk shop with old-timers from behind their refrigerated counter and marvelled at the different cuts of meat. Every now and then, my uncles would pause to pass a frankfurter over the counter to a youngster walking past. Back then, there was a generosity of spirit and a deep understanding of where meat came from and how it was produced. Sadly, a lot of that’s been lost to the big supermarkets who cater to customers who prioritise the convenience of getting everything in one place over the chance for a yarn.

These memories remind me of a time when agriculture was celebrated in city streets. Steers were pushed through Sydney to market or the abattoir. Back then, there was a wealth of connections between farmers and the steadily developing city towers. It’s a romantic vision of the past, of course. Poetic.

On Worimi Country, the vast riverbanks nestled deeply in a gorge remind me of what this place once was. So too the marking of a bunya pine, its height visible across the landscape indicating a place of trade or celebration.

In order to connect to this place in a way that prioritises culture and our relationship with the land, we need to learn the lessons she imparts. Indigenous people know this innately; it travels in the veins and minds of those who traverse this Country and is recalled when you hear the clicking jump of the kangaroo sound deep in the drone of the didgeridoo.

The natural flair and intuition of Aboriginal stockmen and stockwomen around livestock is reaffirmed every time I speak to a fellow Aboriginal farmer, and often comes up in reflection during a yarn with non-Indigenous farmers.

Indigenous people did not simply hunt and gather, we had a systematic way of organising the land that meant we used the precious resources wisely, from burning Country appropriately, to planting tubers and native foods, and using fence-like structures to herd kangaroos.

During the extended droughts and floods of the mid-2020s, the sustainability of farming has been top of the news agenda. But what of Indigenous sustainability and land management? Isn’t it time we asked where the Indigenous voices in those discussions are? What if we recognised the 60,000 years of knowledge to understand Australia and its landscapes better?

Take for example the ability to regenerate landscapes and promote growth with the use of fire. By regularly burning bushland, Aboriginal people were also able to keep track of areas in which animals would graze and shelter.

Indigenous people have a connection to the land that goes beyond words, and this contains knowledge of climate adaptation from old times. They’ve survived drought, extreme weather and floods for tens of thousands of years. The knowledge we have gathered can help both farmers and scientists understand how to adapt to a changing climate. We should tap into and value this and embrace what Indigenous Australians have to offer.

Black imagination

Farmers can start by reaching out to local Indigenous groups and working with them to build new, sustainable practices based on Indigenous concepts and knowledge. Local and federal government can also take action, by meeting with Aboriginal farmers to hear their thoughts on how we can make successful and sustainable change.

Our romanticised notion of agriculture threatens our mob’s inclusion, stitching a colonial fabric of Australia’s early agricultural development and removing the black faces who stood alongside early white pioneers to write the next chapter.

This Country is where culture and connection danced upon ancient land with foreign cattle and people, building both a new form of agriculture and a new society. These stories exist in the written accounts of those who crossed these lands during colonisation.

Cover of Gilbert's book
Penguin Random House

I find these intersections in Australian history fascinating, where horses galloped across ancient bush food-filled landscapes, where tribes met and often helped settlers, and where grasslands were disputed by someone new. Again and again, black imagination accommodated foreign animals, ancient songs calmed new cattle, and boys became men on horseback.

It’s this connection that I yearn for – the honest conversations about what happened here, how this land was overtaken and where we find ourselves now.

Where we can all understand our truths on these lands – how they come together on the ground and through nature and wildlife, livestock and the humans that share the pathways on Country. Where our truths build new romantic connections for the generations to come through shared stories, an awareness of past challenges and opportunities for new agricultural methods.

While the stories of the past still linger across the landscape, I am intrigued by what’s to come. How we can adapt the lessons of the past by coming together to create a more inclusive definition of Australia and what it means to be Australian.

This is an extract from Australia’s Agricultural Identity: An Aboriginal yarn by Joshua Gilbert (Penguin Random House).The Conversation

Joshua Gilbert, Researcher (Indigenous Policy) Jumbunna Institute for Indigenous Education & Research, University of Technology Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Oscar Wilde’s The Ballad of Reading Gaol is a work of art activism beloved by Banksy

Oscar Wilde photographed by Napoleon Sarony (c. 1882). Library of Congress

Sondeep KandolaLiverpool John Moores University

In 2021, Banksy revealed a mural of Oscar Wilde, clad in prisoner garb, making an escape from the abandoned Reading jail. The artist claimed that he would donate profits from the sale of the stencil he used to create the work (a projected £10 million) to set up an arts hub in the Grade II listed building.

This hasn’t yet taken place, but speaking about the work at the time, Banksy dubbed Wilde “the patron saint of smashing two contrasting ideas together to create magic. Converting the place that destroyed him into a refuge for art feels so perfect we have to do it.”

In 1895, Wilde was sentenced to two years of hard labour for “gross indecency” after being convicted of “homosexual acts”. He was posthumously pardoned in 2017 under the Turing Law.

The Ballad of Reading Gaol, which he wrote two years after his release, hypnotically details the psychological and physical horrors of living in isolation in unsanitary single-cells for 23 hours a day.

It also reveals the mind-numbing conditions and physically exhausting jobs that were relentlessly inflicted on prisoners in Wilde’s day. They were required to ascend 56 steps a minute for nine hours a day on a treadmill, break stones and pick oakum (fibres from the ropes used on ships). And to do so in complete silence.


This article is part of Rethinking the Classics. The stories in this series offer insightful new ways to think about and interpret classic books and artworks. This is the canon – with a twist.


In the poem, Wilde details the intense surveillance techniques and harsh punishments adopted by the prison wardens against the “outcast men”.

A small prison cell with white walls, a bed and table.
Oscar Wilde’s prison cell in Reading Gaol as it appears today. Jack1956/Wiki Commons

“Like ape or clown, in monstrous garb,” he writes, the inmates silently trudge the prison yard in their one allotted hour of exercise per day. The poem focuses on one prisoner in particular, named only as CTW, who is sentenced to death for murdering his wife. It traces his walk to the “hideous” shed where he is to be executed, which ghoulishly sees him “cross his own coffin”.

More gothic images abound. CTW’s impending burial in an unhallowed and anonymous grave is described as “with yawning mouth the horrid hole / Gaped for a living thing” while “the very mud cried out for blood”.

Wilde also references a scene from Coleridge’s 1797 masterpiece The Rime of the Ancient Mariner as he envisions phantoms dancing a “grisly masque” in which they sing of inexorable triumph of sin in prison, “the Secret House of Shame”.

Moreover, Wilde denies that the sacrifice that CTW has offered to the prison with his execution is ultimately redemptive for him as:

He did not pass in purple pomp

Nor ride a moon-white steed

Three yards of cord and a sliding board

Are all the gallows need.

In the ballad, Wilde represents the prison experience as sadistic and unrelenting. Much like Banksy over a century later, Wilde used the degree of anonymity the poem afforded (he published it under his cell number, C33) to berate an inhumane society and the distressing penal policy of “hard labour, hard fare, hard board” that he was forced to endure.

The Ballad of Reading Gaol can ultimately be read as a celebration of compassion, resilience and art activism. Through the poem and letters he wrote to the Daily Chronicle, Wilde publicly attempted to “try and change [prison life] for others”.

Wilde and his lover, Lord Alfred Douglas.
Wilde and his lover, Lord Alfred Douglas in 1893. British Library

Despite Wilde’s public notoriety, Irish MPs Michael Davitt and T.P. O’Connor even went as far as to quote the ballad in parliamentary debates, which led to the adoption of some of the recommendations that Wilde had made in his letters in the 1898 Prison Reform Act.

Although Wilde, himself, was to suffer the psychological and physical effects of his imprisonment until the end of his short life two years later, the 1898 Act saw the treadmill abolished, ensured solitary confinement could only be used for a maximum of 28 days and children were separated from adult prisoners. And yet, sadly, Wilde’s description of “the foul and dark latrine” of “humanity’s machine” continues to reverberate today.

On August 22 2024, “independent monitors” into the conditions at Wandsworth Prison (where Wilde was briefly held) found it to be “crumbling, overcrowded and vermin-infested, with inmates living in half the cell space available when it was first opened in 1851”.

While Wilde’s “swan song” joins with Banksy’s escaped prisoner to expose the failings of modern penal practices, it also reminds us of the enduring power of art and imagination to foster change.

Beyond the canon

As part of the Rethinking the Classics series, we’re asking our experts to recommend a book or artwork that tackles similar themes to the canonical work in question, but isn’t (yet) considered a classic itself. Here is Sondeep Kandola’s suggestion:

If you are looking for further reading on the topic of prison life and the prison experience, Andy West’s memoir The Life Inside (2022) offers a sobering and often witty reflection on living in the carceral state today. A philosophy teacher in prison, West explores the notion of freedom, redemption and our broken prison system.

You might also be interested to read Brendan Behan’s powerful 1958 autobiography Borstal Boy and Bobby Sands’ courageous Writings from Prison (2020), two incarcerated Irish writers who shared Wilde’s republican sympathies and similarly questioned the ethics and integrity of the British government who imprisoned them.The Conversation

Sondeep Kandola, Senior Lecturer in English Literature and Cultural History, Liverpool John Moores University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Sports hernias can cause severe pain in the groin region – and footballers may be at greatest risk

Sports hernias – which are more common in men – cause pain in the groin and pubic region. Inspiration GP/ Shutterstock

Dan BaumgardtUniversity of Bristol

A friend of mine came to see me recently complaining of an odd ache he’d noted in his lower abs and groin. He couldn’t blame it on crunches at the gym, nor a cow kicking him in the belly again (he’s a farmer). But he does spend a fair amount of his time on the football pitch and was now noticing that every training session and match was bringing the pain on – sometimes agonisingly so.

The diagnosis? A sports hernia. This condition also goes by many other names, including athletic pubalgia and Gilmore’s groin – after the late British surgeon Jerry Gilmore who was the first to coin it. It’s actually a fairly recently described condition, dating back to only the 1980s.

The main symptom of a sports hernia is pain in the pubic and groin regions, brought on through athletic activity. The condition is actually more common that you think, especially so in footballers. Around 70% of all sports hernias appear to be related to the sport. It’s also estimated that groin pain accounts for around 5-18% of athletic injuries.

A sport’s hernia is not your typical hernia. In fact, it’s not really a hernia at all.

true hernia is defined as when a section of tissue or organ passes into a space where it shouldn’t be. Many will be aware of those hernias which involve a section of bowel passing through the abdominal wall – such as an inguinal hernia.

There are other types of hernias as well. For instance, your stomach can pop through a gap in the diaphragm and into the chest (called a hiatus hernia). More seriously, even the brain can herniate – out of one of the holes in the skull.

But a sports hernia is different, in that it actually arises from overuse of the abdominal muscles.

The abdominals include the long, straight and central “rectus abdominis” muscles – which allow you to perform a sit-up or crunch. Three layers of muscle also lie on either side of the abdominals. These are the obliques, which have important roles in twisting and turning our bodies. The muscles are also mixed with layers of tendon and connective tissue which not only attach them together, but also to the bones and ligaments of the pelvis.

Sports hernias are typically caused by moves which involve a lot of twisting and turning – and especially those occurring at speed. Hip movements can also put strain on where the ab muscles attach at the groin region. These actions appear to cause shearing and tears in the tissue, leading to pain. It’s felt in the groin or lower abs, usually on one side. In men, who are particularly at risk, pain may also be felt in the genitalia.

Some sports rely upon these sorts of moves and actions during play. Think about dribbling in football and hockey, or pinning and throwing opponents in wrestling or martial arts. Slalom skiing is another prime example – travelling at speed and rapidly changing direction. Tackling and scrum action in rugby or American football, and explosive block starts and hurdling in track athletes might also be to blame.

Two football players from opposing teams face off on the pitch as they chase the ball.
People who play sports that have a lot of twisting, such as football, may have a greater risk of suffering a sports hernia. Vitalii Vitleo/ Shutterstock

The condition appears much more common in males, who are up to nine times more likely to develop it. This is perhaps because of the anatomy of their lower abs, which is different to females. The testes – which initially develop inside the abdomen – descend to the scrotum during the foetal period. But to do this, they actually have to pass through the layers of the abdominal wall which makes the structure weaker and potentially more prone to damage.

While sports hernias are vastly more common in athletes because of the regular repetitive strain they put their bodies under, it’s still technically possible for non-athletes to get it.

If you work in a job where there’s regular heavy lifting, pivoting as you do so – on a building site for instance – it may be possible to sustain the same injury. Or, doing too many advanced core exercises at the gym before you’re sufficiently strong enough might also make you more prone. Dead lifts and core exercises that use a medicine ball (such as Russian twists) are some culprits.

Managing a sports hernia

If you do develop a sports hernia, it appears that improving core strength may help you recover. Patients diagnosed with a sports hernia typically undergo a training programme to strengthen and stabilise their core muscles. In athletes who already have a strong core, it may also be worthwhile training muscles that strengthen the pelvis alongside a gradual return to sport. Physiotherapy, massage and acupuncture may also help.

Some cases might also require surgery to reinforce the groin structure, and relieve any tension on the tissues.

There’s evidence to suggest that sports hernias are both under-reported and under-diagnosed. This may be because they get confused with other types of injuries – such as an inguinal hernia, which is also related to the groin, more commonly found in males and associated with abdominal wall strain and damage.

The key difference is that a real inguinal hernia causes a swelling in the groin region or scrotum, whereas sports hernias do not. Inguinal hernias can also cause complications if the bowel gets twisted and obstructed, which can have potentially severe consequences.

So, if you’re someone who participates in these twisting, turning types of sports and notice any of the symptoms of a sports hernia, it’s best to stop instead of pushing yourself through the pain. You should also speak to a doctor in case there are signs of a true hernia, which often requires further surgical treatment.The Conversation

Dan Baumgardt, Senior Lecturer, School of Physiology, Pharmacology and Neuroscience, University of Bristol

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Faces you hear? Dolphin ‘signature whistles’ may transmit more than just identity information

Ekaterina Ovsyanikova
Ekaterina OvsyanikovaThe University of Queensland

Like us humans, many animals rely on social interactions to survive and thrive. As a result, effective communication between individuals is essential.

Highly social animals often have more complex communication systems. Think of a group of chimpanzees gesturing and vocalising at each other, or a family of elephants communicating through touch or low-frequency calls.

Bottlenose dolphins live in complex societies where each animal has a small number of closely connected individuals and a larger number of looser associates (not dissimilar to our own social networks). They rely heavily on interpersonal interactions to maintain a healthy social balance.

Scientists have long known that dolphins use “signature whistles” to identify themselves to others. In our recent study, we present evidence suggesting that these whistles may contain more information than just identity.

Dolphins frolicking.
Dolphins live in complex societies where communication is important. Ekaterina Ovsyanikova

A unique but variable sound

Dolphins use various sounds, such as burst pulses and whistles, to communicate. There are two broad categories of whistles: signature whistles (distinctive whistle types that are unique to each individual) and non-signature (the rest).

Dolphins use the unique frequency patterns of their signature whistles to broadcast their identity. They develop these signals when they are young and maintain them throughout their lives.

When interacting with others, up to 30% of a dolphin’s whistling may be comprised of its signature whistle. There is often some variation in the whistle versions produced by the individual animals. This led us to analyse the balance between stability and variability of the signature whistles to test if they can contain more information than just the whistler’s identity.

Listening to whistles

In 2017 and 2018, our research team made repeated sound recordings of a group of Indo-Pacific bottlenose dolphins (Tursiops aduncus) at Tangalooma Island Resort near Moreton Island, off the coast of Brisbane in eastern Australia.

We collected many instances of signature whistles produced by the same animals. We also used historical data collected from the same group 15 years earlier.

We found that, while the whistles were exceptionally stable in their frequency patterns, they did vary a certain amount (this variability also remained similar across the years). This suggests that even though frequency patterns of signature whistles encode identity, they are also likely to transmit more information, such as emotional or contextual cues.

Photo of a dolphin's dorsal fin emerging from the water, accompanied by several graphs showing a changing frequency pattern.
An example of the variability in signature whistle renditions produced by a single animal. Dolphins can be individually identified by their dorsal fins. Ekaterina Ovsyanikova

Our study group of animals was too small to draw definitive conclusions, but our findings indicated that males demonstrate more variability in their signature whistles than females. It could be linked to the differences in their social roles and the nature of their interactions with others.

We also identified a whistle much like a signature, but which was shared between several individuals. This supports recent findings that groups of dolphins may have shared distinctive whistles, along with their individual ones.

Faces that you hear

What does all this mean?

First, signature whistles are likely to be more versatile than previously thought. They may carry additional information within their frequency patterns, and possibly other structural elements.

The second lesson is that, while signature whistles are individually learned “labels” that are like human names in many ways, in terms of the information they transmit, a useful analogy may be human faces.

Humans carry identity information in our fixed facial features. At the same time, we transmit a lot of additional information, including emotional and contextual cues, through more transient facial expressions. Like signature whistles, our faces combine stability and variability in their “information package”.

A pair of dolphins swimming along the surface.
Like human faces, dolphin signature whistles may convey a stable identity alongside other information. Ekaterina Ovsyanikova

Making the whole world blurry

Understanding dolphin communication helps us better understand the challenges these animals face in an increasingly human-affected world.

Take noise pollution in the oceans. It’s a hot topic among marine bioacoustics researchers, but rarely at the front of the general public’s mind.

If we do think of it, it’s probably in human terms. Living in a noisy environment for us might be annoying and stressful, but we could still do most of the things we need to do.

But for dolphins, deafening shipping noise would be the equivalent of the whole world going blurry for us. Imagine what it would be like to navigate through life, make friends, stay away from bad connections, and be socially effective (which is necessary for survival), if you can’t recognise anyone’s face or see their expressions.

Thinking of the dolphins’ key signal, a signature whistle, as informational equivalent of our faces, may help us see (and hear) the world from a dolphin’s perspective.The Conversation

Ekaterina Ovsyanikova, Academic, School of the Environment, The University of Queensland

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

A 1980s cost-of-living crisis gave Australia a thriving arts program – could we do it again?

A Railways Union cultural exhibition, September 1985. Mitchell Library, State Library of New South Wales and Courtesy SEARCH FoundationCC BY
Izabella NantsouUniversity of Sydney

The cost-of-living crisis is hitting the arts hard. Artists struggle to survive on poverty wages and audiences are getting priced out.

This challenge is not unprecedented. In the 1980s, another cost-of-living crisis sparked a bold and imaginative model for embedding artists into the everyday rhythms of working life.

Art for the working class

It was 1982. The country was in the grip of stagflation: low growth, high inflation and rising unemployment. The Australia Council for the Arts was reconciling a 20% funding cut. Seeking to offset its cut funds, the council sought out an unexpected partner to launch a community arts program: the Australian Council of Trade Unions.

The “Art and Working Life” initiative sought to celebrate, encourage and support working class art and culture. By embedding artists in workplaces across the country, it enabled workers to practice and develop their artistic skills and expression.

It also addressed two key issues: employment for artists, and increasing the public’s access to the arts.

Unions would sponsor projects and act as employers for the artists involved throughout the project’s duration. This arrangement placed artists in diverse settings such as factory floors, hospital wards, offices and construction sites, where they collaborated with workers to create art that reflected the realities of their working lives.

The NSW Railways Union, partnering with the Art and Working Life program, showcased a cultural exhibition in September 1985. Mitchell Library, State Library of New South Wales and Courtesy SEARCH FoundationCC BY

Why trade unions?

In 1982, 57% of Australian workers were unionised. This meant unions had the infrastructure to match the government’s funding through the Australia Council, and to employ artists on a project basis.

With union membership mandatory in many industries, this generated a guaranteed resource base capable of funding an arts program for the broader community. For artists, the unions’ reach into various industries provided significant potential audiences.

Unions offered more than resources; they brought a philosophy and a plan. Art was a cultural right. In workplaces, it could lift morale, disrupt the grind and add meaning to labour.

It also had practical benefits: strengthening workplace culture, engaging members and helping artists organise within their own industry.

Art and Working Life projects varied widely. Dancers in garment factories devised movement routines aimed at reducing repetitive strain injury. In rail yards, theatre artists wrote plays in collaboration with engineers and mechanics about genderrace, and labour. Musicians headed underground – literally – to record original songs written by miners about the threat of job losses.

By 1986, Australia Council chair Donald Horne lauded the program as “a good example of value for money”.

In four years, it reached over three million workers and their families – nearly 20% of the population – at a cost of just A$2.8 million (around $9 million today).

By the end of the decade, it had employed more than 2,000 artists, with union support matching federal funding.

A slow decline

But the program depended on two fragile pillars: a strong labour movement and sustained government support.

By the 1990s, both were under threat.

As privatisation, deregulation and enterprise bargaining eroded union powermembership declined, workplaces fragmented, and the foundations of Art and Working Life weakened.

At the same time, a major shift occurred in arts funding. In 1994, Paul Keating released Australia’s first national cultural policy Creative Nation, reframing the arts as an economic driver, emphasising export-ready, profitable outcomes. Arts funding increasingly favoured media, tourism and “creative industries”.

For the Australia Council, this shift meant a retreat from community arts programs like Art and Working Life, and the program was quietly shelved in 1995.

It marked more than the loss of a funding stream: it signalled the decline of a cultural policy vision grounded in social equity and everyday life.

Would it work in 2025?

Today, with union density hovering around historic lows of 13.1%, the infrastructure that once supported a national workplace arts program is largely gone. But the need is as urgent as ever.

In the face of today’s cost-of-living crisis, we need bold, integrated policy frameworks with a strong social foundation. Australia’s current cultural policy, Revive, was released in 2023. The document signals a rhetorical shift away from economic metrics and towards access and inclusion. But what structures bring this vision to life?

Today’s cost-of-living crisis could be used to inspire a new wave of cultural investment that supports employment, fosters participation and embeds creativity in everyday life.

Looking at the history of Art and Working Life offers more than nostalgia: it provides a practical model for anchoring arts policy in the material conditions of working people’s lives, where the arts are not apart from daily experience, but central to it.The Conversation

Izabella Nantsou, Academic in Theatre and Performance Studies, University of Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Friday essay: ‘the Boy-Girl’, a crime journalist and a Black activist – meet the radical ratbags of 19th-century Melbourne

Daniel Henderson (left), The Boy-Girl (right). State Library of Victoria
Lucy SussexLa Trobe University

“The past is a foreign country, they do things differently there,” wrote English author L.P. Hartley in The Go-Between (1953). Modern Melburnians may feel the same. But while they live with an increasing cityscape of skyscrapers, the past is not far away.

Consider Scots Church in Collins Street. Its spire tip was for some time the highest point in the city, but now it is relatively low compared to surrounding buildings. The idea behind its vantage was different to modern planning decisions: it indicated the Presbyterians had a closeness to Heaven not possessed by other Christian denominations.

Certainly, the beliefs of many 19th-century Melburnians appear equally odd. The pseudoscience of Phrenology held that the shape of people’s skulls denoted their character. Phrenologist Philemon Sohier was even allowed to take plaster casts from the heads of freshly hanged criminals. His wife Ellen, an Antipodean Tussaud, then used the casts to create realistic replicas for the Chamber of Horrors in their associated waxworks.

But equally, while researching my recent book on colonial crime writer Mary Fortune, I encountered individuals living in 19th-century Melbourne who seem startlingly modern. A wealthy teenage girl who dressed in drag for months as The Boy-Girl, likely as a protest. A radical journalist and sometime criminal who published a lurid true-crime newspaper. And a Black author and activist who advocated for workers’ rights, the unemployed and men of colour.

This trio did not fit the mould – nor do they fit our preconceived views of what colonial Australians were like. They were ratbags: a term extremely expressive of the national character, then and now. They had the strength of character to be different, subversive, even to protest publicly. They did what they wanted, against constraints – and they deserved better than to be forgotten.

The Boy-Girl

Let us start with dress. A man wearing a dress would not be immediately arrested these days. No one would cite the Biblical injunction against cross-dressing, Deuteronomy, at them. But in 1857, French artist Rosa Bonheur had to get permission from the Prefect of Police to wear pants, for reasons of “health”.

a boy in a white dress
Ernest Hemingway as a baby. Pinimg

Family photographs from the Victorian era depict rigid gender roles in dress, with father in trousers, tailcoat and top hat, mother in crinoline and bonnet, surrounded by their many offspring. Yet those roles could be bent, or blurred. Look more closely at the youngest children in these photographs. Small boys wore frocks and their hair long, until “breeched”, put into pants. Even the macho Ernest Hemingway once wore frills and furbelows, most cutely.

In 1875, Melbourne’s Block, the promenade space of the fashionable wealthy, was the site for a challenging display: the Boy-Girl. Here, notions of gender were confounded by an individual dressed as female from the waist down, but male from the waist up. As a letter to the Herald noted:

Sir,– A most distressing sight is to be seen every evening on our principal streets, viz., a poor boy evidently from want of means going about in petticoats, perhaps his mother or sister’s. I would gladly subscribe my mite towards providing him with suitable nether habiliments, and I trust the matter will be taken up by our charitable public. Yours,

“PANTALOON”

21st September. P.S. – Since writing the above a friend has told me the object of my pity is a girl – this must be a joke.

While this letter may have been tongue in cheek, it expressed the general puzzlement. The act was clearly performative, and it happened daily, from 4-5pm. Above the conventional woman’s skirt was a man’s jacket, tie, hat, starched collar and even monocle. The hair was cropped: something prescribed for women suffering fever, but not flaunted in the street. One observer noted slangy speech, loud laughter, a bold gaze – all unwomanly behaviour.

At the time the very act of being a woman in public, rather than the idealised domestic Angel in the House, was considered daring. Walking the streets was a euphemism for prostitution, as with the French “faire le trottoir”.

The Boy-Girl proved a sensation in the colonial media. No known photographs survive, but there are Punch engravings. The first, from winter 1875, has the heading IN DRAG, and shows an Irish cop protesting: “If yez ain’t a man in female’s clothes, yez a male in man’s clothes …”

Edward De Lacy Evans (left) pictured with third wife, Julia Marquand (right). Wikipedia

A man in a woman’s dress faced being jailed in Pentridge. Gordon Lawrence, who co-blackmailed bestselling author Fergus Hume for the then-crime of homosexuality, was arrested in 1888 for “soliciting”, in a bustle outside the Melbourne Exhibition Building. He was sentenced to six months in prison, for vagrancy and “insulting behaviour”, a catch-all charge covering obscenity to prostitution.

In 1879, servant, blacksmith and gold miner Edward De Lacy Evans achieved worldwide fame when revealed to be a cross-dressing woman during their stay in an insane asylum.

The Boy-Girl proved a sensation in the colonial media. Punch/National Library/St Kilda History

The right to be sinful?

In the Boy-Girl’s case, any arrest would have been a major problem. The Boy-Girl’s father was one of the richest men in Melbourne. Kate Johnson, then 17, had been born in Mount Gambier, South Australia, to Archibald and Mary Johnson. Archibald, a Scots Presbyterian, had worked his way up from station overseer to pastoral magnate, with sufficient wealth to buy Stonnington, a major mansion, in his retirement. Of his large family, Kate was his favourite. She would promenade as the Boy-Girl for months.

Her act was primarily visual and she never commented on it publicly. An “interview” with Punch appeared under the heading “Practical Papers on Vice”. Though written with irony, it claimed the Boy-Girl wanted equality of the sexes and rights for women – including the right to be sinful. The journalist concluded the Boy-Girl would lead to a future race of Australian hermaphrodites.

One journalist concluded the Boy-Girl would lead to a future race of Australian hermaphrodites. National Library of Australia/St Kilda History

Others termed her “eccentric”, or claimed the stunt was to win a lucrative bet, though the Boy-Girl did not want for money. When she stopped, to grow her hair again and dress conventionally, it was to study music and drama, at professional level. In 1877, she took to the stage, a natural progression given that theatre was a liminal space regarding gender roles. Pantomime featured cross-dressers, with the Principal Boy (an actress) and the Widow Twankey, a caricature of femininity even more grotesque than Edna Everage.

It was an unusual move for a rich young lady, since actresses were regarded as being little less than whores, however glamorous. One journalist deplored her move, saying “we fathers and brothers” only wished to keep womenfolk pure, and “out of the sight of impurity”. Johnson played Kate in The Taming of the Shrew, to a packed house but poor notices. More successful were piano performances, where she showed both skill and brio.

What might have been a brilliant career came to a premature halt in February 1878. Kate died at Stonnington, of typhoid fever – the mansion had bad drains. Crowds lined the streets to watch her funeral cortege. Even journalists who had mocked her expressed sorrow.

Her grieving parents planned a memorial, of Carrara marble, 14 feet high, in Melbourne General Cemetery, with a portrait of Kate, and of her mother, weeping at the base. It never eventuated. Archibald died in 1881, with his will bitterly contested. A marble bust of Kate was completed. Once in the Victorian National Galley, its location is now unknown.

A ratbag radical journalist

Popular commentary on the Boy-Girl included an 1877 poem, printed in the sensational weekly Police News. Its editor, Richard Egan-Lee (1809-1879), was also a noted ratbag. During a busy and disreputable life, he was a printer, publisher, inventor and radical journalist. He had at least 12 children with four wives, likely involving bigamy. Egan-Lee was one of only two people sued successfully by Charles Dickens, for pirating A Christmas Carol. Insolvencies following, he emigrated in 1863 to Melbourne.

Typically, Victorians were fascinated by true crime, but Lee had personal experience. In 1866 he was sent to jail for 12 months, for stealing type. He emerged to work editorially on the popular fiction magazine the Australian Journal, but anonymously. His eight-year tenure overlapped with Marcus Clarke. One of Lee’s descendants recalled that Clarke wrote For the Term of His Natural Life in Lee’s office, which sounds inconvenient.

Observing the success of the US Police News, featuring sensational true crime, Lee produced his own Australian version. It featured not only crime but radical politics. He declared its mission as: “to drag forth into the light of day, more shams, frauds, and humbugs, than all the other papers put together […] ever since Victoria was a colony”. He added that Victorian society was “composed of the rankest duffers and the most consummate veneered hypocrites that can be found in any country”. From the law and legislature, to the police, press and the pulpit, “all is a mass of make-believe and mockery”.

His Police News was wildly popular. Lee sold 17,000 copies weekly: a huge circulation for the colonies. Part of the success was lurid illustrations, sourced from the public: Lee would ask crime witnesses to send in sketches, which he then had engraved in an innovative process he termed zincotype. The Age deplored his “literary garbage”, but he outsold it.

Small wonder he got sued, for obscenity, though the offending illustration merely showed a man and women drinking in a bar; he was also sued for libel. The magazine ran on a shoestring and indignation. It also displayed a fascination with strong women: revenging themselves on seducers, repelling burglars, even murdering.

Lee seems a proto-feminist. He devoted an editorial to “man’s inhumanity to women”. He was also a sympathetic editor to crime writer and journalist Mary Fortune, unlike the misogynistic Clarke.

The ‘wildly popular’ Police News sold 17,000 copies weekly. August 19, 1876. State Library of Victoria

Lee died of typhoid fever (like Kate Johnson), in 1879. Few copies of his magazine survive, but the unique art project of his Police News was the subject of an exhibition by noted artist Elizabeth Gertsakis in 2018.

A Jamaican Black activist

Our last ratbag, like Kate Johnson, appeared in Punch, where he was rendered with stereotypical racism, talking like Uncle Tom. His photograph shows formidable attitude, not least as a man of letters.

Daniel Henderson was an Afro-Jamaican author and activist. A journalist termed him “Henderson Africanus”, after the Roman general Scipio Africanus. Henderson proceeded to own the nickname, proudly adopting it as “an African Political General”.

Like the Boy-Girl, he made a public display, a celebrity selling newspapers in a huge white hat, but also giving speeches and campaigning via letters. He was politically active, a proud and loud Black man.

Afro-Jamaican author and activist Daniel Henderson was a politically active Black man in 19th-century Melbourne. State Library of Victoria

Daniel Ross Henderson was born in Kingston, Jamaica, son of Thomas, a cabinet-maker, and his wife Elizabeth. The family were politically engaged. Daniel was named for Daniel O'Connell, former Lord Mayor of Dublin, an activist for emancipation as well as Irish rights.

The formidable Elizabeth legally and vigorously fought a claim against her freedom, and favoured education for her son. Henderson would find advancement and mobility in the British Navy, which took men upon their worth, not race. That led him to emigrate to Australia. In 1880, he married a white woman, Aphra Lightbourne, of military background.

As a child, he had read the political section of newspapers aloud to his father and workmen. Now, he sold newspapers in Exhibition Street. The proximity to Parliament House was no accident. In 1868, government supply was blocked by the Victorian Legislative Council. Henderson responded with a 24-page pamphlet, Our Imbroglio: (The Crisis) and Our Way Out of It, which closely examined constitutional law. Ten years later, a similar crisis sent political leaders Sir Grahame Berry and Charles Pearson to appeal to London, personally.

The received wisdom is it was an Opposition joke that Henderson be proposed to accompany them. The magazine Table Talk, which had the best gossip, said Punch cartoonist Tom Carrington was behind it. Carrington knew Henderson was good copy. He denigrated him racially and politically in Punch, a Tory publication.

Truth was, Henderson had already argued the case articulately and well. Newspapers and the Bulletin would note Henderson was “really one of the founders of the great liberal party” (Premier Graham Berry’s party and in those days, radicals). He was a presence, a public intellectual, who just happened to be also a Black man. The degree of vilification he faced shows how much he challenged notions of nineteenth-century race. Although Henderson tried standing for parliament several times in the 1880s and 1890s, he was never pre-selected.

Instead, he devoted time to causes such as worker’s rights, the unemployed and men of colour in serious trouble with the law. The Public Record Office preserves many of his distinctive purple-inked letters, including to the police commissioner. One prompted an formal investigation into the case of Antoine Bollars, his lodger, who (with Gordon Lawrence) had blackmailed Fergus Hume. Bollars, also Afro-Jamaican, had been convicted of a homosexual indecent assault, which occurred under Henderson’s roof. It was an unspeakable crime, but Henderson had the courage to intervene.

He was cranky, a show-off, but with the wit and force of character to defy the contemporary strictures on Black people. When he died, of peritonitis, even Punch had to admit he was “a well-meaning and good fellow”.

Bloody minded, showy and bold

A teenage girl who pushed the public limits regarding accepted notions of gender. A radical journalist and inventor who crusaded against the blackguards of his colony in one of its most successful magazines. A politically active Black public intellectual.

They captured public attention, but after their deaths they were soon forgotten.

That they existed at all in their conservative era seems extraordinary – but that they persisted against the formidable opposition is a lesson in personal courage. It is also a lesson in the virtues of ratbaggery.

Let us celebrate those who go against the grain, for they have often have the uncomfortable tendency to be right. And we can learn a good deal from them that can be applied to our troubled times: not least the virtues of political performance art, and of being bloody minded, showy and bold.The Conversation

Lucy Sussex, Honorary Associate, Humanities and Social Science, La Trobe University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Vale Jack McCoy

July 31, 1948 - May 26, 2025

Our community is in mourning on hearing of the passing of one of our own and extends love to Jack's wife Kelly, children Cooper and Indiana, and grandchildren Makoha, Kalani, Cloudy, and Isabel.

Jack passed peacefully at home on Monday.

His family stated on Thursday, May 29:

The last couple of days have been a blur however the pain has been eased by the outpouring of tributes and stories being shared. It’s a testament to the amazing life he created and a reminder of how much he touched, moved and inspired so many people from every corner of the world. We thank you all from the bottom of our hearts.

In true Jack McCoy style, we’ll be organising a couple of celebrations in the coming months to allow those from far and wide to join us and pay their respects, beginning with a small paddle out at Scotts Head this Saturday for the local community and friends nearby.

The main ceremony / paddle out will be held at Avalon Beach on July 5th, and then we will return to Hawaii later this year to spread his ashes.

We invite all friends, family, the wider community and beyond to come and respectfully celebrate his amazing life.

Dress: Wear your favourite aloha shirt.

It’s been literally impossible to keep up with the sheer volume of posts and stories that have been shared - if you could please send any special pics and videos you may have to jackmccoyaloha@outlook.com so we can compose something special for the celebrations and our family at this time and forever.

Love, the McCoy ohana

Jack McCoy, who wrapped up two months of touring Blue Horizon for the 20th Anniversary of this award winning film on Saturday May 24th, reminded surf fans that it was he who fed Mark Foo the famous line, 'Eddie Would Go', and closed with a plea to go easy in the lineup, share the waves, and love your brothers and sisters - your brothers and sisters who are everywhere and present in everyone.

Every time any of us saw him out and about, Jack always had a big smile for you - he was about community, surfing, sharing the stoke - living every moment as best you can, and family.

More in this week's Profile: A Celebration of Jack McCoy

New research reveals ageist assumptions that “bleep” off older people

National Seniors Australia (NSA) has released new research into the annoying and contradictory assumptions made about older people.

More than 2,000 people aged 50+ shared their views on assumptions that annoy them about older people’s bodies, brains, values, lifestyles, and more.

Some people objected to the stereotypes of older people as frail and incapable, bad with technology, resentful of change, or unable to contribute to society.

Such assumptions were countered with comments about older people’s “enormous unpaid contribution to society and economy”, the fact they “still want to be a punk rocker”, or their “lifelong history of protest”.

Other people objected to the counter-stereotypes that older people are all fit, technology savvy, and excited about change. As one person wrote, “I feel that society is impatient with the slowness of older people.”

NSA Head of Research Dr Diane Hosking said the research reinforces older people are extremely diverse and while some are sharper and fitter than ever, others do need support and consideration.

“The research shows how ridiculous it is to make assumptions about people based on age,” Dr Hosking said.

Objections to assumptions about Baby Boomers were common as well. Such assumptions include the contradictory ideas that Baby Boomers hoard wealth or are conversely a “drain on the public purse”.

Some Baby Boomers shared stories of struggling financially during their lives – especially those who didn’t earn superannuation for much of their working lives because of their age, gender, or profession.

“Older people don’t stop being our diverse selves just because we age,” Dr Hosking said.

“More than a third of Australia’s population is aged 50+. Like any large group, it is full of very different people. We were different from each other when we were 20 and we’re still very different now.

“Part of recognising diversity in ageing is accepting that declines in body and mind can come with age and adapting to ensure new needs are met. It is also about respecting people’s values, preferences, and lifestyle expectations, and enabling people to age in the way that’s right for them.” 

History of Narrabeen: U3A Speaker

LOCAL HISTORIAN SUSAN JOY ALEXANDER WILL BE SPEAKING ABOUT “THE HISTORY OF NARRABEEN” AT 2PM ON 24TH JUNE, AT THE U3A MEETING AT THE TRAMSHED AT 1395A PITTWATER ROAD, NARRABEEN

Susan says: ''It is not surprising that I am so drawn to Narrabeen. In this photo of Narrabeen taken in 1888 from a ledge on Collaroy Plateau, I have been associated with all three of the buildings in the photo. I grew up in the one on the far right. The middle house is the heritage listed “Lemville” Circa 1860 where Markus and I lived for 30 years and the third is the original site of the Narrabeen Hotel, where “Setai” has been built and Markus and I have been residing for the past 11 years.



Narrabeen has an amazing history. Once I started researching, I was captivated.''

Please advise Marcia Andrews the convener of the meeting that you are coming for catering purposes. Afternoon tea will be provided. Visitors are required to give a Gold Coin donation.

The Avon Lady

May 28, 2025 from Omeleto
THE AVON LADY is used with permission from Carolina Espiro. Learn more at: carolinaespiro.com

Rosa is a 65-year-old Chilean immigrant who decides to become an Avon Lady, in part to practice her English and earn some extra money. But she's having a hard time getting into the swing of things, struggling with her pronunciation, her spiel and her confidence.

But then she meets a friendly eccentric neighbour, Matty, who is not only patient with Rosa but helps her with her presentation. Under Matty's tutelage, she blooms into the confident, joyful saleswoman she longs to be.

Directed and written by Carolina Espiro, this colourful, delightful short comedy chronicles the travails and triumphs of a senior immigrant woman embarking on a new challenge, as she ventures forth into the wider world to become an Avon Lady. Iconic in the 1980s as a symbol of feminine independence, Avon Ladies sold not just makeup but glamour and empowerment to their customers. But Rosa's need to get her English up to speed hampers her aspirations until she meets a friendly, cheerfully vivacious neighbour who teaches her the secret of success.

Letters to home care recipients to prepare for Support at Home

May 23, 2025
Letters to older people on a Home Care Package to prepare for the new Support at Home program.

The Australian Government Department of Health, Disability and Aging  are sending letters to older people who currently receive a Home Care Package to help them prepare for the new Support at Home program that starts on 1 July.

These letters include:
  • an overview of the Support at Home program
  • information on preparing a service agreement with their provider
  • a checklist detailing activities to help them prepare for the transition.
The letter they receive will depend on whether they were approved for a Home Care Package on or before 12 September 2024, or after.
Translated versions of the letters and checklist are also available at the above links.

Read some frequently asked questions about the letters for older people and providers.

New Australian data shows most of us have PFAS in our blood. How worried should we be?

New Africa/Shutterstock
Ian A. WrightWestern Sydney University

The Australian Bureau of Statistics (ABS) has this week released new data which tells us about the presence of per- and polyfluoroalkyl substances (PFAS) in Australians’ bodies.

The data comes from concentrations measured in blood samples of nearly 7,000 people aged 12 and over, collected as part of the National Health Measures Survey for 2022–24.

The findings are concerning, showing PFAS are detectable in the vast majority of the Australian population, to varying levels.

But are they cause for alarm? What do these findings mean for our health?

‘Forever chemicals’

PFAS, often called “forever chemicals”, are a group of thousands of different human-made chemicals. The molecular structure of PFAS chemicals – characterised by extremely strong bonds between carbon and fluorine atoms – makes PFAS resistant to degradation.

Many PFAS products are very effective for their resistance to water, oil, grease and stains, while others promote foaming. Since the 1940s, PFAS chemicals have been widely used in many consumer and industry products, such as non-stick pans, stain-resistant fabrics and firefighting foam.

One of the downsides of PFAS is their potential to bioaccumulate, or gradually build up in the body.

Important exposure pathways include ingestion of PFAS in drinking water, in food, or absorption through the skin. Absorption of small amounts progressively builds up in the organs of people and animals, particularly the liver.

Exposure to PFAS is associated with a heightened risk of many adverse health outcomes. These include reduced fertility, and increased risk of some cancers, liver disease, kidney disease, high cholesterol and obesity.

Digging into the data

The ABS data measured 11 types of PFAS. The group of PFAS chemicals they selected reflects the most commonly detected forms from previous studies. The concentration of PFAS chemicals is measured in blood serum in nanograms per millilitre (ng/mL).

Three types of PFAS were detected in the blood of more than 85% of Australians, while the remainder were detected in lower proportions of people.

The type of PFAS most commonly detected in blood was perfluorooctanesulfonic acid (PFOS). It was found in 98.6% of samples.

PFOS accumulation has been a major problem in firefighters. Many were exposed occupationally to PFOS, sometimes for decades, and many suffered an unusually high incidence of disease, including a suspected cancer cluster.

The below graph shows the level of PFOS increases with age. This could be because it accumulates in the body over time, and because many types of PFOS are being phased out. From 2004 its use in firefighting was phased out by major users, such as the Department of Defence.

PFOS was also found to be higher in males – research shows PFAS is excreted more rapidly in females, including through menstruation and breastfeeding.

The second most commonly detected type of PFAS detected in Australian blood samples was perfluorooctanoic acid (PFOA), in 96.1% of samples. PFOA has recently been classified by the World Health Organization as a group 1 carcinogen, meaning it’s a recognised cancer-causing agent.

The third most commonly detected type of PFAS was perfluorohexane sulfonic acid (PFHxS), which was detected in 88.1% of samples.

So what are the implications?

The National Health Measures Survey identified a relationship between higher mean PFOS levels and markers of chronic disease including high total cholesterol levels, diabetes and kidney function.

However, it’s important to note this is only 7,000 people, and the data were weighted to be representative of the Australian population. There may be other factors, such as lifestyle or occupation, that have influenced the results.

While these findings may be concerning, they’re not cause for alarm. The scientific evidence more broadly doesn’t tell us conclusively whether concentrations of PFAS equivalent to those seen in the current data would have a direct effect on disease outcomes.

Some good news is that overall, this data suggests we have less PFAS in our blood compared to people in other countries.

Why this data is important

The ABS report provides the most detailed national baseline data on PFAS in the Australian population to date.

While many people are concerned about PFAS, some Australian communities have been particularly worried.

For example, in August 2024 it was revealed that a water filtration plant in the Blue Mountains contained substantial concentrations of PFAS. This was probably due to a major petrol tanker crash in 1992 and residual effects of PFAS from firefighting foam used to respond to that incident.

While people can have a blood sample taken to measure PFAS levels, it’s very expensive. NSW Health advises PFAS testing is not covered by Medicare or private health insurance.

Reports are emerging of Blue Mountains residents that have paid for blood testing getting very high concentrations of PFAS. These ABS results will help people who do receive blood testing assess how their results compare with typical results of a person of the same age and sex. People with concerns should consult a medical professional.

The ABS data will also be valuable for medical practitioners and public health authorities, providing important information to guide the management of PFAS contamination and its potential health effects.The Conversation

Ian A. Wright, Associate Professor in Environmental Science, Western Sydney University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Can your cat recognise you by scent? New study shows it’s likely

Julia HenningUniversity of Adelaide

Ever wonder if your cat could pick you out of a line up?

New research suggests they could … but maybe not in the way you would expect.

Previous research has found that only 54% of cats could recognise humans by their face alone.

So how does your cat know it’s you?

Studying the sniff

A new study published today in PLOS One suggests your cat can recognise you by your smell. This feat has not been studied before and may reveal another layer of depth within cat-human bonds.

Cats often get a bad rap for being aloof or uncaring about the people in their lives, but a growing number of studies are finding the opposite to be true. We now know that cats learn the names we give them, cats and their guardians form their own communication style, and most cats will pick human social interaction over food, a choice even dogs struggle with.

And now, thanks to this most recent study, we know that cats can identify their people by smell, something they also rely on to identify their close feline social groups.

The study, by Yutaro Miyairi and colleagues at Tokyo University of Agriculture, investigated the ability of 30 cats to differentiate between their guardian and an unknown person based on scent alone.

Cats in the study were presented with a plastic tube containing swab samples from under the armpit, behind the ear and between the toes of either the cat’s guardian or of a human they had never met. As a control, cats were also presented with an empty plastic tube.

The results?

Cats in the study spent longer sniffing the scent of an unknown person compared to the scent of their guardian or the empty tube.

A shorter sniffing time suggests that when cats came across the smell of their guardian, they recognised it quickly and moved along. But when they came to the swabs from an unknown person, the cat sniffed longer, using their superior sense of smell to gather information about the scent.

Similar patterns have been observed previously, with kittens sniffing the odour of unknown female cats longer than the odour of their own mother, and adult cats sniffing the faeces of unfamiliar cats longer than those within their social group.

The findings of this new study may indicate that we, too, are in our cats’ social circle.

Two cats in cardboard boxes with a black tuxie sniffing a ginger cat.
Cats do use their sense of smell to tell apart familiar and unfamiliar cats. Chris Boyer/Unsplash

The brain and the nose

The study also found a tendency for cats to sniff familiar scents with their left nostril, while unknown scents were more often sniffed using their right. But when cats became familiar with a scent after sniffing for a while, they switched nostrils from the right to the left.

While this may sound like an odd finding, it’s a pattern that has also been observed in dogs. Current research suggests this nostril preference may indicate that cats process and classify new information using their right brain hemisphere, while the left hemisphere takes over when a routine response is established.

Close-up of the amber nose of a silver tabby cat.
Cats will sniff things with different nostrils depending on whether the information is familiar or not. Kevin Knezic/Unsplash

Why scent?

Cats rely on scent to gather information about the world around them and to communicate.

Scent exchange (through cheek-to-cheek rubbing and grooming each other) is used as a way to recognise cats in the same social circle, maintain group cohesion, and identify unfamiliar cats or other animals that may pose a threat or need to be avoided.

Familiar scents can also be comforting to cats, reducing stress and anxiety and creating a sense of security within their environment.

When you come back from a holiday, if you notice your cat being distant and acting like you’re a total stranger, it might be because you smell like one. Try taking a shower using your usual home products and put on some of your regular home clothing. The familiar scents should help you and your cat settle back into your old dynamic sooner.

And remember, if your cat spends a lot of time sniffing someone else, it’s not because they prefer them. It’s likely because your scent is familiar and requires less work. Instead of being new and interesting, it might do something even better: help your cat feel at home.The Conversation

Julia Henning, PhD Candidate in Feline Behaviour, School of Animal and Veterinary Science, University of Adelaide

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

‘Not a saint’: Florence Nightingale, heroic founder of modern nursing, is humanised in a new novel

Caitlin MacdonaldUniversity of Sydney

Florence Nightingale is often described as the founder of modern nursing. She was immortalised in Henry Wadsworth Longfellow’s 1857 poem, Santa Filomena: “A noble type of good / Heroic Womanhood.” For over a century, she has been remembered as “the lady with the lamp”, moving through the wards of war hospitals.

In Laura Elvery’s debut novel, Nightingale, she is something else entirely. She is not the symbol, but the woman – not solely the caregiver, but a patient, child and sister. It opens with an epigraph from T.S. Eliot’s Little Gidding:

We shall not cease from exploration
And the end of all our exploring
Will be to arrive where we started
And know the place for the first time.

This idea of seeing the familiar in a new light mirrors the novel’s structure and spirit. Nightingale is not a linear biography, nor a detailed account of Nightingale’s public accomplishments. It is a quiet meditation on memory, and on care and the ways it marks a life.


Review: Nightingale – Laura Elvery (UQP)


Death from poor hygiene and neglect

The novel is told in three parts across two timelines. It opens in Mayfair, London, in 1910. Florence is 90, frail and close to death. Her housekeeper, Mabel, watches over her as she drifts between moments of lucidity and memories of her past. The figure who once helped to transform military hospitals reflects on her frailty, and on Mabel’s care for her. She recalls her old instructions:

Use a clear, firm voice so the patient hears you the first time. Do not ask a patient to turn their head towards you. Let the light in. Ventilate the room. Clean the utensils. Change the sheets yourself and do it quickly, without comment.

Florence Nightingale. Henry Hering, National Portrait Gallery/Wikipedia

These directions reflect Nightingale’s ethos: that death came not only from bullets, but from poor hygiene, infection and administrative neglect. Elvery hints at Nightingale’s broader impact – her work on sanitation, hospital reform and data collection – not through exposition, but through the quiet authority of her voice and the awe she commands among doctors, nurses and soldiers alike.

On her final day, Nightingale receives a visit from Silas Bradley, a former soldier whose presence unsettles both her and the reader. As Part One ends, Silas asks, “What did Jean do to me?” The question will continue to haunt the novel.

Jean Frawley, a young nurse serving under Nightingale (or “Miss N”) during the Crimean War (1853–56), is introduced in the novel’s second part. In Marseilles, on her way to Scutari, Jean meets Silas. Their brief encounter sets up a romantic subplot that runs throughout.

But this thread is also one of the novel’s weakest. Jean is introduced as capable and competent, but her story becomes dominated by her feelings for Silas. Her longing for him seems out of proportion and out of step with the more grounded scenes surrounding it. The emotional arc feels less earned, compared to the stark realism of the hospital scenes.

Laura Elvery hints at Florence Nightingale’s wider impact through the awe she commands among doctors, nurses and soldiers. Joe Ruckli/UQP

Vivid hospital scenes

The focus soon shifts to Scutari (part of what is now Istanbul) in 1854, and an overcrowded, filthy and overwhelmed hospital. This is the novel’s strongest section: vivid, harrowing and sharply observed.

Jean’s voice brings urgency to the everyday horrors she witnesses: “Whimpering men lay on stuffed sacks on every side of every corridor, keeping company with the rats, the roaches, the maggots.” Supplies are short, medical tools are rudimentary, nurses are exhausted. The men are dying. In this world, care is emotional work.

Elvery, known for her short-story collections Ordinary Matter and Trick of the Light, brings a lyrical, sensory style to these scenes. Her descriptions are rich with visceral, sensory detail of rats, maggots, blood and chloroform.

But the focus isn’t on historical accuracy for its own sake. Elvery is more interested in the interiority of her characters, in the psychic and bodily toll of caregiving. She doesn’t dwell on dates or battles. Instead, she focuses on what caregiving feels like: its cost, its mess and its strange intimacy.

They asked the girls to kiss them, to write for them, to tell them jokes […] One soldier asked Jean to breathe in time with him.

One of the most moving scenes comes after the war, in 1861, when Jean visits a Crimean War memorial in London. She sees “on a plinth, the figure of a cloaked woman […] arms outstretched”.

Jean expects to feel pride or recognition. Instead, she finds the statue unfamiliar. “Perhaps it was a goddess,” she thinks, noticing the “haloes of leaves that circled her wrists.” She recalls the words of the tailor who sold her her uniform: “Women can’t imagine that sort of suffering.”

The scene captures a key question in the book: who is remembered, and in what form?

Resisting mythmaking

Elvery resists mythmaking. Her Nightingale is not a saint, but a woman forged in complexity: brilliant, stubborn, sometimes difficult. The novel invites us to see her not as a symbol, but as a person shaped by illness, desire, pain and time. Nightingale is not just a novel about Florence Nightingale, or about nursing. It’s about the physical and emotional labour of care, and the people whose work often goes unnoticed.

Part Three returns to 1910 and Nightingale’s final moments. But Nightingale is not the centre of her own story. Jean’s narrative forms the novel’s emotional core, and her connection to Silas drives more of the plot than Nightingale’s recollections. In this way, Elvery shifts focus, both structurally and thematically, away from a single figure – and toward the quieter, often invisible work of caregiving itself.

In a time when the cost of care – whether in hospitals, homes, or war zones – is so visible, Nightingale feels timely. Elvery asks what it means to nurse, and to be nursed. Her novel honours the messy, human particulars of caregiving, even as it gestures toward the legacy of a woman who reshaped its very foundations.The Conversation

Caitlin Macdonald, PhD candidate, Faculty of Arts and Social Sciences, University of Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Avalon Computer Pals turns 25

Avalon Computer Pals for Seniors (Avpals) has marked 25 years teaching local seniors how to use computers and related technology.

Community interest in learning to use computers resulted in a meeting at Avalon Recreation Centre on 19 January 2000 organised by Nan Bosler, a founder of a similar club at Narrabeen. The meeting appointed a steering committee of volunteers, and premises at Maria Regina (Catholic) Church Hall were obtained.
 
The first public meeting was chaired by David Bennett on 15 April. It elected a committee, and eleven trainers joined up. Lessons commenced on 1 May 2000. Originally 58 students were enrolled, and by 3 July there were 86. Financial support was provided by Pittwater Council and Avalon RSL
 
The aim of the club was written up by Judith Morrissey in “Information for Members”. It is relevant today. “Senior citizens have many reasons for wanting to be computer literate. Computers are used widely in today’s society. We can communicate with members of our family travelling anywhere in the world by email. We can manage our finances on computer, write our life histories and participate with our grandchildren who are using computers. The list is endless. Our aim is to assist seniors by removing barriers and de-mystifying this area of modern life.”
 
When Avpals began, two students at a time sat in front of a club computer with a trainer for an hour’s weekly lesson. There were no smartphones or tablets and few laptops. Even the internet was in its infancy. Today, the club continues to teach students at the Avalon Catholic Church for weekly lessons one-on-one. Nearly all students bring their own devices, and trainers tailor the lesson content to the students’ particular needs.
 
In 2012, Avpals broadened its activities to provide lectures and small-group workshops at the Newport Community Centre one afternoon a week during school terms. These have proved very popular and cover topics such as iPhones, photography, internet security, travelling with technology, and many others.
 
Fees are very affordable, at $50 for a ten-week term one-on-one and $10 or $15 for Newport workshops. Some lectures are free.
 
Avpals president Jim Carmichael said, “Minutes from a meeting in 2007 suggested that Avpals may be dying, with student numbers in steady decline. But since then, with new technologies, new applications, worries about security and curiosity about AI, our numbers have recovered, and both the Avalon and Newport activities are thriving. It looks like Avpals will be around for a while yet.”
 
Avpals is always looking for new students and trainers. 
 
Details are available at the website avpals.com and on the club’s Facebook page. There is a weekly newsletter for people on the mailing list.


Photo: Avpals trainer Saskia Zaitzieff delivering a lesson at the Newport Community Centre.

AvPals 25th Year: Term Two Newport Sessions

You can book in and pay for sessions at Newport via the AvPals shop.

Avalon Computer Pals (AVPALS) helps seniors learn and improve their computer and technology skills. Avpals is a not for profit organisation run by volunteers. Since 2000, we have helped thousands of seniors from complete beginners to people who need to improve or update their skills. We offer “one to one” personal tuition or special short courses. 

Small class workshops are run at the Newport Community Centre on Tuesday afternoons.

One-to-one training is provided at our rooms in Avalon, under the Maria Regina Catholic Church, 7 Central Road, Avalon.

Join us in learning 'how to' in our 25th year!

The AvPals shop for Newport short sessions is HERE
The rest of this terms workshop offerings are:

Avalon Beach Historical Society June 2025 Meeting

The next meeting of the Society will be held on TUESDAY 10 JUNE in the usual venue – the ANNEXE in the north-west corner of Dunbar Park and will start at 8pm.

Unfortunately our planned guest speaker is unable to attend so we have a series of surprises to keep you well and truly entertained and more importantly, historically satisfied.

Over our many years, and with our esteemed photographic wizard (aka John Stone) we have amassed a great compilation of appropriate film and video historic clips.

We are going to take you to a folk song concert in St. Michael’s Cave in 1964 and we’ll join A. J. Small in 1932 behind the viewfinder of his movie camera as he films ‘AvaPutt’, his mini-golf course. You’ll also witness his son Geoff, as he sets out the flags to begin patrolling on Avalon Beach after successfully obtaining his Bronze Medallion in the first squad in January 1926.

In 2015 we shared some of our classic photos from our archives which were transformed into a unique video/film presentation called ‘Creative Features’ as part of the Film Festival of the same name.

We will also share with you the sad demise of the classic art-deco Beacon Store at Palm Beach when the ‘rights’ to burn it to the ground were ‘sold’ by the Council to Home and Away.

We couldn’t let you go without the promised last meeting of a local excerpt from ‘Skippy’ and yet another glimpse of the stunning ‘Elephants on Avalon Beach’ by our local resident Jae Morrison.

A big ‘Thanks’ to the 13 members who supported David Elfick in his quest to get a reasonable outcome for the DA on the site to the north of his mighty ‘Palladium’. He has an update for us in General Business.

Geoff Searl OAM
President Avalon Beach Historical Society

Celebrating 50 Years of Friendly at the Avalon Bulldogs

Join us as we honour a true club legend – Friendly – and his incredible 50 years of service to the Avalon Bulldogs.

Let’s come together to celebrate a lifetime of coaching, mentoring, and unwavering dedication that has shaped the heart of our club and community.
  • 📅 Date: Saturday, 21st June 2025
  • 🕖 Time: TBC
  • 📍 Location: Avalon Bulldogs Clubhouse, Hitchcock Park, Avalon
  • 🍴 Food & Drinks: BBQ + bar open, family-friendly
  • 🎤 Speeches, Stories & Surprises – plus a few laughs along the way!
Whether you’re a past or present player, parent, volunteer, or friend – everyone is welcome. Let’s show our appreciation for Friendly and celebrate this remarkable milestone together.
One club. One legend. 50 years of loyalty.

More details to come, but we can’t wait to see you there!

There’s a new COVID variant driving up infections. A virologist explains what to know about NB.1.8.1

VioletaStoimenova/Getty Images
Lara HerreroGriffith University

As we enter the colder months in Australia, COVID is making headlines again, this time due to the emergence of a new variant: NB.1.8.1.

Last week, the World Health Organization designated NB.1.8.1 as a “variant under monitoring”, owing to its growing global spread and some notable characteristics which could set it apart from earlier variants.

So what do you need to know about this new variant?

The current COVID situation

More than five years since COVID was initially declared a pandemic, we’re still experiencing regular waves of infections.

It’s more difficult to track the occurrence of the virus nowadays, as fewer people are testing and reporting infections. But available data suggests in late May 2025, case numbers in Australia were ticking upwards.

Genomic sequencing has confirmed NB.1.8.1 is among the circulating strains in Australia, and generally increasing. Of cases sequenced up to May 6 across Australia, NB.1.8.1 ranged from less than 10% in South Australia to more than 40% in Victoria.

Wastewater surveillance in Western Australia has determined NB.1.8.1 is now the dominant variant in wastewater samples collected in Perth.

Internationally NB.1.8.1 is also growing. By late April 2025, it comprised roughly 10.7% of all submitted sequences – up from just 2.5% four weeks prior. While the absolute number of cases sequenced was still modest, this consistent upward trend has prompted closer monitoring by international public health agencies.

NB.1.8.1 has been spreading particularly in Asia – it was the dominant variant in Hong Kong and China at the end of April.

A graphic showing the evolution of NB.1.8.1.
Lara Herrero, created using BioRender

Where does this variant come from?

According to the WHO, NB.1.8.1 was first detected from samples collected in January 2025.

It’s a sublineage of the Omicron variant, descending from the recombinant XDV lineage. “Recombinant” is where a new variant arises from the genetic mixing of two or more existing variants.

The image to the right shows more specifically how NB.1.8.1 came about.

What does the research say?

Like its predecessors, NB.1.8.1 carries a suite of mutations in the spike protein. This is the protein on the surface of the virus that allows it to infect us – specifically via the ACE2 receptors, a “doorway” to our cells.

The mutations include T22N, F59S, G184S, A435S, V445H, and T478I. It’s early days for this variant, so we don’t have much data on what these changes mean yet. But a recent preprint (a study that has not yet been peer reviewed) offers some clues about why NB.1.8.1 may be gathering traction.

Using lab-based models, researchers found NB.1.8.1 had the strongest binding affinity to the human ACE2 receptor of several variants tested – suggesting it may infect cells more efficiently than earlier strains.

The study also looked at how well antibodies from vaccinated or previously infected people could neutralise or “block” the variant. Results showed the neutralising response of antibodies was around 1.5 times lower to NB.1.8.1 compared to another recent variant, LP.8.1.1.

This means it’s possible a person infected with NB.1.8.1 may be more likely to pass the virus on to someone else, compared to earlier variants.

What are the symptoms?

The evidence so far suggests NB.1.8.1 may spread more easily and may partially sidestep immunity from prior infections or vaccination. These factors could explain its rise in sequencing data.

But importantly, the WHO has not yet observed any evidence it causes more severe disease compared to other variants.

Reports suggest symptoms of NB.1.8.1 should align closely with other Omicron subvariants.

Common symptoms include sore throat, fatigue, fever, mild cough, muscle aches and nasal congestion. Gastrointestinal symptoms may also occur in some cases.

An illustration of SARS-CoV-2, the virus that causes COVID.
COVID is continuing to evolve. Joannii/Shutterstock

How about the vaccine?

There’s potential for this variant to play a significant role in Australia’s winter respiratory season. Public health responses remain focused on close monitoring, continued genomic sequencing, and promoting the uptake of updated COVID boosters.

Even if neutralising antibody levels are modestly reduced against NB.1.8.1, the WHO has noted current COVID vaccines should still protect against severe disease with this variant.

The most recent booster available in Australia and many other countries targets JN.1, from which NB.1.8.1 is descended. So it makes sense it should still offer good protection.

Ahead of winter and with a new variant on the scene, now may be a good time to consider another COVID booster if you’re eligible. For some people, particularly those who are medically vulnerable, COVID can still be a serious disease.The Conversation

Lara Herrero, Associate Professor and Research Leader in Virology and Infectious Disease, Griffith University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Google is going ‘all in’ on AI. It’s part of a troubling trend in big tech

Zena AssaadAustralian National University

Google recently unveiled the next phase of its artificial intelligence (AI) journey: “AI mode”.

This new feature will soon be released as a new option to users of Google’s search engine in the United States, with no timeline yet for the rest of the world. The company says it will be akin to having a conversation with an expert well versed on a wide range of topics.

This is just one of many steps Google is taking in pursuit of its “all-in” approach to AI.

The “all-in” approach extends beyond just integrating the technology into different applications. Google is providing products all along the AI supply chain – a process known as “vertical integration” – housing everything from AI computer chips through to the user interfaces we interact with on a daily basis, such as Google maps or Gmail.

Google isn’t the only AI company with ambitions of vertical integration. For example, OpenAI recently acquired a hardware startup co-founded by Apple’s Jony Ive, which will centralise hardware development within the company. Amazon is taking similar steps. It owns cloud computing platforms, custom chips, device plans and is incorporating more AI services into products.

This may be the beginning of a trend of vertical integration across big tech. And it could have significant implications for users and companies alike.

The AI ‘tech stack’

Hardware, software, data sources, databases and servers are some of the layers that make up what is commonly referred to as the “AI tech stack”.

There are four main layers to Google’s evolving vertical tech stack:

1. Hardware layerGoogle develops its own AI chips, known as tensor processing units (TPUs). The company claims these chips provide superior performance and efficiency compared to general purpose processors.

2. Infrastructure layer. The company uses its own cloud infrastructure to source its computing power, networking and storage requirements. This infrastructure is the foundation for running and scaling AI capabilities.

3. Model development layer. In-house research capabilities are used to drive the development of their products and services. This includes research around machine learning, robotics, language models and computer vision.

4. Data layer. Data is constantly sourced from users across all Google platforms, including its search engine, maps and email. Data collection is a condition of using any Google application.

Some argue vertical integration is an optimal and cost-effective business strategy in many industries, not just tech. However, the realities of this set-up prove otherwise.

A blue, red, yellow and green Google sign on a building roof.
Google is seeking to become a vertically integrated AI company. RYO Alexandre/Shutterstock

Fuelling power imbalances

Google and OpenAI are two of just a handful of companies which dominate the global technology market.

Thanks to this market dominance, these companies can charge higher markups for their goods and services and abuse practices in online advertising.

Vertical integration further skews this power imbalance by centralising the layers of the AI tech stack to one company. A distribution of hardware, infrastructure, research and development and data across multiple industries helps support a more equitable playing field across the industry.

The loss of this equity creates greater barriers to entry for smaller companies as the larger conglomerates keep everything in-house.

It also reduces incentives to innovate in ways that benefit consumers because it eliminates the business competition that usually drives innovation.

Data is often described as the new gold. This is especially true in the case of AI, which is heavily reliant on data. Through its many platforms, Google has access to a continuous stream of data. In turn, this gives the company even more power in the industry.

A large Amazon sign outside a glass building.
Other tech companies such as Amazon are moving towards vertical integration in the AI sector. ACHPF/Shutterstock

The vulnerabilities of vertical integration

The success of a company that is vertically integrated relies on housing the best knowledge and expertise in-house. Retaining this level of resourcing within a small handful of companies can lead to knowledge and expertise hoarding.

Research shows knowledge and expertise hoarding reduces social learning and increases disparities between “winners” and “losers” in a given market. This creates an overall vulnerable industry, because net gains are lost in the pursuit of exclusivity.

Exclusivity also breeds a lack of resilience. That’s because the points of failure are centralised.

Risk is better managed with additional oversight, transparency and accountability. Collaborations across industry rely on these processes to work together effectively.

Centralising the AI tech stack within one organisation eliminates external scrutiny, because it reduces interactions with external providers of products and services. In turn this can lead to a company behaving in a more risky manner.

Regulatory bodies can also provide external scrutiny.

However, the current push to deregulate AI is widening the gap between technology development and regulation.

It is also allowing for big tech companies to become increasingly opaque. A lack of transparency raises issues about organisational practices; in the context of AI, practices around data are of particular concern.

The trend towards vertical integration in the AI sector will further increase this opacity and heighten existing issues around transparency.The Conversation

Zena Assaad, Senior Lecturer, School of Engineering, Australian National University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Avalon Beach SLSC turns 100 in 2025!

2025 marks 100 years of Avalon Beach Surf Lifesaving Club.

Planning is underway to celebrate the achievement of Avalon Beach SLSC's Volunteer Surf Lifesavers keeping Avalon Beach safe for residents and visitors for 100 years!

A number of celebratory events and activities spread throughout the Club's 100th year, are currently under development, and will be progressively announced through the year. 

The range of celebrations will involve past and present members, the Avalon Beach community, as well as visitors to our area.  The Surf Club is a focal point in and for the Avalon Beach community, so it is fitting that the community takes pride in this milestone.

Initially, so that our records are up to date, we invite all past members of our Club to Email the Club at 100years@avalonbeachslsc.com.au  with your updated details so we can keep you informed of what will be happening for members.

If you know of others that may be interested in the 100th Anniversary celebrations please pass the message on. 

The Club looks to the future, acknowledging and building on the legacy left from those who came before us over the past 100 years.

Avalon Beach SLSC Centenary Committee

Protecting workers compensation for future generations

May 27, 2025
The Minns Labor Government has announced it will today (Tuesday May 27 2025) introduce a bill to Parliament to reform the way the NSW workers compensation system deals with psychological injury.

The government states the reforms will address the lack of focus on preventing psychological injury, the low rate of recovery and return to work for psychological injuries, and arrest the sharp rise in premiums.

As well as changes within the system, a Workplace Mental Health package with $344 million in new funding will provide additional measures to support mental health in the workplace, including:
  • SafeWork funding for injury prevention, with more than 50 new inspectors specialising in psychological injury
  • wraparound psychological support services for people navigating the claims process
  • WH&S compliance and enforcement to strengthen psychosocial hazard prevention
  • eight weeks’ income and medical/vocational support to access immediate support.
The Workers Compensation Legislation Amendment Bill 2025 has been informed by consultation within unions and experts, including the release of an exposure draft and a parliamentary inquiry.

The final bill to Parliament includes a range of refinements to proposals that were contained in the exposure draft, including:

  • adding 'excessive work demands' as a new compensable cause of psychological injury
  • an expedited 8-week claims assessment process for psychological injuries caused by bullying or harassment
    • this is instead of a requirement to have a finding in the IRC or FWC
    • workers will still have the right to seek IRC intervention for bullying and harassment, whether they are injured or not
  • introducing commutations to allow psychologically injured workers with a Whole Person Impairment (WPI) of 30 per cent or below to access a lump sum before their weekly payments cease
  • a gradual increase to the WPI measure to determine weekly payments for life, rising to 25 per cent from October 2025 and greater than 30 per cent from 1 July 2026
  • clarifying language around 'vicarious trauma' as a compensable event
  • supporting prevention by including stronger workplace health and safety powers in the jurisdiction of the IRC
  • reducing legal costs with new requirements that any scheme-funded lawyers must be acting in the interests of workers and be judged to have a reasonable prospect of success.
This reform will enable the Minns Labor Government to protect the workers compensation system for future generations of workers across NSW.

Combined with the new Workplace Mental Health funding package, the reform creates a modernised scheme that can better protect workers from psychological injury and more effectively support them when injury does occur.

Currently, half of workers with psychological injury claims return to work within the first year. The average cost of these claims has jumped $100,000 in five years to almost $300,000, and businesses are facing a 36 per cent increase to workers compensation premiums.

Treasurer Daniel Mookhey said:

“We are creating a modern system that will better protect workers from psychological injury and provide better help when they need it.

“I want to ensure that future generations of workers across NSW have a workers compensation system they can rely on.

“As the workplace evolves, our capacity to support people in it must adapt accordingly.”

Industrial Relations Minister Sophie Cotsis said:

“The Minns Labor Government is committed to strengthening a culture of prevention, early intervention, recovery and effective return to work through a series of reforms. 

“These include major reforms to SafeWork NSW, including investing in more inspectors to focus on psychosocial harm prevention and industrial relations reforms that establish a 'stop bullying' jurisdiction.

“Additionally, we have amended the iCare Act to include a principal objective focused on promoting early and appropriate treatment and care for injury and illness. This aims to optimise recovery, support return to work and daily activities, and ensure a sustainable compensation system.

“Thank you to all who contributed submissions to the consultative process for their practical and considered responses. We particularly acknowledge the trade union movement, as we work together to reach our shared goal of a better, more sustainable system for injured workers.”

Minister for Customer Service Jihad Dib said:

“These changes are aimed at sustaining our workers compensation scheme for the long term as we scale up prevention efforts and wraparound support services for people navigating the claims process.

“We need a system that continues to support injured workers and helps them recover as quickly as possible so they can return to their lives.”

Captain Cook College, Site Group and Blake Wills to pay total penalties of $30.4 million for unconscionable conduct towards students

Tuesday May 27, 2025
The Federal Court has today ordered vocational college Captain Cook College to pay penalties of $20 million for engaging in systemic unconscionable conduct and $750,000 for making false or misleading representations to students in connection with online diploma courses under the former VET FEE-HELP loan program.

The College, which received tens of millions of dollars of Federal Government funding, removed consumer safeguards from its enrolment and withdrawal processes from 7 September 2015.

The removal of these safeguards meant that thousands of students incurred substantial debts, despite the fact they were not engaging with their courses.

As a result of Captain Cook College’s actions, about 5,500 affected consumers were left with VET FEE-HELP debts, totalling over $60 million. The vast majority of them failed to complete any part of their course, and around 86 per cent never even logged in to their online course. The Government ultimately waived the VET FEE-HELP debts of affected Captain Cook College students and withheld some of the payments from the college.

“Captain Cook College’s conduct not only cost taxpayers tens of millions of dollars, but it also caused distress to the thousands of consumers enrolled in their courses who for many years were told they had significant debts to the Government,” ACCC Chair Gina Cass-Gottlieb said.

The Court also imposed penalties of $10 million on Captain Cook College’s parent company, Site Group International Limited (Site), and $400,000 on Blake Wills (Site’s former COO), who were knowingly concerned in Captain Cook College’s system of unconscionable conduct.

The Court also disqualified Mr Wills from managing corporations for three years.

Today’s decision comes after two unsuccessful appeals by Captain Cook College, Site and Mr Wills against the systemic unconscionable conduct findings.

“We are pleased with this outcome which sends a message to all businesses, including those seeking to obtain government funding, that they must comply with the laws which protect consumers. The judgment also shows the ACCC’s determination to pursue individuals in appropriate cases,” Ms Cass-Gottlieb said.

The Court also made a costs order in favour of the ACCC.

In June 2020, as part of a settlement with the ACCC, former Captain Cook College CEO Ian Cook admitted that he was knowingly concerned in Captain Cook College’s system of unconscionable conduct. The Court disqualified Mr Cook from managing corporations for three years and ordered that he pay $250,000 in penalties and contribute towards the ACCC’s costs.

Background
Productivity Partners Pty Ltd trading as Captain Cook College was a provider of online VET FEE-HELP diploma courses.

Captain Cook College was established in 1998 and was acquired by Site Group in 2014. It ceased substantive trading at the end of 2016.

Site and several subsidiaries entered into voluntary administration in March 2025. Administrators have been appointed to Site and Captain Cook College.

The ACCC commenced proceedings against Captain Cook College, Site Group, Ian Cook (the former CEO of Captain Cook College) and Mr Wills in November 2018.

In July 2021 the Federal Court found that Captain Cook College engaged in a system of unconscionable conduct and made false or misleading representations to prospective students in relation to online diploma courses following contested proceedings. The Federal Court found that Mr Wills and Site Group were knowingly concerned in Captain Cook College’s system of unconscionable conduct.

In April 2023, the Full Federal Court upheld the majority of these findings following an appeal by Captain Cook College, Site Group and Mr Wills.

In May 2023, Captain Cook College, Site Group and Mr Wills appealed to the High Court which dismissed the appeal in August 2024.

The ACCC and the Commonwealth have previously obtained judgments in relation to educational colleges against Unique International College, Cornerstone Investment Aust Pty Ltd (trading as Empower Institute), Australian Institute of Professional Education and Acquire Learning. The ACCC was also awarded record penalties of $438 million against Phoenix Institute of Australia Pty Ltd and its marketing arm Community Training Initiatives Pty Ltd.

VET FEE-HELP was an Australian Government loan program that assisted eligible students to pay their tuition fees for higher level vocational education and training (VET) courses at the diploma level and above, undertaken at approved VET FEE-HELP providers. The program was replaced by VET Student Loans from 1 January 2017.

Corroboree 2000, 25 years on: the march for Indigenous reconciliation has left a complicated legacy

Heidi NormanUNSW Sydney and Anne Maree PayneUNSW Sydney

First Nations people please be advised this article speaks of racially discriminating moments in history, including the distress and death of First Nations people.


On a cold day 25 years ago, a bitter wind swept up from the south, pushing against an endless throng of people crossing one of Australia’s most famous landmarks.

Some 250,000 people were walking across Sydney Harbour Bridge in support of Indigenous reconciliation. It was an event called Corroboree 2000.

It took more than six hours for the mass of people to make their way from north to south, into the city. Across the nation, in small towns and in the capital cities, bridge walks symbolised overcoming a difficult past and coming together.

But Australia’s relationship with First Nations people in the years since has been sometimes tumultuous, occasionally optimistic and often vexed. What legacy did the event leave?

A ‘decade of reconciliation’?

A “Decade of Reconciliation” started with the unanimous passage of the Council for Aboriginal Reconciliation Act through the federal parliament in 1991. “Reconciliation” was to be achieved between Indigenous and non-Indigenous Australians by the centenary of Federation in 2001.

The act made a national commitment for the federal government to address both “Aboriginal disadvantage and aspirations”.

It didn’t, however, specify what reconciliation was or what a reconciled nation would look like. The 2001 deadline would come and go without any way of knowing if it had been achieved.

The amorphous nature of the concept likely contributed to the widespread political support for reconciliation. But whether it meant addressing Indigenous rights, or disadvantage, or both, was often decided down political party lines.

Some First Nations activists were unequivocal in their criticism of reconciliation. It was widely perceived as a poor substitute for Bob Hawke’s 1984 promise of national land rights, and later, Treaty.

The late Uncle Chicka Dixon renamed the movement “ReCONsillynation”. The “con” was the call to “walk together” as an alternative to Treaty and land rights.

Instead, the Council for Aboriginal Reconciliation was established in 1991. Its approach to reconciliation was largely about building knowledge and understanding among non-Indigenous Australians about Australian Indigenous lives, experience and history. This was seen as essential to advancing justice.

Changing hearts and minds

For more than a decade, the council worked to achieve its vision, recruiting thousands of participants to the cause. It produced educational materials to guide learning about First Peoples histories and cultures. It also promoted reconciliation activities in the community.

Community-led reconciliation activities proliferated quickly. Some of these continue today, helping establish a foundation for truth-telling.

Huge historical events were unfolding alongside this work. In 1992, the Mabo decision in the High Court ruled Australia was not terra nullius (land belonging to nobody) when it was claimed by Britain in 1770. This led to native title laws, which have made it possible for some Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander people to claim ownership of their traditional lands.

In 1997, the Bringing Them Home report highlighted the trauma caused to generations of Aboriginal and Torres Strait children across Australia by removing them from their families. They are known as the Stolen Generations.

The report recommended all Australian governments apologise to Indigenous people for their involvement in the policies and practices of forcible child removal.

By 1999, all states and territory governments had apologised. The federal government had not.

A contested history

These seismic shifts in public conversation inevitably came to feature in federal politics.

In the 1996 election, the two leaders – Labor Prime Minister Paul Keating and Liberal leader John Howard – outlined very different political visions based on opposing approaches to Australian history.

While Keating was in office, he combined two causes – native title and the republic – hoping they would help generate a new story of the nation’s foundation.

He sought to replace the positive, comforting and Anglo-centric view of Australian history. He highlighted the impact of colonisation on Aboriginal people and cast doubt on the morality of British occupation.

Howard largely framed his history in opposition to Keating’s. Whereas Keating’s history dwelled on identifiable historical wrongs, Howard famously said Australians should “feel comfortable and relaxed about their history”.

For Howard, there was much to be proud of in the story of the nation’s past. He accused the Labor party of peddling “the rhetoric of apology and shame”, or what came to be known as the “black armband” view of the past.

Despite the recommendation of the Bringing Them Home report, Howard didn’t apologise to Indigenous people. He championed “practical outcomes” instead of “symbolism”, although ultimately failed to deliver either.

A historic culmination

With all these debates brewing throughout the 1990s, Australians used the new millennium to make their own large, symbolic gesture.

Corroboree 2000 was held over two days in May. At the first event held on May 27, Indigenous and non-Indigenous leaders met at the Sydney Opera House. The Council for Aboriginal Reconciliation presented non-Indigenous leaders with two documents: the Australian Declaration Towards Reconciliation and the Roadmap for Reconciliation.

All the leaders who took part left their handprints on a canvas to show their support.

But in the intervening years, the shape of reconciliation and what Indigenous people could expect from it changed.

Reflecting the Howard government’s emphasis on practical reconciliation, the council’s final report emphasised that “overcoming disadvantage is central to the reconciliation process”. The original brief for reconciliation to also address “Aboriginal aspirations” was forgotten.

Howard gave a speech at the event and expressed “regret” for the past treatment of Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander people, but he did not apologise. This left many in the crowd unhappy.

The apology would eventually come in 2008 from Labor Prime Minister, Kevin Rudd.

Where are we now?

In his recent election victory speech, Prime Minister Anthony Albanese emphasised national unity. He again placed reconciliation at the forefront of the Australian government’s Indigenous affairs agenda, saying:

we will be a government that supports reconciliation with First Nations people, because we will be a stronger nation when we close the gap between Indigenous and non-Indigenous Australians.

It was a far cry from his 2022 victory speech when he promised the full implementation of the Uluru Statement from the Heart.

In the aftermath of the Voice referendum, the Albanese government says it is focusing on First Nations economic independence and empowerment, along with continuing to “Close the Gap” in experiences of disadvantage.

So 25 years on from the bridge walk, reconciliation remains a feature of the government’s response to First Peoples’ calls for recognition and justice.

But reconciliation can be seen as a safe harbour to merely rebuild consensus, when more ambitious Indigenous affairs agendas stall or fail.The Conversation

Heidi Norman, Professor of Aboriginal political history, Faculty of Arts, Design and Architecture, Convenor: Indigenous Land & Justice Research Group, UNSW Sydney and Anne Maree Payne, Senior Research Fellow, Indigenous Land & Justice Research Group, UNSW Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Is it OK to leave device chargers plugged in all the time? An expert explains

YG PhotoArtWorks/Shutterstock
Glen FarivarThe University of Melbourne

How many chargers do you own? We’re surrounded by rechargeable electronic devices – mobile phones, laptops, smart watches, headphones, e-bikes and more.

You might have a phone charger plugged in next to your bed without ever bothering to switch it off at the wall or unplugging it when not in use. The same might go for a laptop charger by your desk.

But is that risky to do? And are there hidden costs associated with leaving chargers plugged in all the time?

What’s inside a charger?

Naturally, not all chargers are the same. Depending on the application and power requirement, their internal structure can range from very simple to complex.

However, a typical charger takes in the AC (alternating current) from the wall plug and converts it to a low-voltage DC (direct current) suitable for your device’s battery.

To understand the difference between DC and AC, consider the flow of electrons in a wire. In a DC circuit, electrons move in one direction and keep rotating in the circuit. In an AC circuit, electrons doesn’t circulate and only move back and forth.

The reason for why we use both types of current goes a long way back, to the time when inventors Thomas Edison and Nicola Tesla battled over which type would become the default standard. Today, we are still stuck between both. Electricity is traditionally generated in AC form, but modern appliances and batteries require the DC form. This is why almost every electrical appliance comes with an AC–DC converter.

To do the conversion from AC to DC, a typical charger needs several electrical components such as a transformer, a circuit for doing the actual conversion, filtering elements to enhance the quality of output DC voltage, and control circuitry for regulation and protection.

A partially broken charger with two prongs and the internal chips exposed.
Chargers have several electrical components to convert the AC current to DC current that the battery can use. PeterRoziSnaps/Shutterstock

Chargers consume power even when not charging

“Vampire power” is real. If you leave it plugged in, a charger will continuously draw a small amount of power. Part of this power is used to keep the control and protection circuits running while the rest is lost as heat.

When we look at an individual small charger, the vampire power – also known as standby power – is negligible. However, if you add up all the chargers in your home for various devices, over time the wasted energy can be significant. Standby power is not exclusive to chargers, either; other electronic devices such as TVs draw a little bit of standby power, too.

Depending on how many things you leave plugged in, over the course of the year it could amount to several kilowatt hours.

That said, modern chargers are designed to minimise standby power consumption. These chargers come with smart power management components that keep them in sleep mode until an external device attempts to draw power.

A view under a desk with lots of things plugged into a power strip.
Having lots of chargers plugged in in your house can add up into a decent trickle of standby power. Kit/Unsplash

There are other risks, too

Chargers wear out over time when electricity flows through them, particularly when the electricity grid voltage temporarily rises above its rated value. The electricity grid is a chaotic environment and various voltage rise events happen from time to time.

Leaving your chargers exposed to these events will shorten their life. This premature ageing shouldn’t be alarming for modern devices, thanks to their improved design and control. But it is particularly concerning for cheap, uncertified chargers. These often lack appropriate levels of protection and can be a fire hazard.

How should I treat my chargers?

Although modern chargers are generally very safe and should be drawing minimal standby power, consider unplugging them anyway – if convenient.

If a charger gets warmer than usual, makes noise, or is damaged in any way, it is time for a replacement. And it definitely shouldn’t be left plugged in.The Conversation

Glen Farivar, Lecturer in Power Electronics, The University of Melbourne

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

What makes somebody a narcissist? Mounting evidence suggests links to insecure attachment styles

DSerov/Shutterstock
Megan WillisAustralian Catholic University

Narcissism has become the armchair diagnosis of the decade. Social media is awash with people flinging the label around. Everyone’s ex seems to be a narcissist, some of our parents are under suspicion, and that office villain? They definitely tick the box, too.

The accuracy of these rampant diagnoses warrants scepticism. But the reality is narcissists do exist. At its extreme, narcissism is a rare mental health diagnosis, known as narcissistic personality disorder. But narcissism also describes a cluster of personality traits, which we all display to varying degrees.

For those of us who have been in close quarters with someone high in narcissistic traits, we rarely walk away unscathed. And we may be left with lingering questions. For example, what made them this way?

In a recent meta-analysis, my colleagues and I pulled together studies examining the link between narcissism and adult attachment styles. Our findings offer an important clue – especially when it comes to the potential roots of vulnerable narcissism.

Types of narcissism

There are two main types of narcissism.

Grandiose narcissism is what typically comes to mind. It is characterised by an overtly grandiose, aggressive and dominant interpersonal style. In contrast, vulnerable narcissism is marked by introversion, hypersensitivity to criticism, and a defensive, insecure grandiosity that masks fragile self-esteem.

Antagonistic traits such as entitlement, manipulation, and a lack of empathy lie at the core of both narcissism types. This helps to explain the interpersonal difficulties linked to each.

Vulnerable narcissism, in particular, has been linked to a range of harmful behaviours in romantic relationships. Individuals high in this trait are more likely to engage in love bombingghosting and breadcrumbing.

They also tend to report lower relationship satisfaction, hold more permissive attitudes towards infidelity and perpetrate intimate partner violence at higher rates.

Secure versus insecure attachment

Researchers have turned to attachment styles to help explain how individuals high in narcissism behave in romantic relationships.

Attachment theory proposes that early experiences with primary caregivers shape our beliefs about ourselves and others. These beliefs are thought to persist into adulthood and influence how we experience and navigate adult relationships.

If we felt safe, loved and supported as children, we are more likely to have a positive view of our self and others. This is the hallmark of secure attachment, which lays the foundation for healthy, stable relationships in adulthood.

But when early relationships are marked by neglect, inconsistency or abuse, they can give rise to insecure attachment styles. Adult attachment models generally identify three types of insecure attachment.

Preoccupied attachment develops from a negative view of the self and a positive view of others. Individuals with this style often feel unworthy of love and seek constant reassurance in relationships, fearing rejection and abandonment.

Dismissive attachment is rooted in a positive view of the self but a negative view of others. These individuals tend to prioritise independence over intimacy. As a result, they often struggle to form deep connections.

Fearful attachment involves negative views of both the self and others. Those with this style typically crave connection while at the same time fearing it, leading to push-pull dynamics in relationships.

An interesting pattern

In our meta-analysis, we combined the results of 33 previous studies comprising more than 10,000 participants to examine how narcissism relates to each of the four adult attachment styles. Overall, narcissism was linked to each of the three insecure attachment styles.

But when we looked at the two types of narcissism separately, an interesting pattern emerged. Vulnerable narcissism was consistently linked to insecure attachment styles – with associations of moderate strength for preoccupied and fearful attachment styles.

In contrast, grandiose narcissism showed no such link.

Does this mean insecure attachment causes vulnerable narcissism? Not necessarily. The studies we reviewed were “correlational”, which means they looked at connections, not causes. So we can’t say attachment styles cause vulnerable narcissism. To answer that, we’d need longitudinal research tracking people over time.

Still, our findings suggest that insecure attachment – particularly preoccupied and fearful attachment styles – may be an important risk factor in the development of vulnerable narcissism.

Of course, not everyone with an insecure attachment style has high levels of vulnerable narcissism. However, for some, vulnerable narcissism may emerge as a defensive coping strategy that arises when early attachments were marked by inconsistency, neglect or abuse.

A young father lovingly holding his newborn.
Supporting parents and caregivers to build secure attachments with the their children could help prevent the development of vulnerable narcissism Halfpoint/Shutterstock

Healing childhood wounds

Attachment styles tend to be fairly consistent throughout a person’s life, however change is possible. Attachment-focused therapies, such as schema therapy and emotionally focussed therapy, can help individuals heal attachment wounds and build more secure relationship patterns. These approaches may be especially helpful for those high in vulnerable narcissism.

At the same time, it is important that families have access to free and timely mental health care, so that children are supported to process and heal from trauma before it shapes their adult relationships, and the way they parent the next generation.

But prevention is better than cure.

Supporting parents and caregivers to build secure attachments with the their children and equipping them with the tools to parent effectively is essential. This is especially urgent given disturbingly high rates of child maltreatment in Australia, including emotional abuse, physical abuse and neglect – all of which have been linked to the development of vulnerable narcissism.

We don’t need to look too far to see the cost of turning a blind eye.The Conversation

Megan Willis, Associate Professor, School of Behavioural and Health Sciences, Australian Catholic University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Daylight can boost the immune system’s ability to fight infections – new study

Getty Images
Chris HallUniversity of Auckland, Waipapa Taumata Rau

Ever found yourself out of sync with normal sleep patterns after late nights or working a night shift? It could be you’re experiencing what scientists call social jet lag.

The term describes the misalignment between our internal body clock (circadian rhythm) and our social schedule.

Social jet lag associated with irregular sleep patterns and inconsistent exposure to daylight is increasingly common, and has been linked with a weakened immune system.

Disruption of our circadian rhythms through shift work, for example, has been shown to have a negative impact on our ability to fight infections.

These observations reinforce the idea that maintaining a robust circadian rhythm through regular exposure to daylight supports a healthy immune system.

But how does the immune system know when it’s daytime? That is precisely what our research, published today in Science Immunology, has uncovered. Our findings could eventually deliver benefits for the treatment of inflammatory conditions.

First responders to infection

Circadian rhythms are a fundamental feature of all life on Earth. Believed to have evolved some 2.5 billion years ago, they enable organisms to adapt to challenges associated with the 24-hour solar day.

At the molecular level, these circadian rhythms are orchestrated through a genetically encoded multi-component time keeper called a circadian clock. Almost all cells are known to have the components for a circadian clock. But how they function within different cell types to regulate their behaviour is very poorly understood.

In the laboratory, we use zebrafish – small freshwater fish commonly sold in pet stores – as a model organism to understand our immune response to bacterial infection.

We use larval zebrafish because their genetic makeup and immune system are similar to ours. Also, they have transparent bodies, making it easy to observe biological processes under the microscope.

We focus on an immune cell called a “neutrophil”, a type of white blood cell. We’re interested in these cells because they specialise in killing bacteria, are first responders to infection, and are the most abundant immune cell in our bodies.

Because they are very short-lived cells, neutrophils isolated from human blood are notoriously difficult to work with experimentally. However, with transparent larval zebrafish, we can film them to directly observe how these cells function, within a completely intact animal.

This time-lapse shows red fluorescent immune cells (neutrophils) moving through larval zebrafish to eat green fluorescent bacteria that have been microinjected.

Cells can tell if it’s daytime

Our initial studies showed the strength of immune response to bacterial infection peaked during the day, when the animals are active.

We think this represents an evolutionary response that provides both humans and zebrafish a survival advantage. Because diurnal animals such as humans and zebrafish are most active during daylight hours, they are more likely to encounter bacterial infections.

This work made us curious to know how this enhanced immune response was being synchronised with daylight. By making movies of neutrophils killing bacteria at different times of the day, we discovered they killed bacteria more efficiently during the daytime than at night.

We then genetically edited neutrophils to turn off their circadian clocks by carefully removing specific clock components. This is an approach similar to removing important cogs from an analogue clock so it doesn’t tick anymore.

This led to the discovery that these important immune cells possess an internal light-regulated circadian clock that alerts the cells to daytime (similar to an alarm clock). This boosts their ability to kill bacteria.

Our next challenge is to understand exactly how light is detected by neutrophils, and whether human neutrophils also rely on this internal timing mechanism to regulate their antibacterial activity.

We’re also curious to see if this killing mechanism is restricted to certain types of bacteria, such as those we’re more likely to encounter during the day. Or is it a more general response to all infectious threats (including viral infections)?

This research unlocks the potential for developing drugs that target the neutrophil circadian clock to regulate the cells’ activity. Given neutrophils are the first and most abundant immune cells to be recruited to sites of inflammation, the discovery has very broad implications for many inflammatory conditions.


The research described here was led by PhD candidates Lucia Du and Pramuk Keerthisinghe, and was a collaboration between the Hall laboratory and the Chronobiology Research Group, led by Guy Warman and James Cheeseman, at the University of Auckland’s Faculty of Medical and Health Sciences. The Conversation


Chris Hall, Associate Professor of Immunology, University of Auckland, Waipapa Taumata Rau

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

From strip searches to sexual harassment, Australian policing has long been plagued by sexism

Michael CainDeakin University

This month, a woman bravely testified in court she was subjected to a “degrading and humiliating experience akin to sexual assault” at the hands of New South Wales Police. The young woman was forced to remove her tampon in front of officers during a strip search, which police later admitted was unlawful.

This experience was heard in the Supreme Court as part of a class action lawsuit that includes 3,000 alleged victims. It’s alleging police unlawfully strip-searched thousands of people at music festivals between 2016 and 2022.

These searches – which disproportionately increased against young girls and women – speak to a underlying issue within policing. Police scholars have long observed an internal culture of misogyny and sexism, both domestically and internationally.

In fact, predatory behaviour from police has been documented across the country, both towards members of the public and towards other police officers.

While there are immediate headlines and promises to improve, they’re often quickly forgotten by police and the community. In not holding them accountable, we allow the harming of women to continue and positive change to remain elusive.

A long history

This has previously been a point of conversation in New South Wales. Last year, there were reports of a female then-officer, Mel Cooper, being sexually harassed and assaulted by male colleagues. Cooper, who joined the force in 1994, argued this culture is “not getting better […] it’s getting worse”.

This reflected experiences from a report by the state’s police watchdog in 2020 reviewing workplace complaints. The report, titled Operation Shorewood, found sexual harassment was among the most common complaints.

Female officers were the most likely to be subjected to harassment, despite the most recent available data indicating they make up only 26.9% of sworn personnel.

New South Wales is not a unique case. In Western Australia, it’s been reported that sexual misconduct complaints are rising. This prompted the police commissioner to admit WA Police had a “boys club culture” issue.

In Queensland, the Richards inquiry in 2022 found evidence of a culture of sexism and misogyny and viewed predatory behaviour as a significant issue. The commission learned of multiple examples of predatory behaviour, sexual harassment and assault against female colleagues (often junior officers).

In some rare cases, rape by male officers was reported.

More recently, a Queensland police sergeant who engaged in a pattern of predatory sexual conduct was reported to still be working with the force. This was despite Queensland’s police watchdog – the Crime and Corruption Commission – recommending in 2022 that dismissal was the “only appropriate sanction”.

Decades of inaction

Victoria also has a long history of this behaviour.

In 1988, a discussion paper criticised the treatment of sexual assault victims who reported or complained to police. The paper’s recommendations were never implemented, with police and government responses dismissing the paper as “pro-victim”.

A decade later, the Victorian ombudsman investigated allegations of sexual impropriety by officers at a rural police station. The allegations, which started in 1988, included rape, sexual assault, stalking, unlawful entry on premises and threatening behaviour towards members of the public.

Victims were dissuaded from giving evidence by police. Male officers came to view sex as an entitlement of their duty, targeting vulnerable and young women. It was ultimately found that police management systems had failed to deal with the behaviour for years.

The failure to address the behaviour has only continued. An audit into sex and gender discrimination and two separate reports from Victoria’s police watchdog in 2015 and 2023 continue to show evidence of sexual impropriety and predatory behaviour.

This came to a head in 2023 when Brett Johnson was convicted of using Victoria’s police database to stalk vulnerable women and initiate sexual relationships.

In response to this, and other reports into systemic issues, Victoria Police has implemented more than 90% of the Independent Broad-based Anti-corruption Commission’s recommendations. This includes working towards implementing recommendations regarding predatory behaviour.

Lessons left unlearned

It is impossible to gauge the full extent of this behaviour and its history in every jurisdiction.

There are no mandatory reporting requirements for police complaint data in Australia. The findings we do have often come from an occasional report or inquiry into police.

These incidents are also quickly forgotten. Government inquiries and investigations often fail to acknowledge these issues have been discussed many times before.

States may recognise the need for change. Other times, they will outright dismiss it.

Many identified reforms are never fully put into practice. In the case of systems for holding police accountable, this phenomenon has been seen as “cyclic”.

This is why it’s vital to recall the incidents of our past. When another scandal occurs, we should remind ourselves these are not “bad apples” or isolated events.

They are symbolic of a crisis of reform in policing – an inability to create meaningful change. We must demand better from our police and our state governments to ensure the protection of not just Australian women, but all victims and complainants.

As researcher Janet Chan argued in her internationally recognised work on changing the culture of the police, this will not be achieved through a single reform. This will require a commitment to a range of related changes.

These include changes to education, better leadership and mentoring, more effective whistleblowing processes and reforms to police complaint systems.

popular proposal has been the creation of an independent police ombudsman to oversee and investigate complaints against police.

However, without a continued public pressure, it is unlikely we can challenge the political power of police. Failure to address these issues will only strengthen a culture that harms all who are victim to it.


The National Sexual Assault, Family and Domestic Violence Counselling Line – 1800 RESPECT (1800 737 732) – is available 24 hours a day, seven days a week for any Australian who has experienced, or is at risk of, family and domestic violence and/or sexual assault.The Conversation

Michael Cain, Associate Lecturer in Criminology, Deakin University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

‘No pain, no gain’: why some primary students are following intense study routines

MNStudio/ Shutterstock
Christina HoUniversity of Technology Sydney

Every year, thousands of New South Wales students sit a test to determine places for highly sought-after selective high schools. These are academically selective public schools often associated with high Year 12 scores.

While there has long been a level of expectation around selective school entrance, the most recent round of testing has shone a fresh light on the pressures some young people are experiencing.

Media reports have described some students studying for 18 months to prepare for the selective school test, with multiple sessions of tutoring each week.

Earlier this month, police were called to control crowds at two testing centres as parents and students from one session overlapped with another. This is also the first year the tests have been done online and there were technical difficulties as students tried to complete exams.

One exam invigilator told The Sydney Morning Herald about the stress they witnessed among students.

We were dealing with kids who were freaking out and totally traumatised by what was going on. You could not make up a worse nightmare than what we went through that day.

It’s not surprising children were upset. The pressure to perform well on test day is enormous. As my previous research has found, some families believe entry into a selective school will secure their child’s future.

As my new research with colleagues suggests, this sees some families place huge pressure on students to study and prepare for academic tests in primary school.

Not just a NSW thing

Most (albeit not all) of Australia’s selective schools are in NSW.

But there is pressure around other tests in the primary years. There are similar levels of competition for lucrative private school scholarships around Australia, which children sit as early as Year 3. Many of these are determined by centralised tests.

Tutoring companies also offer programs for primary students preparing for NAPLAN tests in Year 3 and Year 5, as well as the “opportunity class” test in NSW (for an academically selective stream for Year 5 and 6).

Our research

In ongoing, as yet unpublished research on education cultures among migrant communities in Sydney, colleagues and I are focusing on 38 families with children in upper primary school.

In 2022 and 2023, we interviewed students, parents and teachers at six schools in high and low income areas of Sydney. All schools included large numbers of Asian migrants, allowing us to compare different groups’ approaches to education.

While not necessarily representative of all Asian migrant families, or all families with school-aged children in general, we found intensive preparation for the selective test was common in this group, especially among those students already enrolled in an opportunity class.

The tutoring routine

Many students preparing for the selective test told us they attended private tutoring three or more days per week, in addition to completing home based study. Some had begun this routine up to 12 months before to the test.

One mother, whose son attended tutoring every day, at three different centres, on top of two hours of daily homework, told us,

That’s how we prepare for selective […] You need to be methodical […] no pain, no gain.

Other parents explained they resorted to private tutoring because schools did not teach what was needed to succeed in the selective tests.

Not only do children spend afternoons, evenings and weekends in tutoring centres, they are also often giving up most if not all recreational, sporting and other extracurricular activities, narrowing their focus to acing the test.

Families also postpone holidays, outings and other potential distractions. Many of our student participants aiming for a selective school told us they never socialised with their friends outside of school time.

Sometimes they even neglected their school work so as to focus on the selective test. One teacher told us many of her students were absent from school in the week prior to the test, to ramp up their preparation.

How does this impact students?

This culture of extreme study and competitive schooling raises profound questions about the implications for student wellbeing. Some students spoke about their fatigue. As one student said:

I work up to late at night. So sometimes I feel drowsy and I yawn a bit and have water in my eyes.

Their teachers also expressed concern about insufficient sleep and heightened stress caused by the pressure to get into a selective school. They described students’ tears if they were not successful when the results came out.

One teacher said he had a “blanket rule” of not talking about the tests in the classroom, because his students were so preoccupied with ensuring they were doing enough preparation.

Other teachers reflected on students’ fear of taking risks because of the culture of perfectionism associated with scoring and ranking through tests.

Young boy writes on a maths workbook.
Some students stop doing other activities to prepare for the selective schools test. Maria Sbytova/ Shutterstock

What does the research say?

International research shows an association between high-stakes testing in primary years and issues with children’s mental health and academic confidence. There is also a negative association with students’ achievement in maths and literacy. That is, students who experience pressured exams were more likely to experience anxiety and depression, and not do as well in core subjects as those who did not experience this pressure.

Some parents in our study expressed concern for their child’s wellbeing. But others saw stress a positive sign of engagement and commitment, and necessary for securing the all important place in a selective school.

Given many are recent migrants, without established networks in Australia, and fearful of racial discrimination against their children, they believe education to be the most crucial foundation for future success.

However, we need more research on the impacts of these parental aspirations and anxieties on the next generation. And a broader discussion about the benefits of selecting some students – who may have benefited from extensive and expensive private tutoring – to go to separate, high-performing government schools.


Megan Watkins, Greg Noble and Alexandra Wong all contributed to the research on migrant families mentioned in this article, as part of a larger Australian Research Council-funded project.The Conversation

Christina Ho, Associate professor in Social and Political Sciences, University of Technology Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Boys are more resilient than girls to school setbacks. Here’s how you can help

Monkey Business Images/ Shutterstock
Andrew J. MartinUNSW SydneyOscar YauUNSW SydneyPaul GinnsUniversity of Sydney, and Rebecca J. CollieUNSW Sydney

As educational psychology researchers, we are very interested in how students deal with setbacks and challenges in their schooling.

Research has found resilient students tend to have more positive academic outcomes. These include making greater effort with their work, having better study skills and enjoying school more than students who are less resilient.

We measure this resilience through something called “academic buoyancy”. This is a personal attribute that helps students overcome common setbacks at school, such as a heavy workload, poor test results or competing assignment deadlines.

In the past two decades of research into resilience or academic buoyancy, there has been a concerning trend suggesting girls report lower levels of academic buoyancy than boys.

To better understand this, we analysed all existing studies to conclusively work out if this gender gap exists, and if so, to what extent.

Our research

A meta-analysis is a research technique aimed at identifying the average effect of a phenomenon across a large number of studies. In the case of gender and academic buoyancy, meta-analysis can be used to calculate the average difference between girls and boys in academic buoyancy.

Meta-analysis produces an “effect size” that can be categorised as small, medium or large. In our case, the bigger the effect size, the greater the difference between girls and boys in academic buoyancy.

We searched for all published academic buoyancy studies across major databases. We also contacted leading researchers in the field for any studies into academic buoyancy they had conducted, but had not published.

Following this process, our meta-analysis included 53 studies published between 2008 and 2024 reporting on the link between gender and academic buoyancy. It involved 173,665 students from primary school through to high school and university. Study locations included Australia, the United Kingdom, United States, Canada, Jamaica, Finland, China, Singapore and the Philippines.

A row of students bent over desks.
Our analysis involved more than 170,000 students around the world. Juice Verve/ Shutterstock

What we found

We found the average effect of gender on academic buoyancy was statistically significant and small-to-medium in size. This means there was a reliable and noticeable difference between girls and boys and their reported levels of academic buoyancy.

In other words, girls are less resilient to everyday academic challenges (such as a poor mark or negative interaction with a teacher) than their male peers.

While we did not set out to study why this is the case, previous research suggests this could be because girls experience higher levels of academic anxiety than boys and these higher levels of anxiety may make it more difficult for them to navigate academic adversity. Now these meta-analysis findings are known, there is a need for research to more closely examine the reasons for the gender difference.

Our results, of course, are average findings. This does not mean all girls report lower academic buoyancy and not all boys are buoyant.

So efforts should therefore be aimed at boosting the buoyancy of those who struggle with academic adversity and sustaining it among those who are managing well.

Previous research suggests there are two broad approaches educators, along with parents, can take.

The direct approach

Teachers, counsellors and parents can work to directly boost students’ academic buoyancy through the following steps:

– teaching students to recognise academic adversity early, before that adversity becomes more difficult to manage. For example, when it is starting to take them longer to do homework than other students.

– explaining to students how to adjust their thoughts, behaviour, and/or emotions in the face of this adversity. For thought, they might have to start thinking about what possible resources they can draw on. For behaviour, they might seek help from a teacher as one source of support, when normally they may not do so. For emotion, they may need to minimise fear they may have about asking that teacher for help.

– encouraging students to take heart from small improvements. For example, if asking the teacher for help works, they should see this as a “win” (“I can overcome problems”).

– encouraging students to keep noticing and adjusting their thoughts, behaviours and/or emotion in response to adversity. So this becomes part of their everyday habits.

An older student writes with a pen on a paper.
Students can learn to seek help for challenges early if they are struggling. arrowsmith2/ Shutterstock

The 6 Cs of an ‘underpinning’ approach

Another approach involves targeting the factors that underpin academic resilience. Our previous research has identified six factors or points where educators and parents can help students.

1. Confidence: boosting students’ self belief in their ability to succeed.

2. Coordination: helping students with academic planning and task management.

3. Commitment: building students’ persistence; for example, through goal-setting and goal-striving.

4. Control: directing students’ attention to things they control, such as their effort.

5. Composure: reducing students’ anxiety; for example, through addressing fearful thoughts and adopting relaxation strategies that work for them.

6. Community: building strong interpersonal relationships with peers and teachers, so they feel supported.

As these strategies are being considered, educators also need to accommodate other pressures in students’ lives that may be contributing to or exacerbating a student’s difficulties, such as social difficulties or issues at home. They also need to consider any clinical issues such as attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder (ADHD).

Taken together, with the support of educators and parents, there are practical changes students can make to boost their response to academic adversity, and in turn, help close the gender gap around academic buoyancy.The Conversation

Andrew J. Martin, Scientia Professor and Professor of Educational Psychology, UNSW SydneyOscar Yau, PhD Candidate, School of Education, UNSW SydneyPaul Ginns, Associate Professor in Educational Psychology, University of Sydney, and Rebecca J. Collie, Scientia Associate Professor of Educational Psychology, UNSW Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Landmark donation powers world-first endometriosis research institute at UNSW

by Larissa Baiocchi

A philanthropic donation will revolutionise endometriosis treatment.  Professor Jason Abbott, pictured, will be the Clinical Director of the new research institute. Photo: UNSW Sydney

A $50 million philanthropic contribution will position Australia as a global leader in women’s health. 

A world-first initiative funded by members of the philanthropic Ainsworth family and led by UNSW Sydney is set to revolutionise endometriosis research, diagnosis, and treatment for millions of people suffering around the world.  

Three generations of the Ainsworth family, led by Anna and Lily Ainsworth, have together committed $50 million over 10 years to establish the Ainsworth Endometriosis Research Institute (AERI) at UNSW. The partnership will position Australia as a global leader in women’s health and the fight against endometriosis.  

Endometriosis is a condition where tissue similar to the lining of the uterus is found outside the uterus, often causing severe pelvic pain, fatigue and in some cases infertility. It is estimated one in seven Australian women will have endometriosis by age 49, impacting their health, fertility, careers, and daily lives. This equates to around 830,000 people in Australia.

Globally, about 200 million people suffer from endometriosis, with one in three people with endometriosis experiencing infertility. Many people with endometriosis endure years of symptoms without answers, waiting six to eight years on average for an accurate diagnosis.  

Endometriosis is a significant global challenge, with far-reaching social and economic consequences. In 2025, the World Economic Forum named endometriosis one of the nine diseases most affecting the lives of women, their communities and the global economy. The economic burden of endometriosis on Australia alone is estimated to be between $7.4 billion and $9.7 billion annually.

AERI will adopt a global consortia-based approach to research bringing together top scientists, clinicians, and philanthropists from around the world – including England, Canada, Denmark, India and the USA – to unlock a continuous pipeline of scientific discoveries. The aim is to accelerate breakthroughs in diagnosis and create precision-based treatments. By focusing on genomic research, biorepositories, and advanced testing, AERI will fast-track new understandings of endometriosis, moving beyond current medical limitations.  

Record-breaking donation 
The contribution from the Ainsworths is record-breaking – the largest known philanthropic contribution to endometriosis research globally and women's health in Australia. It is also the largest philanthropic donation ever received by UNSW. 

AERI has been made possible by three branches of the Ainsworths who have been impacted by and care deeply about those with endometriosis: Lily, Greg, Anna and Simon Ainsworth, Paul and Valeria Ainsworth, and Len Ainsworth.  

Lily Ainsworth, who has lived with endometriosis since she was a teenager, and her mother, Anna Ainsworth, have experienced firsthand the chronic pain and uncertainty that comes with the disease. The family is determined to improve the outcomes of endometriosis for millions of people worldwide. Experts indicate that scientific progress in this area has lagged, with current understanding of endometriosis similar to where breast cancer research was in the 1970s. 

Anna and Lily Ainsworth are members of the philanthropic Ainsworth family. Photo: UNSW Sydney

“I’ve had endo pain since I was 15 years old. While my fertility hasn’t been impacted, I experience chronic, daily pain and severe flare ups that debilitate me for days or weeks on end,” Lily Ainsworth said.

“Like many others, endometriosis has affected my education, my career, my relationships, my family, and dictates how I go about each and every day. This reality is shared with millions of people living with endo around Australia and the world. We believe this can change. The Ainsworth Endometriosis Research Institute is more than an exceptional research institute; it is hope. Hope for those living with endometriosis now and in the future, that they will be able to live full, happy and healthy lives.” 

UNSW Vice-Chancellor and President Professor Attila Brungs highlighted the transformative nature of the contribution and its significant societal impact.  

“I would like to thank the Ainsworth family for their generosity and the positive societal impact it will enable. The University and its partners are incredibly honoured to be at the forefront of this ground-breaking initiative together with the Ainsworth family,” Prof. Brungs said.

“The Ainsworth Endometriosis Research Institute represents an historic moment in women’s health. This unprecedented collaboration will not only form the future of endometriosis research but also accelerate our ability to provide real, tangible solutions that quite literally change the lives of each of the hundreds of millions of people globally impacted by this condition.”   

Game-changing impact on endometriosis 
Despite the widespread prevalence of the disease, current research remains underfunded and underdeveloped, leaving millions of people without adequate care. Furthermore, research is poorly integrated with clinical practice right now. A diagnosis which brings a sense of relief is swiftly followed by uncertainty as treatment options are limited and not well understood.

Professor Jason Abbott is a clinician and researcher at UNSW who has dedicated his career to researching and advocating for improving diagnosis and treatment of endometriosis. He will be the Clinical Director at AERI and said the funding is a game-changer.  

“Having cared for those with endometriosis for three decades it is clear to me that we must go beyond the surgery and current medical treatments to understand the disease processes,” Prof. Abbott said.

“AERI is the most significant commitment to endometriosis research that I have ever seen. The donation from the Ainsworth family provides surety to endometriosis researchers, will drive program-driven scientific discoveries and pave the way for generational change for anyone who has, or knows someone with endometriosis.”  

Professor Caroline Ford, Gynaecological Cancer Research Group lead at UNSW and the Scientific Director at AERI, pointed to the critical need for a strong evidence base to support medical decisions, acknowledging that the lack of investment in research has long been a barrier.


Professor Jason Abbott will be the AERI Clinical Director and Professor Caroline Ford will be the AERI Scientific Director. Photo: UNSW Sydney

“The aim of AERI is to enable a precision medicine approach to endometriosis detection, treatment and management. Each person's endometriosis is unique and for the best results, treatment needs to be personalised. We have seen how effective this approach can be in cancer treatment and will be applying many of the successful strategies here, such as the power of genomics and targeted treatment,” Prof. Ford said. 

“In order for doctors to deliver precision medicine they need a solid evidence base to support their decisions. This has been a challenge due to a lack of investment in research. This substantial investment will allow researchers for the first time to build a solid understanding of endometriosis biology and pathogenesis that will lead to improved detection, management and treatment.”

Prioritising endometriosis awareness
The institute has drawn international praise with Professor Stacey Missmer, President of the World Endometriosis Society, highlighting the nation’s commitment to tackling endometriosis through groundbreaking research and advocacy initiatives.  

“Australia once again leads the globe as a role model for prioritising endometriosis awareness, knowledge, and patient-centred advocacy,” Prof. Missmer said.

“Establishment of the Endometriosis Research Institute with this dedicated funding will energise and rapidly leap-forward paradigm shifting discoveries.”

For Eimear McHugh, who was first diagnosed with endometriosis in 2016 more than a decade after experiencing her first symptoms as a teenager, a dedicated research institute will lead to improved quality of care, and ultimately, empowerment and validation for those living with the condition.  

“My biggest concern in the lead up to my surgery was not ‘how will my body heal after this surgery’ or ‘how much pain will I have’, but rather ‘what if there is nothing wrong and I have wasted everybody’s time.’ I now realise that this is a common fear among presenting patients, be it in a surgical setting, an outpatient’s appointment or simply when seeking empathy from a loved one,” McHugh said.

“Seeing skilled healthcare professionals, academics and researchers dedicating their careers to this disease gives almost an assurance that endometriosis is a credible illness, and we are worthy of such developments. AERI will ultimately move from awareness to action about endometriosis and give it the recognition that many people fail to get on their journey to diagnosis.”

Eimear McHugh was diagnosed with endometriosis in 2016, more than a decade after experiencing her first symptoms. Photo: UNSW Sydney

Heart attack or panic attack? Why young men are calling ambulances for unmanaged anxiety

PeopleImages.com - Yuri A/Shutterstock
Krista FisherThe University of MelbourneDan LubmanMonash UniversitySimon RiceThe University of Melbourne, and Zac SeidlerThe University of Melbourne

Anxiety affects one in five Australian men at some point in their lives. But the condition remains highly stigmatised, misunderstood and under-diagnosed.

Men are around half as likely to be diagnosed with an anxiety disorder compared to women. Some feel pressure to be fearless and hide their emotions. Others simply don’t understand or have the language to describe anxiety symptoms.

This has serious consequences. Our latest research shows young men are turning to ambulance services when their symptoms become overwhelming – some even think they’re having a heart attack.

So why do so many men wait until they need to call emergency services, rather than seek support earlier from a GP or psychologist? And what prompts them to call? We reviewed the paramedic notes of 694 men aged 15 to 25 years in Victoria, Australia, to find out.

Young men haven’t seen others asking for help

Boys are raised to value courage, strength and self-assurance, and to suppress vulnerability.

When parents encourage boys to “face their fears”, rather than offering emotional comfort and tenderness, anxiety gets positioned in conflict with masculinity. This leads to a disjuncture between the support young men are met with (and come to expect) from others, and the support they may want or need.

This also means boys grow up believing their male role models – dads, brothers, grandads, coaches – don’t get anxious, deterring boys and men from seeking help. As a result, anxiety goes undiagnosed and opportunities for early intervention are missed.

Recently, we have seen positive shifts challenging restrictive masculine stereotypes. This has improved awareness surrounding men’s depression – opening up conversations, normalising help-seeking and leading to the development of men’s mental health programs and resources.

However, men’s anxiety remains in the shadows. When anxiety is talked about, it’s not with the same weight or concern as depression. This is despite men’s anxiety having harmful health impacts including turning to alcohol and drugs to cope, and increasing the risk of male suicide.

What does anxiety look like?

When men are encouraged to talk about anxiety, they describe various challenges including repetitive worries, feeling out-of-control and intense physical symptoms. This includes a high heart rate, shortness of breath, body pains, tremors and headaches.

Jack Steele, a prominent Australian personality and one half of the Inspired Unemployed, opened up about his anxiety difficulties on The Imperfects Podcast last year saying:

I didn’t know what anxiety was. I thought I was the opposite of anxiety.

The way I explain it, it’s like […] your whole body just shuts down. My throat starts closing up and my whole body just goes numb. […] It feels like you’re just so alone. You feel like no-one can help you.

You genuinely think the world’s ending – like there’s no out.

These physical symptoms are common in men but can be frequently dismissed rather than recognised as anxiety. Our research has found that, when left unaddressed, these symptoms typically worsen and arise in more and more contexts.

Why do anxious men call ambulances?

Our new study investigated the consequences of men’s anxiety going unaddressed.

First, we used data from the National Ambulance Surveillance System to identify and describe the types of anxiety young men experience. We then looked at the characteristics and contexts of young men’s anxiety presentations to ambulance services.

Overwhelmed and lacking support, many young men turn to ambulances in crisis. Anxiety now accounts for 10% of male ambulance attendances for mental health concerns, surpassing depression and psychosis.

Ambulance on a Melbourne street
One in ten ambulance callouts for mental illness among men is for anxiety. Benjamin Crone/Shutterstock

While every presentation is different, our study identified three common presentations among young men:

1. Sudden onset of intense bodily symptoms resembling life-threatening physical health conditions such as heart attacks.

Twenty-two-year-old Joshua, for example, whose case files we reviewed as part of our study, was on a tram home from work when he experienced sudden numbness in his hands and feet. A bystander saw he was having muscle spasms in his hands. Joshua was alert but extremely anxious and asked the bystander for help.

2. Severe anxiety triggered or worsened by substance use.

Adam, a 21-year-old man, consumed a substantial amount of diazepam (Valium) while driving home, after having an anxiety attack at work. Adam reached out to paramedics because he was concerned his anxiety symptoms hadn’t dissipated, and was worried he may have taken too much diazepam.

3. Mental health deterioration with self-harm or suicidal thoughts, often tied to situational stressors such as unstable housing, unemployment, financial difficulties and relationship strain.

Leo, aged 25, had been increasingly anxious for the past three days. Leo’s parents called an ambulance after he told them he wanted to kill himself. Leo told paramedics on arrival that he still felt suicidal and had been getting worse over the past three months.

Directing resources where they’re needed

Young men’s anxiety presentations are time- and resource-intensive for paramedics, many of whom feel poorly equipped to respond effectively. After ruling out physical causes, paramedic support is typically limited to reassurance and breathing techniques.

Most young men are then instructed to follow up with GPs, psychologists or other health professionals in the general community.

But taking that next step involves overcoming the stigma associated with help-seeking, the shame of having called an ambulance and deep tensions between anxiety and what it means to be a man.

This means many young men slip through the cracks. And without ongoing mental health support, they face high risks of presenting again to emergency services with increasingly severe mental health symptoms.

To address this, we need to:

  • ramp up conversations about men’s anxiety and take their experiences seriously

  • develop an awareness campaign about men’s anxiety. Awareness campaigns have successfully dismantled stigma and shed light on men’s depression and suicide

  • improve diagnosis of men’s anxiety disorders by up-skilling and training clinicians to detect anxiety and the unique and distinct constellations of symptoms in men

  • create accessible pathways to early support through digital psychological education resources, focused on improving awareness and literacy surrounding men’s anxiety experiences.


If this article has raised issues for you, or if you’re concerned about someone you know, call Lifeline on 13 11 14.The Conversation

Krista Fisher, Research Fellow, Centre for Youth Mental Health, The University of MelbourneDan Lubman, Executive Clinical Director, Turning Point & Director of Monash Addiction Research Centre, Monash UniversitySimon Rice, Associate Professor & Clinical Psychologist, Mental Health in Elite Sports, The University of Melbourne, and Zac Seidler, Associate Professor, Centre for Youth Mental Health, The University of Melbourne

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

6 ways live music could help combat the loneliness epidemic

Shutterstock
Nikki RickardThe University of Melbourne

Among the rising tide of loneliness and disconnection, live music is proving to be more than just a good time; it’s a powerful antidote. Whether it’s a pub gig or a stadium show, live music brings people together in ways that matter.

In a recent paper, my colleagues and I reviewed 59 studies of more than 18,000 live music attendees, mostly in Western countries such as the United Kingdom, United States, Australia, New Zealand and parts of Europe.

Here are six ways live music helps alleviate loneliness, based on our and other researchers’ findings.

Opportunities for social connection

Live music events offer people the opportunity to deepen connections with friends, and spark conversations with strangers. They can also act as bridges for people from diverse backgrounds to come together, with music as a common ground.

Music Australia recently reported First Nations and younger audiences are especially likely to value live events as a chance to make new friends, and to feel an enhanced sense of belonging.

Bonding through shared experiences

At heavy metal or punk gigs, the chaos of a mosh pit becomes a surprising display of harmony – despite lyrics of rebellion or anarchy. Strangers move in sync, expressing their private emotions in a communal way.

Research shows syncing to music, even in silent discos, enhances positive feelings and behaviours towards coparticipants. Emotional contagion, or “catching” emotions from the music or other audience members, can also contribute to emotional resonance.

When a crowd shares emotions, movement and even values, a strong feeling of unity can emerge. French sociologist Émile Durkheim called this “collective effervescence”.

Focusing on something bigger

Creative Victoria recently found the primary reason people attend live music is to connect with others and feel part of something bigger than themselves.

Live music can create this communal experience through transcendent emotions. Research into awe-inspiring events reveals they can shift our focus away from ourselves and towards a larger, interconnected whole.

This helps explain why attending live performances can encourage positive social behaviours and reduce loneliness, even if an attendee doesn’t actually speak to anyone.

Sharing one’s authentic self

Live music events, particularly festivals, have been described as “idealised communities” where attendees feel safe to express their authentic selves, free from everyday social constraints.

This “time out of time” experience can be exploratory and liberating, allowing people to connect with others in ways they might not in their regular lives. The safety, trust and respect within these spaces can be particularly empowering for historically marginalised groups, such as LGBTQIA+ and culturally diverse individuals.

Long-term identity building

Shared rituals and artefacts, from Swifties’ wristbands to EDM glow sticks, help live music fans feel like they are part of a meaningful collective. These practices are especially powerful for young people, whose social identities are still developing.

Even during the pandemic, live stream audiences overcame isolation by connecting with others through ritualistic use of emojis and comments.

Long after a show ends, merchandise, band tattoos, online fan forums and recordings of the artist’s music all help sustain feelings of connection with other members of the “scene”.

Music as a social surrogate

Sometimes, live music feels like more than just music. It can feel like a friend: it can listen, empathise and offer comfort when no one else is around.

Research shows music can reduce loneliness by reminding us of real relationships. At times, this can extend to forming parasocial relationships with the musicians themselves, which can offer solace during loneliness. This function of music became especially clear during the pandemic and lockdowns.

Reviving community

Looking at our research, it’s undeniable live music is a beacon of community and inclusiveness in an increasingly disconnected world.

But despite its enormous potential, the industry in Australia is at a crossroads. Post-pandemic recovery has been slow, with engagement in local artists’ events and events at smaller venues (such as pubs and clubs) declining.

Music Australia has found younger people are preferring to stay home for their entertainment. And Creative Victoria reports more than a quarter of the live music market has not attended an event in the past three years, prompting this warning: “These audiences need a compelling reason to entice them to return to in-person attendance.”

Alleviating loneliness, especially among young people, might just be that reason.

Whether it’s through a chance meeting with a like-minded individual at a local gig, or an identity-affirming experience at a festival, live music stands as a universal language that is capable of bringing people together to overcome feelings of isolation.

By recognising its value, we’re not just helping revive an industry – we’re tackling one of society’s most pressing issues.The Conversation

Nikki Rickard, Professor, Wellbeing Science, The University of Melbourne

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

New research reveals Australian authors say no to AI using their work – even if money is on the table

Paul CrosbyMacquarie University and Jordi McKenzieMacquarie University

When it was revealed that Meta had used a dataset of pirated books to train its latest AI model, Llama, Australian authors were furious. Works by writers including Liane Moriarty, Tim Winton, Melissa Lucashenko, Christos Tsiolkas and many others had been scraped from the online shadow library LibGen without permission.

It was just the latest in a series of incidents where published books have been fed into commercial AI systems without the knowledge of their creators, and without any credit or compensation.

Our new report, Australian Authors’ Sentiment on Generative AI, co-authored with Shujie Liang and Tessa Barrington, offers the first large-scale empirical study of how Australian authors and illustrators feel about this rapidly evolving technology. It reveals just how widespread the concern is.

Unsurprisingly, most Australian authors do not want their work used to train AI systems. But this is not only about payment. It is about consent, trust and the future of their profession.

A clear rejection

In late 2024, we surveyed over 400 members of the Australian Society of Authors, the national peak body for writers and illustrators. We asked about their use of AI, their understanding of how generative models are trained, and whether they would agree to their work being used for training – with or without compensation.

79% said they would not allow their existing work to be used to train AI models, even if they were paid. Almost as many – 77% – said the same about future work.

Among those open to payment, half expected at least $A1,000 per work. A small number nominated figures in the tens or hundreds of thousands.

But the dominant response, from both established and emerging authors, was a firm “no”.

This presents a serious roadblock for those hoping publishers might broker blanket licensing agreements with AI firms. If most authors are unwilling to grant permission under any terms, then standard contract clauses or opt-in models are unlikely to deliver a practical or ethical solution.

Income loss and a shrinking profession

Authors are not just concerned about how their past work is used. They are also worried about what generative AI means for their future.

70% of respondents believe AI is likely to displace income-generating work for authors and illustrators. Some already reported losing jobs or being offered lower rates based on assumptions that AI tools would cut costs.

This fear compounds an already difficult economic reality. For many, writing is sustained only through other jobs or a partner’s support. As previous research has shown, most Australian authors earn well below the national average. In 2022, the average income writers earned from their work was $18,200 per annum.

Generative AI risks further eroding the already fragile foundation on which Australia’s literary culture depends. If professional writers cannot make a living and new voices cannot see a viable path into the industry, the pipeline of Australian storytelling will shrink.

70% of Australian authors believe AI is likely to displace income-generating work. Viktoriia Hnatiuk/Shutterstock

More than a copyright issue

At first glance, this might seem like a technical or legal issue, concerning rights management and royalty payments. But our findings show the objections run much deeper.

An overwhelming 91% of respondents said it was unfair for their work to be used to train AI models without permission or compensation. More than half believed AI tools could plausibly mimic their creative style. This raised concerns not only about unauthorised use, but also about imitation and displacement.

For many authors, their work is more than just intellectual property. It represents their voice, their identity and years of creative labour, often undertaken with little financial return.

The idea that a machine could replicate that work without consent, credit or payment is not only unsettling; for many, it feels like a fundamental violation of creative ownership.

This is not simply a case of authors being hesitant to engage with emerging technologies. Our findings suggest a more informed and considered stance. Most respondents had a moderate or strong understanding of how generative AI models are trained. They also made clear distinctions between tools that support creativity and those designed to replace it entirely.

What they lacked was basic information. 80% of respondents did not know whether their work had already been used in AI training. This absence of transparency is a major source of frustration, even for well-informed professionals.

Without clear information, informed consent is impossible. And without consent, even the most innovative AI applications will be viewed with suspicion.

The publishing and tech industries cannot expect trust from creators while keeping them in the dark about how their work is used.

A sustainable future far from guaranteed

Generative AI is already reshaping the creative landscape, but the path ahead remains uncertain.

Our findings reveal a fundamental dilemma. If most Australian authors will not grant permission for their work to be used in AI training, even if compensation is offered, the prospect of negotiated agreements between AI companies, publishers and authors is unlikely.

What we are seeing is not just a policy gap. It reflects a deeper breakdown in trust. There is a growing belief among authors that the value of their creative work is being eroded by systems built on its use.

The widespread rejection of licensing models points to a looming impasse. If developers proceed without consent when authors are refusing to participate, it will be difficult to build the shared foundations that a sustainable creative economy requires.

Whether that gap can be bridged is still an open question. But if writers cannot see a viable or respected place for themselves, the long-term consequences for Australia’s cultural life will be significant.

If Australia wants a fair and forward-looking creative sector, it cannot afford to leave its authors out of the conversation.The Conversation

Paul Crosby, Senior Lecturer, Department of Economics, Macquarie University and Jordi McKenzie, Associate Professor, Department of Economics, Macquarie University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Disclaimer: These articles are not intended to provide medical advice, diagnosis or treatment.  Views expressed here do not necessarily reflect those of Pittwater Online News or its staff.

Week Four May 2025 (May 19 -25)

Disaster or digital spectacle? The dangers of using floods to create social media content

Samuel CornellUNSW Sydney and Amy PedenUNSW Sydney

Almost 700 rescues had been carried out in New South Wales by Friday morning as record-breaking rainfall pounds the state. Tragically, four people have died in floodwaters.

Amid the chaos, videos posted on social media show people deliberately entering or standing above swollen rivers and flooded roads. It is a pattern of dangerous behaviour that occurs frequently during natural disasters in Australia.

Filming unsafe acts for social media is not just risky for participants. It may inspire copycat behaviour, and, if things go wrong, can endanger the lives of rescuers. It’s a public health problem which requires new remedies.

Selfies in floods: a risky business

During a flood, water can be deceiving. Just 15cm of water can knock an adult off their feet or cause a car to lose traction and float. Submerged debris and contaminated water add to the dangers.

Emergency services routinely warn the public not to enter floodwaters – on foot or in vehicles. But many people ignore the warnings, including those out to create social media content.

In a startling example posted on Tiktok during the current floods, a young man stands on a mossy log which has fallen over a flooded river. The video, accompanied by dramatic music, shows swirling floodwaters surging beneath him. One wrong step, and the man could easily have drowned.

In other examples posted on Tiktok in recent days, a woman wades through murky floodwaters, and a person films as the car they are travelling in drives down a flooded road.

Similar behaviour was observed during floods in Townsville earlier this year. Residents filmed themselves diving and wading into floodwaters, and towing each other on inflatable rafts.

And during ex-Tropical Cyclone Alfred, social media was filled with images of people in Queensland surfing dangerous swells and wading in rough surf.

A worrying trend

Our research explores the links between social media and adverse health outcomes.

Selfie-related injury has become a public health concern. People are increasingly venturing off-trail, seeking out attractive but hazardous locations such as cliff edges and coastal rock platforms.

These behaviours can lead to injury and death. They can also put emergency services personnel in harm’s way. In 2021, for example, a woman fell into a swollen river on Canberra’s outskirts while trying to take a selfie with friends, prompting a police official to warn:

There is no photo or social media post that is worth risking your life to get. Any water rescue puts the lives of not only of yourself but those of emergency services personnel at risk.

Getting to grips with the problem

How should the problem be tackled? Previous research by others has recommended “no-selfie zones”, barriers, and signs as ways to prevent selfie incidents. But our research suggests these measures may not be enough.

The phenomenon of selfie-related incidents requires a public health approach. This entails addressing the behaviour through prevention, education, and other interventions such as via social media platforms.

In the latest floods, unsafe behaviour has occurred despite a series of official flood, weather and other warnings. Residents also continue to drive into floodwaters, despite repeated pleas from authorities.

Official warnings compete with – and can lose out to – more emotionally compelling, visually rich content. If the public sees other people behaving recklessly and apparently unharmed, then even clear, fact-based warnings can be ignored.

This is especially true in communities experiencing “alert-fatigue” after having gone through disasters before.

Sometimes, vague terminology in warnings means the messages don’t necessarily cut through. We’ve seen this before in relation to surf safety. Technical phrases such as “hazardous swell” don’t change behaviour if people don’t understand what they mean.

For warnings to work, they need to be clear and provide instruction – stating what the danger actually is, and what to explicitly do, or not do.

For social media users, that might mean spelling out not to go into floodwaters to capture content for social media.

We’ve also previously called on social media companies to be held more accountable for the dangerous content they publish – by flagging risky content and supporting in-app safety messaging, especially at high-risk locations or during extreme weather events.

What to do right now

If you’re in or near a flood zone, follow guidance from emergency services to keep yourself and your loved ones safe.

When it comes to using social media in an emergency:

  • stay entirely out of floodwaters, even for a quick photo

  • think before you post. Your safety is more important than your content. No post is worth risking your life

  • avoid glamourising risk. Sharing risky photos or videos can influence others to do the same, potentially with worse outcomes

  • follow official advice. Floodwaters are unpredictable. Warnings are issued for a reason

  • use your platform for good. Share verified information, support affected communities and help amplify safety messages.

As extreme weather becomes more frequent in Australia under climate change, so too will the urge to document them. But we risk turning disasters into digital spectacles – at the expense of our lives and that of rescuers.The Conversation

Samuel Cornell, PhD Candidate in Public Health & Community Medicine, School of Population Health, UNSW Sydney and Amy Peden, NHMRC Research Fellow, School of Population Health and Co-founder UNSW Beach Safety Research Group, UNSW Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Public Education has life-changing impacts

May 22 is National Public Education Day, a chance to highlight this month’s impressive recipients of the Proudly Public Awards. The NSW Department of Education's media officer Kristi Pritchard-Owens reports.

As soon as Rafeef Al-Majidi spoke at the Sydney Town Hall, it was apparent why the Miller Technology High School student had been selected as student speaker for the 2025 Proudly Public Awards.

Born in Iraq, her ethnic and religious group is Mandaean, a persecuted minority from the south of the country.

With confidence and sincerity, Rafeef told of a childhood enduring discrimination due to her religion and gender, the loss of loved ones in war and ongoing instability – and how arriving in Australia as an 8-year-old refugee in 2017 was a “profoundly revolutionary experience” because at her school she could see a way to achieve her potential for the first time in her life.

“The public education system is one of our great national treasures,” the Year 10 student said.

“It is a place where people are not only recognised but encouraged and empowered to succeed.

“This experience has transformed my life, and the lives of everyone in front of me and around me; my siblings, my community and the more than 700,00 students I share our system with.”

The Proudly Public Awards celebrate the hard work and dedication of staff and students in our public schools by providing scholarships to help recipients with learning costs.

Miss Al-Majidi says that her scholarship will assist with school expenses including textbooks, excursion fees, uniform and extracurricular activities.

This will allow her to use her limited savings for other important things, like obtaining her driver's license and passport.

NSW Department of Education Secretary Murat Dizdar thanked the Public Education Foundation for its unwavering commitment to supporting public education.

“It was fantastic to celebrate the lifechanging impact our schools have on young lives at the Proudly Public Awards,” Mr Dizdar said.

“As a proud beneficiary of public education, I will always believe in its transformative powers for students and young people.”

“The students honoured tonight are proof of that potential being realised and the teachers, school leaders and families in their corner.”

Almost 300 students, staff and recent graduates from NSW public schools received awards in Sydney on Tuesday 13 May, with a full list of recipients available at the Public Education Foundation website.

In 2025 the foundation is supporting more than 800 scholars across Australia, a record number of scholarships which are entirely supported by donations.

The NSW Department of Education is proud to be a major partner of the Public Education Foundation.

East Coast Australia - New Wave (1980)

by/from: Australian and New Zealand Surf Film Archive

 

Opportunities:

Sydney HSC and Careers Expo 2025

Sydney HSC and Careers Expo.

Start Date & Time: May 29, 2025 9:00 am

End Date & Time: May 31, 2025 3:00 pm

Venue: Royal Randwick Racecourse

The HSC and Careers Expo provides resources and information for tertiary courses, career and employment options, the HSC, study strategies, the gap year and much more. A feature of The Expo is the seminar program with presentations on course, career and study advice, employment opportunities and key HSC subjects.

Exhibitors with:

  • information and resources for the HSC
  • career and study advice
  • international exchange and GAP year programs
  • Australia’s top universities, TAFE and training colleges

Seminars on:

  • HSC subjects and study advice
  • tertiary courses and careers

Tickets and Program/Visitors Guide

2025 Dorothea Mackellar Poetry Awards entries are now open!!

The Dorothea Mackellar Poetry Awards seek to capture the imaginations of school students across Australia, inspiring them to express their thoughts and feelings through the medium of poetry in their pursuit of literary excellence. The standard of entries year after year is consistently high, yet the winning poems never cease to impress the judges. From reading the entries of both the primary and secondary students, one can get an idea of the current events and issues that have had a great impact on young Australians over the decades. 

The awards are held every year and open for entries until the 30th of June with the winners announced on the first Friday in September.

For more information on the competition and how to enter CLICK HERE.

Conditions of entries:

  • Only students enrolled in an Australian education facility (Kindergarten to Year 12) are eligible to enter.
  • Poems must be no more than 80 lines with no illustrations, graphics or decorations included.
  • Entries are limited to up to 3 poems per student.
  • Poems on any subject are accepted, the annual theme is optional.
  • Poems that have been previously entered in the Dorothea Mackellar Poetry Awards are NOT ELIGIBLE to be entered.
  • Poems entered in other competitions are eligible to be entered.

Our poets are encouraged to take inspiration from wherever they may find it, however if they are looking for some direction, they are invited to use this year’s optional theme to inspire their entries.

“All the beautiful things” has been selected as the 2025 optional theme. Students are encouraged to write about topics and experiences that spark their poetic genius (in whatever form they choose).

How TAFE NSW Ryde is helping locals supercharge careers

Northern Sydney locals have been urged to look to TAFE NSW Ryde to “supercharge” their career options amid a new report revealing more than a third of workers are considering changing jobs this year.

IA survey by global employment company, Indeed, predicted 5.5 million Australians – more than a third of the nation’s workforce – were actively considering a job change this year.

One of many locals who turned to TAFE NSW to make a career change is former hospitality worker, Oliver Reeve.

After moving from the United Kingdom to Australia 12 years ago and enjoying a successful career in hospitality, 32-year-old Oliver was ready for something new. A love of the outdoors and plants inspired him to enrol at TAFE NSW to study landscape design and complete a Certificate III in Landscape Construction.

“Since graduating from TAFE NSW in 2024, I’ve been using my skills to design play spaces at schools and childcare centres across Greater Sydney,” Mr Reeve said. “My aim is to create playgrounds that support holistic use and incorporate natural materials.”

Oliver says studying at TAFE NSW has given him a strong start in his new career, allowing him to use his skills to positively impact the lives of families and children in Sydney’s growing communities. TAFE NSW Managing Director Chloe Read said a rapidly changing jobs market meant it was critical locals continue to invest in new skills.

“The jobs market is going through a fundamental change, shaped by factors like technology, globalisation, and changing demographics,” Ms Read said. "That means there's never been a more important time to consider upskilling or reskilling to future-proof your career.”

According to the global 2025 Future of Jobs Survey, 70 per cent of employers are expecting to hire staff with new skills over the next five years. NSW Minister for Skills, TAFE and Tertiary Education Steve Whan said National Careers Week was a reminder of the diverse and rewarding career pathways vocational education and training can unlock.

“Vocational education and training opens the door to meaningful, hands-on careers in industries that are growing and evolving,” Mr Whan said.

“TAFE NSW plays a vital role in preparing students with the real-world skills and experience they need to thrive — whether they’re starting out, changing direction, or advancing their career.

Lismore man carves out new career path with TAFE NSW stonemasonry course

A Lismore man has credited TAFE NSW with helping him turn his life around and launch a promising career as a stonemason.

Shane McKay, 23, a proud Widjabul Wia-bal and Arakwal man, was working as a delivery driver and struggling to find purpose when his sister suggested he explore apprenticeship options.

Eager to find an in-demand career, he stumbled upon stonemasonry and was offered a week’s trial with Ballina’s B&H Stone. He immediately fell in love with the profession and is now a successful third-year apprentice, with plans to eventually open his own business.

“I was doing nothing with my life and it got to the point where my sister demanded I find a more solid career,” Mr McKay said. “I knew I’d found my calling as soon as I started. It really has changed my life.”

An ageing workforce and intense competition for skilled labour in the construction industry has contributed to a growing shortage of stonemasons nationally. TAFE NSW Miller, the only training organisation in NSW to teach the trade, is addressing the shortage by training the next generation of stonemasons.

TAFE NSW Miller is a quiet and relaxed campus located on Hoxton Park Road, just off the M7 in Sydney's south west.

Now a third-year apprentice with Ballina’s B&H Stone, Mr McKay crafts and installs kitchen benchtops by cutting, shaping, and polishing natural or engineered stone materials. “It’s a great feeling working on a marble or granite top all week and then fitting it at a job and seeing the reaction of the client,” he said.

Mr McKay attends TAFE NSW Miller seven times a year for one week “blocks” of learning, and said his time at TAFE NSW had been invaluable in developing him as a tradesman. “Going to TAFE NSW is a whole different ball game because I’m able to use tools, like a chisel and hammer, that I just wouldn’t use normally,” he said. “It’s really broadened my skill set and built my confidence.”

He said he would eventually like to start his own business, building rock and sandstone walls at residential properties. TAFE NSW Miller Head Teacher of Stonemasonry Michael Landers said TAFE NSW stonemasonry graduates were in such high demand, he regularly fielded calls from employers.

“It’s a great industry and one that many TAFE NSW graduates have built rewarding careers in,” Mr Landers said. “It’s extremely gratifying to create things with your hands that will last longer than you do and knowing you can help preserve these magnificent old buildings or help a grieving family cherish the memory of loved ones.”

According to Jobs and Skills Australia, there are about 27,100 stonemasons employed nationally, with median weekly earnings of $1597.

TAFE NSW is connecting accountants to jobs in the film industry

TAFE NSW is connecting the production industry with accounting graduates to help meet the rising demand for skilled accountants in the film and TV industry.

Data from the NSW Screen and Digital Games Strategy 2025 – 2027 shows NSW is home to 51% of Australia’s screen production businesses and employed 13,500 people in 2021-22 in while the screen industry added almost $1.1 billion to the state economy in this same period.

The expansion in streaming services and challenging conditions overseas has resulted in more diverse, high-quality productions being developed in Australia. This has increased the demand for production accountants and tax experts to help companies navigate budgets, tax incentives and project funding options.

TAFE NSW is working with local production companies to highlight exciting accounting jobs within the film and TV industry through networking opportunities and information sessions. The most recent was a live webinar on the 30th of April, where students heard directly from production companies looking to hire accountants, including Goalpost Pictures, Matchbox Pictures, and Easy Tiger Productions. The webinar also featured Entertainment Partners, a global provider of financial and production management services for the film and TV industry.

The industry speakers gave the students tips on getting started in the industry, the different roles and career pathways available, and current and upcoming productions in the pipeline. During the live session, TAFE NSW students were able to engage with industry professionals, asking questions and gaining valuable insights through the interactive Q&A.

TAFE NSW graduate Themy Pham also shared his story at the event. Themy began his study journey through a Certificate IV in Accounting and Bookkeeping, and went on to complete the Diploma of Accounting at TAFE NSW. He now works for the global company Entertainment Partners as a Senior Incentives and Production Accountant Assistant.

Themy says his decision to study at TAFE NSW changed his life.

“I was 36 years old when I chose to pursue this career, and I’ve never looked back,” he said.

“It was through the support of my teachers at TAFE NSW that I was able to complete these courses, which gave me the qualifications, skills, and connections I needed to find success in this industry.”

“Thanks to a networking event similar to this one, I got my foot in the door at the fantastic company I now work for, and was introduced to the person who eventually hired me.”

“My job is incredibly diverse. Working in an accounting role within a creative industry means I can use my skills to work on unique and fast-moving projects, alongside people who are incredibly passionate about what they do.”

TAFE NSW Team Leader Julie Law says accountants support a wide range of industries, making it an attractive career choice.

“There are so many career pathways in accounting that students can take, with new opportunities coming up all the time, as the industry expands beyond traditional jobs,” she said.

“Our teaching team is regularly connecting with industry groups and organisations looking for staff, through networking events and guest speakers, to connect employers directly to graduates who are looking for jobs.”

Partner and Executive Producer at Goalpost Pictures Australia, Ben Grant says the opportunities for graduates in the industry are growing.

“Production accounting in the film and television industry is an exciting career choice and, in fact, it was where my career in the industry really took off,” he said. “We are experiencing a shortage of experienced accountants and assistants, so it is definitely an opportune time to get a foot in the door if you want a career in the creative industries.”

Big Brother Movement's Scholarships Now open for All Young Australians

For a century, the Big Brother Movement (BBM) has been a catalyst for change and opportunity, opening doors for young people to explore the world and make their mark.

It began as Australia’s most successful migration program for young men moving from the UK to Australia, the Big Brother Movement. 

Today, built on this legacy, BBM continues to empower young people to venture overseas for work experience through their Global Footprints Scholarships program. 

So instead of bringing young people to Australia to access all the opportunities here, they are providing a chance for young Australians to follow their vocational dreams overseas.

few insights into their Global Footprints Scholarship opportunity for young men and women aged 18 to 24.

What is a Global Footprints Scholarship?

A Global Footprints Scholarship is a self-directed career development opportunity for young Australians in agriculture, trades and horticulture. Successful applicants receive an AUD $9,000 grant to travel overseas for industry experience, professional development workshops, networking opportunities and mentoring.  University Students are not eligible to apply - this is for young people outside of that system.

Scholarships are awarded once a year. 

Who can apply?

To be eligible for a Global Footprints Scholarship you must be an Australian citizen or permanent resident and be between 18-25 years old. Check their “Who can apply?” page for full details. If your application is shortlisted you will need to provide evidence for the above.

Applications open every year on 1 May and close 1 June. Shortlisted applicants will be notified by September. 

Will you assist me in finding a work placement?

The Global Footprints Scholarship is a self-directed career development opportunity. You are expected to have a good idea of where you want to go and why, including an understanding of who the industry trailblazers in your field are and where they are located. Networking to find your placement is the first critical learning opportunity of your scholarship experience. We will give you advice on how to approach them, and put you in touch with past scholars who can help.

Find out more and apply at: www.globalfootprints.org.au

Inaugural Murcutt Symposium 2025, 11-13 September 2025

Glenn Murcutt AO is Australia's most celebrated living architect. To mark more than five decades of architectural practice, the inaugural Murcutt Symposium offers 3 days of tours, activities and events in Sydney from 11-13 September 2025.

Murcutt will not be alone in headlining the Murcutt Symposium in 2025. Fellow Pritzker Prize winning architect and friend Francis Kéré will join Murcutt on stage over two days in Sydney - delivering a public lecture, and keynote at a one-day symposium.

Join us for a rare chance to come inside some of Murcutt's most awarded buildings on guided tours. Hear the backstory and share in tales of the design evolution from those who have lived in and loved these places.

Witness the first ever award of the Murcutt Pin, a new international award for architecture designed by Murcutt and presented at the flagship public Murcutt Oration in Sydney on Friday, 12 September.

Dive deep into the themes that have driven Murcutt and informed his unique model of practice, and his internationally awarded projects at a one-day symposium.

Join us for 3 days of tours, talks and deep dives into architecture with a meaningful connection to place.

Murcutt building tours
Thursday 11 September: 8am-5pm
This is an exceptionally rare chance to go inside the iconic Nicholas House (Mount Irvine) and Simpson Lee House (Mount Wilson), with Glenn Murcutt AO as your guide. 
Lunch provided. Vigorous walking involved. Numbers strictly limited.

Friday 12 September: 1.30pm-5pm
Come inside an early Murcutt house in Cromer, north of Sydney, that has been described as "a hidden masterpiece in the suburbs" - given a new life by architect Matt Chan, in consultation with Glenn Murcutt.
Vigorous walking involved. Numbers strictly limited.

Murcutt Oration 
Friday 12 September 2025: 6pm-8pm
Award of the inaugural Murcutt Pin, and Murcutt Oration 
The inaugural Murcutt Oration will be delivered by Francis Kéré, laureate of the Pritzker Prize (2022) and Praemium Imperiale (2023) - widely recognised as one of the worlds leading architects.

Murcutt Symposium 
Saturday 13 September 2025: 9am-5pm
Join us for a deep dive into the themes behind Murcutt's work (3 hours Formal CPD, 2 hours informal CPD):

In-conversation - Glenn Murcutt AO and Francis Kéré
Hear these two eminent Pritzker Prize winning architects and warm friends engage in conversation on events and experiences that have shaped their personal lives and their practice over decades. 

Keynote - Piers Taylor (UK)
Piers Taylor is the founder and principal of the highly awarded Invisible Studio, and Professor of Knowledge Exchange in Architecture at UWE; founding 2 renowned academic programs: ‘Studio in the Woods’ and 'AA Design and Make'. Both engage students in hands-on design and construction. Piers Taylor originally studied in Australia and currently lives in a prototypical self built award winning house in the UK and manages a 100 acre woodland as a research resource for the practice.

Healthy buildings breathe - Lindsay Clare, Ché Wall, Kerry Clare, Rod Simpson
Buildings that breathe and have good natural ventilation are now event more critical in a changing climate. Are our current planning and building regulatory settings match-fit? Three eminent practitioners question the current state of play at the intersection of architecture, environmental science and emerging building regulation. 

Design for climate/Design for change - Carol Marra, Marra + Yeh
Carol Marra is an award-winning architect and Churchill Fellow specialising in sustainable and climate-resilient design. For over 25 years, her architecture, advocacy and research have guided the success of city-based and regional projects. Awarded an Alastair Swayn Strategic Research grant, her practice recently released Design for Climate | Design for Change, a toolkit for climate-resilient design. Originally from Argentina but trained in the United States, Carol has worked across cultural landscapes from North America, Australia and the Asia Pacific region, in urban, regional and remote locations.

The Murcutt legacy - celebrated documentary film maker Catherine Hunter shares footage from 30 years following Glenn Murcutt AO.
Catherine Hunter has followed and documented the work of celebrated architect Glenn Murcutt for more than thirty years and collaborated on a number of film projects. Share in Murcutt's warmth, humanity and skill in pursuit of an architectural vision that always seeks to respond to place and provide delight.

Contributors
Glenn Murcutt AO, Australia
Francis Kéré, Germany/Burkina Faso
Piers Taylor, UK
Brit Andresen, Australia
Kerry Clare, Australia
Lindsay Clare, Australia
Ché Wall, Australia
Richard Leplastrier AO, Australia
Peter Stutchbury, Australia
Carol Marra, Australia  

Tickets are designed for you to choose one or more events, including ticket packages if you can't decide. 
The 2025 Murcutt Symposium is supported by the Robin Boyd Foundation and National Gallery of Victoria; Sydney Design Week (thanks to the Powerhouse); and the Futuna Chapel Trust (NZ). 

This event is presented in partnership with the State Library of New South Wales.

Financial help for young people

Concessions and financial support for young people.

Includes:

  • You could receive payments and services from Centrelink: Use the payment and services finder to check what support you could receive.
  • Apply for a concession Opal card for students: Receive a reduced fare when travelling on public transport.
  • Financial support for students: Get financial help whilst studying or training.
  • Youth Development Scholarships: Successful applicants will receive $1000 to help with school expenses and support services.
  • Tertiary Access Payment for students: The Tertiary Access Payment can help you with the costs of moving to undertake tertiary study.
  • Relocation scholarship: A once a year payment if you get ABSTUDY or Youth Allowance if you move to or from a regional or remote area for higher education study.
  • Get help finding a place to live and paying your rent: Rent Choice Youth helps young people aged 16 to 24 years to rent a home.

Visit: https://www.nsw.gov.au/living-nsw/young-people/young-people-financial-help

School Leavers Support

Explore the School Leavers Information Kit (SLIK) as your guide to education, training and work options in 2022;
As you prepare to finish your final year of school, the next phase of your journey will be full of interesting and exciting opportunities. You will discover new passions and develop new skills and knowledge.

We know that this transition can sometimes be challenging. With changes to the education and workforce landscape, you might be wondering if your planned decisions are still a good option or what new alternatives are available and how to pursue them.

There are lots of options for education, training and work in 2022 to help you further your career. This information kit has been designed to help you understand what those options might be and assist you to choose the right one for you. Including:
  • Download or explore the SLIK here to help guide Your Career.
  • School Leavers Information Kit (PDF 5.2MB).
  • School Leavers Information Kit (DOCX 0.9MB).
  • The SLIK has also been translated into additional languages.
  • Download our information booklets if you are rural, regional and remote, Aboriginal or Torres Strait Islander, or living with disability.
  • Support for Regional, Rural and Remote School Leavers (PDF 2MB).
  • Support for Regional, Rural and Remote School Leavers (DOCX 0.9MB).
  • Support for Aboriginal and/or Torres Strait Islander School Leavers (PDF 2MB).
  • Support for Aboriginal and/or Torres Strait Islander School Leavers (DOCX 1.1MB).
  • Support for School Leavers with Disability (PDF 2MB).
  • Support for School Leavers with Disability (DOCX 0.9MB).
  • Download the Parents and Guardian’s Guide for School Leavers, which summarises the resources and information available to help you explore all the education, training, and work options available to your young person.

School Leavers Information Service

Are you aged between 15 and 24 and looking for career guidance?

Call 1800 CAREER (1800 227 337).

SMS 'SLIS2022' to 0429 009 435.

Our information officers will help you:
  • navigate the School Leavers Information Kit (SLIK),
  • access and use the Your Career website and tools; and
  • find relevant support services if needed.
You may also be referred to a qualified career practitioner for a 45-minute personalised career guidance session. Our career practitioners will provide information, advice and assistance relating to a wide range of matters, such as career planning and management, training and studying, and looking for work.

You can call to book your session on 1800 CAREER (1800 227 337) Monday to Friday, from 9am to 7pm (AEST). Sessions with a career practitioner can be booked from Monday to Friday, 9am to 7pm.

This is a free service, however minimal call/text costs may apply.

Call 1800 CAREER (1800 227 337) or SMS SLIS2022 to 0429 009 435 to start a conversation about how the tools in Your Career can help you or to book a free session with a career practitioner.

All downloads and more available at: www.yourcareer.gov.au/school-leavers-support

Word Of The Week: Docent

Word of the Week remains a keynote in 2025, simply to throw some disruption in amongst the 'yeah-nah' mix. 

Noun

1. (in universities and colleges) a member of the teaching staff immediately below professorial rank. 2. a person who acts as a guide, typically on a voluntary basis, in a museum, art gallery, or zoo. 3. Someone who provides guidance - or promotes learning.

From: late 19th century (1880): via German from Latin docent- ‘teaching’, from docēre  ‘teach’. 

The term is derived from the Latin word docēns, which is the third-person plural present active indicative of docēre ('to teach, to lecture'). Becoming a docent is often referred to as habilitation or doctor of science and is an academic qualification that shows that the holder is qualified to be employed at the level of associate or full professor. The title of docent is conferred by some European universities to denote a specific academic appointment within a set structure of academic ranks at or below the full professor rank, similar to a British readership, a French maître de conférences (MCF), and equal to or above the title of assistant professor.

Docent is the highest academic title in several countries, and the qualifying criteria are research output that corresponds to 3–5 doctoral dissertations, supervision of PhD students, and experience in teaching at the undergraduate and graduate level.

Docent is also used at some (mainly German) universities generically for a person who has the right to teach. In Southeast European countries, it is the first position that people achieve once they enter the University, and after the completion of their PhD degree.

In 2025, NSW celebrated Teacher Appreciation Day on Tuesday, May 6th as part of Teacher Appreciation Week, which ran from Monday, May 5th to Friday, May 9th. This was an opportunity to show gratitude to teachers for their dedication and hard work. 

World Teachers' Day in Australia is observed on the last Friday of October, which is Friday, October 31st in 2025. 

Please don’t tape your mouth at night, whatever TikTok says. A new study shows why this viral trend can be risky

K.IvanS/Shutterstock
Moira JungeMonash University

You might have heard of people using tape to literally keep their mouths shut while they sleep. Mouth taping has become a popular trend on social media, with many fans claiming it helps improve sleep and overall health.

The purported benefits of mouth taping during sleep are largely anecdotal, and include claims of better airflow, less snoring, improved asthma symptoms, less of a dry mouth, being less likely to have bad breath, and better sleep quality.

As the trend has gained momentum in recent years the claims have also come to include improved skin, mood and digestion – and even a sharper jawline.

The rationale for mouth taping during sleep is to encourage breathing through the nose rather than through the mouth. When a person’s nasal passages are blocked, breathing switches from the nose to the mouth. Mouth breathing has been linked to conditions such as obstructive sleep apnoea.

But is mouth taping an effective way to address these issues, and is it safe? A new review suggests taping your mouth shut while you sleep offers limited benefits – and could pose risks.

What did the review find?

In a new paper, Canadian researchers reviewed the scientific literature on mouth taping, searching for studies that mentioned terms such as “mouth breathing”, “mouth taping” and “sleep”.

They searched specifically for studies looking at people with known mouth breathing and breathing-related sleeping problems such as obstructive sleep apnoea to understand the potential benefits and harms of mouth taping for this group.

Obstructive sleep apnoea is a condition where your airway is partly or completely blocked at times while you’re asleep. This can cause you to stop breathing for short periods, called “apnoeas”. Apnoeas can happen many times a night, resulting in lowered oxygen levels in the blood as well as sleep disruption.

The researchers found ten eligible studies published between 1999 and 2024, with a total of 213 participants. Eight studies looked at mouth taping, and two studies involved using a chin strap to keep the mouth shut.

Only two studies identified any benefits of mouth taping for mild obstructive sleep apnoea. The observed improvements – to measures such as oxygen levels in the blood and number of apnoeas per hour – were modest.

And although they were statistically significant, they were probably not clinically significant. This means these changes likely wouldn’t make much difference to symptoms or treatment decisions.

The remainder of studies found no evidence mouth taping helps to treat mouth breathing or related conditions.

A woman asleep in a bed with black tape over her mouth.
Mouth taping has become a popular social media trend. K.IvanS/Shutterstock

What’s more, four studies warned about potential serious harms. In particular, covering the mouth could pose a risk of asphyxiation (lack of oxygen that can lead to unconsciousness or death) for people whose mouth breathing is caused by significant blockage of the nasal airways. This kind of nasal obstruction could be a result of conditions such as hay fever, deviated septum, or enlarged tonsils.

In other words, mouth taping is definitely not a good idea if you have a blocked nose, as it’s unsafe to have both the nose and the mouth obstructed at the same time during sleep.

What’s the take-home message?

The authors concluded there are very few benefits and some potential serious risks associated with mouth taping in people who are mouth breathers or have obstructive sleep apnoea.

They did however note we need further high-quality evidence to better understand if mouth taping is safe and works.

This review didn’t focus on any research relating to mouth taping for proposed improvements to mood, skin, digestion, sharper jaw lines and other things, so the researchers could not draw conclusions about the efficacy and safety of mouth taping for those purposes.

A couple in bed. The woman holds her pillow to her ears while her partner sleeps with his mouth open.
Snoring is one of the problems mouth taping has been suggested to help with. Kleber Cordeiro/Shutterstock

Internationally, qualified sleep health professionals do not recommend mouth taping.

If you have concerns about your sleep, the best thing to do is to consult trusted scientific sources or a health-care professional who will be able to guide you to address the underlying causes of your sleep challenges.

Trying social media trends such as mouth taping before you seek expert advice could lead to delays in diagnosing serious conditions for which there are evidence-based treatments available.

Mouth taping should definitely not be attempted in children.

It’s possible that in some healthy adults, without respiratory conditions, without significant sleep disorders, and who don’t have tape allergies, that mouth taping could pose little harm and produce some modest benefits. But we don’t have enough evidence yet to know one way or the other.The Conversation

Moira Junge, Adjunct Clincal Associate Professor (Psychologist), Monash University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

What does it mean to ‘accept’ or ‘reject’ all cookies, and which should I choose?

Shutterstock/The Conversation
Ahmed IbrahimEdith Cowan University and David CookEdith Cowan University

It’s nearly impossible to use the internet without being asked about cookies. A typical pop-up will offer to either “accept all” or “reject all”. Sometimes, there may be a third option, or a link to further tweak your preferences.

These pop-ups and banners are distracting, and your first reaction is likely to get them out of the way as soon as possible – perhaps by hitting that “accept all” button.

But what are cookies, exactly? Why are we constantly asked about them, and what happens when we accept or reject them? As you will see, each choice comes with implications for your online privacy.

What are cookies?

Cookies are small files that web pages save to your device. They contain info meant to enhance the user experience, especially for frequently visited websites.

This can include remembering your login information and preferred news categories or text size. Or they can help shopping sites suggest items based on your browsing history. Advertisers can track your browsing behaviour through cookies to show targeted ads.

There are many types, but one way to categorise cookies is based on how long they stick around.

Session cookies are only created temporarily – to track items in your shopping cart, for example. Once a browser session is inactive for a period of time or closed, these cookies are automatically deleted.

Persistent cookies are stored for longer periods and can identify you – saving your login details so you can quickly access your email, for example. They have an expiry date ranging from days to years.

What do the various cookie options mean?

Pop-ups will usually inform you the website uses “essential cookies” necessary for it to function. You can’t opt out of these – and you wouldn’t want to. Otherwise, things like online shopping carts simply wouldn’t work.

However, somewhere in the settings you will be given the choice to opt out of “non-essential cookies”. There are three types of these:

  • functional cookies, related to personalising your browsing experience (such as language or region selection)

  • analytics cookies, which provide statistical information about how visitors use the website, and

  • advertising cookies, which track information to build a profile of you and help show targeted advertisements.

Advertising cookies are usually from third parties, which can then use them to track your browsing activities. A third party means the cookie can be accessed and shared across platforms and domains that are not the website you visited.

Google Ads, for example, can track your online behaviour not only across multiple websites, but also multiple devices. This is because you may use Google services such as Google Search or YouTube logged in with your Google account on these devices.

An example of cookie preferences offered by a website. The Conversation

Should I accept or reject cookies?

Ultimately, the choice is up to you.

When you choose “accept all,” you consent to the website using and storing all types of cookies and trackers.

This provides a richer experience: all features of the website will be enabled, including ones awaiting your consent. For example, any ad slots on the website may be populated with personalised ads based on a profile the third-party cookies have been building of you.

By contrast, choosing “reject all” or ignoring the banner will decline all cookies except those essential for website functionality. You won’t lose access to basic features, but personalised features and third-party content will be missing.

The choice is recorded in a consent cookie, and you may be reminded in six to 12 months.

Also, you can change your mind at any time, and update your preferences in “cookie settings”, usually located at the footer of the website. Some sites may refer to it as the cookie policy or embed these options in their privacy policy.

How cookies relate to your privacy

The reason cookie consent pop-ups are seemingly everywhere is thanks to a European Union privacy law that came into effect in 2018. Known as GDPR (General Data Protection Regulation), it provides strict regulations for how people’s personal data is handled online.

These guidelines say that when cookies are used to identify users, they qualify as personal data and are therefore subject to the regulations. In practice, this means:

  • users must consent to cookies except the essential ones
  • users must be provided clear info about what data the cookie tracks
  • the consent must be stored and documented
  • users should still be able to use the service even if they don’t want to consent to certain cookies, and
  • users should be able to withdraw their consent easily.

Since a lot of website traffic is international, many sites even outside the EU choose to follow GDPR guidelines to avoid running afoul of this privacy law.

Better privacy controls

Cookie pop-ups are tiresome, leading to “consent fatigue” – you just accept everything without considering the implications.

This defeats the purpose of informed consent.

There is another way to address your online privacy more robustly – Global Privacy Control (GPC). It’s a tech specification developed by a broad alliance of stakeholders (from web developers to civil rights organisations) that allows the browser to signal privacy preferences to websites, rather than requiring explicit choices on every site.

GPC is not universally available, and it’s not a legal requirement – a number of browsers and plugins support it, but broader adoption may still take time.

Meanwhile, if you’re worried you may have accidentally consented to cookies you don’t want, you can find an option in your browser settings to delete cookies and get back to a clean slate (be warned, this will log you out of everywhere). If you want to learn even more, the non-profit Electronic Frontier Foundation has a project called Cover Your Tracks.The Conversation

Ahmed Ibrahim, Senior Lecturer, Computing and Security, Edith Cowan University and David Cook, Lecturer, Computer and Security Science, Edith Cowan University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

From peasant fodder to posh fare: how snails and oysters became luxury foods

An Oyster cellar in Leith. John Burnet, 1819; National Galleries of Scotland, Photo: Antonia Reeve
Garritt C. Van DykUniversity of Waikato

Oysters and escargot are recognised as luxury foods around the world – but they were once valued by the lower classes as cheap sources of protein.

Less adventurous eaters today see snails as a garden pest, and are quick to point out that freshly shucked oysters are not only raw but also alive when they are eaten.

How did these unusual ingredients become items of conspicuous consumption?

From garden snail to gastronomy

Eating what many consider to be a slimy nuisance seems almost counter-intuitive, but consuming land snails has an ancient history, dating to the Palaeolithic period, some 30,000 years ago in eastern Spain.

Ancient Romans also dined on snails, and spread their eating habits across their empire into Europe.

Lower and middle class Romans ate snails from their gardens, while elite consumers ate specially farmed snails, fed spices, honey and milk.

Blue snails in a mosaic.
An Ancient Roman mosaic dating to the 4th century AD depicting a basket of snails, Basilica di Santa Maria Assunta, Aquileia, Italy. Carole Raddato/Wikimedia CommonsCC BY-SA

Pliny the Elder (AD 24–79) described how snails were raised in ponds and given wine to fatten them up.

The first French recipe for snails appears in 1390, in Le Ménagier de Paris (The Good Wife’s Guide), but not in other cookbooks from the period.

In 1530, a French treatise on frogs, snails, turtles and artichokes considered all these foods bizarre, but surprisingly popular. Some of the appeal had to do with avoiding meat on “lean” days. Snails were classified as fish by the Catholic Church, and could even be eaten during Lent.

For the next 200 years, snails only appeared in Parisian cookbooks with an apology for including such a disgusting ingredient. This reflected the taste of upper-class urbanites, but snails were still eaten in the eastern provinces.

Colour etching: a woman at a market stall with baskets of snails.
Schneckenweib, or Snail Seller, illustrated by Johann Christian Brand in Vienna, after 1798. Wien Museum

An 1811 cookbook from Metz, in the Alsace region in northeastern France, describes raising snails like the Romans, and a special platter, l'escargotière, for serving them. The trend did not travel to Paris until after 1814.

French diplomat Charles-Maurice de Talleyrand-Périgord (1754–1838) hosted a dinner for Russian Tsar Alexander I, after he marched into Paris following the allied forces’ defeat of Napoleon in 1814.

The chef catering the meal was the father of French cuisine Marie-Antoine Carême, a native of Burgundy, spiritual home of the now famous escargots de Bourgogne.

Carême served the Tsar what would become a classic recipe, prepared with garlic, parsley and butter. Allegedly, the Tsar raved about the “new” dish, and snails became wildly popular. A recipe for Burgundy snails first appeared in a French culinary dictionary published in 1825.

It is ironic that it took the approval of a foreign emperor, who had just conquered Napoleon, to restore luxury status to escargot, a food that became a symbol of French cuisine.

Snails remain popular today in France, with consumption peaking during the Christmas holidays, but May 24 is National Escargot Day in France.

Oysters: the original fast food

Oysters are another ancient food, as seen in fossils dating to the Triassic Era, 200 million years ago. Evidence of fossilised oysters are found on every major land mass, and there is evidence of Indigenous oyster fisheries in North America and Australia that dates to the Holocene period, about 12,000 years ago.

There are references in classical Greek texts to what are probably oysters, by authors like Aristotle and Homer. Oyster shells found at Troy confirm they were a favoured food. Traditionally served as a first course at banquets in Ancient Greece, they were often cooked, sometimes with exotic spices.

bust of a man eating oyster, placing the shell in front of his mouth with one hand, the other hand on bib on chest.
Music-cover sheet for ‘Bonne-Bouche’ by Emile Waldteufel, 1847-1897. © The Trustees of the British MuseumCC BY-NC-SA

Pliny the Elder refers to oysters as a Roman delicacy. He recorded methods of the pioneer of Roman oyster farming, Sergius Orata, who brought the best specimens from across the Empire to sell to elite customers.

Medieval coastal dwellers gathered oysters at low tide, while wealthy inland consumers would have paid a premium for shellfish, a perishable luxury, transported to their castles.

French nobles in 1390 preferred cooked oysters, roasted over coals or poached in broths, perhaps as a measure to prevent food poisoning. As late as the 17th century, authors cautioned:

But if they be eaten raw, they require good wine […] to aid digestion.

Etching: a man peddles oysters in a wheelbarrow, caption reads 'Twelve Pence a Peck Oysters'
Oyster Seller, Jacob Gole, 1688–1724. Rijksmuseum

By the 18th century, small oysters were a popular pub snack, and larger ones were added as meat to the stew pot. That century, it is believed as many as 100,000 oysters were eaten each day in Edinburgh and the shells from the tavern in the basement filled in gaps in the brickwork at Gladstone’s Land in Edinburgh’s Royal Mile.

Scottish oyster farms in the Firth of Forth, an inlet of the North Sea, produced 30 million oysters in 1790, but continual over-harvesting took its toll.

By 1883 only 6,000 oysters were landed, and the population was declared extinct in 1957.

As wild oyster stocks dwindled, large oyster farms developed in cities like New York in the 19th century. Initially successful, they were polluted, and infected by typhoid from sewage. An outbreak in 1924 killed 150 people, the deadliest food poisoning in United States history.

Black and white photograph: sellers at a street stall.
Costumes of Naples: Oyster Sellers, c. 1906–10. Rijksmuseum

Far from the overabundance of oysters we once had, over-fishing, pollution, and invasive species all threaten oyster populations worldwide today. Due to this scarcity of wild oysters and the resources required to safely farm environmentally sustainable oysters, they are now a premium product.

Next on the menu

Scarcity made oysters a luxury, and a Tsar’s approval elevated snails to gourmet status. Could insects become the next status food?

Ancient Romans ate beetles and grasshoppers, and cultures around the world consume insects, but not (yet) as luxury products.

Maybe the right influencer can make honey-roasted locust the next species to jump from paddock to plate.The Conversation

Garritt C. Van Dyk, Senior Lecturer in History, University of Waikato

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Four records that embody the joy of the double album – from the Beatles to Outkast

Glenn FosbraeyUniversity of Winchester

In the summer of 1966, a race was on between two very different opponents. On one side was Bob Dylan, the established and bestselling folk artist. On the other was new act The Mothers of Invention, a genre- (and mind-) bending band led by avant garde composer Frank Zappa. The aim? To release the first “double album” (four-sided LP) in popular music.

On June 20, Dylan’s Blonde on Blonde prevailed, pipping The Mothers of Invention’s Freak Out! by a single week. But the outcome was largely unimportant – not least because the first double album had actually been released six years prior, in the form of R&B singer Jimmy Clanton’s Jimmy’s Happy/Jimmy’s Blue.

But the “race” did at least demonstrate there was interest in the double album as a format – and that, with the commercial success of Blonde on Blonde (Freak Out! unsurprisingly failed to trouble the charts), the public weren’t put off by the inflated price of a two-LP set.


Looking for something good? Cut through the noise with a carefully curated selection of the latest releases, live events and exhibitions, straight to your inbox every fortnight, on Fridays. Sign up here.


The double album may have subsequently gone through a rocky patch in the 1970s when “self-indulgent” prog rockers used it to unleash interminable dreary eternities – but it remains a crucial, albeit uncommon, part of pop music. Here are some of the standouts that you may or may not have come across.

1. Speakerboxxx/The Love Below by Outkast (2003)

Rumours of a falling out between Outkast members Big Boi and André 3000 were rife in the lead-up to the release of Speakerboxxx/The Love Below in September 2003. The fact thia project was essentially two solo albums stuck together didn’t help matters.

Roses by Outkast from Speakerboxxx/The Love Below.

Whatever the circumstances it was recorded under, the result was synapse-popping, gut-reorganising, breathtakingly adventurous music. It’s not perfect and, like many double albums before and since, critics have suggested it would have been better served trimmed down and issued as a single disc. But the benefit of the double album format is that it allows artists the time and freedom to experiment.

Across its two-and-a-half-hour running time, Big Boi and André push boundaries and create a space for hip hop to embrace its weirdness.

2. Blinking Lights and Other Revelations by Eels (2005)

American alt-rock band Eels’ sixth studio album saw songwriter-singer-producer Mark Everett (known as “E”) in reflective mood, taking stock of his entire life up to this point.

Given that his life had included his sister’s 1996 suicide, his mother’s death from cancer soon after, his father’s alcoholism and the death of his cousin in 9/11, it would have been reasonable to expect one of the most depressing albums of all time. And yet, somehow, it’s anything but.

Described by the Guardian as “one of the best albums to have arisen out of grief” and by E as “a love letter to life itself, in all its beautiful, horrible glory”, Blinking Lights manages to take all that pain and misery and turn it into something genuinely positive and life-affirming.

Hey Man (Now You’re Really Living) by Eels from Blinking Lights and Other Revelations.

Recorded over several years, mostly in E’s Los Angeles basement, the album’s production veers between intricate and lo-fi. E’s singing voice – a unique combination of gruff and tender – is its only constant.

Having spent 90 minutes going through every conceivable emotion (and perhaps several more besides), we make it to the final line of the final track, Things the Grandchildren Should Know, where E tells us: “If I had to do it all again, then it’s something I’d like to do.”

After all the struggles, all the devastation and trauma, the fact he still considers life sweet enough to live all over again is goosebump-inducing: an extraordinary moment from an extraordinary album.

3. Aerial by Kate Bush (2005)

For whatever reason, the number of double albums released by male artists dwarfs those released by females. Donna Summer, Christina Aguilera and Beyoncé are among the few, and Taylor Swift almost had one with The Tortured Poets Department (technically its 15-song “second instalment” was a separate release from the first). But these are relatively uncommon examples.

As for a double album that’s been written and produced solely by a female artist – well, replace “uncommon” with “almost non-existent”.

King of the Mountain by Kate Bush from Aerial.

“Almost” because in 2005, Kate Bush did it with Aerial. Her first album in over a decade, Aerial saw Bush at her idiosyncratic best. In her hands (and voice), commonplace events are made to sound extraordinary – and they’re sung to a constantly shifting palette of musical styles, ranging from baroque to dance.

It’s impossible to predict what’s going to come next, and that is joyous. Just to show how nothing is ever perfect, though, two of the tracks feature disgraced Australian entertainer Rolf Harris, whose contributions Bush removed from the 2018 re-issue.

4. The Beatles/The White Album by The Beatles (1968)

On May 30 1968, almost exactly one year after the release of Sgt. Pepper’s Lonely Hearts Club Band, the fab four returned to Abbey Road studios to begin work on their next album, a self-titled affair which will forever be known as the White Album.

But where do the most important band in the world go after they’ve just hit a “musically ground-breaking, hyper-influential career high-water mark”? They go bigger, of course.

Millions of words have already been written about the brilliance of the Beatles, but their prolific artistry around this period still can’t be overstated. When the White Album was released in November 1968, the band had produced a staggering 53 songs in just 18 months, spread across two albums (one a double), a double EP and four chart-topping singles. Thirty of those songs appear on this album, most of them written during the band’s meditation retreat to Rishikesh in India in early 1968.

While My Guitar Gently Weeps by the Beatles from the White Album.

It’s the least collegiate of all the Beatles’ albums and Harrison, Lennon and McCartney would often work on their own tracks in three different studios. But it’s also their most experimental and diverse, taking in everything from hard rock and blues-rock to saloon satire, pastoral folk, vaudeville, and avant-garde sound collage.

Its stark, plain white cover may have been designed to contrast with the colourfully trippy artwork of Sgt. Pepper’s, but it shares its acclaim, regularly making “best album cover of all time” lists.

The Beatles may have been coming apart as a group when they were making it – and the sound collage track Revolution 9 may make beginning-to-end listens a bit of a challenge – but for many of us, the White Album is still the biggest and best album from the biggest and best band.

Do you have a favourite double album? We’d love to hear about it. Let us know your pick in the comments below.The Conversation

Glenn Fosbraey, Associate Dean of Humanities and Social Sciences, University of Winchester

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Why do I procrastinate? And can I do anything about it?

Dima Berlin/Shutterstock
Catherine HoulihanUniversity of the Sunshine Coast

Can you only start a boring admin task once your house is clean? Do you leave the trickiest emails to the end of the day?

Delaying a goal or task – usually to do something less important instead – is known as procrastination and it affects many of us. Most people report procrastinating some of the time, but for others it can be chronic.

While procrastination is common, it can be frustrating and lead to feelings of shame, guilt and anxiety.

Here’s why you might be avoiding that task – and five steps to get on top of it.

Am I procrastinating?

You might find yourself putting off starting something, abandoning it before it’s finished or leaving it to the very last minute.

Thoughts such as “I can catch up later” or “I’ll turn it in late” can be telltale signs of procrastination. Maybe you’ve Googled “Why do I procrastinate?” while procrastinating and have come across this article.

Other times, you might not even be aware you’re doing it. Perhaps you look up and realise you’ve been scrolling online shopping and kitten videos for the past hour, instead of doing your assignment.

Procrastination is not a character flaw, and it doesn’t mean you’re lazy or even bad at managing time. Framing it this way can make you feel even worse about the behaviour, and stops you learning the real reasons behind it.

If you want to stop procrastinating, it’s important to understand why you do it in the first place.

Gloved hands cleaning a window with spray.
You may find yourself doing another, less urgent task, without even realising you’re procrastinating. Daenin/Shutterstock

Why do I procrastinate?

Procrastination can be a way of dealing with tricky emotions. Research shows we put off tasks we find boring or frustrating, as well as those we resent or that lack personal meaning.

We may avoid tasks that create stress or painful emotions, such as completing a tax return where you owe a lot of money, or packing up a parent’s house after their death.

There a few deeper reasons, too.

Procrastination can be a sign of perfectionism. This is when an intense fear of failure – of getting something wrong – creates so much pressure to be perfect that it stops us from even getting started.

People with low self-esteem also tend to procrastinate, whether or not they experience perfectionism. Here, it’s a negative self-view (“I’m not good at most things”) coupled with low confidence (“I probably won’t get it right”) that gets in the way of beginning a task.

Distraction can be a factor, too. Most of us battle constant interruptions, with pings and alerts designed to redirect our attention. But being very easily distracted can also be a sign you’re avoiding the task.

For some people, difficulty completing tasks could be a sign of an underlying issue such as attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder. If you’re worried procrastination is affecting your day-to-day life, you can speak to your doctor to seek help.

Man smiling looking at phone with open laptop.
Distraction can be a factor. F8 Studio/Shutterstock

Is procrastination ever helpful?

It depends.

Some people enjoy the pressure of a deadline. Leaving a task to the last minute can be a strategy to improve motivation or get it done in a limited time.

Procrastination can also be a coping mechanism.

Delaying unpleasant tasks may make us feel better in the moment. Avoiding the task may mean we don’t have to face the possibility of getting it wrong, or the negative emotions or consequences it involves.

But this usually only works in the short term, and in the long term it’s more likely to cause problems.

Procrastination can trigger self-criticism as well as negative emotions such as guilt and shame.

In the long term it can also lead to mental health problems including anxiety and depression. Procrastinating has even been linked to poor outcomes in education – such as being caught copying in exams – and at work, including lower salaries and higher likelihood of unemployment.

So what can we do about it?

5 steps to tackling procrastination

  1. Face it – you’re procrastinating. Being able to identify and name these patterns is the first step to overcoming procrastination.

  2. Explore why. Understanding the underlying causes is key. Are you afraid of getting it wrong? Is your to-do list unrealistic? Or do you just love a tight deadline? If your procrastination results from perfectionism or low self-esteem you may wish to explore evidence-based treatments such as cognitive behavioural therapy, with a therapist or through self-guided activities.

  3. Start prioritising. Take a good look at your to-do list. Are the most urgent or important things at the top? Have you given yourself enough time to complete the tasks? Breaking a task into smaller chunks and taking regular breaks will help prevent you from becoming overwhelmed. If you’re not sure what’s the most important, try talking it through with someone. If you tend to leave the most boring things to the last minute and then never get around to them, set some time aside at the start of each day to get these tasks done.

  4. Avoid distractions. Set your phone to “do not disturb”, hang a sign on the door, tell those around you you’ll be “offline” for a little while. Setting a clear start and end time can help you stick to this rule.

  5. Build in rewards. Life is hard work – be kind to yourself. Whenever you complete a difficult task or cross something off your to-do list, balance this by doing something more enjoyable. Building in rewards can make facing the to-do list a little bit easier.The Conversation

Catherine Houlihan, Senior Lecturer in Clinical Psychology, University of the Sunshine Coast

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Do we see colour the same way? What scientists can learn from artists

TSViPhoto/Shutterstock
Sasha RakovichKing's College London

As many people sit at the wheel of their car, they are certain they know what colour is. It’s the red traffic light in front of them, the garish yellow hatchback in the next lane, or the green verge banking to their right.

Colour, as many people understand it, is the property of a thing. That light is green. The sky is blue. But scientifically, that’s not quite true. No one can experience the exact same colour as you do. Colour is a perceptual experience created by our brains.

It’s the interaction between a material, light and the mind. The way a material absorbs and scatters light affects what reaches our eyes. And colour needs to be processed by the brain.

The shape of objects and the context in which you encounter them can also shape the way you perceive colour. If you’ve ever picked a paint colour that looked perfect in the shop but turned into something entirely difference once on your walls, you’ve already encountered this phenomenon.


Get your news from actual experts, straight to your inbox. Sign up to our daily newsletter to receive all The Conversation UK’s latest coverage of news and research, from politics and business to the arts and sciences.


This notion of colour as experience was recently shown in a study by researchers at the University of California, Berkeley, who used lasers to manipulate participants’ eyes into seeing a new colour – a blue-green they call olo.

To achieve this, the scientists used lasers to activate specific photoreceptor cells in the retina that detect green wavelengths of light, called M cones. We also have S and L cones, types of photoreceptors that detect short blue, and longer red wavelengths of light respectively. Everyone has slight variations in the number and sensitivity of these cones, so we each experience colour a little differently.

Outside the lab, the reflected light that comes into our eyes illuminates large areas of the retina, which stimulates multiple cone types. The wavelengths perceived by the M and L cones overlap by over 85%. This means that under natural conditions, the two are always activated together, but in varying degrees.

By targeting just the M cones, the scientists at Berkeley have in essence created a pure colour. Olo doesn’t have context or material conditions. It will look the same to different people.

But this isn’t the only example which shows the place of the brain in colour perception.

The most common type of red-green colour blindness, deuteranomaly, occurs when the M and L cones overlap more than they should. This reduces people’s ability to distinguish between colours in that range, without affecting sharpness or brightness.

Language may play a role in colour perception, influencing how easily or accurately we discriminate between colours, especially when languages differ in how they categorise or label colour distinctions. This highlights the gulf between an objective property and the processing of the brain.

The difference between the subjective experience of colour and the fixed, physical means of producing it means that most artists’ search for “pure” paint will fail. British artist Stuart Semple recently claimed he’d recreated olo in paint form. He called the paint yolo. But when people look at it, M and L cones will be activated at the same time. A “pure” paint is still impossible.

Semple’s Black 3.0, along with other ultra-black materials, is marketed as a “pure” black paint. It absorbs nearly all light, using a high concentration of light-absorbing pigments and a matte binder to minimise reflections. But instead of offering a pure colour, it removes colour altogether – delivering a universal experience of “black” by eliminating visual stimulus.

Close up of chameleon
Colour is never static. gkkhjn/Shutterstock

In truth, artists have known colour is a matter of perception for quite some time. The modernist artist Mark Rothko was notoriously meticulous about how his work was displayed. Rothko insisted that his work be hung low, with as little white wall visible as possible, in dim light.

He was shaping the experience of colour his work presented to the onlooker by controlling brightness, contrast and the surroundings. Rothko, like the scientists at Berkeley, recognised that colour is an interaction between material, light and observer. It is not just about manipulating what we don’t see, but about engineering what we do.

I have been running a public engagement programme, Transcending the Invisible, which brings together scientists and artists to explore scientific ideas through art. What I’ve been struck by most is that scientists and artists share this understanding of colour as experience.

The future of colour

Why do so many artists want to patent the blackest black, the bluest blue or the pinkest pink if they know that colour can’t be made “pure” with pigment?

Berkeley researcher Austin Roorda described having a “wow” experience at perceiving something entirely new when he saw olo.

We need to accept that colours like Semple’s yolo can create a similar wow feeling.

The work at Berkeley opens the door to a much more direct experience of colour than we’ve ever had before. Scientists in the future may map the photoreceptors and parts of the brain which process colour, allowing them to beam a range of direct and repeatable experiences into people’s brains.

It’s important to note that colour isn’t just sensory data but something that shapes how we feel, remember and connect to the world. Artists like Rothko, Van Gogh and Kandinsky had an innate understanding of that which scientists are only now starting to piece together.The Conversation

Sasha Rakovich, Senior Lecturer in Physics, King's College London

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Semicolons are becoming increasingly rare; their disappearance should be resisted

Tung Cheung/Shutterstock
Roslyn PetelinThe University of Queensland

recent study has found a 50% decline in the use of semicolons over the last two decades. The decline accelerates a longterm trend:

In 1781, British literature featured a semicolon roughly every 90 words; by 2000, it had fallen to one every 205 words. Today, there’s just one semicolon for every 390 words.

Further research reported that 67% of British students never or rarely use a semicolon; more than 50% did not know how to use it. Just 11% of respondents described themselves as frequent users.

These findings may not be definitive. According to the Guardian, the Google Books Ngram Viewer database, which surveys novels and nonfiction, indicates that

semicolon use in English rose by 388% between 1800 and 2006, before falling by 45% over the next 11 years. In 2017, however, it started a gradual recovery, with a 27% rise by 2022.

Yet when you put the punctuation mark itself into the database, rather than the word “semicolon”, you get a quite different result – one that looks very much like a steady decline.

Virulent detractors

The semicolon first appeared in 1494, so it has been around for a long time. So have arguments about it.

Its dectractors can be quite virulent. It is sometimes taken as a sign of affected elitism. Adrian Mole, the pretentious schoolboy protagonist of Sue Townsend’s popular novels, says snobbishly of Barry Kent, the skinhead bully at his school: “He wouldn’t know what a semicolon was if it fell into his beer.” Kurt Vonnegut (whose novels are not entirely free of semicolons) said semicolons represented “absolutely nothing” and using them just showed that you “went to college”.

Kurt Vonnegut, antagonist of the semicolon. Bernard Gotfryd / Adam Cuerden, Public domain, via Wikimedia Commons

Other writers have expressed pure animosity. American journalist James Kilpatrick denounced the semicolon “girly”, “odious”, and the “most pusillanimous, sissified utterly useless mark of punctuation ever invented”.

The utility of this much maligned punctuation mark in contemporary prose has been called into question. British author Ben McIntyre has claimed Stephen King “wouldn’t be seen dead in a ditch with a semicolon”.

He obviously hasn’t read page 32 of King’s wonderful book On Writing, where King uses semicolons in three sentences in a row.

Impeccable balance

Before I defend the semicolon, it is worth clarifying what it actually does. Its two uses are as follows:

1) it separates independent clauses, but establishes a relation between them. It suggests that the statements are too closely connected to stand as separate sentences. For example: “Speech is silver; silence is golden.”

2) it can be used to clarify a complicated list. For example: “Remember to check your grammar, especially agreement of subjects and verbs; your spelling, especially of tricky words such as ‘liaison’; and your punctuation, especially your use of the apostrophe.”

Semicolons have long played a prominent role in classic literature. Journalist Amelia Hill notes that Virginia Woolf relies heavily on semicolons in her meditation on time, Mrs Dalloway. The novel includes more than 1000 of them, often used in unorthodox ways, to capture the flow of its protagonist’s thoughts.

Virginia Woolf, semicolon enthusiast. Public Domain, via Wikimedia Commons

Other supporters of the semicolon include Salman Rushdie, John Updike, Donna Tartt, Mark Twain, Charles Dickens and Jane Austen. Novelist Philip Hensher has celebrated the semicolon as “a cherished tool, elegant and rational.” In 1953, theatre critic Kenneth Tynan called it “the prize-winning supporting crutch of English prose”.

In his essay Semicolons: A Love Story, Ben Dolnick refers to William James’s deft use of semicolons to pile on the clauses. He claims this is like saying to a reader, who is already holding one bag of groceries, “Here, I know it’s a lot, but can you take another?”

“The image of the grocery bags,” observed Mary Norris, a highly respected copyeditor at the New Yorker, “reinforces the idea that semicolons are all about balance.” Harvard professor Louis Menand has praised as “impeccable” the balancing semicolon on a public service placard (allegedly amended by hand) that exhorted subway riders not to leave their newspapers behind on the train: “Please put it in a trash can; that’s good news for everyone.”

The poet Lewis Thomas beautifully captures the elegance of a well-used semicolon in his essay Notes on Punctuation:

The semicolon tells you there is still some question about the preceding full sentence; something needs to be added. It is almost always a greater pleasure to come across a semicolon than a full stop. The full stop tells you that is that; if you didn’t get all the meaning you wanted or expected, you got all the writer intended to parcel out and now you have to move along. But with a semicolon there you get a pleasant little feeling of expectancy; there is more to come; read on; it will get clearer.

As Australian novelist David Malouf has argued, the semicolon still has a future, and an important function, in nuanced imaginative prose:

I tend to write longer sentences and use the semicolon so as not to have to break the longer sentences into shorter ones that would suggest things are not connected that I want people to see as connected. Short sentences make for fast reading; often you want slow reading.

We cannot do without the semicolon. The Apostrophe Protection Society is going along very strongly. I would be more than happy to join a Semicolon Supporting Society.The Conversation

Roslyn Petelin, Honorary Associate Professor in Writing, The University of Queensland

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Spotify continues to change music. What’s next – will AI musicians replace music made by humans?

John HawkinsUniversity of Canberra

Spotify was started, according to its official claims, because its founders “love music and piracy was killing it”. In Mood Machine, music journalist Liz Pelly argues this is rewriting history.

In fact, she points out, Spotify founder Daniel Ek initially patented a platform around 2006, for circulating “any kind of digital content”. Only months later did he and his co-founder decide music might be the most profitable form of content.


Review: Mood Machine: The Rise of Spotify and the Costs of the Perfect Playlist – Liz Pelly (Hodder & Stoughton)


Ek grew up in a working-class suburb of Stockholm. A neighbour recalled that, while still at school, Ek had set up a website-making business – and was earning more than his teachers. Rejected for a job at Google, he founded an ad-targeting business, Advertigo. After he sold it to tech entrepreneur Martin Lorentzon, the two men registered a new company: Spotify.

‘The Google of music’

Spotify would allow users to find their desired piece of music quickly. Ek described it in 2009 as “essentially the Google of music”, Pelly writes. He had a “maniacal focus” on ensuring a user would get a virtually instantaneous response when they pressed play; no annoying buffering.

Spotify launched in Europe in 2008 and in the United States in 2011. It listed on the stock market in 2018. Spotify has just recorded its first annual profit. It is valued at over US$100 billion: more than the three leading recording companies combined.

It had 678 million users at March 2025: of them, 268 million were paying subscribers. The rest contribute to Spotify’s earnings by listening to advertisements: the so-called “freemium” model.

Boon or bane of musicians?

Music streaming now accounts for 84% of recorded music revenue, according to Pelly – and Spotify is the largest music streamer.

Initially, Spotify looked like a boon to musicians, she writes. It could save music from the threat of “pirate” downloading, which gave no payments to creators. But many musicians are critical of the low payments artists get: fractions of a cent per stream.

Spotify claims that in 2024 it paid out more than US$10 billion to the music industry. It claims nearly 1,500 artists are earning over US$1 million annually.

Spotify pays the recording and publishing rights holders, not the singers and songwriters. How much the latter gets depends on their contracts with the record companies. The system is complicated, indirect and not that transparent.

‘Mixtapes still work’ – so do playlists

Spotify gradually shifted towards playlists, to simplify the process of users selecting music. Some playlists, like “today’s top hits”, just consisted of the currently most popular songs. These are like the “top 40” format of many commercial radio stations.

Spotify also hired music experts to compile their choice of the best new releases. The compilers of the most popular of these playlists, such as the playlist “rap caviar”, became very influential. A Spotify advertisement in 2013 made the analogy between playlists and mixtapes (as featured in Nick Hornby’s High Fidelity), claiming “mixtapes still work”.

Spotify advertising claims ‘mixtapes still work’, referencing High Fidelity.

Spotify also increasingly tried to increase passive listening. It introduced playlists geared to match the existing tastes of listeners and allow for how these might vary across the day. It termed this “music for every moment”: music to exercise to, background music for studying, music to help you sleep and so on. I have a playlist of songs about economics.

Ek said in 2016: “we really want to soundtrack every moment of your life”.

One of the parts of the book I found most intriguing was Pelly’s discussion of how this echoes a strategy developed by Thomas Edison around a century ago. He produced shellac 78 rpm records with titles such as “in moods of wistfulness” and “for more energy!”.

In 2014, Spotify made large investments in “algorithmic personalisation”. This suggested music similar in key, tempo, time signature, acousticness, danceability, loudness, mode and energy to whatever the user was already choosing.

This kept users “within their comfort zone (or as Spotify thought of it, their customer retention zone)”. But it meant users were much less likely to encounter new styles and artists, or broaden their musical horizons.

Generic music and AI

While Spotify denies it, Pelly claims Spotify commissions session musicians, playing under assumed names, to record very generic-sounding music, for playlists such as “chill instrumental beats”. Pelly gives an example of 20 songwriters using 500 names to produce thousands of tracks, streamed millions of times.

A “looming cloud” is the prospect AI-generated music will displace human musicians and singers in Spotify’s playlists, Pelly writes. She mentions that Spotify blocked a start-up called Boomy, which released over 14.5 million AI-generated songs – and has since struck up a partnership with Warner.

Another controversy is around Spotify’s Discovery Mode, which offers artists more promotion of their songs in exchange for accepting lower payments. But if most artists do this, the promotions cancel each other out, leaving all the artists worse off.

How Spotify is changing music

Pelly quotes an independent record label founder who says Spotify has changed the nature of the music being made.

It’s not sustainable to put out challenging records […] you have to put out records that are going to get repeat listens in coffee shops […] that are going to be playlist friendly.

This is despite some music fans saying the music they experience as “life-changing, really profound” is different from the songs they play most often.

Songs streamed are only monetised after 30 seconds. This has created “a particular emphasis placed on perfecting song intros […] songwriters would just dive directly into the chorus”. So, no more songs with long waits for the vocals, like U2, the TemptationsDire Straits or Pink Floyd.

Artists who want their songs to appear on playlists need them to match a particular mood or context. This means songs increasingly “remain in a single emotional register throughout”.

It may mean artists are less likely to release songs with marked tempo changes, such as Dexys’ Midnight Runners’ Come on Eileen (1982), Led Zeppelin’s Stairway to Heaven (1971), Queen’s Bohemian Rhapsody (1975) or Franz Ferdinand’s Take Me Out (2004). There may still be much smaller tempo changes, such as Taylor Swift’s Evermore from 2020.

Artists may now be less likely to release songs with marked tempo changes, such as Dexys’ Midnight Runners’ Come on Eileen.

The “Spotify for artists” service provides artists with data about the streaming of their songs. A band planning a tour can see in which cities or countries they are most popular. They can even alter their set lists to include the songs particularly popular in particular areas.

But Spotify monitors use of this facility, Pelly writes – and it is not clear how they use the data. Over time, it may encourage artists to repeat aspects of their most popular songs, rather than innovate and evolve.

A serious look

The book is interesting and informative, but somewhat dryer than some other recent exposes of the tech sector. Partly this is because Ek is a less colourful character than X’s Elon Musk, or Meta’s Mark Zuckerberg and Sheryl Sandberg.

Pelly does not provide the witty lines of tech journalist Kara Swisher’s Burn Book. She is not a gossipy former insider, like director of global public policy at Meta, Sarah Wynn-Williams.

As an economist, I felt the book complemented sociologist Michael Walsh’s Streaming Sounds: Musical Listening in the Digital Age. Walsh describes the demand for music streaming. Pelly analyses the supply side.

Pelly rightly describes her book as a “serious look” at Spotify. It brings together a lot of useful information about the company and raises good questions about whether it is changing the music industry – and music itself – for the better.

The debate will continue, as AI increases its influence and artists become more concerned about their songs being “TikTok friendly”, as well as “Spotify friendly”. Perhaps there will be more songs like Steve’s Lava Chicken from A Minecraft Movie. Just 34 seconds long, it recently became the shortest song to make the UK top 40.The Conversation

John Hawkins, Senior Lecturer, Canberra School of Politics, Economics and Society, University of Canberra

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Does drawing on memory help us solve problems? Our experiment gave some surprising answers

Getty Images
Anne MacaskillTe Herenga Waka — Victoria University of WellingtonKaren SalmonTe Herenga Waka — Victoria University of Wellington, and Nicky DuffTe Herenga Waka — Victoria University of Wellington

Conventional wisdom suggests memories of past experiences can help us navigate problems in the present.

For example, if a friend told you they were having a disagreement with their partner, you might ask what they did last time they argued. If your child was anxious about a presentation, you might boost their confidence by saying “remember that great speech you did last year”.

Indeed, memory researchers have found people report a key reason they remember the past is to solve problems in the present. But does this prove that drawing on experience is a good problem-solving strategy?

How much insight do we have about whether these memories support us to solve current problems? And, objectively, does this strategy help people identify more and better solutions?

To get more conclusive evidence, we ran two experimental studies (one with 170 students, one with 340 students). In each, we instructed some people to recall previous times they were successful (we call this the “memory group”). We instructed others to recall neutral personal memories such as what they had for breakfast that morning (we call this the “control group”).

We then asked both groups to come up with as many solutions as they could to everyday problems, such as resolving a disagreement, or working in a team to complete a project.

We expected the memory group to generate more solutions to these problems than the control group. But surprisingly, they did not. Both groups generated the same number of solutions.

Does this mean drawing on the past is an ineffective problem-solving strategy, or perhaps only effective for some people?

Person giving a talk.
For some people, drawing on memories of positive past experiences can help with a task they find difficult, such as public speaking. Getty Images

Unpacking the link between memory and problem solving

To dig further, we asked all participants what was going on in their heads while they were coming up with solutions. Across both groups, some participants said they drew on past experiences we did not specifically instruct them to recall.

This result hinted that recalling memories might be something some people are in the habit of doing anyway, and a possible reason why our memory instructions didn’t seem to make a difference.

We therefore wondered if our instructions were only helpful for participants who do not typically use their memory to solve problems. Indeed, in a followup study with 237 student participants, we found our instruction to recall past successful experiences was useful, but only for a subset of people.

Specifically, this applied to participants who reported they don’t typically use their memory of personal experiences for problem solving. These participants came up with more solutions than anyone else.

We reasoned this was because they already had other good problem-solving strategies (for example, thinking about facts relevant to the problem or thinking laterally and creatively) and we had merely given them an additional strategy (recalling their past).

However, we found no relationship between how often participants typically used their memory to solve problems, and how many solutions they came up with.

Memories can help with difficult tasks

What do our findings tell us? Recalling a memory may be helpful for generating solutions to problems, but it is not the only or best way to solve problems.

However, recalling a memory might help more or be more important in other problem-solving steps, such as defining a problem or implementing a solution once you’ve thought of it.

For instance, some experimental evidence suggests intentionally remembering past experiences could be helpful for doing hard things, such as public speakingexercising or overcoming a fear of heights.

One study found people who remembered a positive public speaking experience before giving a speech were less anxious, and actually did a better job. Another study found people who recalled a positive experience with exercise increased their exercise over a week, even when the researchers took into account their prior attitudes, motivation and exercise activity.

A specific positive and related memory may therefore be helpful to following through on your intention to perform a specific behaviour. Conversely, as we have found, recalling a memory might not be the best or only approach for coming up with multiple solutions to a problem.

People also report that they recall their experiences to shape their identity and to develop and maintain relationships through reminiscing. Memory of personal experiences therefore has the potential to influence many facets of our life.

Overall, our research highlights the importance of context – when, how and who is drawing on memories of past experiences to solve problems – when we consider conventional wisdom about memory.The Conversation

Anne Macaskill, Senior Lecturer in Experimental Psychology, Te Herenga Waka — Victoria University of WellingtonKaren Salmon, Professor of Psychology, Te Herenga Waka — Victoria University of Wellington, and Nicky Duff, Research Assistant in Psychology, Te Herenga Waka — Victoria University of Wellington

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

A sculpture made from 80 tonnes of sand, Mirrorscape is remarkable – but too much is left unsaid

Mirrorscape (detail), 2025, Théo Mercier. Photo credit: Mona/Jesse Hunniford. Image courtesy of the artist and the Museum of Old and New Art, Hobart, Tasmania, Australia.
Robert ClarkeUniversity of Tasmania

The first impulse is to kick it. After all, it’s a sand sculpture. And as everyone who has grown up near a beach appreciates, if it’s made of sand, then it’s asking to be kicked. But for the wall-high protective glass, Mirrorscape, by the French artist Théo Mercier, may not have survived my visit to MONA.

On a low, curved stage sits a scene of mundane wreckage. Two utility vehicles serve as centrepieces. One is upturned, its front chassis exposed. It rests on the carcass of a two-seater lounge. A mattress is draped over the upper side of the wreck, a broken log, a signifier of the non-human world in this otherwise secular scene of anthropocentric waste, rests against the lower side.

The other vehicle is upright but seriously damaged. Another mattress rests against it. A bundle of electrical conduit spills out of the tray. A worker’s boot limps over the bedding like a deflated balloon.

The sculpture behind a curved glass wall.
It’s as though a couple of ute loads of tradies have smashed into a Derwent Park bungalow. Photo credit: Mona/Jesse Hunniford. Image courtesy of the artist and the Museum of Old and New Art, Hobart, Tasmania, Australia.

Strewn around the battered wrecks are pieces of domestic infrastructure and appliances: bricks, cracked concrete slab, a washing machine, broken joists and beams, snarled corrugated iron sheets.

It’s as though a couple of ute loads of tradies have smashed into a Derwent Park bungalow and scampered off.

This scene is framed by a curved wall of brushed metal panelling, lit above by fluorescent light panels, and sealed behind a wall of glass. This glass is both a protector of the delicate eroding sculpture, and another contrasting visual metaphor employing the work’s foundational element, sand.

Commitment to realism

Mercier is a sculptor and a stage director, and the controlled composition of this scene of chaos attests to his multiple talents.

The team of sculptors – Kevin Crawford, Enguerrand David, Sue McGrew and Leonardo Ugolini – have crafted a remarkable piece.

The commitment to realism is impressive, from the quilting in the mattresses, to the indentations on the utes’ bodywork, to the creases in the sofa cushions, and the sly joke of a finely crafted sandshoe as if discarded by one of the artists as they stepped from the sculptural into the spectatorial space.

Looking closer, the human objects – utes, mattresses, sofas – merge into or out of sandstone rock faces, like those found along Derwent River, including the peninsula upon which MONA stands.

Close up: a couch, an upturned car.
The commitment to realism is impressive. Photo credit: Mona/Jesse Hunniford. Image courtesy of the artist and the Museum of Old and New Art, Hobart, Tasmania, Australia.

What are we to make of the deliberate collapsing of the “natural” and “human-made” in this piece?

Mercier styles Mirrorscape as a “diorama of catastrophe”. He describes it as:

a sculpted dystopian landscape […] using 80 tonnes of compacted sand […] inspired by different dark forces, such as tsunamis, earthquakes, hurricanes, wars, bulldozers – the powers of destruction.

The conflation of “natural” and “man-made” here, and in the composition of the work, grates. While Mirrorscape may reflect a “man-made” landscape of disaster, precisely whose landscape is it, and who ultimately is responsible for it?

A work about class

Mirrorscape is superficially a work about class. Its blunt appropriation of the signifiers of working-class labour and domesticity contradicts the claim that the scene is an archetypal landscape, or humanity’s refuse.

Mirrorscape might be appreciated as a witty piece reflecting on the kind of “treasures” of our age that future archaeologists might excavate in a local tip. But I found it provided little connection to the contemporary subjects of our present-day disasters.

Mirrorscape is haunted, so to speak, by the figures who drove the wrecked utes, slept on the wasted mattresses. But their identities and complex lives, very much of our own time, are rendered invisible.

As a meditation on catastrophe and the “powers of destruction,” Mirrorscape offers a conservative reckoning: that the contemporary human tragedies of inequality, alienated labour, class division and the waste these produce are the “natural” order of things.

Close up: the front of a crushed in ute.
Mirrorscape is haunted by the figures who drove the wrecked utes, slept on the wasted mattresses. Photo credit: Mona/Jesse Hunniford. Image courtesy of the artist and the Museum of Old and New Art, Hobart, Tasmania, Australia.

This is evident in the way the human objects merge into and out of the rock faces, each designed to erode to the common element: sand.

In interviews, Mercier stresses the work’s debt to locality, and his engagement with the working-class suburbs neighbouring MONA:

It was really important to me that everything was really strongly locally grounded, so that you can actually see your own mattress, your own car, your own catastrophe […] it’s a landscape that mirrors you.

But really, how local is this scene, and what value is there in the reflections it provokes? There is little in this sculpture that relates it directly to the place where it is displayed.

The images Mercier has chosen, while unconventional, are nevertheless generic. This dulls the potential for the kind of reflection on catastrophe that might impel a change in the minds of its viewers.

Will MONA’s well-heeled attendees recognise their implication in the human catastrophe this work seeks to capture? Will visitors from the suburbs that neighbour MONA appreciate the reflection that Mirrorscape offers?

If art is to play any role in motivating us to confront the catastrophes that are now upon us, it needs to go beyond the kind of slowly eroding stasis that is Mirrorscape’s defining quality.

Mirrorscape is at MONA, Hobart, until February 16 2026.The Conversation

Robert Clarke, Senior Lecturer in English, University of Tasmania

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Boredom gets a bad rap. But science says it can actually be good for us

Michelle KennedyUniversity of the Sunshine Coast and Daniel HermensUniversity of the Sunshine Coast

We have all experienced boredom – that feeling of waning interest or decreased mental stimulation. Eventually we lose focus, we disengage. Time seems to pass slowly, and we may even start to feel restless. Whether it be watching a movie that disappoints, a child complaining that “there’s nothing to do”, or an adult zoning out during a meeting – boredom is a universal experience.

Generally defined as difficulty maintaining attention or interest in a current activity, boredom is commonly viewed as a negative state that we should try to avoid or prevent ourselves from experiencing.

But what if there’s another way to view boredom, as a positive state? Could learning to embrace boredom be of benefit?

The brain on boredom

The brain network is a system of interconnected regions that work together to support different functions. We can liken it to a city where suburbs (brain regions) are connected by roads (neural pathways), all working together to allow information to travel efficiently.

When we experience boredom – say, while watching a movie – our brain engages specific networks. The attention network prioritises relevant stimuli while filtering out distractions and is active when we commence the movie.

However, as our attention wanes, activity in the attention network decreases, reflecting our diminished ability to maintain focus on the unengaging content. Likewise, decreased activity occurs in the frontoparietal or executive control network due to the struggle to maintain engagement with the unengaging movie.

Simultaneously, the default mode network activates, shifting our attention toward internal thoughts and self-reflection. This is a core function of the default mode network, referred to as introspection, and suggestive of a strategy for coping with boredom.

This complex interplay of networks involves several key brain regions “working together” during the state of boredom. The insula is a key hub for sensory and emotional processing. This region shows increased activity when detecting internal body signals – such as thoughts of boredom – indicating the movie is no longer engaging. This is often referred to as “interoception”.

The amygdala can be likened to an internal alarm system. It processes emotional information and plays a role in forming emotional memories. During boredom, this region processes associated negative emotions, and the ventral medial prefrontal cortex motivates us to seek alternative stimulating activities.

A medical scan of the brain showing regions at the front and back lit up.
The default mode network in our brains (highlighted here) shifts our attention towards internal thoughts and self-reflection when we’re bored. John Graner/Wikipedia

Boredom versus overstimulation

We live in a society that subjects us to information overload and high stress. Relatedly, many of us have adopted a fast-paced lifestyle, constantly scheduling ourselves to keep busy. As adults we juggle work and family. If we have kids, the habit of filling the day with schooling and after-school activities allows us to work longer hours.

In between these activities, if we have time to pause, we may be on our screens constantly organising, updating, or scrolling to simply stay occupied. As a result, adults inadvertently model the need to be constantly “on” to younger generations.

This constant stimulation can be costly – particularly for our nervous system. Our overscheduling can feed into overstimulation of the nervous system. The sympathetic nervous system which manages our fight-or-flight response is designed to deal with times of stress.

However, when we are constantly stressed by taking in new information and juggling different activities, the sympathetic nervous system can stay activated for too long, due to the cumulative effects of repeated exposure to different stressors. This is sometimes referred to as “allostatic overload”. It is when our nervous system becomes overwhelmed, keeping us in a heightened state of arousal, which can increase our risk of anxiety.

Eliminating the state of boredom deprives us of a simple and natural way to reset our sympathetic nervous system.

Could boredom be good for us?

In small doses, boredom is the necessary counterbalance to the overstimulated world in which we live. It can offer unique benefits for our nervous system and our mental health. This is opposed to long periods of boredom where increased default mode network activity may be associated with depression.

There are several benefits of giving ourselves permission to be occasionally bored:

  • improvements in creativity, allowing us to build “flow” in our thoughts
  • develops independence in thinking and encourages finding other interests rather than relying on constant external input
  • supports self-esteem and emotional regulation, because unstructured times can help us sit with our feelings which are important for managing anxiety
  • encourages periods without device use and breaks the loop of instant gratification that contributes to compulsive device use
  • rebalances the nervous system and reduces sensory input to help calm anxiety.

Embrace the pause

Anxiety levels are on the rise worldwide, especially among our youth. Many factors contribute to this trend. We are constantly “on”, striving to ensure we are scheduling for every moment. But in doing so, we are potentially depriving our brains and bodies of the downtime they need to reset and recharge.

We need to embrace the pause. It is a space where creativity can prosper, emotions can be regulated, and the nervous system can reset.The Conversation

Michelle Kennedy, Youth Mental Health Researcher, University of the Sunshine Coast and Daniel Hermens, Professor of Youth Mental Health & Neurobiology, University of the Sunshine Coast

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Vale John Murch

Our community was saddened to hear of the passing of artist John Murch on Friday May 16th.

John Murch was born in 1941 at Mona Vale and lived most of his life in Avalon. His parents, artist Arthur and writer, Ria Murch were both well known and loved by the local community. 

The Murch family story is powerfully connected to the village. John designed and carved stone to build one of Avalon’s few handmade houses. The sandstone, the open plan, high ceilings, marble dust and white cement floors make it a truly unique and beautiful home.

Beyond the bends, John was known as ‘the legend’ in the Australian film industry working as a sculptor and model maker on some of Australia’s iconic movies. The Mad Max films, Crocodile Dundee 1 and 2, Les Patterson Saves the World, The Matrix, Babe 2, Priscilla Queen of the Desert and many more. 

John died at Northern Beaches Hospital on Friday 16th May 2025. He is survived by his partner Deb Masters, son Max, daughters Charlotte and Georgia and his sister Michelle and their families.

John’s originality was a gift, a remarkable man who shaped many lives.

Letters to home care recipients to prepare for Support at Home

May 23, 2025
Letters to older people on a Home Care Package to prepare for the new Support at Home program.

The Australian Government Department of Health, Disability and Aging  are sending letters to older people who currently receive a Home Care Package to help them prepare for the new Support at Home program that starts on 1 July.

These letters include:
  • an overview of the Support at Home program
  • information on preparing a service agreement with their provider
  • a checklist detailing activities to help them prepare for the transition.
The letter they receive will depend on whether they were approved for a Home Care Package on or before 12 September 2024, or after.
Translated versions of the letters and checklist are also available at the above links.

Read some frequently asked questions about the letters for older people and providers.

Clinical trials crucial for life of Brian and many others

May 20, 2025
Today is International Clinical Trials Day and Brian Cotterill is living proof of the importance of trials in saving lives and lifestyles.

Three years ago the 76-year-old grandfather of six from the Central Coast was diagnosed with multiple myeloma – a type of blood cancer that originates in the bone marrow.

Soon after commencing chemotherapy and radiation therapy, Brian accepted an offer from the Central Coast Local Health District to take part in a pilot study that enabled him to self-administer the injections from the comfort of his own home.

Patients with multiple myeloma typically attend cancer day units for weekly or twice weekly chemotherapy injections, appointments can take up to two hours and therapy continues for many months to years.

Self-administering at home saved Brian precious time and energy which he spends with his wife Lesley and family and enjoying other things he loves to do such as playing golf and travelling in his caravan.

Following the success of the trial, which ran from 2022 to 2024, the treatment is now available to eligible patients as a standard of care option.

Brian is one of more than 8,000 NSW patients participating in over 2,000 clinical trials across NSW to investigate life-saving medical treatments and improve healthcare by using innovative and evidence-based approaches.

Minister for Medical Research David Harris said International Clinical Trials Day is an opportunity to recognise the many people involved in health research in NSW, from participant patients, to the hundreds of healthcare staff who administer the trials.

Minister for Medical Research David Harris said:

“This International Clinical Trials Day we acknowledge the significant impact clinical trials have on improving patient outcomes and celebrate the more than 760 staff who support this vital work across NSW.

“I want to thank each and every one of them – and our trial participants, such as Brian – for their dedication to improving the lives of people in NSW.

“New South Wales has a well-deserved reputation as a globally competitive destination for clinical trials that progresses research in areas including cancer, heart disease and respiratory illness."

CCLHD Nurse Practitioner and Principal Investigator of the study, Jacqueline Jagger said:

“The self-administration model takes less than 30 minutes of the patient's day compared to 1 to 3 hours to attend the hospital.

“The benefits of the trial have been far-reaching, improving patient confidence and self-management capacity, reducing infection risk, and giving patients time back to do the things that are important to them.

“Following the success of this trial, multiple regional districts are now working with us to set up this standard of care in their locations."

Clinical trial participant Brian Cotterill said:

“The trial freed up time that was usually spent in waiting rooms and the cancer unit. Time saved was spent on activities that improved my quality of life.

“Self-administering chemotherapy gave me confidence and a degree of self-control over my own health care."

Brian Cotterill. Photo supplied

The TGA has approved donanemab for Alzheimer’s disease. How does this drug work and who will be able to access it?

Kateryna Kon/Shutterstock
Steve MacfarlaneMonash University

This week, Australia’s Therapeutic Goods Administration (TGA) approved a drug called donanemab for people in the early stages of Alzheimer’s disease.

Donanemab has previously been approved in a number of other countries, including the United States.

So what is donanemab, and who will be able to access it in Australia?

How does donanemab work?

There are more than 100 different causes of dementia, but Alzheimer’s disease alone accounts for about 70% of these, making it the most common form of dementia.

The disease is believed to be caused by the accumulation in the brain of two abnormal proteins, amyloid and tau. The first is thought to be particularly important, and the “amyloid hypothesis” – which suggests amyloid is the key cause of Alzheimer’s disease – has driven research for many years.

Donanemab is a “monoclonal antibody” treatment. Antibodies are proteins the immune system produces that bind to harmful foreign “invaders” in the body, or targets. A monoclonal antibody has one specific target. In the case of donanemab it’s the amyloid protein. Donanemab binds to amyloid protein deposits (plaques) in the brain and allows our bodies to remove them.

Donanemab is given monthly, via intravenous infusion.

What does the evidence say?

Australia’s approval of donanemab comes as a result of a clinical trial involving 1,736 people published in 2023.

This trial showed donanemab resulted in a significant slowing of disease progression in a group of patients who had either early Alzheimer’s disease, or mild cognitive impairment with signs of Alzheimer’s pathology. Before entering the trial, all patients had the presence of amyloid protein detected via PET scanning.

Participants were randomised, and half received donanemab, while the other half received a placebo, over 18 months.

A 3D illustration showing amyloid plaques in brain tissue.
The accumulation of amyloid plaques in brain tissue is a hallmark of Alzheimer’s disease. Kateryna Kon/Shutterstock

For those who received the active drug, their Alzheimer’s disease progressed 35% more slowly over 18 months compared to those who were given the placebo. The researchers ascertained this using the Integrated Alzheimer’s Disease Rating Scale, which measures cognition and function.

Those who received donanemab also demonstrated large reductions in the levels of amyloid in the brain (as measured by PET scans). The majority, by the end of the trial, were considered to be below the threshold that would normally indicate the presence of Alzheimer’s disease.

These results certainly seem to vindicate the amyloid hypothesis, which had been called into question by the results of multiple failed previous studies. They represent a major advance in our understanding of the disease.

That said, patients in the study did not improve in terms of cognition or function. They continued to decline, albeit at a significantly slower rate than those who were not treated.

The actual clinical significance has been a topic of debate. Some experts have questioned whether the meaningfulness of this result to the patient is worth the potential risks.

Is the drug safe?

Some 24% of trial participants receiving the drug experienced brain swelling. The rates rose to 40.6% in those possessing two copies of a gene called ApoE4.

Although three-quarters of people who developed brain swelling experienced no symptoms from this, there were three deaths in the treatment group during the study related to donanemab, likely a result of brain swelling.

These risks require regular monitoring with MRI scans while the drug is being given.

Some 26.8% of those who received donanemab also experienced small bleeds into the brain (microhaemorrhages) compared to 12.5% of those taking the placebo.

Cost is a barrier

Reports indicate donanemab could cost anywhere between A$40,000 and $80,000 each year in Australia. This puts it beyond the reach of many who might benefit from it.

Eli Lilly, the manufacturer of donanemab, has made an application for the drug to be listed on the Pharmaceutical Benefits Scheme, with a decision pending perhaps within a couple of months. While this would make the drug substantially more affordable for patients, it will represent a large cost to taxpayers.

The cost of the drug is in addition to costs associated with the monitoring required to ensure its safety and efficacy (such as doctor visits, MRIs and PET scans).

A younger woman interacts with a senior woman in a nursing home. Both look happy.
Donanemab won’t be accessible to all patients with Alzheimer’s disease. pikselstock/Shutterstock

Who will be able to access it?

This drug is only of benefit for people with early Alzheimer’s-type dementia, so not everybody with Alzheimer’s disease will get access to it.

Almost 80% of people who were screened to participate in the trial were found unsuitable to proceed.

The terms of the TGA approval specify potential patients will first need to be found to have specific levels of amyloid protein in their brains. This would be ascertained either by PET scanning or by lumbar puncture sampling of spinal fluid.

Also, patients with two copies of the ApoE4 gene have been ruled unsuitable to receive the drug. The TGA has judged the risk/benefit profile for this group to be unfavourable. This genetic profile accounts for only 2% of the general population, but 15% of people with Alzheimer’s disease.

Improving diagnosis and tempering expectations

It’s estimated more than 400,000 Australians have dementia. But only 13% of people with dementia currently receive a diagnosis within a year of developing symptoms.

Given those with very early disease stand to benefit most from this treatment, we need to expand our dementia diagnostic services significantly.

Finally, expectations need to be tempered about what this drug can reasonably achieve. It’s important to be mindful this is not a cure.The Conversation

Steve Macfarlane, Head of Clinical Services, Dementia Support Australia, & Associate Professor of Psychiatry, Monash University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Wine is still Australia’s most popular alcoholic drink – but many producers face an uncertain future

kwest/Shutterstock
Paul ChadUniversity of Wollongong

Australia has become world-famous for its wine, but the industry faces an uncertain future. Too many grapes grown amid falling consumer demand, an oversupply of budget wine, and an undersupply of premium wine are just some of the problems besetting the industry.

There are still many small and medium-sized wineries across Australia. But the industry is dominated by a few large players, as well as “vertical integration” with ownership linkages between wineries and retailers.

Just this month, a merger between global drinks giant Pernod Ricard’s Australian, New Zealand and Spanish wine brands and Accolade Wines (one of Australia’s largest winemakers) was completed, creating a new giant – Vinarchy – to be based in Adelaide with A$1.5 billion in annual revenue.

This move will involve an estimated cull of up to 50 wine brands, which speaks to a broader story of growing concentration. Numerous Australian wine companies have come up for sale in recent years, and the industry is undergoing rationalisation.

The current pressures will require an overall reduction in wine production, and a focus on premium over ordinary wines. Grape-growers and some smaller wineries are likely to be most affected.

Still the top drop

According to Wine Australia, the Australian wine industry currently has about 6,000 grape growers and 2,156 wineries. It employs 163,790 people (full- and part-time) and contributes $45 billion to the Australian economy each year.

This large size shouldn’t come as too much of a surprise. Wine is the most popular alcoholic drink in Australia. But troubles have been brewing for the industry for years.

Domestic wine consumption has been in steady decline, down 9% since 2016–17.

This trend isn’t confined to Australia; it is global. The decline reflects cost-of-living pressures, growing health concerns about alcohol, and Gen Z questioning traditional drinking norms.

Shifting tastes

However, the picture is nuanced. Wine isn’t a staple product; it is a discretionary purchase. Prices in Australia can range from less than $5 to well over $1,000 per bottle, and palates vary significantly among consumers.

Price is generally regarded as an indicator of quality. Wine selling in Australia in the “ordinary” price range of less than $15 per bottle is declining, but wine selling in the “premium” ($15 per bottle and above) price range is increasing.

In the face of decreased global wine consumption, Australia’s shrinking domestic market has also been faced with a steady decline in wine exports. This is problematic for producers looking to exports to offset declines in domestic sales.

A warm country

These woes are impacting the wine industry in different ways at different points along the supply chain. Let’s start with grape-growing.

The current challenge is for growers of “ordinary-quality” grapes in the shrinking marketplace. The Riverina and Riverland areas are the main grape-producing areas of Australia and achieve a low price per tonne.

There is still high demand for “premium-quality” grapes but these are generally grown in select regions of Australia, typically with a cooler climate.

Unsurprisingly, grapes from warm inland regions of Australia account for 72% of wine grape production, at an average price of $345 per tonne, whereas grapes from cool temperate regions achieve an average price of $1,531 per tonne.

The future impacts of climate change need to be assessed, and are already playing into growers’ decisions. Cooler regions are becoming more highly sought after for grape-growing.

Coupled with increased demand for premium grapes, this will make warm inland regions increasingly problematic. Unlike seasonally planted crops such as vegetables and grain, new grape vines require three years after planting before bearing decent levels of fruit. Farmers must determine the most appropriate long-term use of their land.

Vineyard in Tasmania
Concerns about climate change are driving interest in cool regions – such as Tasmania’s Tamar Valley. Marcin Madry/Shutterstock

The challenge of standing out

Many of Australia’s 2,156 wineries are small-scale (typically privately owned). Other wineries are much larger, with extensive resources. Most consumers are largely unaware of most of these wineries – how many wine brands can you list?

Such diversity already presents a challenge for various wineries trying to market themselves. Adding to this, a large number of Australian wine brands are owned by just a few large industry players, some with links to retailers via vertical integration.

Retailers such as Endeavour Group (formerly part of Woolworths) and Coles own hundreds of wine brands. Some of these brands are marketed to look like independent wineries. Some commentators have even suggested a wine duopoly exists at the retail level.

wine bottles on a rack
Standing out in a crowded market is a big challenge for small producers. Sirbouman/Shutterstock

How can wineries survive?

With the trend towards less consumption overall, and towards premium-quality wines instead of ordinary-quality wines, some wineries may need to shift their focus.

On the challenges facing the industry, acclaimed Victorian winemaker Rick Kinzbrunner told me:

We need a better balance of supply and demand and especially more emphasis on top quality wines at reasonable prices.

Why this matters to you

If you’re a wine drinker, current wine industry issues may seem irrelevant. But the ongoing oversupply of ordinary-quality wine for the near future offers plenty of price discounts.

For consumers of premium wines, given current high demand, be wary: does what you’re getting quality-wise match the price? Some wines marketed at high prices don’t have the quality to match.

Consumers may wish to increase direct contact with wineries (via cellar doors, websites and mailing lists) and independent retailers to expand their options.

Winners and losers will emerge as inevitable industry change occurs.The Conversation

Paul Chad, Honorary Fellow, Faculty of Business and Law, School of Business, University of Wollongong

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

From peasant fodder to posh fare: how snails and oysters became luxury foods

An Oyster cellar in Leith. John Burnet, 1819; National Galleries of Scotland, Photo: Antonia Reeve
Garritt C. Van DykUniversity of Waikato

Oysters and escargot are recognised as luxury foods around the world – but they were once valued by the lower classes as cheap sources of protein.

Less adventurous eaters today see snails as a garden pest, and are quick to point out that freshly shucked oysters are not only raw but also alive when they are eaten.

How did these unusual ingredients become items of conspicuous consumption?

From garden snail to gastronomy

Eating what many consider to be a slimy nuisance seems almost counter-intuitive, but consuming land snails has an ancient history, dating to the Palaeolithic period, some 30,000 years ago in eastern Spain.

Ancient Romans also dined on snails, and spread their eating habits across their empire into Europe.

Lower and middle class Romans ate snails from their gardens, while elite consumers ate specially farmed snails, fed spices, honey and milk.

Blue snails in a mosaic.
An Ancient Roman mosaic dating to the 4th century AD depicting a basket of snails, Basilica di Santa Maria Assunta, Aquileia, Italy. Carole Raddato/Wikimedia CommonsCC BY-SA

Pliny the Elder (AD 24–79) described how snails were raised in ponds and given wine to fatten them up.

The first French recipe for snails appears in 1390, in Le Ménagier de Paris (The Good Wife’s Guide), but not in other cookbooks from the period.

In 1530, a French treatise on frogs, snails, turtles and artichokes considered all these foods bizarre, but surprisingly popular. Some of the appeal had to do with avoiding meat on “lean” days. Snails were classified as fish by the Catholic Church, and could even be eaten during Lent.

For the next 200 years, snails only appeared in Parisian cookbooks with an apology for including such a disgusting ingredient. This reflected the taste of upper-class urbanites, but snails were still eaten in the eastern provinces.

Colour etching: a woman at a market stall with baskets of snails.
Schneckenweib, or Snail Seller, illustrated by Johann Christian Brand in Vienna, after 1798. Wien Museum

An 1811 cookbook from Metz, in the Alsace region in northeastern France, describes raising snails like the Romans, and a special platter, l'escargotière, for serving them. The trend did not travel to Paris until after 1814.

French diplomat Charles-Maurice de Talleyrand-Périgord (1754–1838) hosted a dinner for Russian Tsar Alexander I, after he marched into Paris following the allied forces’ defeat of Napoleon in 1814.

The chef catering the meal was the father of French cuisine Marie-Antoine Carême, a native of Burgundy, spiritual home of the now famous escargots de Bourgogne.

Carême served the Tsar what would become a classic recipe, prepared with garlic, parsley and butter. Allegedly, the Tsar raved about the “new” dish, and snails became wildly popular. A recipe for Burgundy snails first appeared in a French culinary dictionary published in 1825.

It is ironic that it took the approval of a foreign emperor, who had just conquered Napoleon, to restore luxury status to escargot, a food that became a symbol of French cuisine.

Snails remain popular today in France, with consumption peaking during the Christmas holidays, but May 24 is National Escargot Day in France.

Oysters: the original fast food

Oysters are another ancient food, as seen in fossils dating to the Triassic Era, 200 million years ago. Evidence of fossilised oysters are found on every major land mass, and there is evidence of Indigenous oyster fisheries in North America and Australia that dates to the Holocene period, about 12,000 years ago.

There are references in classical Greek texts to what are probably oysters, by authors like Aristotle and Homer. Oyster shells found at Troy confirm they were a favoured food. Traditionally served as a first course at banquets in Ancient Greece, they were often cooked, sometimes with exotic spices.

bust of a man eating oyster, placing the shell in front of his mouth with one hand, the other hand on bib on chest.
Music-cover sheet for ‘Bonne-Bouche’ by Emile Waldteufel, 1847-1897. © The Trustees of the British MuseumCC BY-NC-SA

Pliny the Elder refers to oysters as a Roman delicacy. He recorded methods of the pioneer of Roman oyster farming, Sergius Orata, who brought the best specimens from across the Empire to sell to elite customers.

Medieval coastal dwellers gathered oysters at low tide, while wealthy inland consumers would have paid a premium for shellfish, a perishable luxury, transported to their castles.

French nobles in 1390 preferred cooked oysters, roasted over coals or poached in broths, perhaps as a measure to prevent food poisoning. As late as the 17th century, authors cautioned:

But if they be eaten raw, they require good wine […] to aid digestion.

Etching: a man peddles oysters in a wheelbarrow, caption reads 'Twelve Pence a Peck Oysters'
Oyster Seller, Jacob Gole, 1688–1724. Rijksmuseum

By the 18th century, small oysters were a popular pub snack, and larger ones were added as meat to the stew pot. That century, it is believed as many as 100,000 oysters were eaten each day in Edinburgh and the shells from the tavern in the basement filled in gaps in the brickwork at Gladstone’s Land in Edinburgh’s Royal Mile.

Scottish oyster farms in the Firth of Forth, an inlet of the North Sea, produced 30 million oysters in 1790, but continual over-harvesting took its toll.

By 1883 only 6,000 oysters were landed, and the population was declared extinct in 1957.

As wild oyster stocks dwindled, large oyster farms developed in cities like New York in the 19th century. Initially successful, they were polluted, and infected by typhoid from sewage. An outbreak in 1924 killed 150 people, the deadliest food poisoning in United States history.

Black and white photograph: sellers at a street stall.
Costumes of Naples: Oyster Sellers, c. 1906–10. Rijksmuseum

Far from the overabundance of oysters we once had, over-fishing, pollution, and invasive species all threaten oyster populations worldwide today. Due to this scarcity of wild oysters and the resources required to safely farm environmentally sustainable oysters, they are now a premium product.

Next on the menu

Scarcity made oysters a luxury, and a Tsar’s approval elevated snails to gourmet status. Could insects become the next status food?

Ancient Romans ate beetles and grasshoppers, and cultures around the world consume insects, but not (yet) as luxury products.

Maybe the right influencer can make honey-roasted locust the next species to jump from paddock to plate.The Conversation

Garritt C. Van Dyk, Senior Lecturer in History, University of Waikato

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.


Understanding macular degeneration: how to protect your vision

UNSW researcher Dr Lisa Nivison-Smith explains what’s behind the main cause of blindness in older Australians.

Age-related macular degeneration (AMD) is a progressive eye disease where the macula – the part of the retina responsible for central vision – degenerates.

It is the main cause of blindness in older Australians, with 1 in 7 people over the age of 50 having some form of the disease. And it is estimated AMD will affect around 288 million people worldwide by 2040.

Dr Lisa Nivison-Smith is a vision scientist at UNSW’s School of Optometry and Vision Science, where she specialises in macular degeneration with a view to improving early detection, diagnosis and management.

“Macular degeneration considerably impacts independent living as it leads to the loss of your central vision – the vision that you use to drive, to read, to watch television, to see the faces of your loved ones,” says Dr Nivison-Smith.

“Often, people with the early stages of the condition don’t know they have it. Some may experience changes to their vision such as difficulty seeing in low light or straight lines that seem curving or wavy. But for many it doesn’t really affect their vision in its early stages and so they find out during a regular visit to the optometrist or the GP when their retina is examined,” says Dr Nivison-Smith.

The retina is the tissue found along the back surface of the eye. It is made up of many layers of cells including photoreceptors, the cells that receive light and convert it to signals that tell your brain that you are seeing something.

“When you look at the macula region of the retina of someone in the early stages of macular degeneration, you can see little lumps – fatty deposits – in the photoreceptor layer,” says Dr Nivison-Smith.

“As the disease progresses you can see increased damage to this layer including death of the photoreceptors, and this is what causes permanent loss of central vision.”

Types of macular degeneration
There are two main types of macular degeneration: dry (atrophic) and wet (exudative).

“The dry form of macular degeneration is more common, accounting for about 80-90% of cases. It involves geographic atrophy – the death of photoreceptors and other retinal cells in the macula over time – leading to gradual vision loss,” explains Dr Nivison-Smith.

“The wet form, though less common, is more severe and involves abnormal blood vessel growth under the retina. These new vessels leak fluid or blood, causing rapid vision loss.”

Currently, there is only treatment readily available for the wet version of AMD, in the form of injections that prevent the abnormal blood vessel growth. However, the success of this treatment to preserve vision depends on early detection and a rapid initiation of treatment.

For dry AMD, new treatments are on the horizon, with the TGA recently approving a drug targeted at slowing the rate of geographic atrophy. However, this is not yet widely available to patients, and its long-term success rate and side effects are still unclear.

Can you prevent macular degeneration?
With no cure for macular degeneration, most focus is on early detection and implementing approaches to slow the progression of AMD to vision-threatening stages.

“Macular degeneration is caused by both genetic and lifestyle factors. So, the best thing to do is to get regular eye exams, especially if you are over 65 or have a family history of the disease,” says Dr Nivison-Smith.

“There is evidence to show a healthy lifestyle, in particular avoiding things like smoking, can significantly reduce your risk of macular degeneration. Specific dietary supplements, known as the AREDS formula, can also slow macular degeneration down when taken at the right stage of disease. So, looking after yourself and talking to a doctor or optometrist about possible dietary supplements can have a big impact,” says Dr Nivison-Smith.

Dr Nivison-Smith and her team are developing methods to better predict the trajectory of macular degeneration in individual cases, in order to develop a more personalised approach to care.

“Right now, we can take high resolution images of the retina and see if a person has the early stages of macular degeneration. But we are not able to easily predict what will happen next. We cannot determine who will progress to the next stage of disease quickly and need timely treatment versus who will remain stable and not need any treatment for many years,” says Dr Nivison-Smith.

“My research has analysed thousands of retinal images of eyes with early AMD and found that there are changes occurring in other parts of the retina that are not typically measured for macular degeneration."

These changes differed between those whose disease worsened versus those whose disease did not progress. This suggests these new changes may be a way to identify those at high-risk of progression and give them more targeted management.

Ultimately, anything we can do to better understand the early stages of the disease and slow down its progression will make a big difference to people’s quality of life, Dr Nivison-Smith says.

“I’m really passionate about stopping avoidable blindness.

“Australia has an amazing eye care system, so I encourage people to visit their optometrist for regular eye checks, particularly if you are over 65.

“By treating people with macular degeneration at the earliest stage possible we can hold off vision loss for a long period of time.”

Intergenerational Opportunity

Calling all adults 65+: Opportunity to Participate in a FREE Intergenerational Playgroup Program.

Incredible opportunity for older adults (65+) to participate in an Intergenerational Program under the “INTEGRITY” research trial, bringing adults and pre-school-aged children together for fun-filled and engaging activities, hoping to improve health and wellbeing outcomes for all.

Similar to the playgroup seen on the ABC Program 'Old People's Home for 4 Year Olds'.

Sites starting SOON and seeking older adults now include Terrey Hills and Dee Why preschools. This 20-week program involving 2-hour weekly sessions will be held at nearby local preschools throughout Sydney.

Eligibility requirements apply. Interested or want to know more? Call: 8052 4365, email integrity-study@georgeinstitute.org.au or visit https://redcap.link/integrity.trial.eoi

In conjunction with the University of NSW and The George Institute for Global Health.

ABN 90 085 953 331

Elanora Players Next production!

July 2025 Performance: The Great Divide

CAST
Barbara Hansen as Alex Whittle
Chris Richardson as Grace Delahunty
Miriam Gonzaga as Penny Poulter
Phoebe Brian as Rachel Poulter
Hans Wrang as Alan Bridger
Mike Radcliffe as Brian

PERFORMANCE DATES
Friday 11 Jul 7.30pm (Opening Night)*
Saturday 12 Jul 3pm & 7.30pm
Sunday 13 Jul 11am & 3pm
Friday 18 Jul 7.30pm
Saturday 19 Jul 1pm (note new times for last performances)
* Join us for complimentary wine and cheese after the show on Opening Night!

North Narrabeen Community Centre, 2-10 Woorarra Avenue, North Narrabeen.

TICKETS: $35, $28 concession
One complimentary ticket for bookings of 10 or more. Email admin@elanoraplayers.com.au for more info.
On sale now! 

AvPals 25th Year: Term Two Newport Sessions

You can book in and pay for sessions at Newport via the AvPals shop.

Avalon Computer Pals (AVPALS) helps seniors learn and improve their computer and technology skills. Avpals is a not for profit organisation run by volunteers. Since 2000, we have helped thousands of seniors from complete beginners to people who need to improve or update their skills. We offer “one to one” personal tuition or special short courses. 

Small class workshops are run at the Newport Community Centre on Tuesday afternoons.

One-to-one training is provided at our rooms in Avalon, under the Maria Regina Catholic Church, 7 Central Road, Avalon.

Join us in learning 'how to' in our 25th year!

The AvPals shop for Newport short sessions is HERE
The rest of this terms workshop offerings are:

Could cold sores increase the risk of Alzheimer’s disease? A new study is no cause for panic

And-One/Shutterstock
Joyce SietteWestern Sydney University

new study has found the herpes simplex virus type 1 (HSV-1), which causes cold sores, may be linked to the development of Alzheimer’s disease.

This idea is not entirely new. Previous research has suggested there may be an association between HSV-1 and Alzheimer’s disease, the most common form of dementia.

So what can we make of these new findings? And how strong is this link? Let’s take a look at the evidence.

First, what is HSV-1?

HSV-1 is a neurotropic virus, meaning it can infect nerve cells, which send and receive messages to and from the brain. It’s an extremely common virus. The World Health Organization estimates nearly two-thirds of the global population aged under 50 carries this virus, often unknowingly.

An initial infection can cause mild to severe symptoms including fever, headache and muscle aches, and may manifest as blisters and ulcers around the mouth or lips.

After this, HSV-1 typically lies dormant in the body’s nervous system, sometimes reactivating due to stress or illness. During reactivation, it can cause symptoms such as cold sores, although in many people it doesn’t cause any symptoms.

What did the new research look at?

In a study published this week in BMJ Open, researchers analysed data from hundreds of thousands of people drawn from a large United States health insurance dataset.

They conducted a matched “case-control” analysis involving more than 340,000 adults aged 50 and older diagnosed with Alzheimer’s disease between 2006 and 2021. Each Alzheimer’s disease patient (a “case”) was matched to a control without a diagnosis of Alzheimer’s disease based on factors such as age, sex and geographic region, a method designed to reduce statistical bias.

The team then examined how many of these people had a prior diagnosis of HSV-1 and whether they had been prescribed antiviral treatment for the infection.

A senior woman looking out a window.
Alzheimer’s disease is the most common form of dementia. Nadino/Shutterstock

Among people with Alzheimer’s disease, 0.44% had a previous HSV-1 diagnosis, compared to 0.24% of controls. This translates to an 80% increased relative risk of Alzheimer’s disease in those diagnosed with HSV-1, however the absolute numbers are small.

The researchers also found people who received antiviral treatment for HSV-1 had roughly a 17% lower risk of developing Alzheimer’s disease compared to those who were untreated.

Not a new hypothesis

This isn’t the first time researchers have speculated about a viral role in Alzheimer’s disease. Earlier studies have detected HSV-1 DNA in postmortem brain tissues from people who had Alzheimer’s disease.

Laboratory research has also shown HSV-1 can trigger amyloid-beta plaque accumulation in nerve cells and mouse brains. Amyloid-beta plaques are one of the defining features of Alzheimer’s disease pathology, so this has led to speculation that reactivation of the virus may contribute to brain inflammation or damage.

But importantly, previous research and the current study show associations, not proof HSV-1 causes Alzheimer’s disease. These links do not confirm the virus initiates or drives disease progression.

Some other important caveats

The study relied on insurance claim data, which may not always reflect accurate or timely clinical diagnoses. HSV-1 is also frequently underdiagnosed, especially when symptoms are mild or absent. These points could explain why both the Alzheimer’s group and the control group saw such low rates of HSV-1, when population rates of this virus are estimated to be far higher.

This means many carriers of HSV-1 in the study may have gone unrecorded and therefore makes the link harder to interpret clearly. The dataset also doesn’t capture how often people had recurring symptoms, or the severity or duration of infections – conditions which might influence risk more directly.

Another complicating factor is people with HSV-1 might differ in other ways from those without it. Differences in health-care access, the health of a person’s immune systemlifestylegenetics, or even education – could all influence Alzheimer’s disease risk.

MRI images of the human brain.
A variety of factors can influence a person’s risk of Alzheimer’s disease. sfam_photo/Shutterstock

So should you be concerned if you have cold sores?

The short answer is no – at least not based on current evidence. Most people with HSV-1 will never develop Alzheimer’s disease. The vast majority live with the virus without any serious neurological issues.

The “herpes hypothesis” of Alzheimer’s disease is an interesting area for further research, but far from settled science. This study adds weight to the conversation but doesn’t offer a definitive answer.

Alzheimer’s disease is a complex condition with multiple risk factors, including age, genetics, heart health, education, lifestyle and environmental exposures.

Infections such as HSV-1 may be one part of a larger, interconnected puzzle, but they are highly unlikely to be the sole cause.

With this in mind, the best thing to do is to focus on what we already know can help keep your brain healthy as you age. Regular physical activitygood quality sleepsocial engagementa balanced diet and managing stress can all support long-term brain health.The Conversation

Joyce Siette, Associate Professor | Deputy Director, The MARCS Institute for Brain, Behaviour, and Development, Western Sydney University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

An online travel company just collapsed. Here’s how to avoid being left stranded by an online deal

Viacheslav Lopatin/Shutterstock
Madalyn ScerriTorrens University Australia and Anita ManfredaTorrens University Australia

Traveldream.com.au sold discounted holidays – curated hiking tours, boutique cruises and cultural getaways through a slick website and polished social media ads. But news emerged last week that the Melbourne-based travel company has collapsed into administration, leaving customers out of pocket by thousands of dollars, and in some cases, stranded overseas.

What many didn’t know was that Traveldream hadn’t been formally accredited with the leading industry body since 2020. Its status under the Australian Travel Accreditation Scheme, run by the Australian Travel Industry Association, had been cancelled.

To make matters worse, most travel insurance policies don’t cover insolvency, meaning many customers have no way to recover their losses.

Australians are expected to spend over A$2 billion booking holidays online in 2024–25.

Big name platforms such as Booking.com and Expedia account for about 60% of this activity. But many travellers are also turning to smaller or lesser-known providers offering flashy deals and lower prices, often with fewer safeguards.

So, how can you protect yourself? Start with these five checks.

1. Don’t be swayed by slick websites or social media ads

It’s a common tactic, and one that’s hard to resist. You’re scrolling, you see a dreamy image, the price is tempting, and suddenly you’re halfway through checkout.

But a polished ad doesn’t guarantee legitimacy.

Travel-related scams are on the rise, especially involving online-only sellers.

couple relaxing on tropical beach at sunset in hotel
Ads on social media for idyllic vacations can be tempting, but check the fine print. Song_about_summer/Shutterstock

Check for a verifiable business address, phone number and customer support. If the deal feels vague, under-priced or overly urgent, that’s a red flag.

Look for independent reviews (on Trustpilot, Tripadvisor or Google), and check Scamwatch for known issues.

2. Look at how the company engages with customers

A company’s reputation isn’t just about what it promises: it’s built on how it responds to questions and complaints. Before booking, take a moment to see how the business interacts with customers online.

Do they reply constructively to complaints? Do they offer updates or explanations when issues arise?

Also notice the tone. Does it feel human and responsive, or generic and hands-off? That can suggest how they’ll treat you after the sale.

Small signs can speak volumes. A page with thousands of followers but no visible engagement may indicate a paid audience – and a company that vanishes when things get difficult.

3. Check if the company is accredited

Another way to assess a travel company’s credibility is to check if it holds formal accreditation. This signals the company has met standards in financial security, customer service and dispute resolution.

Search the Australian Travel Accreditation Scheme register at https://www.atas.com.au, or look for Quality Tourism Accreditation. For overseas providers, check for recognised local schemes.

Accreditation offers extra reassurance, but it’s not the whole picture. Some large, reputable companies, such as Expedia, operate without it. If a company isn’t accredited, proceed with caution and focus on how bookings and payments are handled.

4. Scrutinise policies carefully

Before booking, check what happens if the provider goes bust, whether you can cancel or reschedule, and how your booking will be confirmed. Where possible, follow up directly with the hotel, airline or tour operator to make sure reservations are secured.

Cropped back view of woman entering hotel room and holding suitcase
Booking directly with a hotel or tour provider can ensure you are getting up-to-date availability. Media_Photos/Shutterstock

It’s also important to understand what travel insurance does – and doesn’t – cover.

Company insolvency is one of the most common exclusions. Unless a policy includes “end supplier failure” or a similar clause (most don’t), you may not be able to claim a refund. Always read the Product Disclosure Statement to check exactly where you stand.

Another safeguard is to pay with protection in mind. Although conditions vary by provider, credit cards may offer chargebacks if the goods or services aren’t delivered.

5. Book direct where feasible

While accredited travel agencies can be helpful for complex itineraries, like overseas trips with multiple stops or bundled services, it’s often worth booking directly with the provider when making travel arrangements online, whether that’s a hotel, airline or tour company.

Cutting out the intermediary can offer better value, including complimentary extras, flexible cancellation and full access to loyalty programs.

Direct bookings usually reflect real-time availability and pricing, reducing the risk of outdated information. You’ll benefit from direct communication and confirmation, making it easier to customise or resolve issues.

If something goes wrong, there’s also greater clarity about who’s responsible – offering stronger recourse under Australian Consumer Law.

The bottom line?

As more Australians book holidays online, it’s becoming harder to tell what’s trustworthy and what could leave you out of pocket.

Traveldream’s collapse is a reminder. Even in the world of digital travel deals, it pays to ask: is this company built to last, not just until your trip departs, but until you return home?The Conversation

Madalyn Scerri, Senior Lecturer in Tourism and Hospitality, Torrens University Australia and Anita Manfreda, Senior Lecturer in Tourism, Torrens University Australia

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

From the Liver King to ultramarathons, fitness influencers are glorifying extreme masculinity where ‘pain is the point’

Netflix/Untold: The Liver King
Samuel CornellUNSW Sydney

A new Netflix documentary about a shirtless supplement salesman who claimed to be “natural” and was exposed as a fraud might seem like a punchline.

But Untold: The Liver King is more than just a character study of a well-known fitness influencer; it’s a case study of performative masculinity in the world of social media.

Brian Johnson, better known as the Liver King, built a brand on extreme workouts, eating raw organ meat, and evangelising about masculinity. He preached “ancestral living” and radical self-control, all while secretly using steroids.

And his rapid rise to popularity reveals how social media rewards the spectacle of hypermasculinity – especially when it leans into extreme behaviours.

Extreme self-discipline, extreme exerciseextreme eating and extreme “wellness” have all become forms of public performance on social media.

From influencers pushing steroids or “wellness” lifestyles, to the growing popularity of ultramarathons, a new model of masculinity is going viral: control your body, grit through pain, workout hard, and make sure everyone hears about it.

The rise of ‘discipline content’

Social media apps and websites such as TikTok, YouTube, and Instagram, are flooded with content that frames pain and extreme physical effort as markers of masculine worth.

One analysis of male fitness YouTubers found they established authority and discipline through a mix of visible physical strength and affiliations with commercial fitness brands. In some cases, the influencers explicitly listed their personal records or showcased their physique post-training as proof of their “masculinity” and discipline.

Influencers also often frame extreme leanness and muscularity as indicators of moral virtue and discipline, even when achieving it has taken a negative physical or mental toll on them. The look of discipline has become more valuable than the outcome of it.

Posts are often wrapped in the language of “resilience”, “discipline” and militaristic rhetoric. Men are told to “go to war” in the gym, to “stay hard”, and to generally treat life like a battlefield.

What’s being sold isn’t stoicism: it’s pseudo-stoicism – a term researchers have coined to describe emotional suppression masquerading as strength and discipline.

Pain is the point

Strava’s 2023 Year in Sport report found Gen Z athletes are 31% less likely to exercise for health reasons compared to older generations. Instead, they are more likely to train with a focus on athletic performance – that is, to push their physical limits, improve metrics such as speed or distance, and outperform others.

The same report shows a surge in extreme endurance activity. Compared to 2023 data, uploads (activities shared with others) of gravel bike rides grew 55%, trail runs grew 16%, and ultramarathon-style workouts grew by 9%.

Take Nedd Brockmann, who ran across Australia in 2022, and last year ran 1,600 kilometres in ten days to raise money for charity – all while sharing his self-imposed physical torture.

Or take the countless fitness content creators pushing themselves through punishing routines for the camera.

These cases reflect a deeper shift of fitness being turned into spectacle, wherein suffering becomes a sign of legitimacy, and pain is “proof” that you’re serious.

Such extreme content, which is often visually striking, can also be pushed by social media algorithms. Research shows how social media platforms systematically boost content that is intenseemotionally charged, and morally loaded.

In other words, posts that provoke a reaction are more likely to get promoted. And content relating to “wellness” extremism is designed to provoke, as it is visceral, performative, and packed with motivational and self-help anecdotes.

Why this matters

This is a potential public health issue.

Social media platforms amplify and monetise these performances, often pushing the most extreme content to the top. And influencers make money, above the money made from directly these platforms, from selling supplementsgear and coaching plans. At the same time, they act in more and more extreme ways to get further amplified by algorithms.

The risks of this dynamic, for both the viewers and creators, are very real. They range from hormone damage, to mental and physical decline, to injury, and even death.

But there is also a deeper ideological harm, as young men are fed a narrow and punishing idea of what it means to be a man. They are taught pain equals purpose, and that if you’re not suffering, you’re not trying.

Where to from here?

Public health agencies need to reckon with this form of digital hypermasculinity.

Extreme fitness influencers aren’t just poor role models; they’re the product of a system that profits from insecurity and spectacle. The goal shouldn’t be to ban or censor this content. But we do need to challenge its dominance, and offer alternatives.

That means engaging young men in offline spaces, such as the Tomorrow Man project, where they have an outlet for community and relationship building.

It means creating counter-narratives that don’t mock, but model, healthier versions of ambition and masculinity. For instance, the Movember campaign’s podcast Dad in Progress explores the various challenges and experiences faced by new dads.

It also means holding platforms accountable for the way they amplify extreme content.

In the absence of healthier narratives, self-flagellation is the only thing young men will have to aspire to.The Conversation

Samuel Cornell, PhD Candidate in Public Health & Community Medicine, School of Population Health, UNSW Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

What’s the obscure Australian online safety standard Elon Musk’s X is trying to dodge in court? An expert explains

Rob CoverRMIT University

In its most recent battle with authorities in Australia, X (formerly Twitter) has launched legal action in the Federal Court, seeking an exemption from a new safety standard aimed at preventing the spread of harmful material online.

The standard in question is known as the Relevant Electronic Services Standard. It came into effect in December 2024, but won’t start being enforced by Australia’s online regulator, eSafety, until June this year.

Compared with the social media ban for under-16s, this standard has been a side issue in the broader topic of online safety. So what exactly is it? And will it be effective at preventing the spread of harmful material online?

What is the standard?

The Relevant Electronic Services Standard contains criteria to help address the pervasiveness of harmful and illegal material distributed online. It is particularly focused on child sexual exploitation content, depictions of extreme violence, illegal drug material, and pro-terror content.

Relevant electronic services (RES) are digital services that enable user-to-user content. This includes instant messaging, email and chat platforms. The legal definition also includes some online gaming services.

Under Australia’s Online Safety Act 2021, the communications minister may exempt some services or platforms from being defined as an RES. The minister can also set conditions on the service for exemption, such as having a robust moderation service, or being a messaging service for internal employees of a company.

Some social media platforms, such as Facebook and X, may be defined as RES. That’s because they also offer user-to-user messaging services. It is sensible, then, for the Federal Court to determine whether they fall under social media codes or RES standards, or both.

The standards require RES to implement systems, processes and technologies to detect and remove child sexual abuse and pro-terror material from their services, and to actively deter end-users from distributing this material.

There are consequences for services that fail to comply. The eSafety commissioner, Julie Inman Grant, can issue a formal warning or infringement notice, or have the courts apply a civil penalty.

What does the standard do?

The Online Safety Act 2021 imposes obligations on RES providers, particularly regarding the handling of harmful material. This material is categorised into several classes, including Class 1A and Class 1B content.

Class 1A material typically means child exploitation and pro-terror content. Class 1B material refers to extreme violence, promotion of crime, and illegal drug-related content.

The class of content is determined by referring to the National Classification Scheme. This scheme sets standards for the ratings of films.

Class 1A and 1B material is content, texts and images that would be “refused classification” under the scheme. That is, it would be material that is usually not allowed to be distributed at all. Class 2 material is what we usually consider X-rated or 18+ material.

At the moment, the eSafety commissioner can ask a RES to remove Class 1 or Class 2 content, or the service can be penalised. However, the next step has been to work with industry to develop codes that require service providers to be more proactive in preventing Class 1 content being shared between their users.

Will the standard be effective?

X wants its platform to be treated as exempt, and governed by the similar but less stringent Social Media Code instead. Whatever the Federal Court decides, however, there are other issues to consider.

Part of the difficulty with the scheme is that it relies on harmful content coming to the attention of the eSafety commissioner. This usually happens when an end-user makes a complaint.

But our recent research, which surveyed 2,520 representative Australians and will be published later this year, found that only about 10% of users who were the target of digital harms reported them to the eSafety commissioner. Among those who had witnessed harmful content or behaviour, only 6% reported. About 40% of Australians don’t believe reporting will make any difference.

Another issue with the industry standards raised by digital rights activists is that it may require services to investigate user messages even when end-to-end encryption of messages is used. That may have serious privacy implications.

A row of flags leading up to a stone building.
New global treaties could help address the problem of online harm. nexus 7/Shutterstock

A global treaty could help

This ties into broader problems with the online safety framework.

Much of the focus has been on managing platforms and getting platforms to police users and content – a necessary approach to avoid penalising individuals and overwhelming courts.

However, service provider policing often fails to meet the norms of due process, such as transparency and the right to appeal decisions.

It also makes platforms and messaging providers the “arbiters” of free speech and censorship, instead of governments, courts and communities.

While setting standards on platforms is one part of the solution, we need to continue developing remedies to protect users. This may include global agreements and multilateral treaties, similar to the International Covenant on Civil and Political Rights, so all countries can share the burden locally for digital harms that occur across jurisdictions, and ensure due process and the protection of privacy.The Conversation

Rob Cover, Professor of Digital Communication and Director of the RMIT Digital Ethnography Research Centre, RMIT University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Junk food is addictive. Drugs like Ozempic treat addiction. But when will we tackle Big Food like we did Big Tobacco?

Polina Tankilevitch/Pexels
Natasha YatesBond University

Since Ozempic hit the public consciousness as a weight-loss medication, one in eight Americans have tried it (or a version of it) to lose weight.

This is remarkable: less than five years ago, most people reading this would not have known these drugs existed. As availability of Ozempic and other GLP-1 based medications has increased, so has controversy. Are they worsening “fat stigma”? Are they safe in the long term? Why aren’t they more affordable? Aren’t they just a chemical solution to a man-made problem?


Review: Diet, Drugs and Dopamine: The Promise – and Peril – of the Latest Weight-Loss Drugs – David A. Kessler (Text Publishing)


When the former head of the United States Food and Drug Administration (FDA), Dr David A. Kessler, suggests answers to these questions, it is worth pausing to listen. As a GP who regularly treats patients with obesity, I found many of his arguments convincing. In Diet, Drugs and Dopamine, he writes:

We can now effectively treat obesity [with GLP-1 injectables], even if we are only masking the root cause. It may seem absurd to have one industry make us sick only to have another industry develop drugs to treat that sickness.

Provocatively, he directly likens the smoking industry of the past to today’s food industry: specifically, ultra-formulated foods, which are foods with “super-normal combinations of fat and sugar, fat and salt, and carbs and salt, that are always within reach”. These foods have been modified from their original form to such an extent they are barely recognisable, but highly palatable and easily transportable.

a slim man in glasses, dressed in black, standing between two white columns
David Kessler likens the smoking industry of the past to today’s food industry. Joy Asico-Smith/Text Publishing

Speaking from experience

Kessler speaks not only with the authority of decades of scientific understanding, but with the empathy of personal understanding: he struggles with obesity himself and used GLP-1 drugs to cut his body fat in half: from 30% to 15%.

He told the Washington Post the side effects were unpleasant, including bloating, intense chills and “occasional sharp abdominal pains”. He also said these drugs could “halt the trajectory of chronic disease in the United States if used under medical supervision and by the right people”.

This book deep dives into why Kessler personally, along with millions around the world, struggles to lose weight and keep it off. He points out:

I have two advanced degrees […] I have been Dean of two medical schools. I’ve run the FDA. No-one would ever accuse me of not having discipline and determination.

If managing weight were simply about sufficient education and willpower, Kessler – for one – would not struggle with it. But he does. His book invites readers to lay down their assumptions and be open to new ways of thinking about obesity.

He is not presenting anything new. His unique contribution here is the drawing together of insights from various fields of research (addiction, endocrinology, obesity medicine), telling a compelling story about why obesity is so prevalent and difficult to treat. It is a story of many influences: including biology, psychology and even the economy.

Weight is a health issue

In some ways, this is a dense read. Kessler’s references (at the end) take up a full third of the book. But in other ways, it’s an easy read. He writes in a narrative style, weaving conversations with researchers into his personal story of struggle. In this way, he pre-empts reader arguments, showing us how his views differ from others.

For example, he gives voice to the opinions of the “Body Positivity” movement – which advocates for respect and acceptance of all body sizes – while still concluding losing weight is something we need to aim for. He recognises weight is not a cosmetic issue, but a health issue: many serious diseases, like heart failure, stroke, rheumatioid arthritis and diabetes, share obesity as a risk factor.

Our society’s failure to act on obesity will lead to increasing illness, Kessler argues. He backs this – and all his claims – with pages of data, which he presents in relatable forms. For example, 13 types of cancer have an increased risk with obesity. A man with a BMI greater than 40 gets nine years shaved off his life.

a larger woman in office across from a smiling woman who looks like a doctor
Millions of people struggle to lose weight and keep it off. Silverkblack/Pexels

Kessler structures the book in four parts. The first, provocatively, is about the addictive power of food. This way of viewing food underpins the rest of the book. Part 2 explains the complex biology of weight gain and loss. (Spoiler: it’s not just about counting calories and exercising.) Part 3 outlines the role of GLP-1 medications in sustainable weight loss in a comprehensive, practical and nuanced way.

And the final part cautions readers not to rely purely on medication, pointing to environmental factors that have led to obesity in the first place, like sedentary lifestyles and diets dominated by unhealthy foods.

Ultra-formulated foods: the culprit

Humming throughout, rising to a crescendo in the last section, is the accusation of a prime mover behind the obesity epidemic: hyper-palatable foods that have been created this way on purpose by adding sugar, salt and fat. This results in both long shelf lives, and enjoyable sensations when eaten (for example: crunchy or soft). Creating these properties means significantly changing a food from its original state, or even creating it from scratch in a laboratory.

He wisely refuses to get dragged into discussing “ultra-processed foods” (UPFs), which have become a politically contentious topic. Debate around the exact definition of a “UPF” has allowed the food industry to distract and deflect from their potential harms. By using the term “ultra-formulated food”, Kessler neatly side-steps those with a vested interest in defending UPFs.

a man with a small belly and tattooed arms eating a burger while hands measure his bare stomach
Ultra-formulated foods are significantly changed from their original state. Karolina Grabowska/Pexels

The problem, he contends, lies in the addictive qualities of ultra-formulated foods, which – coupled with diminished nutrient content – cause metabolic mayhem when we eat them. Our glucose levels spike and visceral fat builds up.

Ultra-formulated foods are abundant, too. There are reasonable arguments that processing food has been essential in staving off starvation. But instead of helping us avoid illness, ultra-formulated products are “weapons against our biology”.

The FDA, his prior workplace, sets guidelines around food safety, he points out. But, he asks, why there are no regulations protecting the community from food that is heavily processed to become hyper-palatable and energy dense, but low in nutrition?

What needs to happen?

Kessler’s final call is directed at both individuals and communities. He calls on us to untangle ourselves from dependence on ultra-formulated foods. And he wants communities to collectively demand a healthier future.

Kessler is methodical in his explanations, continually anticipating and rebutting potential arguments. Much of what he says is compelling – but the real question is what each of us chooses to do about it.

His take-homes in a nutshell: ultra-formulated foods are addictive. GLP-1 injectables treat that addiction. But the ultimate solution is to regulate ultra-formulated foods in the first place.The Conversation

Natasha Yates, General Practitioner, PhD Candidate, Bond University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

The public service has a much smaller gender pay gap than the private sector. It’s a big achievement

NDAB Creativity/Shutterstock
Leonora RisseUniversity of Canberra

After two years of publishing the gender pay gaps of Australia’s private-sector companies, the Workplace Gender Equality Agency has released public-sector employer data for the first time.

The report shows a stark contrast between the private and public sectors. The Commonwealth public sector has a gender pay gap of 6.4%, far less than the equivalent gap of 21.1% in the private sector.

The agency attributes a big part of the “substantially better” outcome in the public sector to the achievement of gender balance at managerial and board levels.

Women’s representation in senior and governance roles doesn’t just narrow the pay gap at the top. It can also change workplace cultures and embed more gender-equitable practices that ripple through to all occupational levels.

The agency says public-sector employers have achieved this outcome by “long-term and deliberate actions that address gender equality”. These include conducting a gender pay gap analysis and formulating a gender-equality strategy.

The public sector’s results also illustrate the power of setting targets. The Australian government has set – and now achieved – targets for women to hold 50% of all Australian government board positions.

Who’s performing well?

Of the 120 public-sector employers in the Workplace Gender Equality Agency’s dataset, 55 have a gender pay gap that falls into the target range of between –5% and +5%.

Several have a gender pay gap in total remuneration at or very close to zero. These include the Department of the Prime Minister and Cabinet, Department of Treasury, Department of Social Services and the Office of the Fair Work Ombudsman.

A handful have a slight positive gender pay gap in favour of women, including the Productivity Commission.

Where is there room for improvement?

To support greater transparency, the Workplace Gender Equality Agency has published a searchable database of Commonwealth public sector employers. This is broken down by each department and agency.

The largest gender gaps in median total remuneration are reported by the National Offshore Petroleum Safety and Environmental Management Authority (50.4%) and Coal Mining Industry Corporation (31.7%).

Closer to the middle of the pack, the Australian Federal Police reports a gender pay gap of 12.2%. The Reserve Bank of Australia has a gap of 11.5%, and Australia Post 8.6%.

The data does not include elected officials such as members of parliament.

All up, half of Commonwealth public-sector employers have a gender pay gap larger than 5%, which the agency deems the acceptable maximum.

But this is still a better performance than in the private sector, where 60% of companies exceeded the 5% threshold.

How much less are women earning?

Women working in Australia’s public sector earn on average A$8,200 less per year than their male colleagues.

The data cover both the Australian Public Service (APS) (which is directly responsible for the delivery of government services) and non-APS organisations (which deliver services on behalf of the government).

Within the APS workforce, men’s average total remuneration of $128,503 compares to women’s $121,146. This equates to a 5.7% gap.

In public-sector agencies outside the APS, this gender pay gap widens to 8.8%. Men’s average salary of $127,354 compares to women’s $116,157.

In agencies outside the APS, more of this gender gap – 5.6 percentage points – is due to men being paid more in bonuses, overtime and superannuation. Within the APS, these above-base payments contribute only 1.1 percentage points to the overall gap.

The role of discretionary above-base payments in widening the gap in total remuneration is similar to the dynamics of the private sector, where there is also greater scope for individual negotiation.

Research shows negotiation practices are laced with gender biases.

Coworkers at a desk
Public sector employers have taken action after conducting gender pay gap analysis. Tint Media/Shutterstock

More standardised recruitment, promotion and wage-setting practices in the public sector, compared with private companies, mean there’s less scope for personal subjectivity and implicit biases in hiring, promotion and salary decisions.

Turning data into action

This is the first year the Commonwealth public sector’s performance on gender equality has been published at employer level. It follows changes to legislation in 2022 requiring public sector employers to report their gender equality indicators to WGEA from 2023, similar to the obligations of large private companies.

The point of publishing gender pay gaps is to spark awareness and motivate employer action.

Three in four public sector employers report they have taken action after conducting a gender pay gap analysis. Of these actions, one in four employers have corrected instances of unequal pay.

With a heightened awareness of the benefits of flexible work, almost all public-sector employers (96%) reported “flexible working is promoted throughout the organisation”.

But there is scope to improve the practical implementation of flexible work policies.

Only 56% of public-sector employers offer an online option for all team meetings. Only 43% provide support to managers to ensure performance evaluations are not unfairly biased against staff who work remotely or hybrid. And only 5% report that management positions can be designed as part-time.

With this greater transparency, there will be opportunity to monitor changes in future to look for ongoing improvements in gender-equality practices and outcomes.

It’s in the interests of fostering a more equitable, productive and effective public sector for all.The Conversation

Leonora Risse, Associate Professor in Economics, University of Canberra

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Ground broken on $780 million Sydney Biomedical Accelerator

May 21,2025
The Minns Labor Government, the University of Sydney and the Sydney Local Health District will today break ground on the $780 million Sydney Biomedical Accelerator, a world class health education and research complex that will house more than 1200 researchers and clinician scientists on its 36,000 square metre site, spanning the University and Royal Prince Alfred Hospital.

Due to open in 2028, the giant facility will be a major centre for biomedical innovation and research – bringing the disciplines of biology and medicine together to fast-track scientific discovery into real life health outcomes for patients and strengthen Australia’s global leadership in biomedicine.

Following a competitive tender process Australian-owned Richard Crookes Constructions has been selected as construction partner to build the complex, which includes two new biomedical research buildings over eight levels, and connecting bridges between the university and RPA.

An independent business with a strong track record in health construction, Richard Crookes’ expertise will be key to bringing the project’s vision to life and will employ more than 3,000 workers during construction.

Connecting the hospital and university is crucial for the new facility to enable a seamless exchange of knowledge from lab to bedside, such as by conducting targeted clinical trials.

The facility will include:
  • Laboratory and collaboration spaces for researchers, clinicians, and industry, including an innovation and start-up hub.
  • A high-tech biobank – a storage facility for tissue samples, cells, blood and DNA used for research.
  • High-performing computing.
  • Precision medicine.
  • State-of-the-art surgery and anatomy research and teaching.
  • Core research facilities for microscopy, preclinical imaging, drug discovery, protein production and purification.
  • Clinical trials and patient-facing clinical spaces.
The Sydney Biomedical Accelerator will also help attract and retain world class researchers, provide anatomy training facilities for our future health workforce, and create career opportunities for those wanting to break into the field of medical and scientific research.

The NSW Health Research and Innovation Strategy was released this month. The Strategy seeks to foster a coordinated collaborative research environment across NSW.

Health Minister, Ryan Park said:

“This new facility is set to change the game when it comes to research into diagnostics and treatments in Australia, and I am really proud that we have it here in New South Wales.

“Benchmarked against the world’s leading biomedical facilities, the Accelerator is set to change to landscape of medical research, and I hope it becomes a major drawcard for world class health researchers.  

“Cutting-edge laboratories will empower researchers to accelerate the discovery of cures and treatments for a wide range of diseases, driving medical breakthroughs with greater speed and precision.”

Minister for Medical Research, David Harris said:

"The Sydney Biomedical Accelerator is more than just a new building, it's a launchpad for the next generation of medical breakthroughs. 

“We know that for NSW to be a world leader in medical research we need to continue to foster collaboration across government, health, industry and academia. 

“By bringing together scientists, clinicians and innovators under one roof, we're laying the foundation for discoveries that will shape the future of healthcare in this country and across the globe.”

Sydney Local Health District Chief Executive, Deb Willcox AM said:

“The Sydney Biomedical Accelerator represents a transformative leap in our health and medical research landscape.

“By bringing together class-leading laboratories, clinicians and academics from Royal Prince Alfred Hospital and the University of Sydney, we can accelerate the journey from scientific discovery to real‑world patient outcomes, cementing our position as a global leader in biomedical innovation.”

University of Sydney Vice-Chancellor and President, Professor Mark Scott AO said: 

"The Sydney Biomedical Accelerator is a bold step forward in Australia’s research and development landscape.

“What makes it unique is its integration of world-class research with innovation, commercial translation, and real-world clinical outcomes. It will be a place for discovery – but also one where ideas transform into impact, accelerating solutions from the lab bench to the bedside and beyond."

What’s the difference between skim milk and light milk?

bodnar.photo/Shutterstock
Margaret MurraySwinburne University of Technology

If you’re browsing the supermarket fridge for reduced-fat milk, it’s easy to be confused by the many different types.

You can find options labelled skim, skimmed, skinny, no fat, extra light, lite, light, low fat, reduced fat, semi skim and HiLo (high calcium, low fat).

So what’s the difference between two of these common milks – skim milk and light milk? How are they made? And which one’s healthier?

What do they contain?

Skim milk

In Australia and New Zealand, skim milk is defined as milk that contains no more than 1.5% milk fat and has at least 3% protein. On the nutrition information panel this looks like less than 1.5 grams of fat and at least 3g protein per 100 millilitres of milk.

But the fat content of skim milk can be as low as 0.1% or 0.1g per 100mL.

Light milk

Light milk is sometimes spelled “lite” but they’re essentially the same thing.

While light milk is not specifically defined in Australia and New Zealand, the term “light” is defined for food generally. If we apply the rules to milk, we can say light milk must contain no more than 2.4% fat (2.4g fat per 100mL).

In other words, light milk contains more fat than skim milk.

You can find the fat content by reading the “total fat per 100mL” on the label’s nutrition information panel.

How about other nutrients?

The main nutritional difference between skim milk and light milk, apart from the fat content, is the energy content.

Skim milk provides about 150 kilojoules of energy per 100mL whereas light milk provides about 220kJ per 100mL.

Any milk sold as cow’s milk must contain at least 3% protein (3g protein per 100mL of milk). That includes skim or light milk. So there’s typically not much difference there.

Likewise, the calcium content doesn’t differ much between skim milk and light milk. It is typically about 114 milligrams to 120mg per 100mL.

You can check these and other details on the label’s nutrition information panel.

How are they made?

Skim milk and light milk are not made by watering down full-cream milk.

Instead, full-cream milk is spun at high speeds in a device called a centrifuge. This causes the fat to separate and be removed, leaving behind milk containing less fat.

Here’s how fat is removed to produce skim and light milk.

Who should be drinking what?

Australian Dietary Guidelines recommend we drink mostly reduced-fat milk – that is, milk containing no more than 2.4g fat per 100mL. Skim milk and light milk are both included in that category.

The exception is for children under two years old, who are recommended full-cream milk to meet their growing needs.

The reason our current guidelines recommend reduced-fat milk is that, since the 1970s, reduced-fat milk has been thought to help with reducing body weight and reducing the risk of heart disease. That’s because of its lower content of saturated fat and energy (kilojoules/calories) than full cream milk.

However, more recent evidence has shown drinking full-cream milk is not associated with weight gain or health risks. In fact, eating or drinking dairy products of any type may help reduce the risk of obesity and other metabolic disorders (such as heart disease and type 2 diabetes), especially in children and adolescents.

The science in this area continues to evolve. So the debate around whether there are health benefits to choosing reduced-fat milk over full cream milk is ongoing.

Whether or not there any individual health benefits from choosing skim milk or light milk over full cream will vary depending on your current health status and broader dietary habits.

For personalised health and dietary advice, speak to a health professional.The Conversation

Margaret Murray, Senior Lecturer, Nutrition, Swinburne University of Technology

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Alarm bells ring over Bupa’s aggressive vertical integration plans: AMA

May 21, 2025
Bupa’s reported aggressive plans to expand its own network of medical centres by a further 130 and create 60 of its own mental health clinics is a major red flag for Australia’s private health system, which is now at risk of being plunged into a US-style model.

Australian Medical Association President Dr Danielle McMullen said the health insurer’s reported agenda to funnel 25 to 30 per cent of the cases that it manages through its own “ecosystem” of Bupa-controlled facilities raises serious questions about conflicts of interest.

“We are concerned Australia is hurtling towards a US-style system of vertically integrated managed care, where health funds have too much say over the clinical care that patients receive,” Dr McMullen said.

“It is crucial that we avoid a scenario where profits are put before patients, like we have seen happen in the US with disastrous results. Clinical decisions must remain in the hands of doctors and their patients — not influenced by insurers or corporate ownership — so that care is guided by need, not by financial incentives.”

Bupa already owns 180 dental clinics, 50 optical stores and 22 medical centres in Australia and it is not the only insurer pursuing this type of aggressive agenda.

Medibank has been moving to own or have a share in more and more health services and there is little that can be done to stop this march by insurers in the current regulatory environment. Current health legislation allows private health insurers to set up, take-over and own health service delivery businesses.

“The conflict of interest in an insurer both funding and delivering care is incredibly obvious — and while these insurers will use spin to explain away these concerns, it is vital the new government moves quickly to address this, including through the establishment of a private health system authority to oversee the sector,” Dr McMullen said.

“Patients should be very worried when private health insurers are setting up an environment where they are potentially able to access more information than ever before about a patient’s health and interfere with decisions that should be made by a patient after talking with their doctor in the safety of a private consultation.”

The AMA is also deeply concerned about Bupa’s plans to roll out whole genome sequencing for selected customers in Australia.  

“Patient gene information is not to be taken lightly, and it is too risky to give this to insurers, who could use it to quietly bypass existing community-rating legislation that requires private health insurers to charge Australians the same price for any given private health insurance product, irrespective of their medical risk,” Dr McMullen said.

“While the federal government has promised to pass legislation that would ban the use of adverse genetic test results in life insurance underwriting, this has yet to happen.”

Strong demand and reduced domestic competition have contributed to significant earnings for Qantas Group and Virgin Australia

May 20, 2025
Australia’s two largest airline groups have both recorded strong financial results for the first half of 2024-25, reflecting a number of factors including strong ongoing demand for flying and limited domestic competition, the ACCC’s latest Domestic Airline Competition report has found.

Qantas Group reported earnings before interest and taxes of $1.5 billion for the first half of 2024-25, with $916 million coming from its domestic operations across both Qantas and Jetstar.

Of the Qantas Group’s total earnings, Qantas Domestic, including Qantaslink, contributed the highest share of the group’s earnings at $647 million. Much of this result can be attributed to the airline’s dominance in the corporate travel market – Qantas Group had an 80 per cent share of the corporate travel market over the reporting period, coinciding with a resurgence in demand.

“The high half-yearly earnings reported by Qantas Group reflect its dominance of the domestic airline sector, with Qantas and Jetstar accounting for over 60 per cent of passengers,” ACCC Commissioner Anna Brakey said.

The domestic operations of Jetstar recorded the biggest increase in earnings across the Qantas Group, increasing by 53.7 per cent between the first half 2023-24 and 2024-25, to $269 million. Jetstar Domestic became the sole low-cost carrier in Australia after the exit of Tigerair in 2020, and again when Bonza collapsed in April 2024.

“Jetstar has been able to capitalise on the continued absence of competitive pressure from another low-cost carrier in the domestic market to increase its market share and operating margin,” Ms Brakey said.

While Virgin Australia does not publicly report half-year results, its then CEO, Jayne Hrdlicka, said in February that the airline group had achieved record profits in the first half of the current financial year, following its post-administration restructure under Bain Capital.

After the withdrawal of Rex from routes connecting capital cities, Virgin Australia has increased its share of passengers to 34.4 per cent in March 2025, up from 31.3 per cent from a year prior. Virgin Australia also secured three of Rex’s Boeing 737 aircraft leases, which has facilitated its ability to add seat capacity and improve network resilience.

Record passenger volumes in April following weather disruptions in March
Although the data was not yet available for this report, airlines and airports were expecting a significant increase in travellers in April with school holidays, Easter and ANZAC day all condensed into a three-week period. Airservices Australia noted that 17 April 2025 (the Thursday before Good Friday) was the busiest day for domestic travel in the past five years.

This follows disruptions to travel in March, when passenger levels declined by 4.9 per cent compared to March 2024, which can be attributed to Ex-Tropical Cyclone Alfred and associated severe weather events along the east coast of Australia.

Flights operating between Brisbane-Sydney and Brisbane-Melbourne experienced a 9.9 per cent and 9 per cent reduction in passengers in March 2025 respectively. Meanwhile, Gold Coast and Maroochydore airports experienced the biggest decline in passengers over this period by 30.2 per cent and 25.1 per cent respectively.

The weather disruptions also contributed to the average industry flight cancellation rate increasing significantly in March 2025 to 5 per cent, compared to the long-term industry average of 2.2 per cent.

Despite the disruptions caused by Ex-Tropical Cyclone Alfred, the on-time arrival rate has improved over the past six months to levels just below the long-term industry average of 80.7 per cent. The average industry on-time arrival rate was 80.2 per cent in March 2025, an improvement from 74.5 per cent in October 2024.

“It is encouraging to see the on-time arrival rate improving as this means travellers can have more confidence that their flight will arrive at the time they booked,” Ms Brakey said.

Seasonal patterns driving recent movements in airfares
Following a peak in October 2024, the average airfare fell by 16.1 per cent in the three months to January 2025, before increasing again by 9.6 per cent by March 2025.

“The trends observed in average airfares since January reflect seasonal factors and are broadly consistent with those observed in previous years,” Ms Brakey said.

“Average airfares have come down from their peak in October 2024.”

Demand for domestic air travel in the first quarter of 2025 was lower than 12 months prior. However, 2024 was a particularly unusual year by comparison due to significant events that led to unprecedented demand for flights to Melbourne and Sydney, such as the Taylor Swift concerts in February 2024, which in turn led to higher airfares as demand outstripped supply. The Easter long weekend also fell in March last year which contributed to the increase in demand for travel during this time.

Background
On 6 November 2023, the Treasurer directed the ACCC to recommence domestic air passenger transport monitoring. Under this direction the ACCC is to monitor prices, costs and profits relating to the supply of domestic air passenger transport services for a period of three years and to report on its monitoring at least once every quarter.

The ACCC collects data from Jetstar, Qantas, Rex and Virgin Australia for monitoring purposes.

Rex entered voluntary administration in July 2024 but continues to operate its regional services. The government is guaranteeing regional flight bookings for Rex customers throughout the voluntary administration process.

ACCC proposes to allow collaboration between energy providers

May 19, 2025
The ACCC has issued a draft determination proposing to grant authorisation with a condition for five years to Energy Networks Australia, Synergy, and other specified parties to allow for the procurement and implementation of a national ‘public key infrastructure’ service (PKI).

The PKI service would manage secure communication between consumer energy resources (CER) and parties in the energy grid. Examples of CER include rooftop solar cells, batteries, and electric vehicles.

“This public key infrastructure service will enable distribution network service providers to remotely limit or prevent electricity export into the grid by consumer energy resources in times of significant excess production, known as an ‘emergency backstop’ mechanism,” ACCC Commissioner Dr Philip Williams said.

Where power exports from CER are high and general energy consumption is low, there are risks to electricity grid stability and the potential for localised or wider blackouts to occur.

“While several state and territory governments have already implemented emergency backstop mechanisms, this service would give effect to a singular national approach to managing CER devices via communication protocols to avoid risks to electricity network system overload,” Dr Williams said.

Currently, each distribution network service provider is responsible for procuring its own PKI solution for emergency backstop. Under the proposed conduct, however, providers could choose to utilise a national PKI delivered by a single provider.

The creation of a national entity to manage PKI for CER for emergency backstop is reflective of a national reform priority agreed to by federal and state/territory governments in 2024.

“We understand that a national regulatory framework for CER to set and enforce technical standards is being established as part of the national CER Roadmap and that whilst this is a more appropriate avenue for regulatory oversight of CER, we understand the current urgency around emergency backstop requirements,” Dr Williams said.

“We are satisfied the proposed conduct is likely to result in a public benefit that would outweigh any potential public detriment to Australian consumers.”

“Prior to making our final determination, however, we will be seeking further views on a number of potential public benefits and detriments,” Dr Williams said.

The ACCC considers that the proposed conduct is likely to result in public benefits in the form of interoperability, cost savings for distribution networks, lower costs and complexity for manufacturers and installers, and increased consumer choice and device mobility.

However, the proposed conduct is likely to reduce competition for the acquisition and supply of public key infrastructure services. As it also has the potential to result in public detriment due to a lack of formal external oversight, the ACCC is proposing a condition requiring regular reporting of NEPKI’s operations.

While there is some benefit in the proposed conduct enabling the public key infrastructure solution to expand to future use cases autonomously, it also has the potential to result in public detriment. To mitigate this, the ACCC is considering whether to limit authorisation to the ‘initial use case’ (i.e. solar cell and battery energy storage system orchestration via CSIP-AUS for emergency backstop and dynamic operating envelopes).

The ACCC has also granted interim authorisation to enable Energy Networks Australia and Synergy to carry out the initial three phases of activity while the ACCC considers the substantive application.

Submissions to the ACCC can be made by 2 June 2025. More information can be found on the ACCC’s public register here.

Background
Energy Networks Australia is a national industry body representing electricity transmission and distribution network providers (DNSPs) and gas distribution network providers in all States and Territories.

Synergy is a Western Australian state-owned corporation that has electricity generation assets in WA and retails electricity and gas in WA. Sythenergy holds responsibilities around connection of CER to the grid.

PKI is a cybersecurity technology that uses digital ‘certificates’ installed in devices (such as solar inverters) to authenticate them and encrypt communications with them and is carried out over the internet. Distribution network service providers will utilise the national PKI to communicate with devices to remotely limit or prevent devices’ electricity export into the grid in times of significant excess production (known as an ‘emergency backstop’ mechanism); rather than each network procuring individual, bespoke solutions for PKI.

The proposed conduct seeks to give effect to a national reform priority that was agreed to in 2024 by the Australian, state and territory governments in their ‘National CER Roadmap’. The Roadmap states that a national reform priority is to establish a secure communication system for CER devices through establishing a national not-for-profit entity to manage PKI to operate and manage authentication of communications with CER for backstops.

The application for authorisation was lodged on 26 November 2024 and the ACCC received 22 submissions in relation to the application.

In the first phase of activity, there will be a collaborative evaluation of the responses to NEPKI’s request for tenders for PKI services. 

In the second phase, NEPKI will enter a service deed with a selected PKI service provider for the design, build and operation of PKI and related services. In the third phase, the PKI service deed will be delivered, beginning with the design and build of the PKI.

Finally, in phase four, the operational delivery of PKI services by NEPKI to PKI consumers will ‘go live’ for a term of up to five years.

A final determination is expected to be made in July 2025, subject to any submissions and requests from interested parties for a pre-decision conference.

AMA says “no” to homophobia, biphobia, transphobia on IDAHOBIT and every day

May 17, 2025
The Australian Medical Association is steadfast in its commitment to support LGBTQIASB+ patients and doctors on the annual International Day Against Homophobia, Biphobia and Transphobia (IDAHOBIT).

AMA President Dr Danielle McMullen said IDAHOBIT stands as a day to recognise the great advances in LGBTQIASB+ healthcare, while also noting members of the LGBTQIASB+ community are still unfairly marginalised in some areas of society. 

“Every year on 17 May people around the world mark IDAHOBIT in recognition of the struggles faced by members of the LGBTQIASB+ community to ensure their right to live free of discrimination in all its forms,” Dr McMullen said.

“As members of the healthcare profession we recognise LGBTQIASB+ patients still face barriers to accessible and inclusive healthcare.

“Accessible, inclusive and safe healthcare is a right, and that’s why we welcomed the National Action Plan for the Health and Wellbeing of LGBTQIA+ people last December as an important step towards improving the health and wellbeing of the LGBTQIASB+ community.

“Today we remind governments of the importance of putting that plan into action.”

Dr McMullen said the Australian Medical Association’s LGBTQIASB+ Health Position Statement, published last year, affirms that accepting and supporting people who identify as LGBTQIASB+, is a vital part of reducing discrimination and boosting health and wellbeing.

“The AMA supports the provision of appropriate, respectful and culturally safe healthcare for people who are LGBTQIASB+ across the healthcare system,” Dr McMullen said.

“Culturally safe healthcare is something that we can all create. For example, we encourage medical practitioners to actively foster LGBTQIASB+-inclusive environments by using patient-directed names and pronouns, and supporting patients’ rights and perspectives in a culturally safe practice.

“And of course, we strongly advocate for the Australian health care system to be a safe place for all LGBTQIASB+ health workers as well as people seeking care.

“I was truly honoured to lead the AMA’s first ever float in this year’s Sydney Gay and Lesbian Mardi Gras as it allowed me to publicly show our commitment to our LGBTQIASB+ members and colleagues. On IDAHOBIT, and every day, I recommit to supporting the rights and wellbeing of all LGBTQIASB+ people.”

The Queensland melioidosis outbreak is still growing. What’s keeping this deadly mud bug active?

ap-studio/Shutterstock
Thomas JeffriesWestern Sydney University

The outbreak of the deadly “mud bug” melioidosis in north Queensland has not yet abated since it began at the start of this year.

So far there have been 221 cases and 31 deaths from the disease in 2025. This encompasses a 400% increase in cases in Cairns and a 600% increase in Townsville compared to the average over previous years.

Fortunately, case numbers have begun to drop. Queensland Health reports new cases weekly, and in the most recent reporting period – up to May 6 – seven new cases were recorded, down from a peak of 29 cases in the week to February 16.

However, people are still contracting and dying from this disease. So what’s keeping it active in Queensland, and are there any promising vaccines on the horizon?

What is melioidosis?

Melioidosis is caused by the bacterium Burkholderia pseudomallei which lives in soil, mud and groundwater, usually not causing any harm. But B. pseudomallei can cause disease in humans and animals if it enters the skin via a cut. Or it can be inhaled in water droplets and enter the lungs.

The disease generally takes one to four weeks to establish itself, meaning people don’t develop symptoms immediately after they’ve been exposed.

Melioidosis most commonly presents as pneumonia. However chronic skin infections, called cutaneous infections, occur in 10–20% of cases. Melioidosis can also lead to blood infections.

Symptoms of the pneumonia form include fever, headache, difficulty breathing, muscle pain, chest pain and confusion.

We don’t understand cutaneous infections as well as we do lung infections with melioidosis. Cutaneous infections are also less responsive to standard antibiotic treatments due to the nature of the chronic wound. For example, the bacteria can form a slimy layer called a biofilm. This can help the bacteria produce proteins which can block the antibiotics from working.

Melioidosis occurs most commonly in tropical areas, such as Thailand. But it’s also regarded as endemic in northern Australia, occurring in Queensland and the Northern Territory. Nonetheless, the scale of the current outbreak in north Queensland is highly unusual.

Anyone can contract melioidosis, but certain medical conditions can increase a person’s risk. These include diabetes, liver, kidney or lung disease, cancer, or other conditions which might compromise the patient’s immune system.

During the current Queensland outbreak 95% of cases have been in people with risk factors such as diabetes or lung disease.

How is melioidosis spreading in Queensland?

Melioidosis increases during periods of high rainfall and flooding, and this has been the case in the current outbreak. However, patterns have begun to emerge suggesting the bacterium may now be spreading in other ways.

Experts have suggested that while the Townsville cases can be explained by flooding and correlate to high levels of rainfall, the Cairns cases do not match with this explanation.

One suggestion is that the construction of the Bruce Highway upgrade south of Cairns has caused an increase in cases due to clay soil particles becoming airborne during construction.

It’s not an entirely new idea. The movement of soil during highway construction and urban expansion has been investigated as a potential mode of transmission during previous spikes of melioidosis cases in far north Queensland.

The infrastructure body responsible for the upgrade has pledged to follow expert health advice as investigations continue.

Could B. pseudomallei be evolving and becoming more deadly?

This potential change in how the disease is spreading, and the increased number of cases and deaths, might indicate the organism is evolving to spread more easily and become more deadly. Genome analysis is ongoing to determine this.

Notably, bacteria found in the environment can acquire genes from other bacteria in soil and water. This may give them enhanced abilities to survive in unfavourable conditions and be more resilient to changes in their natural habitat, as well as potentially infect human hosts more effectively.

In a warming climate with increased rainfall, the bacterium behind melioidosis is likely to be a prime candidate for this kind of change.

The _B. pseudomallei_ in a petri dish – purple spores on a red background.
Melioidosis is caused by the bacterium B. pseudomallei. TheBlueHydrangea/Shutterstock

How about treatments and protection?

There’s currently only one way to treat melioidosis, which involves receiving intravenous antibiotics in hospital for several weeks, followed by up to six months of oral antibiotics.

Against a backdrop of urgent calls for more research and increased public awareness around melioidosis, there may be hope on the horizon.

Researchers at the University of California have developed a vaccine which produces a protein that mimics the proteins in B. pseudomallei, leading to an immune response against this bacterium. The vaccine has been successful in mouse models and will continue to a further animal trial, which, if successful, will lead to human trials.

It seems melioidosis is a problem that’s not going away.

If you live in an affected region such as tropical Queensland or the NT, limit exposure to mud and water as much as possible. If you’re spending time in muddy areas, use appropriate personal protective equipment such as gloves and boots. You can also protect yourself by covering any open wounds and wearing a respirator if you’re working closely with water.

Monitor for symptoms and see a doctor if you feel unwell. More information is also available from Queensland Health.The Conversation

Thomas Jeffries, Senior Lecturer in Microbiology, Western Sydney University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Australian para sport has issues everywhere – here’s what must be fixed ahead of the Brisbane Paralympics

Bratislav Kostic/Shutterstock
Katherine RawSwinburne University of Technology

Australia’s underwhelming performance at the 2024 Paris Paralympics has raised serious questions about how well our adaptive sport system is working. The Paris games returned our lowest medal tally since 1988, from our smallest team since 2004.

This result hasn’t gone unnoticed.

Ahead of the 2032 Brisbane games, now is the time to rebuild and strengthen grassroots disability sport across the country.

To do this, we must focus on inclusive, sustainable and community-driven approaches that truly support people with disabilities from the very start.

Issues at grassroots level

Grassroots disability clubs are vital to the health of para sports in Australia.

These local clubs give people with disabilities the chance to be active, which supports both physical and mental wellbeing.

Just as importantly, they provide places where people can build friendships, feel included and develop a sense of belonging.

Many paralympians start their journey in these environments; they’re not just places to play sport, they’re key to developing future talent.

Current and former athletes have called for more and better participation opportunities in adaptive sport.

Paralympian Leanne Del Toso called for more support for women’s wheelchair basketball after Australia missed qualification for the Rio and Paris Olympics.

It shouldn’t be about funding, it shouldn’t be about access, it should be about equality.

The message is clear: we need to rebuild from the ground up, starting with a stronger and more supportive grassroots system.

What are the main problems?

Australia’s para sports system is often fragmented and inconsistent, especially compared to mainstream sports such as swimming or athletics, which usually have national pathways, structured support and a clear line from beginner to elite.

But adaptive sports are often run in disconnected ways across different states, clubs or organisations.

This system is often difficult to navigate for aspiring athletes.

Another big part of the problem is the “mainstreaming” of adaptive sport: instead of creating separate systems designed specifically for people with disabilities, many sports fold disability sport into their existing structures.

While this can sound inclusive, it often creates problems.

Research shows this approach can actually narrow who gets to participate.

Many organisations and leagues tend to follow a standard competitive model that doesn’t work for everyone, especially those with more complex needs.

Even well-meaning attempts at inclusion can backfire if they don’t involve people with disability.

That’s why researchers now believe adaptive sport only works when paired with real disability-specific knowledge, community consultation and strong systems of accountability.

Without that, we risk reinforcing the very inequalities we’re trying to fix.

Another problem is the lack of participation data.

One of the main sources of sports participation data in Australia is the AusPlay survey.

This gives some insight into who is playing sport and being active, but it doesn’t give enough detail when it comes to disability sport.

For instance, while the AusPlay survey indicates 51% of adults with a disability engage in physical activity once per week, it lacks specificity regarding the activities these people participate in.

This makes it hard for policymakers, funders and sport organisations to make smart decisions, as they don’t have enough information about who is participating, where the gaps are or how things are changing over time.

With better data, we could target resources where they’re needed most, especially in communities that currently miss out.

Some possible solutions

If we want to fix these problems, we need a different approach.

That starts with co-design: involving people with disabilities in designing the systems, programs and policies that affect them.

It’s not just about asking for feedback, it’s about giving real decision-making power.

A great example of this is Wheelchair Sports NSW/ACT, which has embraced co-design and made it a core part of its programs.

This has led to a 380% increase in membership over five years, and a record number of affiliated clubs across their network.

This success shows what’s possible when sport organisations stop designing systems for people with disabilities and start designing with them.

When people feel valued and heard, they are more likely to get involved and stay involved.

Recent initiatives, such as the new para unit launched by the Western Australian Institute of Sport (the original home of Australia’s Paralympic movement), demonstrate promising steps towards a more cohesive para sport system.

But grassroots sport isn’t about medals. While we all love to celebrate paralympic success, local sport has a much bigger role to play.

It helps people with disabilities stay healthy, feel included and connect with their communities. It can change lives on and off the field.

As we look to Brisbane 2032, it’s clear paralympic success doesn’t start at the top. It starts in the community and on local fields.

If we invest now in grassroots sport and centre people with disabilities in the design and delivery of programs, we can create a stronger and more inclusive future for para sport in Australia.

The author would like to acknowledge the contributions of Mick Garnett to discussions on the future of adaptive sport in Australia.The Conversation

Katherine Raw, Lecturer, Sport Management, Swinburne University of Technology

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

AI is now used for audio description. But it should be accurate and actually useful for people with low vision

Chansom Pantip/Shutterstock
Kathryn LockeCurtin University and Tama LeaverCurtin University

Since the recent explosion of widely available generative artificial intelligence (AI), it now seems that a new AI tool emerges every week.

With varying success, AI offers solutions for productivity, creativity, research, and also accessibility: making products, services and other content more usable for people with disability.

The award-winning 2024 Super Bowl ad for Google Pixel 8 is a poignant example of how the latest AI tech can intersect with disability.

Directed by blind director Adam Morse, it showcases an AI-powered feature that uses audio cues, haptic feedback (where vibrating sensations communicate information to the user) and animations to assist blind and low-vision users in capturing photos and videos.

Javier in Frame showcases an accessibility feature found on Pixel 8 phones.

The ad was applauded for being disability inclusive and representative. It also demonstrated a growing capacity for – and interest in – AI to generate more accessible technology.

AI is also poised to challenge how audio description is created and what it may sound like. This is the focus of our research team.

Audio description is a track of narration that describes important visual elements of visual media, including television shows, movies and live performances. Synthetic voices and quick, automated visual descriptions might result in more audio description on our screens. But will users lose out in other ways?

AI as people’s eyes

AI-powered accessibility tools are proliferating. Among them is Microsoft’s Seeing AI, an app that turns your smartphone into a talking camera by reading text and identifying objects. The app Be My AI uses virtual assistants to describe photos taken by blind users; it’s an AI version of the original app Be My Eyes, where the same task was done by human volunteers.

There are increasingly more AI software options for text-to-speech and document reading, as well as for producing audio description.

Audio description is an essential feature to make visual media accessible to blind or vision impaired audiences. But its benefits go beyond that.

Increasingly, research shows audio description benefits other disability groups and mainstream audiences without disability. Audio description can also be a creative way to further develop or enhance a visual text.

Traditionally, audio description has been created using human voices, script writers and production teams. However, in the last year several international streaming services including Netflix and Amazon Prime have begun offering audio description that’s at least partially generated with AI.

Yet there are a number of issues with the current AI technologies, including their ability to generate false information. These tools need to be critically appraised and improved.

Is AI coming for audio description jobs?

There are multiple ways in which AI might impact the creation – and end result – of audio description.

With AI tools, streaming services can get synthetic voices to “read” an audio description script. There’s potential for various levels of automation, while giving users the chance to customise audio description to suit their specific needs and preferences. Want your cooking show to be narrated in a British accent? With AI, you could change that with the press of a button.

However, in the audio description industry many are worried AI could undermine the quality, creativity and professionalism humans bring to the equation.

The language-learning app Duolingo, for example, recently announced it was moving forward with “AI first” development. As a result, many contractors lost jobs that can now purportedly be done by algorithms.

On the one hand, AI could help broaden the range of audio descriptions available for a range of media and live experiences.

But AI audio description may also cost jobs rather than create them. The worst outcome would be a huge amount of lower-quality audio description, which would undermine the value of creating it at all.

A young man sits on a park bench with phone and headphones in hand, holding a folded white cane.
AI shouldn’t undermine the quality of assistive technologies, including audio description. Ground Picture/Shutterstock

Can we trust AI to describe things well?

Industry impact and the technical details of how AI can be used in audio description are one thing.

What’s currently lacking is research that centres the perspectives of users and takes into consideration their experiences and needs for future audio description.

Accuracy – and trust in this accuracy – is vitally important for blind and low-vision audiences.

Cheap and often free, AI tools are now widely used to summarise, transcribe and translate. But it’s a well-known problem that generative AI struggles to stay factual. Known as “hallucinations”, these plausible fabrications proliferate even when the AI tools are not asked to create anything new – like doing a simple audio transcription.

If AI tools simply fabricate content rather than make existing material accessible, it would even further distance and disadvantage blind and low-vision consumers.

We can use AI for accessibility – with care

AI is a relatively new technology, and for it to be a true benefit in terms of accessibility, its accuracy and reliability need to be absolute. Blind and low-vision users need to be able to turn on AI tools with confidence.

In the current “AI rush” to make audio description cheaper, quicker and more available, it’s vital that the people who need it the most are closely involved in how the tech is deployed.The Conversation

Kathryn Locke, Associate Researcher in Digital Disability, Centre for Culture and Technology, Curtin University and Tama Leaver, Professor of Internet Studies, Curtin University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

RBA cuts interest rates, ready to respond again if the economy weakens further

Reserve Bank Governor Michele Bullock speaks at a forum during the World Bank/IMF meetings in Washington in April. Jose Luis Magana/AP
John HawkinsUniversity of Canberra

The Reserve Bank of Australia cut the official interest rate for the second time this year, as it lowered forecasts for Australian economic growth and pointed to increasing uncertainty in the world economy.

The bank lowered the cash rate target by 0.25%, from 4.1% to 3.85%, saying inflation is expected to remain in the target band.

All the big four banks swiftly passed the cut on to households with mortgages. This will save a household with a $500,000 loan about $80 a month.

Announcing the cut, the Reserve Bank stressed in its accompanying statement it stands ready to reduce rates again if the economic outlook deteriorates sharply.

The Board considered a severe downside scenario and noted that monetary policy is well placed to respond decisively to international developments if they were to have material implications for activity and inflation in Australia.

Inflation is back under control

The latest Consumer Price Index showed that inflation remained around the middle of the Reserve Bank’s medium-term target band of 2-3% in the March quarter.

The Reserve Bank was also comforted by the underlying inflation measure called the “trimmed mean”. This measure excludes items with the largest price movements up or down.

The bank noted that it has returned to the 2–3% target band for the first time since 2021. This suggests inflation is not just temporarily low due to temporary factors such as the electricity price rebates.

In February, Reserve Bank Governor Michele Bullock conceded the bank had arguably been “late raising interest rates on the way up”. It did not want to be late on the way down.

Perhaps Bullock is being unduly modest. The central bank looks to have judged well the extent of monetary tightening. It did not raise interest rates as much as its peers, but still got inflation back to the target.

Unemployment remains low

Last week, we got an update on the strength of the labour market. Unemployment stayed at 4.1%. It has now been around 4% since late 2023, a remarkable achievement.

This is below the 4.5% the Reserve Bank had regarded as the level consistent with steady inflation (in economic jargon, the NAIRU). But neither prices nor wages have accelerated.

Households and businesses may turn cautious

In its updated forecasts, the bank sees headline inflation dropping to 2.1% by mid-year but going back to 3.0% by the end of the year, as the electricity subsidies are removed. By mid-2027, it will be back near the middle of the 2-3% target.

Underlying inflation is forecast to stay around the middle of the target band throughout.

The Reserve Bank cut its forecast for gross domestic product (GDP) to 2.1% by December, down from its previous forecast of 2.4% made in February. It said:

Economic policy uncertainty has increased sharply alongside recent global developments, and this is expected to prompt some households to increase their precautionary savings and some businesses to postpone some investment decisions.

The unemployment rate is expected to increase to 4.3% by the end of the year and remain there through 2026.

Cost of living pressures look set to ease, as real household disposable income grows faster than population.

As the Reserve Bank governor told a media conference on Tuesday:

There’s now a new set of challenges facing the economy, but with inflation declining and the unemployment rate relatively low, we’re well positioned to deal with them. The board remains prepared to take further action if that is required.

Economic and policy ‘unpredictability’

The main uncertainty in the global economy is how the trade war instigated by US President Donald Trump will play out. According to one count, he has announced new or revised tariff policies about 50 times.

“The outlook for the global economy has deteriorated since the February statement. This is due to the adverse impact on global growth from higher tariffs and widespread economic and policy unpredictability,” the bank noted.

The US tariff pauses on the highest rates on China and most other nations are due to be in place for 90 days. But more measures may be announced before then.

This uncertainty is likely to be stifling trade, and even more so investment decisions by companies in the face of rapidly changing policies. And it will weaken the global economy.

In her press conference, Bullock said the board’s judgement was that “global trade developments will overall be disinflationary for Australia”. Not only is the global outlook weaker, but some goods no longer being sold to the US could be diverted to Australia.

Where will interest rates go from here?

The Reserve Bank’s updated forecasts assume interest rates will fall further, to 3.4% by the end of the year.

But this is just a reflection of what financial markets are implying. It is not necessarily what the bank itself expects to do. It is certainty not a promise of what they will do.

But the Reserve Bank still regards its stance as “restrictive”, or weighing on growth. So if it continues to believe inflation will stay within the target band, or the global outlook deteriorates, it will cut rates further.The Conversation

John Hawkins, Senior Lecturer, Canberra School of Politics, Economics and Society, University of Canberra

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Disclaimer: These articles are not intended to provide medical advice, diagnosis or treatment.  Views expressed here do not necessarily reflect those of Pittwater Online News or its staff.


Week Three May 2025 (May 12 -18)

Narrabeen News: ARIA Chart Topper- Nick Woodford

Monday May 12, 2025

Huge congratulations to Narrabeen Sports High School's Head Teacher Faculty of Arts, Mr Nick Woodford!

When he’s not inspiring students in the classroom, he’s on the road with Aussie country star Travis Collins—playing keys and singing backing vocals. And now, the latest album 'The Band Album', released March 28 2025, has just:

  • 🥇 Hit #1 on the Australian Country ARIA Charts
  • 🥈 Scored #2 on the Australian Album Chart
  • 🥉 Landed #3 on the overall Country Chart

What an outstanding result! Narrabeen are beyond lucky to have a touring, chart-topping musician as their Head Teacher—sharing his real-world experience and passion for music with students every day.

Rock on, Mr Woodford! We’re so proud of you!

Nick attended Windsor Primary then Windsor High School where he was School Captain and earned a 1st in Music.

He went on to the University of Western Sydney, attaining a Bachelor of Music and returned to earn a Masters of Teaching (Secondary school) in Music Teacher Education in 2012. He was one of two selected by the Australian Literacy and Numeracy to complete a special practicum at Tennant Creek, NT.

Nick has been with the NSW Department of Education since 2013.

Travis William Collins (born 4 May 1985, Campbelltown) is an Australian country music singer-songwriter and guitarist. Travis busked on Peel Street, Tamworth at age 11. He was a graduate of the NSW Public Schools Talent Development Program.

Three of his albums have reached the ARIA Albums Chart top 20, Hard Light (2016), Brave & the Broken (2018) and Wreck Me (2020). He has won eight Golden Guitar trophies at the annual Country Music Awards of Australia and four CMC Australian awards. Collins is an ambassador for RUOK? Day.

The boys are returning to their home stomping grounds this Sunday May 18, playing at the Camden Hotel.

Pittwater's Australian Emus

Three of Pittwater High School's talented student athletes made their Australian debut in the Australian Emu's at the 2025 Asia Pacific Youth Touch Cup in Redcliffe, Queensland on Thursday May 15; Max D, a Year 12 student, is a member of the U18 Boys team, while Tyrone F represents the U18 mixed team. Taj T, who graduated in 2024, will join Max. 

The school states; 'We are extremely proud of these young men and wish them every success over the next few days'. 

Australia's national representative Touch Football teams are known as the Australian Emus. The highest-level Australian Emus teams are the Men's Open, Women's Open, and Mixed Open teams. Unlike other team sports, there are Mixed divisions at the most elite level of Touch. Touch Football athletes can also represent the Emus at Youth and Masters levels. The Emus represent Australia in Touch World Cup events and Trans-Tasman Test Series.

Why are they called Emus?

The emu sits beside the kangaroo on the coat of arms and takes pride of place on all Australian team shirts, over the heart. Sharing the coat of arms with the kangaroo reflects the partnership between the NRL and their national men's Rugby League team, The Kangaroos, and TFA and our national Touch Football teams, Australian Emus. Working side by side, representing both sports, are the kangaroo and the emu.

The Asia Pacific Youth Touch Cup 

Launched in 2023, the Asia Pacific Youth Touch Cup (APYTC) returns to the Touch Football calendar in 2025 showcasing the best emerging youth talent on the international stage, with teams competing from across the South Pacific region including but not limited to Australia, Cook Islands, New Zealand, Papua New Guinea, the Philippines, Samoa, and Tonga.

The international youth event will feature six divisions across Boys, Girls, and Mixed 18s; and Men’s, Women’s, and Mixed 20s. The APYTC follows last month’s Open Trans-Tasman Series (OTTS) held in Christchurch – a tri-series contest between Australia and New Zealand Open teams where the Australian Emus achieved a series clean sweep.

The inaugural APYTC in 2023 saw Australia sweep the series with wins in all six divisions to be crowned Champion Nation – one against the Philippines and five against New Zealand – with the Trans-Tasman rivalry expected to be reignited at this year’s event in the City of Moreton Bay.

Touch Football continues to ignite the next generation of athletes who will have the opportunity to show their wares at the APYTC in light of a new World Cup cycle. A host of NRL and NRLW stars including Kalyn Ponga, Ryan Papenhuyzen, Sandon Smith, Tarryn Aiken, and Tamika Upton have previously donned the green and gold of the Australian Emus at the youth level on their journey to elite athletes – highlighting the opportunities presented by the sport.

Among those listed as 'ones to watch' for this comp. is another local:

20s Mixed – Maxwell Marsters

Maxwell Marsters is no stranger to international Touch Football, having served as captain of the 18s Mixed side two years ago in Brisbane. On that occasion, he helped lead his Athelite Australian Emus side to a 3-0 clean sweep over New Zealand to claim the inaugural APYTC title in the division. A key leader for this outfit, the Sydney Scorpions representative has always adopted a team-first mentality, willing to do the hard work in the middle of the park. Whether it’s driving up the field or making regular touches on defences, Max can always be counted on. In attack his speed and step are incredible. Whether it’s crossing the line himself or opening up spaces for his teammates, the Manly Touch representative is certainly going to cause headaches for opposition defences. Back in the green and gold, expect Maxwell to once again step up in the big moments this tournament. 

Touch Football Australia CEO, Marcus Ashcroft praised the impact of the international event and its capacity to create a platform for a plethora of young talent.

“The Asia Pacific Youth Touch Cup presents a fantastic opportunity for the best youth talent from across the South Pacific region to compete on the international stage, in what is a critical component of our high-performance pathways,” Mr. Ashcroft said.

“We are thrilled to host this event with the support of City of Moreton Bay and look forward to seeing all the exciting talent on display this week.”

City of Moreton Bay Mayor, Peter Flannery said he was proud that, for the first time, City of Moreton Bay’s Kayo Stadium would be the Australian host destination for the incredible and up-and-coming Touch Football talent in this international contest.

“City of Moreton Bay has established itself as a premier destination for international level sporting competition, and I’m certain the almost 2,000 expected visitors will enjoy the beautiful, vibrant, and welcoming surrounds of the City,” Mayor Flannery said.

Chair of Federation of International Touch (FIT), Peter Topp highlighted the continued growth of the international game ahead of the youth event.

"On behalf of FIT, I'd like to thank Touch Football Australia and City of Moreton Bay for their support in bringing this second iteration of the Asia Pacific Youth Touch Cup to fruition. I would also like to thank all the volunteers at TFA and across the participating nations for their commitment to making the event possible,” Mr. Topp said.

"With an increase in the number of teams and nations taking part in both this event and the Atlantic Cup equivalent in Ireland in August, we are delighted to see further growth across the junior international game. Finally, I would like to wish all those participating as players, referees, coaches, and support staff an enjoyable and successful event."

NRL Touch Football Australia states:

Everyone can play Touch Football, that's why it's Australia's largest social sport. Find out about different competition types in your area.

Visit: touchfootball.com.au

Pictured below are the boys at the Wednesday May 14 jersey presentation.

 

Surf Beach: 1965

From the Film Australia Collection. Made by the Commonwealth Film Unit 1965. Directed by Bern Gandy. 

From beach inspectors watching for danger to the ice cream vendors helping people cool down, Australia’s major beaches in summer have the hustle and bustle of a small town. Surf Beach looks at the proud tradition of surf lifesavers, who give up their weekends voluntarily to patrol our beaches, keeping ordinary folks safe from disaster. Witness the thrilling rescue of a young woman who has got herself into trouble, and the military precision of the surf lifesavers as they bring her back into shore. 

The highlight of the season is the Surf Life Saving Championships – a marvel of pageantry as surf lifesaving clubs from across Sydney march proudly along the beach, led by the UNSW Regiment brass band. 

Beautifully shot and set to a swinging soundtrack, Surf Beach pays tribute to an Australian icon: the beach.

More than 1,000 apprentices, trainees and cadets to start careers in NSW councils

May 14, 2025

Hundreds of new apprentices and trainees vital to the delivery of essential local services have hit the ground running with councils across the state, thanks to a landmark $252.2 million investment by the Minns Labor Government.

The NSW Government’s Fresh Start program is funding the wages of an additional 1,300 apprentices, trainees and cadets in the local government sector over the next six years.

Councils have now been given the green light to employ 1,008 new apprentices, trainees and cadets this year under the first two rounds of funding.

Hundreds commenced their new roles with councils across the state earlier this year, with more onboarding every month as councils fill roles to coincide with the start dates of a wide range of training programs.

More than 60 per cent of the approved new roles are in regional and rural councils, providing a major boost to regional communities and more job opportunities for people in country towns.

The Fresh Start program enables students and school leavers to study and learn on the job while gaining a nationally accredited qualification.

Councils have applied for the jobs they need most including 58 more apprentice mechanics, 25 electricians, 146 parks and gardens staff, 82 civil construction apprentices and trainees and 44 early childhood trainees.

47 planning cadets and trainees and 58 in engineering have also been approved, vital to driving local housing approvals and enabling supporting community infrastructure to help tackle the housing crisis.

A 2022 report by the Australian Local Government Association found that 91 per cent of respondent councils in NSW reported skills shortages, with close to 30 per cent reporting shortages in trades such as plumbing, automotive and mechanical work.

The Fresh Start program supports the government’s goal of boosting the number of apprentices and trainees in councils to make up 15 per cent of the local government workforce, to address the growing skills shortage that is slowing down the delivery of homes and community infrastructure.

The program has shown great success with nearly 90 per cent of local government organisations successfully applying for funding.

A third round will be open to councils soon aimed exclusively at apprentices, providing opportunities for hundreds more young people start jobs in councils from January next year.

Premier of New South Wales Chris Minns said:

“Council staff are out in our communities every day, providing the services we often take for granted.

“This program is a massive boost for local government and for young people looking for a job where they can work in their local community.

“Councils employ more than 50,000 people in NSW, and many council workers who start as an apprentice or trainee go on to have life-long careers in local government.

“It means more horticulturalists to look after our parks, more childcare staff to educate the next generation and more planners to help deliver more homes.”

Minister for Local Government Ron Hoenig said:

“From Wollongong to Walgett, the Blue Mountains to Ballina, the Fresh Start program is an investment in the future of local government in NSW.

“The uptake from councils has been fantastic and goes to show how desperately councils need this support, especially in regional and rural areas.

“We’re opening the door for hundreds of young people to learn life-long skills, making sure councils have the workforce they need to continue delivering for their communities.”

Minister for Skills, TAFE and Tertiary Education Steve Whan said:

“The Minns Labor Government was elected on the promise that we would rebuild local services, restore confidence in local education networks and boost local job opportunities.

“It’s pleasing to see the Fresh Start program helping to plug gaps across the local government sector in NSW, including in critical skills shortages areas such as construction and childcare.

“Vocational education and training provides a valuable career path for many young people and there’s no doubt the Fresh Start program will help build a stronger workforce for NSW councils.”

Top five roles by position type

Apprentices                           Trainees                 Cadets

Parks and Gardens             Business Administration Engineering

Civil Construction             Waste and Water         Urban and Regional Planning

Mechanics                     Childcare                         Building (Surveying, Inspection, etc.)

Electricians                     Information Technology Finance

Plumbers                          Parks and Gardens         Environmental Services      

Councils with significant positions approved

  • Inner West Council – 29 positions
  • Blacktown City Council - 23 positions
  • City of Newcastle Council – 23 positions
  • Ku-ring-gai Council – 21 positions
  • Dubbo Regional Council – 20 positions
  • Sutherland Shire Council – 20 positions
  • Ballina Shire Council - 19 positions
  • Penrith City Council – 18 positions

 

School students help Sydney save critically endangered gum

May 12, 2025

Students from Nepean Christian School have put on their gardening gloves to be part of a ground-­breaking conservation project to save the Camden white gum across western Sydney.

Sixty students planted 12 Camden white gum seedlings in the school grounds at Mulgoa to create an insurance population with diverse genetics.

The project is part of the NSW Government's Saving our Species (SoS) program and aims to establish insurance populations of the critically endangered gum by using specially bred plants.

Six hundred seedlings bred by CSIRO Canberra will be planted across Western Sydney this autumn at 14 different sites to grow new populations to reduce the gum's potential extinction risk.

The NSW Department of Environment and Heritage states a small number of Camden white gums remain in the wild along the Nepean River area but have lost their fitness to survive due to their small population size after decades of land clearing. These gums, due to inbreeding, are now effectively "living dead" trees as they cannot regenerate.

Nepean Christian School students and staff will care for the plants for at least two summers, by regularly watering and maintaining the site, so the seedlings can grow into a mature population.

Once established, the trees will provide shade and canopy cover for up to 300 years, given their incredibly long lifespans. The species gene flow will also increase through pollen exchange, connecting with other isolated subpopulations in the Nepean River corridor. Camden white gums (Eucalyptus benthamii) only remain in small areas with pockets in the Blue Mountains and Western Sydney, which is where the school is based.

Eucalyptus benthamii, commonly known as Camden white gum, Bentham's gum, Nepean River gum, kayer-ro or durrum-by-ang, is a species of tree that is endemic to New South Wales. It has mostly smooth bluish grey or white bark, lance-shaped to curved adult leaves, flower buds arranged in groups of seven, white flowers and cup-shaped, bell-shaped or conical fruit.

Eucalyptus benthamii is a tree that grows to a height of 35 or 40 metres (115 or 131 ft) with a trunk diameter attaining 1.5 metres (4.9 ft) and forms a lignotuber. It has smooth bluish grey or white bark which is shed in ribbons, except for about 1 metre (3.3 ft) of rough brownish bark at the base of the trunk. The leaves on young plants and on coppice regrowth are arranged in opposite pairs, egg-shaped to heart-shaped, 30–90 mm (1–4 in) long, 20–40 mm (0.8–2 in) wide and sessile. Adult leaves are lance-shaped to curved, 80–230 mm (3–9 in) long, 17–27 mm (0.7–1 in) wide on a petiole 5–35 mm (0.2–1 in) long and the same colour on both sides. The flower buds are arranged in groups of seven on a peduncle 4–8 mm (0.2–0.3 in) long, the individual buds sessile or on a pedicel up to 2 mm (0.08 in) long. Mature buds are oval, 3–5 mm (0.12–0.20 in) long, 2–4 mm (0.08–0.2 in) wide with a rounded operculum. Flowering occurs between March and September and the flowers are white. The fruit is a woody cup-shaped, bell-shaped or conical capsule 3–4 mm (0.12–0.16 in) long and 4–6 mm (0.16–0.24 in) wide.

This tree was well-known to the Aboriginal people of the area, who knew it as durrum-by-ang. Stands of Durrum‐by‐ang were important distinctive landmarks within their country.

Eucalyptus benthamii was first formally described by Joseph Maiden and Richard Hind Cambage in 1915 from a specimen collected "from the banks of the Nepean River near Cobbity". The description was published in Journal and Proceedings of the Royal Society of New South Wales. Maiden and Cambage did not give a reason for the specific epithet (benthamii) but it is assumed to honour George Bentham, an English botanist, described by the weed botanist Duane Isely as "the premier systematic botanist of the nineteenth century".

Camden white gum grows on alluvial plains on sand or loam over clay along the Nepean River and its tributaries, in tall open forest, where it either forms a pure stand or is found with other eucalypts such as mountain blue gum (E. deanei) and river peppermint (E. elata). Other associated trees within this tree community itself include grey box (E. moluccana), forest red gum (E. tereticornis), grey gum (E. punctata), cabbage gum (E. amplifolia), narrow-leaved ironbark (E. crebra) and broad-leaved apple (Angophora subvelutina), while associated understory species include blackthorn (Bursaria spinosa), bracken (Pteridium esculentum) tantoon (Leptospermum polygalifolium) and fern-leaved wattle (Acacia filicifolia).

Camden White Gum (Eucalyptus benthamii) Location: Australian National Botanic Gardens, Canberra, Australian Capital Territory, Australia Date: 2005-09-21 Source: picture taken by Danielle Langlois. 

The conservation project is managed by the Department of Climate Change, Energy, the Environment and Water (DCCEEW)'s Saving our Species Program. DCCEEW works with partners including CSIRO Canberra, Australian Botanic Gardens, NSW National Parks and Wildlife Service(NPWS), Greater Sydney Local Land Services, Local Landcare Groups, local councils, and private industry such as Sydney Metro Airports.

Threatened Species Officer, DCCEEW, Dr Ahamad Sherieff said:

"Local school students planting Camden white gums in their school's backyard will help save this critically endangered species from potential extinction.

"It's wonderful to see these seedlings planted at the school, where students can learn first-hand about genetic diversity, and the purpose of insurance populations in nature, all while experiencing what a tree needs to grow and thrive.

Principal of Nepean Christian School Dr Cameron Nunn said:

"We are thrilled to be part of this vital conservation effort. Our students are excited to contribute to saving the Camden white gum and learning about the importance of biodiversity.

"This project exemplifies the power of collaboration in conservation. By working together, we can secure a future for the Camden white gum and enhance our local environment."

Four Nepean Christian College students helped save critically endangered gum. Image Credit: DCCEEW

Opportunities:

Big Brother Movement's Scholarships Now open for All Young Australians

For a century, the Big Brother Movement (BBM) has been a catalyst for change and opportunity, opening doors for young people to explore the world and make their mark.

It began as Australia’s most successful migration program for young men moving from the UK to Australia, the Big Brother Movement. 

Today, built on this legacy, BBM continues to empower young people to venture overseas for work experience through their Global Footprints Scholarships program. 

So instead of bringing young people to Australia to access all the opportunities here, they are providing a chance for young Australians to follow their vocational dreams overseas.

few insights into their Global Footprints Scholarship opportunity for young men and women aged 18 to 24.

What is a Global Footprints Scholarship?

A Global Footprints Scholarship is a self-directed career development opportunity for young Australians in agriculture, trades and horticulture. Successful applicants receive an AUD $9,000 grant to travel overseas for industry experience, professional development workshops, networking opportunities and mentoring.  University Students are not eligible to apply - this is for young people outside of that system.

Scholarships are awarded once a year. 

Who can apply?

To be eligible for a Global Footprints Scholarship you must be an Australian citizen or permanent resident and be between 18-25 years old. Check their “Who can apply?” page for full details. If your application is shortlisted you will need to provide evidence for the above.

Applications open every year on 1 May and close 1 June. Shortlisted applicants will be notified by September. 

Will you assist me in finding a work placement?

The Global Footprints Scholarship is a self-directed career development opportunity. You are expected to have a good idea of where you want to go and why, including an understanding of who the industry trailblazers in your field are and where they are located. Networking to find your placement is the first critical learning opportunity of your scholarship experience. We will give you advice on how to approach them, and put you in touch with past scholars who can help.

Find out more and apply at: www.globalfootprints.org.au

Soundboks Oz Grom Open – Now Bigger and Better Than Ever

Presented by O’Neill and Incorporating the WSL Traeger Grills Pro Junior

The 2025 Soundboks Oz Grom Open, hosted by Le-Ba Boardriders, is set to return for its 14th year of this iconic junior surfing competition. This long-standing event has evolved, bringing a fresh new look and feel as it attracts surfers, fans, and sponsors from around the world. With a brand-new naming sponsor, Soundboks, and presenting partner O’Neill, the event is poised to be bigger and better than ever.

Incorporating the WSL Traeger Grills Pro Junior, the event will take place from 3–8 July 2025 in the beautiful, surf-rich region of Lennox Head. As one of the most prestigious junior surfing competitions globally, the Soundboks Oz Grom Open brings together top-level competitors contending for national rankings, with the U16 and U18 divisions vying for selection to represent Australia at the International Surfing Association (ISA) World Junior Championships.

The Soundboks Oz Grom Open event features both the U14 to U18 divisions (competing for national rankings and ISA selection) and the WSL Traeger Grills Pro Junior, where surfers under 21 battle for qualification to the upcoming WSL World Junior Championships. This unique combination of elite junior talent and professional-level competition makes the event one of the most exciting junior surf events worldwide.

Taj Air - 2024 comp. Photo:  Surfing NSW – Ethan Smith

With divisions for both boys and girls and a strong focus on inclusivity and youth empowerment, the event celebrates surfing’s universal appeal—fostering confidence, community, and connection among the next generation of champions.

Built to mirror a WSL Tour event, it features a professional judging panel, computerised scoring, digital priority boards, athlete zones, and a live global webcast with commentary from world-renowned surf personalities, reaching more than one million viewers worldwide. In 2024, ISA World Junior Champion Dane Henry’s perfect 10-point ride wowed the crowd and racked up 1.1 million Instagram views, spotlighting the world-class talent the event attracts.

“The Oz Grom Open is more than a surf comp — it’s where the next generation of champions are forged and where our town comes together to celebrate youth, surf, and the coastal lifestyle,” said Anthony O’Brien, Event Manager. 

“Each year, the energy grows, and with new partners like Soundboks on board, 2025 will be our biggest event yet.”

Beyond the waves, the event has long been a key driver of the economy and regional tourism during the traditionally quieter winter season. Locals affectionately refer to it as Christmas in July, as families, surf fans, and athletes flock to Lennox, bringing a welcome upswing for local cafes, retail, accommodation, and tourism operators.

“The Grom Comp embraces so much of the Aussie surfer’s journey — the classic road trip, the grommet enthusiasm, and the time spent with other kids who all love surfing. Memories and friendships are made that stand the test of time... and maybe the opportunity to prove yourself in Australia’s biggest grom event. We are stoked to be involved,” said Rob Bain, O’Neill Marketing Director.

Whether you’re a surf fan, travelling family, or regional explorer, the event is the perfect chance to experience the Northern Rivers—from whale watching and rainforest hikes to vibrant markets, beachside dining, and its famously relaxed lifestyle.

Registrations open at 9 a.m. on Monday, 12 May, and close at 5 p.m. on Monday, 19 May. 

Full entry details and registrations will be available via the Soundboks Oz Grom Open website and the Surfing Australia Just Go platform. Surfers are encouraged to register early, as divisions are limited and demand is expected to be high.

Council's 2025 Environmental Art & Design Prize - Entries open now

Council has announced Ramesh Mario Nithiyendran (art) and Keinton Butler (design) as the judges for this year’s Environmental Art & Design Prize.

Now in its fifth year, Environmental Art & Design Prize is open to artists and designers of all levels and diverse disciplines from across Australia. Submissions will be accepted until 19 May 2025.

Mayor Sue Heins said the prize has developed into one of the leading competitions covering both art and design focusing on the environment.

“Each year fascinating art works and designs are submitted for this environmentally thought-provoking prize.

“The prize is an important platform for the natural environment to take centre stage, enabling artists and designers to share their work inspired by nature, climate change and sustainable living.

“In past years we have seen impactful submissions from creatives including painters, ceramists and furniture designers. This year we would also love to see more contributions from architects, product, fashion and industrial designers.

“We are looking forward to an amazing array of powerful artworks and designs for 2025,” Mayor Heins said.

This year’s judges have vast experience in the art and design worlds. Ramesh Mario Nithiyendran is a contemporary artist with his work appearing in galleries across the globe. Keinton Butler is Senior Curator at Sydney’s Powerhouse Museum and the Creative Director of Sydney Design Week.

There are four prizes on offer this year with prize money totalling $46000. 

The visual arts and design winners will each receive $20,000. The people’s choice winners and the young artists/designers have a prize pool of $3,000 each.

All finalists will be featured in an exhibition across the Council’s 3 galleries, Manly Art Gallery and Museum (MAG&M), Curl Curl Creative Space, and Mona Vale Creative Space Gallery from 1 August to 14 September 2025.

Finalists will be announced on Friday 23 May and the winners will be announced on Friday 1 August 2025.

For more information, and to enter, visit Council's webpage at: https://www.northernbeaches.nsw.gov.au/things-to-do/arts-and-culture/northern-beaches-environmental-art-and-design-prize   

Inaugural Murcutt Symposium 2025, 11-13 September 2025

Glenn Murcutt AO is Australia's most celebrated living architect. To mark more than five decades of architectural practice, the inaugural Murcutt Symposium offers 3 days of tours, activities and events in Sydney from 11-13 September 2025.

Murcutt will not be alone in headlining the Murcutt Symposium in 2025. Fellow Pritzker Prize winning architect and friend Francis Kéré will join Murcutt on stage over two days in Sydney - delivering a public lecture, and keynote at a one-day symposium.

Join us for a rare chance to come inside some of Murcutt's most awarded buildings on guided tours. Hear the backstory and share in tales of the design evolution from those who have lived in and loved these places.

Witness the first ever award of the Murcutt Pin, a new international award for architecture designed by Murcutt and presented at the flagship public Murcutt Oration in Sydney on Friday, 12 September.

Dive deep into the themes that have driven Murcutt and informed his unique model of practice, and his internationally awarded projects at a one-day symposium.

Join us for 3 days of tours, talks and deep dives into architecture with a meaningful connection to place.

Murcutt building tours
Thursday 11 September: 8am-5pm
This is an exceptionally rare chance to go inside the iconic Nicholas House (Mount Irvine) and Simpson Lee House (Mount Wilson), with Glenn Murcutt AO as your guide. 
Lunch provided. Vigorous walking involved. Numbers strictly limited.

Friday 12 September: 1.30pm-5pm
Come inside an early Murcutt house in Cromer, north of Sydney, that has been described as "a hidden masterpiece in the suburbs" - given a new life by architect Matt Chan, in consultation with Glenn Murcutt.
Vigorous walking involved. Numbers strictly limited.

Murcutt Oration 
Friday 12 September 2025: 6pm-8pm
Award of the inaugural Murcutt Pin, and Murcutt Oration 
The inaugural Murcutt Oration will be delivered by Francis Kéré, laureate of the Pritzker Prize (2022) and Praemium Imperiale (2023) - widely recognised as one of the worlds leading architects.

Murcutt Symposium 
Saturday 13 September 2025: 9am-5pm
Join us for a deep dive into the themes behind Murcutt's work (3 hours Formal CPD, 2 hours informal CPD):

In-conversation - Glenn Murcutt AO and Francis Kéré
Hear these two eminent Pritzker Prize winning architects and warm friends engage in conversation on events and experiences that have shaped their personal lives and their practice over decades. 

Keynote - Piers Taylor (UK)
Piers Taylor is the founder and principal of the highly awarded Invisible Studio, and Professor of Knowledge Exchange in Architecture at UWE; founding 2 renowned academic programs: ‘Studio in the Woods’ and 'AA Design and Make'. Both engage students in hands-on design and construction. Piers Taylor originally studied in Australia and currently lives in a prototypical self built award winning house in the UK and manages a 100 acre woodland as a research resource for the practice.

Healthy buildings breathe - Lindsay Clare, Ché Wall, Kerry Clare, Rod Simpson
Buildings that breathe and have good natural ventilation are now event more critical in a changing climate. Are our current planning and building regulatory settings match-fit? Three eminent practitioners question the current state of play at the intersection of architecture, environmental science and emerging building regulation. 

Design for climate/Design for change - Carol Marra, Marra + Yeh
Carol Marra is an award-winning architect and Churchill Fellow specialising in sustainable and climate-resilient design. For over 25 years, her architecture, advocacy and research have guided the success of city-based and regional projects. Awarded an Alastair Swayn Strategic Research grant, her practice recently released Design for Climate | Design for Change, a toolkit for climate-resilient design. Originally from Argentina but trained in the United States, Carol has worked across cultural landscapes from North America, Australia and the Asia Pacific region, in urban, regional and remote locations.

The Murcutt legacy - celebrated documentary film maker Catherine Hunter shares footage from 30 years following Glenn Murcutt AO.
Catherine Hunter has followed and documented the work of celebrated architect Glenn Murcutt for more than thirty years and collaborated on a number of film projects. Share in Murcutt's warmth, humanity and skill in pursuit of an architectural vision that always seeks to respond to place and provide delight.

Contributors
Glenn Murcutt AO, Australia
Francis Kéré, Germany/Burkina Faso
Piers Taylor, UK
Brit Andresen, Australia
Kerry Clare, Australia
Lindsay Clare, Australia
Ché Wall, Australia
Richard Leplastrier AO, Australia
Peter Stutchbury, Australia
Carol Marra, Australia  

Tickets are designed for you to choose one or more events, including ticket packages if you can't decide. 
The 2025 Murcutt Symposium is supported by the Robin Boyd Foundation and National Gallery of Victoria; Sydney Design Week (thanks to the Powerhouse); and the Futuna Chapel Trust (NZ). 

This event is presented in partnership with the State Library of New South Wales.

Financial help for young people

Concessions and financial support for young people.

Includes:

  • You could receive payments and services from Centrelink: Use the payment and services finder to check what support you could receive.
  • Apply for a concession Opal card for students: Receive a reduced fare when travelling on public transport.
  • Financial support for students: Get financial help whilst studying or training.
  • Youth Development Scholarships: Successful applicants will receive $1000 to help with school expenses and support services.
  • Tertiary Access Payment for students: The Tertiary Access Payment can help you with the costs of moving to undertake tertiary study.
  • Relocation scholarship: A once a year payment if you get ABSTUDY or Youth Allowance if you move to or from a regional or remote area for higher education study.
  • Get help finding a place to live and paying your rent: Rent Choice Youth helps young people aged 16 to 24 years to rent a home.

Visit: https://www.nsw.gov.au/living-nsw/young-people/young-people-financial-help

School Leavers Support

Explore the School Leavers Information Kit (SLIK) as your guide to education, training and work options in 2022;
As you prepare to finish your final year of school, the next phase of your journey will be full of interesting and exciting opportunities. You will discover new passions and develop new skills and knowledge.

We know that this transition can sometimes be challenging. With changes to the education and workforce landscape, you might be wondering if your planned decisions are still a good option or what new alternatives are available and how to pursue them.

There are lots of options for education, training and work in 2022 to help you further your career. This information kit has been designed to help you understand what those options might be and assist you to choose the right one for you. Including:
  • Download or explore the SLIK here to help guide Your Career.
  • School Leavers Information Kit (PDF 5.2MB).
  • School Leavers Information Kit (DOCX 0.9MB).
  • The SLIK has also been translated into additional languages.
  • Download our information booklets if you are rural, regional and remote, Aboriginal or Torres Strait Islander, or living with disability.
  • Support for Regional, Rural and Remote School Leavers (PDF 2MB).
  • Support for Regional, Rural and Remote School Leavers (DOCX 0.9MB).
  • Support for Aboriginal and/or Torres Strait Islander School Leavers (PDF 2MB).
  • Support for Aboriginal and/or Torres Strait Islander School Leavers (DOCX 1.1MB).
  • Support for School Leavers with Disability (PDF 2MB).
  • Support for School Leavers with Disability (DOCX 0.9MB).
  • Download the Parents and Guardian’s Guide for School Leavers, which summarises the resources and information available to help you explore all the education, training, and work options available to your young person.

School Leavers Information Service

Are you aged between 15 and 24 and looking for career guidance?

Call 1800 CAREER (1800 227 337).

SMS 'SLIS2022' to 0429 009 435.

Our information officers will help you:
  • navigate the School Leavers Information Kit (SLIK),
  • access and use the Your Career website and tools; and
  • find relevant support services if needed.
You may also be referred to a qualified career practitioner for a 45-minute personalised career guidance session. Our career practitioners will provide information, advice and assistance relating to a wide range of matters, such as career planning and management, training and studying, and looking for work.

You can call to book your session on 1800 CAREER (1800 227 337) Monday to Friday, from 9am to 7pm (AEST). Sessions with a career practitioner can be booked from Monday to Friday, 9am to 7pm.

This is a free service, however minimal call/text costs may apply.

Call 1800 CAREER (1800 227 337) or SMS SLIS2022 to 0429 009 435 to start a conversation about how the tools in Your Career can help you or to book a free session with a career practitioner.

All downloads and more available at: www.yourcareer.gov.au/school-leavers-support

Word Of The Week: Wild

Word of the Week remains a keynote in 2025, simply to throw some disruption in amongst the 'yeah-nah' mix. 

Noun

1. a natural state or uncultivated or uninhabited region.

Adjective

1. (of an animal or plant) living or growing in the natural environment; not domesticated or cultivated. 2. (of a place or region) uninhabited, uncultivated, or inhospitable. 3. (of a playing card) deemed to have any value, suit, colour, or other property in a game at the discretion of the player holding it. 4. Very angry (informal).

Verb

1. behave in an unrestrained  manner.

From: Old English wilde, of Germanic origin; related to Dutch and German wild - "in the natural state, uncultivated" (of plants, herbs), "untamed, undomesticated" (of animals), from Proto-Germanic wildia-, a word of uncertain origin, perhaps from word root welt- "woodlands; wild" -  cognate to be Welsh gwyllt "wild."

Of persons, "self-willed, lacking restraint," late Old English; also of a region, "unpeopled, without civilisation." Of wind, weather, c. 1200. The specific meaning "sexually dissolute, loose" is attested from mid-13c. The meaning "distracted with excitement or emotion" is from 1590s. U.S. slang sense of "exciting, excellent" is recorded from 1955.

Compare Wilderness

Noun

1. Wilderness or wildlands (usually in the plural) are Earth's natural environments that have not been significantly modified by human activity, or any nonurbanized land not under extensive agricultural cultivation. 2. an uncultivated, uninhabited, and inhospitable region. 

From: Old English wildēornes ‘land inhabited only by wild animals’, from wild dēor ‘wild deer’ + -ness.

Men are shaving off their eyelashes on TikTok. Here’s why that might be a bad idea

Bhatakta Manav/Shutterstock
Amanda MeyerJames Cook University and Monika ZimanyiJames Cook University

Videos of men removing their eyelashes, by trimming or shaving, have been circulating on social media in recent weeks. This trend is based on the idea short eyelashes look more masculine.

Hair can tell us a lot about our social and cultural values. As the Canadian sociologist Anthony Synnott says, it can represent embedded ideas about biological sex, such as “opposite sexes have opposite hair” and “head hair and body hair are opposite”.

But do sex differences have any basis in biology? And what about the health risks of tampering with your lashes?

If the idea of a buzzing razor coming near your eyes makes you nervous, there’s good reason.

Does sex determine eyelash length?

Most warm-blooded animals have eyelashes. Human eyelashes begin to develop in the womb at around seven weeks and by six months they are fully formed.

Typically, we have 100 to 150 lashes on the upper eyelid that grow in two or three rows. There are half as many eyelashes on the lower lid.

Eyelash length is usually around one-third of the eye’s width. Lower lashes are shorter (6–8 millimetres) compared to the upper lashes (8–12mm).

The density, length, thickness and curl of eyelashes are determined by your genetics. But there is no evidence these anatomical differences are linked to sex.

This means the idea men “naturally” have short eyelashes – and women’s are longer, darker and thicker – is based in culture, not biology.

Regardless of your sex or gender, eyelashes serve several important functions.

What are eyelashes for?

Protection

Eyelashes provide a barrier against dust, debris, bugs, bacteria and chemicals (such as hairspray and deodorants), stopping them from entering the eyes.

Tears form a fluid film that covers the eye to keep it lubricated. Eyelashes also prevent air drying out this film.

From an aerodynamic point of view, medium-length lashes (8mm) are ideal for stopping the eye’s surface from drying out. Very short lashes can expose the surface to air, while very long lashes can channel more air flow towards it.

Eyelashes also shield our eyes from glare, reducing how much light enters the eye by up to 24%.

Sensation

Eyelashes are highly sensitive, so touching the eyelashes triggers a blink reflex that makes the eye shut. This protects it from unwanted materials.

Blinking also activates the release of tears and distributes them across the eyes’ surface.

Social interaction

Eyelashes help us communicate. Blinking slowly can signal attentiveness or flirtation – and eyelashes make this more appealing.

Wearing mascara or fake eyelashes emphasises the eyelashes and can make the eyes look larger and more expressive.

Toddler with long eyelashes.
Eyelashes form in the womb by six months of pregnancy, and are not linked to male or female sex. DUSITARA STOCKER/Shutterstock

So, what if you don’t have eyelashes?

People can lose their eyelashes for various reasons.

For example, chemotherapy for cancer often results in hair loss – including eyelashes – as does alopecia, an autoimmune condition which causes the body to attack its own hair follicles.

Some people also pull out their eyelashes when they are anxious or stressed.

If you can’t stop this behaviour, and your eyelash loss is noticeable and affects day-to-day life, you may have a condition called trichotillomania.

The compulsion to cut or shave hair (rather than pull it out) is known as trichotemnomania.

If you’re worried, you should speak to your doctor to get support.

No matter how hair is lost, without eyelashes you will likely feel greater discomfort. More foreign particles can enter the eye – exposing you to greater risk of infection – and you will blink more to try to wash them away.

More air on the eyes’ surface can also make them feel dry and irritated.

Is removing eyelashes risky?

Putting sharp blades near your eyes means if you are bumped, slip, or even blink, you risk injury to the eyelid or cornea (the clear, dome-shaped covering at the front of your eyeball).

Anything that goes near your eye should be very clean. If blades aren’t sterile, bacteria can lead to blepharitis (eyelid inflammation) or conjunctivitis (“pink eye”).

Will shaved eyelashes grow back?

Cross-section diagram of a hair follicle.
Cutting eyelashes doesn’t remove the hair follicle. art4stock/Shutterstock

Yes. If eyelashes are trimmed or shaved, the hair bulb and follicle (the sac surrounding the hair) remains in the skin of the eyelid, allowing the hair to keep growing.

Eyelashes grow at an average rate of 0.12mm per day, or 3.6mm a month. It could take up to three or four months for your eyelashes to grow back to their typical length.

Shaving does not affect the length, thickness and darkness of your regrown eyelashes – these will grow back the same as before (unless there has been irreversible damage to the follicle itself).

Sex, gender, and eyelashes

Perceptions of sex and gender differences in eyelashes persist, thanks in part to social norms and media portrayals.

For example, a 2023 study from the United States surveyed 319 people (142 men and 177 women) of diverse ethnic backgrounds about eyelash length in women. Men and women of all backgrounds said images of female faces with no or short eyelashes were the least attractive, regardless of ethnicity.

Cartoon characters illustrate how deeply ingrained and socially constructed these gender differences are. Compare Minnie Mouse’s long, thick lashes with Mickey Mouse, who has none.

Dress-up mascots of Mickey Mouse and Minnie Mouse. Mickey has no eyelashes and Minnie has long ones.
Cartoons often depict women with exaggerated lashes and male characters with none at all. Loren Javier/flickrCC BY-NC-ND

This is not a thing of the past, as the masculine- and feminine-presenting characters of a popular current children’s cartoon Miraculous: Tales of Ladybug & Cat Noir still demonstrate.

Two male cartoon characters with no eyelashes and two female cartoon characters with long, thick, dark eyelashes.
The top row depicts masculine-presenting characters with no lashes, and the bottom row shows feminine-presenting characters with long and plentiful eyelashes. Zagtoon Wiki

In reality, all bodies and features, including eyelashes, are naturally diverse.

Body autonomy means recognising that personal choices about appearance are valid and should be respected without judgement. But when altering your body, it’s important to also know the health risks.The Conversation

Amanda Meyer, Senior Lecturer, Anatomy and Pathology, James Cook University and Monika Zimanyi, Associate Professor in Anatomy, James Cook University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Dishevelled, dehydrated delirium: new Aussie film The Surfer, starring Nicolas Cage, is an absolute blast

Madman Entertainment
Grace RussellMonash University

Nicolas Cage has made a career from his highly entertaining scenery chewing. He follows a performance style he calls “Nouveau Shamanic” – an exaggerated form of method acting where he acts according to the character’s impulses. This allows for the wild, unpredictable outbursts his characters are known for.

Cage films are also usually about masculinity: its worst excesses, the parameters restricting it, and what ennobling versions of it might look like.

The Surfer, a new Australian feature film from Irish director Lorcan Finnegan, leans right into masculinity as a theme.

Our unnamed protagonist (Cage) is returning to his former Australian home from the United States. He is newly divorced, and trying to buy a beachside property to win back his family.

He takes his teenage son (Finn Little) for a surf near the property, but they are run off by an unfriendly pack of locals.

Returning alone to the beachside car park to make some calls, he is besieged there over the next several days by the same gang. They are led by a terrifying middle-aged Andrew Tate-esque influencer, Scally (Julian McMahon), who runs the beach like a combination of a frat bro party and wellness retreat.

The protagonist’s fast descent into dishevelled, dehydrated delirium as the group’s hazing escalates, fuels much of the first two acts.

Fish out of water

It is impossible to think of an actor other than Cage who could make a character like this so enjoyable to watch.

From the first moments, he seems pathetic: giving his uninterested teenage son metaphorical speeches about surfing, losing arguments on the phone with his broker and real estate agent, reeking of pomposity and desperation.

The sense of a man out of his depth is compounded by his Americanness contrasting with the particular brand of Australian masculinity the locals display. Both types are brash and entitled, but with entirely different ways of expressing it.

Cage is in the face of another surfer, wearing a Santa hat.
This is a man out of his depth. Madman Entertainment

Cage’s distinctively American confidence has no resistance to the terrifying switches of Australian masculinity from friendly to teasing to violent.

“Don’t live here, don’t surf here,” they hiss at him on first meeting, forcing him to retreat, cowed, to the car park, where he remains for most of the rest of the film.

The wide-open and the claustrophobic

What a stroke of genius it is to use this single location.

Filmed in Yallingup, Western Australia, The Surfer beautifully captures the natural surroundings, stunning views and shimmering heat of Australian coastal summer.

At the same time, a confined, interstitial semi-urban feature like a beachside car park feels so bleak and uninviting. The only amenities are an overpriced coffee cart, ancient payphone and a dingy toilet block.

Cage stands next to a phone booth.
The beachside car park feels so bleak and uninviting. Madman Entertainment

As a film setting, it is both a spectacular wide-open vista and stiflingly claustrophobic – a perfect mechanism for The Surfer’s psychological horror.

It must have been attractive in getting the script funded as well. With such an affordable location, more of the budget would have been freed up for a big name like Cage.

A modern Wake in Fright

With its oppressive setting, overexposed orange and yellow light and grade, and a sweaty spiral into madness, The Surfer invites comparisons to Wake in Fright, Ted Kotcheff’s 1971 brutal depiction of Australian men and their drinking culture.

Both take place at Christmas and feature an antagonist who enjoys confidently explaining their dubious moral worldview to everyone. However, Wake in Fright’s horror lingers because we know the culture remains even after the hero escapes it. The Surfer struggles a little more in landing the ending.

Men in a sweaty hug: perhaps they are cheering, or maybe they are yelling.
The film’s depiction of masculinity echoes Wake In Fright. Madman Entertainment

For the mean, violent, misogynistic villains to be defeated, it would be unsatisfying for Cage to stoop to their level. This means – without spoiling too much – Cage remains an oddly passive character throughout the film, while others perform the avenging actions.

The only way the protagonist’s masculinity can be resurrected as upright, ethical and empowering is for the character to literally turn his back on the vengeance we’ve been waiting for him to deliver.

It’s not that the film has an inarticulate grasp of its own politics, but more that the otherwise terrific script by Thomas Martin feels written into a difficult corner.

A blast along the way

I don’t want to imply that this ending means The Surfer isn’t an absolute blast along the way. A lot of the fun is in anticipating each dreadful humiliation – and it somehow turning out worse than you could have expected.

A spilled coffee leads to drinking recycled wastewater which leads to chewing on a dead rat, and we still haven’t reached the lowest rung on the ladder of indignities that Cage’s character suffers.

In less skilled hands this could feel nasty or gross, but the hallucinatory quality of Finnegan’s direction makes it feel almost sublime. And Cage’s pleading, groaning, sobbing and gibbering feel believable and relatable.

The pathos works – and it’s pretty funny too.

The Surfer is in cinemas from today and streaming on Stan from June 15.The Conversation

Grace Russell, Lecturer, School of Media, Film and Journalism, Monash University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Don’t click without thinking – and 4 other ways to keep yourself safe from scams

tete_escape/Shutterstock
Meena JhaCQUniversity Australia

Think about how many things you have done online today. Paid a bill? Logged into your bank account? Used social media or spent time answering emails? Maybe you have used your phone to pay at a supermarket or train station.

We are all plugged in, and that’s not necessarily a bad thing. But with all these conveniences comes a growing risk many Australians are unprepared for: cyber crime.

According to the most recent cyber threat report by the Australian Cyber Security Centre, more than 87,000 reports of cybercrime were made in 2023-2024. That’s a report every six minutes. And that’s just what gets reported. Many people do not even realise they have been hacked or scammed until it’s too late.

Earlier this year, Scamwatch, run by the Australian Competition and Consumer Commission, revealed Australians lost nearly A$319 million to scams in 2024 alone. In a recent example, cyber criminals used stolen login details to hack several major superfunds in Australia and steal a collective A$500,000 of people’s retirement savings.

A big part of this worsening problem is poor “digital hygiene”. Here are five easy ways to improve yours.

First, what exactly is ‘digital hygiene’?

Just like brushing your teeth keeps cavities away, digital hygiene is all about keeping your online life clean, safe and protected from harm.

It is a simple idea: the better your habits when using technology, the harder it is for scammers or hackers to trick you or get access to your personal information.

It means being aware of what you are sharing, whom you are trusting, and how your devices are set up. Unfortunately, most of us are probably more hygienic in bathrooms than we are online.

How should you protect yourself?

Good news: you do not need to be a computer whizz to keep clean online. Here are five simple practical steps anyone can take:

1. Stop and think before clicking

Got an unexpected message from your bank asking you to verify your account? Or a text about a missed parcel delivery with a link? Scammers love urgency. It gets people to click before they think. Instead of rushing, pause.

Ask yourself: was I expecting this? Is the sender’s email or phone number legitimate? Do not click the link, go directly to the official website or app.

2. Use strong, unique passwords

Using your pet’s name or “123456” is not going to cut it. And if you reuse passwords across websites, a breach on one site means hackers can try the same password everywhere else. This is called a credential stuffing attack, and it is how the cyber attack on superannuation funds happened earlier this year.

The best move? Begin securing your online accounts by using a password manager and updating any reused passwords, prioritising your most sensitive accounts such as emails, banking and cloud storage first.

3. Turn on multi-factor authentication

Multi-factor authentication means you need something more than just a password to login, such as a code sent to your phone or an app such as Google Authenticator or Microsoft Authenticator.

It is a simple step that adds a powerful layer of protection. Even if someone guesses your password, they cannot log in without your second factor.

4. Update your apps and devices

Yes, those software updates are annoying, but they are important. Updates fix security holes that hackers can use. Make it automatic if you can, and do not ignore update prompts, especially for your operating systems such as Windows, iOS or Android. However, it is important to recognise that older devices often stop receiving updates because manufacturers stop supporting older models or are not developing updates for older devices as it can be costly.

Outdated software harbours known vulnerabilities that hackers actively can target. While keeping devices longer supports sustainability, there is a balance to strike. If your device no longer receives security updates, it may be safer to responsibly recycle it and invest in a newer supported model to maintain your digital safety.

5. Be mindful of what you share

Oversharing on social media makes you an easy target. Public posts that include your birthday, where you went to school, or your pet’s name can be used to guess security questions or build convincing fake messages. Think before you post – would a stranger need to know this?

A phone screen displaying icons of multiple social media platforms.
Oversharing on social media makes you an easy target for scammers. Cristian Dina/Shutterstock

What should I do if I have been hacked?

To check if your passwords have been leaked in a breach, you can use HaveIBeenPwned – a free tool trusted by security experts.

If you have been hacked, follow the tips provided by Australian Cyber Security Centre. For example, you should change all your passwords and passcodes and use software to scan for malware on your computer.

Need more help? Visit esafety.gov.au for practical guides, especially for parents, teachers and young people.

Digital hygiene is not a personal responsibility, it is a collective one. We are connected through emails, group chats, workplaces and social media. One weak link can put others at risk. Talk to your family and friends about the risk of scams and how to avoid them. The more we talk about this, the more normal and effective digital hygiene becomes.

Because just like washing your hands became second nature during the COVID-19 pandemic, keeping your online life clean should be a habit, not an afterthought.The Conversation

Meena Jha, Head Technology and Pedagogy Cluster CML-NET, CQUniversity Australia

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

How a toxic seaweed choking Caribbean beaches could become a valuable resource

Marc Bruxelle/Shutterstock
Emily WilkinsonODI Global and Emma TompkinsUniversity of Southampton

Each year, between March and October, large amounts of brown seaweed called sargassum wash up on the shores of Caribbean islands – choking beaches, damaging marine life and threatening tourism and public health. But a number of local entrepreneurs are hoping the seaweed could create an economic opportunity.

From the coast of west Africa to the Caribbean Sea and the Gulf of Mexico, climate change is warming the temperature of the ocean. Seas are also becoming more acidic as water absorbs carbon dioxide. This all results in more intense growth of sargassum in the tropical Atlantic.

Small Caribbean nations are among the hardest hit. With 20 million tonnes of this seaweed washing up on the beaches in 2024, sargassum is fuelling an economic and public health crisis.

The piles of noxious seaweed on the Caribbean islands’ white sandy beaches are putting off visitors to these islands and probably dampening tourism revenues.


Get your news from actual experts, straight to your inbox. Sign up to our daily newsletter to receive all The Conversation UK’s latest coverage of news and research, from politics and business to the arts and sciences.


The fishing sector is also suffering, with blooms of seaweed getting caught up in fishing nets, often ripping them due to the weight of the seaweed. This makes it hard for fishers to catch fish and make a living.

The sheer volume of sargassum left to decompose on land produces toxic fumes that have forced people on islands like Guadeloupe to leave their homes. These toxic fumes have been linked to serious health issues including respiratory infections, sleep apnoea and even preeclampsia (high blood pressure during pregnancy).

The sargassum problem is just one of many slow-onset events that are being exacerbated by climate change. But gradual changes get much less attention or resources to address the consequences than, say, alarming wildfires or flash floods.

Slow-onset events are also much harder to quantify than climate-change-induced extreme weather, such as worsening hurricanes or floods. Our team at ODI Global, a thinktank, recently published a study that estimated the cost of these at US$2,000 (£1,500) per person. Calculating the tourism lost each year due to seaweed inundation is trickier.

Despite these challenges, through small-scale, locally developed solutions, as well as government policies that support small businesses including helping them access climate finance, entrepreneurs can find sustainable solutions to help their populations thrive in an era of climate change.

Legena Henry, a lecturer at the University of the West Indies in Barbados, uses sargassum to produce a biofuel that can power cars. Johanan Dujon, the founder and chief executive of St. Lucia-based Algas Organics sells plant tonics made from sargassum and is trialling methods to convert sargassum into paper.

Meanwhile, other innovations are helping to minimise the impacts of sargassum in the region.

Andrés León, founder of SOS Carbon, a spin-off organisation from the mechanical engineering department at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology, has designed a boat-based harvester to collect sargassum at sea to stop it from beaching and causing damage onshore.

Some islands, such as Jamaica, are using early warning systems, typically used to predict hurricanes, to predict the ocean currents that might bring a bumper arrival of the seaweed to their shores. This could give fishers up to 30 days notice of just how bad the inundation will be.

Barriers to scale up

But while small businesses are emerging, turning them into larger enterprises across the region remains difficult. As usual, small island nations struggle to get funding because investors think the projects are too small and won’t make enough money.

As Legena Henry recently told us on the Small Island Big Picture podcast, spending a few million dollars (as opposed to a few hundred million dollars) can feel administratively cumbersome for funders as they often have limited administrative capacity and large sums of money to manage.

Another issue is ensuring the benefits from any sargassum solutions flow into the affected Caribbean islands to support local growth and economic development.

Several opportunities exist for small island nations to generate some income from sargassum. They could, for example, sell licences to permit companies to harvest sargassum within their exclusive economic zones, which can stretch around many islands for hundreds of nautical miles.

They can also sell licences to businesses trialling or operating new sargassum technologies within their exclusive economic zones — for example, SOS Carbon has a patent pending for technology designed to sink sargassum to the seabed to store carbon.

Will sargassum continue to be a nuisance, or could it be an important renewable natural resource? It’s not yet clear.

Ideally, as with other renewable natural resources in developing countries, small island nations that own the sargassum need to find ways to extract a fair share of the value from that ownership, as well as selling to external companies that come in, remove it and profit from it.

With tax incentives and low-cost finance for domestic innovators, small islands can manage and sell sargassum and then use the proceeds to develop climate resilience measures.


Don’t have time to read about climate change as much as you’d like?
Get a weekly roundup in your inbox instead. Every Wednesday, The Conversation’s environment editor writes Imagine, a short email that goes a little deeper into just one climate issue. Join the 45,000+ readers who’ve subscribed so far.The Conversation


Emily Wilkinson, Principal Research Fellow, ODI Global and Emma Tompkins, Professor of Geography, Environment & Development, University of Southampton

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

How Denmark’s oysters are transforming foodies into citizen scientists

Lea Meilandt MathisenCC BY-NC-ND
Dominique TownsendUniversity of SouthamptonCamille SaurelTechnical University of Denmark, and Pedro Seabra FreitasTechnical University of Denmark

This year 80 people put on their waders, grabbed buckets and quadrats (square metal frames), and splashed through the clear shallow waters. Once they reached one of the many sampling locations, marked by miniature floats, they threw their quadrats into the shallow water, ready to collect all the sea life that landed inside their quadrats.

No one had any idea what they might find living on the seabed until they reached into the water. Nearby, kids peered down at the seabed using underwater scopes, grandparents chuckled as they returned for a second forage.

This citizen science project combines coastal ecology and gastronomy. Our groups returned to the sorting stations to identify, count, weigh and measure each bucket of creatures and algae. A typical bucket might contain four living Pacific oysters, nine dead, a brush-clawed shore crab, four folded sea squirts and a handful of snails.

Then, we sat down together to eat a gourmet oyster dinner, prepared by Denmark’s top chefs. Organised by a shellfish gastrotourism association called Danmarks Skaldyrshovedstad, this oyster hunt (Østerjagten 2025) is a new annual festival held at the Salling Sund Bridge in the Danish Limfjorden, a 110-mile strait of water in northern Denmark.

Citizen scientists of all ages gather flora and fauna samples from the seafloor with the Salling Sund bridge in the background.
Citizen scientists gather flora and fauna samples from the seafloor. Lea Meilandt MathisenCC BY-NC-ND

The invasive Pacific oysters people had collected from the seabed then went on to be shucked and cooked. They were served au gratin, with wild flavour combinations, ranging from blueberry and blue cheese to shavings of prosciutto with strawberries and lime.

Most people told us they came along because of the quirkiness of this event, and the promise of gourmet food. Less than one in five people stated their interest in marine research as their reason for joining. Nobody attended the event just for the science.

As a coastal change researcher, this result was exciting – we were reaching an audience that might not normally engage. Even after participating, many people didn’t feel like citizen scientists. But when asked what they had learnt, most recalled facts about coastal ecology, as well as new ways to cook oysters.

A plate full of delicious Pacific Oysters au Gratin.
A delicious plate of Pacific oysters served au gratin. Lea Meilandt MathisenCC BY-NC-ND

Eating aliens

Back to the basket sample contents. Pacific oyster, brush-clawed shore crab, folded sea squirts: none are native to the Limfjorden or Danish waters. So many people were shocked to find out that their baskets were full of invasive species – these “alien species” are non-native and can compete with the resident species for both food and space.

Despite an increase in the number of empty Pacific oysters shells we found this year compared to last (indicating more oyster deaths), temperatures are rising in this estuary system. This means that conditions are becoming more suitable for the Pacific oysters and the other invasive creatures, many of which originate in warmer waters.

A pair of hands measures the length of a Pacific oyster with a ruler.
Individual Pacific oysters were measured by hand. Lea Meilandt MathisenCC BY-NC-ND

All oysters provide ecosystem services; improving water quality, forming new habitats and protecting coastlines from erosion by reducing wave energy. As Pacific oysters are bigger, rougher, tougher and much faster growing than native European oysters, they can have a greater impact on the environment.

This, however, is not necessarily a good thing. As Pacific oysters take over European oyster and blue mussel beds, birds which once fed on these species are left without vital food sources. The thick shells mean they have no predators once they reach a certain size. Beach goers can also be affected as the razor-sharp shells occupy previously sandy bathing areas.

Farming of the Pacific oyster has been banned in Denmark since 1998, yet despite this measure, Pacific oyster beds are now widespread and prevalent across Denmark’s estuaries. A single oyster can release between 50 and 200 million eggs during a spawning event each year meaning it is impossible to control them.

A small shore crab rests in the palm of a little girl.
A young citizen scientist holds a small shore crab. Lea Meilandt MathisenCC BY-NC-ND

While children were discovering the joy of sea squirts, other marine scientists and I could have tougher conversations with adults about climate change. We explained that warming temperatures are clearly visible in the here-and-now of local monitoring data.

The Limfjorden is made up of a series of fjords and islands in northern Denmark which link the North Sea to the Kattergat (the sea between Denmark and Sweden). This area is characterised by undisturbed coastlines and rolling hills, as well as some famous geological sites. It is a popular holiday destination for those that enjoy being in nature, some Danish hyggelig (comfort) and seafood.

But the Limfjorden is subject to numerous pressures: eutrophication (when extra nutrients in the water cause toxic algal blooms), changing climate, fishing, dumping of dredged materials and the arrival of invasive species. Its resilience to these may serve as an ecological bell weather for the rest of the world’s coasts.

Our event highlights how we’ll have to deal with environmental issues together. One feedback form still sits on my desk, the participant wrote in Danish: “Forskning er alle mands projekt og at det har effekt.” This translates to “research is everyone’s project and it has an effect”.

This edible approach offers a new way of communicating complex issues such as biodiversity and the introduction of alien species. Oyster hunt-style events such as this offer an excellent opportunity for scientists like us to provide some food for thought.


Don’t have time to read about climate change as much as you’d like?
Get a weekly roundup in your inbox instead. Every Wednesday, The Conversation’s environment editor writes Imagine, a short email that goes a little deeper into just one climate issue. Join the 45,000+ readers who’ve subscribed so far.The Conversation


Dominique Townsend, Visiting Researcher, School of Geography and Environmental Science, University of SouthamptonCamille Saurel, Senior Researcher, Coastal Ecology, Technical University of Denmark, and Pedro Seabra Freitas, Senior Researcher in Coastal Ecology, Technical University of Denmark

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Bronze-age Britain traded tin with the Mediterranean, shows new study – settling a two-century debate

Bronze age tin ingot from Salcombe, England. Benjamin Roberts / Alan Williams
Benjamin RobertsDurham University and Alan WilliamsDurham University

Tin was the critical mineral of the ancient world. It was essential to alloy with copper to make bronze, which for many centuries was the preferred metal for tools and weapons. Yet sources of tin are very scarce – and were especially so for the rapidly growing bronze age towns, cities and states around the eastern Mediterranean.

Though major tin deposits are found in western and central Europe and in central Asia, by far the richest and most accessible tin ores are in Cornwall and Devon in southwest Britain. Yet it has been difficult to prove that these British deposits were used as a source for people in the eastern Mediterranean. So for more than two centuries, archaeologists have debated about where bronze age societies obtained their tin.

In a new study published in the journal Antiquity, our team analysed the chemistry and different forms of particular elements in tin ores and artefacts from across Britain and Europe. These included tin ingots found at prehistoric shipwreck sites at Salcombe and Erme, southwest Britain, as well as in the Mediterranean.


Get your news from actual experts, straight to your inbox. Sign up to our daily newsletter to receive all The Conversation UK’s latest coverage of news and research, from politics and business to the arts and sciences. Join The Conversation for free today.


This revealed that tin ingots from three ancient shipwrecks discovered off the coast of Israel and one shipwreck found off the Mediterranean coast of France originated in southwest Britain. The shipwrecks found near Israel date to around 1300BC, while the wreck from France has been dated to around 600BC.

Small farming communities across Cornwall and Devon would have dug, washed, crushed and smelted the abundant tin ore from the alluvial deposits in the region. The heavy sand to gravel-sized tin ore is in a layer buried under soft layers of barren silt, sand and gravel.

The tin ore is eroded from hard rock mineral veins and deposited by streams and rivers. There was simply no need for any complex and difficult mining of hard rock here. The tin would then have been taken to coastal locations where it could be traded.

It’s probable that the tin was then moved by traders through France to the Mediterranean coast, where it was loaded onto ships. It would make its way through flourishing trade networks between the islands of Sardinia and Cyprus before reaching markets in the east Mediterranean. The tin’s value would have increased immensely as it progressed along this 2,485 mile (4,000km) journey.

Tin is the first commodity to have been exported across the entire European continent. It was produced and traded at a potentially vast scale, but is rarely found in archaeological sites due to corrosion. But what we do known is that by 1,300BC, virtually all of Europe and the Mediterranean had widespread and consistent access to bronze.

We know of more than 100 bronze age copper mines from Ireland to Israel and from Spain to the southern Urals in Russia. Yet these would have been just a small proportion of the copper mines active at the time.

Given that bronze was typically made from 90% copper and 10% tin, if the copper produced by each of these known mines had to be matched by 10% tin, then tens or even hundreds of tonnes of tin were being traded each year – perhaps across distances of thousands of miles.

St Michael's Mount may be the site of the ancient island Ictis.
St Michael’s Mount may be the site of the ancient island Ictis. Alan Williams

The volume, consistency and frequency of the estimated scale in the tin trade is far larger than has been previously imagined and requires an entirely new perspective on what bronze age miners and merchants were able to achieve. It is no coincidence that it is around 1,300BC that technologies from the east, such as sophisticated systems for weighing items, as well as bronze swords, reached small farming communities living on the Atlantic coasts.

A millennium later, around 320BC, Pytheas the Greek, from Massalia (modern Marseilles), journeyed by land and sea to Britain, which was at the edge of the known world at the time. Pytheas wrote the earliest account describing the island and its inhabitants in a book which is now lost, but which has partially survived in snippets quoted by later classical authors.

Pytheas described how tin in southwest Britain was extracted and traded off a tidal island he called Ictis, before being taken across the sea and down the rivers of France to the mouth of the Rhone in only 30 days. In our research, we provide the first direct evidence for the tin trade Pytheas described. We show that tin from the Rochelongue shipwreck, off the south coast of France and dating to around 600BC, came from southwest Britain.

While we can establish the movement of tin across the seas, we know very little about the markets on land in which it was traded. We are now working with a team of archaeologists from Cornwall to excavate on the tidal island of St Michael’s Mount, which has long thought to have been the island of Ictis described by Pytheas.

A pan-continental tin trade continued in all periods after the bronze age and, in the absence of written records, our approach, using different methods of analysis, allows us to determine whether the tin came from Britain.

Historical records show that during the medieval period, tin from Cornwall and Devon enjoyed a virtual European monopoly, with production continuing until the last tin mine closed in 1998.

Today, tin is once again a critical and strategic mineral, this time for use in the electronics industry. As such it forms a vital part of the tools and weapons of the 21st century. Cornwall’s tin production is also set to soon restart, reviving a 4,000 year old industry.The Conversation

Benjamin Roberts, Associate Professor in Later European Prehistory, Durham University and Alan Williams, Honorary Research Fellow, Department of Archaeology, Durham University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

How to write a perfect wedding speech – according to ancient orators

IVASHstudio/Shutterstock
David RobertsBirmingham City University

Looking for an example of how not to give a wedding speech? Try this. I was recently told an anecdote about guests at a wedding who became suspicious about the detached, cliched style of the groom’s speech, and the monotonous way it was read. Gathered at the reception afterwards, they asked ChatGPT to write a groom’s wedding speech. Bingo! The result was as good as identical.

Admittedly, whether you’re bride or groom, best man or chief bridesmaid, giving a wedding speech can be a scary prospect. But if you want to keep it personal and memorable, AI is not the answer.

So what is? You could do a lot worse than following the five canons of classical rhetoric, as recommended by the great practitioners of the ancient world, Cicero and Quintilianinventionarrangementstylememory and delivery.

1. Invention

The first canon of classical rhetoric is invention. That’s the process of discovering and developing the ideas you’ll use in your speech.

You can’t speak about everything, and no one likes a speech that drones on. Around ten minutes is all you need. That leaves you time for maybe six or seven events in the life of the person you’re talking about.

If you visualise those six or seven events, that will help you remember them. Is there a theme or characteristic that binds them together? Identify one or two, and use them to create a thread.

Good speakers often begin with a bit of a warm-up – maybe some light-hearted comments about the venue, or something in the news, or just a good joke. Plan to single out people in the audience for a mention or a laugh. Say something nice about the new family, or friendship groups you’ve discovered through the relationship.


Looking for something good? Cut through the noise with a carefully curated selection of the latest releases, live events and exhibitions, straight to your inbox every fortnight, on Fridays. Sign up here.


2. Arrangement

History is your best friend when it comes to arranging the order of your speech. The events you’ve chosen under “invention” happened in order of time. So lean on history and organise them chronologically.

Also, remember that many of the best wedding speeches often follow an arc from light to serious. You can make fun of your subject for a while, but nothing quite beats ending with love.

3. Style

This will vary depending on your role. Best men and chief bridesmaids traditionally skirt the boundaries of politeness, or sometimes go crashing through them (the worst best-man jokes are not repeatable here, nor anywhere else, and there’s no shortage of books dedicated to them).

Mostly you’ll be talking to a mixed audience. You can be a bit risqué without offending anyone (sexist jokes are not recommended). And because you’re likely to be talking to people you know, try to be informal – the “familiar style”, as it used to be called. That also means being personal. The speech has to sound like you.

bride and groom cheers their glasses with guests
Keep your speech as personal as possible. Dupe/Chloe ChristiansonCC BY-SA

4. Memory

The prospect of remembering a speech may feel daunting or impossible. But speaking without notes makes a huge difference to how you engage your audience.

Look into their eyes and they will be drawn in. The ancient Roman educator Quintilian was one among many orators to recommend visual analogues as a memory aid – often, the ground plan of a house, where a porch leads to a hall, which leads to a dining room, and so on. You populate each room with clues. They might be verbal or visual.

Anything that helps you lift your eyes from a script will increase your chances of getting the audience on your side.

5. Delivery

Calm your nerves by visualising the scene ahead of time. Most people visit their wedding venue before the big day, so take the opportunity to get used to the space, and then run it through in your head afterwards.

Try rehearsing the speech while you’re going for a walk. When it comes to the big day and the room is full, remember that you can’t speak directly to everyone. Instead, pick out maybe three or four people to focus on, in different parts of the room.

A wedding venue laid out with a table and lights
Taking a walk around the venue ahead of time can help you to memorise your speech. Dupe/Marissa GradeiCC BY-SA

There are novel approaches and there are disasters. The double-act approach can work brilliantly, where bride and groom take turns to deliver a single speech, but it may need scripting. If the venue has the facilities, a slide show can work well. Picking out the various groups of families and friends and getting them to wave usually works as a good warmup.

When you get a laugh, ride it – start speaking again just as the laughter is dying down. Don’t wait for silence. If you get into a panic and can’t think of anything, just say you’re so happy that you’re speechless, and raise your glass for a toast.The Conversation

David Roberts, Professor of English and University Orator, Birmingham City University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Australia’s ‘inconvenient’ women writers blazed a trail through the 20th century

Katharine Susannah Prichard, Miles Franklin, Kylie Tennant, Mary Gilmore, Marjorie Barnard and Pamela Travers. Public domain, Wikimedia Commons
Anthea TaylorUniversity of Sydney

In Inconvenient Women, Jacqueline Kent shines a spotlight on some of Australia’s most radical and influential writers.

For Kent, these iconic women were “inconvenient” in many ways. They pursued careers as journalists, poets and novelists at times when many women were relegated to the private sphere. They spoke out against injustices, despite the personal cost. They lived unconventional lives, personally and professionally. And they embodied alternative forms of womanhood.


Review: Inconvenient Women: Australian Radical Writers 1900-1970 – Jacqueline Kent (NewSouth)


The limits of the “wave” metaphor to categorise periods of feminist activism are well known. Kent explicitly seeks to recentre women who were in between the “waves” – that is, she is interested in those who came after the campaigns for women’s suffrage during the so-called “first wave”, but predated the revitalisation of Western feminism in the “second wave” of the 1970s.

These women writers clearly laid some important foundations for later feminist activists, especially those who called for more radical social upheaval.

The book’s subtitle – “Australian radical writers” – clarifies its focus. Kent does not explicitly discuss the criteria for inclusion, but it becomes clear that “radical” is shorthand for the most left-leaning women writers and activists in the first two thirds of the 20th century.

Accordingly, much of the book is preoccupied with tracing their varied engagement with political ideas and organisations. As Kent clarifies in the book’s first few pages: “These were all women who used their power with words in support of their beliefs, and to question and change elements of the world they knew.”

Kent makes it clear, however, that this is a “joint biography”, not a work of history or literary criticism. Inconvenient Women focuses on how these women lived and how their literary contributions were informed – and indeed made possible – by their more unorthodox ways of being and living, rather than on the writing itself.

Kent puts it this way:

All these women were brave. Common to them all were unquenchable curiosity, fearlessness and willingness to take risks – with their lives, with their relationships, with the work they did.

Challenging norms

Written in an engaging and accessible style for a broad audience, Kent’s ambitious group biography places these formidable women at the forefront of Australia’s literary, cultural and political history. Spanning a period of 70 years, Kent maps the cultural and political shifts that enabled and constrained these women writers. Their activism took different forms across different periods, but for all of them writing was a key tool in their political arsenal.

The book’s five-part structure is chronological. Part one covers Federation, the granting of suffrage, and the first world war. It discusses a number of 20th-century writers who honed their skills in the journalistic field before publishing award-winning and often controversial novels.

Kent begins with journalist, poet and novelist Mary Gilmore. For more than two decades, from 1908 to 1931, Gilmore used the Women’s Page in the socialist magazine Worker to advocate for a mother’s allowance, support women who wished to eschew marriage, and criticise Christianity for its assumptions about women’s innate inferiority.

These ideas challenged the gender norms of the day, though in other respects, as Kent shows, Gilmore did little to disrupt prevailing ideologies. She supported the White Australia policy, for example.

In this opening section, Kent introduces several other women who return at various points in the biography, including Katharine Susannah PrichardMiles FranklinMarjorie Barnard and New Zealand-born novelist Jean Devanny.

Kent reflects upon the barriers encountered by these pioneering women authors. Devanny’s 1926 novel The Butcher Shop, which condemned the subservience of women in marriage, was the first book to be banned in Australia. Other lesser-known women whose work “hovered at the border of what was acceptable” included Jean CampbellDoris Kerr and Marjorie Clark, who wrote under the pseudonym “Georgia Rivers”.

Kent’s commitment to reevaluating women writers who have not been foregrounded in literary or cultural history, such as poet Marie Pitt, is laudable. However, some of these figures – Marion Knowles and Elinor Mordaunt (the pen name of Evelyn May Clowes), for example – are only given short paragraphs. This reclamation is an important feature of the book, and I wanted to read more about these historically marginalised women.

Political dangers

Inconvenient Women is well researched and given texture through a variety of sources, including correspondence between some of these writers. Kent establishes how the subversive politics of her subjects informed their lives and their writing, and provides important insights into the communities they formed.

Marjorie Barnard c.1936. State Library of New South Wales, Public domain, via Wikimedia Commons

Many of these women supported each other across their often lengthy careers. Examining the intricate webs of connection and fruitful collaborative relationships – such as that between Marjorie Barnard and Flora Eldershaw, which produced novels, plays, short stories and essays – Kent foregrounds the intimacies of those who moved in literary and left political circles across the 20th century. This is one of the strengths of a group biography as a way of reframing histories from which women have been excluded.

At times, the focus turns to key male figures, such as journalist and communist activist Egon Kisch and Guido Barrachi, who was integral to the establishment of the Australian Communist Party and romantically involved with women writers such as Lesbia Harford and Betty Roland. This can distract from the book’s professed goal, though I acknowledge Kent’s introductory comment that “men figure in this story, too, both as antagonists and supporters”.

The extent to which the women’s writing overtly engaged with political issues varied, as did their positions on communism. While Prichard and Christina Stead wholeheartedly endorsed it, writer and critic Nettie Palmer appeared more ambivalent.

The second part of Inconvenient Women covers visits to the Soviet Union in the 1930s by Roland, Prichard, and Pamela Travers, the Australian-born author of Mary Poppins. Later in the decade, Palmer and Stead travelled to Spain, becoming caught up in the civil war and the protests against fascism. For Palmer, the experience cemented the importance of art as a “weapon”.

Continuing the book’s interest in women who may have been overlooked, Kent shows how Australian war correspondents, such as Women’s Weekly reporter Adele “Tilly” Shelton-Smith and Lorraine Stumm from the Daily Mail in England, played an important role during this tumultuous time.

Katharine Susannah Prichard c.1928. May Moore, Public domain, via Wikimedia Commons

Communism, Kent remarks, “influenced the work of some of Australia’s best women writers, whether they followed the Party or not”. This left them in vulnerable positions when war broke out in 1939. The third section of Inconvenient Woman considers how they responded to the second world war, personally and professionally. For many of them, this meant dealing with censorship, state surveillance and police raids on their homes.

To be a supporter of the left in the 1930s and 1940s, especially as a woman, could come at grave cost. Police raided Prichard’s house; Devanny was also subject to surveillance. As evidence of the oppressive political climate, Kent discusses how Dymphna Cusack, a teacher in inner-city Sydney, was transferred to Bathurst after the publication of Jungfrau (1936), her controversial novel exploring female sexuality. There were dangers in transgressing social mores.

As Kent shows, surveillance continued into the 1950s. Writers were increasingly subject to monitoring by ASIO. This included those who had received grants from the Commonwealth Literary Fund, such as Kylie Tennant, who returned the money after conservative parliamentarian Bill Wentworth publicly labelled her a communist.

The difficulties of publishing in such an environment, especially for women, are brought into sharp relief throughout the book. In the fourth section, which covers the years 1945–60, Kent addresses the difficulties experienced by women seeking to engage with the androcentric publishing industry. This is exemplified by the protracted publication journey of Come in Spinner (1951), co-written by Cusack and Florence James, which won a prize as an unpublished manuscript in 1946, only for its publication deal to be withdrawn. It eventually appeared five years later in an expurgated version.

Kent also emphasises how these women sought to ensure that writing be taken seriously as a form of labour. Many were involved in establishing and maintaining writers’ organisations. Gilmore and journalist Connie Robertson set up the Society of Women Writers in 1925, which was followed a few years later by a broader association, the Fellowship of Australian Writers, with Gilmore again at the forefront. Women were highly active, too, in the Australian Society of Authors, established in 1963 and still thriving today.

A formidable legacy

Despite living unconventional lives, Kent suggests many of these writers were not overt in their feminism. Dorothy Hewett’s social realist novel Bobbin’ Up represents a shift in this regard. Published in 1959, it is closer to the burgeoning modern women’s movement than any other literary text considered in the book.

Given certain voices have historically been privileged over others, it is unsurprising that the majority of the women in this book are white and heterosexual. A little more reflection on the conditions that made their careers possible could have further illuminated how some “inconvenient” women in Australia, as elsewhere, have always been seen as more acceptable than others.

There is, nevertheless, an important discussion of Indigenous women writers and activists, including the poet Oodgeroo Noonuccal (Kath Walker) and the activist and writer Faith Bandler, in the book’s fifth and final section.

Inconvenient Women lacks a conclusion. Its account stops before the 1970s, a turbulent time of social and political change, when “inconvenient women” became more visible than at any other time in Australian history. Some additional gesturing towards subsequent developments might have given a stronger sense of how the foundations laid by these trailblazing women were built upon by second wave writers-as-activists, such as Germaine Greer and Anne Summers.

At different points in the book, I found myself wishing for further reflection on certain figures and the reception of their work. But this is a limitation of the group biography sub-genre rather than Kent’s writing. Inconvenient Women may function as an introduction for some readers, sparking curiosity about these remarkable women and a desire to seek out their books, plays and poems. For others, it might illuminate connections between these figures, or provide a deeper understanding of their cultural and historical contexts.

Whatever the case, Kent urges us to acknowledge and reconsider the legacy of these formidable Australian women. Each of them, in their own way, models what it is to be an “inconvenient” woman – something we certainly need now, perhaps more than ever.The Conversation

Anthea Taylor, Associate Professor, Gender and Cultural Studies, University of Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Meta’s new AI chatbot is yet another tool for harvesting data to potentially sell you stuff

Tony Lam Hoang/Unsplash
Uri GalUniversity of Sydney

Last week, Meta – the parent company of Facebook, Instagram, Threads and WhatsApp – unveiled a new “personal artificial intelligence (AI)”.

Powered by the Llama 4 language model, Meta AI is designed to assist, chat and engage in natural conversation. With its polished interface and fluid interactions, Meta AI might seem like just another entrant in the race to build smarter digital assistants.

But beneath its inviting exterior lies a crucial distinction that transforms the chatbot into a sophisticated data harvesting tool.

‘Built to get to know you’

“Meta AI is built to get to know you”, the company declared in its news announcement. Contrary to the friendly promise implied by the slogan, the reality is less reassuring.

The Washington Post columnist Geoffrey A. Fowler found that by default, Meta AI “kept a copy of everything”, and it took some effort to delete the app’s memory. Meta responded that the app provides “transparency and control” throughout and is no different to their other apps.

However, while competitors like Anthropic’s Claude operate on a subscription model that reflects a more careful approach to user privacy, Meta’s business model is firmly rooted in what it has always done best: collecting and monetising your personal data.

This distinction creates a troubling paradox. Chatbots are rapidly becoming digital confidants with whom we share professional challenges, health concerns and emotional struggles.

Recent research shows we are as likely to share intimate information with a chatbot as we are with fellow humans. The personal nature of these interactions makes them a gold mine for a company whose revenue depends on knowing everything about you.

Consider this potential scenario: a recent university graduate confides in Meta AI about their struggle with anxiety during job interviews. Within days, their Instagram feed fills with advertisements for anxiety medications and self-help books – despite them having never publicly posted about these concerns.

The cross-platform integration of Meta’s ecosystem of apps means your private conversations can seamlessly flow into their advertising machine to create user profiles with unprecedented detail and accuracy.

This is not science fiction. Meta’s extensive history of data privacy scandals – from Cambridge Analytica to the revelation that Facebook tracks users across the internet without their knowledge – demonstrates the company’s consistent prioritisation of data collection over user privacy.

What makes Meta AI particularly concerning is the depth and nature of what users might reveal in conversation compared to what they post publicly.

Open to manipulation

Rather than just a passive collector of information, a chatbot like Meta AI has the capability to become an active participant in manipulation. The implications extend beyond just seeing more relevant ads.

Imagine mentioning to the chatbot that you are feeling tired today, only to have it respond with: “Have you tried Brand X energy drinks? I’ve heard they’re particularly effective for afternoon fatigue.” This seemingly helpful suggestion could actually be a product placement, delivered without any indication that it’s sponsored content.

Such subtle nudges represent a new frontier in advertising that blurs the line between a helpful AI assistant and a corporate salesperson.

Unlike overt ads, recommendations mentioned in conversation carry the weight of trusted advice. And that advice would come from what many users will increasingly view as a digital “friend”.

A history of not prioritising safety

Meta has demonstrated a willingness to prioritise growth over safety when releasing new technology features. Recent reports reveal internal concerns at Meta, where staff members warned that the company’s rush to popularise its chatbot had “crossed ethical lines” by allowing Meta AI to engage in explicit romantic role-play, even with test users who claimed to be underage.

Such decisions reveal a reckless corporate culture, seemingly still driven by the original motto of moving fast and breaking things.

Now, imagine those same values applied to an AI that knows your deepest insecurities, health concerns and personal challenges – all while having the ability to subtly influence your decisions through conversational manipulation.

The potential for harm extends beyond individual consumers. While there’s no evidence that Meta AI is being used for manipulation, it has such capacity.

For example, the chatbot could become a tool for pushing political content or shaping public discourse through the algorithmic amplification of certain viewpoints. Meta has played a role in propagating misinformation in the past, and recently made the decision to discontinue fact-checking across its platforms.

The risk of chatbot-driven manipulation is also increased now that AI safety regulations are being scaled back in the United States.

Lack of privacy is a choice

AI assistants are not inherently harmful. Other companies protect user privacy by choosing to generate revenue primarily through subscriptions rather than data harvesting. Responsible AI can and does exist without compromising user welfare for corporate profit.

As AI becomes increasingly integrated into our daily lives, the choices companies make about business models and data practices will have profound implications.

Meta’s decision to offer a free AI chatbot while reportedly lowering safety guardrails sets a low ethical standard. By embracing its advertising-based business model for something as intimate as an AI companion, Meta has created not just a product, but a surveillance system that can extract unprecedented levels of personal information.

Before inviting Meta AI to become your digital confidant, consider the true cost of this “free” service. In an era where data has become the most valuable commodity, the price you pay might be far higher than you realise.

As the old adage goes, if you’re not paying for the product, you are the product – and Meta’s new chatbot might be the most sophisticated product harvester yet created.

When Meta AI says it is “built to get to know you”, we should take it at its word and proceed with appropriate caution.The Conversation

Uri Gal, Professor in Business Information Systems, University of Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Physicists at the Large Hadron Collider turned lead into gold – by accident

Sunny Young / Unsplash
Ulrik EgedeMonash University

Medieval alchemists dreamed of transmuting lead into gold. Today, we know that lead and gold are different elements, and no amount of chemistry can turn one into the other.

But our modern knowledge tells us the basic difference between an atom of lead and an atom of gold: the lead atom contains exactly three more protons. So can we create a gold atom by simply pulling three protons out of a lead atom?

As it turns out, we can. But it’s not easy.

While smashing lead atoms into each other at extremely high speeds in an effort to mimic the state of the universe just after the Big Bang, physicists working on the ALICE experiment at the Large Hadron Collider in Switzerland incidentally produced small amounts of gold. Extremely small amounts, in fact: a total of some 29 trillionths of a gram.

How to steal a proton

Protons are found in the nucleus of an atom. How can they be pulled out?

Well, protons have an electric charge, which means an electric field can pull or push them around. Placing an atomic nucleus in an electric field could do it.

However, nuclei are held together by a very strong force with a very short range, imaginatively known as the strong nuclear force. This means an extremely powerful electric field is required to pull out protons – about a million times stronger than the electric fields that create lightning bolts in the atmosphere.

The way the scientists created this field was to fire beams of lead nuclei at each other at incredibly high speeds – almost the speed of light.

The magic of a near-miss

When the lead nuclei have a head-on collision, the strong nuclear force comes into play and they end up getting completely destroyed. But more commonly the nuclei have a near miss, and only affect each other via the electromagnetic force.

The strength of an electric field drops off very quickly as you move away from an object with an electric charge (such as a proton). But at very short distances, even a tiny charge can create a very strong field.

So when one lead nucleus just grazes past another, the electric field between them is huge. The rapidly changing field between the nuclei makes them vibrate and occasionally spit out some protons. If one of them spits out exactly three protons, the lead nucleus has turned into gold.

Counting protons

So if you have turned a lead atom into gold, how do you know? In the ALICE experiment, they use special detectors called zero-degree calorimeters to count the protons stripped out of the lead nuclei.

They can’t observe the gold nuclei themselves, so they only know about them indirectly.

The ALICE scientists calculate that, while they are colliding beams of lead nuclei, they produce about 89,000 gold nuclei per second. They also observed the production of other elements: thallium, which is what you get when you take one proton from lead, as well as mercury (two protons).

An alchemical nuisance

Once a lead nucleus has transformed by losing protons, it is no longer on the perfect orbit that keeps it circulating inside the vacuum beam pipe of the Large Hadron Collider. In a matter of microseconds it will collide with the walls.

This effect makes the beam less intense over time. So for scientists, the production of gold at the collider is in fact more of a nuisance than a blessing.

However, understanding this accidental alchemy is essential for making sense of experiments – and for designing the even bigger experiments of the future.The Conversation

Ulrik Egede, Professor of Physics, Monash University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Comet, rocket, space junk or meteor? Here’s how to tell your fireballs apart

A blaze of light streaks across the sky, but what is it? Wendy Miller/FlickrCC BY-NC-ND
Michael J. I. BrownMonash University

There’s a blaze of light across the sky! A fireball is seen by thousands, and mobile phone and dashcam footage soon appears on social media.

But what have people just seen? A mix of social media hashtags suggests confusion about what has streaked overhead. Was it a Soviet Venus probe? Was it one of Elon Musk’s satellites or rockets? Was it a meteor? Was it a comet?

While these objects have some similarities, there are crucial differences that can help us work out what just passed over our heads.

Shooting stars, meteors and comets

Shooting stars can often be seen on dark, clear nights in the countryside as brief flashes of light travelling across the sky. Usually, they are gone in just a second or two.

A bright shooting star with the Milky Way in the background
To capture a shooting star with this level of detail, your camera settings need to be just right, because they are very brief flashes of light. Andrew Xu/FlickrCC BY-NC-ND

Shooting “stars” are not stars, of course. They are produced by dust and pebbles burning up high in the atmosphere, typically above 50km in altitude. Comets are often a source of this dust, and regular showers of shooting stars happen when Earth travels through comets’ orbits.

Sometimes shooting stars burn with colours that reflect their composition – including iron, magnesium and calcium.

Meteors and shooting stars are actually the same thing. But when people talk about meteors, they often mean bigger and brighter events – bolides. Bolides result from rocks and boulders plunging into Earth’s atmosphere, resulting in bright flashes of light that can outshine all the stars and planets in the night sky.

Bolides can reach the lower atmosphere and sometimes produce audible sonic booms. Occasionally pieces of the bolide – meteorites – even make it to Earth’s surface.

The Chelyabinsk fireball was a bolide.

While bolides can survive longer than shooting stars, they also don’t last for long. As they are initially travelling at tens of kilometres per second, they don’t take long to traverse the atmosphere.

The Chelyabinsk meteor, the largest bolide known to impact Earth in over a century, shone brightly for only 20 seconds or so.

If you see something blaze across the sky, it almost certainly isn’t a comet. Comets are so far away from us that their vast speeds are imperceptible to the human eye. Furthermore, while comets are sometimes depicted as fiery, their glow is more subtle.

Space junk

Maybe the bright flash you just saw was space junk? Perhaps. The number of orbital rocket launches and satellites has increased rapidly in recent years, and this has resulted in some spectacular reentries, which are often discarded rocket stages.

Like meteors, space junk travels at vast speeds as it travels through the atmosphere and it begins burning up spectacularly. Also like meteors, you can see colours indicative of the materials burning up, such as steel and aluminium. However, there are a few things that distinguish space junk from meteors.

When rockets and satellites are launched into orbit, they typically travel along paths that roughly follow Earth’s curvature. So when space junk begins to enter the atmosphere, it’s often travelling almost horizontally.

Space junk also travels at slower speeds than shooting stars and meteorites, entering Earth’s atmosphere at roughly 8km/s rather than tens of kilometres per second.

Because of these factors, space junk can take minutes to enter the atmosphere and travels hundreds of kilometres in the process. Over this time, the space junk will slow down and break up into pieces, and the more solidly constructed parts might make it down to Earth.

The slower pace of space junk fireballs gives people time to grab phones, take footage and post on social media, perhaps with a little colourful commentary added for good measure.

A Russian rocket reenters the atmosphere over south eastern Australia.

Rockets

While space junk can produce a light show, rockets can also put on amazing displays. If you happen to be near Cape Canaveral or Vandenberg Space Force Base in the United States, or Wairoa in Aotearoa New Zealand, then it’s not unexpected to see a rocket launch. You get smoke, flames and thundering noise.

But in other parts of the world you may get a different view of rockets.

Rockets that bring satellites into our orbit accelerate to 8km/s. As they do, they travel many hundreds of kilometres at over 100km altitude. American satellite launches often travel near the coast, passing major cities including Los Angeles.

As rockets approach orbit, they are more subtle than the flames and noise of liftoff. Rockets produce plumes of exhaust gases that rapidly and silently expand in the vacuum of space.

While these plumes are typically seen near launch sites, they can be visible elsewhere, too.

Sometimes rocket engines are ignited after reaching an initial orbit to boost satellites to higher orbits, send probes into the Solar System or slow rockets down for reentry. Rockets may also vent excess fuel into space, again producing plumes or spirals of gases. While not necessarily a common occurrence, these have been seen all over the world.

A deorbit burn over Western Europe.

Do look up

There’s a lot to see in the night sky – the familiar Moon, stars and planets. But there’s the unexpected, too – something blazing across the sky in minutes or even mere seconds. While fireballs may be puzzling at first, they are often recognisable and we can figure out what we’ve just witnessed.

Have you had the good fortune to see a fireball for yourself? If not, pop outside on a clear dark night. Perhaps you will see something unexpected.The Conversation

Michael J. I. Brown, Associate Professor in Astronomy, Monash University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Forest home of ‘polar dinosaurs’ 120 million years ago in southern Australia recreated in detail for the first time

Artwork © Bob Nicholls 2024
Vera KorasidisThe University of Melbourne

Roughly 140 million to 100 million years ago, the piece of land that is modern day Australia was located much further south on Earth. In fact, what is now Victoria was once within the polar circle, up to 80 degrees south of the equator and shrouded in darkness for months at a time.

Despite these harsh conditions, dinosaurs thrived here, leaving behind evidence of their existence at various palaeontological sites.

For decades, scientists have come to these sites to study the rocks containing the bones of these ancient creatures in order to better understand them.

My new research with palynologist Barbara Wagstaff, published in Alcheringa, builds on existing knowledge by using plant fossils from bone-bearing sites in the region to explain how the forests these dinosaurs lived in evolved – and, for the first time, illustrating them in detail.

One of the warmest periods on Earth

The Early Cretaceous epoch – between roughly 140 million and 100 million years ago – represents one of the warmest periods in the last half a billion years of Earth’s history. The sustained warmth was a result of increased volcanic activity, which released large quantities of carbon dioxide levels into the atmosphere.

The sustained warmth resulted in no polar ice caps, high sea levels and flooded continents.

The geographic distribution of land masses was also very different back then. The supercontinent Gondwana, in which most of the southern continents we know today were clumped into a single landmass, had only just started to break apart. At the time, southernmost Australia was in the polar circle.

The dinosaurs that lived in this region are known as “polar dinosaurs”. They included small ornithopods (plant-eaters with beaks and cheeks full of teeth) and therapods (carnivorous and predatory dinosaurs).

A map of Earth with the continents clustered together.
A map of Earth during the Early Cretaceous period 120 million years ago, with Australia seen in the polar region. Scotese, Christopher R; Vérard, Christian; Burgener, Landon; Elling, Reece P.; Kocsis, Ádám T/Wikipedia

Building a picture of ancient plants

For decades, palaeontologists have been studying rocks from Victorian sites. To establish the age of the recovered dinosaur bones, we’ve needed the expertise of palynologists – palaeontologists who study microscopic fossil spores and pollen produced by plants.

Palynologists identified key species that they dissolved out of rocks. They deduced the dinosaur bones ranged in age from 130 to 100 million years old.

At the same time they were carefully recording all the microscopic spores and pollen they saw in the slides to build a picture of the plants through the Early Cretaceous period.

A planet-altering transition

The transition from a world without flowers to one with flowers has fascinated scientists for centuries, most famously Charles Darwin who labelled them “an abominable mystery”. More importantly, it also forever changed our planet.

Shortly after their first appearance approximately 132 million years ago, albeit in the southern portion of the supercontinent Laurasia, we see an explosive radiation of flowering plants not only in our new record from Victoria, but also globally.

What fuelled the evolution and rapid global expansion of flowering plants that dominate the Australian landscape today?

Our new research suggests warmer conditions helped flowering plants migrate across the globe and colonise understorey habitats shortly after evolving. Increased competition also contributed to the turnover in understorey flora, with flowering plants outcompeting lycophytes in rapidly colonising braided river channels after flooding events.

The appearance of flowering plants in the landscape resulted in the extinction of numerous understorey plants (in particular ferns) with a long fossil record.

As a result, by 100 million years ago, the forests of Victoria included an open conifer-dominated forest canopy. The subcanopy beneath was made up of seed ferns and ferns. Flowering plants and ferns featured in the understorey, alongside liverworts, hornworts, lycophytes and sphagnum-like mosses.

Illustration of a forest full of ferns.
By 100 million years ago, the canopy of forests of Victoria was dominated by conifers. Artwork © Bob Nicholls 2024

Diversifying in a warming world

High carbon dioxide levels in the past made the planet warmer. This is consistent with what’s happening today. As a result of these warmer conditions cool-temperate forests thrived in the polar circle.

For flowering plants, the warmer conditions provided an opportunity to diversify in an increasingly warm world. However, not all plants adapted to the warming world, with many understorey floras, including ferns, becoming extinct.

The fossil record provides crucial insights into how life will respond to predicted future climate conditions because these have occurred before in Earth’s history.

Knowing this history is crucial to our response to the current climate change challenge.

Some exciting places to visit to see fossils in Australia include Eric the Red West dig site in the Otway Ranges, Inverloch’s Dinosaur Dreaming dig site in Victoria, the Dinosaur Trail along the Queensland towns of Hughenden, Richmond and Winton, and sauropod footprints in Western Australia at Gantheaume Point.The Conversation

Vera Korasidis, Lecturer in Environmental Geoscience, The University of Melbourne

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Prof. Richard West AM Commences 11th Term as Palm Beach Whale Beach Association President

Congratulations to Richard West who was elected for yet another term as the president of the Palm Beach- Whale Beach Association, the local residents group, at the AGM held on Tuesday May 13th.

The news service has been fortunate to speak with Prof. West for his Profile which will run, once he has vetted the transcript, shortly.

After presenting his report, Beverlie Farrelly, as this year's Guest Speaker, was interviewed by PBWBA Secretary Robert Mackinnon, a gentleman with a passion for local history, who is currently working on the Association's History - a legacy of looking after the local community and environment that stretches over 109 years.

That all runs as this week's Profile.

Robert presents an Australian flowers bouquet - 'my favourites' said Beverlie - as a thank you

Prof. West paid tribute to Virginia Christensen at this year's AGM, stepping down after years as a Vice-President, although she will remain active as a member.

Gordon Lang will be taking up the VP role alongside fellow VP Frank Edgell-Bush AM, who continues to represent the community and its residents.

Frank Edgell-Bush received his AM in the 2018 Queens' Birthday Honours List  'For significant service to business, particularly to improving standards of corporate governance across the private, public and not-for-profit sectors.'

On Monday May 26th the PBWBA will host a special Guest Speaker from the NSW State Library on the “PIX: Palm Beach Expose” at their monthly coffee meeting - sure to be a great insight into the Palm Beach of the 1930's. The news service has already run some of these great photos and stories as part of Palm Beach history pages, but the State Library of NSW has a wonderful team of researchers and archivists who no doubt will provide some brilliant insights. 

That will run from 10.30am at The Pacific Club for members.

The Palm Beach & Whale Beach Association is a not-for-profit, non-political organisation of volunteer residents who are passionate about keeping our area unique, and keeping the local council and state government accountable. 

Their objective (from their Constitution) is:

“to preserve and enhance the natural beauty of the area and to protect the local amenity by promoting proper planning of all developments and by expressing positively, in appropriate quarters, the views of residents.” 

They welcome new members from the community; click here to become a member of the Association or find out more about membership here.

PBWBA Committee

VALE Don Mitchell

We extend our deepest sympathy to the family and friends of Avalon Beach SLSC Life Member, Don Mitchell, who passed away early Tuesday May 13 2025.  

Don (or ‘Mulga’ as he was often called) was awarded his Bronze Medallion during the 1953/54 season. Don was Patrol Captain during the 1958/59 season and was a keen carnival competitor. 



In 1961 John Campbell, John Fuller, Bob Head and Warren Mitchell headed to Cornwall in the UK to assist and instruct locals in surf life saving. 

On 2 November 1969 Don joined his brother, Life Member Warren Mitchell OAM, as Bowman in the first test run of an IRB in Australian waters, at Avalon Beach. 

 The first surf rescue IRB trial: Avalon Beach, 2 November 1969. Driver: Warren Mitchell, OAM, Life Member, Avalon Beach SLSC. Crew: Don Mitchell, Life Member, Avalon Beach SLSC 

In 2019 Don travelled up from Tasmania to also represent his brother (who still lives in the UK) at the unveiling of the plaque commemorating 50 years of the IRB at its birth-place, Avalon Beach.  

Don Mitchell at IRB plaque unveiling - photo by Michael Mannington OAM for PON

Don received his Life Membership of the Club in 1986. 
Vale Don.

Avalon Beach SLSC

A Tribute of Don's service to our community and his passion for IRB's runs as this week's Aquatics Feature, as penned by his fellow ABSLSC Life Members.

 John Towner, John Greaves, Don Mitchell, Bob Head and Jim Burgess at Avalon Beach SLSC 90th Anniversary Celebrations.

New chronic pain therapy retrains the brain to process emotions

By Meliisa Lyne, UNSW
UNSW and NeuRA researchers have created an effective therapy for chronic pain that reduces pain intensity by focusing on emotional regulation.

A new study led by UNSW Sydney and Neuroscience Research Australia (NeuRA) shows that targeting emotional processing is key to treating and managing chronic pain.

The study is based on a randomised controlled trial led by Professor Sylvia Gustin and Dr Nell Norman-Nott, both from UNSW and NeuRA. Along with a team at NeuRA’s Centre for Pain IMPACT, they published their results, today in JAMA Network Open.

The trial showed that enhancing the brain’s capacity for emotional processing through therapeutic intervention is an effective approach to managing chronic pain.

“By changing how we manage emotions, it is possible to change the experience of pain itself,” Prof. Gustin says. “This is not just a temporary relief but a potential long-term improvement in quality of life for those affected by chronic pain.”

Prof. Gustin and Dr Norman-Nott developed Pain and Emotion Therapy — a novel and emerging eHealth intervention. The therapy aims to retrain the brain to more easily process emotions by improving an individual's ability to deescalate negative emotions and enhance positive ones.

Nell Norman-Nott (left) and Sylvia Gustin (right) created Pain and Emotion Therapy to be accessible to all. Photo: Jake Willis, UNSW Media

The trial took place from March 2023 to September 2024 and focused on the experiences of 89 people with chronic pain. The authors say the results could lead to new ways of treating chronic pain, emphasising the profound impact of emotional health on physical wellbeing.

The online therapy, made available through the trial, is the first of its kind, delivered through eight group-based therapist-guided sessions by video conference across Australia. Participants also used an app and handbook for self-learning. The control group continued their usual treatment.

Prof. Gustin says those who received the new treatment reported better emotional regulation as well as pain reduction equal to a 10-point decrease on a 100-point scale for pain intensity within a six-month follow up.

"This shows not only a clinical improvement, but one that makes a noticeable difference in the daily lives of the people affected," she says.

Understanding chronic pain
Chronic pain, defined as pain lasting longer than three months, affects around 30% of people globally. The economic costs are estimated to be higher than that of heart disease, cancer and diabetes combined.

Declining mental health is also widespread, with up to 80% of people with chronic pain experiencing depression and anxiety. In addition, suicide rates are two to three times higher than those of the general population.

“A key factor in disease progression is the inability to regulate negative emotions,” Prof. Gustin says. “This is disrupted by the impact of persistent pain on the brain’s emotional circuitry. The resulting emotion dysregulation is an ill-understood and undertreated aspect of chronic pain, which we addressed in this trial.”

Study participant Jabez Allies has had chronic back pain for 10 years. She says chronic pain affects her emotions.

“It makes me feel more worried, moody and frustrated, which in turn affects my pain. The more negative emotions I have, the worse my pain is, and vice versa,” she says.

Prof. Gustin says this cycle of worsening pain and increasing negative emotions is a common presentation.

“It shows us that chronic pain really does have a considerable effect on how people feel and the level of pain they experience.”

A boost to traditional treatments
Dr Norman Nott says that in the past 50–60 years, the model of chronic pain has shifted focus.

“We’ve gone from purely medical and biological approaches to a more holistic treatment model that includes addressing social and psychological experiences,” Dr Norman Nott says.

She says while prescription and non-prescription pain medications continue to play an important role in treatment, they have limitations.

“I’m thinking particularly of side effects and diminishing efficacy over time. Opioids, specifically, present considerable issues with dependency and declining effectiveness.”

She says, “though psychological therapies come with few side effects, we know there are still improvements needed, particularly to address the key mental health concerns of people with chronic pain, such as identifying and expressing emotions, and calming down emotional reactiveness.

“The focus on training for emotional regulation appears to be the missing piece of the jigsaw puzzle of chronic pain treatment.

“This is why we created this therapy – to focus on emotion processing by improving how people manage their emotions.”

Richard Beaumont is a participant who has had cancer pain and chronic lower back pain for 11 years. He says he frequently gets pain that reaches an eight or nine out of 10.

“After receiving Pain and Emotion Therapy I can bring this right down to a four or five just by calming the farm,” he says.

Targeting the emotional brain
“Previous research shows us that the brain can be trained to identify negative emotions and regulate them,” Prof. Gustin says. “With this trial we can now see that engaging emotion regulation skills can reduce the intensity of pain and improve several other factors such as depression, anxiety and sleep problems.”

Dr Norman-Nott says this new therapy works by teaching participants that we need emotions in our lives.

“Often when we live with chronic pain for many years, negative emotions get pushed down and positive emotions become harder to identify,” Dr Norman-Nott says.

“We focus on helping to identify and bring up those negative emotions so that they can be acknowledged and resolved – while also realising the potential positive aspects of life and setting goals for the future.”

Accessible treatment for all
The accessibility of psychological treatment for chronic pain is a key point, of governmental concern.

The progression and management of the disease are further aggravated by long wait times and limited healthcare services outside of capital cities.

“Our online treatment delivery reduced barriers by making it accessible to those who struggle with mobility, social anxiety, or physical exhaustion from travelling to in-person appointments,” Dr Norman-Nott says.

“It enabled them to participate from every state in Australia, including many from remote and regional locations.

“Participants attended the online sessions from their homes, or wherever it was comfortable for them, so they could train their emotion regulation skills when it suited them via the customised app and workbook.”

The next step for rolling out Pain and Emotion Therapy is a larger clinical trial supported by the Medical Research Future Fund, due to start in 2026.

The researchers are now calling for participants to register their interest in the trial.

“The results we've seen so far are a big improvement in our understanding of chronic pain, showing how important it is to treat both the body and emotions together,” says Prof. Gustin.

Dementia risk depends on more than lifestyle factors. Overstating this can cause stigma and blame

Shvets Production/Pexels
Joyce SietteWestern Sydney University and Gilbert KnaggsUniversity of Sydney

As public awareness of dementia grows, so too does the appetite for prevention. Global headlines tout the benefits of exercisediet, brain training and social activity in reducing dementia risk.

In recent years, medical journals have amplified this message to encourage people to take control of their cognitive futures through lifestyle change. Last year, The Lancet estimated up to 45% of dementia cases worldwide could theoretically be delayed or prevented by addressing modifiable risk factors.

These messages are undeniably hopeful. They suggest personal effort, combined with emerging scientific evidence, can help to overcome a disease long seen as inevitable.

But public health messaging that focuses too narrowly on behaviour may be misleading and potentially harmful, as we argue in The Lancet.

This can lead to a two-tiered system, where affluent people are praised for their proactive brain health, while marginalised groups face barriers to participation and are blamed for their perceived inaction.

What is dementia and what causes it?

Dementia is a neurocognitive disorder and describes conditions that affect memory, thinking and the ability to do everyday tasks. Alzheimer’s disease is the most common type, but there are others such as vascular and Lewy body dementia.

It happens when brain cells become damaged and stop communicating properly. This can cause confusion, forgetfulness and changes in behaviour or mood.

Dementia is linked to some of our deepest cultural fears: the limits of autonomy, dependency on others, the stigma of being diagnosed and the unknown.

So, what increases your risk of dementia? Some risk factors can’t be changed. Age is the biggest one. Family history and certain genes, such as APOE-e4, also raise risk.

But many risk factors are modifiable, which means we can do something about them. Obesity, high cholesterol and high blood pressure raise your risk. Low levels of exercise or education can also increase the chances of developing dementia.

The science behind prevention

The science of dementia prevention has evolved significantly over the past decade. Lifestyle trials, from FinlandFranceAustralia and the United States are exploring whether combinations of diet, physical activity, cognitive training and managing cardiovascular risk (high blood pressure, cholesterol, obesity and smoking) can reduce dementia risk.

The Finnish study, the most widely cited of these, demonstrated modest but meaningful cognitive benefits in older adults at risk for dementia after a two-year lifestyle intervention.

Its success has spurred a wave of similar studies globally (to date, more than 40 trials). Collectively, these trials provide a scientific foundation for an increasingly popular public health message: brain health tomorrow is linked to healthy behaviours today.

New possibilities for preventing dementia are certainly promising. However, the translation of these findings into broad public campaigns is where complexity, and ethical tension, emerges.

Dementia risk is related to socioeconomic disadvantage

Dementia risk is also determined by a complex array of extrinsic factors – conditions outside our control – that are unevenly distributed across society: air quality, ethnicity, gender, occupation, the built environment.

These factors influence not just if, but when, dementia might develop.

Dementia prevalence is disproportionately higher in communities facing social disadvantage partly because modifiable risk factors such as diabetes, obesity and low education are also more common in these areas.

Car exhaust fumes
Poor air quality also affects dementia risk, with some communities disproportionately affected. Theplantetspeaks/Pexels

But there’s another layer: access. The same communities at greater risk often lack access to the very interventions meant to reduce that risk.

Low-income neighbourhoods may have fewer green spaces, safe walking paths, or affordable, healthy food. They also face higher levels of pollutionnoise and chronic stress. All of which can damage brain health.

Not everyone can access the kinds of healthy lifestyles to counteract dementia risks. Telling people to eat a Mediterranean diet or join a gym may be a cold comfort for those without the money, time, services or mobility to do so.

Positioning dementia as something people can avoid also risks implying dementia is something individuals can fail to prevent. This could reinforce existing narratives which equate disease in later life to poor lifestyle choices rather than social inequity.

So how do we do better?

First, prevention messaging must be framed within a social and cultural context.

This means acknowledging and addressing barriers such as food insecurity, lack of green space, caregiver stress and health system distrust.

Messages must be co-created with communities, not imposed on them, and have a visual, motivating appeal.

Second, we must shift from individualistic narratives to collective responsibility. Brain health should be supported through public infrastructure, equitable access to care, and culturally sensitive health promotion.

Cyclists talk, holding their bikes on a beach-front path
Brain health should be supported through infrastructure. Centre for Ageing Better/Unsplash

Prevention doesn’t just happen in the home. It also happens in preschoolsschoolsshopping centres, clinics, parks and policy rooms.

Finally, we need to reframe success. Preventing dementia is a worthy goal, but so is ensuring dignity, inclusion and care for people who live with it. A just approach to brain health must do both.

The next generation of dementia messaging must be not only evidence-based, but also equity-focused. It should strive to educate without shaming, to empower without excluding, and to promote brain health in ways that honour the realities of ageing.The Conversation

Joyce Siette, Associate Professor | Deputy Director, The MARCS Institute, Western Sydney University and Gilbert Knaggs, Sociology PhD Candidate, University of Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Australia’s ‘inconvenient’ women writers blazed a trail through the 20th century

Katharine Susannah Prichard, Miles Franklin, Kylie Tennant, Mary Gilmore, Marjorie Barnard and Pamela Travers. Public domain, Wikimedia Commons
Anthea TaylorUniversity of Sydney

In Inconvenient Women, Jacqueline Kent shines a spotlight on some of Australia’s most radical and influential writers.

For Kent, these iconic women were “inconvenient” in many ways. They pursued careers as journalists, poets and novelists at times when many women were relegated to the private sphere. They spoke out against injustices, despite the personal cost. They lived unconventional lives, personally and professionally. And they embodied alternative forms of womanhood.


Review: Inconvenient Women: Australian Radical Writers 1900-1970 – Jacqueline Kent (NewSouth)


The limits of the “wave” metaphor to categorise periods of feminist activism are well known. Kent explicitly seeks to recentre women who were in between the “waves” – that is, she is interested in those who came after the campaigns for women’s suffrage during the so-called “first wave”, but predated the revitalisation of Western feminism in the “second wave” of the 1970s.

These women writers clearly laid some important foundations for later feminist activists, especially those who called for more radical social upheaval.

The book’s subtitle – “Australian radical writers” – clarifies its focus. Kent does not explicitly discuss the criteria for inclusion, but it becomes clear that “radical” is shorthand for the most left-leaning women writers and activists in the first two thirds of the 20th century.

Accordingly, much of the book is preoccupied with tracing their varied engagement with political ideas and organisations. As Kent clarifies in the book’s first few pages: “These were all women who used their power with words in support of their beliefs, and to question and change elements of the world they knew.”

Kent makes it clear, however, that this is a “joint biography”, not a work of history or literary criticism. Inconvenient Women focuses on how these women lived and how their literary contributions were informed – and indeed made possible – by their more unorthodox ways of being and living, rather than on the writing itself.

Kent puts it this way:

All these women were brave. Common to them all were unquenchable curiosity, fearlessness and willingness to take risks – with their lives, with their relationships, with the work they did.

Challenging norms

Written in an engaging and accessible style for a broad audience, Kent’s ambitious group biography places these formidable women at the forefront of Australia’s literary, cultural and political history. Spanning a period of 70 years, Kent maps the cultural and political shifts that enabled and constrained these women writers. Their activism took different forms across different periods, but for all of them writing was a key tool in their political arsenal.

The book’s five-part structure is chronological. Part one covers Federation, the granting of suffrage, and the first world war. It discusses a number of 20th-century writers who honed their skills in the journalistic field before publishing award-winning and often controversial novels.

Kent begins with journalist, poet and novelist Mary Gilmore. For more than two decades, from 1908 to 1931, Gilmore used the Women’s Page in the socialist magazine Worker to advocate for a mother’s allowance, support women who wished to eschew marriage, and criticise Christianity for its assumptions about women’s innate inferiority.

These ideas challenged the gender norms of the day, though in other respects, as Kent shows, Gilmore did little to disrupt prevailing ideologies. She supported the White Australia policy, for example.

In this opening section, Kent introduces several other women who return at various points in the biography, including Katharine Susannah PrichardMiles FranklinMarjorie Barnard and New Zealand-born novelist Jean Devanny.

Kent reflects upon the barriers encountered by these pioneering women authors. Devanny’s 1926 novel The Butcher Shop, which condemned the subservience of women in marriage, was the first book to be banned in Australia. Other lesser-known women whose work “hovered at the border of what was acceptable” included Jean CampbellDoris Kerr and Marjorie Clark, who wrote under the pseudonym “Georgia Rivers”.

Kent’s commitment to reevaluating women writers who have not been foregrounded in literary or cultural history, such as poet Marie Pitt, is laudable. However, some of these figures – Marion Knowles and Elinor Mordaunt (the pen name of Evelyn May Clowes), for example – are only given short paragraphs. This reclamation is an important feature of the book, and I wanted to read more about these historically marginalised women.

Political dangers

Inconvenient Women is well researched and given texture through a variety of sources, including correspondence between some of these writers. Kent establishes how the subversive politics of her subjects informed their lives and their writing, and provides important insights into the communities they formed.

Marjorie Barnard c.1936. State Library of New South Wales, Public domain, via Wikimedia Commons

Many of these women supported each other across their often lengthy careers. Examining the intricate webs of connection and fruitful collaborative relationships – such as that between Marjorie Barnard and Flora Eldershaw, which produced novels, plays, short stories and essays – Kent foregrounds the intimacies of those who moved in literary and left political circles across the 20th century. This is one of the strengths of a group biography as a way of reframing histories from which women have been excluded.

At times, the focus turns to key male figures, such as journalist and communist activist Egon Kisch and Guido Barrachi, who was integral to the establishment of the Australian Communist Party and romantically involved with women writers such as Lesbia Harford and Betty Roland. This can distract from the book’s professed goal, though I acknowledge Kent’s introductory comment that “men figure in this story, too, both as antagonists and supporters”.

The extent to which the women’s writing overtly engaged with political issues varied, as did their positions on communism. While Prichard and Christina Stead wholeheartedly endorsed it, writer and critic Nettie Palmer appeared more ambivalent.

The second part of Inconvenient Women covers visits to the Soviet Union in the 1930s by Roland, Prichard, and Pamela Travers, the Australian-born author of Mary Poppins. Later in the decade, Palmer and Stead travelled to Spain, becoming caught up in the civil war and the protests against fascism. For Palmer, the experience cemented the importance of art as a “weapon”.

Continuing the book’s interest in women who may have been overlooked, Kent shows how Australian war correspondents, such as Women’s Weekly reporter Adele “Tilly” Shelton-Smith and Lorraine Stumm from the Daily Mail in England, played an important role during this tumultuous time.

Katharine Susannah Prichard c.1928. May Moore, Public domain, via Wikimedia Commons

Communism, Kent remarks, “influenced the work of some of Australia’s best women writers, whether they followed the Party or not”. This left them in vulnerable positions when war broke out in 1939. The third section of Inconvenient Woman considers how they responded to the second world war, personally and professionally. For many of them, this meant dealing with censorship, state surveillance and police raids on their homes.

To be a supporter of the left in the 1930s and 1940s, especially as a woman, could come at grave cost. Police raided Prichard’s house; Devanny was also subject to surveillance. As evidence of the oppressive political climate, Kent discusses how Dymphna Cusack, a teacher in inner-city Sydney, was transferred to Bathurst after the publication of Jungfrau (1936), her controversial novel exploring female sexuality. There were dangers in transgressing social mores.

As Kent shows, surveillance continued into the 1950s. Writers were increasingly subject to monitoring by ASIO. This included those who had received grants from the Commonwealth Literary Fund, such as Kylie Tennant, who returned the money after conservative parliamentarian Bill Wentworth publicly labelled her a communist.

The difficulties of publishing in such an environment, especially for women, are brought into sharp relief throughout the book. In the fourth section, which covers the years 1945–60, Kent addresses the difficulties experienced by women seeking to engage with the androcentric publishing industry. This is exemplified by the protracted publication journey of Come in Spinner (1951), co-written by Cusack and Florence James, which won a prize as an unpublished manuscript in 1946, only for its publication deal to be withdrawn. It eventually appeared five years later in an expurgated version.

Kent also emphasises how these women sought to ensure that writing be taken seriously as a form of labour. Many were involved in establishing and maintaining writers’ organisations. Gilmore and journalist Connie Robertson set up the Society of Women Writers in 1925, which was followed a few years later by a broader association, the Fellowship of Australian Writers, with Gilmore again at the forefront. Women were highly active, too, in the Australian Society of Authors, established in 1963 and still thriving today.

A formidable legacy

Despite living unconventional lives, Kent suggests many of these writers were not overt in their feminism. Dorothy Hewett’s social realist novel Bobbin’ Up represents a shift in this regard. Published in 1959, it is closer to the burgeoning modern women’s movement than any other literary text considered in the book.

Given certain voices have historically been privileged over others, it is unsurprising that the majority of the women in this book are white and heterosexual. A little more reflection on the conditions that made their careers possible could have further illuminated how some “inconvenient” women in Australia, as elsewhere, have always been seen as more acceptable than others.

There is, nevertheless, an important discussion of Indigenous women writers and activists, including the poet Oodgeroo Noonuccal (Kath Walker) and the activist and writer Faith Bandler, in the book’s fifth and final section.

Inconvenient Women lacks a conclusion. Its account stops before the 1970s, a turbulent time of social and political change, when “inconvenient women” became more visible than at any other time in Australian history. Some additional gesturing towards subsequent developments might have given a stronger sense of how the foundations laid by these trailblazing women were built upon by second wave writers-as-activists, such as Germaine Greer and Anne Summers.

At different points in the book, I found myself wishing for further reflection on certain figures and the reception of their work. But this is a limitation of the group biography sub-genre rather than Kent’s writing. Inconvenient Women may function as an introduction for some readers, sparking curiosity about these remarkable women and a desire to seek out their books, plays and poems. For others, it might illuminate connections between these figures, or provide a deeper understanding of their cultural and historical contexts.

Whatever the case, Kent urges us to acknowledge and reconsider the legacy of these formidable Australian women. Each of them, in their own way, models what it is to be an “inconvenient” woman – something we certainly need now, perhaps more than ever.The Conversation

Anthea Taylor, Associate Professor, Gender and Cultural Studies, University of Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Surf Beach: 1965

From the Film Australia Collection. Made by the Commonwealth Film Unit 1965. Directed by Bern Gandy. 

From beach inspectors watching for danger to the ice cream vendors helping people cool down, Australia’s major beaches in summer have the hustle and bustle of a small town. Surf Beach looks at the proud tradition of surf lifesavers, who give up their weekends voluntarily to patrol our beaches, keeping ordinary folks safe from disaster. Witness the thrilling rescue of a young woman who has got herself into trouble, and the military precision of the surf lifesavers as they bring her back into shore. 

The highlight of the season is the Surf Life Saving Championships – a marvel of pageantry as surf lifesaving clubs from across Sydney march proudly along the beach, led by the UNSW Regiment brass band. 

Beautifully shot and set to a swinging soundtrack, Surf Beach pays tribute to an Australian icon: the beach.

Intergenerational Opportunity

Calling all adults 65+: Opportunity to Participate in a FREE Intergenerational Playgroup Program.

Incredible opportunity for older adults (65+) to participate in an Intergenerational Program under the “INTEGRITY” research trial, bringing adults and pre-school-aged children together for fun-filled and engaging activities, hoping to improve health and wellbeing outcomes for all.

Similar to the playgroup seen on the ABC Program 'Old People's Home for 4 Year Olds'.

Sites starting SOON and seeking older adults now include Terrey Hills and Dee Why preschools. This 20-week program involving 2-hour weekly sessions will be held at nearby local preschools throughout Sydney.

Eligibility requirements apply. Interested or want to know more? Call: 8052 4365, email integrity-study@georgeinstitute.org.au or visit https://redcap.link/integrity.trial.eoi

In conjunction with the University of NSW and The George Institute for Global Health.

ABN 90 085 953 331

Elanora Players Next production!

July 2025 Performance: The Great Divide

CAST
Barbara Hansen as Alex Whittle
Chris Richardson as Grace Delahunty
Miriam Gonzaga as Penny Poulter
Phoebe Brian as Rachel Poulter
Hans Wrang as Alan Bridger
Mike Radcliffe as Brian

PERFORMANCE DATES
Friday 11 Jul 7.30pm (Opening Night)*
Saturday 12 Jul 3pm & 7.30pm
Sunday 13 Jul 11am & 3pm
Friday 18 Jul 7.30pm
Saturday 19 Jul 1pm (note new times for last performances)
* Join us for complimentary wine and cheese after the show on Opening Night!

North Narrabeen Community Centre, 2-10 Woorarra Avenue, North Narrabeen.

TICKETS: $35, $28 concession
One complimentary ticket for bookings of 10 or more. Email admin@elanoraplayers.com.au for more info.
On sale now! 

AvPals 25th Year: Term Two Newport Sessions

You can book in and pay for sessions at Newport via the AvPals shop.

Please note the first session for Term Two, 'Outsmart the Hackers' to be held this coming Tuesday, May 6, 1.30 to 3pm, is a Free, all welcome and no booking required session.

Avalon Computer Pals (AVPALS) helps seniors learn and improve their computer and technology skills. Avpals is a not for profit organisation run by volunteers. Since 2000, we have helped thousands of seniors from complete beginners to people who need to improve or update their skills. We offer “one to one” personal tuition or special short courses. 

Small class workshops are run at the Newport Community Centre on Tuesday afternoons.

One-to-one training is provided at our rooms in Avalon, under the Maria Regina Catholic Church, 7 Central Road, Avalon.

Join us in learning 'how to' in our 25th year!

The AvPals shop for Newport short sessions is HERE
The rest of this terms workshop offerings are:

Don’t click without thinking – and 4 other ways to keep yourself safe from scams

tete_escape/Shutterstock
Meena JhaCQUniversity Australia

Think about how many things you have done online today. Paid a bill? Logged into your bank account? Used social media or spent time answering emails? Maybe you have used your phone to pay at a supermarket or train station.

We are all plugged in, and that’s not necessarily a bad thing. But with all these conveniences comes a growing risk many Australians are unprepared for: cyber crime.

According to the most recent cyber threat report by the Australian Cyber Security Centre, more than 87,000 reports of cybercrime were made in 2023-2024. That’s a report every six minutes. And that’s just what gets reported. Many people do not even realise they have been hacked or scammed until it’s too late.

Earlier this year, Scamwatch, run by the Australian Competition and Consumer Commission, revealed Australians lost nearly A$319 million to scams in 2024 alone. In a recent example, cyber criminals used stolen login details to hack several major superfunds in Australia and steal a collective A$500,000 of people’s retirement savings.

A big part of this worsening problem is poor “digital hygiene”. Here are five easy ways to improve yours.

First, what exactly is ‘digital hygiene’?

Just like brushing your teeth keeps cavities away, digital hygiene is all about keeping your online life clean, safe and protected from harm.

It is a simple idea: the better your habits when using technology, the harder it is for scammers or hackers to trick you or get access to your personal information.

It means being aware of what you are sharing, whom you are trusting, and how your devices are set up. Unfortunately, most of us are probably more hygienic in bathrooms than we are online.

How should you protect yourself?

Good news: you do not need to be a computer whizz to keep clean online. Here are five simple practical steps anyone can take:

1. Stop and think before clicking

Got an unexpected message from your bank asking you to verify your account? Or a text about a missed parcel delivery with a link? Scammers love urgency. It gets people to click before they think. Instead of rushing, pause.

Ask yourself: was I expecting this? Is the sender’s email or phone number legitimate? Do not click the link, go directly to the official website or app.

2. Use strong, unique passwords

Using your pet’s name or “123456” is not going to cut it. And if you reuse passwords across websites, a breach on one site means hackers can try the same password everywhere else. This is called a credential stuffing attack, and it is how the cyber attack on superannuation funds happened earlier this year.

The best move? Begin securing your online accounts by using a password manager and updating any reused passwords, prioritising your most sensitive accounts such as emails, banking and cloud storage first.

3. Turn on multi-factor authentication

Multi-factor authentication means you need something more than just a password to login, such as a code sent to your phone or an app such as Google Authenticator or Microsoft Authenticator.

It is a simple step that adds a powerful layer of protection. Even if someone guesses your password, they cannot log in without your second factor.

4. Update your apps and devices

Yes, those software updates are annoying, but they are important. Updates fix security holes that hackers can use. Make it automatic if you can, and do not ignore update prompts, especially for your operating systems such as Windows, iOS or Android. However, it is important to recognise that older devices often stop receiving updates because manufacturers stop supporting older models or are not developing updates for older devices as it can be costly.

Outdated software harbours known vulnerabilities that hackers actively can target. While keeping devices longer supports sustainability, there is a balance to strike. If your device no longer receives security updates, it may be safer to responsibly recycle it and invest in a newer supported model to maintain your digital safety.

5. Be mindful of what you share

Oversharing on social media makes you an easy target. Public posts that include your birthday, where you went to school, or your pet’s name can be used to guess security questions or build convincing fake messages. Think before you post – would a stranger need to know this?

A phone screen displaying icons of multiple social media platforms.
Oversharing on social media makes you an easy target for scammers. Cristian Dina/Shutterstock

What should I do if I have been hacked?

To check if your passwords have been leaked in a breach, you can use HaveIBeenPwned – a free tool trusted by security experts.

If you have been hacked, follow the tips provided by Australian Cyber Security Centre. For example, you should change all your passwords and passcodes and use software to scan for malware on your computer.

Need more help? Visit esafety.gov.au for practical guides, especially for parents, teachers and young people.

Digital hygiene is not a personal responsibility, it is a collective one. We are connected through emails, group chats, workplaces and social media. One weak link can put others at risk. Talk to your family and friends about the risk of scams and how to avoid them. The more we talk about this, the more normal and effective digital hygiene becomes.

Because just like washing your hands became second nature during the COVID-19 pandemic, keeping your online life clean should be a habit, not an afterthought.The Conversation

Meena Jha, Head Technology and Pedagogy Cluster CML-NET, CQUniversity Australia

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Meta’s new AI chatbot is yet another tool for harvesting data to potentially sell you stuff

Tony Lam Hoang/Unsplash
Uri GalUniversity of Sydney

Last week, Meta – the parent company of Facebook, Instagram, Threads and WhatsApp – unveiled a new “personal artificial intelligence (AI)”.

Powered by the Llama 4 language model, Meta AI is designed to assist, chat and engage in natural conversation. With its polished interface and fluid interactions, Meta AI might seem like just another entrant in the race to build smarter digital assistants.

But beneath its inviting exterior lies a crucial distinction that transforms the chatbot into a sophisticated data harvesting tool.

‘Built to get to know you’

“Meta AI is built to get to know you”, the company declared in its news announcement. Contrary to the friendly promise implied by the slogan, the reality is less reassuring.

The Washington Post columnist Geoffrey A. Fowler found that by default, Meta AI “kept a copy of everything”, and it took some effort to delete the app’s memory. Meta responded that the app provides “transparency and control” throughout and is no different to their other apps.

However, while competitors like Anthropic’s Claude operate on a subscription model that reflects a more careful approach to user privacy, Meta’s business model is firmly rooted in what it has always done best: collecting and monetising your personal data.

This distinction creates a troubling paradox. Chatbots are rapidly becoming digital confidants with whom we share professional challenges, health concerns and emotional struggles.

Recent research shows we are as likely to share intimate information with a chatbot as we are with fellow humans. The personal nature of these interactions makes them a gold mine for a company whose revenue depends on knowing everything about you.

Consider this potential scenario: a recent university graduate confides in Meta AI about their struggle with anxiety during job interviews. Within days, their Instagram feed fills with advertisements for anxiety medications and self-help books – despite them having never publicly posted about these concerns.

The cross-platform integration of Meta’s ecosystem of apps means your private conversations can seamlessly flow into their advertising machine to create user profiles with unprecedented detail and accuracy.

This is not science fiction. Meta’s extensive history of data privacy scandals – from Cambridge Analytica to the revelation that Facebook tracks users across the internet without their knowledge – demonstrates the company’s consistent prioritisation of data collection over user privacy.

What makes Meta AI particularly concerning is the depth and nature of what users might reveal in conversation compared to what they post publicly.

Open to manipulation

Rather than just a passive collector of information, a chatbot like Meta AI has the capability to become an active participant in manipulation. The implications extend beyond just seeing more relevant ads.

Imagine mentioning to the chatbot that you are feeling tired today, only to have it respond with: “Have you tried Brand X energy drinks? I’ve heard they’re particularly effective for afternoon fatigue.” This seemingly helpful suggestion could actually be a product placement, delivered without any indication that it’s sponsored content.

Such subtle nudges represent a new frontier in advertising that blurs the line between a helpful AI assistant and a corporate salesperson.

Unlike overt ads, recommendations mentioned in conversation carry the weight of trusted advice. And that advice would come from what many users will increasingly view as a digital “friend”.

A history of not prioritising safety

Meta has demonstrated a willingness to prioritise growth over safety when releasing new technology features. Recent reports reveal internal concerns at Meta, where staff members warned that the company’s rush to popularise its chatbot had “crossed ethical lines” by allowing Meta AI to engage in explicit romantic role-play, even with test users who claimed to be underage.

Such decisions reveal a reckless corporate culture, seemingly still driven by the original motto of moving fast and breaking things.

Now, imagine those same values applied to an AI that knows your deepest insecurities, health concerns and personal challenges – all while having the ability to subtly influence your decisions through conversational manipulation.

The potential for harm extends beyond individual consumers. While there’s no evidence that Meta AI is being used for manipulation, it has such capacity.

For example, the chatbot could become a tool for pushing political content or shaping public discourse through the algorithmic amplification of certain viewpoints. Meta has played a role in propagating misinformation in the past, and recently made the decision to discontinue fact-checking across its platforms.

The risk of chatbot-driven manipulation is also increased now that AI safety regulations are being scaled back in the United States.

Lack of privacy is a choice

AI assistants are not inherently harmful. Other companies protect user privacy by choosing to generate revenue primarily through subscriptions rather than data harvesting. Responsible AI can and does exist without compromising user welfare for corporate profit.

As AI becomes increasingly integrated into our daily lives, the choices companies make about business models and data practices will have profound implications.

Meta’s decision to offer a free AI chatbot while reportedly lowering safety guardrails sets a low ethical standard. By embracing its advertising-based business model for something as intimate as an AI companion, Meta has created not just a product, but a surveillance system that can extract unprecedented levels of personal information.

Before inviting Meta AI to become your digital confidant, consider the true cost of this “free” service. In an era where data has become the most valuable commodity, the price you pay might be far higher than you realise.

As the old adage goes, if you’re not paying for the product, you are the product – and Meta’s new chatbot might be the most sophisticated product harvester yet created.

When Meta AI says it is “built to get to know you”, we should take it at its word and proceed with appropriate caution.The Conversation

Uri Gal, Professor in Business Information Systems, University of Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Viking pregnancy was deeply political – new study

Britomart by Walter Crane (1900). Library of Decorative Arts, Paris
Marianne Hem EriksenUniversity of Leicester

Pregnant women wielding swords and wearing martial helmets, foetuses set to avenge their fathers – and a harsh world where not all newborns were born free or given burial.

These are some of the realities uncovered by the first interdisciplinary study to focus on pregnancy in the Viking age, authored by myself, Kate Olley, Brad Marshall and Emma Tollefsen as part of the Body-Politics project. Despite its central role in human history, pregnancy has often been overlooked in archaeology, largely because it leaves little material trace.

Pregnancy has perhaps been particularly overlooked in periods we mostly associate with warriors, kings and battles – such as the highly romanticised Viking age (the period from AD800 until AD1050).

Topics such as pregnancy and childbirth have conventionally been seen as “women’s issues”, belonging to the “natural” or “private” spheres – yet we argue that questions such as “when does life begin?” are not at all natural or private, but of significant political concern, today as in the past.

In our new study, my co-authors and I puzzle together eclectic strands of evidence in order to understand how pregnancy and the pregnant body were conceptualised at this time. By exploring such “womb politics”, it is possible to add significantly to our knowledge on gender, bodies and sexual politics in the Viking age and beyond.


Looking for something good? Cut through the noise with a carefully curated selection of the latest releases, live events and exhibitions, straight to your inbox every fortnight, on Fridays. Sign up here.


First, we examined words and stories depicting pregnancy in Old Norse sources. Despite dating to the centuries after the Viking age, sagas and legal texts provide words and stories about childbearing that the Vikings’ immediate descendants used and circulated.

We learned that pregnancy could be described as “bellyful”, “unlight” and “not whole”. And we gleaned an insight into the possible belief in personhood of a foetus: “A woman walking not alone.”

Etching of a Viking man and woman
Helgi and Guðrún in the Laxdæla saga, as depicted by Andreas Bloch (1898). Wiki Commons

An episode in one of the sagas we looked at supports the idea that unborn children (at least high-status ones) could already be inscribed into complex systems of kinship, allies, feuds and obligations. It tells the story of a tense confrontation between the pregnant Guðrún Ósvífrsdóttir, a protagonist in the Saga of the People of Laxardal and her husband’s killer, Helgi Harðbeinsson.

As a provocation, Helgi wipes his bloody spear on Guđrun’s clothes and over her belly. He declares: “I think that under the corner of that shawl dwells my own death.” Helgi’s prediction comes true, and the foetus grows up to avenge his father.

Another episode, from the Saga of Erik the Red, focuses more on the agency of the mother. The heavily pregnant Freydís Eiríksdóttir is caught up in an attack by the skrælings, the Norse name for the indigenous populations of Greenland and Canada. When she cannot escape due to her pregnancy, Freydís picks up a sword, bares her breast and strikes the sword against it, scaring the assailants away.

While sometimes regarded as an obscure literary episode in scholarship, this story may find a parallel in the second set of evidence we examined for the study: a figurine of a pregnant woman.

This pendant, found in a tenth-century woman’s burial in Aska, Sweden, is the only known convincing depiction of pregnancy from the Viking age. It depicts a figure in female dress with the arms embracing an accentuated belly — perhaps signalling connection with the coming child. What makes this figurine especially interesting is that the pregnant woman is wearing a martial helmet.

A silver pendant showing a pregnant woman
The figurine of a pregnant woman that was analysed in the study. Historiska MuseetCC BY-ND

Taken together, these strands of evidence show that pregnant women could, at least in art and stories, be engaged with violence and weapons. These were not passive bodies. Together with recent studies of Viking women buried as warriors, this provokes further thought to how we envisage gender roles in the oft-perceived hyper-masculine Viking societies.

Missing children and pregnancy as a defect

A final strand of investigation was to look for evidence for obstetric deaths in the Viking burial record. Maternal-infant death rates are thought to be very high in most pre-industrial societies. Yet, we found that among thousands of Viking graves, only 14 possible mother-infant burials are reported.

Consequently, we suggest that pregnant women who died weren’t routinely buried with their unborn child and may not have been commemorated as one, symbiotic unity by Viking societies. In fact, we also found newborns buried with adult men and postmenopausal women, assemblages which may be family graves, but they may also be something else altogether.

Interpretative drawing of a grave showing a woman's skeleton and the body of her child
Interpretative drawing of a grave from Fjälkinge, Sweden, of an adult woman buried together with newborn placed between her thighs. Note that the legs of the woman’s body have been weighed down by a boulder. Matt Hitchcock / Body-PoliticsCC BY-SA

We cannot exclude that infants – underrepresented in the burial record more generally – were disposed of in death elsewhere. When they are found in graves with other bodies, it’s possible they were included as a “grave good” (objects buried with a deceased person) for other people in the grave.

This is a stark reminder that pregnancy and infancy can be vulnerable states of transition. A final piece of evidence speaks to this point like no other. For some, like Guđrun’s little boy, gestation and birth represented a multi-staged process towards becoming a free social person.

For people lower on the social rung, however, this may have looked very different. One of the legal texts we examined dryly informs us that when enslaved women were put up for sale, pregnancy was regarded as a defect of their bodies.

Pregnancy was deeply political and far from uniform in meaning for Viking-age communities. It shaped – and was shaped by – ideas of social status, kinship and personhood. Our study shows that pregnancy was not invisible or private, but crucial to how Viking societies understood life, social identities and power.The Conversation

Marianne Hem Eriksen, Associate Professor of Archaeology, University of Leicester

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Community-run food co-ops can reduce food insecurity and boost healthy diets, research shows

alicja neumiler/Shutterstock
Katherine KentUniversity of WollongongCristy BrooksWestern Sydney University, and Freya MacMillanWestern Sydney University

As grocery prices continue to rise, many Australians are struggling to afford healthy food and are looking for alternatives to the big supermarket chains.

The recent supermarkets inquiry, run by the Australian Competition and Consumer Commission, confirmed Australia’s grocery sector is highly concentrated, with limited competition and rising retail margins. In regional and remote areas, consumers often face higher prices and fewer choices.

One option growing in popularity around the country is the community food co-operative, or “food co-op”.

Food co-ops are local not-for-profit or member-owned groups where people join together to buy food in bulk, usually straight from farmers or wholesalers. These co-ops can take different forms, including shops, neighbourhood-based hubs, or box delivery models. They typically offer a range of foods such as fresh fruit and vegetables, bread, dairy products, eggs and pantry staples.

By co-ordinating their orders, members can reduce food costs, limit packaging waste, and avoid supermarket markups. Co-ops can also help lower transport emissions by reducing long supply chains.

We’ve been researching the benefits of food co-ops. We’ve found this model could reduce food insecurity and increase people’s intake of fruit and vegetables.

How are food co-ops run?

Some co-ops are owned and run by their members. Any surplus or profits are generally reinvested into the co-op or shared through lower prices, improved services, or support for local community initiatives.

Other co-ops are managed by not-for-profit organisations focused on improving food access for whole communities.

More recently, digital platforms and apps have made it even easier for people to start or join co-ops and connect with local growers.

Regardless of the model, co-ops are guided by values of co-operation, fairness and community benefit, rather than profit.

A young man on a laptop at home, with a woman in the background in the kitchen.
Digital platforms have made it easier to get involved in food co-ops. Cottonbro studio/Pexels

What does the research say?

We recently published a study which adds to a growing body of evidence showing food co-ops can play an important role in improving diet and reducing food insecurity.

Food insecurity is when someone doesn’t have reliable access to affordable, nutritious food. It can mean skipping meals, eating less fresh produce, relying on cheap processed foods, or experiencing ongoing stress about being able to afford groceries.

We surveyed more than 2,200 members of Box Divvy, a community-based food co-op operating across New South Wales and the Australian Capital Territory. Within this co-op, members join local “hubs”, pool their orders for groceries through an app, and collect their food from a nearby coordinator.

To measure food security, we used an internationally recognised survey that asks about things such as running out of food or skipping meals due to cost.

Before joining the co-op, more than 50% of surveyed members were classified as “food insecure”. This is well above the national average (estimated to be around 22%). It suggests many people turning to food co-ops are already under significant financial pressure.

After joining, food insecurity dropped by nearly 23%. The rate of severe food insecurity – where people skip meals and regularly experience hunger – more than halved.

These changes were accompanied by improved diets. We asked participants to report how many serves of fruit and vegetables they usually ate in a day. On average, members increased their vegetable intake by 3.3 serves per week and their fruit intake by 2.5 serves.

The benefits were even more pronounced for people experiencing severe food insecurity, who tend to have poorer diets overall. They ate 5.5 more serves of vegetables and 4.4 more serves of fruit per week while using the co-op.

These are meaningful improvements that bring people closer to meeting national dietary guidelines. This matters because eating more fruit and vegetables is linked to a lower risk of chronic diseases such as heart disease, type 2 diabetes, and some cancers.

A woman unpacks a box of fresh produce.
Our study found people ate more fruit and vegetables after joining the co-op. Davor Geber/Shutterstock

Other research has reflected similar findings. A 2020 Sydney-based study found co-op members were more likely to meet the recommended servings of fruit and vegetables than non-members.

Another study of The Community Grocer, a Melbourne-based social enterprise, found their weekly markets offered produce around 40% cheaper than nearby retailers and improved healthy food access for culturally diverse and low-income customers.

Internationally, a Canadian study of a community-based food box program – similar in structure to some co-ops – reported higher fruit and vegetable intake among regular users. It found a decline in intake for those who stopped using the service.

In Wales, disadvantaged communities that used co-ops reported better access to fresh produce. Similarly in New Zealand, co-op participants reported better access to healthy food.

In qualitative research, people who have experienced food insecurity say co-ops offer a more dignified alternative to food relief by offering choice and control over what’s on the table.

A man holds a number of receipts up in a supermarket.
Food co-ops can offer a cheaper alternative to shopping at large supermarkets. Denys Kurbatov/Shutterstock

Where to next?

Despite clear benefits, food co-ops remain largely overlooked in Australian policy. This is at a time when national conversations about price gouging and supermarket power highlight the need for viable, community-based alternatives.

Meanwhile, food co-ops also face operational challenges. For example, regulatory requirements can vary significantly between local councils and states. This makes it difficult to establish, scale or replicate successful co-ops.

Government support could help co-ops grow where they’re needed most. Some measures might include:

  • seed funding and small grants to establish co-ops in low-income communities
  • subsidised memberships or vouchers for eligible households
  • investment in digital tools and logistics to support efficient operations, particularly in rural and remote areas
  • simplifying regulatory processes.

As the Feeding Australia strategy develops under the Albanese government, there’s an opportunity to consider how community models such as food co-ops could complement broader national efforts to improve food security and strengthen local food systems.The Conversation

Katherine Kent, Senior Lecturer in Nutrition and Dietetics, University of WollongongCristy Brooks, Associate Lecturer in Interprofessional Health Sciences, Western Sydney University, and Freya MacMillan, Professor, Translational Health Research Institute, Western Sydney University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Pacific voyagers’ remarkable environmental knowledge allowed for long-distance navigation without Western technology

An outrigger canoe would typically have several paddlers and one navigator. AP Photo/David Goldman
Richard (Rick) FeinbergKent State University

Wet and shivering, I rose from the outrigger of a Polynesian voyaging canoe. We’d been at sea all afternoon and most of the night. I’d hoped to get a little rest, but rain, wind and an absence of flat space made sleep impossible. My companions didn’t even try.

It was May 1972, and I was three months into doctoral research on one of the world’s most remote islands. Anuta is the easternmost populated outpost in the Solomon Islands. It is a half-mile in diameter, 75 miles (120 kilometers) from its nearest inhabited neighbor, and remains one of the few communities where inter-island travel in outrigger canoes is regularly practiced.

A documentary team made a recent visit to Anuta.

My hosts organized a bird-hunting expedition to Patutaka, an uninhabited monolith 30 miles away, and invited me to join the team.

We spent 20 hours en route to our destination, followed by two days there, and sailed back with a 20-knot tail wind. That adventure led to decades of anthropological research on how Pacific Islanders traverse the open sea aboard small craft, without “modern” instruments, and safely arrive at their intended destinations.

Wayfinding techniques vary, depending upon geographic and environmental conditions. Many, however, are widespread. They include mental mapping of the islands in the sailors’ navigational universe and the location of potential destinations in relation to the movement of stars, ocean currents, winds and waves.

Western interest in Pacific voyaging

Disney’s two “Moana” movies have shined a recent spotlight on Polynesian voyaging. European admiration for Pacific mariners, however, dates back centuries.

In 1768, the French explorer Louis Antoine de Bougainville named Sāmoa the “Navigators’ Islands.” The famed British sea captain James Cook reported that Indigenous canoes were as fast and agile as his ships. He welcomed Tupaia, a navigational expert from Ra‘iātea, onto his ship and documented Tupaia’s immense geographic knowledge.

Early 1800s lithograph of long canoe with about a dozen people on the ocean with island in background, along with a sailing ship in distance
European explorers were impressed by the navigational skills of the people they encountered in the Pacific islands. Science & Society Picture Library via Getty Images

In 1938, Māori scholar Te Rangi Hīroa (aka Sir Peter Buck) authored “Vikings of the Sunrise,” outlining Pacific exploration as portrayed in Polynesian legend.

In 1947, Thor Heyerdahl, a Norwegian explorer and amateur archaeologist, crossed from Peru to the Tuamotu Islands aboard a balsa wood raft that he named Kon-Tiki, sparking further interest and inspiring a sequence of experimental voyages.

Ten years later Andrew Sharp, a New Zealand-based historian and prominent naysayer, argued that accurate navigation over thousands of miles without instruments is impossible. Others responded with ethnographic studies showing that such voyages were both historic fact and current practice. In 1970, Thomas Gladwin published his findings on the Micronesian island of Polowat in “East Is a Big Bird.” Two years later, David Lewis’ “We, the Navigators” documented wayfinding techniques across much of Oceania.

Many anthropologists, along with Indigenous mariners, have built on Gladwin’s and Lewis’ work.

A final strand has been experimental voyaging. Most celebrated is the work of the Polynesian Voyaging Society. They constructed a double-hull voyaging canoe named Hōkūle‘a, built from modern materials but following a traditional design. In 1976, led by Micronesian navigator Mau Piailug, they sailed Hōkūle‘a over 2,500 miles, from Hawai‘i to Tahiti, without instruments. In 2017, Hōkūle‘a completed a circumnavigation of the planet.

In traversing Earth’s largest ocean, one can travel thousands of miles and see nothing but sky and water in any direction. Absent a magnetic compass, much less GPS, how is it possible to navigate accurately to the intended destination?

Looking to the stars

Most Pacific voyagers rely on celestial navigationStars rise in the east, set in the west, and, near the equator, follow a set line of latitude. If a known star either rises or sets directly over the target island, the helmsman can align the vessel with that star.

However, there are complications.

Which stars are visible, as well as their rising and setting points, changes throughout the year. Therefore, navigation requires detailed astronomical understanding.

Also, stars are constantly in motion. One that is positioned directly over the target island will soon either rise too high to be useful or sink below the horizon. Thus, a navigator must seek other stars that follow a similar trajectory and track them as long as they are visible and low on the horizon. Such a sequence of guide stars is often called a “star path.”

Of course, stars may not align precisely with the desired target. In that case, instead of aiming directly toward the guide star, the navigator keeps it at an appropriate angle.

A navigator must modify the vessel’s alignment with the stars to compensate for currents and wind that may push the canoe sideways. This movement is called leeway. Therefore, celestial navigation requires knowledge of the currents’ presence, speed, strength and direction, as well as being able to judge winds’ strength, direction and effect on the canoe.

During daylight, when stars are invisible, the Sun may serve a similar purpose. In early morning and late afternoon, when the Sun is low in the sky, sailors use it to calculate their heading. Clouds, however, sometimes obscure both Sun and stars, in which case voyagers rely on other cues.

two canoes, each with several crew, out on the water
Navigating requires deep understanding of waves, in the form of both swells and seas. AP Photo/Esteban Felix

Waves, wind and other indicators

A critical indicator is swells. These are waves produced by winds that blow steadily across thousands of miles of open sea. They maintain their direction regardless of temporary or local winds, which produce differently shaped waves called “seas.”

The helmsman, feeling swells beneath the vessel, gleans the proper heading, even in the dark. In some locations, as many as three or four distinct swell patterns may exist; voyagers distinguish them by size, shape, strength and direction in relation to prevailing winds.

Once sailors near their target island, but before it is visible, they must determine its precise location. A common indicator is reflected waves: swells that hit the island and bounce back to sea. The navigator feels reflected waves and sails toward them. Pacific navigators who have spent their lives at sea appear quite confident in their reliance on reflected waves. I, by contrast, find them difficult to differentiate from waves produced directly by the wind.

pinkish blue sky with no sun over the ocean, with a formation of birds flying
Birds headed for home at the end of the day provide a clue about where land lies. Ecaterina Leonte/Photodisc via Getty Images

Certain birds that nest on land and fish at sea are also helpful. In early morning, one assumes they’re flying from the island; in late afternoon, they’re likely returning to their nesting spots.

Navigators sometimes recognize a greenish tint to the sky above a not-yet-visible island. Clouds may gather over a volcanic peak.

And sailors in the Solomon Islands’ Vaeakau-Taumako region report underwater streaks of light known as te lapa, which they say point toward distant islands. One well-known researcher has expressed confidence in te lapa’s existence and utility. Some scholars have suggested that it could be a bioluminescent or electromagnetic phenomenon. On the other hand, despite a year of concerted effort, I was unable to confirm its presence.

Estimating one’s position at sea is another challenge. Stars move along a given parallel and indicate one’s latitude. To gauge longitude, by contrast, requires dead reckoning. Navigators calculate their position by keeping track of their starting point, direction, speed and time at sea.

Some Micronesian navigators estimate their progress through a system known as etak. They visualize the angle between their canoe, pictured as stationary, and a reference island that is off to one side and represented as moving. Western researchers have speculated on how etak works, but there is no consensus yet.

For millennia, Pacific voyagers have relied on techniques such as these to reach thousands of islands, strewn throughout our planet’s largest ocean. They did so without Western instruments. Instead, they held sophisticated knowledge and shared understandings, passed by word of mouth, through countless generations.The Conversation

Richard (Rick) Feinberg, Professor Emeritus of Anthropology, Kent State University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

A law change will expand who we remember on Anzac Day – the New Zealand Wars should be included too

The New Zealand Wars memorial in new Plymouth. Wikimedia CommonsCC BY-SA
Alexander GillespieUniversity of Waikato

Anzac Day has come and gone again. But – lest we forget – war and its consequences are not confined to single days in the calendar. Nor do we only remember those who fought at Gallipoli more than a century ago.

This gradual expansion of the scope and meaning of April 25 is now about to grow further, with the Anzac Day Amendment Bill currently before parliament. Its goal is to make the commemoration “broader and more inclusive than it currently is”.

Remembrance will soon include “other conflicts and persons who have served New Zealand in time of war or in warlike conflicts in the past and in the future that are not currently covered”.

New Zealand personnel who served in United Nations missions, and who fought or died in training, will be recognised, as will civilians who served in war or warlike conflicts. Without doubt, it is an excellent initiative.

The question is, does it go far enough? The obvious omission, if the new law is intended to be “broader” and include past wars, is the conflict that helped shape (and still shapes) the country we are today: the New Zealand Wars.

Of course, including this pivotal period from 1843 to 1872 plays into the politics of today, given the land confiscations and other injustices the New Zealand Wars also represent. The question is whether their inclusion can avoid becoming a culture war in the process.

How Anzac Day has grown

The case for explicitly including the New Zealand Wars is strong. It is thought about 500 British and colonial troops, 250 of their Māori allies (sometimes known as kūpapa), and 2,000 Māori fighting against the Crown died in these conflicts.

It was also during these wars that Australian and New Zealand military cooperation (the earliest form of Anzacs, in a sense) actually began. Around 2,500 Australian men enlisted for irregular New Zealand militia units, many encouraged by the offer of land grants in return for serving.

Furthermore, Anzac Day has gradually grown over time to include wars and military conflicts beyond the tragedy in Turkey, first observed in 1916 when the government gazetted a half-day holiday (later made into a full public holiday in 1921) .

The government again changed the law governing Anzac Day in 1949 to include World War II and the 11,500 New Zealand citizens who died in it. Significantly, it also added the South African/Boer War (which killed 59 New Zealanders), setting a precedent for bringing pre-first world war events into the frame.

In 1966, Anzac Day’s scope grew again to recognise those “who at any time have given their lives for New Zealand and the British Empire or Commonwealth of Nations”. This allowed commemorations to cover the Cold War period, during which New Zealanders were killed in the Malayan Emergency (15), Korea (38) and Vietnam (37).

Remembering without prejudice

The counterargument to including the New Zealand Wars in an expanded Anzac Day might be that we already have a dedicated day of observance: Te Pūtake o te Riri on October 28, the date the Declaration of Independence of the United Tribes of New Zealand (precursor to the Treaty of Waitangi) was signed in 1835.

First observed in 2018, the commemorations take place in different locations each year. And perhaps one day, young New Zealanders will talk about the events at Rangiriri, Gate Pā, Matawhero and Ngātapa in the same way they now talk about Gallipoli, Passchendaele, Crete and Monte Cassino.

But the problem is that a two-tier system seems to have been created. Te Pūtake o te Riri was not made an official holiday and has struggled for wider recognition. While there is some public funding available, it is not on the scale of Anzac Day.

Te Pūtake o te Riri can and will continue to evolve, and it’s focus on the causes and injustices of these conflicts should not be diminished.

But an expanded and more inclusive Anzac Day, which recognises those who fought and died, would add another layer of meaning to a date long enshrined in the national calendar, similar to the way National Memorial Day in the United States encompasses their Civil War.

We are now at a point in history when the injustices of the early colonial government have at least been acknowledged through the Treaty settlement process. It would make sense for the New Zealand Wars to be folded into the Anzac Day Amendment Bill.

The words “lest we forget” should also apply to those who fell in the nation’s third most costly military conflict. That way we can remember all of the fallen, without prejudice.


Public submissions on the Anzac Day Amendment Bill close on Thursday May 22.The Conversation

Alexander Gillespie, Professor of Law, University of Waikato

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Using a blue inhaler alone is not enough to manage your asthma

New Africa/Shutterstock
Stephen HughesUniversity of Sydney and Bandana SainiUniversity of Sydney

Inhalers have been key to asthma management since the 1950s. The most common, salbutamol, comes in a familiar blue-coloured inhaler (or “puffer”).

This kind of “rescue inhaler” brings quick relief from asthma symptoms. You may know these inhalers by their brand names such as Ventolin, Asmol or Zempreon.

But there is growing evidence that using this kind of inhaler without treating the underlying condition may not only be ineffective – it could actually increase the risk of an asthma attack.

Next month, the National Asthma Council is releasing updated guidelines that reflect this shift. Here’s what’s changing and what you need to know.

What is a bronchodilator?

Bronchodilators such as salbutamol act by relaxing smooth muscle in the airways. While they don’t address inflammation, which is the key cause of asthma, bronchodilators are effective at quickly opening up constricted airways.

This means for people experiencing typical asthma symptoms – such as tightness of the chest and shortness of breath – a puff of salbutamol brings relief within ten minutes. The effect can last up to six hours.

Diagram shows the difference between a normal lung and asthmatic lung, with constricted airways.
Salbutamol relaxes the airway muscles that tighten due to asthma. BlueRingMedia/Shutterstock

Salbutamol is used by people with asthma and other respiratory conditions, such as chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (which includes chronic bronchitis and/or emphysema). As part of a management plan made with a doctor, salbutamol is used to relieve shortness of breath when it occurs.

In Australia, more than 60% of salbutamol is purchased over the counter (without a prescription) in pharmacies. Many of these purchases may be for people with infrequent asthma symptoms, meaning less than twice a month.

However, we now know there are safer and more effective ways for people with infrequent asthma to manage it in the long term.

So, what’s wrong with using salbutamol?

Treating symptoms is only one part of asthma management. Salbutamol doesn’t address the root cause – why the airways of people who get asthma become constricted in the first place.

It’s a bit like taking pain relief for a swollen elbow without treating the tendonitis causing the pain.

In asthma, chronic inflammation is usually a result of genes and environment interacting.

Some people have airways that overreact to triggers in the environment. These triggers include pollens, moulds and dust mites, or air that is cold or humid.

Over the long term, chronic inflammation can lead to changes in the airways. The airway walls become thicker and produce more mucus, allowing less space for air to flow through them.

Using short-acting treatments such as salbutamol without addressing chronic inflammation in the airways poses risks.

Salbutamol can become less effective with regular use. This means people with shortness of breath don’t gain the relief they expect and need, and paradoxically, their airways may become more “twitchy” (sensitive to environmental triggers) and inflamed. One response to this is people use more salbutamol and the problem is compounded.

Strong data links increased use of short-term inhalers such as salbutamol to higher risk of asthma flare-ups, hospital admissions and even death.

Purchasing three or more salbutamol inhalers per year is considered overuse.

According to asthma guidelines in Australia and globally, needing salbutamol for symptom relief on more than two days a week is an indicator of poorly controlled asthma, requiring review and possibly anti-inflammatory treatment.

Elderly woman's hands holding a blue inhaler.
Using your blue inhaler more than two days a week may indicate poorly controlled asthma. Kotcha K/Shutterstock

What do the new guidelines recommend?

In 2019, the Global Initiative for Asthma, an independent not-for-profit organisation, radically changed its recommendations for salbutamol use. This is based on its committee of asthma experts reviewing the evidence.

Australian asthma guidelines from the National Asthma Council are set to follow suit.

The council’s 2025 Australian Asthma Handbook now states that salbutamol alone is inadequate treatment for asthma in adults or adolescents.

Previously, the guidelines recommended people with infrequent symptoms to use salbutamol when needed and “alone” – that is, without an anti-inflammatory preventer.

The new recommendations specifically warn against anyone with asthma using a short-acting bronchodilator such as salbutamol by itself, due to the increased health risks mentioned above.

People with asthma who use salbutamol, for example, should also use an anti-inflammatory treatment that provides preventive cover, such as an inhaled corticosteroid.

The 2025 Australian Asthma Handbook now recommends anti-inflammatory relievers from day one when it comes to asthma treatment in adults and adolescents.

These inhalers contain, in a single dose (one puff), both a bronchodilator (to relieve symptoms) and a low-dose anti-inflammatory corticosteroid (to treat underlying inflammation).

They are recommended instead of salbutamol-only inhalers for symptom relief, even for those whose symptoms are infrequent.

When used in place of salbutamol-only inhalers, anti-inflammatory relievers have demonstrated improvements in quality of life for people with asthma, as well as lower risks of hospitalisations and death.

In the case of children with asthma, global guidelines emphasise the use of anti-inflammatory inhalers and discourage over-reliance on bronchodilators.

Will I need to change my inhaler?

Currently, combination anti-inflammatory relievers are only available with a prescription from a doctor. These prescriptions with repeats can allow people with asthma up to 12 months of treatment.

In Australia you can still buy salbutamol in a pharmacy without a prescription, after consultation with a pharmacist.

However, if you have asthma and you’re concerned about the new guidance, you should speak to your pharmacist or doctor for advice.The Conversation

Stephen Hughes, Lecturer in Pharmacy Practice, University of Sydney and Bandana Saini, Professor, Pharmacy Practice, University of Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Appointments to the Industrial Relations Commission of NSW

Thursday May 15, 2025
The Minns Labor Government has appointed new Commissioners to the Industrial Relations Commission of New South Wales (IRC).

The IRC hears industrial disputes and settles employment conditions and remuneration for employees primarily in the NSW public sector and local government as well as regulating the terms and conditions of engagement for owner-drivers, rideshare and food delivery riders.

Mr Anthony Howell is currently practising as a Barrister at HB Higgins Chambers. He started his career working in the Chambers of various IRC members before being admitted as a solicitor in 2003. He was called to the Bar in 2012.

As a Barrister, he specialises in industrial relations law and employment law, including discrimination and workplace health and safety law. He regularly appears in matters of significance before the Commission.

Ms Alison McRobert is currently the Legal Counsel at the Public Service Association/Community and Public Sector Union (PSA). She was admitted as a solicitor in 2001, working in private legal firms prior to joining the PSA.

She has held positions as a Board director, including her current position on the Board of Legal Aid and participated in multi-union and employer/employee taskforces.

They are expected to commence their roles in June 2025.

Minister for Industrial Relations Sophie Cotsis said:

“I am pleased to announce the appointment of the two eminent respected legal practitioners as commissioners of the NSW Industrial Relations Commission.

“They both bring a wealth of industrial relations and legal experience and will serve the people of NSW well.

“I congratulate them both and wish them every success in their new roles.”

Young detainees often have poor mental health. The earlier they’re incarcerated, the worse it gets

Emaediong I. AkpanekpoUNSW Sydney and Tony ButlerUNSW Sydney

Populist rhetoric targeting young offenders often leads to kneejerk punitive responses, such as stricter bail laws and lowering the age of criminal responsibility. This, in turn, has led to more young people being held in detention.

In Australia, the number of young people held in detention facilities increased by 8% (from 784 to 845) between the June quarter of 2023 and the June quarter of 2024.

But what if some of these young people were treated and helped, rather than incarcerated? A series of recently published studies examining mental health in the youth justice population suggests treatment would be more beneficial than punitive measures – some of which may even promote persistent offending.

Increased incarceration

New South Wales saw a 31% increase in young people in detention between 2023 and 2024.

Increases in youth detention numbers have also been reported in Queensland, the Australian Capital Territory, Tasmania and South Australia over the same period.

About 60% of young people in detention are First Nations youth.

Custody as a catalyst

Young people in the justice system have significantly higher rates of mental ill-health and adverse childhood experiences than their peers in the general population.

However, less clear is how involvement in the justice system, particularly custody, affects the severity and trajectory of these mental health issues over time.

Our team examined how exposure to the justice system affected mental health among young people in NSW. We analysed administrative health and justice data over two years post-supervision.

These data came from more than 1,500 justice-involved youth who participated in the Young People in Custody Health Survey in 2003, 2009 and 2015 and Young People on Community Orders Health Survey between 2003 and 2006.

We found young people who had spent time in custody faced markedly higher rates of subsequent psychiatric hospitalisation compared with those supervised in the community.

The risk of psychiatric hospitalisations was higher for those with multiple custody episodes. This demonstrates the significant negative impact of incarceration on the mental health of young people long after they are released.

We also examined how the impact of custody on psychiatric hospitalisations differed by age.

We found psychiatric hospitalisation rates were similar among youth aged 14–17 years who had been supervised in the community, compared with those aged 18 and older.

However, youth aged 14–17 who were placed in custody were hospitalised at significantly higher rates than their older peers aged 18 and above.

This suggests incarceration is particularly harmful for younger offenders.

How does this affect crime?

When we examined the long-term consequences of youth detention on subsequent offending, we found conviction during adolescence, especially before the age of 14, significantly increased the likelihood of later entering the adult prison system.

Those who were incarcerated during adolescence faced a fivefold increase in the risk of being incarcerated as an adult, compared with young people who’d never been in custody.

This suggests it may be beneficial to delay the involvement of young people in the justice system to help prevent repeat offending in the future.

Breaking the cycle

So what can be done to help?

In NSW, laws allow young people with mental health conditions to be diverted from judicial processes into treatment. Such laws for young people also exist in other states, although specific models vary.

While research shows those diverted into treatment have a lower risk of reoffending, less than half of eligible youth receive this option.

How do we help those who miss out? Our studies examined whether going to mental health services voluntarily (without a court order) could help reduce recidivism.

Among boys who had been in custody, we found they were 40% less likely to reoffend if they received mental health treatment after release than those who did not receive such treatment.

A similar, but larger, benefit was observed among boys supervised in the community. There, mental health treatment was associated with a 57% reduction in reoffending risk.

Evidence-based reform

Evidence shows punitive measures do not deter youth crime, but instead are likely to perpetuate cycles of offending into adulthood.

Policymakers should reimagine youth justice to protect young people and create real pathways to rehabilitation.

Raising the minimum age of criminal responsibility to delay the onset of formal contact with the justice system aligns with developmental science and prevents early criminalisation of young people.

Enhancing routine mental health screening in the justice system and expanding access to diversion programs is warranted.

Our findings on the benefits of routine mental health treatment highlight the potential for more integrated approaches. When combined with wraparound services for health and education, they could be even more effective.

As detaining a young person costs around $1 million annually, mental health treatment-based approaches make sound financial sense too.The Conversation

Emaediong I. Akpanekpo, PhD Candidate, School of Population Health, UNSW Sydney and Tony Butler, Professor and Program Head, Justice Health Research Program, UNSW Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Soon, your boss will have to pay your wages and super at the same time. Here’s how everyone could benefit

Dragon Images/Shutterstock
Helen HodgsonCurtin University

If you have a job in Australia, you’ve probably noticed each of your payslips has a section telling you how much superannuation will be paid alongside your wages.

But while your wages are deposited in your bank account however frequently you receive a payslip – whether that’s weekly, fortnightly or monthly – it’s a different story for your super.

Under current superannuation laws, employers are only required to pay super into an employee’s nominated fund at least four times a year – 28 days after the end of each quarter – although many do pay more regularly.

But that’s set to change. From July 1 2026, new “payday super” rules will require employers to pay super into the employee’s fund within seven days of wages.

This reform was announced in the 2023–24 federal budget, allowing employers, superannuation funds and software providers three years to set up compliant systems. But it hasn’t yet been legislated.

Now, some industry groups are calling for a further delay of up to two years. So, who are these reforms designed to benefit? And does business really need more time to get ready?

Missing or incorrect super

Missing or incorrect super payments present a huge problem for Australia’s retirement system.

The Super Members Council claims one in four Australians are missing out on the correct amount of superannuation contributions.

Australian assorted cash notes
Missing super payments are a multi-billion dollar problem. Wara1982/Shutterstock

The Australian Taxation Office (ATO) estimates A$5.2 billion of guaranteed superannuation went unpaid in 2021–22.

This can be due to payroll errors, misclassification under an award or, in extreme cases, non-payment of superannuation as a form of wage theft. All these things can be harder to spot when super is paid less frequently.

Rules only requiring super to be paid quarterly may have been appropriate 30 years ago, in the early days of the superannuation guarantee. Business systems were often not computerised, and wages were often paid in cash.

Times have changed

Payroll systems are now much more sophisticated.

From 2018, the federal government rolled out the single-touch payroll program that requires employers to report wages in real time, including details of superannuation guarantee withheld from an employee’s wages.

The government is already benefiting from the increased automation of data submitted through this system.

Single-touch payroll data helps improve official labour statistics and provides up-to-date income information for employees through the MyGov portal.

Sending real-time data to Centrelink addresses one of the major flaws underpinning the Robodebt scandal, which used an averaging system to estimate fortnightly earnings.

Benefits for employees

In simple terms, the coming changes are basically a change in timing. Payments will be transferred to an employee’s super fund in the same way their wages are transferred directly to their bank account.

Once bedded down, the changes will provide benefits across the board to employees, employers and the government.

Currently, if an employee believes the correct amount of superannuation is not being paid to their fund, they are expected to follow this up directly with the ATO.

Unfortunately, many employees presume the withheld amount shown on the payslip has already been paid into their super account.

Unless a member is actively monitoring their super balance, they may be unaware that the amount shown on their payslip is not being paid into their fund on a timely basis.

Person paying by card in a cafe
Payday super changes could help employees more easily check their super is being paid. Chay_Tee/Shutterstock

Benefits for business

Employers should also benefit from these changes, many of whom already do transfer superannuation when wages are paid.

Currently, superannuation guarantee payments are run on a separate payment cycle to payroll, coinciding with payment of tax liabilities. If payments are on the same cycle as payroll, it should make budgeting easier, and ensure the separate super payment run is not overlooked.

This assumes, of course, that the business is not relying on unpaid superannuation contributions to manage their cash flows elsewhere in the business. If that is the case, payday super changes will help protect the employee if the employer runs into financial difficulties.

The change will also allow the tax office to match deductions and payments in real time to detect fraud – and check that super is actually being paid. This can reduce audit costs and – in the long run – reduce reliance on the aged pension as super account balances improve.

Why wait any longer?

So, with all of these expected benefits, why has the financial services sector this month asked for implementation to be delayed further – by up to two years? The building blocks of the system – electronic payments to transfer funds and the government’s single-touch payroll gateway – are already in place.

One challenge is legislative. Although announced in May 2023, the draft legislation was only released for consultation in March 2025.

The Superannuation Guarantee (Administration) Act 1992 needs extensive amendments to rewrite references to the calculation and payment of the superannuation guarantee charge.

The draft legislation also makes some changes to definitions that may impact on how systems must be set up for payday super. Although not intended to change entitlements, they need to be made accurate in the software.

Still, payday super has the potential to strengthen Australia’s superannuation system, protecting employee contributions and smoothing the payment system for employers. Concerns around its implementation are largely due to the time it has taken for the draft legislation to emerge.

Following the election, the federal government has the numbers to pass this legislation as a matter of priority.The Conversation

Helen Hodgson, Professor, Curtin Law School and Curtin Business School, Curtin University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

View from The Hill: Ley says Liberals must ‘meet the people where they are’, but how can a divided party do that?

Michelle GrattanUniversity of Canberra

Cynics point out that when a party turns to a woman leader, it is often handing her a hot mess. That’s certainly so with the federal Liberals, now choosing their first female leader in eight decades.

For the Liberals, and for Sussan Ley, 63, this is a bittersweet milestone. The odds are overwhelmingly against her chances of taking the Liberals from opposition to government.

Given Labor’s massive majority, it will be virtually impossible for the Liberals to regain office in under two terms (when Ley would be in her late 60s). The way these things go, there’s likely to be more than one opposition leader in the next half dozen years.

Most immediately, Ley has to put the meagre talent pool available to best use. This is not just fitting the right people into the right spots but containing ambitions and discontents.

Peter Dutton didn’t have to look over his shoulder in three years. Ley will be constantly glancing behind. Given the closeness of the vote, and his personality, Angus Taylor is unlikely to regard the result as closing the book. But for the moment, he said on Tuesday, “We must unify […] I will contribute the best way I can to help get us back in the fight.”

Jacinta Price, after defecting from the Nationals in a bid to become deputy to Taylor, has had her hopes of dramatic advancement dashed. In the end, she didn’t even contest the deputyship. She said later she was “disappointed” Taylor was not elected. Talked up by the conservative base, she may also find her new Liberal kennel more flea-ridden than her previous fairly-comfy Nationals one. Certainly Price, used to running her own race, will require careful management. She told Sky on Tuesday night she looked forward to “robust debate” in the party room.

Over coming days, there’ll be the opposition’s pain-filled policy overhaul. The nearly evenly divided leadership vote (29-25), in which the moderates supported Ley and the conservatives backed Taylor, highlights differences over policy.

A large cloud hangs over the controversial nuclear policy. Some will want to ditch it entirely; others will argue it should be recalibrated. A complication is that Ted O'Brien, the new deputy, was its main architect.

More seriously, the commitment to net zero emissions reduction by 2050 will be on the table.

Ley told her joint news conference with O'Brien: “There won’t be a climate war. There will be sound and sensible consultation”. That sounds like wishful thinking. It certainly goes against the Coalition’s history.

While there are some Liberal critics of net zero, this is particularly a debate for the Nationals, among whom there will be a strong push to ditch the commitment.

Within the Coalition, the Nationals will have greater clout because they held almost all their seats. What they do on climate policy will substantially affect the joint party room. But will there be pressure to break the Coalition?

Especially challenging for Ley – and at present looking almost impossible – is how the Liberals manage to appeal to two vital constituencies, women and younger voters. Many professional women in what were once solid Liberal areas have gone off to the teals. The under-50s have comprehensively rejected the Liberals.

Ley said: “We have to have a Liberal Party that respects modern Australia, that reflects modern Australia, and represents modern Australia. And we have to meet the people where they are.”

That’s exactly right, if the Liberal Party is to be successful. But the reality is that the party, as things stand, appears incapable of “meeting the people where they are.” The fundamental problem is that these constituencies – younger voters and women – are increasingly progressive in their politics, but the Liberals are not.

It’s not as if Ley, when deputy leader, didn’t make an effort with women. After the 2022 election, she embarked on a “women’s listening tour”. But such efforts didn’t work, and the Liberals then further alienated women with the working-from-home debacle..

Pitching to women in future will require the Liberals to consider whether they should swallow their objection to quotas for female candidates – and that will encounter fierce resistance.

The Liberals need to thread the needle between the so-called “leafy” urban areas they must win back and the outer suburbs that Dutton thought, wrongly, could take him to power.

Ley is a centrist and a pragmatist. She told her news conference she believed government “is ultimately formed in a sensible centre”.

She will probably be able to navigate issues such as “welcome to country” and the flag better than Dutton, and she said that at the Liberal Party meeting “I committed to my colleagues that there would be no captain’s calls”.

She has changed her views on issues, ranging from her previously strong support for the Palestinians (she was in the parliamentary friends of Palestine) to her opposition to the live sheep trade (she had a private member’s bill in 2018 restricting these exports).

A massive problem Ley will confront is the weak and in parts feral Liberal organisation, which is a federation of states. Variously, these divisions are riven by factionalism, depleted, and incompetent, or all of those. In contrast, Labor excels in its ground game at elections. Ley won’t be able to drive the needed reform, and the party lacks the strong figures in the organisation to do so.

Few people want to join political parties these days, and when a party is on the ropes, the traffic is the other way. This gives the ideologues and factional players even more power over candidate selection, often with bad outcomes.

Adding to their organisational challenges, the Liberals will also likely have to find a new federal director, with Andrew Hirst, who has been in the post since 2017, expected to move on.

When Ley was young she put an extra “s” in her name. She describes it as a joke in her rebellious youth. She told journalist Kate Legge in 2015, “I read about this numerology theory that if you add the numbers that match the letters in your name you can change your personality. I worked out that if you added an "s” I would have an incredibly exciting, interesting life and nothing would ever be boring.“

However it turns out, her time as opposition leader won’t be boring.The Conversation

Michelle Grattan, Professorial Fellow, University of Canberra

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

This 6-point plan can ease Australia’s gambling problems – if our government has the guts

WHYFRAME/Shutterstock
Charles LivingstoneMonash University and Angela RintoulThe University of Melbourne

We have a refreshed and revitalised Australian government, enriched with great political capital.

During the last term of parliament before the election, opportunities to address Australia’s raging gambling habit were neglected.

Could this government now have enough authority and courage to take on the gambling ecosystem?

A massive issue

Australians are the world’s biggest gambling losers.

Many attribute this to some inherent Australian trait. But what it really comes down to is the proliferation of gambling operators and their products.

They’re everywhere, along with their marketing and promotion.

Half of the gambling problems in Australia are associated with poker machines, ubiquitous in all states and territories other than Western Australia (WA).

Consequently, and unsurprisingly, WA has the lowest rate of gambling harms. The state has 2,500 pokies at a single Perth casino and none in clubs or pubs.

New South Wales boasts nearly 90,000 pokies, the highest pokie “density” in Australia, and its clubs and pubs make $8.1 billion a year.

Overall, pokie losses in Australia total $15.8 billion per year.

Wagering (betting on sport, racing and even elections), is now mainly online, and reaps another $8.4 billion in Australia. This is the fastest growing gambling sector, with growth, adjusted for inflation, of more than 45% between 2018-19 and 2022-23.

Pokies grew by a more modest 7.6% during the same period. Only casinos went backwards.

Overall, gambling costs Australians more than $32 billion annually.

This has been fuelled by relentless promotion and marketing and the expansion of the gambling ecosystem: the network of commercial actors who reap a major dividend from gambling losses.

It includes the bookies, pub and club chains as well as sporting leagues, financial services providers, software and game developers, charitable organisations, broadcasters, and state and territory governments.

Of course, gambling comes at a cost: it is strongly linked to broken relationships, loss of assets, employment and educational opportunities, and crime rates.

Intimate partner violence and neglect of children, along with poor mental and physical health, are also connected to gambling accessibility. As, unfortunately, is suicide.

However, there are ways to reduce gambling harm.

Six ways to tackle the problem

1. First up, we need a national gambling regulator. This was an important recommendation in the 2023 report of the all-party parliamentary committee chaired by the late Peta Murphy.

Currently, gambling is regulated by each state and territory. Some have reasonably robust systems in place. Others, somewhat less so. None are best practice.

A national system is long overdue, as many gambling businesses operate across multiple Australian jurisdictions.

In the absence of national regulation, the Northern Territory has become the de facto national regulator for online wagering. It offers a low-tax and arguably low intervention regulatory system.

Yet the vast majority of losses from punters come in other jurisdictions.

National regulation would also assist in standardising tax rates and maintaining reasonable uniform standards of regulation and enforcement.

2. Poker machines are Australia’s biggest gambling problem, but a national precommitment scheme would provide a tool for people to manage their gambling.

This proposal has been frequently mooted in Australia since the Productivity Commission recommended it in 2010.

It has worked well in Europe: forms of it now operate in 27 European countries.

Both Victoria and Tasmania have proposed it, as did the Perrottet government in the lead into the last NSW election.

Unfortunately, the power of the pokie lobby, supercharged by the addiction surplus it reaps from punters, has slowed or stopped its implementation.

But it’s eminently feasible and is highly likely to significantly reduce the harm of pokies.

The technical challenges are far from insurmountable, despite what industry interests argue.

3. Limiting accessibility to pokies is an important way to reduce harm.

Nothing good happens in a pokie room after midnight, yet they are often open until 4am, with reopening time only a little later.

Closing down venues after midnight and not opening until 10am would help a lot of people.

4. We can’t talk about political access without considering some key tools of the gambling ecosystem.

Pokie operators have enormous ability to influence politicians. Donations are a typical method to ensure access, backed up by the “revolving door” of post-politics jobs.

Politicians also enjoy a stream of freebies from the gambling ecosystem, which allow these businesses to bend the ear of a guest for hours at a time, at lunch, over drinks, or during an event.

To address this, we need better rules around acceptance of hospitality and gifts. Some states have moved towards such arrangements but there has been little action on the national front.

5. Another major recommendation from the Murphy committee was the banning of online gambling ads.

The majority of Australians want it to happen, and gambling ads are banned for almost all other forms of gambling.

The special treatment for this rapidly growing, highly harmful gambling product makes no sense.

6. Finally, we need to properly resource research into gambling harm and its prevention.

Much gambling research (and its conferences) are funded by the gambling ecosystem, either directly or via representative organisations.

This raises massive conflicts and has lead to a poor evidence base for policy making.

The time is now

Anything that stops people getting into trouble with gambling will be opposed by the gambling ecosystem because their best customers are those with the biggest losses.

But nobody is saying we should do away with gambling.

The evidence-based ideas above would help people with existing problems, and stop many more from ending up in trouble.

Gambling is a problem we can solve.

It does need political effort – but the Albanese government has the political capital to solve this problem.The Conversation

Charles Livingstone, Associate Professor, School of Public Health and Preventive Medicine, Monash University and Angela Rintoul, Principal Research Fellow - Gambling and Suicide, The University of Melbourne

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Beacon Products, Zandox Group and Mr Warren Skry in court for alleged misleading and unconscionable sales practices

May 12, 2025
The ACCC has been granted leave by the Federal Court to commence legal proceedings against two companies in liquidation, Beacon Products Pty Ltd (Beacon) and Zandox Group Pty Ltd (Zandox), for alleged unconscionable conduct and misleading or deceptive conduct.

The ACCC is also taking action against the director of Beacon, Mr Warren Skry, alleging he was knowingly concerned in the companies’ alleged unconscionable conduct.

The ACCC alleges the companies engaged in unconscionable conduct, including by deceiving customers and exerting undue influence and pressure to make unsolicited sales of printer cartridges and cleaning products to businesses across Australia, in breach of the Australian Consumer Law.

Beacon and Zandox allegedly misled business customers into ordering printer cartridges or cleaning products by falsely stating during unsolicited phone calls that they were confirming an order that had already been made by the business when, in fact, no order had been made.

The companies also allegedly misled some customers into thinking an initial order was an agreement for an ongoing supply of goods or that the customer did not have the right to terminate an agreement for ongoing supply, when this was not the case. The companies also allegedly falsely represented to some customers that they did not have a right to return or receive refunds for unwanted goods.

The breaches of the Australian Consumer Law alleged in this case relate to systems of conduct or patterns of behaviour that occurred over several years, first commencing in November 2016.

“The alleged conduct by Beacon and Zandox targeted many small and medium businesses, including a retirement village, residential care facility, a childcare centre, and farming businesses, misleading them into accepting orders of products they didn’t want or need, and then making it very difficult to return the unwanted goods,” ACCC Deputy Chair Catriona Lowe said.

“We took this action because we were concerned that this type of conduct has the potential to cause financial and emotional stress to business owners and staff.”

In one example of the conduct alleged to be in breach of the Australian Consumer Law, a small business in NSW was sent three deliveries of toner cartridges by Beacon, which the business accepted. A representative of Beacon then contacted the business and requested confirmation of a further delivery of toner cartridges. The business requested that this be the final delivery from Beacon. Beacon continued to contact the business to confirm subsequent orders. It is alleged there was no agreement in place for the order and payment of goods after the initial three deliveries.

The business further contacted Beacon requesting that any future orders be cancelled and, on several occasions, sought to return toner cartridges it did not order or want and sought refunds. Beacon allegedly asserted that the orders were confirmed and authorised by staff of the business, and that they would not take all of the unwanted cartridges back. The ACCC alleges that the business had the right to return and receive a refund for the unordered goods.

The ACCC previously took court action against Mr Skry and his previous company Globex Systems Pty Ltd in 2004 for asserting a right to payment for unsolicited goods and making false representations that businesses had agreed to buy products from Globex when that was not the case.

The ACCC is seeking declarations and penalties against Beacon and Zandox, as well as pecuniary penalties, declarations, disqualification orders, costs and an injunction against Mr Skry.

Background
Because Beacon and Zandox are in liquidation, the ACCC was required to obtain leave of the court before commencing proceedings against the companies.

Beacon and Zandox had liquidators appointed on 20 April 2023 following a creditors’ voluntary winding up decision.

Beacon was incorporated in 2016, initially selling cleaning products and from January 2020 also selling printer consumables. It predominantly sold these products to businesses through telemarketing calls.

Mr Skry has been a director of Beacon from 6 January 2020.

Zandox was incorporated in late 2022. It is alleged that Zandox was essentially as a rebranding of Beacon, selling the same products.

NSW nurses recognised for their dedication and compassion

May 12, 2025
This International Nurses Day, the vital contributions of nurses across NSW are being recognised as they continue to be at the heart of healthcare in every community.

Minister for Health Ryan Park thanked nurses for the important role they play in providing compassionate care and clinical expertise in a range of clinical, outpatient, and community settings.

International Nurses Day is an opportunity to shine a light on the incredible dedication NSW nurses show every day in delivering high-quality, patient-centred care to thousands of people across the state.

If you know a nurse or midwife going above and beyond, International Nurses Day is the perfect time to nominate them for the Healing Heart Award, as part of the 2025 Excellence in Nursing and Midwifery Awards.

The Healing Heart Award recognises a nurse or midwife whose compassion, kindness, professionalism, or other attributes stood out.

Nominations for the Excellence in Nursing and Midwifery Awards are open until 12 June. People can nominate at: Excellence in Nursing and Midwifery Awards 2025.

The Excellence in Nursing and Midwifery Awards consist of nine awards, including seven local health district and specialty network nominated awards, one consumer-nominated Healing Heart award and one colleague-nominated Healing Heart award.

NSW Minister for Health Ryan Park stated:

“Nurses are the backbone of our healthcare system, and I want to thank each and every one of them for the vital role they play in our health system.

“Their contributions are critical to ensuring safe, effective, and compassionate healthcare, and their commitment is essential to the resilience of the entire health system.

“The care and expertise provided by nurses supports thousands of people across our state every single day, and International Nurses Day is a chance to shine a light on the incredible work they do."

NSW Health's Chief Nursing & Midwifery Officer Jacqui Cross said:

“Nurses are everywhere all the time, contributing to health outcomes for the people and communities of NSW. They are in community settings and in acute and complex care environments, and everywhere in between.

“I am incredibly proud of my nursing colleagues, and would like to thank them for their compassion, professionalism, and round-the-clock commitment to caring for patients in the public health system.

“As the single largest workforce group in NSW Health, nurses are there at every turn, making a real difference to the care and experience of patients and their families and carers."

NSWNMA Stronger Together Awards

May 12, 2025
Announcing our 2025 Award winners!
The NSW Nurses and Midwives’ Association is proud to announce the winners of the NSWNMA Stronger Together Awards 2025, celebrating the outstanding contributions and strong voices within our professions for International Day of the Midwife and International Nurses Day.

These awards recognise NSWNMA members who have demonstrated our values of activism, collectivism, courage, innovation, and integrity, and a commitment to improving healthcare across all sectors in NSW, inspiring others through their work, dedication and tenacity.

The NSWNMA Stronger Together Awards 2025 concern three key categories, with one nominee selected to win the overall Member of the Year award.

Winners
Member of the Year Award: Jacqueline Myers – Royal Prince Alfred Hospital
“An extraordinary midwife working in extraordinary times, even now!”

Jacqueline Myers has been selected as our first-ever Member of the Year Award recipient for her dedication to securing better outcomes for nurses, midwives, and the patients in their care.

A proponent of midwifery at all levels, Jacqueline was at the heart of the campaign to have ‘midwives’ introduced to the title of the NSWNMA.

“It took much determination, energy &  further campaigning at two Annual Conferences to get this resolution through. Jac never gave up and she was the linchpin to keep the RPA Branch focussed to get this through. 

“Jacquie has kept the branch active over the decades, encouraging new members to become active at Branch level; encouraged activism in the workplace, advocated for colleagues to practice safely and be aware of their rights in the workplace.”

Activism Award: Pumla Coleman – Hornsby Ku-Ring-Gai Hospital
Pumla has been recognised as our Activism Award winner for her unwavering campaigning against racism and discrimination. Having emigrated to Australia from apartheid South Africa, Pumla played a key role in establishing the NSWNMA’s Culturally and Linguistically Diverse (CaLD) Professional Reference Group.

Pumla’s own lived experiences emboldened her to be a leader in the fight for equity, and she continues to inspire migrant nurses as they establish their working life in Australia. 

Community Award: Nichole Callan – Warren and Trangie MPS
Nichole is the recipient of our Community Award for her outstanding efforts to improve health outcomes in rural and remote communities. Nichole’s commitment to supporting Aboriginal families is seen through her project Bellies and New Life, a positive engagement tool offered to women in their antenatal period.

Through this work, Nichole has fostered a sharp increase in the number of Aboriginal families attending Child & Family Health Nursing services. These efforts continue to make a positive impact in the Orana region of New South Wales.

Nichole’s commitment to her community can also be seen through the Little Wings program – where she helped establish a fly-in fly-out paediatric clinic for local children.

Rising Star Award: Sweta Subedi – Southern Cross Care Thorton Park
Since stepping into the role of Clinical Care Coordinator, Sweta Subedi has had an immediate positive impact in her workplace, improving clinical responses to deterioration, decreasing behavioural incidents, reducing Serious Incident Response Scheme Reports, improving nutritional outcomes for residents, and improved team retention through sound leadership, among other workplace positives.

Described by colleagues as “demonstrating maturity, insight and initiative of a seasoned leader,” Sweta’s commitment to improving aged care has seen her recognised as our inaugural Rising Star Award recipient.

Genes, environment or a special bond? Why some twins talk and think in unison

Jeffrey CraigDeakin University and Nancy SegalCalifornia State University, Fullerton

An interview with Paula and Bridgette Powers – identical twins who witnessed their mother’s carjacking – recently went viral. The way they spoke and gestured in unison has captivated global audiences.

Bridgette and Paula Powers have gained global attention for the way they speak.

Genetically, identical twins are clones. They result from the splitting of an early embryo, meaning they share the same genes.

In contrast, fraternal twins are the result of two eggs being fertilised by two different sperm. On average they share 50% of their genes – the same as any siblings who share both their biological mother and father.

So, when identical twins talk and gesture in unison (known as synchrony), is it down to genes? The answer can be complicated.

Genes aren’t the only influence on looks, language and like-minded thinking. Let’s break down the factors that might lead some twins to speak – and apparently think – in unison.

A close bond in a shared environment

Almost all twins, even “identical” ones, show some differences in physical, mental and emotional traits. They also regard themselves as distinct individuals and typically don’t like being referred to as “the twins”.

Yet we know most people naturally mimic the way those close to them speak and move, even without realising it. This phenomenon is called automatic mimicry and may be part of healthy social development, helping people synchronise behaviours and share emotions.

For identical twins who grow up in the same home, school and community, the effect of a shared environment and close bond may be particularly intense.

Twin boys read a book on a picnic rug.
Twins may become each other’s main social companion. Lana G/Shutterstock

Paula and Bridgette Powers, for example, have shared an environment: not only the same parents, home and upbringing, but also the same job, running a bird rescue charity.

Twins may know each other so well they can intuitively sense what the other twin is about to say — and may feel like their brains are in sync. The Powers sisters have explained:

our brains must think alike at the same time.

In contrast, twins who grow up apart share many personality traits, but without years of shared interaction they are less likely to develop synchronised speech or mirrored behaviours. However, they do display many of the same unusual habits and idiosyncrasies.

What about genetics?

Studying identical and fraternal twins separated at birth can help us unravel how much of our behaviours – intelligence, personality and temperament – are influenced by genes and environment.

Even when identical twins grow up apart, they tend to closely resemble one another – not only physically, but in their personality, interests and behaviours. Fraternal twins, in general, are much less alike. This tells us genes matter.

One of us (Nancy) was a researcher with the Minnesota Study of Twins Raised Apart, which lasted from 1979 to 1999 and looked at more than 100 sets of twins (and triplets) separated at birth and raised apart. Twins were separated for various reasons, such as the stigma of single motherhood, inadequate family resources and maternal death.

The study comprehensively examined factors affecting a wide range of psychological, physical and medical traits. Researchers wanted to understand the impact of differences in their life histories on both identical and fraternal twins, reared apart and how they affected the current similarities and differences between them.

striking finding was identical twins raised apart are as similar in personality as identical twins raised together. For example, the Minnesota researchers found little difference in traits such as wellbeing and aggression, whether identical twins were raised together or apart.

This shows genes play an important role in shaping our personality. Genes also affect the way we process speech and language.

Sharing identical genes may mean identical twins also respond to situations in similar ways. This is because their brains lead them to behave in comparable ways. This genetic closeness, which underlies their behavioural resemblance, explains why they may independently say or do the same thing, without any need for a mystical explanation.

The Minnesota study also found when identical twins were reunited they formed closer relationships with each other than reunited fraternal twins did. This suggests perceptions of similarity in behaviour might draw people together and help keep them connected.

We now know genes and environment each account for half the person-to-person differences in personality. However, the life events we individually experience remain the most important factor shaping how our unique traits are expressed and who we ultimately become.

What about a secret ‘twin language’?

Parents of identical twins may be left baffled as their children, even as toddlers, seem to communicate through babbles and gestures that no one else can understand.

Parents may observe young twins communicating without words.

Each twin pair has their own way of communicating. Twins’ private speech, also called idioglossia, cryptophasia or a “secret language”, refers to verbal and nonverbal exchanges most other people don’t understand. This is different to synchronised speech.

Private speech is displayed by about 40% of twins. However, estimates vary wildly – ranging from as low as 2% to as high as 47%. That’s mainly because researchers define and measure it differently.

Private speech usually fades as children age, at about three years of age. But some twins continue to use it into early childhood.

Why are we so fascinated by twins?

Twins continue to fascinate us. That is clear in the wealth of media attention they receive, their popularity in scientific studies, and their presence in myths and legends across all continents.

Perhaps it is because when we see identical twins who look and act so much alike, it challenges our belief that we are all unique.

But even identical twins are not exact replicas of one another. Genetic changes, events in the womb, and/or life experiences can conspire to create differences between them.

Nevertheless, most identical twins are more alike and socially closer than any other pair of people on the planet.

Bridgette and Paula Powers appear in an episode of Australian Story airing on Monday on ABCTV and ABC iview.The Conversation

Jeffrey Craig, Professor in Medical Sciences, Deakin University and Nancy Segal, Professor of Psychology and Director of the Twin Studies Center, California State University, Fullerton

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Disclaimer: These articles are not intended to provide medical advice, diagnosis or treatment.  Views expressed here do not necessarily reflect those of Pittwater Online News or its staff.

Week Two May 2025 (May 5 -11)

Pittwater Tigers Secure 50k Grant for Auskick field at North Narrabeen + Amenities Upgrade

Photo; L- R: Jacqui Scruby, Member of Parliament for Pittwater. Andrew Varasdi Head of AFL NSW/ACT. Chris Davison, President Pittwater Tigers. Sue Heins, Mayor. Sara Archer, Registrar Pittwater Tigers, Pittwater Tigers team members. Pic: NBC/JS

Council announced on Thursday May 8 the Pittwater Tigers AFL club has secured  a $50,000 grant for the redesign of the underused area of the North Narrabeen Reserve fields to allow the installation of a new junior Auskick field and to upgrade the amenities.

The Pittwater Tigers Auskick program is for Children aged 5 to 7 years, and includes 15 Sunday sessions, commencing Sunday 27th April, 8:30am to 9:30am at Tigerland, the Tigers home ground at North Narrabeen Reserve.  There will also be optional weekly training sessions.

AFL Auskick is a program designed to introduce children aged 5-12 to the sport of Australian Rules Football. It focuses on fun and engagement, with a non-contact, modified version of the game to cater to all skill levels. Auskick is often the first introduction to football for many children and serves as a starting point for their participation in the sport. 

Auskick is a stepping stone for children who want to progress to more structured junior football leagues. Auskick participants may have the chance to play during halftime at key AFL and AFLW games. See: Auskick Match Rules – 5 to 8 Years 

Register here for Pittwater Tigers Auskick sessions.

The Pittwater Junior AFL Club was founded in April 1970 as the Pittwater Australian Rules Football Club with the official uniform at formation being a yellow jumper with black sash and yellow and black hooped socks. The Tigers have won numerous Premierships across a number of different age groups over their 55 years and have built a culture around being a family friendly local club.​

The club states:

‘’We have strong values of Pride, Fun and Community Spirit and our club is run by passionate parents and volunteers. From coaches, team managers, ground managers and a club committee committed to growing our club into the future.

In 2025 we have over 300 young tigers and we have seen significant growth in both the younger groups of Auskick and Under 8’s and huge growth in Youth Girls Footy.​

We welcome all kids across all age groups regardless of experience or ability.

Pittwater Tigers Junior AFL Club is the only AFL Club in Pittwater. ​

We pride ourselves on being a family-oriented Club, teaching young AFL players skills, sportsmanship, team work and Club values. Ages 5 to 17, boys and girls, we welcome everyone to our Club regardless of experience or ability. Come and have a go!’’

Find out more at: www.pittwatertigers.com.au

The Pittwater Tigers are on a roll with the club hosting Swans players Jack Buller and Sam Wicks in late April for an inspirational meet and greet at North Narrabeen.

Sam played junior football for the Manly Bombers and Manly Warringah Wolves. He was recruited from the Manly-Warringah (NSW)/Sydney (NEAFL) and has played as a forward with the Swans. Wicks has been moved into the backline at the Swans this year and featured in every game as a small lockdown defender.

"It is a big change; it came about in my end of season review last year. The coaches asked how I felt about doing some training down back and I said I'd be open to it and then really loved it and the coaches loved having me there, so it's been a good fit," Wicks told AFL.com.au earlier in April 

"One thing that's really helped me is knowing what a small forward likes and doesn't like from playing that role. If I can put little things into my game that opposition small forward's hate, it’ll help the team out."

The Sydney Swans Academy player was rookie-listed in November 2018 and was a consistent stand-out for the Sydney Swans’ NEAFL side in 2019. He became Sydney's fifth debutant of season 2020 when he was named to face Collingwood in Round 10, before finishing the season with seven appearances to his name. He enjoyed a breakout 2021 season that saw him make 21 appearances and become a key part of the club's return to finals football. In 2023 he signed a two-year contact which will keep him at the club until the end of 2025.

Fellow Pittwater Tigers visitor was 22-year-old West Australian Jack Buller, who joined Sydney via pick 13 in the 2023 Mid-season Draft from the Claremont Football Club. He is a key forward and ruck. 

Some of the Pittwater Tigers cohort

The Manly Warringah Wolves were successful as well, receiving a $11,000 grant that allowed the council to relocate the goal posts at Frank Gray Oval to allow for a second open-age field adding an extra 10 playing hours a week.

The council states this improvement will be further enhanced by the female amenities upgrade due to completed by it in September.

Mayor Sue Heins said, "These grants will not only enhance the facilities for the AFL Clubs but also ensure the community has more opportunities to connect and improve their health and wellbeing."

The council states it is committed to supporting the growth and development of local sports clubs and actively works with local groups to secure grants through third parties as well as the council grants program.

“With continued investment in facilities and programs, the Council aims to pave the way for future opportunities for growth and development, creating a thriving culture that benefits all residents,” Mayor Heins added.

Head of AFL NSW/ACT Andrew Varasdi said "We are thrilled to support our community clubs and councils to provide high-quality, accessible and welcoming facilities through the NSW Facilities Fund initiative.

"The Northern Beaches Council boasts the highest AFL participation of all local government areas in Sydney, and we hope the upgrade to North Narrabeen Reserve fields and Frank Gray Oval strengthen the foundations of grassroots footy locally and invite greater participation in our game.

"Creating the best environments that are fit for purpose so our players, parents and volunteers can enjoy our great game is of utmost importance to the AFL, and we look forward to seeing the community embrace these facility upgrades over the coming months." Mr Varasdi added.

Works to North Narrabeen Reserve fields are being done outside of the AFL season to reduce any impact to teams

The 2025 NSW Facilities Fund was established by AFL NSW/ACT to:

  • Maximise carrying capacity of existing venues by upgrading facilities and providing high-quality infrastructure.
  • Develop new and increased carrying capacity by constructing new ovals in growing communities and exploring innovative facility solutions.
  • Ensure inclusivity and accessibility, with particular emphasis on creating female-friendly environments and supporting the growing participation of women and girls.
  • Enhance the talent pathway, including resources for umpiring, dedicated spaces for volunteers, and maintaining landmark heritage sites associated with the game.
  • Facilitate partnerships with government and non-government bodies to improve the quantity, quality, and welcoming nature of community football venues.
  • Provide immediate support to those affected by natural disasters, ensuring community venues remain safe, accessible, and resilient.

Some more on this great grrrr- ant from Pittwater MP Jacqui Scruby:

Aussie music acts set to take the big stage

May 5, 2025
The Minns Labor Government states it is backing Aussie musicians by incentivising the biggest international musical touring acts to add a home-grown support act to their bill when they perform at NSW’s largest venues.

The effect will be a reduced venue hire fee at Accor Stadium, Allianz Stadium, CommBank Stadium, McDonald Jones Stadium, Newcastle Entertainment Centre, the Sydney Cricket Ground and WIN Stadium and Entertainment Centre, along with Sydney Opera House in return for choosing a local act to open the show.

Australian music is facing its biggest challenge up against streaming services that favour American content and the decline of the local live scene that eroded venues during the lockouts then the COVID era.

Under the former Coalition government, NSW lost more than half its music venues, with just 133 registered across the state in March 2023. The Minns Labor Government states it is reviving the live music scene and has since grown the number to 435 through extending trading for venues that host local artists, but there is a need to get acts back on to the biggest stage to ensure Australia can continue to export our best talent to the world.

The NSW Government is the first in Australia to adopt ‘Michael’s Rule’, named after the late artist manager Michael McMartin OAM whose passion was to see Aussie talent included on the stadium tours that take bands and solo artists to a whole new level and audience.

Oasis will tour Australia in October and November and have asked Australia’s Ball Park Music to open for them while Dua Lipa gave Kita Alexander invaluable exposure as her support act during her tour of Australia and New Zealand.

Supporting the biggest tours is a proven pathway to success. Teen Jesus and the Jean Teasers is now opening for Pearl Jam on a US stadium tour after doing so on their Australian tour. The Preatures, who supported Harry Styles, were able to book a 40-date regional tour as result.

Hoodoo Gurus, who were managed by Michael McMartin, saw their career take off after supporting Lou Reed in the 1980’s, while Cold Chisel opened for Foreigner in the 1970s. In the 1990s, You Am I played Australia shows with Soundgarden before touring the US with them, and the 2007 Daft Punk tour was crucial to the Presets and their Apocalypso album.

The incentive will see the NSW Government reduce the venue hire fee by $20,000 for each eligible show across the Venues NSW network, and a $5,000 reduction at Sydney Opera House.

To be eligible, at least one Australian artist must be included as a support act on an international artist’s headline tour. The Australian artist must appear on the same stage as the international artist and be announced at the same time as the tour.

The incentive will be available for an initial two-year period starting May 5.

Premier of New South Wales Chris Minns said:

“The Hoodoo Gurus got their first big break after they performed with Lou Reed in 1984.

“We want more Australian musicians to have that opportunity, performing on the biggest stages in NSW alongside the best international artists.

"Giving Aussie artists their first big break in front of thousands of locals will help them get high rotation on playlists and increase their chances of becoming the next big act.”

Minister for Music and the Night-time Economy John Graham said:

“There were just three Australian albums in the ARIA top 100 charts in 2024. This represents a crisis for Australian music.

“The rise of streaming is flooding our market with American music and creating a roadblock for NSW artists trying to break through. By adopting Michael’s Rule we will get more local acts on to the big stage.

“While local shows are suffering, fans are still paying the big money for big international acts. Michael’s Rule will help our local artists capture that attention.

“We want Australian artists to benefit from international touring revenue so they can build their own careers and take our music to the world. Successful bands and artists at the top of the industry are an important part for the overall scene in NSW which supports 14,000 jobs and adds $5.5 billion to the state economy."

Minister for Sport and Minister for Jobs & Tourism Steve Kamper said:

“We are bringing the entertainment back to Sydney, last year we lifted the concert cap and now we have promoters currently holding enough dates for Allianz Stadium to fulfill the recently expanded concert cap. We want to see those dates locked in.

“To make the most of this uplift in entertainment, we want to see homegrown artists given the opportunity to grow their fanbase and the domestic music industry. The flow on effects of Michael’s Rule will be huge not only for the artists, but for the pubs and clubs around NSW which will be packed with the new fans of our homegrown artists.”

Head of Sound NSW Emily Collins said:

“Australian artists are fighting an uphill battle with streaming services and social media algorithms when it comes to having their music be discovered by new audiences.

“This Australian-first policy is one small way the NSW Government can throw its weight behind home-grown talent, and give them a platform with high exposure and a unique opportunity to supercharge their career. It’s also a great way to start introducing music-loving locals to some of our amazing talent and build lifelong fans, right here at home.”

Teen Jesus and the Jean Teasers said:

"We are so happy to hear the news that the NSW Government are taking these steps to support Michael's Rule. We received the news at the airport on our way to Nashville to support Pearl Jam so we are proof that having Australian artists on international tours at home really does impact careers. Hopefully other states will join the call!"

Ball Park Music said:

“There’s no denying the benefit of a big support slot. The opportunity to play your music live in front of a new audience is the best marketing we have as artists, the chance to showcase what we’re all about in the most real and authentic fashion.

“In our career to date, we’ve had - and continue to get - great support slots where we’ve seen a direct growth in our audience that often translates to a boost in our number of long-term fans, none of which would have discovered us without that exposure.

Any initiative that can help amplify Australian talent, increase exposure, and aid in building a long term and engaged audience is a massive step in the right direction.”

NSW Government continues to build women’s football legacy

May 6, 2025

The NSW Government has announced a $400,000 investment in women’s football as a benefit of NSW hosting of 11 games at next year’s AFC Women’s Asian Cup Australia 2026™.

The NSW Football Legacy Program features five initiatives that will aim to develop the women’s game at all levels and leave a lasting legacy from NSW hosting games at the tournament, including the Final at Stadium Australia on 21 March 2026.

Initiatives delivered under the Program include:

  • Women in Leadership Program: empower women in football to have stronger confidence and a positive influence on the sport, build a network of advocates and prepare them to take on or advance their leadership positions.
  • Body Image and Well Being Program: educate and build confidence in young female representative footballers (National Premier League) aged 13 – 18 years in relation to body image and wellbeing.
  • Flexible Football Initiative: remove barriers to entry to grassroots football through flexible football format options for women
  • Coach and Referee Mentor Program: create role models within football to improve and increase the number of suitably qualified and experienced female coaches and referees.
  • First Nations Football: Provide pathway opportunities to first nations footballers aged 14 -16 years and coaches within high performance environments.

Minister for Sport Steve Kamper said:

“Women’s sport has seen tremendous growth and success in recent years, including the unforgettable performances of the Matildas at the FIFA Women’s World Cup 2023™.

“The Minns Labor Government wants to ensure that the momentum from that tournament and NSW’s hosting of 11 games at the AFC Women’s Asian Cup Australia 2026™ leaves a lasting legacy for women’s football in NSW at all levels.

“The initiatives delivered through the NSW Football Legacy Program will ensure football is a safe, inclusive and supportive environment for women and girls to play the World Game.

“Importantly, the Program will play a vital role in enabling young female footballers to develop a better understanding of the challenges that can stop them playing, like body image, resilience and confidence.

“The NSW Football Legacy Program is a key outcome of the NSW Government’s women’s sport strategy; Play Her Way which aims to enable more women and girls to play and stay involved in sport.”

Football NSW CEO John Tsatsimas said:

“Football NSW has experienced unprecedented growth in female football and we are delighted with the NSW Government’s continued commitment to our game.

“The initiatives being supported, including the Empower Her body image and wellbeing program, will help to ensure that football is an accessible, safe and enjoyable sport for women and girls across the state.

“We look forward to seeing the impact of these new and expanded programs over the coming years as Football NSW continues towards the goal of gender parity in our game.”

Northern NSW Football (NNSWF) CEO Peter Haynes said:

“Northern NSW Football is thrilled to receive this contribution from the NSW government, which will have a lasting impact on women and girls’ football in our region.

“This support will allow NNSWF to further enhance its Women in Football Leadership program, Coach and Referee Mentor Programs and First Nations Football activities.

“Investments in women’s football like this make a real difference to our football community and we appreciate the NSW government’s commitment to football in northern NSW.”

Football Australia General Manager - Women's Football Carlee Millikin said:

"Football Australia welcomes the NSW Government’s commitment of an additional $400,000 to the NSW Football Legacy Program.

“In 2024, we saw participation of women and girls in New South Wales soar up 9 per cent on 2023 levels. It’s a powerful sign that the legacy of the FIFA Women’s World Cup 2023 is still being felt, and it’s only just the beginning.

“With New South Wales set to host the AFC Women’s Asian Cup in 2026, we have another incredible opportunity to elevate the game even further—igniting passion, driving participation, and inspiring the next generation of footballers.

“This ongoing investment means we can keep building on the momentum, expanding our leadership pathways and unlocking new opportunities across every level of the game.

“We’re excited to continue this journey with the NSW Government, Football NSW, Northern NSW Football, and the entire football community—because together, we’re creating a future where football truly belongs to everyone.”

Saving our Species: Meet the Expert – Jill Smith

by NSW Climate Change, Energy, Environment and Water

A HISTORY OF PITTWATER - PART 1: DISCOVERY

by Pittwater Pathways (John Illingsworth)

Opportunities:

Soundboks Oz Grom Open – Now Bigger and Better Than Ever

Presented by O’Neill and Incorporating the WSL Traeger Grills Pro Junior

The 2025 Soundboks Oz Grom Open, hosted by Le-Ba Boardriders, is set to return for its 14th year of this iconic junior surfing competition. This long-standing event has evolved, bringing a fresh new look and feel as it attracts surfers, fans, and sponsors from around the world. With a brand-new naming sponsor, Soundboks, and presenting partner O’Neill, the event is poised to be bigger and better than ever.

Incorporating the WSL Traeger Grills Pro Junior, the event will take place from 3–8 July 2025 in the beautiful, surf-rich region of Lennox Head. As one of the most prestigious junior surfing competitions globally, the Soundboks Oz Grom Open brings together top-level competitors contending for national rankings, with the U16 and U18 divisions vying for selection to represent Australia at the International Surfing Association (ISA) World Junior Championships.

The Soundboks Oz Grom Open event features both the U14 to U18 divisions (competing for national rankings and ISA selection) and the WSL Traeger Grills Pro Junior, where surfers under 21 battle for qualification to the upcoming WSL World Junior Championships. This unique combination of elite junior talent and professional-level competition makes the event one of the most exciting junior surf events worldwide.

Taj Air - 2024 comp. Photo:  Surfing NSW – Ethan Smith

With divisions for both boys and girls and a strong focus on inclusivity and youth empowerment, the event celebrates surfing’s universal appeal—fostering confidence, community, and connection among the next generation of champions.

Built to mirror a WSL Tour event, it features a professional judging panel, computerised scoring, digital priority boards, athlete zones, and a live global webcast with commentary from world-renowned surf personalities, reaching more than one million viewers worldwide. In 2024, ISA World Junior Champion Dane Henry’s perfect 10-point ride wowed the crowd and racked up 1.1 million Instagram views, spotlighting the world-class talent the event attracts.

“The Oz Grom Open is more than a surf comp — it’s where the next generation of champions are forged and where our town comes together to celebrate youth, surf, and the coastal lifestyle,” said Anthony O’Brien, Event Manager. 

“Each year, the energy grows, and with new partners like Soundboks on board, 2025 will be our biggest event yet.”

Beyond the waves, the event has long been a key driver of the economy and regional tourism during the traditionally quieter winter season. Locals affectionately refer to it as Christmas in July, as families, surf fans, and athletes flock to Lennox, bringing a welcome upswing for local cafes, retail, accommodation, and tourism operators.

“The Grom Comp embraces so much of the Aussie surfer’s journey — the classic road trip, the grommet enthusiasm, and the time spent with other kids who all love surfing. Memories and friendships are made that stand the test of time... and maybe the opportunity to prove yourself in Australia’s biggest grom event. We are stoked to be involved,” said Rob Bain, O’Neill Marketing Director.

Whether you’re a surf fan, travelling family, or regional explorer, the event is the perfect chance to experience the Northern Rivers—from whale watching and rainforest hikes to vibrant markets, beachside dining, and its famously relaxed lifestyle.

Registrations open at 9 a.m. on Monday, 12 May, and close at 5 p.m. on Monday, 19 May. 

Full entry details and registrations will be available via the Soundboks Oz Grom Open website and the Surfing Australia Just Go platform. Surfers are encouraged to register early, as divisions are limited and demand is expected to be high.

New free TAFE courses to deliver Australia’s manufacturing workforce

The Albanese and Minns Labor governments have announced they are working together to build Australia’s future by growing the Australian manufacturing workforce, through Free TAFE.

Four new Free TAFE courses have been established, designed to upskill Australians, boost onshore capability, and support employment opportunities in the industry.

The four Free TAFE courses are being offered through the TAFE NSW Manufacturing Centres of Excellence, announced late last year to support manufacturing education and training across engineering, transport and renewable energy sectors.

Funded by $78.6 million matched investment from the Commonwealth and NSW governments ($157.2 million total over four years), the specialised training Centres are being established at TAFE NSW campuses in three of NSW’s major manufacturing industry areas – Newcastle/the Hunter, Western Sydney, and the Illawarra.

The Free TAFE courses have been designed with industry to upskill existing workers and equip the future domestic manufacturing workforce for emerging industry needs, boosting onshore manufacturing capability and providing more career opportunities for local workers.

Enrolments are now open for three Microskills (self-paced short courses) delivered online and one Microcredential:
  1. Discover renewable manufacturing careers – a Microskill introducing the industries, technologies and practices enabling renewable manufacturing in Australia.
  2. Discover advanced manufacturing careers – a Microskill introducing advanced manufacturing and its role in driving innovation, sustainability, and economic growth in Australia.
  3. Maths foundations in the manufacturing industry – a Microskill supporting students and workers with mathematical concepts to perform accurate calculations and solve problems in a manufacturing setting.
  4. Generative design and analysis – a Microcredential providing specialised training in advanced computer-aided drafting software for manufacturing product design and modelling to solve real-world manufacturing challenges.  
The four courses are the first of a series of short courses, education and training planned for delivery through the TAFE NSW Manufacturing Centres of Excellence this year.

To further support tertiary harmonisation, a University Partnership Panel has also been established to collaborate with the TAFE NSW Manufacturing Centres of Excellence on design and delivery of the specialised training. 

10 university partners across New South Wales, Victoria, and Queensland have been included on the University Partnership Panel and will collaborate with TAFE NSW over the next four years to support expertise in manufacturing education. 

This could include contributing subject matter expertise to inform new manufacturing courses, providing access to specialist equipment and facilities, and development of educational pathways and higher education qualifications.

The 10 universities are:
  1. University of Sydney
  2. University of Technology, Sydney
  3. Western Sydney University
  4. Macquarie University
  5. University of Wollongong
  6. University of Newcastle
  7. Charles Sturt University
  8. Griffith University
  9. RMIT University
  10. Swinburne University
Locally, the TAFE NSW Net Zero Manufacturing Centre of Excellence will boost local capability, enabling the community to take advantage of the opportunities of renewable manufacturing and the Hunter-Central Coast Renewable Energy Zone.

The Centre will deliver tailored, industry-aligned training needed to skill local workforces ready to lead in onshore manufacturing capabilities in resources, aviation, defence and transport.

The TAFE NSW Manufacturing Centres of Excellence are a joint initiative between the Australian Government and NSW Government under the National Skills Agreement.

Minister for Skills and Training Andrew Giles said:

“Free TAFE is changing lives and it is building Australia’s future. 

“The TAFE Centres of Excellence were established to be job-creating hubs, and this is more evidence that what we’re doing is working. 

“The Albanese and Minns Governments are ensuring manufacturing needs at a local, state and national level are backed by a pipeline of skilled workers and a strong economy for years to come.

“More Free TAFE courses, means more Free TAFE students and more Free TAFE success stories. 

“Through strong ongoing with industry and universities, TAFE is shaping the future of manufacturing education in Australia.”

Minister for Skills, TAFE and Tertiary Education Steve Whan said:

“These first four Fee-Free TAFE courses being delivered through the Centres of Excellence are just the beginning of the collaboration across TAFE NSW, universities and the manufacturing industry to support a skilled workforce to meet national challenges across the manufacturing sector.

“This partnership will deliver more technical and hands-on training to students across renewable energy and advanced manufacturing, with a focus on sustainable and technological innovation.”

Council's 2025 Environmental Art & Design Prize - Entries open now

Council has announced Ramesh Mario Nithiyendran (art) and Keinton Butler (design) as the judges for this year’s Environmental Art & Design Prize.

Now in its fifth year, Environmental Art & Design Prize is open to artists and designers of all levels and diverse disciplines from across Australia. Submissions will be accepted until 19 May 2025.

Mayor Sue Heins said the prize has developed into one of the leading competitions covering both art and design focusing on the environment.

“Each year fascinating art works and designs are submitted for this environmentally thought-provoking prize.

“The prize is an important platform for the natural environment to take centre stage, enabling artists and designers to share their work inspired by nature, climate change and sustainable living.

“In past years we have seen impactful submissions from creatives including painters, ceramists and furniture designers. This year we would also love to see more contributions from architects, product, fashion and industrial designers.

“We are looking forward to an amazing array of powerful artworks and designs for 2025,” Mayor Heins said.

This year’s judges have vast experience in the art and design worlds. Ramesh Mario Nithiyendran is a contemporary artist with his work appearing in galleries across the globe. Keinton Butler is Senior Curator at Sydney’s Powerhouse Museum and the Creative Director of Sydney Design Week.

There are four prizes on offer this year with prize money totalling $46000. 

The visual arts and design winners will each receive $20,000. The people’s choice winners and the young artists/designers have a prize pool of $3,000 each.

All finalists will be featured in an exhibition across the Council’s 3 galleries, Manly Art Gallery and Museum (MAG&M), Curl Curl Creative Space, and Mona Vale Creative Space Gallery from 1 August to 14 September 2025.

Finalists will be announced on Friday 23 May and the winners will be announced on Friday 1 August 2025.

For more information, and to enter, visit Council's webpage at: https://www.northernbeaches.nsw.gov.au/things-to-do/arts-and-culture/northern-beaches-environmental-art-and-design-prize   

Inaugural Murcutt Symposium 2025, 11-13 September 2025

Glenn Murcutt AO is Australia's most celebrated living architect. To mark more than five decades of architectural practice, the inaugural Murcutt Symposium offers 3 days of tours, activities and events in Sydney from 11-13 September 2025.

Murcutt will not be alone in headlining the Murcutt Symposium in 2025. Fellow Pritzker Prize winning architect and friend Francis Kéré will join Murcutt on stage over two days in Sydney - delivering a public lecture, and keynote at a one-day symposium.

Join us for a rare chance to come inside some of Murcutt's most awarded buildings on guided tours. Hear the backstory and share in tales of the design evolution from those who have lived in and loved these places.

Witness the first ever award of the Murcutt Pin, a new international award for architecture designed by Murcutt and presented at the flagship public Murcutt Oration in Sydney on Friday, 12 September.

Dive deep into the themes that have driven Murcutt and informed his unique model of practice, and his internationally awarded projects at a one-day symposium.

Join us for 3 days of tours, talks and deep dives into architecture with a meaningful connection to place.

Murcutt building tours
Thursday 11 September: 8am-5pm
This is an exceptionally rare chance to go inside the iconic Nicholas House (Mount Irvine) and Simpson Lee House (Mount Wilson), with Glenn Murcutt AO as your guide. 
Lunch provided. Vigorous walking involved. Numbers strictly limited.

Friday 12 September: 1.30pm-5pm
Come inside an early Murcutt house in Cromer, north of Sydney, that has been described as "a hidden masterpiece in the suburbs" - given a new life by architect Matt Chan, in consultation with Glenn Murcutt.
Vigorous walking involved. Numbers strictly limited.

Murcutt Oration 
Friday 12 September 2025: 6pm-8pm
Award of the inaugural Murcutt Pin, and Murcutt Oration 
The inaugural Murcutt Oration will be delivered by Francis Kéré, laureate of the Pritzker Prize (2022) and Praemium Imperiale (2023) - widely recognised as one of the worlds leading architects.

Murcutt Symposium 
Saturday 13 September 2025: 9am-5pm
Join us for a deep dive into the themes behind Murcutt's work (3 hours Formal CPD, 2 hours informal CPD):

In-conversation - Glenn Murcutt AO and Francis Kéré
Hear these two eminent Pritzker Prize winning architects and warm friends engage in conversation on events and experiences that have shaped their personal lives and their practice over decades. 

Keynote - Piers Taylor (UK)
Piers Taylor is the founder and principal of the highly awarded Invisible Studio, and Professor of Knowledge Exchange in Architecture at UWE; founding 2 renowned academic programs: ‘Studio in the Woods’ and 'AA Design and Make'. Both engage students in hands-on design and construction. Piers Taylor originally studied in Australia and currently lives in a prototypical self built award winning house in the UK and manages a 100 acre woodland as a research resource for the practice.

Healthy buildings breathe - Lindsay Clare, Ché Wall, Kerry Clare, Rod Simpson
Buildings that breathe and have good natural ventilation are now event more critical in a changing climate. Are our current planning and building regulatory settings match-fit? Three eminent practitioners question the current state of play at the intersection of architecture, environmental science and emerging building regulation. 

Design for climate/Design for change - Carol Marra, Marra + Yeh
Carol Marra is an award-winning architect and Churchill Fellow specialising in sustainable and climate-resilient design. For over 25 years, her architecture, advocacy and research have guided the success of city-based and regional projects. Awarded an Alastair Swayn Strategic Research grant, her practice recently released Design for Climate | Design for Change, a toolkit for climate-resilient design. Originally from Argentina but trained in the United States, Carol has worked across cultural landscapes from North America, Australia and the Asia Pacific region, in urban, regional and remote locations.

The Murcutt legacy - celebrated documentary film maker Catherine Hunter shares footage from 30 years following Glenn Murcutt AO.
Catherine Hunter has followed and documented the work of celebrated architect Glenn Murcutt for more than thirty years and collaborated on a number of film projects. Share in Murcutt's warmth, humanity and skill in pursuit of an architectural vision that always seeks to respond to place and provide delight.

Contributors
Glenn Murcutt AO, Australia
Francis Kéré, Germany/Burkina Faso
Piers Taylor, UK
Brit Andresen, Australia
Kerry Clare, Australia
Lindsay Clare, Australia
Ché Wall, Australia
Richard Leplastrier AO, Australia
Peter Stutchbury, Australia
Carol Marra, Australia  

Tickets are designed for you to choose one or more events, including ticket packages if you can't decide. 
The 2025 Murcutt Symposium is supported by the Robin Boyd Foundation and National Gallery of Victoria; Sydney Design Week (thanks to the Powerhouse); and the Futuna Chapel Trust (NZ). 

This event is presented in partnership with the State Library of New South Wales.

Financial help for young people

Concessions and financial support for young people.

Includes:

  • You could receive payments and services from Centrelink: Use the payment and services finder to check what support you could receive.
  • Apply for a concession Opal card for students: Receive a reduced fare when travelling on public transport.
  • Financial support for students: Get financial help whilst studying or training.
  • Youth Development Scholarships: Successful applicants will receive $1000 to help with school expenses and support services.
  • Tertiary Access Payment for students: The Tertiary Access Payment can help you with the costs of moving to undertake tertiary study.
  • Relocation scholarship: A once a year payment if you get ABSTUDY or Youth Allowance if you move to or from a regional or remote area for higher education study.
  • Get help finding a place to live and paying your rent: Rent Choice Youth helps young people aged 16 to 24 years to rent a home.

Visit: https://www.nsw.gov.au/living-nsw/young-people/young-people-financial-help

School Leavers Support

Explore the School Leavers Information Kit (SLIK) as your guide to education, training and work options in 2022;
As you prepare to finish your final year of school, the next phase of your journey will be full of interesting and exciting opportunities. You will discover new passions and develop new skills and knowledge.

We know that this transition can sometimes be challenging. With changes to the education and workforce landscape, you might be wondering if your planned decisions are still a good option or what new alternatives are available and how to pursue them.

There are lots of options for education, training and work in 2022 to help you further your career. This information kit has been designed to help you understand what those options might be and assist you to choose the right one for you. Including:
  • Download or explore the SLIK here to help guide Your Career.
  • School Leavers Information Kit (PDF 5.2MB).
  • School Leavers Information Kit (DOCX 0.9MB).
  • The SLIK has also been translated into additional languages.
  • Download our information booklets if you are rural, regional and remote, Aboriginal or Torres Strait Islander, or living with disability.
  • Support for Regional, Rural and Remote School Leavers (PDF 2MB).
  • Support for Regional, Rural and Remote School Leavers (DOCX 0.9MB).
  • Support for Aboriginal and/or Torres Strait Islander School Leavers (PDF 2MB).
  • Support for Aboriginal and/or Torres Strait Islander School Leavers (DOCX 1.1MB).
  • Support for School Leavers with Disability (PDF 2MB).
  • Support for School Leavers with Disability (DOCX 0.9MB).
  • Download the Parents and Guardian’s Guide for School Leavers, which summarises the resources and information available to help you explore all the education, training, and work options available to your young person.

School Leavers Information Service

Are you aged between 15 and 24 and looking for career guidance?

Call 1800 CAREER (1800 227 337).

SMS 'SLIS2022' to 0429 009 435.

Our information officers will help you:
  • navigate the School Leavers Information Kit (SLIK),
  • access and use the Your Career website and tools; and
  • find relevant support services if needed.
You may also be referred to a qualified career practitioner for a 45-minute personalised career guidance session. Our career practitioners will provide information, advice and assistance relating to a wide range of matters, such as career planning and management, training and studying, and looking for work.

You can call to book your session on 1800 CAREER (1800 227 337) Monday to Friday, from 9am to 7pm (AEST). Sessions with a career practitioner can be booked from Monday to Friday, 9am to 7pm.

This is a free service, however minimal call/text costs may apply.

Call 1800 CAREER (1800 227 337) or SMS SLIS2022 to 0429 009 435 to start a conversation about how the tools in Your Career can help you or to book a free session with a career practitioner.

All downloads and more available at: www.yourcareer.gov.au/school-leavers-support

Word Of The Week: microcosm

Word of the Week remains a keynote in 2025, simply to throw some disruption in amongst the 'yeah-nah' mix. 

Noun

1. a community, place, or situation regarded as encapsulating in miniature the characteristics of something much larger.

From Middle English: from Old French microcosme or medieval Latin microcosmus, from Greek mikros kosmos ‘little world’.

A microcosm is a small society, place, or activity which has all the typical features of a much larger one and so seems like a smaller version of it.

late 12c., mycrocossmos (modern form from early 15c.), "human nature, man viewed as the epitome of creation," literally "miniature world" (applied metaphorically to the human frame by philosophers, hence a favourite word with medieval writers to signify "a man"), from Medieval Latin microcosmus, from Greek mikros "small" + kosmos "world".

General sense of "a community constituting a world unto itself, a little society" is attested from 1560s, perhaps from French microcosme. A native expression in the same sense was petty world (c. 1600): 

Forrþi mahht tu nemmnenn mann Affterr Grikkishe spæche Mycrocossmos, þat nemmnedd iss Affterr Ennglisshe spæche Þe little werelld. ["Ormulum," c. 1175]

And the Anglo-Saxon glossaries have læsse middaneard.

A new publisher will focus on books by men. Are male writers and readers under threat?

Andrea Piacquadio/Pexels
Julian NovitzSwinburne University of Technology

A new publisher, Conduit Books, founded by UK novelist and critic Jude Cook, will focus on publishing literary fiction and memoirs by men: at least initially. Conduit is currently seeking its launch title, “preferably a debut novel by a male UK novelist under 35”. It aims to publish three books a year from 2026. Diminishing attention is now paid to male authors, Cook feels, creating a need for “an independent publisher that champions literary fiction by men”.

This argument has been made closer to home, too. Earlier this year, Australian poet and fiction writer Michael Crane bemoaned the diminishing space and attention for male authors, claiming to be unfairly overlooked as a white male author over 50.

Are there declining numbers of male authors in Australia and elsewhere? How is this reflected in prizes, readership statistics and sales? And if less men than women are reading, particularly literary fiction, then might this be a logical outcome of a gender divide in demand and engagement?

Prizes, working writers and sales

While more focused on age than gender, Crane noted “most books published locally are by women”. He also argued female writers have recently come to dominate the Miles Franklin Literary Award shortlist.

There is some truth in this: since 2012, the year the Stella Prize was founded, there have been 12 women winners of the Miles Franklin and just one man. In the equivalent preceding period (1999–2011), there were ten men and three women. So, there has been a change – even a flip – in the past decade or so.

That said, older male authors have historically been overrepresented in literary culture, both within Australia and globally. The shift seems, in part, a correction.

While the number of working writers in Australia has grown steadily since 1983, the percentage of male writers has diminished: from 55% (in 1988) to just 17% (as of 2023), according to a recent Creative Australia study of Australian professional artists.

Looking at last week’s Australian bestseller list, topped by US self-help guru Mel Robbins’ Let Them Theory, eight of ten authors are women. The bestseller list for Australian writers only, topped by colouring-in book Cosy Calm, is further dominated by women: no male writers are represented in the top ten.

Last year’s overall top ten bestseller list in Australia reads similarly: seven titles were authored by women. Two of these, ranked first and second, were RecipeTin Eats cookbooks by Nagi Maehashi.

In the UK, too, female authors are increasingly dominating publishing lists and the space and attention for male authors has dwindled. New and established male authors lack the “cultural buzz” associated with female authors like Sally Rooney, who have arguably captured the literary zeitgeist, wrote literary critic Johanna Thomas-Corr in the Guardian.

On the other hand, in the period when Australia’s leading literary prize had 12 women and one male winner (2012–24), the Man Booker Prize was still narrowly dominated by men, with eight male and six female winners. (Two women, Bernardine Evaristo and Margaret Atwood, shared the 2019 prize.)

And in the US during that period, the Pulitzer Prize for Fiction was heavily dominated by men, with nine male and four female winners. (The 2023 prize was shared, between Barbara Kingsolver and Hernan Diaz.) The 2025 Pulitzer was announced today: the fiction winner is Percival Everett, for James.

Do men need better stories?

While Cook’s project has its sceptics, it seems well intentioned. As Cook notes, current conversations around toxic masculinity make it more important than ever to “pay attention to what young men are reading”. Other commentators have argued the decline of male authors and readers is a cause for concern, too.

In recent months, Las Vegas English professor David J. Morris argued in the New York Times that dwindling interest in literary fiction represents emotional, cultural and educational regression among men in the United States. He notes women readers now account for about 80% of US fiction sales.

The alienated, disaffected young men who have been drawn to the “manosphere” and contributed to Trump’s second election win “need better stories – and they need to see themselves as belonging to the world of storytelling”. He makes a good case for the importance of literary fiction in developing emotional intelligence – and that the decline in male readership is therefore troubling.

Jude Cook. Literary Consultancy

Cook seems to agree: he believes important narratives and voices are being overlooked. He is keen to publish novels and stories that focus on fatherhood, masculinity, working-class life, relationships and other topics that relate to “navigating the 21st century as a man”.

He stresses, however, that Conduit Books is not taking an “adversarial stance”. It will “not exclude writers of colour, or queer, non-binary and neurodivergent authors”.

Women read more than men

A February 2025 Australia Reads survey indicates “avid readers” (who regularly start new books and read daily) are predominantly women, whereas “ambivalent readers” and “uninterested non-readers” were far more likely to be men.

Furthermore, recent research suggests there is still a significant gender bias in male reading habits. Men made up less than 20% of the readership for the top ten bestselling titles by female authors, Nielsen Bookscan data revealed in 2023. Conversely, the readership for bestselling titles by male authors was more evenly split: 56% men and 44% women.

Women, on balance, read far more than men do, and are much more willing to read books by men than men are to read books by women. It would be fair to say all writers of literary fiction are largely dependent on a predominately female audience – and have been for a long time.

Back in 2005, when male writers were not exactly underrepresented in the literary marketplace, UK novelist Ian McEwan embarked on an experiment. Seeking to clear out some shelf space, he took a stack of novels to a nearby park and attempted to give them away to passersby. The free books were happily accepted by women, but he failed to give away a single title to a man. McEwan gloomily concluded: “when women stop reading, the novel will be dead”.

Publishing and demand

Cook believes works by men that grapple with themes especially relevant to male readers are “not being commissioned” in the current literary environment.

2020 diversity study reported 78% of editorial staff in the UK are women (though the same study indicates just under half of senior management roles in publishing are still occupied by men).

An anonymous male publisher told the Guardian a few years ago “the exciting writing is coming from women right now”, but this was “because there aren’t that many men around. Men aren’t coming through.”

Another publisher, from literary imprint Serpent’s Tail, said: “If a really good novel by a male writer lands on my desk, I do genuinely say to myself, this will be more difficult to publish.”

a white man with glasses writing in a notebook
One publisher says: ‘If a really good novel by a male writer lands on my desk, I do genuinely say to myself, this will be more difficult to publish.’ Pixabay/Pexels

Sales figures seem to back this. The Guardian calculated, based on figures from the Bookseller, that 629 of the 1,000 bestselling fiction titles from 2020 were written by women, with 341 authored by men (27 were co-authored by men and women, and three were by non-binary writers). Of course, many still read the historical literary canon, which is overwhelmingly male.

Cook seems to argue men are now less interested in literary fiction because there are fewer contemporary male authors, and they attract less commentary and acclaim. But it is just as likely female authors have become more prominent because women are consistently more engaged with literary fiction – and the publishing market is simply adapting to cater to its principal audience.

Can we bring back male readers?

So will publishing and promoting more men bring back male readers? Or does this just amount to a demand that the overwhelmingly female audience for literary fiction should pay more attention to male authors? As literary critic Thomas-Corr notes, regardless of authorship, a lot of men

couldn’t give a toss about fiction, especially literary fiction. They have video games, YouTube, nonfiction, podcasts, magazines, Netflix.

Male writers are still well represented in these mediums, so perhaps it may be as or more important to devote serious attention to their narratives and storytelling practices. Novels aren’t, after all, the only engines for emotional intelligence or empathy.

Cook’s initiative will at the very least create more discussion around the growing absence of male authors and readers in literary spaces, and will probably ensure the first few titles published by Conduit Press will be received with interest. But given contemporary reading demographics, it seems reasonable to expect male authors will occupy an increasingly niche space in literary publishing.The Conversation

Julian Novitz, Senior Lecturer, Writing, Department of Media and Communication, Swinburne University of Technology

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Buddha’s foster mother played a key role in the orphaned prince’s life – and is a model for Buddhists on Mother’s Day

Prince Siddhartha with his foster mother Mahaprajapati. A 1910 painting by Maligawage Sarlis. Photo by MediaJet, 2009 via Wikimedia Commons
Megan BrysonUniversity of Tennessee

Mother’s Day offers an opportunity to reflect on what motherhood means in different religions and cultures. As a scholar of Buddhism and gender, I know how complicated Buddhist attitudes toward mothers can be.

The historical Buddha, Siddhartha Gautama, taught that family ties were obstacles to enlightenment. According to the Buddha, attachment to family causes suffering because family relationships eventually end and cannot offer lasting contentment. The main goal of Buddhism is to break the cycle of rebirth, which is characterized by suffering.

However, one family tie remained important for the Buddha – his relationship with his mother. Even after the Buddha left home, he continued to honor two mother figures – his biological mother, Maya, and his foster mother, known as Mahaprajapati Gautami in Sanskrit and Mahapajapati Gotami in the Pali language, which was used for early Buddhist scriptures in ancient India. These women played key roles in the Buddha’s life story, and they continue to inspire Buddhists today. Mahaprajapati specifically inspires women as the first Buddhist nun.

Many Buddhist scriptures describe reproduction and pregnancy in negative terms because they continue the cycle of rebirth. But Buddhist scriptures also express love and gratitude for mothers, especially the Buddha’s two mother figures.

Maya, the birth mother

Maya and Mahaprajapati were sisters who both married the Buddha’s father, Suddhodana, who ruled the region of Kapilavastu along the India-Nepal border. Maya’s name means “illusion,” which refers to a Hindu and Buddhist concept that the material world conceals the true nature of reality.

A drum panel showing a woman lying on her side and an elephant next to her. Several others stand around her, likely as guards.
Maya’s dream of the Buddha’s conception. Pakistan, second to third centuries C.E. © The Trustees of the British MuseumCC BY-NC-SA

Miracles related to Maya appear throughout stories of the future Buddha Siddhartha’s conception, gestation and delivery. Siddhartha is the Buddha of the current world cycle, but in Buddhist tradition there were other Buddhas in the past and there will be more Buddhas in the future. Each one goes through many rebirths before they attain Buddhahood, and each Buddha’s final rebirth follows the same pattern. According to Buddhist texts, Buddhas-to-be wait for the right time to be born, they choose their own parents, and they are not conceived through sexual intercourse.

Early Buddhist texts claim that Siddhartha chose Maya as his mother because of her purity and entered her right side in the form of an elephant while she was sleeping. According to some Buddhist scriptures, during Maya’s pregnancy the future Buddha never actually touched her womb, which was considered impure in early Indian Buddhism. When Siddhartha was born, he is said to have emerged from Maya’s right side as she stood, holding onto a tree branch.

A statue of a woman with one arm extended above her holding the branch of a tree. On her right is a newborn standing on flower petals.
The future Buddha Siddhartha being born from Maya’s right side as she stands, holding the tree. India, 11th century C.E. Collection of the Metropolitan Museum of Art. Purchase, Gift of Dr. Mortimer D. Sackler, Theresa Sackler and Family, and Joseph Pulitzer Bequest, 2007

Maya died seven days after her son’s birth, meaning that she did not live to see him become an enlightened Buddha. As the Buddha, even though Siddhartha encouraged his followers to leave domestic life and cut family ties, he never forgot his birth mother.

Thanks to her good karma, Maya had been reborn in the heavens as a god, but in Buddhism gods are not as spiritually advanced as Buddhas. The Buddha used his spiritual powers to travel to the heavens, where he preached to Maya and encouraged her progress on the Buddhist path.

One Chinese text claims that Maya spontaneously lactated upon hearing her son’s words, showing that the bond between mother and son remained strong even after her death.

Mahaprajapati, the foster mother

Siddhartha’s aunt Mahaprajapati became his foster mother after Maya died. She cared for the young Siddhartha and breastfed him, having just given birth to her own biological son, Nanda.

When Siddhartha was preparing to leave home to follow a spiritual path, the chariot driver tried to convince him to stay by reminding Siddhartha how Mahaprajapati nursed him and telling Siddhartha he should be grateful for her motherly kindness.

Siddhartha left home anyway, which caused Mahaprajapati to collapse out of grief. According to the Mahavastu, the earliest Sanskrit biography of the Buddha, her “eyes, as a result of her tears and grief, had become covered as with scales, and she had become blind.” It was only after Siddhartha returned as the Buddha that her sight was restored.

A panel showing a seated Buddha, with several figures on both sides. Prominent among those is a woman on his right offering a long cylindrical and tapering object like a flask.
A scene depicting the Buddha in the center with Mahaprajapati to his right, pleading with him to establish a nuns’ order. Pakistan, second to third centuries C.E. © The Trustees of the British MuseumCC BY-NC-SA

At around the same time as the Buddha’s return to his kingdom of Kapilavastu, his father Suddhodana died, making Mahaprajapati a widow. The books with rules for Buddhist monks and nuns, known as the Vinaya, report that Mahaprajapati approached the Buddha to ask whether women like her, as well as women whose husbands had become monks, could leave home to join the Buddha’s monastic order.

The Buddha eventually agreed to this request but warned that including women as nuns would cut short the lifespan of Buddhist teachings in the world from 1,000 years to 500 years. Mahaprajapati became the first Buddhist nun, reaching enlightenment before passing away at the age of 120.

Scholars of Buddhism do not necessarily treat this episode as literally true, but instead see it as a reflection of mixed attitudes toward admitting women as nuns in the early Buddhist community. These mixed attitudes can still be seen today – for example, in the unwillingness to reinstate the order of nuns in Southeast Asia, which died out centuries ago.

In Buddhism, nuns must be ordained by a group of 10 fully ordained monks and fully ordained nuns. An order of nuns still survives in China, Japan, Korea and Vietnam, where Mahayana Buddhism is practiced. However, the monastic leaders in Southeast Asia, where Theravada Buddhism is practiced, decided that Mahayana nuns could not ordain Theravada nuns, leaving countries such as Thailand, Laos, Cambodia and Myanmar without fully ordained nuns.

Legacies of the Buddha’s mothers

Both Maya and Mahaprajapati were loving mothers in the Buddha’s life story, but it is Mahaprajapati who has remained more of an inspiration for Buddhist women.

Reiko Ohnuma, a scholar of South Asian Buddhism, argues that Maya is remembered in Buddhist tradition as an idealized, if passive, maternal figure. Her death shortly after the future Buddha’s birth serves as a reminder that life is impermanent and characterized by suffering.

In contrast, Mahaprajapati lived a full life and played an active role in both raising the future Buddha and in advocating for women to join the monastic community. Early Buddhists may not have fully supported the inclusion of women in the Buddhist monastic community, but the nuns’ order was established nonetheless.

Mahaprajapati made this opportunity possible thanks to her unique position as the Buddha’s foster mother.The Conversation

Megan Bryson, Associate Professor of Religious Studies, University of Tennessee

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

William Morris: new exhibition reveals how Britain’s greatest designer went viral

Marcus WaitheUniversity of Cambridge

Hadrian Garrard, the curator of Morris Mania – an innovative exhibition now showing at the William Morris Gallery in Walthamstow, east London – tells the story of being in King’s Cross Station and spotting someone wheeling a shopping trolley covered in a plasticised Morris pattern. It reminded me of the time when a student thanked me for my teaching with a pair of Morris-themed flip-flops.

Mugs, tea towels, notepads, handbags and all manner of other incongruous objects make up this world of Morris merchandise. Much of it is made in China and remote from the purposes William Morris had in mind. How did this Victorian designer and socialist, known for championing craftsmanship and preferring substance over style, become an icon of consumer culture?

The exhibition’s tagline – How Britain’s Greatest Designer Went Viral – makes good sense. It’s not just that Morris stages an escape from the Victorian decorative world, but that his art proliferates in uncontrolled ways. The walk from Walthamstow station lays the groundwork in this regard: exhibition posters in shop windows, end-of-terrace murals and even the civic architecture, speak of something leaking from the gallery walls.

The first display in the exhibition tell the story of how we got here. Morris began spreading thanks to the commissions he received from aristocratic and royal clients. They were drawn to the medieval ethos of his work, and its rejection of industrialism in the arts. An important early contract was for the interiors at St James’s Palace.

But these establishment associations soon morphed and mutated, first among the English middle classes, who welcomed Morris’s designs into their suburban villas despite his new fondness for revolution, and then more remotely: one photograph shows Morris-patterned walls at St Peterburg’s Winter Palace, taken shortly after the Bolsheviks stormed the building. The socialism as it were, is turned inside out.

The earliest Morris merchandise was printed for a centenary exhibition at the V&A Museum in 1934. One of its patterned postcards appears in a display case, the souvenir of Morris’s own daughter, May, whose handwriting is on the back. In 1966, Morris’s designs went out of copyright, marking a watershed. Pop Victoriana and Laura Ashley floral dresses depended on it for their reproductive freedoms.

George Harrison’s “golden lily” jacket, from the Chelsea boutique Granny Takes a Trip, stands out as a poignant example of the ways in which Morris was recut and repurposed for the counterculture.

Morris’s “rose” pattern proves a particularly intrepid traveller, as the design chosen for the officers’ cushions on HMS Valliant, an early nuclear-powered submarine. Its onboard domesticity blends curiously with the menace of its mission.

Three turning points prepare us for the newest forms of Morris mania. The V&A’s 1996 exhibition repopularised Morris’s work, and thanks to new digital technology, its merchandise included printed mugs.

Then, in 2001, the British government instructed public collections to open their doors for free. In search of new income streams, museums turned to selling themed objects through their shops. The rise of China as a manufacturing hub complemented this emphasis – less by revolutionising working conditions and democratising design, as Morris had hoped, than with a flood of cheaply produced goods.

Beyond this revealing timeline, what really impresses is the exhibition’s care in preserving distinctions. It’s particularly careful to show that going viral need not mean selling out. From Nanjing – a major centre of Chinese manufacturing – comes a poster for the 2023 exhibition Beyond William Morris at the Nanjing Museum. It attracted over a million visitors, reminding us that behind the merchandise are new wells of love and respect.

Something similar applies at the level of making. For every sweatshop Hello Kitty, the same character appears in a beautifully crafted yukata (a casual kimono) in Liberty fabrics made in Japan.

A Brompton Bike hangs from the wall – manufactured in London, and sporting a handsome “willow bough” livery. Likewise, a neon “strawberry thief” motif, made at Walthamstow’s God’s Own Junk Yard, rekindles the embers of local production. This emphasis extends to the exhibition’s own making. A film documents the weaving of the Axminster carpet that furnishes the main room. Even the labels were dyed by hand with weld, a natural pigment whose use Morris revived.

In these ways, the exhibition champions ethical and bespoke production, while confronting the darker currents that move objects around our world. It also stays curious enough to push further by exploring the kitsch new frontier of “Morris” patterns generated by AI, or by populating a Victorian dresser with “crowdsourced” Morris bric-a-brac.

There might have been more space to consider why the surface effects of pattern travel so readily, and to quote Morris’s writings on the subject. But much of that is implicit and there for audiences to follow up.

Morris Mania excels by nurturing the joy behind all this promiscuous growth. Most pleasingly, that trolley from King’s Cross makes a reappearance, dressed here in an AI-adapted “strawberry thief”, courtesy of Sholley Trolleys, Clacton-on-Sea. Just like Morris himself, it was made in Essex.

Morris Mania: How Britain’s Greatest Designer Went Viral is at the William Morris Gallery until September 21 2025.The Conversation

Marcus Waithe, Professor of Literature and the Applied Arts, University of Cambridge

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Can a wooden spoon really stop a pot from boiling over? Here’s the science

Alexanderstock23/Shutterstock
Jay DeagonCQUniversity Australia and Gemma MannCQUniversity Australia

One moment, your spaghetti is happily bubbling away in the pot. A minute later, after busying yourself with something else, you turn around to find a hot mess all over your stove.

Boiling liquid can rocket up very quickly, and we often only have a split second to act. But are there ways to prevent the pot boiling over in the first place? One kitchen hack you may have seen on social media is to place a wooden spoon across the top of the pot.

Does it work? As with many kitchen science questions, there is an answer – and there’s lots of nuance, too.

In short, it will work, but not for long periods of time. Let’s dig into the why.

What causes the bubbles?

Interestingly, a pot of rapidly boiling pure water will not rise up the sides of the pot.

Ingredients added to the water are the culprits for overflow and spillage. Pots of pasta, rice, porridge or milk are the most prone to boiling over and making a mess. A heavy stew is less likely to bubble over – unless you overfill the pot.

In cookery, the key food molecules are water, carbohydrates, proteins, lipids (the collective term for fats and oils) and, to a lesser extent, vitamins and minerals.

The main culprits for rapid boiling and overflow are carbohydrates and proteins. When carbohydrates or proteins (or a combination of both) come into contact with heated water molecules, their properties change and structures rearrange.

Changes can happen quickly if the heat is high. Excited by lots of heat, the water molecules begin to boil rapidly. As this occurs, bubbles form.

Why do the bubbles rise so quickly?

The carbohydrates involved in bubbling up and messing up your kitchen are primarily plant starches. Pasta or porridge products are derived from plant starches such as wheat, rice, potato or corn. If you’re boiling anything with milk, a protein called casein can contribute to the bubbles, too.

Casein and starches are known as colloids. “Colloidal dispersion” means that not all such particles will dissolve into a water solution, because some of these particles are too large. As bubbles form, the larger starch and/or protein particles start to coat the bubbles.

For pasta water or porridge, the heat and starch solution starts to form a gel. This gel becomes sticky and, depending on the type of starch and other additives, the temperature of the boiling solution can rise above 100°C.

So, they’re not just bubbles – they’re hot, sticky bubbles. Filled with air and coated with a sticky starch gel, as the solution continues to boil, the bubbles build on top of each other and rise up the sides of the pot.

It’s a little different with milk. Have you ever noticed a film across the top of boiled milk? Milk skin is formed by heated casein. When heated, the casein can become quite strong – like plastic – and coat each bubble. Milk bubbles are smaller and become more of a foam, but they can still rise quickly.

A pot of foamy milk on a stovetop with a wooden spoon placed across it.
Boiling milk forms smaller bubbles – more like a foam – because of the cassein in the milk. Ahanov Michael/Shutterstock

So, how does a wooden spoon stop the bubbles?

Placing a wooden spoon over a boiling pot acts as an interruption to the bubbles – it lowers the surface temperature and provides a porous surface to burst the bubbles. This stops them from climbing over the edge of the pot.

To understand why, picture another porous surface: the structure of a sponge. Because the sponge has a lot of holes in it, you can blow air through a dry sponge. However, air does not pass through a wet sponge because the holes are filled with water.

Wood is a porous material, and a dry wooden spoon is more porous than when it’s wet. On contact with the wood, the air in the bubbles is released.

But you can’t just leave a wooden spoon over the pot indefinitely and expect it to not boil over. As the spoon is exposed to heat, moisture, sticky starch or casein bubbles, it will soon become the same temperature as the liquid. That means it won’t reduce the surface temperature any more, nor be porous enough to burst bubbles.

This is why some people claim the spoon hack doesn’t work – because it has a limited window of effectiveness.

What should I do instead?

Stirring the pot or using the wooden spoon as a fan would work equally as well.

Better yet, try not to get distracted in the kitchen and select the correct kitchen tools for the job: use a bigger pot, and turn down the heat so it’s not just going full blast.

We like to treat working in the kitchen like a meditation. Remain present and in the moment. If you do get distracted, turn the stove to its lowest setting, switch it off or remove the pot from the heat. The phrase “a watched pot never boils” doesn’t count in this situation. Indeed, a watchful eye on the pot is essential.The Conversation

Jay Deagon, Senior Lecturer of Home Economics, CQUniversity Australia and Gemma Mann, Senior Lecturer in Access and Equity in Education, CQUniversity Australia

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

How did sport become so popular? The ancient history of a modern obsession

Roman mosaics discovered in Sicily show women playing different sports. David Pineda Svenske/Shutterstock
Konstantine PanegyresThe University of Western Australia

It’s almost impossible to go a day without seeing or hearing about sport.

Walk around any city or town and you will almost always catch a glimpse of people playing sports in teams or participating solo.

Turn on the TV or radio and you’ll be able to find some kind of sport being played at international or national level.

Why do people love sport so much?

To answer this question, it’s worth a dive back into ancient history.

An ancient person’s perspective

One of the most famous figures from the ancient world, Saint Augustine of Hippo (354-430 AD), once wrote that when he was a boy he was obsessed with playing sports:

I liked to play ball as a boy and my playing slowed my progress in learning to read and write.

The earliest portrait of Saint Augustine in a 6th century fresco, Lateran, Rome.
The earliest portrait of Saint Augustine in a 6th century fresco, Lateran, Rome. Wikimedia CommonsCC BY

In fact, Saint Augustine was so preoccupied with playing ball that his teacher was said to sometimes beat him for it. His teacher said it was bad to waste one’s youth on such things – it’s better to study hard.

Why was Saint Augustine obsessed with ball games? He loved to win:

I loved to play games […] in these games I was overmastered by my vain desire to excel, so I used to strive to win, even by cheating.

Plenty of people today probably share Saint Augustine’s view that winning is one of the things that make sport enjoyable.

Of course, there are many other reasons why people might like to play sport.

What sports did they play?

If you walked down a city street in ancient Greek and Roman times, it’s likely you’d come across children or even adults playing a ball game.

Handball games played in ancient Greece.
Handball games played in ancient Greece. Gardiner, E. Norman/Wikimedia CommonsCC BY

The Roman playwright Plautus (3rd/2nd century BC) even has one of his characters complain about people “who play ball in the street”.

Ball games were probably the most popular sporting activity in the ancient world and could be played in many different ways.

In one ball game, called episkyros, two teams competed against each other. If one team got the ball over the line behind the other team, they scored. Feet and hands could be used and tackles were permitted.

Sounds familiar, doesn’t it?

Of course, many other sports were also popular: athletics, swimming, wrestling, lifting weights and boxing were all favourites.

Ancient ideas about the origins of sports

For the ancient Greeks, the earliest mention of a ball game appears in the Odyssey, an epic poem composed by the poet Homer in probably the eighth or seventh century BC.

In the Odyssey, Nausicaa, daughter of the King of the Phaeacians, plays a ball game with some other girls on the beach. While they throw the ball, they sing songs:

Then when they had had their joy of food, she and her handmaids, they threw off their headgear and fell to playing at ball, and white-armed Nausicaa was leader in the song.

During the game, Nausicaa throws the ball too far. Her maid can’t catch it and the ball flies into the sea. All the girls shout out when it goes flying.

Already in the 3rd century BC, Nausicaa was sometimes regarded as the inventor of ball games. However, other people attributed the invention of ball games to different regions of Greece, saying the games were invented by the Sicyonians or Spartans.

But it is unlikely any Greeks were the original inventors of ball games.

In Egypt, thousands of years before Homer’s epics, there are already artistic depictions of ball games.

For example, in the tomb of the Nomarch of the 11th Dynasty (c. 2150-2000 BC), Baqet III, there is artwork showing women playing ball games and men wrestling each other.

Ancient ball games
Ancient ball games. J. Murray/PicrylCC BY

Baqet III, whose tomb contained these artistic depictions of various sports, was likely a true sports lover.

Why did people like sports?

People liked ball games for many different reasons.

One was for the sheer fun and excitement. Another was because they were considered a healthy type of exercise.

Ancient Greek and Roman doctors even told their patients to play ball games to become healthier.

For example, the famous ancient Greek physician Galen (129-216 AD) wrote an essay titled On Exercise with a Small Ball.

He argued “exercises with a small ball are superior to other kinds of exercises”.

He claimed ball games were especially healthy because they moved all of the muscles and because teamwork was good for the soul.

People in the ancient world also thought just watching sport could be something worth doing.

The writer Lucian of Samosata (born 120 AD), for instance, said watching athletes competing for glory could help to encourage men to achieve similar feats: “many of the spectators go away in love with manfulness and hard work”, wrote Lucian.

So it seems there’s nothing new about our modern love of playing and watching sports, and this obsession will probably continue for thousands of years into the future.The Conversation

Konstantine Panegyres, Lecturer in Classics and Ancient History, The University of Western Australia

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

How Lady Gaga acts as a custodian of hope

M. Tina DacinQueen's University, Ontario 

In an age of cynicism and despair, Lady Gaga’s recent Coachella performance “The Art of Personal Chaos” brings audiences hope.

Over two weekends, audiences were treated to a visually lavish set, flawless choreography and strong vocals. Gaga’s performance in five acts — staged for fans as an opera house set in the Indio, California desert — was a self-reflexive event exploring many influences upon the singer.

Gaga’s performance paid homage to past greats such as Michael Jackson and Prince as well as her different past selves. From donning armour and crutches from her “Paparazzi” persona to her Fame-era look, Gaga showed that where she is today follows and emerges from every iteration of her artistic identity over the years.

The evocation and embodiment of her different selves suggested not only a journey of mixed emotions and struggles regarding fame, but her negotiation and resolution of these struggles as pathways into a promising future.

In a recent interview, Gaga highlights that for her, despite emotional struggles and pain, reflexiveness, acceptance and forward thinking can yield eventual peace and happiness.

For me as scholar who researches organizations, Gaga’s performance is an allegory of the need for stewarding change and transition in today’s world.

Allegory of the need to steward change

In my work with organizational scholars Peter Dacin and Derin Kent, we suggest that people involved in stewarding change and transition in organizations are “custodians” — people with a vested interest in protecting traditions, while also reimagining and renewing them over time.

Lady Gaga, ‘Vanish Into You,’ Coachella 2025 Livestream Feed.

As our work argues, custodians are agents of maintaining the best aspects of cultural continuity, as well as change. Such custodians in workplaces or social organizations facing disruption take valued remnants from the past and curate them to be accessible and relevant for the future.

Gaga’s performance reminds us how artists may be understood to serve this role for society at large. This leads us to view Gaga as an architect of future possibility, a “custodian of hope.”

Cultivating expectations, visions

Custodians of hope are deliberately prospective — meaning, they cultivate expectations and concrete visions for the future.

They craft futures that are worth preserving. They do this by translating current and past practices through renewal and reinvention and by keeping things continually refreshed. Gaga did this by reimagining her past hits during her performance and by injecting them with a new and renewed sense of energy and style.

As writer Coleman Spilde’s brilliant review in Salon noted, Gaga’s performance reminds us that in a world where it’s easy to feel defeated, “beauty is not lost; it’s just harder to find.”

Throughout several of the numbers performed during her Coachella set, Gaga showed that existing in the present is not so simple. Battles are fought and choices must be made. By embodying resilience, Gaga gives us hope and inspiration that in a world full of volatility and despair, small acts of resistance and emotional contagion can craft and recraft the future.

The past is a resource for renewal

According to recent research by organizational studies scholars Matthias Wenzel, Hannes Krämer, Jochen Koch and Andreas Reckwitz, people can work to make alternative futures that are not strictly bound to the past but still align with their values. We shouldn’t just passively allow the future to unfold: we need to be intentional about crafting truly desirable futures, as suggested by organizational scholars Ali Aslan Gümüsay and Juliane Reinecke.

As my research with entrepreneurship scholar Nico Klenner examines, custodians of hope care for the past while projecting the past into futures they and others desire.

Yet Gaga goes beyond merely preserving tradition. As a custodian, Gaga curates the past, showing us that tradition is not simply the weight or remnant of the past. Bits of the past are reworked and recrafted as she selectively incorporates past styles of Prince and Michael Jackson into her performance as well as nods to fashion moments of her varied personas.

As expressed by a fan on Tik Tok, dance moves choreographed during “Shadow of a Man” are reminiscent of Jackson. The past becomes a valuable resource for renewal and reinvention moving us towards what might be.

Evoke emotion to enlist others

However, invoking the past is not enough. To realize change, custodians need to evoke emotion to enlist others. As sociologist Ann Mische suggests, hope is ultimately an emotion of possibility.

As a custodian of hope, Gaga takes audiences through an emotionally laden and inclusive journey that reminds us how struggles can be overcome through acts of confrontation, defiance and resilience. For example, during her performance of “Poker Face” performed on a chess board, Gaga confronts a blond figure, an earlier version of her past self.

Early on in her second performance at Coachella, Gaga experienced a wireless microphone failure and grabbed a connected mic and exclaimed: “I’m sorry my mic was broken for a second; At least you know I sing live; And I guess all we can do is our best; I’m definitely giving you my best tonight; I love you so much,” sending the crowd into an uproar.

The audience experienced a collective sense of resilience or effervescence, in what seemed to be a public celebration of generosity and improvisation above perfection.

Collective sense of care

Through interactivity with the audience via the live performance and livestream, fans are drawn in to co-imagine the future not through Lady Gaga but with her. Asking the crowd to raise their “monster paws” signals encouragement and support highlighting the importance of a sense of collective care.

In addition to evoking emotion, Gaga reminded us of the importance of anchoring her vision for the future in the collective sense of care embedded in the Born This Way Foundation. For example, her #BeKind365 platform has logged millions of acts of kindness since its inception. This shows how value can be generated through structured supports or programs that link positive emotion with specific and concrete acts.

Gaga curates as well as extends the past through renewal and reinvention to enlist new believers into a plausible path forward. Her performance underscores that hope is not a one-off moment but rather, an ongoing custodial effort of curating and reconciling the past towards a kinder and more authentic future.The Conversation

M. Tina Dacin, Stephen J.R. Smith Chaired Professor of Strategy & Organizational Behaviour, Queen's University, Ontario

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Labor has promised fast action to cut student debt, but arts students will have to wait for lower fees

Andrew NortonMonash University

Labor’s federal election win means university fees and costs are set to change. But some of these changes will not be immediate.

Prime Minister Anthony Albanese has already said planned cuts to student debt will be a top priority for the the new parliament. A new student debt repayment system will follow soon after.

But humanities students paying nearly A$17,000 a year for their studies – thanks to the Job-ready Graduates scheme introduced by the Morrison government – will probably have to wait until 2027 for lower fees.

Reduction in student debt

People with student debt will benefit from a 20% cut to how much they owe. As the Greens support wiping student debt entirely, Labor is likely to only need one or two other senators to pass the cut.

With more Labor senators elected, Labor will be less reliant on crossbenchers to get legislation through parliament.

Labor says the debt reduction will apply before 3.2% indexation is applied to HELP loan balances on June 1 this year. Given this deadline is mere weeks away, the necessary legislation will probably need to be retrospective.

On average, the 20% reduction will save Australia’s 3 million student debtors about $5,500 each.

A new student debt repayment system

Another promised Labor change will deliver quick cash benefits to the about 1.2 million people making compulsory student debt repayments.

If the Senate agrees, for the 2025-26 financial year, the income threshold to start repaying student loans will increase from $56,156 to $67,000. Anyone earning less than $67,000 in 2025-26 will repay nothing that financial year, compared to between $561 and $1,340 under current settings.

Once the $67,000 income threshold is reached, student debtors will repay 15% of their income above this amount up to an income of $125,000, when the rate moves up to 17%. For example, a person earning $68,000 will be $1,000 above the new threshold – 15% of $1,000 equals a repayment of $150. Under the current system, somebody earning $68,000 would repay $1,360.

Employers will deduct lower HELP repayments from their payroll, delivering extra cash to student debtor employees. Given the limited time before the thresholds are scheduled to change on July 1, employers may start with the old repayment system and transition to the new one after the necessary legislation passes.

Understand the fine print

During the election campaign, the Parliamentary Budget Office released work it did on HELP repayment scenarios for independent ACT Senator David Pocock, who was reelected on Saturday.

This showed how under Labor’s proposed system, people with student debt will take longer to repay and incur higher indexation costs. If student debtors are concerned about this they can make voluntary repayments.

What happens to the Job-ready Graduates scheme?

A key to reducing repayment times is students accruing less debt in the first place. The Morrison government’s Job-ready Graduates policy increased student contributions for business, law and most arts subjects. Currently they pay $16,992 a year for their studies.

The Coalition introduced this change in 2022 in a bid to encourage more university students to study “job-ready” teaching, nursing and STEM subjects.

A new Australian Tertiary Education Commission, which Labor plans to legislate in the second half of 2025, will review student contribution levels as part of its broader role in managing the domestic student funding system.

Last year, the Australian Universities Accord final report recommended student contributions should no longer be designed to steer course choices. Instead they should be based on expected future earnings.

Using this principle, humanities students would pay the cheapest student contribution level. But this will not happen quickly.

The new commission has a lot of work to do, with new student contributions forming part of a broader funding overhaul. The government then needs to accept any recommendations and legislate the new rates.

Unfortunately for current students, this process means that student contributions are unlikely to change before 2027 at the earliest.

International students

While many domestic students are set to eventually pay less for their education, international students face early increases in costs. During the election campaign, Labor announced student visa application fees will increase from $1,600 to $2,000. As recently as June 2024 the visa application fee was only $710.

This latest visa increase adds another item to an already long list of policies designed to discourage or block potential international students. It probably isn’t the last.

Although student visa applications have trended down, the number of student visa holders in Australia at the end of March 2025 was higher than at the same time in 2023 or 2024.

The government might try again to legislate formal caps on international student numbers. The Greens combined with the Liberals to block this in 2024.

Commonwealth Prac Payments

With Labor returned, eligible teaching, nursing and social work students will receive $331.65 a week when on mandatory work placements.

While the “Commonwealth Prac Payments” policy is scheduled to start on July 1, the necessary legal instrument is not yet in place.

Late in the election campaign the Coalition announced that, if elected, it would proceed with Prac Payments as a loan, rather than a grant.

With the election result, Prac Payments can go ahead as originally planned. The minister can authorise the necessary delegated legislation before parliament sits. While the Senate could later “disallow” Prac Payments, the new Senate numbers make this very unlikely.

Needs-based funding

Labor’s election win should see another so far unlegislated program – needs-based funding for equity students – proceed as promised from January 1 2026.

This will be a per student payment made to universities for each low socioeconomic status and First Nations student, along with each student enrolled at a regional campus. The idea is similar to needs-based funding for schools.

Whether or not current education minister Jason Clare remains in the portfolio, Labor has a large higher education agenda to implement. In some areas the detail is already clear. But significant work remains to develop the new Australian Tertiary Education Commission and a new domestic student funding system.

With several policy start dates due in the next eight weeks, the government will need to move quickly.The Conversation

Andrew Norton, Professor of Higher Education Policy, Monash University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

For 100 years, we have marvelled at planetariums. Here’s a brief history of how humans brought the stars indoors

Ulverstone Planetarium, Hive Tasmania
Martin BushThe University of Melbourne and Tanya HillMuseums Victoria Research Institute

Picture this: a small audience is quietly ushered into a darkened room. They gasp in awe, as a brilliant night sky shines above. They wonder – as many after them will do – what trickery has made the roof above their heads disappear?

But this is a performance; the stars above an ingenious projection. For the first time a public audience has experienced the spectacle of the opto-mechanical planetarium. The location is the newly opened Deutsches Museum in Munich, built to celebrate science and technology. The date is May 7 1925.

Visualising the heavens

Throughout time, cultures around the world have used the stars to help make sense of the world, to understand where we come from and determine our place in the cosmos.

People have tried to recreate the movements of the stars and planets since antiquity. In the 1700s, the orrery, a clockwork model of the Solar System, was developed. The word “planetarium” was invented to describe orreries that featured the planets.

One room-sized orrery example was built by the self-taught Frisian astronomer Eise Eisinga. It’s still operational today in Franeker, Netherlands.

No human has ever been to the edge of the Solar System to see this view. Orreries, and other mechanical models of the universe like celestial globes, present views from impossible, external perspectives.

Eise Eisinga’s orrery was constructed on a scale of 1mm:1 million km with the pendulum clock that drives the mechanism located in the ceiling above. Erik ZachteCC BY-SA

The first planetariums

The desire for a realistic view of the stars and planets, created from a perspective we actually see, gathered pace in the early 20th century as light pollution from growing cities diminished the view of the night sky.

People like Oskar von Miller, first director of the Deutsches Museum in Munich, Germany, wanted to return this vision of the stars and planets to everyone. (Ironically, von Miller’s earlier career was as an electrical engineer, rolling out the city lighting that contributed to light pollution.)

One early attempt to create this view of the night sky was the Atwood Sphere, installed in Chicago in 1913.

Approximately five metres across, it was made of sheet metal perforated with a star map. When viewed from the inside, the light shining through 692 pinholes replicated the Chicago night sky. The whole structure could even be rotated to simulate the motion of the stars.

A realistic display of the stars is one thing. Representing the planets, whose positions in the sky change from night to night, is a different one. Von Miller and others at the Deutsches Museum knew that fixed holes could not represent the complexity of a moving planet.

What if the planets were displayed by projection? If so, couldn’t the stars be projected, as well? With this realisation, a new kind of planetarium was born, borrowing the name from earlier orreries but working in a completely different way.

The task of building such a device was given to the German optical company Carl Zeiss AG. After many setbacks, their first planetarium projector was completed in 1923, with the first performance at the Deutsches Museum a century ago today.

Planetariums were a hit with the public. Within decades, they had spread around the world – the first planetarium in the United States opened in Chicago in 1930, while the first one in Asia opened in Osaka, Japan in 1937. The popularity of planetariums particularly accelerated in the US during the space race of the 1960s.

Australia’s oldest operating planetarium is the Melbourne Planetarium, managed by Museums Victoria since 1965. In Aotearoa New Zealand, Auckland’s Stardome Observatory has been in operation since 1997. The current longest-running planetarium in the southern hemisphere is in Montevideo, Uruguay, operational since 1955.

Changing pace of technology

The opto-mechanical planetarium projector remains a technological wonder of the modern world. Individual plates, perforated with pinholes, are illuminated by a bright central light. Separate lenses focus each projection from one of these star maps to fill the entire dome with about 5,000 stars.

The Sun, Moon and planets have separate projectors driven by gears and rods that mechanically calculate the object’s position in the sky for any time or place.

The Zeiss ZKP-1 star projector was installed at Adelaide Planetarium in 1972. Adelaide Planetarium

By the 1990s, a digital revolution had begun. With the advent of computers, the positions of the planets could now be calculated digitally. The Melbourne Planetarium became the first digital planetarium in the southern hemisphere when it installed the Digistar II in 1999.

This system, developed by computer graphics company Evans and Sutherland, replaced the multiple lenses of earlier projectors with a fisheye lens. A single beam of light swept across the whole dome so rapidly that it seemed to create a single image – albeit in a bizarre green colour, rendering a starfield of fuzzy green blobs.

The first accurate fly-through of a star field was created by Evans and Sutherland and used as the opening credits of Star Trek II: Wrath of Khan (1982).

The trade-off for a less crisp starfield was a 3D database with more than 9,000 stars. For the first time, planetarium audiences could fly through space, far beyond the edge of the Solar System.

Planetarium technology continues to develop. Today, most planetariums operate through video projection. Known as fulldome, the output from multiple projectors is blended together to create a seamless video, transforming the planetarium into a sophisticated 360-degree theatre.

A still fulldome frame from Melbourne Planetarium’s production Moonbase One, released in 2018. Museums Victoria

A gateway to the stars

Astronomy has also changed over the last century. Just as Zeiss was completing its first projector, astronomer Edwin Hubble discovered that other galaxies exist beyond our Milky Way galaxy.

The stars shown on the dome in Munich in 1925 turned out to be just a tiny part of the universe that we know today.

Planetariums’ digital systems now incorporate data from telescopes and space agencies around the world. Audiences can fly off Earth, orbit the planets and moons of the Solar System, and explore the billions of known galaxies.

In the planetarium, data from the GAIA spacecraft shows the little Sagittarius Dwarf Galaxy dropping stars like breadcrumbs as it orbits the Milky Way. Museums VictoriaCC BY-SA

Yet some things have not changed. From orreries and lantern slides to opto-mechanical and digital planetariums, the communication of astronomy has always been about more than just the latest results of science.

The power of the planetarium over the last 100 years has been its ability to evoke wonder and awe. It taps into our enduring fascination with the vast mystery of the night sky.The Conversation

Martin Bush, Senior Lecturer in History and Philosophy of Science, The University of Melbourne and Tanya Hill, Honorary Fellow at University of Melbourne and Senior Curator (Astronomy), Museums Victoria Research Institute

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Why do some people get a curved back as they age and what can I do to avoid it?

fran_kie/Shutterstock
Jakub MesinovicDeakin University and David ScottDeakin University

As we age, it’s common to notice posture changes: shoulders rounding, head leaning forward, back starting to curve. You might associate this with older adults and wonder: will this happen to me? Can I prevent it?

It’s sometimes called “hunchback” or “roundback”, but the medical term for a curved back is kyphosis.

When the curve is beyond what’s considered normal (greater than 40 degrees), we refer to this as hyperkyphosis. In more severe cases, it may lead to pain, reduced mobility and physical function, or lower quality of life.

Here’s how it happens, and how to reduce your risk.

What causes a curved back?

A healthy spine has an elongated s-shape, so a curve in the upper spine is completely normal.

But when that curve becomes exaggerated and fixed (meaning you can’t stand up straight even if you try), it can signal a problem.

One common cause of a curved back is poor posture. This type, called postural kyphosis, usually develops over time due to muscle imbalances, particularly in younger people who spend hours:

  • hunched over a desk
  • slouched in a chair, or
  • looking down at a phone.

Fortunately, this kind of curved back is often reversible with the right exercises, stretches and posture awareness.

Man with impaired posture position
When the curve in your back becomes exaggerated and fixed, it can signal a problem. Undrey/Shutterstock

Older adults often develop a curved back, known as age-related kyphosis or hyperkyphosis.

This is usually due to wear and tear in the spine, including vertebral compression fractures, which are tiny cracks in the bones of the spine (vertebrae).

These cracks are most often caused by osteoporosis, a condition that makes bones more fragile with age.

In these cases, it’s not just bad posture – it’s a structural change in the spine.

An older man with a curved back walks on a path.
Older adults often develop a curved back, known as age-related kyphosis or hyperkyphosis. nhk_nhk/Shutterstock

How can you tell the difference?

Signs of age-related hyperkyphosis include:

  • your back curves even when you try to stand up straight
  • back pain or stiffness
  • a loss of height (anything greater than 3-4 centimetres compared to your peak adult height may be considered outside of “normal” ageing).

Other causes of a curved back include:

  • Scheuermann’s kyphosis (which often develops during adolescence when the bones in the spine grow unevenly, leading to a forward curve in the upper back)
  • congenital kyphosis (a rare condition present from birth, caused by improper formation of the spinal bones. It can result in a more severe, fixed curve that worsens as a child grows)
  • scoliosis (where the spine curves sideways into a c- or s-shape when viewed from behind), and
  • lordosis (an excessive inward curve in the lower back, when viewed from the side).

In addition to these structural conditions, arthritis, and in rare cases, spinal injuries or infections, can also play a role.

Should I see a doctor about my curved back?

Yes, especially if you’ve noticed a curve developing, have ongoing back pain, or have lost height over time.

These can be signs of vertebral fractures, which can occur in the absence of an obvious injury, and are often painless.

While one in five older adults have a vertebral fracture, as many as two-thirds of these fractures are not diagnosed and treated.

In Australia, the Royal Australian College of General Practitioners and Healthy Bones Australia recommend a spine x-ray for:

  • people with kyphosis
  • height loss equal to or more than 3 centimetres, or
  • unexplained back pain.

What can I do to reduce my risk?

If you’re young or middle-aged, the habits you build today matter.

The best way to prevent a curved back is to keep your bones strong, muscles active, and posture in check. That means:

  • doing regular resistance training, especially targeting upper back muscles
  • staying physically active, aiming for at least 150 minutes per week
  • getting enough protein, calcium, and vitamin D to support bone and muscle health
  • avoiding smoking and limiting alcohol to reduce risk factors that worsen bone density and overall wellbeing

Pay attention to your posture while sitting and standing. Position your head over your shoulders and shoulders over your hips. This reduces strain on your spine.

A woman sits hunched over her laptop
If you’re young or middle-aged, the habits you build today matter. Doucefleur/Shutterstock

What exercises help prevent and manage a curved back?

Focus on exercises that strengthen the muscles that support an upright posture, particularly the upper back and core, while improving mobility in the chest and shoulders.

In general, you want to prioritise extension-based movements. These involve straightening or lifting the spine and pulling the shoulders back.

Repeated forward-bending (or flexion) movements may make things worse, especially in people with osteoporosis or spinal fractures.

Good exercises include:

  • back extensions (gently lift your chest off the floor while lying face down)
  • resistance exercises targeting the muscles between your shoulder blades
  • weight-bearing activities (such as brisk walking, jogging, stair climbing, or dancing) to keep bones strong and support overall fitness
  • stretching your chest and hip flexors to open your posture and relieve tightness.

Flexibility and balance training (such as yoga and pilates) can be beneficial, particularly for posture awareness, balance, and mobility. But research increasingly supports muscle strengthening as the cornerstone of prevention and management.

Muscle strengthening exercises, such as weight lifting or resistance training, reduces spinal curvature while enhancing muscle and bone mass.

If you suspect you have kyphosis or already have osteoporosis or a vertebral fracture, consult a health professional before starting an exercise program. There may be some activities to avoid.

Woman using lat pulldown machine in gym
Resistance training is crucial. Yakobchuk Yiacheslav/Shutterstock

Can a curved back be reversed?

If it’s caused by poor posture and muscle weakness, then yes, it’s possible.

But if it’s caused by bone changes, especially vertebral fractures, then full reversal is unlikely. However, treatment can reduce pain, improve function, and slow further progression.

Protecting your posture isn’t just about appearance. It’s about staying strong, mobile and independent as you age.The Conversation

Jakub Mesinovic, Research Fellow at the Institute for Physical Activity and Nutrition, Deakin University and David Scott, Associate Professor (Research) and NHMRC Emerging Leadership Fellow, Deakin University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Women political leaders are rare – but 450 years ago, Anna Jagiellon was elected Queen of Poland

Anna Jagiellon, 1553. Lucas Cranach the Younger/Wikimedia
Darius von Guttner SporzynskiAustralian Catholic University

Anna Jagiellon was elected Queen of Poland in 1575. While many women rose to power by birth or marriage, Anna was actually chosen by nobles to rule. This achievement remains surprising.

Today, female world leaders are still rare. According to recent data, only about one in four national parliament members globally are women: 27.2% of parliamentarians in single or lower houses, up from 11% in 1995.

As of January 1 2025, in 25 countries women serve as heads of state or government. That number has improved over the past few decades, but men continue to dominate elected office. Anna’s story, set over four centuries ago, shows a woman could secure power through a vote, even in an era when female rulers were nearly unheard of.

The making of a queen

Anna was born in 1523. Her father was King Sigismund the Elder and her mother was Queen Bona Sforza.

The family, the Jagiellon dynasty, ruled a vast realm of Poland and Lithuania. Her brother, King Sigismund II Augustus, was the last male heir. When he died, Anna became the only living member of that royal line residing in Poland.

When Sigismund II Augustus died in 1572, Anna was not initially considered as eligible to ascend the throne: there was no tradition of a woman inheriting it. The Poles had only one previous queen regnant, a woman who rules a kingdom in her own right: Jadwiga, the queen whose 1386 marriage to Jogaila, grand duke of Lithuania, founded the centuries-long union of Lithuania and Poland. Lithuanians had none.

Anna Jagiellon in coronation robes. Wikimedia

The nobility of the Jagiellon realm decided to elect their monarch, as Sigismund II Augustus did not have a son to inherit the throne. In May 1573, 22-year-old Henry Valois of France was elected king. His reign did not last much more than a year. In May 1574, his brother, Charles IX of France, died. Henry returned to France to become Henry III.

Anna had once been on the sidelines of court life. Perhaps she was overshadowed by her powerful mother and siblings. Yet after her brother’s death and Henry’s abandonment of the Polish throne, she leapt into politics.

In the time when the throne was vacant, Anna became an important figure in deciding who would rule next. Many people viewed her as a political pawn, but she aimed to protect her family’s legacy. She made bold moves to shape alliances and ensure she herself would not be pushed aside.

Election of a queen

In 1575, a group of nobles and officials assembled to pick the next monarch. This was the second time in Poland–Lithuania royal elections were held, instead of the throne passing down the dynasty line. Standing for royal election was unusual among women in the 16th century.

At that gathering, the electors did something almost unheard of in Europe: they chose a woman, Anna, to wear the crown. They also selected a husband for her, a man named Stephen Báthory, who would be her co-ruler.

Anna Jagiellon and her husband Stephen Báthory, by Jan Matejko. Vilnews

Yet Anna was crowned as a queen in her own right, not just as a wife of a king. She signed laws, granted privileges and held ceremonies that emphasised her royal power. Some historians once doubted her independence, but newer research points out her keen political sense.

For instance, Anna invested her own money and energy to defend her inheritance from foreign claimants. She made deals to secure alliances and pushed hard to protect her family’s interests. Her role in Poland’s next royal election, after Stephen Báthory died, sealed her reputation as a serious political player.

Breaking gender barriers

Anna’s rule broke with expectations of her era. Like Mary I, the first queen to rule England in her own right (1553–58) and her successor Elizabeth I (1558–1603), she stepped into a job usually held by men.

She faced scepticism and criticism, often based on stereotypes about her age, her fertility or her ability to manage power. Some described her as emotional and unfit to lead. Others cast her as incapable because she had spent so long as a single woman.

Despite these biases, Anna went on to promote her family’s legacy. She commissioned a funerary monument for her mother in the Basilica of San Nicola in Bari and completed the Jagiellon chapel at Wawel Castle in which her father, brother and her own tombstone were placed.

Anna Jagiellon’s tomb. Dennis Jarvis/FlickrCC BY

She arranged key alliances and rewarded those who remained loyal. She also supported religious and cultural projects, building on the traditions of her royal parents. In that sense, she showed a queen could manage statecraft and political negotiations, just like any king of her day.

Lessons for today

Women in leadership continue to face hurdles in modern elections. Many still question their abilities or focus on their appearance. Some blame voter bias. Others highlight social structures that limit women’s options. That is why Anna’s story matters.

Anna Jagiellonka. Wikimedia Commons

Her success in a challenging environment underlines two major lessons. First, women have long claimed a rightful place in government. Even in the 16th century, when few women held direct power, Anna achieved electoral victory and took an active role in shaping policy. She helped decide who would succeed her, proving her ability to steer the political landscape.

Second, history’s hidden figures deserve recognition. There are countless remarkable women from outside Western Europe who rarely appear in popular culture. Many stories can also be found in central or eastern Europe, once a vibrant powerhouse of diverse cultures. Yet global narratives often overlook this legacy, especially after 1945, when the Yalta Conference redrew political maps and sidelined histories of those who found themselves on the eastern side of the Iron Curtain.

Anna Jagiellon’s tale broadens our view of female leadership. Her life reminds us that a woman could win a political contest centuries ago, despite prejudice and rigid traditions. It proves there is nothing new about women excelling in positions of power.The Conversation

Darius von Guttner Sporzynski, Historian, Australian Catholic University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Tailoring and the Black dandy: how 250 years of Black fashion history inspired the 2025 Met Gala

Portrait of a Man, c. 1855. National Gallery of Art
Toby SladeUniversity of Technology Sydney and Dijanna MulhearnUniversity of Technology Sydney

Fashion is one of the most powerful tools we have for understanding ourselves and the world around us. Nowhere is this clearer than in the story of Black American tailoring and the legacy of the Black dandy.

Inspired by scholar Monica L. Miller’s groundbreaking book Slaves to Fashion: Black Dandyism and the Styling of Black Diasporic Identity, the theme of The Metropolitan Museum of Art’s Costume Institute spring 2025 show is Superfine: Tailoring Black Style.

The exhibition charts the evolution of the Black dandy from the 18th century to today. The story it tells is about more than suits. It’s about power, pride, resistance and joy.

Each year, the Met Gala takes its dress code from the institue’s spring exhibition. This year’s is “Tailored for You”. So who is the Black dandy, why are they so important to fashion today, and what can we expect to see on the red carpet?

The birth of the Black Dandy

“Black dandy” is a modern term. Figures like American abolitionist Frederick Douglass (1818–95) or Haitian revolutionary leader Toussaint Louverture (1743–1803) would not have called themselves dandies, but they used style with similar effect: as a tool of resistance, self-fashioning and cultural pride.

Illustration: a black man in a suit on horseback.
Toussaint Louverture was a leader during the widespread uprisings of enslaved people in Saint-Domingue (now Haiti) in 1791. This image was drawn in 1802. The Metropolitan Museum of Art

French poet Charles Baudelaire (1821–67) first wrote about dandies in 1863, describing them as individuals who elevate style to a form of personal and aesthetic resistance.

Baudelaire’s dandy was not just stylish but symbolic. He was an emblem of modernity itself: a time marked by fluid identities, liminal spaces and the collapse of clear boundaries between gender, authenticity and social order.

Dandyism among Black men took root in the 18th and 19th centuries in both the United States and the Caribbean. Tailoring became a way to reclaim dignity under enslavement and colonialism.

Dandies take the clothing of an oppressor – aristocratic, colonial, segregationist or otherwise – and turn it into a weapon of elegance. Through meticulous style and refinement, dandies make a silent yet striking claim to moral superiority.

A very handsome black man in a suit.
Frederick Douglass was born into slavery, and freed in 1838. This photograph shows him in 1855. The Metropolitan Museum of Art

Douglass famously appeared in immaculate Victorian suits when campaigning for abolition, consciously dressing in the same style as those who denied his freedom.

Louverture used perfectly tailored French military uniforms during the Haitian Revolution against French colonial rule.

In the 1920s, Harlem dandies wore fine tailoring and flamboyant colours, rejecting the idea that poverty or discrimination should dictate presentation.

In perfectly tied cravats, polished shoes and sharply tailored coats, Black dandies refashion power on their own terms.

Presence through style

Dandies also challenge the narrow rules of masculinity.

Conventional menswear often demands restraint, toughness and invisibility. Dandies dare to embrace beauty, self-adornment and performance. This masculinity can be expressive, creative and even flamboyant.

The luxurious silk suits and carefully groomed appearance of American Jazz pioneer Duke Ellington (1899–1974) projected glamour rather than austerity.

The elegantly tailored overcoats and scarves of American poet Langston Hughes (1901–67) suggested a masculinity deeply entwined with creativity and softness.

Figures in Harlem’s ballrooms and jazz clubs blurred gender boundaries decades before mainstream conversations about gender fluidity emerged.

Three men in suits walk by Rhum Boogie.
A street scene in Harlem, New York City, photographed in 1943. Library of Congress

A tradition of Black tailoring

In a world where Black self-presentation has long been scrutinised and politicised, tailored clothing asserted visibility, authority and artistry. Dandies transformed fashion into a political declaration of dignity, resistance and creative power.

Black American tailoring practices blossomed most visibly in the zoot suits of the Harlem Renaissance, though they also had strong roots in New Orleans, Chicago and the Caribbean.

As seen in the Sunday Best of the Civil Rights era, Black tailoring walked the line between resistance and celebration: beautiful but with clear political intent.

In the 1970s, the Black dandy became more flamboyant, wearing tight, colourful clothes with bold accessories. He transformed traditional suits with exaggerated shapes, bright patterns and plaids inspired by African heritage.

Artists popular with a white audience like Sammy Davis Jr (1925–90), Miles Davis (1926–91) and James Brown (1933–2006) embraced the aesthetic, contributing to its widespread acceptance.

Davis holds a framed record above his head.
Sammy Davis Jr with his first European gold record, 1976. Nationaal ArchiefCC BY

Meanwhile, a super stylish contingent of Black men in the Congo, La Sapeur, refined their look so spectacularly they would become the benchmark of the Black dandy for generations to come.

The 1990s saw a new era of Black dandyism emerge through luxury sportswear and hip-hop aesthetics.

Designer Dapper Dan (1944–) revolutionised fashion by remixing luxury logos into bold, custom streetwear, creating a distinctive Black aesthetic that bridged hip-hop culture and high fashion.

Musician Andre 3000 (1975–) redefined menswear by blending Southern Black style with bold colour, vintage tailoring and theatrical flair.

Today, the tradition thrives in the style of influencer Wisdom Kaye, the elegance of LeBron James, and the risk-taking of Lewis Hamilton.

Dressing for the red carpet

Tailored for You invites guests to interpret the dandy’s legacy in personal, bold and boundary-pushing ways.

Whether conforming to tradition, subverting expectations or creating something entirely new, this theme is a celebration of the freedom to dress – and be – on your own terms.

The Black dandy is a figure of defiance and desire, of ambiguity and brilliance, of resistance and beauty. Dandyism blurs boundaries between masculinity and femininity, artifice and authenticity, conformity and rebellion. It unsettles fixed identities and reflects broader tensions within modern life.

Painting: a black man's face, and the hints of a tuxedo.
The poet and activist Countee Cullen, as depicted by Winold Reiss around 1925. National Portrait Gallery

Black dandies have shocked, amused, offended, delighted and inspired society since their inception. In the sharp defiance of Douglass’ Victorian suits, the flamboyant spectacle of Harlem ballrooms, and the logo-laced rebellion of Dapper Dan’s streetwear, the Black dandy has continually forced the world to reckon with the politics of presence, pride and performance.

Despite being overlooked by mainstream fashion history, they’ve shaped the way we see elegance, masculinity and self-expression. This Met Gala and the accompanying exhibition are not just a celebration – they are a long-overdue recognition.The Conversation

Toby Slade, Associate Professor of Fashion, University of Technology Sydney and Dijanna Mulhearn, PhD Candidate, School of Design. Author of Red Carpet Oscars, University of Technology Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

We talk a lot about being ‘resilient’. But what does it actually mean?

Kinga Howard/Unsplash
Peter McEvoyCurtin University

In a world with political polarisation, war, extreme weather events and increasing costs of living, we need to be able to cope as individuals and communities.

Our capacity to cope with very real stressors in our lives – our resilience – can determine whether we thrive, just survive, or are deprived of a reasonable quality of life.

Stress vs resilience

Resilience means having the ability to cope with, and rebound from, life’s challenges and still achieve our goals.

Stress isn’t something to be avoided. We need to feel some stress to achieve our best. Exposure to manageable levels of stress and adversity develops our coping skills and resilience.

But if we feel too much stress, we can flounder or become overwhelmed.

The ability to re-activate ourselves when we feel down, fatigued or disengaged helps to optimise our focus and motivation. Sportspeople, for example, might listen to high intensity music just before a competition to increase their energy levels.

Conversely, the ability to dampen down emotional intensity can make use feel less stressed or anxious. Exercising, listening to relaxing music, or patting a much-loved pet can prevent high arousal from interfering with completing a task.

Effective emotion regulation is crucial for adapting to life’s ups and downs, and keeping us on a relatively even keel.

How does resilience develop?

Resilience emerges from interactions between personal and environmental factors.

In addition to emotion regulation skills, personal factors that can bolster resilience include academic achievement, developing a range of skills and abilities (such as sport and music) and problem-solving skills. Many of these skills can be fostered in childhood. And if one area of life isn’t going well, we can still experience confidence, joy and meaning in others.

Boy looks at phone while listening to music
Sometimes we need to increase our energy levels, other times we need to lower anxiety. Ilias Chebbi/Unsplash

People who reflect on traumatic experience and develop new positive meanings about themselves (getting through it means I’m strong!) and life (a greater appreciation) can also have higher levels of resilience.

Genetic factors and temperament also play an important role. Some of us are born with nervous systems that respond with more anxiety than others in novel, uncertain, or potentially threatening situations. And some of us are more likely to avoid rather than approach these situations. These traits tend to be associated with lower levels of resilience. But we can all learn skills to build our resilience.

Environmental factors that promote resilience include:

  • a nurturing home environment
  • supportive family and peer relationships
  • cultural identity, belonging and rituals
  • modelling from others overcoming hardship
  • community cohesion
  • government policies that provide social safety nets, strong education, anti-discrimination and inclusion
  • investment in facilities, spaces, services and networks that support the quality of life and wellbeing of communities.

Can resilience be taught?

Many factors associated with resilience are modifiable, so it stands to reason that interventions that aim to bolster them should be helpful.

There is evidence that interventions that promote optimism, flexibility, active coping and social support-seeking can have small yet meaningful positive effects on resilience and emotional wellbeing in children and adults.

However, school-based programs give us reason to be cautious.

trial across 84 schools in the United Kingdom evaluated the effectiveness of school-based mindfulness programs. More than 3,500 students aged between 11 and 13 years received ten lessons of mindfulness and a similar number did not.

There was no evidence that mindfulness had any benefit on risk for depression, social, emotional and behavioural functioning, or wellbeing after one year. Teaching school children mindfulness at scale did not appear to bolster resilience.

In fact, there was some evidence it did harm – and it was most harmful for students at the highest risk of depression. The intervention was not deemed to be effective or cost-effective and was not recommended by the authors.

In another recent trial, researchers found an emotion regulation intervention with Year 8 and 9 school children was unhelpful and even harmful, although children who engaged in more home practice tended to do better.

Girls walk across a plaza
The evidence doesn’t support school-based resilience programs. Mitchell Luo/Unsplash

These interventions may have failed for a number of reasons. The content may not have been delivered in a way that was sufficiently engaging, comprehensive, age-appropriate, frequent, individually tailored, or relevant to the school context. Teachers may also not be sufficiently trained in delivering these interventions for them to be effective. And students didn’t co-design the interventions.

Regardless of the reasons, these findings suggest we need to be cautious when delivering universal interventions to all children. It may be more helpful to wait until there are early signs of excessive stress and intervening in an individualised way.

What does this mean for resilience-building?

Parents and schools have a role in providing children with the sense of security that gives them confidence to explore their environments and make mistakes in age-appropriate ways, and providing support when needed.

Parents and teachers can encourage children to try to solve problems themselves before getting involved. Problem-solving attempts should be celebrated even more than success.

Schools need to allocate their scarce resources to children most in need of practical and emotional support in non-stigmatising ways, rather than universal approaches. Most children will develop resilience without intervention programs.

To promote resilience, schools can foster positive peer relationships, cultural identity and involvement in creative, sporting and academic pursuits. They can also highlight others’ recovery and resilience stories to demonstrate how growth can occur from adversity.

More broadly in the community, people can work on developing their own emotion regulation skills to bolster their confidence in their ability to manage adversity.

Think about how you can:

  • approach challenges in constructive ways
  • actively problem-solve rather than avoid challenges
  • genuinely accept failure as part of being human
  • establish healthy boundaries
  • align your behaviour with your values
  • receive social and professional support when needed.

This will help you navigate the ebbs and flows of life in ways that support recovery and growth.The Conversation

Peter McEvoy, Professor of Clinical Psychology, Curtin University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

AvPals 25th Year: Term Two Newport Sessions

You can book in and pay for sessions at Newport via the AvPals shop.

Please note the first session for Term Two, 'Outsmart the Hackers' to be held this coming Tuesday, May 6, 1.30 to 3pm, is a Free, all welcome and no booking required session.

Avalon Computer Pals (AVPALS) helps seniors learn and improve their computer and technology skills. Avpals is a not for profit organisation run by volunteers. Since 2000, we have helped thousands of seniors from complete beginners to people who need to improve or update their skills. We offer “one to one” personal tuition or special short courses. 

Small class workshops are run at the Newport Community Centre on Tuesday afternoons.

One-to-one training is provided at our rooms in Avalon, under the Maria Regina Catholic Church, 7 Central Road, Avalon.

Join us in learning 'how to' in our 25th year!

The AvPals shop for Newport short sessions is HERE
The rest of this terms workshop offerings are:

COVID is still around and a risk to vulnerable people. What are the symptoms in 2025? And how long does it last?

Meru SheelUniversity of Sydney

Five years ago, COVID was all we could think about. Today, we’d rather forget about lockdowns, testing queues and social distancing. But the virus that sparked the pandemic, SARS-CoV-2, is still circulating.

Most people who get COVID today will experience only a mild illness. But some people are still at risk of severe illness and are more likely to be hospitalised with COVID. This includes older people, those who are immunocompromised by conditions such as cancer, and people with other health conditions such as diabetes.

Outcomes also tend to be more severe in those who experience social inequities such as homelessness. In the United Kingdom, people living in the 20% most deprived areas have double chance of being hospitalised from infectious diseases than those in the least deprived areas.

How many cases and hospitalisations?

In Australia, 58,000 COVID cases have been reported so far in 2025. However, testing rates have declined and not all positive cases are reported to the government, so case numbers in the community are likely much higher.

Latest data from FluCan, a network of 14 hospitals, found 781 people were hospitalised for COVID complications in the first three months of the year. This “sentinel surveillance” data gives a snapshot from a handful of hospitals, so the actual number of hospitalisations across Australia is expected to be much higher.

While deaths are lower than previous years, 289 people died from COVID-related respiratory infections in the first two months of the year.

What can we expect as we head into winter?

We often see an increase in respiratory infections in winter.

However, COVID peaks aren’t just necessarily seasonal. Over the past few years, peaks have tended to appear around every six months.

What are the most common COVID symptoms?

Typical early symptoms of COVID included fever, cough, sore throat, runny nose and shortness of breath. These have remained the most common COVID symptoms across the multiple variant waves.

Early in the pandemic, we realised COVID caused a unique symptom called anosmia – the changed sense of taste or smell. Anosmia lasts about a week and in some cases can last longer. Anosmia was more frequently reported from infections due to the ancestral, Gamma, and Delta variants but not for the Omicron variant, which emerged in 2021.

However, loss of smell still seems to be associated with some newer variants. A recent French study found anosmia was more frequently reported in people with JN.1.

But the researchers didn’t find any differences for other COVID symptoms between older and newer variants.

Should you bother doing a test?

Yes. Testing is particularly important if you experience COVID-like symptoms or were recently exposed to someone with COVID and are at high-risk of severe COVID. You might require timely treatment.

If you are at risk of severe COVID, you can see a doctor or visit a clinic with point-of-care testing services to access confirmatory PCR (polymerase chain reaction) testing.

Rapid antigen tests (RATs) approved by Australia’s regulator are also still available for personal use.

But a negative RAT doesn’t mean that you don’t have COVID – especially if you are symptomatic.

If you do test positive, while you don’t have to isolate, it’s best to stay at home.

If you do leave the house while experiencing COVID symptoms, minimise the spread to others by wearing a well-fitted mask, avoiding public places such as hospitals and avoiding contact with those at higher risk of severe COVID.

How long does COVID last these days?

In most people with mild to moderate COVID, it can last 7–10 days.

Symptomatic people can spread the infection to others from about 48 hours before you develop symptoms to about ten days after developing symptoms. Few people are infectious beyond that.

But symptoms can persist in more severe cases for longer.

UK study which tracked the persistence of symptoms in 5,000 health-care workers found symptoms were less likely to last for more than 12 weeks in subsequent infections.

General fatigue, for example, was reported in 17.3% of people after the first infection compared with 12.8% after the second infection and 10.8% following the third infection.

Unvaccinated people also had more persistent symptoms.

Vaccinated people who catch COVID tend to present with milder disease and recover faster. This may be because vaccination prevents over-activation of the innate immune response.

Vaccination remains the best way to prevent COVID

Vaccination against COVID continues to be one of the most effective ways to prevent COVID and protect against it. Data from Europe’s most recent winter, which is yet to be peer reviewed, reports COVID vaccines were 66% effective at preventing symptomatic, confirmed COVID cases.

Most people in Australia have had at least one dose of the COVID vaccine. But if you haven’t, people over 18 years of age are recommended to have a COVID vaccine.

Boosters are available for adults over 18 years of age. If you don’t have any underlying immune issues, you’re eligible to receive a funded dose every 12 months.

Boosters are recommended for adults 65–74 years every 12 months and for those over 75 years every six months.

Adults over 18 years who are at higher risk because of weaker immune systems are recommended to get a COVID vaccine every 12 months and are eligible every six months.

Check your status and eligibility using this booster eligibility tool and you can access your vaccine history here.

new review of more than 4,300 studies found full vaccination before a SARS-CoV-2 infection could reduce the risk of long COVID by 27% relative to no vaccination for the general adult population.

With ongoing circulation of COVID, hybrid immunity from natural infection supplemented with booster vaccination can help prevent large-scale COVID waves.

The Conversation

Meru Sheel, Associate Professor and Epidemiologist, Infectious Diseases, Immunisation and Emergencies (IDIE) Group, Sydney School of Public Health, University of Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Thirty years on, our research linking viral infections with Alzheimer’s is finally getting the attention it deserves

meeboonstudio/Shutterstock
Ruth ItzhakiUniversity of Oxford

The common cold sore virus, which is often caught in childhood, usually stays in the body for life – quietly dormant in the nerves. Now and then, things like stress, illness or injury can trigger it, bringing on a cold sore in some people. But this same virus – called herpes simplex virus type 1 – may also play an important role in something far more serious: Alzheimer’s disease.

Over 30 years ago, my colleagues and I made a surprising discovery. We found that this cold sore virus can be present in the brains of older people. It was the first clear sign that a virus could be quietly living in the brain, which was long thought to be completely germ-free – protected by the so-called “blood-brain barrier”.

Then we discovered something even more striking. People who have a certain version of a gene (called APOE-e4) that increases their risk of Alzheimer’s, and who have been infected with this virus, have a risk that is many times greater.

To investigate further, we studied brain cells that we infected with the virus. They produced the same abnormal proteins (amyloid and tau) found in the brains of people with Alzheimer’s.

We believe that the virus stays mainly dormant in the body for years – possibly decades. But later in life, as the immune system gets weaker, it can enter the brain and reactivate there. When it does, it will damage brain cells and trigger inflammation. Over time, repeated flare-ups could gradually cause the kind of damage that leads to Alzheimer’s in some people.

We later found the virus’s DNA inside the sticky clumps of these proteins, which are found in the brains of Alzheimer’s patients. Even more encouragingly, antiviral treatments reduced this damage in the lab, suggesting that drugs might one day help to slow or even prevent the disease.

Large population studies by others found that severe infections, specifically with the cold sore virus, was a strong predictor of Alzheimer’s, and that specific antiviral treatment reduced the risk.

Our research didn’t stop there. We wondered if other viruses that lie dormant in the body might have similar effects – such as the one responsible for chickenpox and shingles.

Woman with a cold sore on her upper lip.
Herpes hides out in our body from childhood – occasionally erupting as cold sores. Domaskina/Shutterstock

Shingles vaccine offers another clue

When we studied health records from hundreds of thousands of people in the UK, we saw something interesting. People who had shingles had only a slightly higher risk of developing dementia. Yet those who had the shingles vaccine were less likely to develop dementia at all.

new Stanford University-led study gave similar results.

This supported our long-held proposal that preventing common infections could lower the risk of Alzheimer’s. Consistently, studies by others showed that infections were indeed a risk and that some other vaccines were protective against Alzheimer’s.

We then explored how risk factors for Alzheimer’s such as infections and head injuries could trigger the hidden virus in the brain.

Using an advanced 3D model of the brain with a dormant herpes infection, we found that when we introduced other infections or simulated a brain injury, the cold sore virus reactivated and caused damage similar to that seen in Alzheimer’s. But when we used a treatment to reduce inflammation, the virus stayed inactive, and the damage didn’t happen.

All of this suggests that the virus that causes cold sores could be an important contributor to Alzheimer’s, especially in people with certain genetic risk factors. It also opens the door to possible new ways of preventing the disease, such as vaccines or antiviral treatments that stop the virus from waking up and harming the brain.

What began as a link between cold sores and memory loss has grown into a much bigger story – one that may help us understand, and eventually reduce, the risk of one of the most feared diseases of our time.The Conversation

Ruth Itzhaki, Professor Emeritus of Molecular Neurobiology at the University of Manchester and a Visiting Professorial Fellow, University of Oxford

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Wealth, wellness and wellbeing: why healthier ageing isn’t just about personal choices

Matej Kastelic/Shutterstock
Simon EvansUniversity of Surrey

We’ve all heard it before: eat your five-a-day, and try to get some exercise. It’s advice that’s simple in theory, yet in practice, not everyone is able to follow it. So what’s standing in the way?

Our research examined this question in depth. Using data from UK adults over the age of 50, we explored how socioeconomic status affects the likelihood of meeting the World Health Organization’s recommendations for physical activity and diet. These guidelines include at least 150 minutes of moderate-intensity (or 75 minutes of vigorous-intensity) physical activity per week and a daily intake of at least five portions of fruit and vegetables.

What we found points to a clear and concerning disparity. Wealthier older adults are nearly twice as likely to meet both exercise and dietary recommendations compared to their less affluent peers. And perhaps even more striking, those who don’t meet these health guidelines are significantly more likely to suffer from depression.

We analysed survey responses from more than 3,000 adults aged 50 to 90, using data from the English Longitudinal Study of Ageing. While nearly 70% of participants reported doing some form of physical activity, the data revealed a sharp wealth divide.

Adults in the highest wealth quintile (the top 20%) were almost twice as likely to be physically active as those in the lowest quintile. A similar pattern emerged for diet. Over 70% of those in the wealthiest group reported meeting the five-a-day guideline, compared to just over 40% in the lowest income bracket.

This matters, because not meeting government guidelines for physical activity and diet can have serious long-term health consequences. Regular exercise is known to increase HDL (or “good”) cholesterol, improve cardiovascular health, and reduce the risk of chronic conditions like type 2 diabetes, heart disease, and some cancers.

It also benefits brain health by lowering inflammation and even promoting the growth of new brain cells. Similarly, diets rich in fibre, vitamins, and antioxidants – found in fruits and vegetables – are associated with lower the risks of disease and cognitive decline, including conditions like Alzheimer’s.

Depression disparity

But the impact isn’t just physical. Our research also explored links between lifestyle and mental health. Around 19% of participants met the criteria for clinical depression, with the highest risk found among women, people living alone, smokers and those with lower incomes.

Alarmingly, rates of depression were nearly three times higher among those in the lowest wealth quintile (32.6% were depressed) compared to those in the highest (11.1%).

Lifestyle clearly played a role in depression levels. Among inactive participants, 30% reported symptoms of depression – more than double the rate seen in those who were physically active (13.7%). Likewise, those who didn’t meet the five-a-day guideline had a depression rate of 23.4%, compared to 15.7% among those who did.

These results suggest that staying physically active and eating well not only improves physical health but may also play a protective role in mental wellbeing. Yet not everyone has equal access to the resources, time, or environments that support healthy living. There is also the role of social isolation as a compounding factor.

Social disconnection is strongly linked to both poor physical and mental health, including depression and even increased mortality risk. Physical activity programmes that also offer social interaction – such as walking groups or community exercise classes – may provide even greater benefits.

Healthy ageing for everyone

The evidence shows that health disparities in later life are deeply tied to wealth and socioeconomic status. This means that addressing them requires more than encouraging personal responsibility – it calls for policy action.

Financial barriers to healthy food and physical activity need to be tackled through targeted programmes, subsidies and infrastructure investments. Making healthy options accessible and affordable – especially for those in lower-income groups – will benefit people and reduce strain on healthcare systems.

As populations continue to age, promoting health in later life is a public health priority. But that effort will only succeed if it recognises – and works to reduce – the inequalities that hold people back from living healthy, fulfilling lives.The Conversation

Simon Evans, Lecturer in Neuroscience, School of Psychology, University of Surrey

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

What’s the difference between osteoarthritis and rheumatoid arthritis?

Douglas Olivares/Shutterstock.
Giovanni E. FerreiraUniversity of Sydney and Rachelle BuchbinderMonash University

Arthritis – an umbrella term for around 100 conditions that damage the joints – affects 4.1 million Australians. This is expected to rise by 31% to 5.4 million by 2040 and cost the Australian health-care system an estimated $12 billion each year.

The two most common types, osteoarthritis and rheumatoid arthritis, can both cause joint pain, swelling and stiffness. Both are more common in women. Neither can be cured.

But their causes, risk factors and treatments are different – here’s what you need to know.

What is osteoarthritis?

Osteoarthritis is the most common form of arthritis. It affects 2.1 million Australians, mostly older people. About a third of Australians aged 75 and older have the condition.

It can affect any joint but is most common in the knees, hips, fingers, thumbs and big toes.

The main symptom is pain, especially during movement. Other symptoms may include swelling, stiffness and changes to the shape of joints.

The main risk factors are ageing and obesity, as well as previous injuries or surgery. For osteoarthritis in the hands, genetics also play a big role.

Signs of osteoarthritis can appear on knee scans from around age 45 and become more common with age.

However, this type of arthritis not simply the “wear and tear” of ageing. Osteoarthritis is a complex disease that affects the whole joint. This includes the cartilage (“shock-absorbing” connective tissue protecting your bones), bones, ligaments (connective tissue holding bones and body parts in place) and joint lining.

Pair of hands laying flat with bent joints in the fingers.
Osteoarthritis can change the shape of joints such as knuckles. joel bubble ben/Shutterstock

How is it diagnosed?

Diagnosis is based on symptoms (such as pain and restricted movement) and a physical exam.

The disease generally worsens over time and cannot be reversed. But the severity of damage does not always correlate with pain levels.

For this reason, x-rays and MRI scans are usually unhelpful. Some people with early osteoarthritis experience severe pain, but the damage won’t show up on a scan. Others with advanced and visible osteoarthritis may have few symptoms or none at all.

What about rheumatoid arthritis?

Unlike osteoarthritis, rheumatoid arthritis is an autoimmune disease. This means the immune system attacks the joint lining, causing inflammation and damage.

Common symptoms include pain, joint swelling and stiffness, especially in the morning.

Rheumatoid arthritis is less common than osteoarthritis, affecting around 514,000 Australians. It mostly impacts the wrists and small joints in the hands and feet, though larger joints such as the elbows, shoulders, knees and ankles can also be involved.

It can also affect other organs, including the skin, lungs, eyes, heart and blood vessels. Fortunately, disease outside the joint has become less common in recent years, likely due to better and earlier treatment.

Rheumatoid arthritis often develops earlier than osteoarthritis but can occur at any age. Onset is most frequent in those aged 35–64Smoking increases your risk.

How is it diagnosed?

As with osteoarthritis, your doctor will diagnose rheumatoid arthritis based on your symptoms and a physical exam.

Some other tests can be useful. Blood tests may pick up specific antibodies that indicate rheumatoid arthritis, although you can still have the condition with negative results.

X-rays may also reveal joint damage if the disease is advanced. If there is uncertainty, an ultrasound or MRI can help detect inflammation.

The ConversationCC BY-SA

How is osteoarthritis treated?

No treatment can stop osteoarthritis progressing. However many people manage their symptoms well with advice from their doctor and self-care. Exercise, weight management and pain medicines can help.

Exercise has been shown to be safe for osteoarthritis of the kneehip and hand. Many types of exercise are effective at reducing pain, so you can choose what suits you best.

For knee osteoarthritis, managing weight through diet and/or exercise is strongly recommended. This may be because it reduces pressure on the joint or because losing weight can reduce inflammationAnti-obesity medicines may also reduce pain.

A woman in exercise gear does squats outside.
Exercise can help manage weight and is safe and effective at managing joint pain. gelog67/Shutterstock

Topical and oral anti-inflammatories are usually recommended to manage pain. However, opioids (such as tramadol or oxycodone) are not, due to their risks and limited evidence they help.

In some cases antidepressants such as duloxetine may also be considered as a treatment for pain though, again, evidence they help is limited.

What about rheumatoid arthritis?

Treatments for rheumatoid arthritis focus on preventing joint damage and reducing inflammation.

It’s essential to get an early referral to a rheumatologist, so that treatment with medication – called “disease-modifying anti-rheumatic drugs” – can begin quickly.

These medicines suppress the immune system to stop inflammation and prevent damage to the joint.

With no cure, the overall goal is to achieve remission (where the disease is inactive) or get symptoms under control.

Advances in treatment

There is an increasing interest in prevention for both types of arthritis.

A large international clinical trial is currently investigating whether a diet and exercise program can prevent knee osteoarthritis in those with higher risk – in this case, women who are overweight and obese.

For those already affected, new medicines in early-stage clinical trials show promise in reducing pain and improving function.

There is also hope for rheumatoid arthritis with Australian researchers developing a new immunotherapy. This treatment aims to reprogram the immune system, similar to a vaccine, to help people achieve long-term remission without lifelong treatment.The Conversation

Giovanni E. Ferreira, NHMRC Emerging Leader Research Fellow, Institute of Musculoskeletal Health, University of Sydney and Rachelle Buchbinder, Professor of Clinical Epidemiology and Rheumatologist, Monash University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Opportunity to refine and reform government agenda: National Seniors

May 8, 2025
National Seniors Australia (NSA), the leading advocacy body for older Australians, congratulates the Anthony Albanese led Government on being elected for a second term.

NSA Chief Executive Officer Chris Grice said he looks forward to continuing to work with the government to protect and promote the interest and contribution of older Australians at a time of significant global uncertainty.

“Post-election, older Australians continue to face challenges. Cost-of-living pressures; global market volatility; stability and certainty of retirement income; rising health costs; insecure and unaffordable housing; and delays in accessing high quality aged care are some of the immediate challenges facing the older population,” Mr Grice said.

“The issues facing older people are not behind us and will continue to be felt by current and future generations unless the federal government acts in a timely and appropriate manner to refine its policies.

“Over the next 40 years, the number of Australians aged 65 and older will more than double and the number aged 85 and older and will more than triple. We must work now to get Australia’s policy settings right.

“As detailed in the 2023 Intergenerational Report, an ageing population, rising demand for care and support services, and technical and digital transformation are three of the top five forces affecting the economy. Managing these forces that will also impact older Australians is essential to “building a stronger, more sustainable, and more inclusive nation” where the older population is a part of the solution and not the problem.

“Now is an opportunity to refine and reform the government agenda for the next three years to create a kinder and more respectful Australia that acknowledges and supports the millions of older Australians who made our country what it is today – and lays the foundation for the seniors of tomorrow.”

National Seniors Australia’s key policy policies

COST OF LIVING
  • Retain the deeming rate freeze until a fairer method is devised.
  • Let Pensioners Work by exempting employment income from the pension income test.
HEALTH & AGED CARE
  • Review the private health system to reduce premiums and out-of-pocket costs.
  • Provide more home care packages to reduce wait list to three months.
BANKING & SUPERANNUATION
  • Create an Australia Post bank for regional and rural Australia.
  • Protect superannuation by retaining choice and control. 

New chronic pain therapy retrains the brain to process emotions

By Meliisa Lyne, UNSW
May 8, 2025
UNSW and NeuRA researchers have created an effective therapy for chronic pain that reduces pain intensity by focusing on emotional regulation.

A new study led by UNSW Sydney and Neuroscience Research Australia (NeuRA) shows that targeting emotional processing is key to treating and managing chronic pain.

The study is based on a randomised controlled trial led by Professor Sylvia Gustin and Dr Nell Norman-Nott, both from UNSW and NeuRA. Along with a team at NeuRA’s Centre for Pain IMPACT, they published their results, today in JAMA Network Open.

The trial showed that enhancing the brain’s capacity for emotional processing through therapeutic intervention is an effective approach to managing chronic pain.

“By changing how we manage emotions, it is possible to change the experience of pain itself,” Prof. Gustin says. “This is not just a temporary relief but a potential long-term improvement in quality of life for those affected by chronic pain.”

Prof. Gustin and Dr Norman-Nott developed Pain and Emotion Therapy — a novel and emerging eHealth intervention. The therapy aims to retrain the brain to more easily process emotions by improving an individual's ability to deescalate negative emotions and enhance positive ones.

Nell Norman-Nott (left) and Sylvia Gustin (right) created Pain and Emotion Therapy to be accessible to all. Photo: Jake Willis, UNSW Media

The trial took place from March 2023 to September 2024 and focused on the experiences of 89 people with chronic pain. The authors say the results could lead to new ways of treating chronic pain, emphasising the profound impact of emotional health on physical wellbeing.

The online therapy, made available through the trial, is the first of its kind, delivered through eight group-based therapist-guided sessions by video conference across Australia. Participants also used an app and handbook for self-learning. The control group continued their usual treatment.

Prof. Gustin says those who received the new treatment reported better emotional regulation as well as pain reduction equal to a 10-point decrease on a 100-point scale for pain intensity within a six-month follow up.

"This shows not only a clinical improvement, but one that makes a noticeable difference in the daily lives of the people affected," she says.

Understanding chronic pain
Chronic pain, defined as pain lasting longer than three months, affects around 30% of people globally. The economic costs are estimated to be higher than that of heart disease, cancer and diabetes combined.

Declining mental health is also widespread, with up to 80% of people with chronic pain experiencing depression and anxiety. In addition, suicide rates are two to three times higher than those of the general population.

“A key factor in disease progression is the inability to regulate negative emotions,” Prof. Gustin says. “This is disrupted by the impact of persistent pain on the brain’s emotional circuitry. The resulting emotion dysregulation is an ill-understood and undertreated aspect of chronic pain, which we addressed in this trial.”

Study participant Jabez Allies has had chronic back pain for 10 years. She says chronic pain affects her emotions.

“It makes me feel more worried, moody and frustrated, which in turn affects my pain. The more negative emotions I have, the worse my pain is, and vice versa,” she says.

Prof. Gustin says this cycle of worsening pain and increasing negative emotions is a common presentation.

“It shows us that chronic pain really does have a considerable effect on how people feel and the level of pain they experience.”

A boost to traditional treatments
Dr Norman Nott says that in the past 50–60 years, the model of chronic pain has shifted focus.

“We’ve gone from purely medical and biological approaches to a more holistic treatment model that includes addressing social and psychological experiences,” Dr Norman Nott says.

She says while prescription and non-prescription pain medications continue to play an important role in treatment, they have limitations.

“I’m thinking particularly of side effects and diminishing efficacy over time. Opioids, specifically, present considerable issues with dependency and declining effectiveness.”

She says, “though psychological therapies come with few side effects, we know there are still improvements needed, particularly to address the key mental health concerns of people with chronic pain, such as identifying and expressing emotions, and calming down emotional reactiveness.

“The focus on training for emotional regulation appears to be the missing piece of the jigsaw puzzle of chronic pain treatment.

“This is why we created this therapy – to focus on emotion processing by improving how people manage their emotions.”

Richard Beaumont is a participant who has had cancer pain and chronic lower back pain for 11 years. He says he frequently gets pain that reaches an eight or nine out of 10.

“After receiving Pain and Emotion Therapy I can bring this right down to a four or five just by calming the farm,” he says.

Targeting the emotional brain
“Previous research shows us that the brain can be trained to identify negative emotions and regulate them,” Prof. Gustin says. “With this trial we can now see that engaging emotion regulation skills can reduce the intensity of pain and improve several other factors such as depression, anxiety and sleep problems.”

Dr Norman-Nott says this new therapy works by teaching participants that we need emotions in our lives.

“Often when we live with chronic pain for many years, negative emotions get pushed down and positive emotions become harder to identify,” Dr Norman-Nott says.

“We focus on helping to identify and bring up those negative emotions so that they can be acknowledged and resolved – while also realising the potential positive aspects of life and setting goals for the future.”

Accessible treatment for all
The accessibility of psychological treatment for chronic pain is a key point, of governmental concern.

The progression and management of the disease are further aggravated by long wait times and limited healthcare services outside of capital cities.

“Our online treatment delivery reduced barriers by making it accessible to those who struggle with mobility, social anxiety, or physical exhaustion from travelling to in-person appointments,” Dr Norman-Nott says.

“It enabled them to participate from every state in Australia, including many from remote and regional locations.

“Participants attended the online sessions from their homes, or wherever it was comfortable for them, so they could train their emotion regulation skills when it suited them via the customised app and workbook.”

The next step for rolling out Pain and Emotion Therapy is a larger clinical trial supported by the Medical Research Future Fund, due to start in 2026.

The researchers are now calling for participants to register their interest in the trial.

“The results we've seen so far are a big improvement in our understanding of chronic pain, showing how important it is to treat both the body and emotions together,” says Prof. Gustin.

Google is rolling out its Gemini AI chatbot to kids under 13. It’s a risky move

Studio Nut/Shutterstock
Lisa M. GivenRMIT University

Google has announced it will roll out its Gemini artificial intelligence (AI) chatbot to children under the age of 13.

While the launch starts within the next week in the United States and Canada, it will launch in Australia later this year. The chatbot will only be available to people via Google’s Family Link accounts.

But this development comes with major risks. It also highlights how, even if children are banned from social media, parents will still have to play a game of whack-a-mole with new technologies as they try to keep their children safe.

A good way to address this would be to urgently implement a digital duty of care for big tech companies such as Google.

How will the Gemini AI chatbot work?

Google’s Family Link accounts allow parents to control access to content and apps, such as YouTube.

To create a child’s account, parents provide personal details, including the child’s name and date of birth. This may raise privacy concerns for parents concerned about data breaches, but Google says children’s data when using the system will not be used to train the AI system.

Chatbot access will be “on” by default, so parents need to actively turn the feature off to restrict access. Young children will be able to prompt the chatbot for text responses, or to create images, which are generated by the system.

Google acknowledges the system may “make mistakes”. So assessment of the quality and trustworthiness of content is needed. Chatbots can make up information (known as “hallucinating”), so if children use the chatbot for homework help, they need to check facts with reliable sources.

What kinds of information will the system provide?

Google and other search engines retrieve original materials for people to review. A student can read news articles, magazines and other sources when writing up an assignment.

Generative AI tools are not the same as search engines. AI tools look for patterns in source material and create new text responses (or images) based on the query – or “prompt” – a person provides. A child could ask the system to “draw a cat” and the system will scan for patterns in the data of what a cat looks like (such as whiskers, pointy ears, and a long tail) and generate an image that includes those cat-like details.

Understanding the differences between materials retrieved in a Google search and content generated by an AI tool will be challenging for young children. Studies show even adults can be deceived by AI tools. And even highly skilled professionals – such as lawyers – have reportedly been fooled into using fake content generated by ChatGPT and other chatbots.

Will the content generated be age-appropriate?

Google says the system will include “built-in safeguards designed to prevent the generation of inappropriate or unsafe content”.

However, these safeguards could create new problems. For example, if particular words (such as “breasts”) are restricted to protect children from accessing inappropriate sexual content, this could mistakenly also exclude children from accessing age-appropriate content about bodily changes during puberty.

Many children are also very tech-savvy, often with well-developed skills for navigating apps and getting around system controls. Parents cannot rely exclusively on inbuilt safeguards. They need to review generated content and help their children understand how the system works, and assess whether content is accurate.

Close up photo of Google logo sign.
Google says there will be safeguards to minimise the risk of harm for children using Gemini, but these could create new problems. Dragos Asaeftei/Shutterstock

What risks do AI chatbots pose to children?

The eSafety Commission has issued an online safety advisory on the potential risk of AI chatbots, including those designed to simulate personal relationships, particularly for young children.

The eSafety advisory explains AI companions can “share harmful content, distort reality and give advice that is dangerous”. The advisory highlights the risks for young children, in particular, who “are still developing the critical thinking and life skills needed to understand how they can be misguided or manipulated by computer programs, and what to do about it”.

My research team has recently examined a range of AI chatbots, such as ChatGPT, Replika, and Tessa. We found these systems mirror people’s interactions based on the many unwritten rules that govern social behaviour – or, what are known as “feeling rules”. These rules are what lead us to say “thank you” when someone holds the door open for us, or “I’m sorry!” when you bump into someone on the street.

By mimicking these and other social niceties, these systems are designed to gain our trust.

These human-like interactions will be confusing, and potentially risky, for young children. They may believe content can be trusted, even when the chatbot is responding with fake information. And, they may believe they are engaging with a real person, rather than a machine.

A mother teaching her child the alphabet.
AI chatbots such as Gemini are designed to mimic human behaviour and gain our trust. Ground Picture

How can we protect kids from harm when using AI chatbots?

This rollout is happening at a crucial time in Australia, as children under 16 will be banned from holding social media accounts in December this year.

While some parents may believe this will keep their children safe from harm, generative AI chatbots show the risks of online engagement extend far beyond social media. Children – and parents – must be educated in how all types of digital tools can be used appropriately and safely.

As Gemini’s AI chatbot is not a social media tool, it will fall outside Australia’s ban.

This leaves Australian parents playing a game of whack-a-mole with new technologies as they try to keep their children safe. Parents must keep up with new tool developments and understand the potential risks their children face. They must also understand the limitations of the social media ban in protecting children from harm.

This highlights the urgent need to revisit Australia’s proposed digital duty of care legislation. While the European Union and United Kingdom launched digital duty of care legislation in 2023, Australia’s has been on hold since November 2024. This legislation would hold technology companies to account by legislating that they deal with harmful content, at source, to protect everyone.The Conversation

Lisa M. Given, Professor of Information Sciences & Director, Social Change Enabling Impact Platform, RMIT University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Alzheimer’s: certain combinations of prescription drugs may slow progression of the disease, says mice study

Certain prescription drugs combinations had different effects on the mice. roger ashford/ Shutterstock
Silvia MaioliKarolinska Institutet and Francesca EroliKarolinska Institutet

Millions of older adults take five or more prescription drugs every day to manage chronic illnesses. While polypharmacy is often necessary, this practice has also been linked to many negative health outcomes in older adults – including memory problems, increased risk of falls and greater frailty.

The most common prescription drugs involved in polypharmacy are those used to treat conditions such as high blood pressure, high cholesterol and depression. Importantly, these same conditions are also known risk factors for Alzheimer’s disease.

This raises an important question: could polypharmacy have any influence on the progression of Alzheimer’s disease?

Our recent research in mice suggests that certain prescription drugs combinations might actually have a positive effect on memory and signs of Alzheimer’s disease. However, these effects appeared to differ depending on whether the mouse was male or female.

To better understand how polypharmacy may affect Alzheimer’s disease, we designed an experiment using mice that were genetically altered to develop Alzheimer’s-like brain changes. These mice had amyloid plaques – clumps of protein in the brain that, with time, are linked with memory loss and considered a hallmark of Alzheimer’s disease .

We tested two different combinations of five commonly prescribed drugs, including: analgesics (painkillers), antithrombotics (to prevent blood clots), lipid-modifying agents (such as statins, which lower cholestrol), beta-blockers (which help controlling arrythmias and hypertension) and Ace inhibitors (used to treat cardiovascular conditions), as well as antidepressants.

Both groups of mice were given paracetamol, aspirin, an antidepressant, a statin and a blood pressure drug. The only differences between the two groups were the specific types of statin and cardiovascular drugs used. The first group were given simvastatin and metoprolol, while the second group was given atorvastatin and enalapril.

We gave these prescription drug combinations to both male and female mice. We then tested their memory, examined their brains for signs of disease and analysed blood samples for disease-related markers.

Our findings showed that polypharmacy has both positive and negative effects on Alzheimer’s disease progression. The effects largely depended on which specific drug combinations were used as well as the sex of the mice.

The first drug combination had beneficial effects in male mice. These mice showed better memory, reduced signs of Alzheimer’s pathology in the brain (such as the number and size of amyloid plaques) and fewer signs of the disease in their blood. This suggested that polypharmacy delayed the progression of Alzheimer’s disease.

In females, however, the same combination had very little to no effect on signs and symptoms of the disease.

But for the mice in the second combination group, the results were different. The benefits previously seen in males disappeared. In female mice, their memory worsened.

A digital drawing of amyloid plaques forming between neurons in the brain.
Certain drug combinations reduced signs of Alzheimer’s disease in the male mice’s brains, such as the size and number of amyloid plaques. nobeastsofierce/ Shutterstock

We also looked at what happened when some of the drugs were taken on their own. In some cases, they had beneficial effects for the female mice – improving memory and signs of Alzheimer’s disease in the brain. For instance, the statin simvastatin improved memory and reduced signs of brain inflammation in female mice when the drug was taken on its own.

Polypharmacy and brain health

These results show how complex the effects of polypharmacy can be, especially in the context of a brain disease such as Alzheimer’s. They also suggest that men and women may respond differently to certain drug combinations.

This is not surprising. Biological sex is known to influence how drugs are absorbed and metabolised and their effect on the body. When it comes to polypharmacy, these differences can become more pronounced, having an even stronger effect on drug safety and efficacy.

This could partly help explain why the same drug combinations had very different effects in the male and female mice in our study. Other possible explanations for why certain drug combinations only improved signs and symptoms of the disease in male mice include sex differences in hormone levels and differences in immune responses that may influence how drugs work in the brain. Understanding these mechanisms will be key to tailoring safer and more effective treatments for the disease.

Our study confirms that current, universal prescribing approaches for older adults may not be ideal.

It’s also worth noting that older women are more likely to be polypharmacy users compared to men. This highlights the importance of understanding the effects of polypharmacy that are specific to men and women, and developing more personalised prescribing approaches.

Future translational studies (from mice to humans) looking at how drug combinations affect Alzheimer’s in males and females are also warranted to help reduce risks and improve healthcare in the ageing population.

The global population is continuing to age, which means that an even greater number of people are going to be at risk of developing Alzheimer’s disease. This is why it’s so important we understand all of the causes of the disease and how it can be prevented.The Conversation

Silvia Maioli, Associate professor and Principal Researcher, Neurobiology, Karolinska Institutet and Francesca Eroli, PhD Researcher, Neurobiology, Karolinska Institutet

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Can drinking champagne reduce your risk of sudden cardiac arrest? Here’s why it’s only a small part of the story

Lomb/Shutterstock
David C. GazeUniversity of Westminster

“My only regret in life is that I didn’t drink enough champagne,” the English economist and philosopher John Maynard Keynes (1883–1946) is reported to have said. As it turns out, there may be a surprising ounce of truth to that quote.

Picture this: a glass of champagne – bubbly, crisp and, for many, reserved for toasts and celebrations. Now imagine it being mentioned in the same sentence as a way to help prevent sudden cardiac arrest: a condition where the heart abruptly stops beating, killing tens of thousands each year, often without warning. Sounds too good to be true, right?

Yet, a Canadian study has uncovered a curious link. Using data from over half a million people in the health research database the UK Biobank, researchers found that those who consumed moderate amounts of white wine or champagne had a lower risk of experiencing sudden cardiac arrest. Surprising, especially given the widely held belief that red wine, not white, is what benefits the heart.

To rule out coincidence, the researchers double-checked their findings using genetic data – and the connection seemed to hold firm. This suggests there might be more to the story than chance alone.

The study didn’t stop at wine. It explored more than 100 lifestyle and environmental factors tied to sudden cardiac arrest, including diet, exercise, air pollution, emotional wellbeing, body composition and education levels – all of which have been independently associated with risk. The conclusion? Up to 63% of sudden cardiac arrest cases could potentially be prevented by addressing these risk factors.

Among all the protective factors identified, a few stood out: fruit consumption, regular computer use (yes, really) and moderate drinking of white wine or champagne were all linked to a reduced risk of sudden cardiac arrest. Why? That remains uncertain.

One theory is that white wine contains antioxidants that may support heart health. Another possibility is that people who drink these types of beverages may also be more affluent and more likely to engage in other healthy behaviour, such as eating well, exercising regularly – and have access to better healthcare.

But before you pop a cork in celebration, a word of caution: alcohol remains a complex and often contradictory player in heart health. Other large-scale studies suggest a U-shaped relationship between alcohol and cardiovascular disease. Non-drinkers may have a certain level of risk, moderate drinkers of one glass of wine a day may see some benefit, but heavy drinking sharply increases the risk of high blood pressure, stroke and heart failure.

One observational study involving over 400,000 participants even found that moderate drinking could raise the risk of arrhythmias, which in some cases can lead to sudden death.

So while champagne may offer a hopeful glimmer, it’s no magic bullet. The study’s broader message was clear: it’s the overall lifestyle that matters most. Better sleep, regular physical activity and a balanced diet significantly reduced the risk of sudden cardiac arrest – and could prevent nearly one in five cases.

On the flip side, obesity, high blood pressure and chronic stress were among the strongest risk factors, along with lower education levels and exposure to air pollution. These findings underscore that preventing sudden cardiac arrest isn’t just about personal habits: it’s also about the environments we live in and the policies that shape them. Cleaner air, better education and easier access to nutritious food could all play a role.

Sudden cardiac arrest is not entirely random. Many of the contributing factors are within our control. Managing stress, staying active, maintaining a healthy weight, getting quality sleep – and yes, perhaps enjoying the occasional glass of white wine – can all help. But the real power lies in stacking small, healthy choices over time. Prevention is rarely about a single change; it’s about the cumulative effect of many.

And in case you were wondering: Keynes suffered a series of heart attacks in 1946, beginning during negotiations for the Anglo-American loan in Savannah, Georgia. He described the process as “absolute hell”. A few weeks after returning to his farmhouse in Firle, East Sussex, he died of a heart attack at the age of 62.

Maybe he was right about drinking more champagne after all.The Conversation

David C. Gaze, Senior Lecturer in Chemical Pathology, University of Westminster

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

NSW's 2025 Street Count underscores 'importance of housing and homelessness initiatives'

May 5, 2025
The 2025 Street Count has reinforced the importance of the NSW Government’s targeted investment to build more homes and strengthen homelessness services, with 2,192 people recorded as sleeping rough across the state, the government states.

Byron Shire recorded a 16 per cent decrease in the number of people sleeping rough, after having the highest count for the state in 2024.

''These results reflect positive progress following the NSW Government’s $2.3 million investment to establish a dedicated Assertive Outreach team on the North Coast, announced in May 2024. The initiative is helping connect vulnerable people with housing and support, delivering better outcomes for regional communities.'' the government said

Inner-city Sydney recorded the highest number of people sleeping rough, with a 24 per cent increase since the 2024 count. This underscores the urgent need for more housing and support in the area. In response, the NSW Government has already committed more than $1.4 million to five organisations through the $100 million Homelessness Innovation Fund, expanding access to shelter and wraparound services.

Building more homes in areas that need them most remains central to reducing the risk of homelessness. The Waterloo renewal is set to deliver more than 3,000 new homes, including over 1,600 social and affordable homes, with another 250 nearby in Eveleigh as part of the land audit.

The NSW Government is driving a comprehensive approach to help combat homelessness. This includes strengthening specialist services for immediate support and increasing housing supply to deliver long-term solutions that prevent insecurity.

Key actions underway to ensure experiences of homelessness are rare, brief and not repeated include:
  • Investing in more housing through the Building Homes for NSW Program: the$6.6 billion initiative the largest-ever investment in social housing and homelessness in NSW. It aims to build 8,400 new public homes, more than 21,000 affordable homes, and repair 30,000 public homes in need of maintenance.
  • Delivering support through the Homelessness Innovation Fund: More than $16.6 million has already been allocated under the $100 million Fund to directly support the ideas and innovation of our Specialist Homelessness Services providers and other partners on the frontline of the housing crisis.   
  • Reforming temporary accommodation: Greater investment in providing temporary accommodation and crisis services to individuals and families experiencing homelessness.
  • Designing a better system: The NSW Homelessness Strategy 2025-2035 will be released in mid-2025, providing a whole-of-government plan with a focus on prevention, early intervention, and tailored support including stand-alone action plans for Aboriginal people, children and young people.
  • Targeted planning reforms: The NSW Government has developed the Social and Affordable Housing Rezoning Pathway, which seeks to accelerate rezoning proposals for NSW communities in need and amended planning controls to fast track the delivery of temporary and crisis accommodation.
More than 370 local organisations partnered with Homes NSW to complete the 2025 Street Count in 415 towns and suburbs across 77 Local Government Areas (LGAs) in NSW.

This year’s results were captured between 4 February and 26 February 2025 and are published annually. The 2025 Street Count data can be viewed in full on The 2025 NSW Street Count results web page.

Minister for Housing and Homelessness Rose Jackson said:

“Every year the Street Count gives Government a sense of the scale of homelessness across our state and I want to thank all the volunteers, councils and organisations who participated.

“The uptick in rough sleepers is a stark reminder of the homelessness and housing crisis we face, and an urgent call to action.

“Every person deserves a safe place to call home, and the NSW Government is working tirelessly with our partners to provide the support and resources we need to make this a reality.

“Through Homes NSW, we expanded our assertive outreach teams and working hand in hand with community organisations, housing providers and all levels of government to address the root causes of homelessness.

“We’re reforming the system, planning for the future and thanks to our record investment in the Building Homes for NSW program we’re delivering more homes to ensure that no one is left behind.

“We are determined to work to drive down homelessness and as we continue to innovate and expand our efforts to provide more safe, secure and affordable housing for all.”

NSW ID support bill: Identity Protection and Recovery Bill 

Wednesday May 7 2025
People at risk of identity fraud because their documents have been breached or stolen will benefit from stronger protections and support under new laws introduced into the NSW Parliament, the government states.

The legislation will establish a new fraud check service, allowing government agencies and other accredited organisations to confirm whether identity document (ID) details have been compromised or stolen, to stop criminals misusing people’s details to apply for grants or credit.

The Identity Protection and Recovery Bill will also underpin ongoing NSW Government efforts to help residents secure their identity and avoid theft and scams through the work of ID Support NSW.

According to ScamWatch, Australians reported losing more than $2 billion to scams last year, with more than 67,000 scams reported by NSW residents alone.

ID Support provides a lifeline for people caught up in a data breach by notifying them when a breach has occurred and helping them replace government documents and guard against cyber criminals.

In 2023–24, it supported more than 40,000 customers impacted by identity misuse and data compromises. ID Support also provides community outreach and education, delivering almost 200 interactive events last year on identity, privacy and cyber security resilience. 

Under the Bill, ID Support will operate as the core government provider of identity protection and recovery services, including setting up a secure Compromised Credential Register to provide a fraud check service for IDs such as NSW driver licences and photo cards.

Once it is known an ID document is potentially compromised – for example, because an individual’s personal details, driver licence and card number have been exposed in a data breach or found on the dark web – it can be added to the Register. ID Support will then notify the individual and the issuing authority so the document can be replaced.

Authorised fraud check users such as government agencies, banks and credit card providers, who currently use document verification services, will be able to check the Register to ensure compromised identity documents are not being used fraudulently.

The Bill also allows NSW Government agencies to share relevant information to ID Support so they can alert affected individuals quickly and take immediate steps to reduce their risk of harm.

The new laws are a key action under the NSW Digital Strategy which aims to build secure, reliable and inclusive digital services and enhance cyber resilience and public trust.

The Minns Labor Government has secured the future of ID Support with a four-year, $22.7 million funding commitment through the 2024-25 Budget, after funding was set to expire under the previous government.

Minister for Customer Service and Digital Government Jihad Dib said:  
“These new laws will help safeguard NSW residents against cyber criminals and the scourge of identity theft, especially when it targets our most vulnerable citizens who can least afford it.

“By alerting people quickly and supporting them to secure their identity and replace compromised ID documents, NSW residents will be better protected from impersonation, scams and fraud.

“The new Compromised Credential Register will enable these early notifications to both individuals and agencies, and will send up a red flag when someone tries to use an ID document that has been stolen or compromised.

“The bill also ensures ID Support can provide ongoing support, advice and education to NSW communities to help build cyber security awareness and resilience.

“We are introducing this legislation to ensure ID Support NSW can work closely with police, victims and government agencies to help us prevent identity crime.”

Interim facilities propel Ryde Hospital Redevelopment forward

Wednesday May 7, 2025
Construction for the $526.8 million Ryde Hospital Redevelopment has reached a significant milestone with new interim healthcare facilities, including an interim Intensive Care and Coronary Care Unit now complete, ensuring ongoing access to care while major works continue.

The NSW Government’s investment will deliver a world-class health facility to meet the future health needs of the growing community, with more than 180,000 people expected to call the Ryde area home by 2041.

The new and enhanced facilities will support patients and health staff as construction for the redevelopment continues, which will include a new six-level Acute Services Building, and basement parking. The interim facilities will offer more contemporary amenities, supporting the continued delivery of high-quality care at Ryde Hospital.

A range of interim facilities are now complete, including a new interim intensive care/coronary care unit, the hospital’s kitchen, executive and engineering offices and a new interim loading dock.

The $526.8 million Ryde Hospital Redevelopment is set to deliver a major improvement for patients, staff and the community by consolidating healthcare services and facilities that were previously spread across 21 buildings on the campus into the new Acute Services Building. The project has been carefully staged to prepare the site for construction of the new building, set to commence next month.

Designed with the historic Denistone House at its forefront, the redevelopment will build on existing services. The Ryde Hospital’s new and expanded services will include:
  • a new and expanded emergency department, medical imaging department, intensive care unit, operating theatres and procedure rooms, and surgical/endoscopy day only spaces
  • a new purpose-built ambulatory care centre and paediatric short stay unit
  • more adult overnight inpatient beds
  • associated clinical and non-clinical support services including pharmacy, pathology, food, environmental, linen and supply services
  • contemporary education, training and research to strengthen tertiary partnerships
  • improved accessibility to the campus, including internal roads, urban spaces, landscaping and wayfinding, and engineering and information and communications technology service infrastructure.
The new hospital is expected to be completed in 2027, with the new main entry and landscaping to be completed in 2028.

To learn more visit: Ryde Hospital Redevelopment.

Minister for Health, Ryan Park said:
“The Ryde Hospital Redevelopment is immense in size and scale, and it’s a credit to careful planning, design and community consideration.

“We’ve ensured that essential healthcare services, including the intensive care unit, emergency department and operating theatres will remain operational throughout construction, ensuring uninterrupted care for the local community.”

Northern Sydney Local Health District Chief Executive Anthony Schembri stated:
“It’s a challenge to maintain the complex workings of a hospital alongside essential construction activity and these interim facilities will support our hardworking staff in keeping services running smoothly and with the high quality we expect, and the community deserves.

“The new Ryde Hospital is on track for completion in late 2027, with final site works carrying into 2028. We are excited to reach each milestone as we progress work to deliver enhanced healthcare to support the health needs of Ryde’s growing population, now and into the future.”

New Health Research and Innovation Strategy to drive NSW’s health and economic prosperity announced

Wednesday May 7, 2025
The NSW Government has today released the NSW Health Research and Innovation Strategy 2025 to 2030 - a 5-year blueprint to improve health outcomes for the people of NSW and cement the state as the nation’s innovation and investment powerhouse for health and medical research and innovation.

The government states the new strategy will target research and innovation efforts across NSW Health to where it is needed the most to move innovation from benchtop to bedside for best health outcomes for NSW patients.

It will drive collaboration across NSW Government, health, academia and industry, pulling the various research and innovation strands into one cohesive, streamlined direction for maximum gain for NSW.

The strategy will build on the major investments the NSW Government has made over the past two years to support medical research, commercialisation and infrastructure in the state, including:
  • establishment of Australia’s first Viral Vector Manufacturing Facility ($58.2 million)
  • investing $96 million into a RNA research manufacturing facility that will change the way NSW tackles its future health challenges, under construction at Macquarie University
  • targeted call for research in Aboriginal cardiovascular health ($5 million)
  • replacing Animals in Medical Research program ($4.5 million).
These investments are securing NSW as a major international hub for advanced manufacturing.

According to a report by KPMG Economic Impact of Medical Research in Australia, every $1 invested in Australian medical research returns $3.90 in economic benefit.

NSW’s globally recognised research and innovation network is home to 55% of Australia’s life science companies and 44% of start-ups.

The State is a premier destination for high-quality, efficient, and cost-effective clinical trials, and leads the nation with 31% of national trial activity.

Collaboration is key to achieving the strategy’s ambitious goals for the State, and one of the first steps is to establish a NSW Health Research and Innovation Council to drive the strategy’s vision.

The Council will comprise key stakeholders across the research and innovation ecosystem to work in partnership with Government to supercharge medical research and innovation in NSW to better attract and retain the globe’s best and brightest health researchers and boost the economy.

The government states the strategy will:
  • drive clinical trials across NSW to discover life-saving treatments for rare diseases and cancers
  • leverage NSW’s significant and world leading physical and data assets, including new infrastructure such as the RNA Pilot Facility and Viral Vector Manufacturing Facility, as well as the NSW Biobank
  • harness the enormous potential of AI to deliver better health care, building on projects such as Royal Prince Alfred Hospital’s Emergency Department pioneering new AI tools to streamline analysis of x-rays and CT scans to boost clinician decision-making
  • prioritise and focus on women’s health in medical research by supporting women to participate in the many areas of research they are under-represented
  • build partnerships to help close the gap in the health outcomes of Aboriginal people
  • boost health outcomes in rural and regional communities.
The strategy aligns with recent NSW Government measures to optimise innovation and education, including the NSW Innovation Blueprint, the NSW Industry policy, and the NSW High Education Strategy 2025-2029.

More than 400 stakeholders across the research and innovation sector were consulted to inform the development of the strategy and ensure it is best placed to shape the future of NSW’s health and medical research and innovation.


Minister for Health Ryan Park said:

“This strategy charts a path for NSW to become Australia’s leading state for medical research and innovation.

“Building on our already strong health and medical research system, this strategy will foster collaboration which will better bring together our healthcare and biomedical research sector.

“I have no doubt this strategy will lead to health innovations which will boost the health of the people in NSW.”

Minister for Medical Research David Harris said:

“The NSW Health Research and Innovation Strategy will enable NSW to realise its great potential for research and innovation to transform healthcare in our state.

“Partnerships are at the heart of this wide-ranging blueprint to improve the delivery of care, reduce health and social inequities, and contribute substantial economic benefits to NSW.

“I am particularly proud of the strategy’s focus on increasing collaboration with Aboriginal people to Close the Gap for better outcomes for our First Nations peoples.

“This strategy will also help drive more research for historically under-studied groups, including in women’s health, to improve outcomes for women across NSW.

“Tomorrow’s medical breakthrough will be the result of a well-connected and supported research sector which this strategy is building today.”

Minister for Innovation, Science and Technology Anoulack Chanthivong said:

“This strategy is an important step from the NSW Government bringing to life our Innovation Blueprint.

“NSW is the home of many of Australia’s greatest innovation success stories – from established world leaders such as Cochlear and ResMed, to future titans like Harrison AI and Nanosonics.

“The Minns Government is setting the stage for more of our health start-ups and scale-ups to join these companies as global ambassadors for the life changing innovation our state is capable of.”

Seven new magistrates appointed in further boost to the Local Court of NSW

Wednesday, 7 May 2025
The Attorney General today announced the appointment of seven new magistrates to the Local Court of New South Wales, strengthening the judiciary with a wealth of experience across criminal, civil and community law.

The new magistrates - Paul Blunt, Kirk Dailly, Tania Johnson, Simon Joyner, Marguerite Vassall, Ann Lambino and Lucas Swan - bring a combined total of more than 150 years of legal experience and will serve in locations across metropolitan and regional NSW.

The appointments reflect the NSW Government’s ongoing commitment to supporting the Local Court, the busiest court jurisdiction in Australia, with magistrates responsible for more than 90 per cent of judicial decisions in the state, including increasingly complex cases.

The incoming magistrates have extensive backgrounds in police prosecution, defence, Legal Aid, community outreach, and complex litigation. Their appointments will provide valuable support to the judiciary in managing caseloads and ensuring the delivery of timely, fair, and accessible justice.

These seven appointments bring the total number of magistrates in the Local Court to a record 161. They will be sworn in and commence in late May 2025.

Attorney General Michael Daley said:

“I am delighted to announce the appointment of seven outstanding lawyers to the Local Court bench.

“Our Local Court magistrates make critical decisions every day that affect people’s lives, families and futures.

“These new appointees bring not just legal expertise, but also compassion, integrity, and a deep understanding of the communities they will serve.

“This new cohort will strengthen the diversity, resilience and capability of the Local Court, and I thank them for their service to justice in NSW.”

BIOGRAPHIES

Paul Blunt
Paul Blunt has more than two decades of experience as a solicitor, following 10 years as a police prosecutor. He has appeared in every level of the NSW court system and contributed to the training of legal professionals and frontline service providers.

He brings a deep understanding of community safety and culturally informed practice.

Mr Blunt will be sworn in and commence as a magistrate on 26 May 2025.

Kirk Dailly
Kirk Dailly has practised as a barrister for over 20 years, with prior experience as a senior police prosecutor. He has appeared in complex trials across multiple jurisdictions and has acted in both prosecution and defence.

He has been recognised for his role in high-profile cases and coronial inquests. His legal insight and professional ethics are widely respected. 

Mr Dailly will be sworn in and commence as a magistrate on 26 May 2025.

Tania Johnson 
Tania Johnson is a highly accomplished solicitor with a twenty-year career in criminal law. She began at the Office of the Director of Public Prosecutions before joining Legal Aid NSW, where she worked as a Solicitor Advocate in the Local, District and Supreme Courts.

Her focus has been on improving access to justice, especially for vulnerable and disadvantaged clients.

Ms Johnson will be sworn in and commence as a Magistrate on 27 May 2025.

Simon Joyner 
Simon Joyner comes to the bench with 20 years of experience in criminal law. Admitted as a solicitor in 2004, he co-founded Matouk Joyner Lawyers in 2006 and his own firm in 2021. He has appeared before the High Court of Australia, the Supreme Court of NSW, and the NSW Court of Criminal Appeal.

Committed to social justice, he has contributed to initiatives supporting victims of crime particularly advocacy for women’s domestic violence and at-risk youth. He has handled diverse criminal cases, including murder and terrorism, and represented clients across Australia and New Zealand.

Mr Joyner will be sworn in and commence as a magistrate on 22 May 2025.

Marguerite Vassall  
Marguerite Vassall began her legal career in 2012 at the Office of the Director of Public Prosecutions where she has appeared widely in summary prosecutions and jury trials across multiple court jurisdictions.

Since 2023, she has served as a Solicitor Advocate and was previously Senior Solicitor in the Walama List, helping establish ODPP processes. She is respected for her clear judgment, strategic insight, and ability to manage sensitive cases with care and rigour.

Ms Vassall will be sworn in and commence as a magistrate on 23 May 2025.

Ann Lambino
Ann Lambino brings over 37 years of experience with the NSW Local Court to the bench. She began her career as a Court Officer in 1988. Since her admission as a legal practitioner in 1998 she has held a range of senior roles including Policy Officer, Deputy Registrar and Executive Officer to the Chief Magistrate. For the last 13 years, she has served as Registrar of the Coroners Court.

She is highly regarded for her extensive knowledge of court operations, leadership across jurisdictions, and longstanding dedication to accessible justice.

Ms Lambino will be sworn in and commence as a magistrate on 27 May 2025.

Lucas Swan 
Lucas Swan is an experienced solicitor in criminal, civil, compensation and family law and community legal advocate. He has a strong record of public service, courtroom advocacy and cross-jurisdictional litigation.

He has provided outreach services in remote communities and is recognised for his work advancing legal access for Indigenous Australians.

Mr Swan will be sworn in and commence as a magistrate on 23 May 2025.

Aussie music acts set to take the big stage

May 5, 2025
The Minns Labor Government states it is backing Aussie musicians by incentivising the biggest international musical touring acts to add a home-grown support act to their bill when they perform at NSW’s largest venues.

The effect will be a reduced venue hire fee at Accor Stadium, Allianz Stadium, CommBank Stadium, McDonald Jones Stadium, Newcastle Entertainment Centre, the Sydney Cricket Ground and WIN Stadium and Entertainment Centre, along with Sydney Opera House in return for choosing a local act to open the show.

Australian music is facing its biggest challenge up against streaming services that favour American content and the decline of the local live scene that eroded venues during the lockouts then the COVID era.

Under the former Coalition government, NSW lost more than half its music venues, with just 133 registered across the state in March 2023. The Minns Labor Government states it is reviving the live music scene and has since grown the number to 435 through extending trading for venues that host local artists, but there is a need to get acts back on to the biggest stage to ensure Australia can continue to export our best talent to the world.

The NSW Government is the first in Australia to adopt ‘Michael’s Rule’, named after the late artist manager Michael McMartin OAM whose passion was to see Aussie talent included on the stadium tours that take bands and solo artists to a whole new level and audience.

Oasis will tour Australia in October and November and have asked Australia’s Ball Park Music to open for them while Dua Lipa gave Kita Alexander invaluable exposure as her support act during her tour of Australia and New Zealand.

Supporting the biggest tours is a proven pathway to success. Teen Jesus and the Jean Teasers is now opening for Pearl Jam on a US stadium tour after doing so on their Australian tour. The Preatures, who supported Harry Styles, were able to book a 40-date regional tour as result.

Hoodoo Gurus, who were managed by Michael McMartin, saw their career take off after supporting Lou Reed in the 1980’s, while Cold Chisel opened for Foreigner in the 1970s. In the 1990s, You Am I played Australia shows with Soundgarden before touring the US with them, and the 2007 Daft Punk tour was crucial to the Presets and their Apocalypso album.

The incentive will see the NSW Government reduce the venue hire fee by $20,000 for each eligible show across the Venues NSW network, and a $5,000 reduction at Sydney Opera House.

To be eligible, at least one Australian artist must be included as a support act on an international artist’s headline tour. The Australian artist must appear on the same stage as the international artist and be announced at the same time as the tour.

The incentive will be available for an initial two-year period starting May 5.

Premier of New South Wales Chris Minns said:

“The Hoodoo Gurus got their first big break after they performed with Lou Reed in 1984.

“We want more Australian musicians to have that opportunity, performing on the biggest stages in NSW alongside the best international artists.

"Giving Aussie artists their first big break in front of thousands of locals will help them get high rotation on playlists and increase their chances of becoming the next big act.”

Minister for Music and the Night-time Economy John Graham said:

“There were just three Australian albums in the ARIA top 100 charts in 2024. This represents a crisis for Australian music.

“The rise of streaming is flooding our market with American music and creating a roadblock for NSW artists trying to break through. By adopting Michael’s Rule we will get more local acts on to the big stage.

“While local shows are suffering, fans are still paying the big money for big international acts. Michael’s Rule will help our local artists capture that attention.

“We want Australian artists to benefit from international touring revenue so they can build their own careers and take our music to the world. Successful bands and artists at the top of the industry are an important part for the overall scene in NSW which supports 14,000 jobs and adds $5.5 billion to the state economy."

Minister for Sport and Minister for Jobs & Tourism Steve Kamper said:

“We are bringing the entertainment back to Sydney, last year we lifted the concert cap and now we have promoters currently holding enough dates for Allianz Stadium to fulfill the recently expanded concert cap. We want to see those dates locked in.

“To make the most of this uplift in entertainment, we want to see homegrown artists given the opportunity to grow their fanbase and the domestic music industry. The flow on effects of Michael’s Rule will be huge not only for the artists, but for the pubs and clubs around NSW which will be packed with the new fans of our homegrown artists.”

Head of Sound NSW Emily Collins said:

“Australian artists are fighting an uphill battle with streaming services and social media algorithms when it comes to having their music be discovered by new audiences.

“This Australian-first policy is one small way the NSW Government can throw its weight behind home-grown talent, and give them a platform with high exposure and a unique opportunity to supercharge their career. It’s also a great way to start introducing music-loving locals to some of our amazing talent and build lifelong fans, right here at home.”

Teen Jesus and the Jean Teasers said:

"We are so happy to hear the news that the NSW Government are taking these steps to support Michael's Rule. We received the news at the airport on our way to Nashville to support Pearl Jam so we are proof that having Australian artists on international tours at home really does impact careers. Hopefully other states will join the call!"

Ball Park Music said:

“There’s no denying the benefit of a big support slot. The opportunity to play your music live in front of a new audience is the best marketing we have as artists, the chance to showcase what we’re all about in the most real and authentic fashion.

“In our career to date, we’ve had - and continue to get - great support slots where we’ve seen a direct growth in our audience that often translates to a boost in our number of long-term fans, none of which would have discovered us without that exposure.

Any initiative that can help amplify Australian talent, increase exposure, and aid in building a long term and engaged audience is a massive step in the right direction.”

We talk a lot about being ‘resilient’. But what does it actually mean?

Kinga Howard/Unsplash
Peter McEvoyCurtin University

In a world with political polarisation, war, extreme weather events and increasing costs of living, we need to be able to cope as individuals and communities.

Our capacity to cope with very real stressors in our lives – our resilience – can determine whether we thrive, just survive, or are deprived of a reasonable quality of life.

Stress vs resilience

Resilience means having the ability to cope with, and rebound from, life’s challenges and still achieve our goals.

Stress isn’t something to be avoided. We need to feel some stress to achieve our best. Exposure to manageable levels of stress and adversity develops our coping skills and resilience.

But if we feel too much stress, we can flounder or become overwhelmed.

The ability to re-activate ourselves when we feel down, fatigued or disengaged helps to optimise our focus and motivation. Sportspeople, for example, might listen to high intensity music just before a competition to increase their energy levels.

Conversely, the ability to dampen down emotional intensity can make use feel less stressed or anxious. Exercising, listening to relaxing music, or patting a much-loved pet can prevent high arousal from interfering with completing a task.

Effective emotion regulation is crucial for adapting to life’s ups and downs, and keeping us on a relatively even keel.

How does resilience develop?

Resilience emerges from interactions between personal and environmental factors.

In addition to emotion regulation skills, personal factors that can bolster resilience include academic achievement, developing a range of skills and abilities (such as sport and music) and problem-solving skills. Many of these skills can be fostered in childhood. And if one area of life isn’t going well, we can still experience confidence, joy and meaning in others.

Boy looks at phone while listening to music
Sometimes we need to increase our energy levels, other times we need to lower anxiety. Ilias Chebbi/Unsplash

People who reflect on traumatic experience and develop new positive meanings about themselves (getting through it means I’m strong!) and life (a greater appreciation) can also have higher levels of resilience.

Genetic factors and temperament also play an important role. Some of us are born with nervous systems that respond with more anxiety than others in novel, uncertain, or potentially threatening situations. And some of us are more likely to avoid rather than approach these situations. These traits tend to be associated with lower levels of resilience. But we can all learn skills to build our resilience.

Environmental factors that promote resilience include:

  • a nurturing home environment
  • supportive family and peer relationships
  • cultural identity, belonging and rituals
  • modelling from others overcoming hardship
  • community cohesion
  • government policies that provide social safety nets, strong education, anti-discrimination and inclusion
  • investment in facilities, spaces, services and networks that support the quality of life and wellbeing of communities.

Can resilience be taught?

Many factors associated with resilience are modifiable, so it stands to reason that interventions that aim to bolster them should be helpful.

There is evidence that interventions that promote optimism, flexibility, active coping and social support-seeking can have small yet meaningful positive effects on resilience and emotional wellbeing in children and adults.

However, school-based programs give us reason to be cautious.

trial across 84 schools in the United Kingdom evaluated the effectiveness of school-based mindfulness programs. More than 3,500 students aged between 11 and 13 years received ten lessons of mindfulness and a similar number did not.

There was no evidence that mindfulness had any benefit on risk for depression, social, emotional and behavioural functioning, or wellbeing after one year. Teaching school children mindfulness at scale did not appear to bolster resilience.

In fact, there was some evidence it did harm – and it was most harmful for students at the highest risk of depression. The intervention was not deemed to be effective or cost-effective and was not recommended by the authors.

In another recent trial, researchers found an emotion regulation intervention with Year 8 and 9 school children was unhelpful and even harmful, although children who engaged in more home practice tended to do better.

Girls walk across a plaza
The evidence doesn’t support school-based resilience programs. Mitchell Luo/Unsplash

These interventions may have failed for a number of reasons. The content may not have been delivered in a way that was sufficiently engaging, comprehensive, age-appropriate, frequent, individually tailored, or relevant to the school context. Teachers may also not be sufficiently trained in delivering these interventions for them to be effective. And students didn’t co-design the interventions.

Regardless of the reasons, these findings suggest we need to be cautious when delivering universal interventions to all children. It may be more helpful to wait until there are early signs of excessive stress and intervening in an individualised way.

What does this mean for resilience-building?

Parents and schools have a role in providing children with the sense of security that gives them confidence to explore their environments and make mistakes in age-appropriate ways, and providing support when needed.

Parents and teachers can encourage children to try to solve problems themselves before getting involved. Problem-solving attempts should be celebrated even more than success.

Schools need to allocate their scarce resources to children most in need of practical and emotional support in non-stigmatising ways, rather than universal approaches. Most children will develop resilience without intervention programs.

To promote resilience, schools can foster positive peer relationships, cultural identity and involvement in creative, sporting and academic pursuits. They can also highlight others’ recovery and resilience stories to demonstrate how growth can occur from adversity.

More broadly in the community, people can work on developing their own emotion regulation skills to bolster their confidence in their ability to manage adversity.

Think about how you can:

  • approach challenges in constructive ways
  • actively problem-solve rather than avoid challenges
  • genuinely accept failure as part of being human
  • establish healthy boundaries
  • align your behaviour with your values
  • receive social and professional support when needed.

This will help you navigate the ebbs and flows of life in ways that support recovery and growth.The Conversation

Peter McEvoy, Professor of Clinical Psychology, Curtin University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Is it dangerous to kiss someone who’s eaten gluten if you have coeliac disease?

Lordn/Shutterstock
Vincent HoWestern Sydney University

Coeliac disease is not a food allergy or intolerance. It’s an autoimmune disease that makes the body attack the small intestine if gluten (a protein found in wheat, rye and barley) reaches the gut. Even a small amount – a tiny bread crumb – can cause damage and inflammation.

The only treatment is a gluten-free diet. This means completely eliminating foods containing the protein, such as pasta, bread, noodles and many processed products, and preparing food carefully to avoid cross-contamination.

But what about other forms of cross-contamination? One study surveyed 538 adults with coeliac disease about their dating habits and found 39% were hesitant to kiss their partners because of the disease.

But can gluten really be transferred this way, with a kiss? Research is only just beginning to look at this question – here’s what we know.

How harmful is gluten for people with coeliac disease?

Coeliac disease is common: surveys representative of the population estimate it affects one in 70 Australians. However, it tends to be under-diagnosed. Research suggests only 20% of those with coeliac disease have a medical diagnosis.

This means most sufferers are unaware they have coeliac disease, despite experiencing unpleasant symptoms.

When untreated, coeliac disease can stop the small intestine absorbing nutrients and lead to gut symptoms such as diarrhoea, abdominal pain, bloating and flatulence. It can also result in non-gut symptoms such as fatigue, skin rashes and brain fog.

However, touching gluten won’t have any effect. Gluten only causes damage to people with coeliac disease if it enters the gut. This is why it can be effectively treated with a strict gluten-free diet.

How much gluten is harmful?

Researchers have investigated how much gluten can result in harm to people with coeliac disease. One study found some people with coeliac disease experienced damage to their small intestine with as little as 10 milligrams of gluten per day.

For context, one slice of bread contains 2.5 grams of gluten. A very small amount can cause damage if eaten, such a tiny crumb accidentally transferred from a chopping board or plate.

Australian researchers have determined that a dose of gluten below 3mg does not cause an immune response on very sensitive blood tests.

Kinfe slicing through a crusty loaf of bread.
Even a bread crumb can be harmful to people with coeliac disease, if it’s eaten. Master1305/Shutterstock

Food regulatory authorities look at how much gluten is concentrated in particular foods to decide what is “gluten free”. In most countries a diet containing gluten at less than 20 parts per million (or 20mg per kilogram) is considered to be safe for people with coeliac disease.

But Australia and New Zealand have much stricter requirements for labelling a food as “gluten free”. Testing methods in Australia allow for detection as low as three parts per million – this is known as the “limit of detection”. Foods below this limit contain no detectable gluten and can be labelled gluten free.

So, what about kissing?

What does this mean for kissing? Can enough gluten be transmitted from one person to another via saliva to cause problems? To date, there is very limited data.

New US research presented today looked at ten couples, each with one partner who had coeliac disease.

In the study, the non-coeliac partner ate ten crackers containing gluten before the couple kissed for ten seconds.

The researchers found gluten transfer was minimal in the saliva. When the non-coeliac partner had a glass of water after eating the crackers, the gluten in their saliva was less than 20 parts per million (the international limit for gluten-free products).

While this data has not yet been peer-reviewed, their preliminary finding seems to support similar research from 2022 which looked at peanut allergy and saliva to estimate gluten levels in saliva.

It estimated that saliva after eating gluten could contain around 250 micrograms of gluten – one-twelfth of the minimum amount (3mg) believed to cause an immune response.

This means, for people with coeliac disease, kissing should not be an issue to worry about.

A man, woman and child chat and laugh in a kitchen while preparing food.
Cross-contamination from foods containing gluten is the biggest risk for people with coeliac disease. Jacob Lund/Shutterstock

Other risks

The bigger risk for people with coeliac disease continues to be exposure to gluten from food – even food labelled “gluten free”.

One study found seven out of 256 manufactured food products sold as gluten free had detectable levels of gluten, in some cases as much as 3mg in a single serving.

In 2018 another study found almost 10% of food sold as gluten free at cafes and restaurants across Melbourne actually contained gluten. One food sample contained a gluten concentration of more than 80 parts per million.

Still, given Australia has strictest regulations in the world, the risk of getting sick from eating gluten-free foods is quite low.

The risk from kissing? Even lower.

If you want to look out for your loved one with coeliac disease, how you prepare food is more important. This includes preventing cross-contamination by storing and preparing gluten-free foods well away from foods containing gluten, and thoroughly cleaning equipment and utensils after they’ve been in contact with food containing gluten.

And next time you’re on a date at your favourite eatery – whether they advertise as gluten free, or just have gluten-free items on the menu – it’s a good idea to politely ask about their food handling practices.The Conversation

Vincent Ho, Associate Professor and Clinical Academic Gastroenterologist, Western Sydney University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

The MMR vaccine doesn’t contain ‘aborted Foetus debris’, as RFK Jr has claimed. Here’s the science

Hassan VallyDeakin University

Robert F. Kennedy Jr, the United States’ top public health official, recently claimed some religious groups avoid the measles, mumps and rubella (MMR) vaccine because it contains “aborted fetus debris” and “DNA particles”.

The US is facing its worst measles outbreaks in years with nearly 900 cases across the country and active outbreaks in several states.

At the same time, Kennedy, secretary of the Department of Health and Human Services, continues to erode trust in vaccines.

So what can we make of his latest claims?

There’s no Foetal debris in the MMR vaccine

Kennedy said “aborted fetus debris” in MMR vaccines is the reason many religious people refuse vaccination. He referred specifically to the Mennonites in Texas, a deeply religious community, who have been among the hardest hit by the current measles outbreaks.

Many vaccines work by using a small amount of an attenuated (weakened) form of a virus, or in the case of the MMR vaccine, attenuated forms of the viruses that cause measles, mumps and rubella. This gives the immune system a safe opportunity to learn how to recognise and respond to these viruses.

As a result, if a person is later exposed to the actual infection, their immune system can react swiftly and effectively, preventing serious illness.

Kennedy’s claim about fetal debris specifically refers to the rubella component of the MMR vaccine. The rubella virus is generally grown in a human cell line known as WI-38, which was originally derived from lung tissue of a single elective abortion in the 1960s. This cell line has been used for decades, and no new fetal tissue has been used since.

Certain vaccines for other diseases, such as chickenpox, hepatitis A and rabies, have also been made by growing the viruses in fetal cells.

These cells are used not because of their origin, but because they provide a stable, safe and reliable environment for growing the attenuated virus. They serve only as a growth medium for the virus and they are not part of the final product.

You might think of the cells as virus-producing factories. Once the virus is grown, it’s extracted and purified as part of a rigorous process to meet strict safety and quality standards. What remains in the final vaccine is the virus itself and stabilising agents, but not human cells, nor fetal tissue.

So claims about “fetal debris” in the vaccine are false.

It’s also worth noting the world’s major religions permit the use of vaccines developed from cells originally derived from fetal tissue when there are no alternative products available.

Are there fragments of DNA in the MMR vaccine?

Kennedy claimed the Mennonites’ reluctance to vaccinate stems from “religious objections” to what he described as “a lot of aborted fetus debris and DNA particles” in the MMR vaccine.

The latter claim, about the vaccine containing DNA particles, is technically true. Trace amounts of DNA fragments from the human cell lines used to produce the rubella component of the MMR vaccine may remain even after purification.

However, with this claim, there’s an implication these fragments pose a health risk. This is false.

Any DNA that may be present in this vaccine exists in extremely small amounts, is highly fragmented and degraded, and is biologically inert – that is, it cannot cause harm.

Even if, hypothetically, intact DNA were present in the vaccine (which it’s not), it would not have the capacity to cause harm. One common (but unfounded) concern is that foreign DNA could integrate with a person’s own DNA, and alter their genome.

Introducing DNA into human cells in a way that leads to integration is very difficult. Even when scientists are deliberately trying to do this, for example, in gene therapy, it requires precise tools, special viral delivery systems and controlled conditions.

It’s also important to remember our bodies are exposed to foreign DNA constantly, through food, bacteria and even our own microbiome. Our immune system routinely digests and disposes of this material without incorporating it into our genome.

This question has been extensively studied over decades. Multiple health authorities, including Australia’s Therapeutic Goods Administration, have addressed the misinformation regarding perceived harm from residual DNA in vaccines.

Ultimately, the idea that fragmented DNA in a vaccine could cause genetic harm is false.

The bottom line

Despite what Kennedy would have you believe, there’s no fetal debris in the MMR vaccine, and the trace amounts of DNA fragments that may remain pose no health risk.

What the evidence does show, however, is that vaccines like the MMR vaccine offer excellent protection against deadly and preventable diseases, and have saved millions of lives around the world.The Conversation

Hassan Vally, Associate Professor, Epidemiology, Deakin University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Independents will not help form government – but they will be vital in holding it to account

Joshua BlackAustralian National University

When the newspapers delivered their standard election-eve editorials, there were few surprises. Former Fairfax papers and smaller outlets offered qualified support for Labor, while the News Corp papers unashamedly championed the Coalition. In Adelaide, The Advertiser ran a curious line recommending a majority government of whatever persuasion, “lest our futures be in the hands of the mad Greens, self-serving teals or the independent rabble.”

How must those editors feel this morning? On the one hand, they got the majority government they wished for, and then some. The 2025 election will be mythologised in Labor circles for decades to come.

On the other hand, the “independent rabble” defied the expectations of some, and the best efforts of others, holding their seats and making gains in Sydney and Canberra, and potentially Melbourne and Perth as well. New crossbenchers will certainly be welcomed into the 48th parliament. And with the Coalition reeling from an historic defeat, they may all play a critical role in policy the debates to come.

Weathering the storm

The election campaign put all of the incumbent independent MPs through their paces. Coalition candidates and some of their outspoken media allies applied enormous personal pressure, with accusations of weakness on the issue of antisemitism and piercing questions from conservative news outlets about the transparency of some independent MPs’ donations.

Vast sums of money were also involved. In the Perth-side seat of Curtin, for example, independent MP Kate Chaney’s supporters and the Liberal Party allegedly spent $1 million each on their respective campaigns.

In the end, incumbent independents benefited from the historic pattern in federal politics: that a good independent is a tough proposition to beat. At election time, successful independent MPs benefit from the advantages of incumbency, the ability to point to specific policy or project victories arising from greater political competition for the seat, and the flexibility to adapt more quickly to changing voter attitudes, unencumbered by any party machinery.

Zali Steggall in Warringah and Helen Haines in Indi enjoyed their third successive wins, Rebekah Sharkie in Mayo a fourth general election win (she won a competitive byelection in 2018), Andrew Wilkie in Hobart a sixth victory on the trot, and north Queensland’s Bob Katter yet another term after 50 years of parliamentary service.

At the time of writing, all of the independents who won their seats in 2022 appear to have been returned. (The exception was Kylie Tink, whose electorate was abolished last year.) The closest count is in Goldstein, where incumbent Zoe Daniel narrowly leads her Liberal predecessor Tim Wilson. Other incumbents, such as Sophie Scamps in Mackellar, Allegra Spender in Wentworth, Monique Ryan in Kooyong and Kate Chaney in Curtin, have enjoyed distinctive swings toward them. In the formerly safe Labor seat of Fowler, where the party hoped to win, independent MP Dai Le enjoyed a handsome primary vote swing of around 6% in her favour.

Changing hands

The picture has been more mixed for the rest of the crossbench and other minor parties. The Greens seem set to lose two of their Brisbane seats, but a close race in the formerly safe Labor seat of Wills in Victoria may yet provide a win. Another record spendathon from Clive Palmer will see the Trumpet of Patriots win zero seats. One Nation may keep Queensland senator Malcolm Roberts in his place, but there do not appear to be any other gains for Pauline Hanson’s team.

Coalition defectors fared poorly, too. Monash MP, independent and former Liberal Russell Broadbent, appears to have secured just 10% of the primary vote, placing him behind both major parties and the community independent candidate.

In the Perth seat of Moore, Liberal defector Ian Goodenough has fallen behind Labor, Liberal and the Greens, with preferences flowing mainly to Labor candidate Tom French. Right-wing LNP defector Gerard Rennick appears unlikely to win his contest for a Queensland senate seat. In the regional NSW seat of Calare, ex-National MP Andrew Gee appears the only one able to buck the trend, coming second on primary votes and benefiting from a stronger flow of preferences than his National Party opponent.

New crossbench faces?

A series of close contests may yet result in extra independent members of parliament. Despite a bitter campaign, community independent Nicolette Boele appears likely to win in the north Sydney seat of Bradfield. In the Victorian seat of Flinders, independent Ben Smith has enjoyed a 5.4% swing toward him, and away from Liberal MP Zoe McKenzie, though preferences have not yet been published in that seat. In Fremantle, where the Australian Electoral Commission is yet to report any preference flows, independent candidate Kate Hulett may still be in with a shot to beat Labor’s Josh Wilson. The competitive result follows an impressive campaign from Hulett at the state election earlier this year.

After five weeks of vicious debates about the public service and Canberra, voters in the ACT sent clear messages to both major parties. Voices for Bean candidate Jessie Price appears to have run close to victory in Bean, and independent Senator David Pocock enjoyed an easy victory. Labor received less than a third of the primary vote in that Senate race, and barely one in seven ACT residents voted Liberal.

Not burning down the house

Despite that qualification, Labor’s victory is historic by several measures. It is one of only four occasions over the past 30 years where its primary vote actually grew at a federal election. It looks to have won a lower house majority comparable with that of the Howard government’s final term, and maybe even with the Coalition’s 2013 victory (when it won 90 seats, more than double the figure it is likely to have won this time). The two-party preferred vote shows Albanese securing the kind of victory that made John Curtin a Labor hero in 1943.

So what role does that leave for independents in the 48th parliament?

Returning crossbenchers will regard their impressive primary votes as confirmation their voters want them to keep doing politics differently. The Liberal and National parties, on the other hand, will be consumed for much of the parliamentary term with introspection and institutional reckoning. Given how unhelpful their studied unity over the past term ultimately proved, it may be there’s more infighting within the Coalition during the next parliament.

Does it matter that the crossbenchers will not hold the balance of power in the lower house? Not necessarily. In the event of a serious policy misstep from the Albanese government during this term, the crossbenchers may prove to be the more influential voices of opposition in the lower house.

Sometimes a solo voice speaks with powerful volume. In 2001 the rural independent for Calare, Peter Andren, proved to be a singularly powerful voice against the Howard government’s draconian offshore detention program for asylum seekers arriving in Australia by boat. Andren defied the national trends (and the local opinion polls) and was returned with an increased primary vote, and again in 2004. When he died, some said his opposition to the Howard government showed “more guts and decency” than “all the other Coalition and ALP candidates combined”.

Several of the current independents have earned themselves a national profile and are trusted advocates on issues such as public integrity and accountability, climate and energy policy and even foreign and security affairs. There will certainly be few MPs left on the opposition benches who can speak with compelling authority on some of these issues. In the face of an emboldened Labor government, their opposition to contentious legislation may sometimes have outsized influence.

In pragmatic political terms, it is arguably in the Labor Party’s interests to negotiate, and to be seen to negotiate, with the crossbench. The independents in formerly safe Liberal seats are some of the biggest obstacles in any future Liberal pathway back into office.

Newly-elected Labor MPs may also depend on preferences from community independent candidates next time they go to the polls. The Menzies government owed part of its longevity in the late 1950s and 1960s to its ability to win the preferences of the Democratic Labor Party, an anti-communist breakaway party from Labor.

Independents are nothing like the DLP, and many run open tickets instead of strictly recommending preferences on their how to vote cards. But in some seats, including the leader of the opposition’s seat of Dickson, independent and Greens voters’ preferences will have proven crucial for Labor’s success.

‘Every day is minority government in the Senate’

The other crucial reason independents still have a role to play is the Senate. Pocock recently remarked that “every day is minority government in the Senate”. Albanese’s victory, no matter how impressive, does not extend to a majority in the red chamber.

The last time a party won a majority in the Senate was in 2004. Before that, it was 1977. No matter how large a lower-house majority, negotiation and compromise are simply unavoidable for laws to get passed in the federal parliament.

The Greens will now hold the balance of power in the Senate. Other crucial crossbenchers include Pocock and, assuming she is re-elected as the sixth senator for Tasmania, Jacqui Lambie. During the 47th parliament, Pocock and Lambie often proved decisive in shaping, amending and sometimes postponing legislation they felt needed improvement.

Both will bring a range of priorities to the 48th parliament. They may also collaborate more routinely with lower house crossbench colleagues to make those critical votes in the senate count for everything that they are worth. That would be a good thing. After all, both chambers really do matter in our parliamentary system.


Editor’s note: this article was updated on May 5 to take account of the updated vote counts in the electorate of Bean and for the Senate.The Conversation

Joshua Black, Visitor, School of History, Australian National University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

In its soul-searching, the Coalition should examine its relationship with the media

Matthew RicketsonDeakin University and Andrew DoddThe University of Melbourne

Among the many lessons to be learnt by the Liberal-National Coalition parties from the election is that they should stop getting into bed with News Corporation Australia.

Why would a political party outsource its policy platform and strategy to people with plenty of opinions, but no experience in actually running a government?

The result of the federal election suggests that unlike the Coalition, many Australians are ignoring the opinions of News Corp Australia’s leading journalists such as Andrew Bolt and Sharri Markson.

Last Thursday, in her eponymous program on Sky News Australia, Markson said:

For the first time in my journalistic career I’m going to also offer a pre-election editorial, endorsing one side of politics […] A Dutton prime ministership would give our great nation the fresh start we deserve.

After a vote count that sees the Labor government returned with an increased majority, Bolt wrote a piece for the Herald Sun admonishing voters:

No, the voters aren’t always right. This time they were wrong, and this gutless and incoherent Coalition should be ashamed. Australians just voted for three more years of a Labor government that’s left this country poorer, weaker, more divided and deeper in debt, and which won only by telling astonishing lies. That’s staggering. If that’s what voters really like, then this country is going to get more of it, good and hard.

The Australian and most of News’ tabloid newspapers endorsed the Coalition in their election eve editorials.

The election result was a repudiation of the minor culture war Dutton reprised during the campaign when he advised voters to steer clear of the ABC and “other hate media”. It may have felt good alluding to “leftie-woke” tropes about the ABC, but it was a tactical error. The message probably resonated only with rusted-on hardline Coalition voters and supporters of right-wing minor parties.

But they were either voting for the Coalition, or sending them their preferences, anyway. Instead, attacking the ABC sent a signal to the people the Coalition desperately needed to keep onside – the moderates who already felt disappointed by the Coalition’s drift to the right and who were considering voting Teal or for another independent.

Attacking just about the most trusted media outlet in the country simply gave those voters another reason to believe the Coalition no longer represented their values.

Reporting from the campaign bus is often derided as shallow form of election coverage. Reporters tend to be captive to a party’s agenda and don’t get to look much beyond a leader’s message. But there was real value in covering Dutton’s daily stunts and doorstops, often in the outer suburbs that his electoral strategy relied on winning over.

What was revealed by having journalists on the bus was the paucity of policy substance. Details about housing affordability and petrol pricing – which voters desperately wanted to hear – were little more than sound bites.

This was obvious by Dutton’s second visit to a petrol station, and yet there were another 15 to come. The fact that the campaign bus steered clear of the sites for proposed nuclear plants was also telling.

The grind of daily coverage helped expose the lateness of policy releases, the paucity of detail and the lack of preparation for the campaign, let alone for government.

On ABC TV’s Insiders, the Nine Newspapers’ political editor, David Crowe, wondered whether the media has been too soft on Dutton, rather than too hard as some Coalition supporters might assume.

He reckoned that if the media had asked more difficult questions months ago, Dutton might have been stress-tested and better prepared before the campaign began.

Instead, the Coalition went into the election believing it would be enough to attack Labor without presenting a fully considered alternative vision. Similarly, it would suffice to appear on friendly media outlets such as News Corp, and avoid more searching questions from the Canberra press gallery or on the ABC.

Reporters and commentators across the media did a reasonable job of exposing this and holding the opposition to account. The scrutiny also exposed its increasingly desperate tactics late in the campaign, such as turning on Welcome to Country ceremonies.

If many Australians appear more interested in what their prospective political leaders have to say about housing policy or climate change than the endless culture wars being waged by the coalition, that message did not appear to have been heard by Peta Credlin.

The Sky News Australia presenter and former chief of staff to prime minister Tony Abbott said during Saturday night’s election coverage “I’d argue we didn’t do enough of a culture war”.The Conversation

Matthew Ricketson, Professor of Communication, Deakin University and Andrew Dodd, Professor of Journalism, Director of the Centre for Advancing Journalism, The University of Melbourne

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

What is a ‘smart city’ and why should we care? It’s not just a buzzword

guitar photographer/Shutterstock
Milad HaghaniThe University of MelbourneAbbas RajabifardThe University of Melbourne, and Benny ChenThe University of Melbourne

More than half of the world’s population currently lives in cities and this share is expected to rise to nearly 70% by 2050.

It’s no wonder “smart cities” have become a buzzword in urban planning, politics and tech circles, and even media.

The phrase conjures images of self-driving buses, traffic lights controlled by artificial intelligence (AI) and buildings that manage their own energy use.

But for all the attention the term receives, it’s not clear what actually makes a city smart. Is it about the number of sensors installed? The speed of the internet? The presence of a digital dashboard at the town hall?

Governments regularly speak of future-ready cities and the promise of “digital transformation”. But when the term “smart city” is used in policy documents or on the campaign trail, it often lacks clarity.

Over the past two decades, governments around the world have poured billions into smart city initiatives, often with more ambition than clarity. The result has been a patchwork of projects: some genuinely transformative, others flashy but shallow.

So, what does it really mean for a city to be smart? And how can technology solve real urban problems, not just create new ones?

What is a smart city, then?

The term “smart city” has been applied to a wide range of urban technologies and initiatives – from traffic sensors and smart meters to autonomous vehicles and energy-efficient building systems.

But a consistent, working definition remains elusive.

In academic and policy circles, one widely accepted view is that a smart city is one where technology is used to enhance key urban outcomes: liveability, sustainability, social equity and, ultimately, people’s quality of life.

What matters here is whether the application of technology leads to measurable improvements in the way people live, move and interact with the city around them.

By that standard, many “smart city” initiatives fall short, not because the tools don’t exist, but because the focus is often on visibility and symbolic infrastructure rather than impact.

This could be features like high-tech digital kiosks in public spaces that are visibly modern and offer some use and value, but do little to address core urban challenges.

The reality of urban governance – messy, decentralised, often constrained – is a long way from the seamless dashboards and simulations often promised in promotional material.

But there is a way to help join together the various aspects of city living, with the help of “digital twins”.

Artist concept of a futuristic city display with various stats overlaid.
Slick digital dashboards that show the stats of a city at a glance are a far cry from the messy reality of city governance. thinkhubstudio/Shutterstock

Digital twin (of?) cities

Much of the early focus on smart cities revolved around individual technologies: installing sensors, launching apps or creating control centres. But these tools often worked in isolation and offered limited insight into how the city functioned as a whole.

City digital twins represent a shift in approach.

Instead of layering technology onto existing systems, a city digital twin creates a virtual replica of those systems. It links real-time data across transport, energy, infrastructure and the environment. It’s a kind of living, evolving model of the city that changes as the real city changes.

This enables planners and policymakers to test decisions before making them. They can simulate the impact of a new road, assess the risk of flooding in a changing climate or compare the outcomes of different zoning options.

Used in this way, digital twins support decisions that are better informed, more responsive, and more in tune with how cities actually work.

Not all digital twins operate at the same level. Some offer little more than 3D visualisations, while others bring in real-time data and support complex scenario testing.

The most advanced ones don’t just simulate the city, but interact with it.

Where it’s working

To manage urban change, some cities are already using digital twins to support long-term planning and day-to-day decision-making – and not just as add-ons.

In Singapore, the Virtual Singapore project is one of the most advanced city-scale digital twins in the world.

It integrates high-resolution 3D models of Singapore with real-time and historical data from across the city. The platform has been used by government agencies to model energy consumption, assess climate and air flow impacts of new buildings, manage underground infrastructure, and explore zoning options based on risks like flooding in a highly constrained urban environment.

In Helsinki, the Kalasatama digital twin has been used to evaluate solar energy potential, conduct wind simulations and plan building orientations. It has also been integrated into public engagement processes: the OpenCities Planner platform lets residents explore proposed developments and offer feedback before construction begins.

A panoramic view of the centre of Helsinki with blue skies and a white cloud above the white cathedral in the centre.
Urban planners in Helsinki have been using a digital twin to help plan building orientations. Mistervlad/Shutterstock

We need a smarter conversation about smart cities

If smart cities are going to matter, they must do more than sound and look good. They need to solve real problems, improve people’s lives and protect the privacy and integrity of the data they collect.

That includes being built with strong safeguards against cyber threats. A connected city should not be a more vulnerable city.

The term smart city has always been slippery – more aspiration than definition. That ambiguity makes it hard to measure whether, or how, a city becomes smart. But one thing is clear: being smart doesn’t mean flooding citizens with apps and screens, or wrapping public life in flashy tech.

The smartest cities might not even feel digital on the surface. They would work quietly in the background, gather only the data they need, coordinate it well and use it to make citizens’ life safer, fairer and more efficient.The Conversation

Milad Haghani, Associate Professor & Principal Fellow in Urban Risk & Resilience, The University of MelbourneAbbas Rajabifard, Professor in Geomatics and SDI, The University of Melbourne, and Benny Chen, Senior Research Fellow, Infrastructure Engineering, The University of Melbourne

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Truth and lies, trust and doubt: how should we be navigating the misinformation crisis?

Pixelvario/Shutterstock
Jane GoodallWestern Sydney University

“Lies are often much more plausible, more appealing to reason than reality, since the liar has the great advantage of knowing beforehand what the audience wishes or expects to hear.”

This statement might have been written last year – or last week – as a comment on the current state of political reporting. It is actually from Lying in Politics, an article by Hannah Arendt published in The New York Review of Books in November 1971. Her reflections were prompted by the release of the Pentagon Papers, which provided devastating evidence of the discrepancy between US government narrative about its role in the Vietnam War and the actual policies of engagement.


Review: Age of Doubt: Building Trust in a World of Misinformation – edited by Tracey Kirkland and Gavin Fang (Monash University Publishing)


Somehow, the sense that we can no longer trust public institutions and the information they feed us always seems immediate: a pathology of recent development. Age of Doubt: Building Trust in a World of Misinformation, a collection of essays edited by ABC journalists Tracey Kirkland and Gavin Fang, addresses the misinformation crisis as “one of the central issues of our time”.

Arendt wrote in response to a particular moment of crisis in public trust. There is no question that we are currently facing another. But if the problem isn’t new, what is “new” about the present crisis? What gives the issue an escalated priority now?

The 25 short articles in the book offer a range of diagnoses. Journalists and news editors feature prominently, but there are also contributions from heads of major public institutions. Their brief was to consider how and why trust has been replaced by doubt: the title of the book is printed on the cover so that the first word is overlaid by the second.

The implication that trust is the opposite of doubt is problematic. Mistrust or suspicion are surely the antitheses. And if trust is replaced by doubt, is that necessarily a bad thing? An environment riddled with propaganda and disinformation tends to generate fierce certainties about false beliefs. It promotes excessive levels of trust in influencers and highly manipulative public figures. This is not something the anthology sets out to address.

Cut flowers

Several of the contributors see the trust breakdown in almost existential terms, as part of a deep history of divided perceptions. Fang returns to Plato’s cave, where the inhabitants are restrained from turning in the direction of the real world and can only see its shadows on an inner wall. Everyone sees these shadows differently.

The relevance of this ancient metaphor to a culture increasingly dominated by screens is all too obvious. Fang quotes linguistics professor Nick Enfield, who calls for “a literacy around our own limitations”. The loss of common vision also concerns Simon Longstaff, director of the Ethics Centre, who suggests that we are at a similar juncture to that faced by French philosopher René Descartes in the mid 17th century. As the certainties of the past collapse, the loss of a common standard of judgement is making trust impossible.

Former New York Times journalist Ben Decker, a specialist in information warfare, compares the problem to coastal erosion. “It’s not like we didn’t see this coming,” he asserts. Marshall McLuhan, one of the pioneers of media theory, was warning us about it in the 1970s. Disinformation existed long before the internet. Like Fang, Decker sees it as an existential problem. We must focus on how to “increase empathy at scale”, rather than investing ever more in programs to counter disinformation.

Marshall McLuhan in 1967. Bernard Gotfryd, Public domain, via Wikimedia Commons

Anglican archbishop Michael Stead diagnoses the empathy deficit as an inevitable consequence of loss of faith. A society that is no longer Christian continues to operate on Christian foundations, leaving us “like cut flowers”, without the common ground we need for survival.

Many of the contributors regard the COVID pandemic as a turning point. Conspiracy theories spread as a secondary and ultimately more enduring virus. Kaz Ross, a specialist in extremism and conspiracy theories, explains how they arise in the gap between an unexpected event and our capacity to account for it. Once the false accounts are up and running, it is hard for genuine explanation to get traction.

Former Victorian Police Commissioner Graham Ashton had to front up to situations in which the community was judging police actions without knowing the circumstances. Instantaneous online reactions exacerbated the tensions. The experience reinforced his conviction that police must be part of community, not other to it.

That’s easily said, and it puts another vote in the empathy box. But the word “empathy” itself is being enlisted to carry too much weight in the quest for solutions. What does it mean in these contexts?

The only person here with a convincing answer to that is Yolŋu elder Yalmay Yunupingu. Yunupingu is coming from a place where community is continuously lived rather than constantly referred to, where practices of truth-telling go back through generations. The kinship system, Gurrutu, is the foundational truth from which trust is grown.

There are none of Archbishop Stead’s cut flowers here. Instead of well-intentioned talk of something called empathy, there are rules, responsibilities and protocols. Children are educated in these through storytelling. Language is a precious heritage to be honoured and cultivated – a salient reminder that the betrayal of truth begins with speaking falsely.

Where does agency lie?

Telling a lie to a circle of people whose faces you can see carries a very different moral force from wielding the firehose of falsehoods in a global media environment. When Kirkland says “something in this current age is different, sometimes dangerously so”, we are steered towards the central questions of where agency lies, and to what extent the problem is inherent in new forms of media.

Social media platforms are an easy target, and one journalists are especially inclined to pick, for obvious reasons. As Nic Newman and Amy Ross Arguedas from the Reuters Institute for the Study of Journalism point out, journalists are often targets of vindictive posts from bloggers who have no accountability for what they say.

Polarisation is being supercharged in the pandemonium of social media. Plummeting levels of trust in professional news media tend to correlate with escalating levels of aggravation on TikTok or X. But that is only part of the story, which requires more sustained focus than it gets from this rather disparate collection of writings. Social media are as various as any other form of public communication. It is easy to overlook the role of public commentary in responding to real problems and critiquing the roles high-profile reporters and presenters play in the political arena.

There is as wide a difference between an abusive spray on X and a serious discursive exchange on Threads as there is between political feuding on Sky and the kind of news reporting we expect from the ABC. News journalists who are feeling the pressure might do well to attend to some of the more cogent criticism on public platforms, rather than sweeping it all into the basket of deplorables.

None of the contributors who are engaged in news journalism are proposing this kind of rapprochement as one of the solutions to the yawning gulf of mistrust, even though there are many distinguished reporters who have a significant social media presence and use it to promote ethical awareness on issues of critical importance. Australians Van Badham and Debbie Spillane, Guardian writer George MonbiotAnne Applebaum of The Atlantic, and MSNBC legal analyst Andrew Weissman are among those who do this effectively.

In Age of Doubt, editors Tracey Kirkland and Gavin Fang address the misinformation crisis. Monash University Publishing

Radical impartiality

ABC presenter Patricia Karvelas takes on the “radical impartiality” challenge that dogs all political journalists at the national broadcaster. In a measured and well-documented overview, she cites data on falling levels of satisfaction with government, loss of faith in democracy, and the rise of influence campaigns funded by “bad actors sowing dissent”.

Then comes the question of what radical impartiality looks like in this volatile environment, where high profile figures like herself can only measure their performance by being attacked with equal virulence from the left and the right. The solution, says Karvelas, lies in raising democratic literacy levels and equipping the public with tools to be better adjudicators.

That is a rather condescending view, which goes along with being satisfied that the public have been given a voice when their text messages are read out or when they get to ask a question of a panel of celebrity speakers. But this only widens the gulf and increases the frustration. Perhaps people make comments on social media because they have a point to make that is being missed by the voices issuing from television and radio?

News professionals, even in the most distinguished circles, can be remarkably obtuse on matters that are their core business. “Every tribe has its myths, and journalists are no exception,” writes Fergus McIntosh of the New Yorker. Fact-checking he says, has become “a pursuit bordering on mania”. But as the go-to solution in a disinformation fire-storm, the practice is just not cutting through.

Are those who manage staff budgets catering for some 30 dedicated fact-checkers at the New Yorker unaware that deception and manipulation do not reside in individual “facts” (however defined), but in the connections between them, the way they are strung into pseudo-logical assertions, thrown out in colourful non-sequiturs, or woven into narratives heavily loaded with implication?

Those are exactly the kinds of things that get picked up in social media communities, where participants correlate their understanding from a range of sources and share them with others who do likewise.

It is Danish news director Ulrik Haagerup, CEO of the Constructive Institute, who offers the most agile and insightful perspective on these matters. His contribution is all about the challenge of self-appraisal. He reports on workshops for editors – held at News Corp, of all places – in which the agenda was identifying how to do and see things differently.

This exercise begins with a resolve “to rethink continuously the business of storytelling”. At the Danish Broadcasting Corporation, Haagerup led experiments with stories that asked different kinds of questions and shifted some hardwired premises about how news communication should be framed. One strategy involved accompanying politicians to regional locations, where they were asked to talk to “real people”.

In picking “trust” rather than “truth” as the central theme of the anthology, the editors have wisely sidestepped the risks of inviting didactic or polemical views. “Truth carries within itself an element of coercion,” Arendt warns. Trust may involve an acceptance of the Plato’s cave dilemma. No one lays claim to the truth more vehemently than the propagandist who appeals to reason with lies.The Conversation

Jane Goodall, Emeritus Professor, Writing and Society Research Centre, Western Sydney University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Disclaimer: These articles are not intended to provide medical advice, diagnosis or treatment.  Views expressed here do not necessarily reflect those of Pittwater Online News or its staff.

Week One May 2025 (April 28 - May 4)

2025 APRA Music Award winners announced

Photo: King Stingray's Theo Dimathaya Burarrwanga and Roy Kellaway. Credit: Lucinda Goodwin

Thursday April 30, 2025 : 1am

  • Amyl and the Sniffers, Kevin Parker, King Stingray, Sia and Troye Sivan among the winners on the night
  • First time winners include Coterie, Kaiit, Lithe, Make Them Suffer and Royel Otis
  • lncredible performances from Gut Health, Jude York, Lior, Ripple Effect Band, Sarah Blasko and more

The winners of the 2025 APRA Music Awards have been announced at a star-studded evening at Melbourne Town Hall celebrating the talented songwriters and music publishers that have achieved outstanding success in the past year. 

Melbourne powerhouse four-piece, Amyl and the Sniffers, clinched the coveted Peer-Voted APRA Song of the Year for their electrifying track “U Should Not Be Doing That”. This accolade, determined by thousands of fellow songwriter members, tops off an exceptional few months for the band, who recently graced the stage at Coachella during their extensive world tour. 

Also following up a remarkable year on the circuit is Kevin Parker, who took home two awards for Dua Lipa’s pop anthem “Houdini”, snapping up Most Performed Australian Work and Most Performed Pop Work. Parker collaborated with international co-writers Caroline Ailin, Danny Harle, Dua Lipa and Tobias Jesso Jr. on the hit song. 

Three-time nominee, Troye Sivan, who took home last year’s Peer-Voted APRA Song of the Year with “Rush”, has been honoured with the prestigious Songwriter of the Year award, as chosen by the APRA Board. The international super star first received an APRA Music Award in 2017 for Breakthrough Songwriter of the Year. 

One of Australia’s most successful musical exports, Sia, took out Most Performed Australian Work Overseas for the second consecutive year with her aptly titled hit “Unstoppable”. This marks her sixth win in this category.  

Making its grand return to the line-up this year, the International Recognition Award was presented to Grammy-Award-winning producer, Keanu Torres, for his incredible international success writing for superstars including Doechii, Taylor Swift and The Kid LAROI.  

The final board-appointed award of the night was the Emerging Songwriter of the Year, presented to first-time winners Otis Pavlovic and Royel Maddell aka Royel Otis. 

In the Most Performed categories, first-time winners Coterie, comprised of brothers Brandford, Conrad, Joshua and Tyler Fisher, along with co-writer Robby De Sa, claimed the Most Performed Alternative Work award for "Paradise". Ziggy Alberts, a familiar face at the APRA Music Awards, secured his third time win for Most Performed Blues & Roots Work with his latest hit "New Love." 

Nashville-based hit-maker, Kylie Sackley, alongside co-writers Timothy Cooper and Justin Morgan, won the Most Performed Country Work for Cooper Alan’s “Take Forever (Hally’s Song)”. The unstoppable Dom Dolla, with co-writers Clementine Douglas, Toby Scott and Caitlin Stubbs, took out Most Performed Dance/Electronic Work for the smash hit “Saving Up”. 

The Most Performed Hard Rock/Heavy Metal category was awarded to APRA Music Award debutants, Make Them Suffer, for “Epitaph”, while fellow first-timers Lithe and co-writer Omid Khasrawy took out Most Performed Hip Hop/Rap Work for the viral hit “Fall Back”. 

Neo soul singer-songwriter Kaiit with co-writers Jake Amy, Anthony Liddell, Jaydean Miranda and Justin Smith also won her first award for “Space” in the Most Performed R&B/Soul Work. Yolŋu surf rock favourites, King Stingray, took out the Most Performed Rock Work for their soaring hit “Through The Trees”. 

Richard Wilkins was on hand to present Australia’s undisputed queen of pop, Kylie Minogue, with the prestigious Ted Albert Award for Outstanding Services to Australian Music. In her acceptance speech, Minogue said: “Thank you so much, APRA. This is such an honour, I am completely over the moon. I'm only sad that I'm not with you in person.  

“17-year-old me would not be able to compute the life that music has given me. I mean, we all know it's work. You work for it, but I feel like whatever we give and whatever it might take from us, we receive more.  

“As I'm on tour at the moment, I'm singing songs from throughout my entire catalogue. From the first one, “The Locomotion”, right up to songs from Tension, so I'm really aware of the passage of time and just how much more music means to me.”

 Photo: Brendan Minogue, Rebecca Shand, Charlie Minogue, James Minogue. Credit: Lucinda Goodwin.

The awards were hosted by Zan Rowe with guest presenters Hau Lātūkefu and Ngaiire. Returning Music Director, Julian Hamilton, curated an electrifying mix of performances including Lior’s cover of the Powderfinger classic “These Days” to commemorate the 25th anniversary of Odyssey Number Five and Sarah Blasko’s moving homage to the late singer-songwriter Jack Colwell for the In Memoriam segment.  

The five Peer-Voted APRA Song of the Year finalists were reimagined with incredible performances. Dylan Atlantis and FRIDAY* delivered a stunning rendition of Troye Sivan’s “One of Your Girls”, tiffi gave Missy Higgins’ “The Second Act” an indie-pop twist, and Ripple Effect Band’s rendition of King Stingray’s “Through The Trees” was a triumph for the all-female band.  

Post-punk six-piece, Gut Health, packed a punch with their cover of Song of the Year winner, Amyl and the Sniffers’ “U Should Not Be Doing That”. DENNI, TAIJA and Zaya wrapped up the final five with their take on 3% and Jessica Mauboy’s powerful “Won’t Stop”. Jude York closed the evening with his crowd-pleasing ode to Queen Kylie’s global hit “Can’t Get You Out of My Head.” 

Dean Ormston, CEO of APRA AMCOS, concluded: “Congratulations to all this year’s nominees and winners on their incredible success. It’s been another huge year for Australian music, both at home and overseas, and it’s fantastic to see our songwriters’ music being played and celebrated on stages big and small, and on platforms globally.  

“It’s heartwarming to see so many first-time winners this year, showcasing the incredible breadth of talent Australia produces, and it’s a testament to the opportunity of Australia becoming a global songwriting powerhouse. 

“With an election just days away, we hope that both sides of government can see the immense talent we have here, and the opportunities to build a stronger, fairer, more vibrant future for Australian music, recognising our music as the global cultural powerhouse and valuable export that it so clearly is.” 

Click here to see the full list of winners.

Photo: Ripple Effect Band. Credit: Rick Clifford.

 

Soundboks Oz Grom Open – Now Bigger and Better Than Ever

Presented by O’Neill and Incorporating the WSL Traeger Grills Pro Junior

The 2025 Soundboks Oz Grom Open, hosted by Le-Ba Boardriders, is set to return for its 14th year of this iconic junior surfing competition. This long-standing event has evolved, bringing a fresh new look and feel as it attracts surfers, fans, and sponsors from around the world. With a brand-new naming sponsor, Soundboks, and presenting partner O’Neill, the event is poised to be bigger and better than ever.

Incorporating the WSL Traeger Grills Pro Junior, the event will take place from 3–8 July 2025 in the beautiful, surf-rich region of Lennox Head. As one of the most prestigious junior surfing competitions globally, the Soundboks Oz Grom Open brings together top-level competitors contending for national rankings, with the U16 and U18 divisions vying for selection to represent Australia at the International Surfing Association (ISA) World Junior Championships.

The Soundboks Oz Grom Open event features both the U14 to U18 divisions (competing for national rankings and ISA selection) and the WSL Traeger Grills Pro Junior, where surfers under 21 battle for qualification to the upcoming WSL World Junior Championships. This unique combination of elite junior talent and professional-level competition makes the event one of the most exciting junior surf events worldwide.

Taj Air - 2024 comp. Photo:  Surfing NSW – Ethan Smith

With divisions for both boys and girls and a strong focus on inclusivity and youth empowerment, the event celebrates surfing’s universal appeal—fostering confidence, community, and connection among the next generation of champions.

Built to mirror a WSL Tour event, it features a professional judging panel, computerised scoring, digital priority boards, athlete zones, and a live global webcast with commentary from world-renowned surf personalities, reaching more than one million viewers worldwide. In 2024, ISA World Junior Champion Dane Henry’s perfect 10-point ride wowed the crowd and racked up 1.1 million Instagram views, spotlighting the world-class talent the event attracts.

“The Oz Grom Open is more than a surf comp — it’s where the next generation of champions are forged and where our town comes together to celebrate youth, surf, and the coastal lifestyle,” said Anthony O’Brien, Event Manager. 

“Each year, the energy grows, and with new partners like Soundboks on board, 2025 will be our biggest event yet.”

Beyond the waves, the event has long been a key driver of the economy and regional tourism during the traditionally quieter winter season. Locals affectionately refer to it as Christmas in July, as families, surf fans, and athletes flock to Lennox, bringing a welcome upswing for local cafes, retail, accommodation, and tourism operators.

“The Grom Comp embraces so much of the Aussie surfer’s journey — the classic road trip, the grommet enthusiasm, and the time spent with other kids who all love surfing. Memories and friendships are made that stand the test of time... and maybe the opportunity to prove yourself in Australia’s biggest grom event. We are stoked to be involved,” said Rob Bain, O’Neill Marketing Director.

Whether you’re a surf fan, travelling family, or regional explorer, the event is the perfect chance to experience the Northern Rivers—from whale watching and rainforest hikes to vibrant markets, beachside dining, and its famously relaxed lifestyle.

Registrations open at 9 a.m. on Monday, 12 May, and close at 5 p.m. on Monday, 19 May. 

Full entry details and registrations will be available via the Soundboks Oz Grom Open website and the Surfing Australia Just Go platform. Surfers are encouraged to register early, as divisions are limited and demand is expected to be high.

Talent pool runs deep at swim championships

April 30, 2025

Plenty of star power was on display, in and out of the pool, at the state swimming and diving championships. The NSW Department of Education's News Officer, Glenn Cullen, reports.

Olympian Olivia Wunsch presenting - Boys 16-19 years Multi Class 50m Butterfly medallists: (Gold: Declan Budd, Davidson High School. Silver: Harry Keane, Wagga Wagga High School. Bronze: Josh Graham, Young High School).

The numbers couldn’t have been much more impressive at the recently completed NSW high schools and primary schools swimming and diving championships as more than 8,000 thousand spectators watched 3,300 athletes rack up 23 new state records.

Held back-to-back across a week at Sydney’s Olympic Park Aquatic Centre, the events showcased some of the country’s best young swimmers who may be dreaming of the Brisbane 2032 Olympic Games.

The first major event on the 2025 NSW Combined High Schools Sports Association (NSWCHSSA) and NSW Primary Schools Sports Association (NSWPSSA) calendars enjoyed some star power with the attendance of Paris Olympics 4 x 100m freestyle relay gold medallist Olivia Wunsch and five-time Olympic diver and two-time Games medallist Melissa Wu.

The pair attended thanks to the department’s partnership with the Australian Olympic Committee (AOC) and its Olympics Unleashed program.

“It was so heart-warming to see the smiles on the students’ faces when they come face-to-face with these Olympic athletes and in some instances, their idols. It was obvious that the students were really inspired by these experiences,” NSWCHSSA Executive Officer, Jacky Patrick said.

Numbers for the event’s live stream were equally impressive, already attracting more than 50,000 views.

Student commentators Gloria Tauiliili and Tahlia Greene (Westfields Sports High School) and Lucy Davidson (Pennant Hills High School) joined the live stream commentary team, getting an insight into live events and polishing their media skills at the same time.

But as always, the swimmers and divers were the biggest stars of the show.

In the NSWCHSSA event it was hard to go past Cyrus Fosberg (Tuggerah Lakes College) who scooped six gold medals and two state records in boys’ 12-15 years Multi Class events.

Chris Song (Kent Road Public School) picked up four wins and two seconds while also logging three new state records in the boys’ 12-13 years division in the NSWPSSA championships.

High school swimmers Luke Chen (Northern Beaches Secondary College, Manly Campus) won five events while Benji Lynas (Turramurra High School), Xavier Miles (Moruya High School) and Ciara Nixon (Corrimal High School) all claimed four. Declan Budd (Davidson High School) and Lily Bright-Taylor (Toormina High School) both took out four wins in Multi Class events.

Other primary school standouts were Titus Teoh (Artarmon Public School) who bagged four golds and two records while Charlie Manwaring (Jerrabomberra Public School) and Chloe Webster (Kareela Public School) each picked up two Multi Class wins.

“Our students have again produced high level performances at these events. The individual achievements and setting of new records highlight the talent that continues to shine among our next generation of student athletes,” School Sport Unit, Sport Strategy and Planning Coordinator, Darren Lang said.

The top place-getters from the secondary schools’ competition will now compete for state team selection at the upcoming NSW All Schools event while the qualifying primary students automatically take their place in the NSW team.

Both teams will compete at the School Sport Australia Championships, to be held later in the year in Brisbane and Ballarat.

Abdul Abdullah awarded Packing Room Prize 2025 for portrait of artist Jason Phu

May 1, 2025

Winner Packing Room Prize 2025, Abdul Abdullah No mountain high enough © the artist  

Abdul Abdullah has been named the winner of the 2025 Packing Room Prize at the Art Gallery of New South Wales for his portrait of fellow artist and friend Jason Phu. Abdullah’s portrait, titled No mountain high enough, marks his seventh time as an Archibald finalist and was selected from 57 finalists in the Archibald Prize, Australia’s most prestigious art award.

Now in its 34th year, the Packing Room Prize, valued at $3000, is awarded to the best entry in the Archibald Prize as judged by the Art Gallery staff who receive, unpack and hang the entries.

Alexis Wildman, senior installation officer and member of the Art Gallery’s Packing Room team, says: ‘We were instantly drawn to Abdul Abdullah’s portrait of Jason Phu. Both are accomplished artists whose works have a distinct style and engage with complex social and cultural themes using wit and cartoonish references. The team holds great respect for the way both Abdul and Jason have progressed in their careers.

‘On a technical level, this portrait is very well painted. It really captures the essence of the subject with the image of a lone ranger, an intrepid jokester or a quiet hero navigating the rocky terrain of today’s social climate. This immediately sparked conversation among the Packing Room team,’ said Wildman.

Born in Perth, Abdullah is a multidisciplinary artist now based between Melbourne and Bangkok. A seventh-generation Muslim Australian of Malay, Indonesian and European heritage, his practice often investigates narratives of displacement and the reality of lived experience. He has been a finalist in the Archibald, Wynne and Sulman Prizes multiple times.

On receiving the news, Abdullah said he was excited to win the 2025 Packing Room Prize.

‘It is always an honour to be selected as a finalist for the Archibald Prize, and I am especially honoured to be picked for the Packing Room Prize. I see it as a sort of community prize, where the Packing Room team, which is made up of professional art handlers – many of whom are artists themselves – get to pick a painting they like. I am so glad they picked this one. It’s kind of like an artists’ pick, and I’m extra happy for that,’ said Abdullah.

‘Jason is my best friend. We talk on the phone every day, he was the best man at my wedding, and we have travelled together. I’ve painted him as I see him, as a ceaseless adventurer who at any one time is involved in a dozen conversations on a dozen different platforms, bringing his unique perspective to one flummoxed friend or another.’ 

Jason Phu is a Sydney-born artist whose practice brings together a wide range of references, including traditional ink paintings, calligraphy, readymade objects, everyday vernacular, ancient folklore, personal narratives and historical events, often imbued with satire and humour. Phu has also been a previous finalist in the Archibald, Wynne and Sulman Prizes, and is himself a finalist in this year’s Archibald Prize for his portrait of actor Hugo Weaving.

In 2025, the Art Gallery received 2394 entries across the Archibald, Wynne and Sulman Prizes, the second-highest number of combined entries received in the history of the three prizes and eclipsed only by the 2020 record year, which was delayed due to the pandemic. The Archibald Prize received 904 entries; the Wynne Prize received 758 entries; and the Sulman Prize received 732 entries, which is a record year for that individual prize. In total, 139 works have been selected as finalists across the 2025 Archibald, Wynne and Sulman Prizes: 57 finalists in the Archibald, 52 in the Wynne and 30 in the Sulman. This year marks the first time there are more finalist works by women artists across the three competitions.

The popular Young Archie competition received more than 3200 entries in 2025, with entries received from budding young artists aged five to 18 from every state and territory, showcasing the enduring popularity of this family-friendly crowd favourite. Seventy finalists from across the four Young Archie age categories have been selected to be exhibited at the Art Gallery.

Young Archie Finalist 2025: 5-8 year olds: Moorea Cai, Age 8  - 'My magical ocean' 

 © the artist  

Moorea says; ''In my painting, I am a mermaid swimming in a big shiny ocean filled with so many animals! My best friend, Duck, is right beside me, paddling happily. A playful dolphin is trying his very best to jump high. Above us, the sky is a soft dreamy pink, like cotton candy floating in the air. My mermaid tail has a super special pattern and it gives me a magical power! The water twirls and sparkles around me. Everything in my ocean feels alive, like a beautiful dream come true.''

The Archibald, Wynne and Sulman Prizes 2025 exhibition and the Young Archie 2025 competition are generously supported by presenting partner ANZ.

Mark Whelan, Group Executive, Institutional at ANZ, said: ‘Congratulations to Abdul Abdullah on winning the 2025 Packing Room Prize for his portrait, which captivated the Packing Room team. ANZ has a proud history of supporting the arts community in Australia and we are pleased to continue our support of the Archibald Prize in 2025.’

The winners of the Archibald, Wynne and Sulman Prizes 2025 will be announced on Friday 9 May at midday. Winners and all finalists will then be exhibited at the Art Gallery of New South Wales from Saturday 10 May to Sunday 17 August 2025.

Following the exhibition at the Art Gallery, Archibald Prize 2025 finalist works will tour to six venues across New South Wales and Victoria, offering audiences outside Sydney the opportunity to see the finalist portraits up close and personal.

Wynne Prize 2025 finalist works will tour to four venues in regional New South Wales. The Wynne Prize regional tour is proudly supported by the NSW Government through Create NSW’s Blockbusters Funding initiative.

Opportunities:

TAFE NSW Granville bricklaying students ‘lay the foundation’ for industry innovation

“It’s great to have the support of TAFE NSW and it will help apprentices gain a deeper understanding of the best mortar compositions into the future.” - Cathy Inglis, Think Brick CEO

TAFE NSW Granville bricklaying students are helping “lay the foundation” for a stronger industry as part of a unique testing program.

Following an approach by peak bricklaying industry advisory body Think Brick, TAFE NSW Granville students and staff built 20 brick walls at the campus in a bid to test mortar quality and find the “magic formula” for optimum effectiveness.

Mortar is a paste-like building material made of cement, fine sands, water and lime, used most often to build brick or block walls.

TAFE NSW Granville Head Teacher of Bricklaying Greg Ible said the event provided a “win-win”, helping the industry find the ideal mortar mix and exposing students to a real-world problem-solving lesson.

A group of people laying bricks and mortar outdoors, constructing low training walls on a concrete pad with tools and a wheelbarrow.

“There have been ongoing concerns from industry about mortar quality; many think it’s too strong and sticky, and can stain brickwork,” Mr Ible said.

“The fact Think Brick approached us to run these test panels shows how trusted TAFE NSW is by industry. We as a team have a long history with the bricklaying trade so it only makes sense we would be at the forefront of this type of testing.”

As part of the testing panel, TAFE NSW Granville bricklaying apprentices built a series of brick walls, experimenting with different lime additives in the mortar. Engineers from Think Brick were on hand for the event, and the testing will be undertaken by Mahaffey and Associates laboratory and provided back to the industry to help improve mortar quality.

Think Brick CEO Cathy Inglis said her organisation had been fielding regular calls from members concerned about the effect of lime substitutes currently being used in mortar mixes.

She said utilising the facilities at TAFE NSW Granville – and the expertise of teachers – was a powerful way to drive innovation in the industry.

“It’s great to have the support of TAFE NSW and it will help apprentices gain a deeper understanding of the best mortar compositions into the future,” Ms Inglis said.

Ms Inglis said six different mortar mixes were used during last week’s testing panels, and their adhesion and durability will be analysed after seven days and again after 28 days and finally the brick-cleaning qualities will be assessed. It marks the second time Think Brick has run a brick testing panels at TAFE NSW Granville.

Ms Inglis said Australia was facing a significant shortage of skilled bricklayers, with industry groups reporting acute shortages that are impacting housing and infrastructure projects, and potentially hindering the country's ability to meet its housing targets.

According to employment website Seek, the average bricklayer in Australia earns between $70,000 and $80,000 annually.

New free TAFE courses to deliver Australia’s manufacturing workforce

The Albanese and Minns Labor governments have announced they are working together to build Australia’s future by growing the Australian manufacturing workforce, through Free TAFE.

Four new Free TAFE courses have been established, designed to upskill Australians, boost onshore capability, and support employment opportunities in the industry.

The four Free TAFE courses are being offered through the TAFE NSW Manufacturing Centres of Excellence, announced late last year to support manufacturing education and training across engineering, transport and renewable energy sectors.

Funded by $78.6 million matched investment from the Commonwealth and NSW governments ($157.2 million total over four years), the specialised training Centres are being established at TAFE NSW campuses in three of NSW’s major manufacturing industry areas – Newcastle/the Hunter, Western Sydney, and the Illawarra.

The Free TAFE courses have been designed with industry to upskill existing workers and equip the future domestic manufacturing workforce for emerging industry needs, boosting onshore manufacturing capability and providing more career opportunities for local workers.

Enrolments are now open for three Microskills (self-paced short courses) delivered online and one Microcredential:
  1. Discover renewable manufacturing careers – a Microskill introducing the industries, technologies and practices enabling renewable manufacturing in Australia.
  2. Discover advanced manufacturing careers – a Microskill introducing advanced manufacturing and its role in driving innovation, sustainability, and economic growth in Australia.
  3. Maths foundations in the manufacturing industry – a Microskill supporting students and workers with mathematical concepts to perform accurate calculations and solve problems in a manufacturing setting.
  4. Generative design and analysis – a Microcredential providing specialised training in advanced computer-aided drafting software for manufacturing product design and modelling to solve real-world manufacturing challenges.  
The four courses are the first of a series of short courses, education and training planned for delivery through the TAFE NSW Manufacturing Centres of Excellence this year.

To further support tertiary harmonisation, a University Partnership Panel has also been established to collaborate with the TAFE NSW Manufacturing Centres of Excellence on design and delivery of the specialised training. 

10 university partners across New South Wales, Victoria, and Queensland have been included on the University Partnership Panel and will collaborate with TAFE NSW over the next four years to support expertise in manufacturing education. 

This could include contributing subject matter expertise to inform new manufacturing courses, providing access to specialist equipment and facilities, and development of educational pathways and higher education qualifications.

The 10 universities are:
  1. University of Sydney
  2. University of Technology, Sydney
  3. Western Sydney University
  4. Macquarie University
  5. University of Wollongong
  6. University of Newcastle
  7. Charles Sturt University
  8. Griffith University
  9. RMIT University
  10. Swinburne University
Locally, the TAFE NSW Net Zero Manufacturing Centre of Excellence will boost local capability, enabling the community to take advantage of the opportunities of renewable manufacturing and the Hunter-Central Coast Renewable Energy Zone.

The Centre will deliver tailored, industry-aligned training needed to skill local workforces ready to lead in onshore manufacturing capabilities in resources, aviation, defence and transport.

The TAFE NSW Manufacturing Centres of Excellence are a joint initiative between the Australian Government and NSW Government under the National Skills Agreement.

Minister for Skills and Training Andrew Giles said:

“Free TAFE is changing lives and it is building Australia’s future. 

“The TAFE Centres of Excellence were established to be job-creating hubs, and this is more evidence that what we’re doing is working. 

“The Albanese and Minns Governments are ensuring manufacturing needs at a local, state and national level are backed by a pipeline of skilled workers and a strong economy for years to come.

“More Free TAFE courses, means more Free TAFE students and more Free TAFE success stories. 

“Through strong ongoing with industry and universities, TAFE is shaping the future of manufacturing education in Australia.”

Minister for Skills, TAFE and Tertiary Education Steve Whan said:

“These first four Fee-Free TAFE courses being delivered through the Centres of Excellence are just the beginning of the collaboration across TAFE NSW, universities and the manufacturing industry to support a skilled workforce to meet national challenges across the manufacturing sector.

“This partnership will deliver more technical and hands-on training to students across renewable energy and advanced manufacturing, with a focus on sustainable and technological innovation.”

Council's 2025 Environmental Art & Design Prize - Entries open now

Council has announced Ramesh Mario Nithiyendran (art) and Keinton Butler (design) as the judges for this year’s Environmental Art & Design Prize.

Now in its fifth year, Environmental Art & Design Prize is open to artists and designers of all levels and diverse disciplines from across Australia. Submissions will be accepted until 19 May 2025.

Mayor Sue Heins said the prize has developed into one of the leading competitions covering both art and design focusing on the environment.

“Each year fascinating art works and designs are submitted for this environmentally thought-provoking prize.

“The prize is an important platform for the natural environment to take centre stage, enabling artists and designers to share their work inspired by nature, climate change and sustainable living.

“In past years we have seen impactful submissions from creatives including painters, ceramists and furniture designers. This year we would also love to see more contributions from architects, product, fashion and industrial designers.

“We are looking forward to an amazing array of powerful artworks and designs for 2025,” Mayor Heins said.

This year’s judges have vast experience in the art and design worlds. Ramesh Mario Nithiyendran is a contemporary artist with his work appearing in galleries across the globe. Keinton Butler is Senior Curator at Sydney’s Powerhouse Museum and the Creative Director of Sydney Design Week.

There are four prizes on offer this year with prize money totalling $46000. 

The visual arts and design winners will each receive $20,000. The people’s choice winners and the young artists/designers have a prize pool of $3,000 each.

All finalists will be featured in an exhibition across the Council’s 3 galleries, Manly Art Gallery and Museum (MAG&M), Curl Curl Creative Space, and Mona Vale Creative Space Gallery from 1 August to 14 September 2025.

Finalists will be announced on Friday 23 May and the winners will be announced on Friday 1 August 2025.

For more information, and to enter, visit Council's webpage at: https://www.northernbeaches.nsw.gov.au/things-to-do/arts-and-culture/northern-beaches-environmental-art-and-design-prize   

School Leavers Support

Explore the School Leavers Information Kit (SLIK) as your guide to education, training and work options in 2022;
As you prepare to finish your final year of school, the next phase of your journey will be full of interesting and exciting opportunities. You will discover new passions and develop new skills and knowledge.

We know that this transition can sometimes be challenging. With changes to the education and workforce landscape, you might be wondering if your planned decisions are still a good option or what new alternatives are available and how to pursue them.

There are lots of options for education, training and work in 2022 to help you further your career. This information kit has been designed to help you understand what those options might be and assist you to choose the right one for you. Including:
  • Download or explore the SLIK here to help guide Your Career.
  • School Leavers Information Kit (PDF 5.2MB).
  • School Leavers Information Kit (DOCX 0.9MB).
  • The SLIK has also been translated into additional languages.
  • Download our information booklets if you are rural, regional and remote, Aboriginal or Torres Strait Islander, or living with disability.
  • Support for Regional, Rural and Remote School Leavers (PDF 2MB).
  • Support for Regional, Rural and Remote School Leavers (DOCX 0.9MB).
  • Support for Aboriginal and/or Torres Strait Islander School Leavers (PDF 2MB).
  • Support for Aboriginal and/or Torres Strait Islander School Leavers (DOCX 1.1MB).
  • Support for School Leavers with Disability (PDF 2MB).
  • Support for School Leavers with Disability (DOCX 0.9MB).
  • Download the Parents and Guardian’s Guide for School Leavers, which summarises the resources and information available to help you explore all the education, training, and work options available to your young person.

School Leavers Information Service

Are you aged between 15 and 24 and looking for career guidance?

Call 1800 CAREER (1800 227 337).

SMS 'SLIS2022' to 0429 009 435.

Our information officers will help you:
  • navigate the School Leavers Information Kit (SLIK),
  • access and use the Your Career website and tools; and
  • find relevant support services if needed.
You may also be referred to a qualified career practitioner for a 45-minute personalised career guidance session. Our career practitioners will provide information, advice and assistance relating to a wide range of matters, such as career planning and management, training and studying, and looking for work.

You can call to book your session on 1800 CAREER (1800 227 337) Monday to Friday, from 9am to 7pm (AEST). Sessions with a career practitioner can be booked from Monday to Friday, 9am to 7pm.

This is a free service, however minimal call/text costs may apply.

Call 1800 CAREER (1800 227 337) or SMS SLIS2022 to 0429 009 435 to start a conversation about how the tools in Your Career can help you or to book a free session with a career practitioner.

All downloads and more available at: www.yourcareer.gov.au/school-leavers-support

Word Of The Week: Congregate

Word of the Week remains a keynote in 2025, simply to throw some disruption in amongst the 'yeah-nah' mix. 

Verb

1. gather, collect, assemble, congregate mean to come or bring together into a group, mass, or unit.

From late Middle English: from Latin congregat- ‘collected (into a flock), united’, from the verb congregare, from con- ‘together’ + gregare (from grex, greg- ‘a flock’).

Who would win in a fight between 100 men and 1 gorilla? An evolutionary expert weighs in

Hung Hung Chih/Shutterstock
Renaud Joannes-BoyauSouthern Cross University

The internet’s latest absurd obsession is: who would win in a no-rules fight between 100 average human men and one adult male gorilla?

This hypothetical and strange question has taken over Reddit, TikTok, YouTube and Instagram. Some argue that humans once hunted mammoths so, clearly, we would win. Others point out that a silverback gorilla can lift close to 1,000kg and could throw a grown man like a rag doll.

To be honest, it’s not really a question we need to answer – and yet, as usual on the internet, everyone has an opinion.

But, beyond the jokes and memes, this silly debate provides an opportunity to reflect on human evolution. What are the real strengths of our species? What have we sacrificed? And what can a gorilla, our majestic, powerful and endangered distant cousin, teach us about our own nature and evolution?

Gorillas and humans: two branches of the same evolutionary tree

Gorillas are one of our closest living relatives. Along with chimpanzees, bonobos and orangutans, they belong to the great apes or Hominidae family. Chimpanzees share about 98.8% of their DNA with us, while gorillas come a close second, sharing around 98.4%.

The last common ancestor between humans and gorillas lived roughly 10 million years ago, and it is also the same ancestor for chimpanzees.

Since the evolutionary split, humans and gorillas have followed very different paths. Gorillas have adapted to dense forests and mountainous terrains, while humans have evolved to live in the open, but realistically to multiple and various environments.

Despite the substantial difference in ecological niches, humans and gorillas share many traits, such as opposable thumbs, facial expressions, complex social behaviours and emotional intelligence.

Mastering forest power

In the recent Dune saga, to win, Duke Leto Atreides wanted to develop “desert power”. Well, gorillas have mastered forest power.

And let’s be clear – in terms of raw power, the gorilla wins every time. An adult male silverback can weigh more than 160kg and lift about a tonne without going to the gym every day. Their upper-body strength is shocking. And that’s no evolutionary accident – it’s the result of intense competition between males, where dominance determines mating.

Additionally, gorillas are extremely tough and resilient, yet gentle and calm most of the time. Gorillas, like many primates, have a strong social intelligence. They use a variety of vocalisations, gestures and even chest drumming to communicate across distances.

They have shown the ability to use sign language, mourn their dead, and demonstrate empathy, attesting to sophisticated cognitive skills.

Trading muscles for minds

A fight between 100 men and one gorilla might lead to a lot of dead men, but we all know that men will come with weapons, strategies, drones, fire and other clever tricks.

Humans are not physically strong in comparison to many other mammals. Our strength as a species is our adaptability and our ability to collaborate in very large groups.

Our brains are, on average, three times larger proportionally than those of gorillas. This fantastic evolutionary adaptation has allowed us to develop abstract thinking and symbolic language, but most of all, to pass and build on complex knowledge across generations.

And this is our greatest superpower, our ability to cooperate across vast groups, far beyond the average gorilla social unit, which usually ranges from a few family members up to a group of 30 individuals.

Humans’ evolutionary history has led to trading brute force for social, cultural and technological complexity, making us Earth’s most versatile and dangerous species.

So, who’s the winner?

In a one-on-one brawl, the gorilla can make “human-mash” with one hand. There is no contest when discussing brute force and bare hands.

But humans fight dirty. Judging by our evolutionary success, humans would likely lose many battles but ultimately win the fight. Mountain gorillas were not on the brink of extinction in the 1980s without our help.

Our species has spread across all continents, all terrains, and all climates. We have reshaped ecosystems, walked on the Moon, and developed advanced technologies. But gorillas are another kind of success rooted in harmony with their environment, physical grace, and quiet strength.

Perhaps the real takeaway message isn’t who wins in a fight, but to realise that two very different and yet very close cousins have walked two separate evolutionary roads, each in their own distinct way. And both are nature’s triumph and accomplishment.The Conversation

Renaud Joannes-Boyau, Professor in Geochronology and Geochemistry, Southern Cross University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

When it comes to health information, who should you trust? 4 ways to spot a dodgy ‘expert’

Surface/Unsplash
Hassan VallyDeakin University

When it comes to our health, we’re constantly being warned about being taken in by misinformation. Yet for most of us what we believe ultimately comes down to who we trust, including which “experts” we trust.

The problem is that not everyone who presents themselves as an expert is actually an expert. And an expert in one area isn’t necessarily an expert in everything.

The reality is that we often rely on superficial cues to decide who to trust. We’re often swayed by how confidently someone speaks, their perceived authority, or how compelling their story sounds. For some, it’s simply the loudest voice that carries the most weight.

Even if we feel we have some understanding of science, few of us have the time or the capacity to verify every claim made by every so-called “expert”.

So how can we distinguish credible experts from those that are not? Here are four things I look out for.

1. Dodgy experts don’t acknowledge uncertainty

One thing that separates trustworthy experts from dodgy ones, is their humility. They have a healthy respect of the limitations of science, the gaps in the evidence, and even the limitations of their own expertise.

And importantly, they communicate this clearly.

In contrast, one of the most common characteristics of the dodgy expert is they are misleadingly certain. They often present issues in overly simplistic, black-and-white terms, and they draw conclusions with misplaced confidence.

This, of course, is part of their appeal. A neat clear-cut message that downplays uncertainty, complexity and nuance can be persuasive – and often even more persuasive than a messy but accurate message.

One of the clearest examples of unfounded certainty was the confident claim by some “experts” early in the pandemic that COVID was no worse than the flu, a conclusion which ignored uncertainties in the emerging data.

2. The dodgy expert doesn’t strive to be objective

Credible experts follow a well-established and disciplined approach when communicating science. They present their understanding clearly, support it with evidence, and endeavour to remove emotion and bias from their thinking.

A core principle of scientific thinking is striving for objectivity – and language reflects this. Experts generally aim to provide high-quality information to assist the public to make informed decisions for themselves, rather than manipulating them to reach specific conclusions.

Dodgy experts often rely on overly emotional language, inject political agendas, or resort to personal attacks against critics in order to elicit strong emotions. This is a powerful tool for manipulating opinions when the evidence is lacking.

One of the most harmful examples of this is the use of emotional testimonials by dodgy experts who claim people have “beaten cancer naturally”, offering false hope and often leading patients to abandon proven treatments.

3. Dodgy experts cherry-pick evidence

Despite what those seeking to mislead you would have you believe, scientists only reach consensus when a large body of high-quality evidence points in the same direction.

So one of the most crucial skills experts possess is the ability to critically evaluate evidence. That means understanding its strengths and weaknesses, assessing its reliability, and synthesising what the full evidence base indicates. This task requires a deep understanding of their area of expertise.

Dodgy experts don’t do this. They tend to dismiss inconvenient evidence that contradicts their narrative and readily embrace flawed, or even discredited, studies. In short: they often cherry-pick evidence to suit their position.

Unfortunately, this tactic can be hard to spot if you don’t have an understanding of the full evidence base, which is something dodgy experts exploit.

People sit in theatre
Scientists only reach consensus when a large body of evidence points in the same direction. Matej Kastelic/Shutterstock

A red flag that you are being misled by a dodgy expert is when there is a clear over-reliance on a single study, despite its low quality.

Perhaps the most well-known example of cherry-picking is the way dodgy experts rely on a single, discredited study to push the false claim that the MMR (measles, mumps and rubella) vaccine causes autism, while ignoring the vast body of high-quality evidence that clearly shows no such link.

4. Dodgy experts don’t change their mind when the evidence changes

Dodgy experts are often rigidly attached to their beliefs, even when new evidence emerges.

In contrast, genuine experts welcome new evidence and are willing to change their views accordingly. This openness is often unfairly portrayed as weakness, but it reflects an expert’s desire to understand the world accurately.

A striking example of this is the shift in our understanding of stomach ulcers. For years, ulcers were blamed on stress and spicy food, but that changed when Australian gastroenterologist and researcher Barry Marshall, in a bold move, swallowed Helicobacter pylori to demonstrate its potential role.

His self-experiment (which is generally not recommended!) was the first step in a broader body of research that ultimately proved bacteria, not lifestyle, was the primary cause of ulcers. This ultimately led to Marshall and his colleague pathologist and researcher Robin Warren being awarded a Nobel Prize.

As this example highlights, when presented with the evidence, clinicians and scientists acknowledged they’d got the underlying cause of stomach ulcers wrong. Clinical practice subsequently improved, with doctors prescribing antibiotics to kill the ulcer-causing bacteria.

This is how science informs practice so we can continually improve health outcomes.

In a nutshell

True expertise is marked by intellectual humility, a commitment to high-quality evidence, a willingness to engage with nuance and uncertainty, flexibility, and a capacity to respectfully navigate differing opinions.

In contrast, dodgy experts claim to have all the answers, dismiss uncertainty, cherry-pick studies, personally attack those who disagree with them, and rely more on emotion and ideology than evidence.The Conversation

Hassan Vally, Associate Professor, Epidemiology, Deakin University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

On stage but out of the spotlight − the quiet struggle of being an opening act

Getting heard has never been easier. Being recognized and staying relevant is the real challenge. PeopleImages/E+ via Getty Images
Jeff ApruzzeseDrexel University

I grew up playing in a lot of different bands, and my bandmates and I always held onto the belief that if we could just open for a more established act, it would pave the way to more success.

When I started playing in the indie pop band Passion Pit – a group known for its shimmering synths, energetic live shows and breakout hits like Sleepyhead and Take a Walk – we began gaining traction and soon had the chance to open for the British band Muse, in what would be our first arena shows.

Until then, we’d been headlining 3,000-capacity venues. Our label, management and booking team made it clear that this next step – playing in front of massive audiences – would catapult us to megastardom.

Reality was different. After playing our own packed shows where fans cheered and called for encores, we suddenly found ourselves in 15,000-capacity arenas, where it seemed like everyone was ignoring us: chatting among themselves, still getting to their seats or waiting in line for food and drinks.

It was a wake-up call. The transition from being a headliner at a smaller music venue to opener for a major act didn’t feel like a step forward. It felt like starting over.

Years later, as an academic studying the music industry, I found myself returning to this question: Does opening for a major act help an artist’s career?

There’s an assumption that it’s a golden ticket. But I’d seen plenty of openers, some incredibly talented, disappear from the spotlight soon after a tour ended. If touring is supposed to be a stepping stone to long-term success, why do so many promising acts fade into obscurity?

These questions became the basis for my most recent study. I wanted to see whether these high-profile opportunities deliver any benefits for a singer or band, or if they were more like a sugar high, providing little more than a brief boost in exposure.

It’s harder to stick out from the crowd

Popular music is a US$28.6-billion global industry, and music consumption, according to a 2025 report from the International Federation of the Phonographic Industry, is at an all-time high. People around the world now spend an average of 20.7 hours per week listening to music on radio, streaming platforms, vinyl, CDs and social media.

The ease of listening to and recording music presents both an opportunity and a challenge for aspiring artists.

On one hand, streaming platforms such as Spotify and Apple Music have removed traditional gatekeepers, making it easier than ever to release music and reach a global audience. But these platforms have also saturated listeners with content, and discovery is dictated more by algorithms rather than by word-of-mouth buzz, local touring circuits or traditional artist development.

Social media, especially TikTok, can launch an unknown act into viral stardom within days. However, the attention span of digital audiences is fleeting. Most people consume music passively – often through playlists they didn’t curate and might not even remember.

In other words, getting heard has never been easier. Being recognized and staying relevant? That’s the real challenge.

For artists trying to break through, it’s no longer a question of choosing between touring or posting content. It’s about doing both, constantly, at a high level.

Young male guitar player wearing a hat and white shirt raises his arms in the air from stage in front of a drummer.
Josh Ross performs as the opener for country superstar Jelly Roll in Edmonton on March 13, 2025. Ron Palmer/SOPA Images/LightRocket via Getty Images

Fleeting benefits

But while headlining tours are often seen as a marker of success, many emerging acts first step onto national stages as openers – raising the question, does opening for a major artist actually lead to meaningful career growth?

In my study, I analyzed the touring and streaming data of 57 opening acts on major U.S. tours in 2022 and 2023. For this project, “major” referred to nationally promoted, ticketed tours at venues with capacities of 2,000 or more, such as Harry Styles’ “Love On Tour,” Paramore’s spring arena run and Mitski’s “Laurel Hell Tour.” These tours drew large, dedicated fanbases – offering opening artists significant exposure.

Using platforms such as PollstarSongkick and Chartmetric, I tracked each artist’s listenership across Spotify four weeks before the tour, during the tour and four weeks after the tour. I also conducted surveys with 500 fans to better understand how people were discovering and engaging with openers.

The results were revealing. Most opening acts saw a streaming bump during the tour – usually between 18% and 20%, with some surging up to 200%.

But that momentum rarely held. Within weeks, streams often dropped by 6% to 10%, or returned to their pre-tour levels entirely. While a few artists managed to hold onto new listeners, most saw the gains quickly fade. And even when audiences enjoyed an opener’s set, their interest withered: They may have checked out a song or two after the show, but few became regular listeners.

These findings challenge the long-standing narrative that opening for a major artist is a surefire path to career growth. Exposure helps, but it’s not enough on its own. Without a clear post-tour strategy, that attention quickly fades.

Woman wearing black sweatshirt holds a microphone on stage against a backdrop of blue lights.
Rapper Rapsody performs as an opener for Lauryn Hill on Oct. 19, 2023, in New York City. Astrida Valigorsky/Getty Images

Algorithms can’t generate loyalty

I’m not trying to discourage aspiring bands from going on tour. Far from it. Touring remains a crucial part of building a fan base.

In a landscape defined by passive consumption, there’s still something powerful about the shared experience of live music. A performance can create an emotional connection that a stream simply can’t.

Today, discovery often starts with a playlist. Someone hears a song and maybe adds it to their rotation. But they rarely click to learn more about the artist. Listeners follow the playlist, not the person behind the music. Many acts land on major playlists and go on to generate tens of thousands of streams. Others will even go viral on social media. And they still can’t sell more than 25 tickets to a local show.

Live performances offer something different. A great set can turn a casual listener into a true fan. I’ve heard countless people say a particular show changed the way they experienced that artist’s music, that it left a lasting impression and forged a bond with the singer or group.

That kind of loyalty doesn’t come from an algorithm. It comes from being in the room. And with more than 100,000 tracks uploaded to streaming services each day, artists need to use every tool they can to stand out.

Cutting through the noise

In an era when streaming revenue is notoriously slim, touring has become one of the few reliable sources of income for working artists. The top artists in 2017 earned 80% of their income from touring, 15% from recorded music and 5% from publishing fees.

Even though touring is far from a guarantee – especially if you’re not the headliner, as my research shows – it’s still one of the few ways left to cut through the noise. In the survey I ran for my study, 68% of concertgoers said they discovered at least one new artist through an opener, and 39% said the opener influenced their ticket purchase.

And there are success stories – instances where opening slots have helped launch lasting careers.

Billie Eilish opened for Florence + The Machine early on in her career, using that visibility to build a massive following. Taylor Swift, in particular, has a reputation for picking future stars: Justin Bieber, Ed Sheeran, Shawn Mendes, Sabrina Carpenter and Chappell Roan all opened for her before becoming major names.

Teeanged girl wearing baggy black sweatshirt, holding a microphone, bathed in green light.
Billie Eilish’s tour with Florence + the Machine in 2018 helped catapult the young singer to stardom. Jeff Hahne/Getty Images

These examples are outliers, of course. For most openers, visibility comes quickly but fades just as fast.

Today’s artists need more than one big moment. There needs to be some sort of plan, whether it’s releasing new content, crafting a strong identity or figuring out ways for new fans to stay engaged after the show ends.

Because at the end of the day, it’s not about being seen once. It’s all about being remembered.The Conversation

Jeff Apruzzese, Professor of Music Industry, Drexel University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Young bats learn to be discriminating when listening for their next meal

A frog-eating bat approaches a túngara frog, one of its preferred foods. Grant Maslowski
Logan S. JamesThe University of Texas at AustinRachel PageSmithsonian Institution, and Ximena BernalPurdue University

It is late at night, and we are silently watching a bat in a roost through a night-vision camera. From a nearby speaker comes a long, rattling trill.

Cane toad’s rattling trill call.

The bat briefly perks up and wiggles its ears as it listens to the sound before dropping its head back down, uninterested.

Next from the speaker comes a higher-pitched “whine” followed by a “chuck.”

Túngara frog’s ‘whine chuck’ call.

The bat vigorously shakes its ears and then spreads its wings as it launches from the roost and dives down to attack the speaker.

Bats show tremendous variation in the foods they eat to survive. Some species specialize on fruits, others on insects, others on flower nectar. There are even species that catch fish with their feet.

Bat eating frog
The calls male frogs use to attract mates also attract eavesdropping predators. Here, a frog-eating bat consumes an unlucky male túngara frog. Marcos Guerra, Smithsonian Tropical Research Institute

At the Smithsonian Tropical Research Institute in Panama, we’ve been studying one species, the fringe-lipped bat (Trachops cirrhosus), for decades. This bat is a carnivore that specializes in feeding on frogs.

Male frogs from many species call to attract female frogs. Frog-eating bats eavesdrop on those calls to find their next meal. But how do the bats come to associate sounds and prey?

We were interested in understanding how predators that eavesdrop on their prey acquire the ability to discriminate between tasty and dangerous meals. We combined our expertise on animal behaviorbat cognition and frog communication to investigate.

How do bats know the sound of a tasty meal?

There are nearly 8,000 frog and toad species in the world, and each one has a unique call. For instance, the first rattling call that we played from our speaker came from a large and toxic cane toad. The second “whine chuck” came from the túngara frog, a preferred prey species for these bats. Just as herpetologists can tell a frog species by its call, frog-eating bats can use these calls to identify the best meal.

Over the years, our research team has learned a great deal from frog-eating bats about how sound and echolocation are used to find prey, as well as the role of learning and memory in foraging success. In our newly published study, we focused on how associations between the sounds a bat hears and the prey quality it expects arise within the lifespan of an individual bat.

Bat capturing frog from a pond
Adult bats like the one pictured have extensive acoustic repertoires and remember specific frog calls year after year. Young bats must learn which calls to respond to – and, critically, which to ignore – over time through experience. Grant Maslowski

We considered whether the associations between sound and a delicious meal are an evolved specialty that bats are born with. But this possibility seemed unlikely because the bat species we study has a large geographic distribution across Central and South America, and the species of frogs found across this range vary tremendously.

Instead, we hypothesized that bats learn to associate different sounds with food as they grow up. But we had to test this idea.

First, we and our collaborators spent time in the forest and at ponds to record the mating calls from 15 of the most common frog and toad species in our study area in Panama.

Researcher untangles a bat from a finely woven mistnet at night.
Rachel Page, one of the lead authors on the study, takes a bat out of a mist net in Panama. Jorge Alemán, Smithsonian Tropical Research Institute

Then, we set up mist nets along streams in Soberanía National Park to capture wild bats for the study.

Frog call, bat response

For the testing, each bat was housed individually in a large, outdoor flight chamber. From a speaker on the ground in the center, we played calls from one frog species on loop for 30 seconds and measured the behavior of the bat, which was hanging from a cloth roost. As we expected, adult bats were generally uninterested in the sounds of species that were unpalatable, such as those with toxins or those that are too large for the bat to carry.

But it was a different story for young bats. Juveniles responded with significantly more predatory behaviors in response to the calls of toxic toads compared with the adults. They also responded more weakly than adults to the sounds of túngara frogs, a palatable, abundant prey that adult bats prefer.

Thus it seems that juvenile bats must learn the associations between sounds and food over the course of their lives. As they grow up, we believe they learn to ignore the calls of frogs that aren’t worth the trouble and zero in on the calls of frogs that will be a good meal.

To better understand how sounds drive prey associations, we measured the acoustic properties of the different calls. We found that some of the most noticeable features of the calls correlated with body size: Larger frogs produce lower-frequency calls – that is, their voices are deeper. Both the adult and juvenile bats responded more strongly to larger species, which would provide larger meals.

However, there was a clear exception in the responses of adults, where the toxic toads and very large frogs elicited much weaker responses than expected for their body size. This finding led us to hypothesize that bats have early biases to pay attention to sounds associated with larger body size. Then they must learn through experience that meal quality is not only about size. Some large meals are toxic or impossible to carry, making them unpalatable.

Once the researchers have studied each frog-eating bat for a few days, they safely release it where it was originally captured. Footage courtesy of Léna de Framond-Bénard and Eric de Framond-Bénard, compiled by Caroline Rogan.

After the bats spent a few days with us, we released each one back at its original site of capture. The bats departed, taking with them a small RFID tag, just like the ones pet owners use to identify their dogs and cats, in case we meet again as part of a future study.

As the bats go on with their lives in the wild, we continue our quest to deepen our understanding of the subtleties of information discrimination. How do individuals weed through information overload to make choices that make sense and benefit them? That’s the same challenge we all face each day.The Conversation

Logan S. James, Research Associate in Animal Behavior, The University of Texas at AustinRachel Page, Staff Scientist, Smithsonian Tropical Research Institute, Smithsonian Institution, and Ximena Bernal, Professor of Biological Sciences, Purdue University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

The ski-jumping cheating scandal: how suits were illegally altered for unfair advantage

Bryce DyerBournemouth University

In this age of artificial intelligence, data tampering and genetic manipulation, it seems that the nature of fraud and deception in competitive sport is becoming increasingly sophisticated. So, it seems almost surprising to see cheating in sport take a relatively old-fashioned form of late: tampering with equipment.

Yet that’s precisely what unfolded last month in ski jumping, a winter sport whereby athletes soar down a ramp, take flight and aim to maximise both distance and technique. Over the last few months, several ski jumpers and their management have been suspended from the sport due to the intentional illegal tampering and modification of the suits they wear.

The case first came to light during the 2025 FIS Nordic World Ski Championships held in Trondheim in March. Two Norwegian athletes, Marius Lindvik and Johann Andre Forfang, were subsequently disqualified from the men’s large hill event due to allegations of illegal ski jump suit manipulation with the intention of improving their performance.


Looking for something good? Cut through the noise with a carefully curated selection of the latest releases, live events and exhibitions, straight to your inbox every fortnight, on Fridays. Sign up here.


subsequent investigation revealed that their ski suits had been illegally altered. In response, the International Ski and Snowboard Federation (FIS) provisionally suspended the two athletes, along with three Norwegian national team officials – including the head coach and their equipment manager. Both athletes ultimately admitted the illegal alterations.

The scandal then intensified as FIS expanded its investigation which then subsequently led to the suspension of three other Norwegian ski jumpers. Several members of the team were all found to have been involved in the decision to modify the suits for the championships.

This wasn’t the sport’s first brush with controversy surrounding its suits. At the 2022 Winter Olympics, several jumpers there were disqualified for wearing suits that were deemed too large, again raising concerns about fairness.

What did the cheating intend to achieve?

A successful ski jump can be divided into several phases: in-run, take-off, early flight, stable flight, landing preparation, and landing. The suit contributes to enhancing the performance in all of these phases by directly affecting the aerodynamics and flight characteristics of the athlete. As a result, the size and shape of the suit is heavily regulated.

In the case of this scandal, the Norwegian Ski Federation general manager told a news conference that a reinforced thread or an extra seam had been put in the jumpsuits of the first two athletes that were suspended.

This additional material was inserted into the crotch area of the suits, increasing the surface area and stiffness, potentially providing extra lift during a jump’s flight phases. This extra lift would essentially translate into an increase in flight time and therefore a potential increase in the jumping distance. These modifications were not detectable through standard visual inspection and were only discovered upon detailed examination of the suits by then tearing them open.

Of course, cheating in sport is not a new phenomenon. However, in some cases, such controversies are not cheating per se, but merely new technologies emerging that challenge our perceptions of a sport and its values.

Some examples of this were the use of full-body swimsuits at the Sydney Olympics in 2000, or the potential use of prosthetic legs in track athletics at the Beijing Olympics in 2008.

However, sometimes cheating can occur whereby sports equipment is intentionally modified physically to provide a competitive advantage. A recent example of this is the Australian cricket ball tampering scandal in 2018 where balls were intentionally scuffed by players to change their behaviour when bowled.

Improving a piece of sports equipment to increase its performance is the field of mechanical ergogenics, or, when illicitly performed, colloquially known as “technodoping”.

Some consider that the physical capabilities of athletes in some sports have now plateaued to the extent that any future improvements in performance will need to rely predominantly on technological innovation. So perhaps it can be understood why the suits were targeted in this particular sport.

In April 2025, the FIS decided to lift the provisional suspensions of the five Norwegian athletes under investigation for suspected involvement in suit tampering because it is the competitive off-season.

However, the ban for the officials involved remains in place. In the wake of the scandal, FIS has now implemented stricter regulations to prevent future instances of equipment manipulation. These key measures included limiting athletes to a single, pre-approved suit for the year’s competitions, and the FIS storing and inspecting all suits.

These reforms aim to uphold the integrity of ski jumping and will hopefully restore confidence in the sport itself. The 2025 scandal stands as a clear reminder that in the pursuit of victory, sports must remain vigilant – because when innovation outpaces fair play, integrity is the first casualty.The Conversation

Bryce Dyer, Associate Professor of Sports Technology, Bournemouth University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Why film and TV creators will still risk it all for the perfect long take shot

Apple TV
Kristian RamsdenUniversity of Adelaide

In the second episode of Apple TV’s The Studio (2025–) – a sharp satirical take on contemporary Hollywood – newly-appointed studio head Matt Remick (Seth Rogen) visits the set of one of his company’s film productions.

He finds the crew anxiously attempting to pull off an extremely audacious and technically demanding shot known as a “oner”, or “long take”. Chaos ensues.

But despite the difficulties associated with it, the long take has a long history and continues to be a promising creative choice in contemporary film and television.

High stakes on the set

The long take is a shot which captures a scene in a single, unbroken take.

It’s a risky endeavour. While most film and TV production is constructed through the use of coverage – different shots edited together – the long take can’t hide behind the editing process. Every minute detail needs to be perfectly planned, executed and captured.

As a result, the oner is often associated with big, ostentatious, showstopping set pieces that exemplify technical and directorial prowess. Think of the “Copacabana” sequence from Goodfellas (1990), or the opening scene of Children of Men (2006).

The shot has gained a cultish type of reverence among film enthusiasts, with countless online articles and videos counting down the “best long takes in film history”.

Yet the practice also has its detractors. Film critic A.A. Dowd’s recent article for The Ringer says that “to the unimpressed, oners often come across as an act of glorified self-glorification”.

This dichotomy is also highlighted in The Studio, when one executive complains long takes are just directors showing off. Rogen’s character counters the oner is, in fact, “the ultimate cinematic achievement”.

A theory of the long take

The long take has existed in nearly every stage of film history – from silent films to sound, from Asian films to European, and from art-house to mainstream.

The greatest advocate of the long take was arguably French film theorist André Bazin. In his piece The Evolution of Film Language, Bazin argued cinema’s greatest asset was its ability to capture reality – and the long take was central to his understanding of how film achieved that.

For Bazin, editing “did not show us the event, but alluded to it”. To illustrate his point, he examines a scene from Robert Flaherty’s controversial silent documentary Nanook of the North (1922), in which a hunter patiently waits for his prey.

The passage of time could have been suggested by editing but, as Bazin notes, Flaherty “confines himself to showing the actual waiting period”. If the act of editing creates a synthetic manipulation of space and time, then the long take does the opposite – bringing us closer to a true representation of reality. For Bazin, the length “is the very substance of the image”.

The tradition of the long take – of showing “reality” – is perhaps most upheld in the world of art-house cinema. Directors such as Chantal Akerman, Béla Tarr, Hou Hsiao-Hsien and Tsai Ming-liang have used the long take to “de-dramatise” narrative, creating a deliberately slow pace to prompt audiences to contemplate aspects of existence traditional narratives usually ignore.

Mainstream cinema also uses the long take to show “reality”, albeit in a different manner. Here, the long take has often been used as a mark of authenticity for the amazing feats of practical performers, whether this is the wild stunts or camera trickery of Buster Keaton, the balletic graces of Fred Astaire and Ginger Rogers or this white-knuckled fight scene from The Protector (2005), starring Thai martial artist Tony Jaa.

However, our strong association between the oner and a distinct directorial vision likely began with Citizen Kane (1941). In this film, screen reality itself is manipulated, as director Orson Welles and cinematographer Gregg Toland liberated the camera to move as if it was its own player in the drama.

In the below example, the camera starts outside, before reversing backwards through a window and two different rooms. The actors are constantly repositioning themselves around the camera for dramatic impetus, rather than for reality.

Bazin would refer to this as “shooting in depth”. Subsequent auteurs also embraced this technique, including William Wyler, Max Ophüls, Stanley Kubrick and Steven Spielberg.

Many viewed it as a chance to up the ante from Welles, something the director did himself with the remarkable opening sequence of his 1958 film Touch of Evil.

The future of the long take

There are far too many oners for me to list here, and they seem to only be increasing. It’s now common to see entire films seemingly shot in one take, such as Russian Ark (2002), Birdman (2014), 1917 (2019) and Boiling Point (2021), to name a few.

Technological advancements have made the long take more achievable. Camera stabilisers enable greater freedom of movement, while digital camera tech allows us to record for longer durations.

Furthermore, digital compositing has made it easier to fake the long take, such as in Birdman and 1917. Both of these films use multiple long takes that are strategically edited to look like a single shot. Impossible-to-see cuts may be hidden in dark moments, or through fast whip pans.

Prestige television has also lifted the oner practice, with examples from shows such as Mr. Robot (2015-19), True Detective (2014–), The Bear (2022-), Severance (2022) and, of course, The Studio.

But perhaps the most remarkable recent example comes from Netflix’s Adolescence (2025), a show in which four separate standalone episodes are all shot in a single long take.

In the age of TikTok and shortening attention spans, it should strike us as positive to see a resurgence of the long take as a creative choice in so much contemporary film and TV.The Conversation

Kristian Ramsden, PhD Candidate, University of Adelaide

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Let Them Theory: TikTok and Oprah love the ‘deeply individualistic’ self-help trend. Can it help you? We asked an expert

Mel Robbins, centre, author of The Let Them Theory. Mel Robbins
Nick HaslamThe University of Melbourne

So you want to write a self-help book? Let me help you.

First, you’ll need a catchy idea. Ideally it will name the key elements of something important. But keep it simple: “The 57 Habits of Highly Effective People” or “98 Steps to Infinite Happiness” aren’t going to cut it.

Your idea doesn’t have to be new. How many genuinely original ideas about human nature are there after thousands of years of self-reflection? Recycle old ideas but dress them in contemporary clothing.

Resist the temptation to be modest. In the crowded marketplace of self-improvement, you mustn’t hide your light under a bushel. Your readers know the norms of the genre and will tolerate levels of preening and hyperbole they wouldn’t accept anywhere else.

Speaking of that marketplace, don’t pretend there are no other self-help authors. Find ways to acknowledge and applaud popular ones and align their ideas with yours. It might be the beginning of a beautiful cross-promotional friendship.

Cover of The Let Them Theory
Goodreads

Add a dash of science, but don’t overdo it. Like salt, too much will make the stew unappetising. The science is usually complex and unsettled, so doing justice to it will only muddy your message.

Where possible, upgrade the research you cite from psychology to neuroscience. Instead of “fear”, “self-control” and “pleasure”, say “amygdala”, “prefrontal cortex” and “dopamine”. People don’t have strong intuitions about brains, so they’ll be more impressed and credulous when you write about them.

If your recipe for personal growth has a specific focus – becoming a better partner or parent, losing weight, overcoming addiction or trauma, getting ahead at work – so be it. But see if you can widen its focus so it speaks to other topics.

Don’t underestimate the importance of your persona. You need to come across as capable but relatable. Use lots of personal anecdotes, both to illustrate your formula for success and to humanise yourself.

Show readers you share their everyday struggles and failings. They need to like you, not see you as an unreachable, envy-making icon.

The Let Them Theory

Anyone wishing to see this formula applied to perfection should look no further than Mel Robbins, author of the virally successful new book The Let Them Theory.

The Guardian reported a trend for Let Them tattoos. The hashtag #letthem has over 206,000 posts on TikTok. On her podcast, Oprah called the book both “a game-changer” and “a life-changer”. And within a month of its release date, it had sold over 1.2 million copies.

Robbins’ previous books, The 5 Second Rule (not about dropped food) and The High 5 Habit, were bestsellers, and she has built a vast online presence, including a podcast currently topping the iTunes chart.

Whereas her earlier works were intended to help people overcome inertia and under-confidence, Let Them moves into the troubled waters of relationships. Rather than make us better stewards of our personal motivation and self-esteem, it aspires to help us deal with the endless frustrations, impositions and disappointments of other people.

Robbins abandons her previous fondness for five-item formulas and gives us the mantra-like “Let them”. In essence, we should recognise we can’t control what other people think and do, and should therefore stop being bothered by it.

She shared a couple of examples on the NBC Today show recently: “The person you’re dating doesn’t want a commitment. Let them. Your company is laying people off. Let them.”

We spend too much time and energy accommodating others, trying to change them and worrying what they think of us. We can only control ourselves, so we should focus on choosing the life we want. This she calls Let Me, the inseparable but unsung companion to Let Them.

Robbins frames Let Me as a way to reclaim power. By allowing others to dictate how we act, think and feel, we give them the power to affect us. Saying Let Them takes back that power and allows us to wield it for our own benefit, she writes.

The book is saturated with the language of control and power. Lacking them is what troubles and motivates people, Robbins suggests.

The need for control is repeatedly described as a “hard-wired” feature of human nature. Described in a zero-sum manner – the more you have, the less I do – it is front and centre in Let Them’s account of what makes relationships challenging.

It’s important to clarify what Let Them doesn’t mean. To Robbins, it doesn’t mean we should passively accept everything in life. It doesn’t mean we should let people do bad things to us (“They want to poke me in the eye with a sharp stick? Let them!”).

Let Them also doesn’t mean we should be selfish. Many of Robbins’ examples look like enlightened selfishness, but she argues Let Them improves relationships by clarifying boundaries, reducing conflict and allowing loved ones to make positive changes by no longer enabling them.

In theory, Let Them means accepting and emotionally detaching from challenging aspects of other people, not disconnecting from them.

Despite these clarifications of what it is and isn’t, what Let Them entails remains somewhat ambiguous throughout the book. Whatever Robbins’ intentions, a reader might easily read it as a call to look out for number one, to cut difficult people loose and to see relationships as power struggles.

However beneficial its advice might be, Let Them asks us to insulate ourselves psychologically from other people. At its heart, it is a deeply individualistic prescription that draws a sharp line between the self and others.

A woman in a leotard takes a selfie.
At its heart, Let Them Theory draws a sharp line between the self and others. Ron Lach/AAP

Research evidence

The basic idea of Let Them can be distilled into three propositions. First, how we should respond to something depends on whether we can control it. Second, because we can’t control other people, the best way to cope with the challenges they pose is detached acceptance. Third, because we can control ourselves, we should seize responsibility and actively choose our own path, guided by our values.

Psychological research shines a light on each of these propositions. Whether the best way to cope with an event depends on its controllability has been a focus of research on coping strategies since the 1980s. The idea itself is much older, dating at least to the Stoics, and is spelled out in the famous Serenity Prayer:

God, grant me the serenity to accept the things I cannot change, the courage to change the things I can, and the wisdom to know the difference.

Studies find forms of emotion-focused coping, which modify how we respond to an event rather than the event itself (including acceptance and distancing), are usually more effective when stressful events are outside our control. In general, though, problem-focused coping strategies, such as actively confronting the stressor, tend to be more effective, especially when it is to some degree controllable.

Studies generally find that flexible use of coping strategies is most effective, so Robbins’ advice to adjust our responses to the controllability of the problem is well founded. But is the detached acceptance she advocates effective?

Research on emotion regulation suggests it often is. Meta-analyses find using acceptance strategies is associated with better emotional outcomes, such as the ability to tolerate distress.

This finding should come as no surprise, because acceptance is a primary ingredient of the well-established Acceptance and Commitment Therapy approach to psychotherapy. It is also central to mindfulness interventions.

Even if acceptance strategies are effective and suited to uncontrollable problems, however, it doesn’t follow that we can’t control other people, as Robbins argues. They are not puppets on strings, of course, but they can be persuaded, instructed, cajoled, manipulated and role-modelled. In short, people can be controlled imperfectly, or influenced.

Robbins takes a black-or-white view of the uncontrollability of other people to justify letting them be. She then smuggles in the concept of influence when offering advice on how not to let them be: how to make friends and deal with slovenly spouses.

Just as others aren’t entirely outside our control, we aren’t entirely inside it. The Let Them world, where we control what’s ours and can’t control what’s theirs, is a polarised one far removed from the interconnected reality of social life.

Robbins’ third proposition is on more solid ground. She is unquestionably correct in promoting the value of an action-oriented, problem-focused or agentic approach to life. Countless studies point to the benefits of traits and mindsets that foster authenticity and autonomy. Even if the argument for Let Them can be questioned, Let Me is uncontroversial.

A girl sits on a low wall writing in a notebook.
The Let Them world is a polarised one. Michael Burrows/Pexels

Self-help books might help

It’s easy (and fun) for bookish types to be snooty about self-help titles like The Let Them Theory. They can be simplistic, naïve, immodest, one-note, grandiose, unnuanced, breathless, name-droppy, scientifically unsupported or just plain wrong.

They can make change look easy – just follow these fail-safe rules for happiness! – when we know it’s hard. They often overlook how much the difficulties we face are beyond our control, and as a result they imply we’re responsible when we don’t overcome them.

All of this criticism is fair, but it also misses the point. The main goal of the self-help book – aside from selling itself – is to instigate change rather than to capture complex truths. It aims to convey an idea or technique that will hook into readers’ minds and inspire positive action, not to offer a sober, scientifically sound account of psychological reality.

Different hooks will work with different people. Let Them will resonate with some readers and give them an easy-to-apply, all-purpose tool (“mind-hack”, to use the vernacular) for approaching life problems. It won’t resonate with others. Many readers of the self-help genre read multiple books in the hope of finding new and better ways to be hooked.

This is exactly what a good therapist would do. Some techniques won’t work with a particular client and some formulations of their problems won’t make sense to them, however well-founded they may be. Therapy aims to find the keys that fit the client’s mental locks.

A self-help book may only offer a single key, and it may be the wrong one for many people. But for roughly the price of five minutes of therapy – based on the Australian Psychological Society’s recommended hourly consultation rate – that’s not such a bad deal.

If we accept that the aim of a self-help book is to persuade and be actionable, its simplifications and overconfident claims are features, not bugs. Easily remembered, simple ideas are exactly the ones that have a chance of being implemented. They might even work.

People may mock pop psychology, scoff at the inflated claims of self-improvement gurus and sneer at self-help books. Let them.The Conversation

Nick Haslam, Professor of Psychology, The University of Melbourne

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Did ‘induced atmospheric vibration’ cause blackouts in Europe? An electrical engineer explains the phenomenon

Mehdi SeyedmahmoudianSwinburne University of Technology

The lights are mostly back on in Spain, Portugal and southern France after a widespread blackout on Monday.

The blackout caused chaos for tens of millions of people. It shut down traffic lights and ATMs, halted public transport, cut phone service and forced people to eat dinner huddled around candles as night fell. Many people found themselves trapped in trains and elevators.

Spain’s prime minister, Pedro Sánchez, has said the exact cause of the blackout is yet to be determined. In early reporting, Portugal’s grid operator REN was quoted as blaming the event on a rare phenomenon known as “induced atmospheric vibration”. REN has since reportedly refuted this.

But what is this vibration? And how can energy systems be improved to mitigate the risk of widespread blackouts?

How much does weather affect electricity?

Weather is a major cause of disruptions to electricity supply. In fact, in the United States, 83% of reported blackouts between 2000 and 2021 were attributed to weather-related events.

The ways weather can affect the supply of electricity are manifold. For example, cyclones can bring down transmission lines, heatwaves can place too high a demand on the grid, and bushfires can raze substations.

Wind can also cause transmission lines to vibrate. These vibrations are characterised by either high amplitude and low frequency (known as “conductor galloping”), or low amplitude and high frequency (known as “aeolian vibrations”).

These vibrations are a significant problem for grid operators. They can place increased stress on grid infrastructure, potentially leading to blackouts.

To reduce the risk of vibration, grid operators often use wire stabilisers known as “stock bridge dampers”.

What is ‘induced atmospheric vibration’?

Vibrations in power lines can also be caused by extreme changes in temperature or air pressure. And this is one hypothesis about what caused the recent widespread blackout across the Iberian peninsula.

As The Guardian initially reported Portugal’s REN as saying:

Due to extreme temperature variations in the interior of Spain, there were anomalous oscillations in the very high voltage lines (400 kV), a phenomenon known as “induced atmospheric vibration”. These oscillations caused synchronisation failures between the electrical systems, leading to successive disturbances across the interconnected European network.

In fact, “induced atmospheric vibration” is not a commonly used term, but it seems likely the explanation was intended to refer to physical processes climate scientists have known about for quite some time.

In simple terms, it seems to refer to wavelike movements or oscillations in the atmosphere, caused by sudden changes in temperature or pressure. These can be triggered by extreme heating, large-scale energy releases (such as explosions or bushfires), or intense weather events.

When a part of Earth’s surface heats up very quickly – due to a heatwave, for example – the air above it warms, expands and becomes lighter. That rising warm air creates a pressure imbalance with the surrounding cooler, denser air. The atmosphere responds to this imbalance by generating waves, not unlike ripples spreading across a pond.

These pressure waves can travel through the atmosphere. In some cases, they can interact with power infrastructure — particularly long-distance, high-voltage transmission lines.

These types of atmospheric waves are usually called gravity wavesthermal oscillations or acoustic-gravity waves. While the phrase “induced atmospheric vibration” is not formally established in meteorology, it seems to describe this same family of phenomena.

What’s important is that it’s not just high temperatures alone that causes these effects — it’s how quickly and unevenly the temperature changes across a region. That’s what sets the atmosphere into motion and can cause power lines to vibrate. Again, though, it’s still unclear if this is what was behind the recent blackout in Europe.

Rippled clouds above the ocean.
Atmospheric waves can sometimes be seen in clouds. Jeff Schmaltz/NASA

More centralised, more vulnerable

Understanding how the atmosphere behaves under these conditions is becoming increasingly important. As our energy systems become more interconnected and more dependent on long-distance transmission, even relatively subtle atmospheric disturbances can have outsized impacts. What might once have seemed like a fringe effect is now a growing factor in grid resilience.

Under growing environmental and electrical stress, centralised energy networks are dangerously vulnerable. The increasing electrification of buildings, the rapid uptake of electric vehicles, and the integration of intermittent renewable energy sources have placed unprecedented pressure on traditional grids that were never designed for this level of complexity, dynamism or centralisation.

Continuing to rely on centralised grid structures without fundamentally rethinking resilience puts entire regions at risk — not just from technical faults, but from environmental volatility.

The way to avoid such catastrophic risks is clear: we must embrace innovative solutions such as community microgrids. These are decentralised, flexible and resilient energy networks that can operate independently when needed.

Strengthening local energy autonomy is key to building a secure, affordable and future-ready electricity system.

The European blackout, regardless of its immediate cause, demonstrates that our electrical grids have become dangerously sensitive. Failure to address these structural weaknesses will have consequences far worse than those experienced during the COVID pandemic.The Conversation

Mehdi Seyedmahmoudian, Professor of Electrical Engineering, School of Engineering, Swinburne University of Technology

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

1 billion years ago, a meteorite struck Scotland and influenced life on Earth

Stoer Head lighthouse, Scotland. William Gale/Shutterstock
Chris KirklandCurtin UniversityTimmons EricksonCurtin University, and Tony PraveUniversity of St Andrews

We’ve discovered that a meteorite struck northwest Scotland 1 billion years ago, 200 million years later than previously thought. Our results are published today in the journal Geology.

This impact now aligns with some of Earth’s earliest known, land based, non-marine microbial fossils, and offers new insights into how meteorite strikes may have shaped our planet’s environment and life.

A rocky treasure trove

The Torridonian rocks of northwest Scotland are treasured by geologists as some of the finest archives of the ancient lakes and river systems that existed a billion years ago.

Those water bodies were home to microbial ecosystems consisting of eukaryotes. Eukaryotes are single-celled organisms with complex internal structures that are the ancestors of all plants and animals.

But the Torridonian environments and their associated microbial communities were dramatically disrupted when a meteor slammed into the planet.

Aerial image of a rocky coast under grey skies.
A drone’s-eye view of the Stac Fada Member reveals towering blocks of sandstone preserving a meteorite impact frozen in time. Look closely and you’ll spot figures for scale, dwarfed by the chaotic jumble of rock fragments encased in impact-smashed debris. Tony Prave

The record of this event is preserved in a geological unit known as the Stac Fada Member. It is comprised of unusual layers of rock fragments broken and melted by the impact.

Also, crucially, there are shock-altered minerals that closely resemble those found in famous impact sites such as Chicxulub (Mexico) and Sudbury (Canada).

In the case of the Stac Fada, these minerals were engulfed in high-energy, ground-hugging flows of smashed rock triggered by the impact that spread across the ancient landscape.

What is exciting about our new date for the Stac Fada impact is that it now overlaps in age with microfossils preserved elsewhere in the Torridonian rocks.

This raises some interesting questions. For example, how did the meteorite strike influence the environmental conditions those early non-marine microbial ecosystems relied on?

Finding out the date

Determining when a meteorite struck is no easy task.

We can use minerals to constrain the age, but they have to be the right kind. In this case it means something that wasn’t overly altered by the intense heat, pressure and fluids generated by the impact, yet robust enough to survive the ravages of deep geological time.

Suitable minerals are extremely rare, but we found a few in the Stac Fada rocks. One was reidite, a mineral that only forms under extreme pressure. The other was granular zircon, a uranium-bearing mineral formed by immense impact temperatures.

Electron microscope image of a shocked zircon: blue is granular zircon, red is reidite formed under extreme pressure from a meteorite impact. Timmons Erickson

These minerals are, in effect, tiny stopwatches whose clocks start “ticking” at the time they form. Although these clocks are often damaged during the impact and the ensuing pulse of heat, we used mathematical modelling to determine the most probable time of impact.

Together, these techniques consistently pointed to an event 1 billion years old, not 1.2 billion years old as previously suggested. Given such vast spans of time, a 20% change in age might not seem dramatic.

However, the new age shows the timing of the impact coincides with early non-marine eukaryotic fossils. It also lines up with a major mountain-building event. This means the Torridonian lifeforms had to cope with significant, environment-altering phenomena.

Why this is important for you, me, and life in general

The origin of life is a deeply complex process that likely began with a series of pre-biotic chemical reactions.

While much remains unknown, it is intriguing that two ancient meteorite impacts, the 3.5-billion-year-old North Pole impact in Western Australia and now the 1-billion-year-old Stac Fada deposit in northwest Scotland, occur close in time to major milestones in the fossil record.

The North Pole impact occurs in a sequence of rocks containing stromatolites, some of the oldest-known fossils considered to be indicative of microbial life.

These rippled layers in the Torridon rocks were built by ancient microbial communities, evidence of some of the earliest life on land. Tony Prave

All life requires energy. The earliest forms of life are thought to be associated with volcanic hydrothermal springs. Impacts offer a plausible alternative. The immediate aftermath of a meteorite strike is extreme and hostile, and would ruin your day. But the long-term effects could support key biological processes.

Meteorite strikes fracture rocks, generate long-lived hydrothermal systems and form crater lakes that enable the concentration of important ingredients for life, such as clays, organic molecules and phosphorus. The latter is a key element for all forms of life.

In Scotland, the Stac Fada impact lies within an ancient river and lake environment that housed microbial ecosystems colonising the land. What makes the Stac Fada impact deposits fascinating is that, unlike most other impacts on Earth, they preserve the environments in which those pioneering organisms lived immediately prior to the impact.

Further, the impact deposits were subsequently buried as non-marine microbial habitats became reestablished. So, the Stac Fada rocks provide an opportunity to see how microbial life recovered from impact.

Extraterrestrial visitors in the form of meteorite collisions may not just have scarred Earth’s surface, but shaped its future, turning catastrophic events into natural crater-cradles of life.The Conversation

Chris Kirkland, Professor of Geochronology, Curtin UniversityTimmons Erickson, Visting Research Associate, School of Earth and Planetary Sciences, Curtin University, and Tony Prave, Emeritus Professor, School of Earth and Environmental Sciences, University of St Andrews

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Why do dogs eat poo? A canine scientist explains

nygi/Unsplash
Mia CobbThe University of Melbourne

When miniature dachshund Valerie was captured after 529 days alone in the wilds of Australia’s Kangaroo Island, experts speculated she survived partly by eating other animals’ poo.

While this survival tactic may have saved the resilient sausage dog, it highlights a behaviour that makes many dog owners cringe.

This type of “recycling” is surprisingly common in our canine companions. But why would dogs, even those with full food bowls, choose to indulge in such a revolting habit?

Here’s why some dogs can’t resist a faecal feast, known more technically as coprophagia.

What is coprophagia?

Coprophagia or coprophagy is the scientific term for eating faecal matter (poo). It’s a behaviour displayed across a number of animal species.

Around half of all dogs try eating poo at some stage – either their own, another dog’s, or other animals’. Research suggests about one in four dogs have made it a regular habit.

In wild canids like foxes and wolves, mothers will eat their puppies’ stools to keep dens clean and reduce scents that might attract predators.

It’s also thought that eating fresh faeces could reduce the likelihood of intestinal parasites being spread, offering an evolutionary benefit to our dogs’ wild counterparts.

Modern dogs still actively clean their puppies’ poo away in the first few weeks of life, a behaviour that puppies observe and can learn.

A white husky licks her small puppies.
Licking away ‘waste’ from their puppies is a normal maternal behaviour in dogs. Anurak Pongpatimet/Shutterstock

Nutritional factors

As unpalatable as it might seem to us, poo still contains considerable nutrients that offer valuable compounds as a food source when times are tough.

Dogs do have different preferences to us in terms of texture, taste and odour of their food, so we should not be hasty to dismiss what might appeal to them.

Medical reasons

The links between diet, gut flora and diseases that might influence behaviours like coprophagia are still emerging. At this stage, there seems to be no apparent link with age or diet.

There could be underlying health reasons for your dog seeking out a sneaky snack, so do mention it to your vet and get a health check if your dog is known to frequent the kitty litter box, for example.

Punishment in toilet training, living conditions that don’t provide enough to do or room to explore (like kennel facilities), and psychological distress have all been linked to dogs eating their own poo.

A sad looking labrador in a kennel.
Shelters and kennel facilities are often built for hygiene and safety, not to keep dogs’ minds and bodies active. Evgenii Bakhchev/Shutterstock

A strain on relationships

Our typical response to seeing dogs eat any kind of poo ranges from disgust to concern. At best it makes us less likely to want a lick to the face, at worst it can really strain our human-animal bonds.

One study from the United Kingdom showed that dogs eating their own poo after rehoming was in the top ten reasons for the adoption failing in the first four weeks when dogs were returned to the shelter.

Dogs can potentially transmit parasites and bacteria to humans through licking, regardless of whether they eat poo. This serves as a good reminder to ensure your dog receives appropriate parasite control and encourage all household members to follow good hygiene practices, like washing hands before eating.

Help, my dog keeps eating poo

While Valerie’s tale of survival shows us coprophagia may be life-saving in extreme situations, most of our doggo companions aren’t facing wilderness survival challenges.

Thankfully, coprophagia is often manageable.

Understanding why our dogs might eat poo – whether based on evolutionary instinct, medical issues or psychological triggers – can help us address this canine behaviour with compassion rather than just disgust.

If your dog indulges often, providing appropriate stimulation through regular exercise, social connection with people and other dogs, offering toys and safe chews can help. Sometimes, a trip to the vet might be needed to rule out any underlying health issues.

A wet long haired sausage dog tears across beach sand with ball in mouth.
Offering fun activities is one way to reduce the chance of your dog eating poo. Kojirou Sasaki/Unsplash

Dogs reprimanded for toileting accidents might eat the evidence to avoid future punishment, creating a new problem behaviour. Instead, rewarding your puppy or dog for toileting in the right location (and giving them frequent opportunities to do so) is likely to establish toileting routines you will approve of, making coprophagia less likely.

By the same token, dogs can’t eat what isn’t left lying around. Regular poo-pickups in your yard, dog park, kitty litter box and other likely locations will remove temptation and help set your dog up for success.

If Valerie has taught us anything, it’s that what might be considered our dogs’ most revolting habits are actually remarkable adaptations that deserve our understanding and empathy, even if we can’t rally enthusiastic support.The Conversation

Mia Cobb, Research Fellow, Animal Welfare Science Centre, The University of Melbourne

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

‘Do something about it before it gets worse’: young people want government action on gambling reform

David P. Smith/Shutterstock
Hannah PittDeakin UniversityGrace ArnotDeakin UniversitySamantha ThomasDeakin University, and Simone McCarthyDeakin University

Do something about it before it gets worse.

This was a response from a 16-year-old boy in one of our recent studies when asked what he would say to the prime minister about gambling in Australia.

This response is not uncommon.

Calls for action

Even before they can legally gamble at the age of 18, young people recognise the harms that the gambling industry (and those who profit from gambling, such as sporting codes) can cause to Australians.

And they are frustrated by a lack of government action to protect them from these harms.

They tell us that rather than prioritising the wellbeing of the community, the government is prioritising the profits of a harmful business.

Politicians are also hearing concerns about gambling from the young people they represent in their communities.

Urging parliamentary action on gambling advertising, former Australian rugby captain and Independent ACT Senator David Pocock told parliament:

Talk to parents and young people. They’ll name all the gambling companies. They’ll be able to recite odds. They’ll talk about the odds for the upcoming games of their favourite teams. What I’m hearing from people here in the ACT that I represent is that this is not the direction they want to go in.

Gambling has become a costly pastime for many young Australians.

Starting young

For more than a decade, our team has been talking to young people and their parents about the normalisation of gambling in Australia. We have carried out multiple studies that show how pervasive marketing tactics are normalising gambling for young Australians.

Young people tell us they see innovative marketing strategies for different gambling products (including betting, lotteries and casinos) everywhere, including during family-friendly television shows, through watching and attending sport and even while walking down the street.

They increasingly see promotions on social media sites such as TikTok and Snapchat.

They can name multiple gambling brands from a young age, and think gambling gives you a reason to watch sport.

When asked why, they say gambling adds to the fun and excitement of the game. Some tell us they would be convinced to gamble if they got a good “deal” from a company.

Newer forms of app-based gambling also make it is easier for young people to gamble anywhere, anytime when they turn 18.

As an example, a young person couldn’t sit in a classroom and drink alcohol when they reach the legal age, but it is not unusual for young people to tell us that classmates use apps to bet on major events while at school.

Some researchers have also documented the extent to which young people gamble before the age of 18.

One study found 31% of 12- to 17-year-olds had ever gambled and 6% had gambled in the past month. They found 8% were at some level of risk of gambling harm.

It’s no wonder parents are worried.

Their concern about the risks of gambling are similar to their concerns about alcohol: 70% are at least somewhat concerned about the risks associated with gambling for their children, and 27.7% are extremely concerned.

They comment that gambling products are “highly accessible”, “attractive” and “in your face”.

When parents try to talk to their children about gambling, they say it is almost impossible to “get the message across” given the constant exposure to ads that their children see in their everyday lives. As one father told us:

It’s advertised to children every day of the week when they watch their favourite sport stars, so they think it’s normal.

It’s time to act

Government decisions about how to respond to the gambling industry will have a major impact on young people’s futures. But young people have rarely (if ever) been given an opportunity by the government to put forward their views.

Research shows when they are given the opportunity to comment on gambling policy (and gambling industry tactics), they carefully consider the issues. They are also able to use their own experiences to suggest strategies that would help protect them and other young people from gambling industry harm.

The United Nations states children have the right to be consulted about issues that matter to them and impact their futures. This includes strengthening engagement with children and young people, recognising their “agency, resilience and their positive contributions as agents of change”.

Young people have been central actors in the climate justice movement, and have been key stakeholders in initiatives to respond to the tactics of the junk food and tobacco industries.

While we talk a lot about the impact of the gambling industry on young people, governments rarely consult them about the policies that are needed to protect them from harm.

Yet their message to the government in our research is clear. They:

  • are concerned about the influence of gambling marketing on the normalisation of gambling for young people, and its short and long-term impacts

  • believe current restrictions aimed at protecting young people are ineffective

  • are critical of the overwhelmingly positive messages about gambling they are exposed to, with very limited information about the risks and harms associated with the industry and its products.

The following comment from a 15-year-old sums it up best:

The wellbeing of the population is more important than the revenue that comes in from these sorts of businesses.The Conversation

Hannah Pitt, Senior Research Fellow – Institute for Health Transformation, Deakin UniversityGrace Arnot, Public Health Researcher, Deakin UniversitySamantha Thomas, Professor of Public Health, Deakin University, and Simone McCarthy, Postdoctoral Research Fellow - Commercial Determinants of Health, Deakin University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

AvPals 25th Year: Term Two Newport Sessions

You can book in and pay for sessions at Newport via the AvPals shop.

Please note the first session for Term Two, 'Outsmart the Hackers' to be held this coming Tuesday, May 6, 1.30 to 3pm, is a Free, all welcome and no booking required session.

Avalon Computer Pals (AVPALS) helps seniors learn and improve their computer and technology skills. Avpals is a not for profit organisation run by volunteers. Since 2000, we have helped thousands of seniors from complete beginners to people who need to improve or update their skills. We offer “one to one” personal tuition or special short courses. 

Small class workshops are run at the Newport Community Centre on Tuesday afternoons.

One-to-one training is provided at our rooms in Avalon, under the Maria Regina Catholic Church, 7 Central Road, Avalon.

Join us in learning 'how to' in our 25th year!

The AvPals shop for Newport short sessions is HERE
The rest of this terms workshop offerings are:

Spotted: Bill G + Geoff S!

Local Historians Bill Goddard and Geoff Searl were spotted Tuesday morning, April 30 - probably off to delve deeper into some local history. This pair are quite happy to travel to the Western Sydney Records holding for the NSW State Records and find that elusive thread they're looking for to make sense of what happened long before this generation commenced strolling around the place.

What they get up to turns up in the Meetings held quarterly by the Avalon Beach Historical Society, of which Geoff is President and Bill a backbone Member.

Funnily enough, your PON paparazzo was out doing some site investigations for North Avalon creeks in the rain - the best time to see how they are or aren't flowing - and which form part of a History on the same creeks, which should be available next Issue- May 11th, to which both Bill and Geoff have already contributed their research as part of the 'Barrenjoey History Group'.

Other members are Christine Ellis and Robert Mackinnon of the Palm Beach-Whale Beach Association and your Ed., A J Guesdon.

This may be as good as it gets: NZ and Australia face a complicated puzzle when it comes to supermarket prices

Daria Nipot/Shutterstock
Richard MeadeGriffith University

With ongoing cost of living pressures, the Australian and New Zealand supermarket sectors are attracting renewed political attention on both sides of the Tasman.

Allegations of price gouging have become a political issue in the Australian federal election. At the same time, the New Zealand government has announced that “all options” are on the table to address a lack of competition in the sector – including possible breakup of the existing players.

But it is not clear breaking up the supermarkets or other government interventions will improve the sector for shoppers and suppliers.

In 2022, I co-authored a government-commissioned analysis looking at whether New Zealand’s two main supermarket groups should be forced to sell some of their stores to create a third competing chain.

We found it was possible under some scenarios that breakup could benefit consumers. But key uncertainties and implementation risks meant consumers could lose overall.

A lot hinges on whether breakup causes supermarkets’ input costs to rise or product variety to fall. Even in more positive scenarios at least some consumers could be left worse off.

Watchdog concerns

Competition authorities – the Australian Competition and Consumer Commission (ACCC) and New Zealand’s Commerce Commission – have conducted supermarket sector studies. They each expressed concern at significant barriers to entry and expansion in the sector and supermarkets’ resulting high levels of profitability.

This year, the ACCC concluded margins earned by Australia’s main supermarkets are among the highest of supermarket businesses in comparable countries. Similarly, in 2022 the Commerce Commission found New Zealand’s supermarkets were earning excess profits of around NZ$430m a year.

While high profits might mean that market power is being abused, it could also mean managers are doing a good job. Or have had a great run of luck. Alternative explanations for high profits would need to be ruled out before putting fingers on regulatory triggers.

Nicola Willis speaking to the media in front of microphones.
New Zealand’s Finance Minister Nicola Willis says everything is on the table when it comes to addressing the concentration of the supermarket sector. Hagen Hopkins/Getty Images

Barriers to entry

The starting point is to acknowledge that high profits and prices go hand in hand with barriers to entry and challenges in achieving economies of scale.

In other words, some sectors are less competitive than others simply because a lack of demand or high costs make it unprofitable for additional competitors to either enter or remain in the market.

Countries like Australia and New Zealand, with low population densities and large service areas, face high costs of nationwide supply. They also face significant shipping distances from other countries. This limits the ability of overseas entrants using their existing buying and supply infrastructures.

That said, some barriers to entry might be artificial or caused by existing firms stifling new competitors.

Existing supermarkets in both countries have gained controlling stakes in the land needed to set up new supermarkets – something regulatory settings can prevent.

Another challenge for new chains is the process of getting planning and land use consents – something policymakers can address.

This points to key elements of a test for whether supermarkets are charging too much. One is a recognition that there can be natural reasons for limited competition, and unless technologies or consumer preferences change that will remain the case.

Another is a focus on the things that can be changed – whether at the firm or policy level – in a way that benefits consumers and suppliers. Finally, policymakers need to consider whether the benefits of implementing them outweigh the costs.

Testing the market

Building on work developed by Nobel economist Oliver Williamson, a “three-limb test” was used in the 2017 government-commissioned assessment of fuel pricing in New Zealand that I co-authored. The same could be used to assess the supermarket sector.

That three-limb test asks

  • are there features of the existing industry structure and conduct giving cause for concern
  • can those causes for concern be remedied
  • would the benefits of remedying those concerns outweigh the costs of doing so?

If the answer to all three limbs is yes, that suggests suppliers are charging too much (or delivering too little) since there are practical ways to improve on the status quo.

A virtue of such a test is that is can be applied in any sector where there are high firm concentration, barriers to entry and high profit margins.

Importantly, the test looks beyond just what firms are (or are not) doing and asks whether policy and regulatory settings are ripe for improvements too.

The test is also pragmatic – it shouldn’t trigger changes unless they are clearly expected to do more good than harm. This is important if interventions are risky, costly or irreversible, especially in sectors that are important to all of us.

Politicians on both sides of the Tasman are floating the possibility of supermarket breakup, among other possible interventions. The three-limb test helps to identify whether any proposed interventions are a good idea and whether supermarket prices are higher than they need to be.The Conversation

Richard Meade, Adjunct Associate Professor, Centre for Applied Energy Economics and Policy Research, Griffith University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Who’s eating publishers’ lunch? The rising costs and shrinking margins of Australian books

Zamrznuti tonovi/Shutterstock
Alice GrundyAustralian National University

At the end of March 2025, Penguin Random House announced booming sales, with a year-on-year increase of 8.5%. Even better, their profits rose 11.3%.

Reading this, you might think publishing is flourishing, but you will hear a very different story if you ask many Australian independent publishers. They will tell you it’s difficult to cover costs, let alone make profit.

With some data from the Australian Bureau of Statistics and a breakdown of the costs involved in getting a book into your local Dymocks, I can show where some of the troubles lie. Which leads to the question: How can Australia protect its homegrown publishers?

Are books actually expensive?

Commonly held wisdom is that books are expensive in Australia. Perhaps in part because of this perception, books have, on average, roughly the same recommended retail price they did 15 years ago.

In the late 1990s, when the Australian Bureau of Statistics started collecting data on book prices, they seemed to be rising in line with the consumer price index (CPI). Since the early 2000s, the CPI has jumped, while books have hovered around the same price.

This is a partly a result of more books selling through discount department stores, which lowers the average price and has led to relative stability in prices. When I started working in publishing in 2008, a trade paperback usually cost around A$29.99; the average cost now is around $36.99.

This chart shows how the price of books has not risen in line with the CPI. Australian Bureau of Statistics

So, what would have happened to book prices if they had increased in line with the CPI? According to the Reserve Bank of Australia’s Inflation Calculator, a book that cost $29.95 in 2010 would cost $43.22 in 2024.

Over the same 15-year period, pulp and converted paper costs rose 51% and printing costs rose 34%. Wages in general rose 48% in that time. (However, the book editor’s award rate only increased 20%: from $1,007 per week for a book editor grade one in 2010 to $1,205 in 2025.)

In short, it costs much more to make a book now – but as the chart above clearly demonstrates, the retail price has barely moved. More books being sold through discount department stores, such as Big W, exacerbates the issue, so the return for publishers is generally lower per book than it was 15 years ago.

The price of books hasn’t risen – making it hard for Australian publishers. Shutterstock

What a book costs in 2025

What follows is an indicative (not exhaustive) breakdown of publishing income and expenses for an independent publisher in 2025, for books sold in an independent bookshop. Small presses are less likely to have their books stocked in Big W.

Taking a $36.99 trade paperback as an example, these calculations are based on a 2,000-copy print run: a moderate to ambitious target for a literary fiction title. For ease of accounting, I have left out GST, except on author royalties.

An author receives 10% of the recommended retail price as a royalty rate. So for a $36.99 book, the author gets $3.69 for each copy sold.

The average bookseller discount is set at 47%. (For discount department stores such as Big W, it is often over 50%.) This means a publisher would receive $17.70 for each copy sold. From that, the publisher pays for editing and design, printing and distribution. For the purposes of this exercise, I am assuming this is 19% of the money the publisher receives from the booksellers. This is a modest percentage; it can be as high as 30%.

A sell-through of every printed copy is a publishing unicorn – you can imagine it, but it doesn’t exist. Inevitably, copies will be damaged in transit. And because of the sale or return policy, which allows booksellers to order copies on the understanding they can return them if the books do not sell, the tendency is for booksellers to do at least some over-ordering.

If a publisher sells 80% of the print run, the income would be $5,274. With their income, a publisher pays for overheads such as salaries, rent, insurance, purchases, software and hardware. They will also pay tax.

If they hired a freelance publicity or marketing firm, they would be in the red. If the book needed to be legalled for potential defamation suits, they would be in the red. If there were photoshoots and permissions to reproduce song lyrics, or an extra round of design or editing, they would be in the red.

What about ebooks?

For ebooks, the story is different. The publisher will have covered all the production costs. Without the printing, the margins are better. There is a negligible conversion fee, of around $200. The distribution and bookseller slices of the pie are smaller.

Author royalties on ebooks are higher as well – usually 25%. There are no returns, so each sale represents income. For a literary fiction title, the sales may be around 200 copies. If this is the case, the publisher’s income on an ebook priced at $16 would be just over $1200.

In some genres, ebooks dominate. But for the books independent publishers release, the income is usually modest – unless the title wins the Miles Franklin Literary Award, in which case they may sell a few thousand ebooks, or is set on school curricula, which means sales in the hundreds or low thousands each year.

How can small publishers keep making books?

Clearly, the numbers are not adding up in a sustainable way for the publishing industry. This poses the obvious question: can small local publishers continue to make books?

The short answer is yes. What follows are some paths to that future.

Increase book prices

The above heading is enough to rouse fear in the hearts of publishers and booksellers alike. If book prices go up, will customers still buy books?

It is one thing for a punter to wear the increase in the cost of a cup of coffee, which has been rising incrementally, although may jump up in the next few months. It represents a much smaller chunk of their fortnightly wage than the price of a book, especially in a cost of living crisis.

As a cautionary tale, we can look to another entertainment industry. Of course, books and films are different. Books make good presents, they can be passed on and usually read in a few sessions, but both are forms of entertainment or education that punters buy.

The cost of the average movie ticket has increased 27% in the last ten years. In the same period, the number of cinema-goers has declined.

More mergers

In the past year, three smaller Australian publishing houses – Affirm, Text and Pantera – have merged with bigger companies, perhaps reflecting the stresses shrinking margins are exerting on the local industry.

A large publisher, such as Penguin Random House, can negotiate competitive print prices and manage its own warehouses. This means the distribution costs are lower on a per-book basis. Profit margins can be more favourable than for smaller houses.

A big company views a merger as a quick way to increase market share and acquire backlist titles. For a small press, a merger can relieve cash flow and margin pressures. The concern for authors, and by extension literary agents, is that more mergers can mean fewer publishers, fewer publishing opportunities and less championing of local culture.

New models

Word of mouth has long been the most effective marketing strategy for books, but it is time consuming to orchestrate.

Historically, publishers have alerted readers to books through traditional media, publicity and marketing campaigns, and “co-op” with booksellers – where the publisher pays for prominent shelf space or places in customer catalogues. In exchange for a fee, a publisher might guarantee a small image of the book’s cover, an abbreviated blurb and placement up the front of a shop – a common practice with chains such as Dymocks.

These ways of reaching readers are still viable, but as media markets are increasingly splintered, the influence is diluted.

One successful option for authors with large followings is to hold events in collaboration with booksellers, where people can buy a ticket and book combo and meet the author. Such deals are only feasible for authors with existing name recognition, even more so if they also have their own social media presence.

These events often require production support and venue-hire fees. They usually only support new release titles, rather than creating a longer-term sales channel. The sticking point is that the authors who can draw a crowd are also usually able to sell their books without the help of booksellers.

For small publishers, another option is selling to readers directly, either through subscription models or through their websites, as the newly created Australia Institute Press (where I am managing editor) has been doing.

This involves postage and handling and additional accounting. But it means that, aside from printing costs and staff time, the return on investment can be as high as $20 for a $36.99 book. The difficulty with such a model is the exclusion of booksellers and the symbiotic relationship between independent booksellers and publishers that has underpinned the industry for generations.

woman carrying pile of books
One option for small publishers is selling books directly to consumers – a higher return on investment. Cottonbro/Pexels

Self-publishing, where authors either do the work themselves or engage others to produce the book – a system of publishers-for-hire – continues to grow. In the recent past, this was often seen as a predatory practice. But in a marketplace where authors are expected to bring their own social media following and market their books to pre-existing audiences, the value of publishers and the traditional bookseller supply chain becomes less clear.

The success of these models depends on an author having sufficient resources to pay upfront and on their ability to reach an audience on their own. But for influencers with a large following, or a following they build with minimal costs by publishing digitally, these are not limiting factors.

Literary authors, however, are less likely to have large audiences of their own. With average earnings of $18,200 per year, they are also less likely to be able to afford upfront costs.

Increase government subsidies

For independent Australian publishers to survive, there is one necessary condition that needs to change. The first is greater support from government for the publishing industry. During COVID, the government offered extra funding to support the arts.

As research from Julieanne Lamond and Melinda Harvey showed, the extra funds government given to literary organisations had a near immediate – and significant – effect on the amount of work literary journals published. The return on investment is quick, compared with artforms such as theatre, and the results are easy to quantify.

Funding for the arts in Australia is strikingly unambitious. There is an opportunity for governments to invest in the future of the sector and lay down the infrastructure for future generations. Writing Australia, the new federal government funding body, will be launched on July 1 2025.

The literature sector is waiting to see how much of the proposed increase in funding will support local writers, editors, publishers, designers, publicists and the many people who keep the industry running.

From 1969 until 1997, the Australian government subsidised publishers and printers with a Book Bounty that bolstered the local industry – to the tune of 25% subsidies of production costs for eligible books. Given current market conditions, if we want to ensure the future of Australian publishing, it may be time to launch a new bounty.

For the past few decades, the common wisdom has been that independent publishers develop new talent, which then bolsters the industry and forms each new generation of writers.

Independent publishers often develop new talent: McPhee Gribble published Helen Garner, now published by Text. Darren James/Text

McPhee Gribble brought us Tim Winton and Helen Garner. Giramondo first published Michael Mohammed Ahmad. Text did the same for Robbie Arnott and Anna Funder.

Literary prizes in Australia recognise the talent these publishers foster. Five of the six titles on last year’s Miles Franklin shortlist were from small publishers, as are half the books on this year’s Stella Prize shortlist.

There are two campaigns this federal election that endeavour to encourage voters, and by extension politicians, to consider the arts. Books Create Australia is an initiative bringing together sometime allies, including publishers, booksellers and libraries announcing a set of requests. Save Our Arts has some similar requests, including regulation of AI and more funding.

Whether either campaign has an effect on the new parliament remains to be seen.

Australia has bid farewell to manufacturing and other industries, but we cannot produce our culture overseas. Without significant increases in support from government, Australian publishing is headed for further trouble.The Conversation

Alice Grundy, Visiting Fellow, Australian National University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

How does consciousness work? Duelling scientists tested two big theories but found no winner

cdd20 / Unsplash
Tim BayneMonash University

“Theories are like toothbrushes,” it’s sometimes said. “Everybody has their own and nobody wants to use anybody else’s.”

It’s a joke, but when it comes to the study of consciousness – the question of how we have a subjective experience of anything at all – it’s not too far from the truth.

In 2022, British neuroscientist Anil Seth and I published a review listing 22 theories based in the biology of the brain. In 2024, operating with a less restrictive scope, US public intellectual Robert Kuhn counted more than 200.

It’s against this background that Nature has just published the results of an “adversarial collaboration” from a group called the Cogitate Consortium focused on two prominent theories: global neuronal workspace theory and integrated information theory.

Two big theories go head to head

With so many ideas floating around and inherently elusive subject matter, testing theories has been no easy task. Indeed, debate between proponents of different theories has been vigorous and, at times, acrimonious.

At a particularly low point in 2023, after the initial announcement of the results Cogitate has formally published today, many experts signed an open letter arguing that integrated information theory was not only false but doesn’t even qualify as scientific.

Nevertheless, global neuronal workspace theory and integrated information theory are two of the “big four” theories that dominate current discussions of consciousness. (The others are higher-order representation theories, and the local re-entry – or recurrency – theory.)

The theories are hard to summarise, but both tie consciousness to the activity of neurons in different parts of the brain.

Advocates of these two theories, together with a number of unaligned theorists, generated predictions from the two theories about the kinds of brain activity one would expect to be associated with consciousness.

Predictions and results

The group agreed that integrated information theory predicts conscious perception should be associated with sustained synchronisation and activity of signals in a part of the brain called the posterior cortex.

On the other hand, they said global neuronal workspace theory predicts that a process of “neural ignition” should accompany both the start and end of a stimulus. What’s more, it should be possible to decode what a person is conscious of from activity in their prefrontal cortex.

A simple illustration of a human brain with lobes and the cerebellum labelled.
The posterior cortex consists of the parietal, temporal, and occipital lobes. The prefrontal cortex is the front part of the frontal lobe. Refluo/Shutterstock

These hypotheses (among others) were tested by “theory-neutral” teams from across the globe.

The results were not decisive. Some were in line with predictions of one or other of the theories, but other results generated challenges.

For example, the team failed to find sustained synchronisation within the posterior cortex of the kind predicted by integrated information theory. At the same time, global neuronal workspace theory is challenged by the fact that not all contents of consciousness could be decoded from the prefrontal cortex, and by the failure to find neural ignition when the stimulus was first presented.

A win for science

But although this study wasn’t a win for either theory, it was a decisive win for science. It represents a clear advance in how the consciousness community approaches theory-testing.

It’s not uncommon for researchers to tend to look for evidence in favour of their own theory. But the seriousness of this problem in consciousness science only became clear in 2022, with the publication of an important paper by a number of researchers involved in the Cogitate Consortium. The paper showed it was possible to predict which theory of consciousness a particular study supported based purely on its design.

The vast majority of attempts to “test” theories of consciousness have been conducted by advocates of those very theories. As a result, many studies have focused on confirming theories (rather than finding flaws, or falsifying them).

No changing minds

The first achievement of this collaboration was getting rival theorists to agree on testable predictions of the two theories. This was especially challenging as both the global workspace and integrated information theories are framed in very abstract terms.

Another achievement was to run the the same experiments in different labs – a particularly difficult challenge given those labs were not committed to the theories in question.

In the early stages of the project, the team took advice from Israeli-US psychologist Daniel Kahneman, the architect of the idea of adversarial collaborations for research.

Kahneman said not to expect the results to change anyone’s mind, even if they decisively favoured one theory over another. Scientists are committed to their theories, he pointed out, and will cling to them even in the face of counter-evidence.

The usefulness of irrationality

This kind of irrational stubbornness may seem like a problem, but it doesn’t have to be. With the right systems in place, it can even help to advance science.

Given we don’t know which theoretical approach to consciousness is most likely to be right, the scientific community ought to tackle consciousness from a variety of perspectives.

The research community needs ways to correct itself. However, it’s useful for individual scientists to stick to their theoretical guns, and continue to work within a particular theory even in the face of problematic findings.

A hard nut to crack

Consciousness is a hard nut to crack. We don’t yet know whether it will yield to the current methods of consciousness science, or whether it requires a revolution in our concepts or methods (or perhaps both).

What is clear, however, is that if we’re going to untangle the problem of subjective experience, the scientific community will need to embrace this model of collaborative research.The Conversation

Tim Bayne, Professor of Philosophy, Monash University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Politicians urged to come clean on sneaky attack on pensions

Statement: April 27 2025
The Federal Government and Opposition need to urgently come clean on their plans for deeming rates, COTA Australia and National Seniors Australia says.

The calls follow the government’s refusal to rule out ceasing the current freeze on deeming rates, which feed into means testing for social security payments, including the Age Pension, JobSeeker, and parenting payments.

Advocates for older Australians estimate the move could leave a single age pensioner up to $3300 a year worse off.

COTA Australia Chief Executive, Patricia Sparrow and National Seniors Australia Chief Executive Officer Chris Grice said deeming rates should continue to be frozen while pensioners and other Australians are battling with the current cost of living crisis.

“This would have a huge impact on older Australians ability to make ends meet,” Chief Executive Officer of COTA Australia, Patricia Sparrow, said.

“Older Australians, and others whose crucial payments are determined by deeming rates, deserve to know what our political parties have in store for them.

“The current cost of living pressures are already hitting many Australians, particularly those on fixed incomes, hard. To expect people to deal with a drop of more than $3000 on top of what they’re currently trying to cope with is unreasonable at best.”

“The latest indexation adjustment to the Age Pension in March wouldn’t even allow a pensioner to buy a coffee per week. Pensioners are already struggling; our politicians need to recognise that and confirm they won’t pile more pain on top of what people are already feeling.”

National Seniors Australia Chief Executive Officer, Chris Grice said the freeze impacted more than 450,000 Age Pensioners.

“Older Australians are struggling to pay competing necessities such as utilities, petrol, groceries, insurances, and rent. The continued freeze on deeming rates would spare part-pensioners and other income support payment recipients a drop in income and the loss of the Commonwealth Seniors Health Card and with it, loss of access to valuable concessions,” Mr Grice said.

“Providing cost-of-living relief with a continued freeze on deeming is a sensible way to help older people meet daily living costs. We need to ensure any changes to deeming rates are fair for everyone, including pensioners.

“Any changes need to be measured, incremental, and transparent in its calculation, so we don’t end up in a situation where older Australians who are already struggling under cost-of-living pressures are hit even harder.

“This can’t be a matter of wait and see. For our political parties to attempt to sneak through changes to deeming rates after the election would be outrageous.”

Background
The Albanese government confirmed in late March 2025 it would not lift rates in the 2025 Federal Budget to help older Aussies deal with the rising cost of living. Deeming rates will remain frozen for another year, allowing pensioners to keep more of their Centrelink payments in their pockets.

Deeming rates are the rates of return the government assumes people earn on their financial assets, regardless of what they actually earn in real terms. That means if you earn more than the deemed rate, it isn't counted by the government when working out your payments. It applies to financial assets like shares, superannuation and bank accounts.

The 12-month freeze applies to all people receiving Centrelink payments, including around 460,000 age pensioners whose rate of payment are impacted by deeming.

The coalition has not mentioned the deeming rates as yet, but did pledge, as part of its election policies, to:
  • Protect the retirement savings of Australians from unfair new taxes.
  • Increase the amount older Australians and veterans can work without reducing pension payments.

Older women at greater risk of homelessness without targeted housing action: COTA

Statement: April 30, 2025
Political parties must commit to concrete actions to tackle Australia’s housing crisis, including the alarming rise in older women’s homelessness, in the lead up to the federal election, COTA Australia says.

COTA Australia – the leading advocacy organisation for older people – Chief Executive, Patricia Sparrow, says too many older women are falling into hidden homelessness – living in cars, couch-surfing, dog or cat sitting, or crammed into overcrowded housing – often experiencing housing insecurity for the first time in their lives.

Ms Sparrow said in addition to building new community and public housing, political parties need to commit to urgently increase Commonwealth Rent Assistance (CRA) by 60%, and to create innovative programs to help older women find affordable housing and navigate the housing system.

“Too many older women locked out of home ownership, priced out of rentals, and with nowhere to go. Commonwealth Rent Assistance isn’t keeping up, and public and community housing remains out of reach for many who desperately need it,” said Ms Sparrow.

“Older women are one of the fastest growing groups at risk of homeless in Australia, and what’s worse is that the true number of older women experiencing homelessness is much higher than official data suggests. Many avoid sleeping rough and instead move between friends’ homes, stay in cars, or live in severely overcrowded housing. They’re invisible in the statistics – but they are there, and they are struggling.

“We’re not far off having half a million older women at risk of homelessness across the country. These are our often mothers and grandmothers who, through no fault of their own, have found themselves without basic, permanent shelter.”

Ms Sparrow said the crisis is triggered by a perfect storm of factors, including decades of gender pay gaps leaving women with insufficient retirement savings, chronic low wages in female-dominated industries, career interruptions for unpaid caregiving, skyrocketing rents pricing fixed-income retirees out of the market and a critical shortage of appropriate public and community housing.

“Some state governments, like South Australia, are exploring solutions such as co-housing and expanding access to small-scale housing like granny flats and tiny homes. But this crisis can’t be solved piecemeal.

“A national response is needed. The Federal Government must act now—older women have worked and contributed all their lives. They deserve stable housing.”

More than 100 new homes for seniors in Sydney

The Albanese and Minns Labor Governments announced on Friday May 2nd they are providing safe, comfortable and modern housing for Sydney residents aged 55 and over, with 116 homes for seniors to be delivered by early next year thanks to Commonwealth funding through the $2 billion Social Housing Accelerator Fund.

More than half of the builds have already been completed with 61 new social homes for seniors providing safe and secure housing for more than 90 residents. The most recent project has been finished in Northmead with 16 purpose-built units set to provide new homes for up to 24 residents.

More completed developments in Riverwood, Matraville and two in North Parramatta are providing modern and accessible homes for older tenants with a mix of one-and two-bedroom apartments,

A further 55 homes are underway and will be delivered over the next 12 months.

Three new developments featuring purpose-built units are currently under construction in Greater Sydney, with the next project in Parramatta slated for completion in June

The largest of the developments, a major social housing complex at Pagewood, is expected to be completed by March 2026 and will offer 33 homes for up to 50 senior residents.

Each of the homes have been designed to be accessible, support independent living and foster a sense of community for residents.

The NSW Government secured $610 million through the Federal SHAF, with $200 million directed to fast-tracked builds. These projects are expected to deliver around 400 new social homes across the state by the end of 2026, with housing for older people a key focus.

The new homes for seniors are spread across growing areas in Sydney’s west and inner east, with locations at Parramatta, North Parramatta, Northmead, Pagewood and Matraville. They are also conveniently located close to public transport, shops and health services to meet the needs of older people.

The construction of these senior living developments has created an estimated 300 jobs and are part of the NSW Government’s commitment to deliver around 1,500 social homes under the SHAF by June 2028.

This initiative forms part of the Minns Labor Government’s commitment to build 8,400 new public homes under the $6.6 billion Building Homes for NSW program, the largest ever investment by an NSW Government into social housing in the state’s history.

Federal Minister for Housing and Homelessness Clare O’Neil said:

“Each one of these homes will change the life of those Australians who will live there and their families, and in this case it means that 116 older Australians will have safe and secure housing.

“The Albanese and Minns Labor Governments are taking on the housing crisis by building thousands of social and affordable homes in our cities, suburbs and regions, but all that is at risk with Peter Dutton.

“These social and affordable homes represent 116 of the 55,000 that the Albanese Labor Government is delivering right across Australia.”

NSW Minister for Housing and Homelessness Rose Jackson said:

“NSW has an ageing population, so we need to invest in social housing that is safe, secure and can accommodate the needs of older Australians. These projects are in prime locations across Sydney’s inner east and west and are desperately needed.

“Many older Australians live alone, which can create a sense of isolation and loneliness. These dedicated seniors housing complexes are designed not only to support the needs of older people, but also to create a sense of community and a place where residents can connect.

“By working closely with the Federal Government, we are delivering more social housing than ever before in NSW, and the Social Housing Accelerator Fund has been a key driver of this.”

NSW Minister for Seniors Jodie Harrison said:

“This investment in affordable, appropriate, and quality social housing will help more seniors looking for a comfortable lifestyle.

“We know women over the age of 55 are a particularly fast-growing cohort experiencing homelessness and more support is needed to help vulnerable people overcome financial barriers to stable housing.

“That’s why it’s so important for all levels of government to work together to deliver better housing outcomes for people where they need it.”

Breakdown of the senior social homes delivered under SHAF in the next 12 months:

Older Australians are also hurting from the housing crisis. Where are the election policies to help them?

shutterstock. beeboys/Shutterstock
Victoria CornellFlinders University

It would be impossible at this stage in the election campaign to be unaware that housing is a critical, potentially vote-changing, issue. But the suite of policies being proposed by the major parties largely focus on young, first home buyers.

What is glaringly noticeable is the lack of measures to improve availability and affordability for older people.

Modern older lives are diverse, yet older people have become too easily pigeonholed. No more so than in respect to property, where a perception has flourished that older people own more than their fair share of housing wealth.

While the value of housing has no doubt increased, home ownership rates among people reaching retirement age has actually declined since the mid-1990s.

Older people can also face rental stress and homelessness – with almost 20,000 homeless people in Australia aged over 55. Severe housing stress is a key contributing to those homelessness figures.

It’s easy to blame older Australians for causing, or exacerbating, the housing crisis. But doing so ignores the fact that right now, our housing system is badly failing many older people too.

No age limits

Owning a home has traditionally provided financial security for retirees, especially ones relying on the age pension. This is so much so, that home ownership is sometimes described as the “fourth pillar” of Australia’s retirement system.

But housing has become more expensive – to rent or buy – for everyone.

Falling rates of home ownership combined with carriage of mortgage debt into retirement, restricted access to shrinking stocks of social housing, and lack of housing affordability in the private rental market have a particular impact on older people.

Housing rethink

Housing policy for older Australians has mostly focused on age-specific options, such as retirement villages and aged care. Taking such a limited view excludes other potential solutions from across the broader housing system that should be considered.

Furthermore, not all older people want to live in a retirement village, and fewer than 5% of older people live in residential aged care.

Elderly woman, in a grey hat, blue jacket and white pants, lies on a red park bench
More than 20,000 older Australians are homeless, blamed in part on severe housing stress. Michael Heim/Shutterstock

During my Churchill Fellowship study exploring alternative, affordable models of housing for older people, I discovered three cultural themes that are stopping us from having a productive conversation about housing for older people.

  • Australia’s tradition of home ownership undervalues renting and treats housing as a commodity, not a basic need. This disadvantages older renters and those on low income.

  • There’s a stigma regarding welfare in Australia, which influences who is seen as “deserving” and shapes the policy responses.

  • While widely encouraged, “ageing-in-place” means different things to different people. It can include formal facilities or the family home that needs modifications to make it habitable as someone ages.

These themes are firmly entrenched, often driven by policy narratives such as the primacy of home ownership over renting. In the past 50 years or so, many have come to view welfare, such as social housing, as a last resort, and have aimed to age in their family home or move into a “desirable” retirement village.

Variety is key

A more flexible approach could deliver housing for older Australians that is more varied in design, cost and investment models.

The promises made so far by political parties to help younger home buyers are welcome. However, the housing system is a complex beast and there is no single quick fix solution.

First and foremost, a national housing and homelessness plan is required, which also involves the states and territories. The plan must include explicit consideration of housing options for older people.

Funding for housing developments needs to be more flexible in terms of public-private sector investment and direct government assistance that goes beyond first home buyer incentives.

International models

For inspiration, we could look to Denmark, which has developed numerous co-housing communities.

Co-housing models generally involve self-managing communities where residents have their own private, self-contained home, supported by communal facilities and spaces. They can be developed and designed by the owner or by a social housing provider. They can be age-specific or multi-generational.

Rows of white and grey houses on a grassy rise next to a road
Australian policy makers could look to the success of social housing developments in Copenhagen, Denmark. ToniSo/Shutterstock

Funding flexibility, planning and design are key to their success. Institutional investors include

  • so-called impact investors, who seek social returns and often accept lower financial returns

  • community housing providers

  • member-based organisations, such as mutuals and co-operatives.

Government also plays a part by expediting the development process and providing new pathways to more affordable ownership and rental options.

Europe is also leading the way on social housing, where cultural attitudes are different from here.

In Vienna, Austria, more than 60% of residents live in 440,000 socially provided homes. These homes are available for a person’s entire life, with appropriate age-related modifications permitted if required.

At over 20% of the total housing stock, social housing is also a large sector in Denmark, where the state and municipalities support the construction of non-profit housing.

Overcoming stereotyes

Our population is ageing rapidly, and more older people are now renting or facing housing insecurity.

If policymakers continue to ignore their housing needs, even more older people will be at risk of living on the street, and as a result will suffer poor health and social isolation.

Overcoming stereotypes - such as the idea that all older people are wealthy homeowners - is key to building fairer, more inclusive solutions.

This isn’t just about older Australians. It’s about creating a housing system that works for everyone, at every stage of life.The Conversation

Victoria Cornell, Research Fellow, Flinders University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

The world’s first museum was curated by a princess. A tour reveals the origins of the zodiac, calculus and writing

Archeological excavations at the palace grounds in Ur, modern-day Iraq, uncovered Ennigaldi-Nanna’s museum. M. Lubinski/Flickr/Wikimedia CommonsCC BY
Louise PrykeUniversity of Sydney

Around 2,500 years ago, a princess living in what is now modern-day Iraq collected a number of artefacts, including a statue, a boundary stone and a mace head. The items, which show signs of preservation, date from around 2100 BCE to 600 BCE. This collection, it is generally thought, was the world’s first known “museum”.

Between Two Rivers, by Oxford scholar Moudhy Al-Rashid, tells the story of ancient Mesopotamia, a period in world history sometimes known as a “forgotten age”.

While Mesopotamian history is innately fascinating, Al-Rashid also notes its many historical “world firsts”: the first known writing system, the potter’s wheel, the first record of beer production and advances in agriculture.


Review: Between Two Rivers: Ancient Mesopotamia and the Birth of History – Moudhy Al-Rashid (Hodder Press)


The first museum

The world’s first known museum, and its curator, Ennigaldi-Nanna, are among these many firsts. The daughter of the Neo-Babylonian king Nabonidus, Ennigaldi-Nanna was a priestess at the temple of the moon deity, as well as a princess.

Both Ennigaldi-Nanna and Nabonidus were keenly interested in history. Indeed, Nabonidus’ interest in excavating old temples and describing his findings once saw him described as the “first archaeologist”. This makes these figures well suited as the book’s central focus.

At its heart, Between Two Rivers is an ode to the power of history. It builds a persuasive case for history writing as a particularly human impulse, and for how lives of people living thousands of years ago can reflect and shape our modern lives in unexpected ways.

10 museum objects

The book is organised around the ten items from Ennigaldi-Nanna’s collection. This structural conceit creates a sense of unity, despite the diversity of topics the book covers. Each chapter is focused on one item. For example, an ancient granite mace head introduces a chapter on warfare, violence and death.

Moudhy Al-Rashid. Hachette

In chapter one, we are introduced to ancient Mesopotamian history. We’re also introduced to the author herself. Al-Rashid punctuates her prose with personal recollections and humour, as well as touching reflections on her experience of motherhood. She is our companion, tour guide and teacher as we navigate this journey into the past, helping the reader feel a personal stake in the scholarly adventure ahead.

Other chapters explore cuneiform script (the world’s first known writing), cities, leadership, education (including some of the earliest doodles by bored students), early scientific developments and the gods. The final three chapters look at economics, warfare and curator Ennigaldi-Nanna herself.

The book offers a useful timeline, though pictures of the ten ancient items and a map would have been useful additions.

Fun historical facts

The broad range of subjects, periods and people explored in this book results in the inclusion of many dazzling features of Mesopotamian history, rarely considered together. Indeed, there is a plethora of fun historical facts.

In the chapter on science, Al-Rashid notes the development of the zodiac and a mathematical precursor to modern calculus.

Five stone tablets against a blue background
Five Amarna letters on display at the British Museum. Osama Shukir Muhammed Amin/Wikimedia CommonsCC BY

We get a brief overview of the fascinating diplomatic correspondence between New Kingdom Pharaohs and their West Asian vassals, known as the Amarna Letters. There is also the cuneiform tablet referencing the death of Alexander the Great, and an overview of the practice of divination (including an attempted palace coup).

These highlights from ancient evidence are balanced against frequent commentary from the author. She notes the less glamorous nature of much of it, such as economic texts and legal agreements.

Indeed, Al-Rashid is careful to note the limits of the evidence used to build this vivid picture of ancient Mesopotamia. She notes the difficulties of learning Sumerian, the world’s first known language, written in the intricate cuneiform script. In her chapter on leadership, she notes that further evidence for powerful women leaders may yet be discovered, while discussing what is currently known of these figures.

Sumerian, the world’s first known language, was written in cuneiform – like the script on this clay tablet. Louvre, photographed by Gary Todd/Flickr

The author’s transparency and expert handling of evidence puts the reader at ease, while subtly championing the importance of continued studies in this field. This is timely, as the academic field of Mesopotamian history has seen significant cuts in the last decade.

Rediscovering cultural riches

Despite the rich cultural legacy of this region, Mesopotamian history is largely unknown in the modern day. While 21st-century audiences are often familiar with the works of PlatoHomer and Virgil, they may struggle to identify Enheduanna – a princess, priestess, and poetess who lived over 4,000 years ago – as the world’s first known author, or Sin-leqe-uninni as the editor of the Epic of Gilgamesh.

This is likely due to the circumstances around the recovery of the Mesopotamian writing script, cuneiform. This style of writing faded from use around the 1st century CE, and was only re-deciphered in 1857 CE. This meant that for almost two millennia, awareness of the Mesopotamian cultural legacy almost entirely disappeared.

This modern lack of awareness of Mesopotamian history is slowly changing. Between Two Rivers is part of an emerging trend in the field of Assyriology — the study of the languages, literature, history, laws and sciences of Mesopotamia — for producing accessible works, for non-specialist audiences.

Between Two Rivers further demonstrates the usefulness of this approach in bringing the riches of the ancient Near East to modern audiences.

Changing times

In recent years, we have seen new translations of the famous Mesopotamian epic Gilgamesh, and the first volume dedicated to the works of the world’s first known author, Enheduanna.

There are new books on Mesopotamian religion and the cuneiform script by Irving Finkel, who has been an ambassador for the discipline for many years. Indeed, Al-Rashid notes his influence.

To write a book like this one, the author needs to have both mastery over the subject material and an engaging style of communication. Al-Rashid excels in both areas. For general audiences, Between Two Rivers is a fascinating, balanced introduction to this complex – and at times elusive – ancient world.The Conversation

Louise Pryke, Honorary Research Associate, Department of Classics and Ancient History, University of Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Avalon Beach SLSC turns 100 in 2025!

2025 marks 100 years of Avalon Beach Surf Lifesaving Club.

Planning is underway to celebrate the achievement of Avalon Beach SLSC's Volunteer Surf Lifesavers keeping Avalon Beach safe for residents and visitors for 100 years!

A number of celebratory events and activities spread throughout the Club's 100th year, are currently under development, and will be progressively announced through the year. 

The range of celebrations will involve past and present members, the Avalon Beach community, as well as visitors to our area.  The Surf Club is a focal point in and for the Avalon Beach community, so it is fitting that the community takes pride in this milestone.

Initially, so that our records are up to date, we invite all past members of our Club to Email the Club at 100years@avalonbeachslsc.com.au  with your updated details so we can keep you informed of what will be happening for members.

If you know of others that may be interested in the 100th Anniversary celebrations please pass the message on. 

The Club looks to the future, acknowledging and building on the legacy left from those who came before us over the past 100 years.

Avalon Beach SLSC Centenary Committee

NSW Ambulance celebrates 130 years

The world-class care provided by NSW Ambulance is today (April 29 225) being recognised, as the service celebrates its 130th anniversary.

The ceremony held at the NSW Ambulance State Operations Centre in Sydney Olympic Park, included a rescue demonstration by the Special Operations Unit paramedics, a display of vintage ambulances and the launch of a permanent timeline exhibition that showcases key moments in NSW Ambulance history.

Temora Ambulance Museum provided the vehicles and other historic artefacts for the milestone event that was hosted by the Chief Executive of NSW Ambulance, Dr Dominic Morgan and attended by more than 100 staff as well as NSW Ambulance Legacy members.

Originally known as the Civil Ambulance and Transport Brigade, the first recognised ambulance service in NSW commenced operations in April 1895.

The first ambulance station was located in a borrowed police station in Railway Square, Sydney and two permanent officers transported patients on hand-held stretchers and handlitters – wooden structures that resembled large wheelbarrows.

In 1899, the Brigade upgraded their mode of transportation to a horse-drawn ambulance, shortly followed by a bicycle ambulance. The first motor vehicle ambulance was donated to the Brigade by the public in 1912.

Presentation of a new Ambulance Waggon by Mr. and Mrs. Archibald Forsyth to the city of Sydney for use by the Civil Ambulance Brigade.
The presentation took place at the main entrance to the Sydney Town Hall on November 8, among those present being the Lord Mayor, Mr. Justice Cohen, Professor Anderson Stuart Mr. A. Forsyth, Mr. R. Anderson, Dr. Mullins, and a number of prominent medical men and others. Mr. Forsyth, the donor of the waggon, In a few appropriate remarks, conveyed the ownership to the Mayor, and requested his Lordship to present it to the association, which the Lord Mayor did in a suitable speech. FRUITGROWING IN THE CUMBERLAND DISTRICT. (1907, November 13). Australian Town and Country Journal (Sydney, NSW : 1870 - 1907), p. 25. Retrieved from http://nla.gov.au/nla.news-article71598676 


CIVIL AMBULANCE AND TRANSPORT CORPS.

SEND FOR THE AMBULANCE!  1. Officer  with his kit bag arriving on the scene of a street accident; All the permanent start are specially, skilled in rendering first aid to the injured. 2. There are three horse ambulances available at any hour of the day or night, in case of a number of people being inured in the city.  3. This picture shows a horse which has become specially trained to the work. As soon as the stable door is opened it walks out and stands ready in position for the collar to fall  into place on its shoulders.  The Civil Ambulance Corps have the same apparatus for harnessing as the Fire brigades, and this enables them to turn-out a fully-equipped horse ambulance within 25 seconds of the call being, received.

For many years the Civil Ambulance and Transport Corps has been doing splendid work. The corps receives no Government subsidy, and is dependent almost entirely on public subscriptions and donations. Last year the corps attended 4382  cases and travelled an aggregate of 15 348 miles. If the work increases at its present rate it will be necessary before long to further increase the staff. 

A fully-equipped horse ambulance station is required within the next' year to deal with accidents and other, cases which occur In the vicinity of Circular Quay. This in itself would mean a capital outlay of some £300 and an increased annual expense of £200. The present staff consists of 12 ambulance officers who are specially trained in rendering first aid. They understand how to handle injured persons, and are also skilled in setting fractured limbs or arresting haemorrhage. Where the patients are conveyed to private hospitals, a charge is made for the services of the ambulance but when the sick or Injured person is conveyed to a public hospital or is not in a position to pay, no charge whatever  is made. In this way the Civil Ambulance Corps has done a great deal of good work in an unostentatious manner. CIVIL AMBULANCE AND TRANSPORT CORPS. (1909, August 27). The Daily Telegraph (Sydney, NSW : 1883 - 1930), p. 9. Retrieved from http://nla.gov.au/nla.news-article238337962

Today, NSW Ambulance receives more than 1.2 million Triple Zero (000) calls each year and has more than 7,500 staff, including paramedics, control centre staff, corporate and support staff, doctors, nurses as well as clinical volunteers and chaplains.

With more than 1,800 vehicles in the NSW Ambulance fleet, staff travel approximately 55 million kilometres by road in a year. The service also has specialised snow vehicles, 12 helicopters and 6 fixed wing aircraft to access patients in remote areas.

In the past 12 months, NSW Ambulance has added 8 Hazardous Area Rescue Ambulances (HARAs) and 8 Inflatable Rescue Boats (IRBs) to significantly boost response capabilities during floods and natural disasters.

For more information on the history of NSW Ambulance visit: www.ambulance.nsw.gov.au/about-us/history

Premier Chris Minns said:

“Paramedics are amongst our most trusted professions, helping people when they are at their worst and providing care for people in extraordinarily difficult situations.

“I am delighted to mark this incredible milestone and want to say a sincere thank you to all NSW Ambulance staff for their bravery and care for people of NSW.”

Minister for Health Ryan Park said:

“It’s a pleasure to join NSW Ambulance staff today to celebrate how far the service has come since its humble beginning in 1895.

“Celebrating this milestone anniversary is an opportunity to look back and acknowledge the important history that has brought us to where we are today and celebrate the remarkable progress of NSW Ambulance.

“When people call Triple Zero (000) for an ambulance, they are often scared and experiencing the worst day of their lives and I’d like to thank NSW Ambulance staff for the exceptional care they provide patients and their families in their time of need.”

NSW Ambulance Chief Executive Dr Dominic Morgan said:

“We are all incredibly proud of the service that NSW Ambulance has become, including the advancements in emergency medical interventions that ensure our staff can provide the best possible care to patients.

“Our staff are dedicated, highly trained clinicians who are committed to continuing the traditions of excellence in out of-hospital care.”


2025 photos: NSW Ambulance

Construction begins on new West Ryde Multi-Sports Facility

April 25, 2025
The rapidly growing Ryde area is set to benefit from a huge new local multi-sports facility being delivered by the Minns  Government, with construction now underway on the site.

The facility is being built on the former site of Marsden High School following the relocation of the school to the Meadowbank Education Precinct in 2022.


Once complete the new facility will provide a range of community and sporting spaces with a focus on netball, one of NSW’s highest participation sports, while also catering for growing sports such as basketball, futsal and badminton.

It will deliver a new 5,000 square metre indoor facility including 4 multipurpose courts and other indoor spaces, as well as outdoor facilities including 29 netball courts with amenities, communal space with open lawns, picnic tables and seating, and new car and bicycle parking spaces.

These new courts will replace existing rundown netball courts located on top of an old rubbish tip at Meadowbank Park.

As the NSW Government delivers more housing for young people and families, this project will also ensure that the community has access to world class sporting facilities and recreational spaces on their doorstep.

This multi-sports facility, was initially promised by the former Liberal National government in 2018 but they failed to even begin construction on the project. The facility will be delivered by the Minns Labor Government in 2026.

This project is part of the Minns Labor Government’s commitment to building a better NSW by providing the essential infrastructure growing communities deserve.

Premier of New South Wales Chris Minns said:

"This huge new facility that we’re delivering will create much needed sports and recreational space for this rapidly growing community.

“With over 30 new outdoor and indoor courts to open space, picnic areas and parking, this will be a great community space that people can come and enjoy whether they play sport or not.

“For years, this block was left to sit vacant. Now we’re turning it into a world class sporting facility that everyone will be able to use.”

Deputy Premier and Minister for Education and Early Learning Prue Car said:

“We are pleased to have begun construction on this new multi-sports facility, which will benefit local students and the broader community alike after years of delays under the Liberals.

“The Minns Labor Government is committed to ensuring growing communities across NSW are equipped with the infrastructure they need – whether that’s new or upgraded schools, or high quality sporting facilities for the whole community.

“Labor is committed to ensuring public assets continue to benefit the public, which is why we are redeveloping this former school site into a much-needed community sport facility.”

Minister for Sport Steve Kamper said:

"We are focused on building better communities and that means ensuring everyone has access to grassroots sporting infrastructure.

“We look forward to this space becoming a vibrant community sporting hub for the entire community to enjoy.”

Member for Bennelong Jerome Laxale said:

“With the state government committed to a new school at Melrose Park, this investment in sporting facilities for our region is crucial.

“Netball has long suffered in Ryde at substandard facilities in Meadowbank. This huge boost will support all players of all ages and provide much needed indoor sports facilities locally.”

Councillor for City of Ryde Lyndal Howison said:

“I’m delighted that this regional sports facility will be located in Ryde. The Minns government is delivering a bright, community future for the former site of Marsden High School.

“Our community has waited long enough to see it come back to life and I thank local residents and ERNA for engaging so constructively in this long process. I want to reassure residents that I will keep listening to them as we watch this site take on an important new role.”

Eastwood Ryde Netball Association (ERNA) President, Karen Waud said:

“Eastwood Ryde Netball Association are very excited about the commencing of the construction phase of our netball journey at our new facility.

“With 4 indoor courts, 29 outdoor courts, and café facilities, it will offer a fantastic experience for players and fans alike. This will be wonderful for our sports loving community in the City of Ryde.

“City of Ryde is growing, and so is the demand for quality sporting facilities.

“This is a big milestone for Eastwood Ryde Netball Association and all our members.”


Artists impressions drawings of new works: NSW Government

A ketamine nasal spray will be subsidised for treatment-resistant depression. Here’s what you need to know about Spravato

WPixz/Shutterstock
Nial WheateMacquarie University and Shoohb AlassadiUniversity of Sydney

An antidepressant containing a form of the drug ketamine has been added to the Pharmaceutical Benefits Scheme (PBS), making it much cheaper for the estimated 30,000 Australians with treatment-resistant depression. This is when a patient has tried multiple forms of treatment for major depression – usually at least two antidepressant medications – without any improvement.

From May 1, a dose of Spravato (also known as esketamine hydrochloride) will cost $A31.60 and $7.70 for concession card holders.

However, unlike oral antidepressants, Spravato can’t be taken at home. Here’s how it works, and who it’s expected to help.

What is Spravato?

The chemical ketamine is used as an anaesthetic. In this formulation it combines both the right-handed (designated “R”) and left-handed (called “S”) forms of the molecule.

This means they are mirror images of each other, similar to how your left hand is a mirror image of your right hand. The left- and right-hand forms can have different effects in the body.

Spravato contains only the left-handed version, giving the drug its generic name esketamine.

Spravato works by increasing the levels of glutamate in the brain. Glutamate is a key chemical messenger molecule that excites brain nerve cells, lifting and improving mood. It also plays a role in learning and forming memories.

How is it taken?

Spravato cannot be taken at home.

A patient can self-administer, but it must be done at a registered treatment facility, such as a hospital, under the supervision of medical staff so they can look out for blood pressure changes and monitor potential side effects.

The drug is provided as a single-use nasal spray. This application means it’s absorbed directly through the nasal lining into the brain, so it starts to work within minutes.

Spravato must also be taken alongside an oral antidepressant. This will be a new one the patient hasn’t tried before. In clinical trials, it was usually an SNRI or SSRI medication.

When a patient first starts on Spravato, they are given the spray twice a week in the first month. It is then administered once a week for the second month, and then weekly or fortnightly after that.

Once there are signs the medicine is working, treatment is continued for at least six months.

Woman looks in the mirror while spraying her nose
You can use the spray yourself but it must be under medical supervision in a registered facility. Scarc/Shutterstock

How effective is it?

Spravato was approved for sale in Australia based on clinical trial data from more than 1,600 patients who were administered the drug for a period of four weeks. Each was given either Spravato, or a nasal placebo, and an oral antidepressant.

Patients were given a starting dose of either 28 or 56mg, which could be then increased up to 84mg by their doctor.

By the end of the four weeks, a greater percentage of patients who were given Spravato were found to have had a meaningful response to the treatment when compared with patients who received the placebo. Patients who were taking Spravato were also found to relapse at a lower rate. For those who did relapse, it took the Spravato patients longer to relapse when compared with patients who took the placebo.

It is expected Spravato will benefit a wide range of patients. The clinical trials demonstrated effectiveness for men and women, people aged 18 to 64, and those from a range of different ethnic backgrounds.

Potential side effects

As with any medicine, Spravato may cause side effects, some of which can be serious. The most common include:

  • dissociation (feeling disconnected from yourself or what is around you)
  • dizziness
  • nausea and vomiting
  • drowsiness
  • headache
  • change in taste
  • vertigo.

Because Spravato can potentially increase blood pressure, medical staff will monitor a patient before and after it is administered.

Usually, blood pressure spikes around 40 minutes after taking the drug, so a reading is taken around this time. After taking Spravato, if their blood pressure has stayed low, or it’s dropping, the patient is given the all-clear to go home.

Due to the potential for this and other serious side effects, Spravato carries a black triangle warning. This means medical staff are encouraged to report any problem or side effect to the Therapeutic Goods Administration. A black triangle warning is generally used for new medicines or medicines that are being used in a new way.

Who will be eligible?

To be eligible for a prescription, a patient will need to have been diagnosed with treatment-resistant depression. In practice, this means they will have unsuccessfully tried at least two other antidepressant drugs first.

Australia’s Therapeutic Goods Administration approved Spravato for use in Australia in 2021, meaning it was available but not subsidised. Since then, the sponsoring company, Janssen-Cilag (an Australian subsidiary of the multinational Johnson & Johnson), applied to have it added to the PBS four times.

In December 2024, the Pharmaceutical Benefits Advisory Committee recommended a PBS listing.

The new PBS listing, capping the price of a single treatment at $31.60, is a significant price drop. In 2023, single doses of branded Spravato were reported to cost anywhere between $500 and $900.

However, patients may still have to pay hundreds of dollars for appointments at private clinics where Spravato can be administered. Public places are available but limited.

Spravato may be suitable for you if you’ve tried different antidepressants without success. If it is suitable for you, then your doctor can discuss the next steps.

If this article has raised issues for you, or if you’re concerned about someone you know, call Lifeline on 13 11 14.The Conversation

Nial Wheate, Professor, School of Natural Sciences, Macquarie University and Shoohb Alassadi, Associate Lecturer and Registered Pharmacist, University of Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

‘No compassion… just blame’: how weight stigma in maternity care harms larger-bodied women and their babies

Kate Cashin Photography
Briony HillMonash University and Haimanot HailuMonash University

According to a study from the United States, women experience weight stigma in maternity care at almost every visit. We expect this experience to be similar in Australia, where more than 50% of women of reproductive age live in larger bodies.

Weight stigma can present as stereotyping, negative attitudes and discriminatory actions towards larger-bodied people.

It occurs in other areas of health care and in society at large. But our research is focused on weight stigma in maternity care, which can cause significant harm for larger-bodied women and their babies.

What does weight stigma look like in maternity care?

Sometimes weight stigma is explicit, or on purpose. Explicit weight stigma includes health-care professionals having negative attitudes towards caring for larger-bodied pregnant women. This might present, for instance, when health professionals make negative comments about weight or accuse women of dishonesty when they discuss their dietary intake.

Sometimes weight stigma is implicit, or unintentional. Implicit weight stigma includes maternity care providers avoiding physical touch or eye contact during consultations with larger-bodied women.

Policies, guidelines and environments also contribute to weight stigma. Women in larger bodies frequently report feeling stigmatised and unable to access the type of maternity care they would prefer. Lack of availability of adequately fitting hospital clothing or delivery beds are other notable examples.

In a review published last year, we looked at weight stigma from preconception to after birth. Our results showed larger-bodied women are sometimes automatically treated as high-risk and undergo extra monitoring of their pregnancy even when they have no other risk factors that require monitoring.

This approach is problematic because it focuses on body size rather than health, placing responsibility on the woman and disregarding other complex determinants of health.

Weight stigma is common in maternity care.

How does this make women feel?

Qualitative evidence shows women who experience weight stigma during their maternity care feel judged, devalued, shamed and less worthy. They may feel guilty about getting pregnant and experience self-doubt.

As one research participant explained:

One doctor told me I was terrible for getting pregnant at my weight, that I was setting up my baby to fail […] I was in tears, and he told me I was being too sensitive.

2023 Australian paper written by women who had experienced weight stigma in maternity care recounted their care as hyper-focused on weight and dehumanising, robbing them of the joy of pregnancy.

According to one woman, “there was no compassion or conversation, just blame”.

Beyond making women feel humiliated and disrespected, weight stigma in maternity care can affect mental health. For example, weight stigma is linked to increased risk of depressive symptoms and stress, disordered eating behaviours and emotional eating.

One of the key reasons why weight stigma is so damaging to pregnant women’s health is because it’s closely linked to body image concerns.

Society unfairly holds larger-bodied women up to unrealistic ideals around their body shape and size, their suitability to be a mother, and the control they have over their weight gain.

Self stigma occurs when women apply society’s stigmatising narrative – from people in the community, the media, peers, family members and health-care providers – to themselves.

A woman sitting on her bed, with her hand over her mouth, looking at a pregnancy test.
Larger-bodied pregnant women can face stigma from health-care professionals and society at large. antoniodiaz/Shutterstock

Impacts on mum and baby

Several adverse pregnancy and birth outcomes have been linked to weight stigma in maternity care. These include gestational diabetescaesarean birth and lower uptake of breastfeeding.

While we know these things can also be linked to higher body weight, emerging evidence shows weight stigma may have a stronger link with some outcomes than body mass index.

There are a variety of possible reasons for these links. For example, weight stigma may result in delayed access to and engagement with health-care services, and, as shown above, poorer mental health and reduced confidence. This may mean a woman is less likely to initiate and seek help with breastfeeding, for example.

Experiencing weight stigma also leads to a stress response in the body, which could affect a woman’s health during pregnancy.

In turn, the adverse effects of weight stigma can also affect the baby’s health. For example, gestational diabetes has a range of potential negative outcomes including a higher likelihood of premature birth, difficulties during birth, and an increased risk of the child developing type 2 diabetes.

But the burden and blame should not fall on women. Pregnant and postpartum women should not have to accept experiences of weight stigma in health care.

A pregnant woman standing on scales.
Weight stigma in maternity care has been linked to a higher likelihood of caesarean birth. photosoria/Shutterstock

What can we do about it?

While it’s essential to address weight stigma as a societal issue, health services can play a key role in undoing the narrative of blame and shame and making maternity care more equitable for larger-bodied women.

Addressing weight stigma in maternity care can start with teaching midwives and obstetricians about weight stigma – what it is, where it happens, and how it can be minimised in practice.

We worked with women who had experienced weight stigma in maternity care and midwives to co-design resources to meet this need. Both women and midwives wanted resources that could be easily integrated into practice, acted as consistent reminders to be size-friendly, and met midwives’ knowledge gaps.

The resources included a short podcast about weight stigma in maternity care and images of healthy, larger-bodied pregnant women to demonstrate the most likely outcome is a healthy pregnancy. Midwives evaluated the resources positively and they are ready to be implemented into practice.

There is a long road to ending weight stigma in maternity care, but working towards this goal will benefit countless mothers and their babies.The Conversation

Briony Hill, Deputy Head, Health and Social Care Unit and Senior Research Fellow, Monash University and Haimanot Hailu, PhD Candidate, Health and Social Care Unit, Monash University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Echidna ancestors lived watery lifestyles like platypuses 100 million years ago – new study

Mary_May/Shutterstock
Sue HandUNSW SydneyCamilo López-AguirreUniversity of TorontoLaura A. B. WilsonAustralian National University, and Robin BeckUniversity of Salford

As the world’s only surviving egg-laying mammals, Australasia’s platypus and four echidna species are among the most extraordinary animals on Earth.

They are also very different from each other.

The platypus is well adapted for a semi-aquatic lifestyle, spending up to 20 hours a day swimming in Australian waterways to forage for freshwater invertebrates. Echidnas, on the other hand, live entirely on land. They are widely distributed across Australia and New Guinea, and adapted for feeding on termites, ants and earthworms.

How did these differences emerge? Some researchers think echidnas evolved from a swimming, platypus-like ancestor. This hypothesis is based on evidence from aspects of their genes and anatomy, and from hypotheses about their evolutionary history.

However, this idea is controversial because fossil evidence for such a profound evolutionary transformation has been lacking – until now.

A spiky echidna on leaf litter under a big tree.
Did the ancestors of echidnas spend time in the water? It’s a controversial idea. Natalia Golovina/Shutterstock

A bone from 108 million years ago

In our study published today in PNAS, we gleaned new data from a 108-million-year-old mammal humerus (arm bone), found 30 years ago at Dinosaur Cove, Victoria, by a team from Museums Victoria.

This arm bone, from a species called Kryoryctes cadburyi, belongs to an ancestral monotreme – a semi-aquatic burrower like the platypus. Our findings support the hypothesis that land-living echidnas evolved from a swimming ancestor.

Kryoryctes lived during the Age of Dinosaurs (the Mesozoic), when monotremes and monotreme relatives were more common than they are today. Glimpses of this past diversity are found in the fossil record in southern Victoria and Lightning Ridge, New South Wales.

Nevertheless, Australian Mesozoic mammal fossils are exceedingly rare, and mostly consist of teeth and jaws. Kryoryctes is the only one known from a limb bone, which provides significant information about its identity, relationships and lifestyle.

Artwork depicting a platypus like creture and the foot of a dinosaur above it on the shore of the river.
Reconstruction of Kryoryctes cadburyi and a small dinosaur (above) at Dinosaur Cove, Victoria, Australia ~108 million years ago. Peter Schouten

Tiny clues inside bones

In order to test the evolutionary relationships of Kryoryctes, we added it to a broader data set of 70 fossil and modern mammals. From there, we calculated an evolutionary tree. This showed Kryoryctes is an ancestral monotreme.

We also compared the external shape of the Kryroryctes humerus bone to living monotremes. These analyses indicated the bone is more like those of echidnas, rather than platypuses.

But it was a different story on the inside. When we looked at the internal structure of the Kryoryctes humerus with several 3D scanning techniques, we uncovered microscopic features of this arm bone that were actually more like those of the platypus.

Such tiny features inside bones yield crucial clues about the lifestyle of an animal. Numerous previous studies link bone microstructure in mammals and other tetrapods (four-limbed animals) with their ecology.

Using the wealth of data available for living mammals, we compared characteristics of the Kryoryctes humerus microstructure to those in platypuses, echidnas and 74 other mammal species.

These analyses confirmed that the Kryoryctes humerus has internal bone features found in semi-aquatic burrowing mammals (such as the platypus, muskrat and Eurasian otter), rather than land-living burrowing mammals such as the echidna.

Close-up of a textured bone with a flared base.
The Kryoryctes humerus we studied. Museums Victoria

From water to land

This discovery suggests that a semi-aquatic lifestyle is ancestral for all living monotremes. It also suggests the amphibious lifestyle of the modern platypus had its origins at least 100 million years ago, during the Age of Dinosaurs.

In this scenario, the modern platypus lineage has retained the ancestral semi-aquatic burrowing lifestyle for more than 100 million years. Echidnas would have reverted to a land-based way of life more recently.

For echidnas, a return to land appears to have resulted in adaptations such as their long bones becoming lighter, as shown in our study.

They possibly also lost several other features more useful for spending time in the water rather than on land, including the loss of a long tail, reduction of webbing between fingers and toes, reduction of the duck-like bill to a narrow beak, and a reduced number of electroreceptors on that beak.

However, precisely when this evolutionary transformation occurred is not yet known. The answer must wait until early echidna fossils are found – so far, nothing definitive has turned up anywhere.

The modern habitats of monotremes are increasingly under threat from environmental degradation, interactions with humans and feral predators, and climate change. This is especially true for platypuses. To ensure the survival of this ancient lineage, we need to better understand how their unique features evolved and adapted.The Conversation

Sue Hand, Professor Emeritus, Palaeontology, UNSW SydneyCamilo López-Aguirre, Adjunct Professor, Department of Anthropology, University of TorontoLaura A. B. Wilson, ARC Future Fellow, Head of Biological Anthropology, Australian National University, and Robin Beck, Lecturer in Biology, University of Salford

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Peter Dutton calling the ABC and the Guardian ‘hate media’ rings alarm bells for democracy

Denis MullerThe University of Melbourne

In front of a crowd of party faithful last weekend, Opposition Leader Peter Dutton referred to the ABC, Guardian Australia and other news platforms as “hate media”. The language was extreme, the inference being these outlets were not simply doing their jobs, but attacking him and his side of politics because of ideological bias.

Speaking at a Liberal Party campaign rally in the Melbourne western suburb of Melton, Dutton said:

Forget about what you have been told by the ABC, The Guardian and the other hate media. Listen to what you hear [at] doors. Listen to what people say on the pre-polling. Know in your hearts that we are a better future for our country.

Melton is in the Labor-held seat of Hawke, which the Liberals believe they can win.

Dutton provided no evidence to support his accusation, for the good reason that there has been nothing in the ABC’s or Guardian Australia’s coverage of Dutton that could remotely justify it.

By a process of elimination, the “other hate media” to which he referred can only be The Age and The Sydney Morning Herald, given the News Corporation mastheads have been unflagging in their support for him throughout the campaign.

What has been common to the campaign coverage by the ABC, Guardian Australia, The Age and the SMH has been close scrutiny of both sides and both leaders.

The three newspapers in particular have put renewed resources into independently fact-checking claims made by both Dutton and Prime Minister Anthony Albanese, and have caught out both men telling falsehoods.

The broadcast news media on the whole have played it straight, except of course for Sky News after dark, which has been as relentlessly pro-Coalition as their News Corp newspaper stablemates.

Beyond these professional mass media platforms, there have been clearly partisan social media influencers working on both sides, as well as a range of podcasters, but none of these has been guilty of hate speech towards Dutton or anyone else.

The inescapable conclusion is that Dutton equates scrutiny of him by journalists with hate speech.

This is where his attitude becomes dangerous to democracy. It comes straight from US President Donald Trump’s playbook, where the professional mass media are “fake news” and the “enemy of the people”.

It is designed to play not just on people’s longstanding distrust of the news media in general – though not of the ABC – but on some voters’ sense of grievance at the way governments have treated them.

This worked for Trump in the United States, but it became obvious early in the campaign that any association with Trumpism was a strong political negative in Australia, particularly in the atmosphere of alarm generated by his tariff war.

Dutton then took pains to distance himself from Trumpism, and at the Liberal launch in Western Australia his face was a picture of alarm when Jacinta Nampijinpa Price, whom he had appointed to the Trumpian-sounding post of shadow minister for government efficiency, used the slogan “Make Australia Great Again”.

But it is typical of his incoherent campaign that at the start of the last week he should be echoing the Trumpian view of the media in such extreme terms, creating even more instability. In an ABC interview, his shadow minister for finance, Jane Hume, refused to support him, saying “that wouldn’t be a phrase I would use”.

It also raises legitimate questions about how Dutton would treat the media should he become prime minister. For example, if a media platform refused to obey his wishes, or provide him with coverage of which he approved, would its representatives be excluded from prime ministerial access?

Not long ago, such a proposition would have been inconceivable, but Trump banned the Associated Press (AP) from presidential access because it would not obey his instruction to rename the Gulf of Mexico the Gulf of America. A federal judge later found the ban violated the First Amendment, and ordered AP’s access to be restored.

It is very improbable Dutton would even try to impose his will on the commercial media in Australia, especially the newspapers.

In fact, Guardian Australia has turned his remark into a fundraising opportunity. It emailed subscribers with the subject line “A note from the ‘hate media’,” comparing Dutton’s language to that of Trump, and asking for financial support to keep holding figures like Dutton to account.

But his potential to punish the publicly funded ABC is another matter.

From statements he has made during the campaign, it seems certain the ABC would be in for more funding cuts and an investigation into its operations of the kind Trump has launched into America’s National Public Radio.

Coalition prime ministers going back to John Howard have had a hostile relationship with the ABC. Howard stacked the ABC board, and the panel that nominates its members, with ideological mates.

In the eight years from 2014 to 2022, under the Coalition governments of Tony Abbott, Malcolm Turnbull and Scott Morrison, $526 million was cut from the ABC’s budget.

During that time, there was also a series of inquiries into the ABC, set up to satisfy politicians with a beef against the ABC, notably Pauline Hanson.

The day after Dutton’s “hate media” statement, the ABC’s 4 Corners program revealed he failed for two years to disclose he was the beneficiary of a family trust that operated lucrative childcare businesses when he was a cabinet minister.

This is unlikely to improve his view of the national broadcaster. He may even see it as more hate. In fact, it is just good journalism.

Denis Muller and Nicole Chvastek will discuss this further on their Truth, Lies and Media podcast on Wednesday April 30.The Conversation

Denis Muller, Senior Research Fellow, Centre for Advancing Journalism, The University of Melbourne

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Why are political parties allowed to send spam texts? And how can we make them stop?

Ti Wi / Unsplash
Tegan CohenQueensland University of Technology

Another election, another wave of unsolicited political texts. Over this campaign, our digital mailboxes have been stuffed with a slew of political appeals and promises, many from the new party Trumpet of Patriots (backed by Clive Palmer, a veteran of the mass text campaign).

The practice isn’t new, and it’s totally legal under current laws. It’s also non-partisan. Campaigns of all stripes have partaken. Behold, the Liberal Party’s last-minute SMS to voters about asylum seekers before the 2022 federal election, or Labor’s controversial “Mediscare” text before the 2016 poll. Despite multiple cycles of criticism, these tactics remain a persistent feature of Australian election campaigns.

A recent proposal to update decades-old rules could help change things – if a government would put it into practice.

What does the law say about political spam?

Several laws regulate spam and data collection in Australia.

First, there is the Spam Act. This legislation requires that organisations obtain our consent before sending us marketing emails, SMSs and instant messages. The unsubscribe links you see at the bottom of spam emails? Those are mandated by the Spam Act.

Second, the Do Not Call Register (DNCR) Act. This Act establishes a “do not call” register, managed by the Australian Communications and Media Authority (ACMA), which individuals can join to opt out of telemarketing calls.

Finally, there is the Privacy Act, which governs how organisations collect, use and disclose our personal information. Among other things, the Privacy Act requires that organisations tell us when and why they are collecting our personal information, and the purposes for which they intend to use it. It restricts organisations from re-purposing personal information collected for a particular purpose, unless an exception applies.

This trio of laws was designed to offer relief from unsolicited, unwanted direct marketing. It does not, however, stop the deluge of political spam at election time due to broad political exemptions sewn into the legislation decades ago.

The Spam Act and DNCR Act apply to marketing for goods and services but not election policies and promises, while the Privacy Act contains a carve-out for political parties, representatives and their contractors.

The upshot is that their campaigns are free to spam and target voters at will. Their only obligation is to disclose who authorised the message.

How do political campaigns get our information?

Secrecy about the nature and extent of campaign data operations, enabled by the exemptions, makes it difficult to pinpoint precisely where a campaign might have obtained your data from.

There are, however, a number of ways political campaigns can acquire our information.

One source is the electoral roll (though not for phone numbers, as the Australian Electoral Commission often points out). Incumbent candidates might build on this with information they obtain through contact with constituents which, thanks to the exemptions, they’re allowed to re-purpose for campaigning at election time.

Another source is data brokers – firms which harvest, analyse and sell large quantities of data and profiles.

We know the major parties have long maintained voter databases to support their targeting efforts, which have become increasingly sophisticated over the years.

Other outfits might take more haphazard approaches – former MP Craig Kelly, for example, claimed to use software to randomly generate numbers for his texting campaign in 2021.

What can be done?

Unwanted campaign texts are not only irritating to some. They can be misleading.

This year, there have been reports of “push polling” texts (pseudo surveys meant to persuade rather than gauge voter options) in the marginal seat of Kooyong. The AEC has warned about misleading postal vote applications being issued by parties via SMS.

Screenshot of a text message from Trumpet of Patriots.
This election campaign has seen a flood of texts from Trumpet of Patriots, among others. The ConversationCC BY-SA

Generative AI is hastening the ability to produce misleading content, cheaply and at scale, which can be quickly pushed out across an array of online social and instant messaging services.

In short, annoying texts are just one visible symptom of a wider vulnerability created by the political exemptions.

The basic argument for the political exemptions is to facilitate freedom of political communication, which is protected by the Constitution. As the High Court has said, that freedom is necessary to support informed electoral choice. It does not, however, guarantee speakers a captive audience.

In 2022, the Attorney-General’s Department proposed narrowing the political exemptions, as part of a suite of updates to the Privacy Act. Per the proposal, parties and representatives would need to be more transparent about their data operations, provide voters with an option to unsubscribe from targeted ads, refrain from targeting voters based on “sensitive information”, and handle data in a “fair and reasonable” manner.

The changes would be an overdue but welcome step, recognising the essential role of voter privacy in a functioning democratic system.

Unfortunately, the government has not committed to taking up the proposal.

A bipartisan lack of support is likely the biggest obstacle, even as the gap created by the political exemptions widens, and its rationale becomes flimsier, with each election cycle.The Conversation

Tegan Cohen, Postdoctoral Research Fellow, Digital Media Research Centre, Queensland University of Technology

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

What political ads are Australians seeing online? Astroturfing, fake grassroots groups, and outright falsehoods

Daniel AngusQueensland University of TechnologyChristine ParkerThe University of MelbourneGiselle NewtonThe University of QueenslandKate ClarkMonash University, and Mark AndrejevicMonash University

In the lead-up to the 2025 Australian federal election, political advertising is seemingly everywhere.

We’ve been mapping the often invisible world of digital political advertising across Facebook, Instagram and TikTok.

We’ve done this thanks to a panel of ordinary Australians who agreed to download an ad tracking app developed through the Australian Internet Observatory.

We’re also tracking larger trends in political ad spending, message type and tone, and reach via the PoliDashboard tool. This open source tool aggregates transparency data from Meta (including Facebook and Instagram) which we use to identify patterns and items of concern.

While the major parties are spending heavily and are highly visible in the feeds of our participants, it is the prevalence of third-party political advertising that is most striking. We’ve observed a notable trend: for every ad from a registered political party, there is roughly one ad from a third-party entity.

Astroturfing and the illusion of grassroots support

One of the most concerning trends we’re seeing is a rise in astroturfing. This refers to masking the sponsors of a message to make it appear as though it originates from ordinary citizens or grassroots organisations.

Astroturfing ads do often adhere to the formal disclosure requirements set out by the Australian Electoral Commission. However, these disclosures don’t meaningfully inform the public on who is behind these misleading ads.

Authorisation typically only includes the name and address of an intermediary. This may be a deliberately opaque shell entity set up just in time for an election.

A key example seen by participants in our study involves the pro-gas advocacy group Australians for Natural Gas.

It presents itself as a grassroots movement, but an ABC investigation revealed this group is working with Freshwater Strategy – the Coalition’s internal pollster. Emails obtained by the ABC show Freshwater Strategy is “helping orchestrate a campaign to boost public support for the gas industry ahead of the federal election”.

Other examples we’ve encountered in our monitoring include groups with benign-sounding names like Mums for Nuclear and Australians for Prosperity. These labels and the ads they are running suggest grassroots concern, but they obscure the deeper agendas behind them.

In the case of Australians for Prosperity, an ABC analysis revealed backing from wealthy donors, former conservative MPs and coal interests.

The battle over energy

Nowhere is this more evident than in messaging around energy policy, especially nuclear power and gas.

In recent months, both major parties and a swathe of third-party advertisers have run targeted online campaigns focused on the costs and benefits of different energy futures. These ads play to deeply felt concerns about cost of living, action on climate change, and national sovereignty.

Yet many of these messages, particularly those that promote gas and nuclear, come from organisations with opaque funding and undeclared political affiliations or connections. Voters may see a slick Facebook ad or a sponsored TikTok explainer without any idea who paid for it, or why.

And with no obligation to be truthful, much of this content may be deeply misleading. It muddies public understanding at a critical moment for climate action.

Truth not required

Truth in political advertising isn’t legally required in all of Australia. While businesses can’t mislead consumers under consumer law, political parties and third-party campaigners are exempt from those same standards.

This means misleading or outright false claims – about opponents, policies or the state of the economy – can be repeated and amplified without consequence, provided they’re framed as political opinion.

Despite calls for reform from politiciansexperts and civil society groups, federal legislation continues to lag behind community expectations.

South Australia and the Australian Capital Territory do have truth in political advertising laws, but there is still no national standard.

In the digital advertising environment, where ads are fast, fleeting, and often tailored to individuals, the absence of such independent scrutiny allows misinformation to flourish unchecked.

Most people are seeing very little – or so it seems

Paradoxically, our data shows the majority of participants are seeing very few political ads. Of the total ads seen, less than 2% pertained to political topics or the election specifically.

This is partly a result of how the advertising products offered by platforms like Meta and TikTok allow ads to be targeted to specific demographics, locations or interests. This means even two people in the same household may have entirely different ad experiences.

But it’s also a reminder social media ads are just the tip of the iceberg. Much political persuasion online happens outside paid ad campaigns – via influencer content, YouTube recommendations, algorithmic amplification, mainstream media coverage and more.

Because platforms and publishers aren’t required to share this broader content with researchers or the public, we can’t easily track it – although we are trying.

We need meaningful observability

If democracy is to thrive in a digital age, we need to be able to independently observe online political communication, including advertising.

Existing measures like campaign finance disclosures and transparency tools provided by platforms will never be enough. They don’t include user experiences or track patterns across populations and over time. This inevitably means some advertising activity flies under the radar.

We lack robust tools to understand and analyse our current fragmented information landscape.

Where platforms don’t provide meaningful data access to researchers and the public, tools like the Ad Observatory and PoliDashboard offer valuable glimpses into a fragmented information landscape, while remaining incomplete.

However, tools on their own are not enough. We also need to be willing to call out and act when politicians mislead the public.


Acknowlegement: The Australian Ad Observatory is a team effort. The authors wish to acknowledge the contribution of Jean Burgess, Nicholas Carah, Alfie Chadwick, Kyle Herbertson, Tina Kang, Khanh Luong, Abdul Karim Obeid, Lina Przhedetsky, and Dan Tran.The Conversation

Daniel Angus, Professor of Digital Communication, Director of QUT Digital Media Research Centre, Queensland University of TechnologyChristine Parker, Professor of Law, The University of MelbourneGiselle Newton, Research Fellow, The Centre for Digital Cultures and Societies, The University of QueenslandKate Clark, Node Administrator, ARC Centre of Excellence for Automated Decision-Making & Society, Monash University, and Mark Andrejevic, Professor of Media, School of Media, Film, and Journalism, Monash University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Sick of eating the same things? 5 ways to boost your nutrition and keep meals interesting and healthy

Loquellano/Pexels
Clare CollinsUniversity of Newcastle

Did you start 2025 with a promise to eat better but didn’t quite get there? Or maybe you want to branch out from making the same meal every week or the same lunch for work almost every day?

Small dietary changes can make a big difference to how you feel, how your body functions and health indicators such as blood pressure, blood sugar and cholesterol levels.

You can meet your nutrient needs by eating a range of foods from the key food groups:

  • vegetables and fruit
  • protein (legumes, beans, tofu, meats, poultry, fish, eggs, nuts, seeds)
  • grains (mostly wholegrain and high-fibre)
  • calcium-rich foods (milk, yoghurt, cheese, non-dairy alternatives).

But you also need a variety of foods to get enough vitamins, minerals and phytonutrients from plant foods. Phytonutrients have antioxidant, anti-inflammatory, anti-cancer and other functions that help keep you healthy.

Use these five dietary tweaks to boost your nutrient intake and add variety to what you eat.

1. Include different types of bran to boost your fibre intake

Different types of dietary fibre help improve bowel function through fermentation by gut microbes in the colon, or large bowel. This creates larger, softer bowel motions that then stimulate the colon to contract, leading to more regular bowel movements.

Add different types of dietary fibre – such as oat bran, wheat bran or psyllium husk – to breakfast cereal or add some into recipes that use white flour:

  • psyllium husk is high in soluble fibre. It dissolves in water forming viscous gel that binds to bile salts, which get excreted and your body is then not able to convert them into cholesterol. This helps lower blood cholesterol levels as well as with retaining water in your colon, making bowel motions softer. Soluble fibre also helps slow the digestive process, making you feel full and slows the normal rise in blood sugar levels after you eat

  • wheat bran is an insoluble fibre, also called roughage. It adds bulk to bowel motions, which helps keep your bowel function regular

  • oat bran contains beta-glucan, a soluble fibre, as well as some insoluble fibre.

Try keeping small containers topped up with the different fibres so you don’t forget to add them regularly to your breakfast.

Heap of psyllium husk in wooden spoon
Psyllium husk is high in soluble fibre, which dissolves in water and slows digestion. Shawn Hempel/Shutterstock

2. Add a different canned bean to your shopping list

Dried beans are a type of legume. From baked beans to red kidney beans and chickpeas, the canned varieties are easy to use and inexpensive. Different colours and varieties have slightly different nutrient and phytonutrient profiles.

Canned beans are very high in total dietary fibre, including soluble fibre and resistant starch, a complex carbohydrate that resists digestion in the small intestine and then passes into the colon where it gets fermented.

The body digests and absorbs the nutrients in legumes slowly, contributing to their low glycemic index. So eating them makes you feel full.

Regularly eating more legumes lowers blood sugar levels, and total and LDL (bad) cholesterol.

Add legumes to dishes such as bolognese, curry, soups and salads (our No Money No Time website has some great recipes).

3. Try a different wholegrain, like buckwheat or 5-grain porridge

Wholegrain products contain all three layers of the grain. Both the inner germ layer and outer bran layer are rich in fibre, vitamins and minerals, while the inner endosperm contains mostly starch (think white flour).

Wholegrains include oats, corn (yes, popcorn too), rye, barley, buckwheat, quinoa, brown rice and foods made with wholegrains, like some breads and breakfast cereals such as rolled oats, muesli and five-grain porridge.

Wholegrains aren’t just breakfast and lunch foods. Dinner recipe ideas include tuna and veggie pasta bakechicken quesadillas and buckwheat mushroom risotto.

4. Try a different vegetable or salad mix every week

review of the relationship between plant-based diets and dying of any cause followed more than half a million people across 12 long-term studies.

It found people who ate the most plants had a lower risk of dying during the study and follow-up period than those who ate hardly any.

Rainbow slaw chicken
Add a rainbow coleslaw to your meal. Kiian Oksana/Shutterstock

Try adding a new or different vegetable or salad item to your weekly meals, such as rainbow coleslaw, canned beetroot, raw carrot, red onion, avocado or tomatoes.

Or try a stir-fry with bok choy, celery, capsicum, carrot, zucchini and herbs.

The more variety, the more colour, flavour and textures – not to mention phytonutrients.

5. Go nuts

Cashews, walnuts, almonds, macadamias, pecans and mixed nuts make a great snack.

(Peanuts are technically a legume because they grow in the ground but we count them as nuts because their nutrient profile is very similar to the tree nuts.)

You have to chew nuts well, which means your brain receives messages that you are eating and should expect to soon feel full.

Nuts are energy-dense, due to their high fat content. A matchbox portion size (30 grams) contains about 15 grams of fat, 5 grams of protein and 740 kilojoules.

While some people think you need to avoid nuts to lose weight, a review of energy restricted diets found people who ate nuts lost as much weight as those who didn’t.

My colleagues and I at the University of Newcastle have created a free Healthy Eating Quiz where you can check your diet quality score, see how healthy your usual eating patterns are and how your score compares to others. You can also get some great ideas to make your meals more interesting .The Conversation

Clare Collins, Laureate Professor in Nutrition and Dietetics, University of Newcastle

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

What are ‘penjamins’? Disguised cannabis vapes are gaining popularity among young people

Stenko Vlad/Shutterstock
Jack ChungThe University of QueenslandCarmen LimThe University of Queensland, and Wayne HallThe University of Queensland

E-cigarettes or vapes were originally designed to deliver nicotine in a smokeless form. But in recent years, vapes have been used to deliver other psychoactive substances, including cannabis concentrates and oils.

Cannabis vapes, also sometimes known as THC vape pens, appear to have increased in popularity in Australia over the past few years. Among those Australians who had recently used cannabis, the proportion who reported ever vaping cannabis increased from 7% in 2019 to at least 25% in 2022–23.

The practice appears to be gaining popularity among young people, who are reportedly using devices called “penjamins” to vape cannabis oil. These are sleek, concealable vapes disguised as everyday objects such as lip balms, earphone cases or car keys.

On social media platforms such as TikTok, users are sharing tips and tricks for how to carry and use penjamins undetected.

So what’s in cannabis vapes, and should we be worried about young people using them?

Are cannabis vapes legal in Australia?

While medicinal cannabis is legal for some users with a prescription, recreational cannabis use remains illegal under federal law.

In Australia, recent vaping reforms have made it illegal to sell disposable vapes such as penjamins.

But there appears to be a robust illicit market for vaping products, including cannabis vapes.

Are cannabis vapes safe?

Cannabis vaping is often perceived to be less harmful than smoking cannabis as it does not involve combustion of the cannabis, which may reduce some respiratory symptoms. But that doesn’t mean it’s without risk.

Most forms of cannabis can be vaped, including cannabis flower and cannabis oil. The difference is, cannabis oil typically contains much higher concentrations of delta-9-tetrahydrocannabinol (THC) compared to cannabis flower.

THC is the ingredient responsible for the “high” people feel when they use cannabis. THC works by interacting with brain receptors that influence our mood, memory, coordination and perception.

The strength of these effects depends on how much THC is consumed. Vaping can produce a more intense high and greater cognitive impairment compared to smoking cannabis, as less THC is lost through combustion.

Our research in the United States and Canada found many people who vape cannabis are moving away from traditional cannabis flowers and increasingly preferring highly potent products, such as oils and concentrates.

A woman holding a small bottle of oil with a dropper.
Cannabis oil typically contains much higher concentrations of THC compared to cannabis flower. Nuva Frames/Shutterstock

Prolonged consumption of products with high THC levels can increase the risk of cannabis use disorder and psychosis.

Young people are particularly vulnerable to the risks of high THC exposure, as their brains are still developing well into their mid-20s. Those without previous experience using cannabis may even be more susceptible to the adverse effects of vaping cannabis.

Our study found those who vape and smoke cannabis reported more severe mental health symptoms, compared to those who only smoke cannabis.

Cannabis vaping can also affect the lungs. Findings from large population-based surveys suggest respiratory symptoms such as bronchitis and wheezing are common among those who vape cannabis.

Cannabis vapes don’t just contain cannabis

The risks associated with cannabis vapes do not just come from THC, but also from the types of solvents and additives used. Solvents are the chemicals used to extract THC from the cannabis plant and produce a concentrated oil for vaping.

While some can be safe when properly processed, others, such as vitamin E acetate, have been linked to serious lung injuries, including E-cigarette or Vaping Use-Associated Lung Injury (EVALI).

This condition hospitalised more than 2,500 people and caused nearly 70 deaths in the US between late 2019 and early 2020. Common symptoms of EVALI include chest pain, cough, abdominal pain, vomiting and fever.

This raises concerns about product safety, particularly when it comes to unregulated cannabis oils that are not subjected to any quality control. This may be the case with penjamins.

A collection of vapes on the floor.
Vapes don’t always contain only the ingredients you think. B..Robinson/Shutterstock

Which is worse: cannabis or nicotine vapes?

There’s no simple answer to this question. Both nicotine and cannabis vapes come with different health risks, and comparing them depends on what you are measuring – addiction, short-term harms or long-term health effects.

Nicotine vapes can be an effective way of helping people quit smoking. However, these vapes still contain addictive nicotine and other chemicals that may lead to lung injuries. The long-term health effects of inhaling these substances are still being studied.

Cannabis vapes can be used to deliver highly potent doses of THC, and pose particular risk to brain development and mental health in young people. Regular cannabis use is also linked to lower IQ and poorer educational outcomes in young people.

In unregulated markets, both these products may contain undisclosed chemicals, contaminants, or even substances not related to nicotine or cannabis at all.

The “worse” option depends on the context, but for non-smokers and young people without any medical conditions, the safest choice is to avoid both.

If you or anyone you know needs help to quit vaping, you can contact Quitline on 13 78 48, Healthdirect on 1800 022 222, or the Alcohol and Drug Foundation on 1800 250 015.The Conversation

Jack Chung, PhD Candidate, National Centre for Youth Substance Use Research, The University of QueenslandCarmen Lim, NHMRC Emerging Leadership Fellow, National Centre for Youth Substance Use Research, The University of Queensland, and Wayne Hall, Emeritus Professor, National Centre for Youth Substance Use Research, The University of Queensland

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Forming new habits can take longer than you think. Here are 8 tips to help you stick with them

SarahMcEwan/Shutterstock
Ben SinghUniversity of South Australia and Ashleigh E. SmithUniversity of South Australia

If you’ve ever tried to build a new habit – whether that’s exercising more, eating healthier, or going to bed earlier – you may have heard the popular claim that it only takes 21 days to form a habit.

It’s a neat idea. Short, encouraging and full of promise. But there’s just one problem: it’s not true.

The 21-day myth can be traced back to Maxwell Maltz, a plastic surgeon in the 1960s, who observed it took about three weeks for his patients to adjust to physical changes. This idea was later picked up and repeated in self-help books, eventually becoming accepted wisdom.

But as psychologists and behavioural scientists have since discovered, habit formation is much more complex.

How long does it really take?

2010 study followed volunteers trying to build simple routines – such as drinking water after breakfast or eating a daily piece of fruit – and found it took a median of 66 days for the behaviour to become automatic.

We recently reviewed several studies looking at how long it took people to form health-related habits. We found, on average, it took around two to five months.

Specifically, the studies that measured time to reach automaticity (when a behaviour becomes second nature) found that habit formation took between 59 and 154 days. Some people developed a habit in as few as four days. Others took nearly a year.

This wide range highlights that habit formation isn’t one-size-fits-all. It depends on what the behaviour is, how often it’s repeated, how complex it is, and who’s doing it.

What determines whether a habit will stick?

Habit strength plays a key role in consistency. A 2021 systematic review focused on physical activity and found the stronger the habit (meaning the more automatic and less effortful the behaviour felt) the more likely people were to exercise regularly.

It’s not entirely surprising that easy, low-effort behaviours such as drinking water or taking a daily vitamin tend to form faster than complex ones like training for a marathon.

But whatever the habit, research shows sticking to it is not just about boosting motivation or willpower. Interventions that actively support habit formation – through repetition, cues and structure – are much more effective for creating lasting change.

For example, programs that encourage people to schedule regular exercise at the same time each day, or apps that send reminders to drink water after every meal, help build habits by making the behaviour easier to repeat and harder to forget.

A man walking on a path outside on a sunny day.
Small, everyday actions can grow into powerful routines. areporter/Shutterstock

Our research, which drew on data from more than 2,600 people, showed habit-building interventions can make a real difference across a range of behaviours – from flossing and healthy eating to regular exercise.

But what stood out most was that even small, everyday actions can grow into powerful routines, when repeated consistently. It’s not about overhauling your life overnight, but about steadily reinforcing behaviours until they become second nature.

8 tips for building lasting habits

If you’re looking to build a new habit, here are some science-backed tips to help them stick:

  1. Give it time. Aim for consistency over 60 days. It’s not about perfection – missing a day won’t reset the clock.

  2. Make it easy. Start small. Choose a behaviour you can realistically repeat daily.

  3. Attach your new habit to an existing routine. That is, make the new habit easier to remember by linking it to something you already do – such as flossing right before you brush your teeth.

  4. Track your progress. Use a calendar or app to tick off each successful day.

  5. Build in rewards, for example making a special coffee after a morning walk or watching an episode of your favourite show after a week of consistent workouts. Positive emotions help habits stick, so celebrate small wins.

  6. Morning is best. Habits practised in the morning tend to form more reliably than those attempted at night. This may be because people typically have more motivation and fewer distractions earlier in the day, making it easier to stick to new routines before daily demands build up.

  7. Personal choice boosts success. People are more likely to stick with habits they choose themselves.

  8. Repetition in a stable context is key. Performing the same behaviour in the same situation (such as walking right after lunch each day) increases the chances it will become automatic.

An older man drinking a glass of water at home.
Habits practised in the morning tend to form more reliably than those attempted at night. Ground Picture/Shutterstock

Why the 21-day myth matters

Believing habits form in 21 days sets many people up to fail. When change doesn’t “click” within three weeks, it’s easy to feel like you’re doing something wrong. This can lead to frustration, guilt and giving up entirely.

By contrast, understanding the real timeline can help you stay motivated when things feel slow.

Evidence shows habit formation usually takes at least two months, and sometimes longer. But it also shows change is possible.

Our research and other evidence confirm that repeated, intentional actions in stable contexts really do become automatic. Over time, new behaviours can feel effortless and deeply ingrained.

So whether you’re trying to move more, eat better, or improve your sleep, the key isn’t speed – it’s consistency. Stick with it. With time, the habit will stick with you.The Conversation

Ben Singh, Research Fellow, Allied Health & Human Performance, University of South Australia and Ashleigh E. Smith, Associate Professor, Healthy Ageing, University of South Australia

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Disclaimer: These articles are not intended to provide medical advice, diagnosis or treatment.  Views expressed here do not necessarily reflect those of Pittwater Online News or its staff.